GIFT OF
THIRTY-SIXTH
ANNUAL REPORT OF THE
BUREAU OF
AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY
TO THE SECRETARY OF THE
SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION
1914-1915
WASHINGTON
GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE
1921
TT Q I /
LETTER OF TRANSMITTAL
SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION,
BUREAU OF AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY,
Washington, D. C., August 4, 1915.
SIR: I have the honor to submit herewith the 'Thirty-
sixth Annual Report of the Bureau of American Ethnology,
for the fiscal year ended June 30, 1915.
With appreciation of your aid in the work under my
charge, I am
Very respectfully, yours,
F. W. HODGE,
Ethnologist-in-charge.
DH. CHARLES D. WALCOTT,
Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution.
4C3385
CONTENTS
REPORT OF THE ETIINOLOGIST-IN-CHARGE
Page.
Systematic researches 9
Special researches 19
Manuscripts
Publications 29
Illustrations 32
Library 32
Collections 33
Property
Miscellaneous 34
ACCOMPANYING PAPER
The Osage Tribe: Rite of the Chiefs; Sayings of the Ancient Men, by Francis
La Flesche (pis. 1-23; figs. 1-15) 35
Index.. 599
REPORT OF THE
ETHNOLOGIST-IN-GHARGE
THIRTY-SIXTH ANNUAL REPORT
OP THE
BUREAU OF AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY
F. W. HODGE, Ethnologist-in-Charge
The operations of the Bureau of American Ethnology
during the fiscal year ended June 30, 1915, were conducted
in accordance with the act of Congress approved August
1, 1914, making appropriations for sundry civil expenses
of the Government, which act contains the following item:
American ethnology: For continuing ethnological researches among
the American Indians and the natives of Hawaii, including the
excavation and preservation of archeologic remains, under the
direction of the Smithsonian Institution, including salaries or com
pensation of all necessary employees and the purchase of necessary
books and periodicals, including payment in advance for subscriptions,
forty-two thousand dollars.
SYSTEMATIC RESEARCHES
As in the past, the systematic researches of the bureau
were conducted by its regular staff, consisting of 9 eth
nologists, including the ethnologist-in-charge, and of 10
ethnologists during part of the year. These operations may
be summarized as follows:
Mr. F. W. Hodge, ethnologist-in-charge, devoted most of
his attention during the year to the administration of the
affairs of the bureau, but opportunity was found, with the
assistance of Miss Florence M. Poast, to add materially to
the compilation of the bibliography of the Pueblo Indians,
which now comprises about 2,400 titles. Mr. Hodge also
read several extended manuscripts submitted for publica
tion by the bureau; he likewise continued to represent the
9
10 BUREAU OF AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY
bureau on the Smithsonian advisory committee on printing
and publication and the Smithsonian Institution on the
United States Geographic Board.
Dr. J. Walter Fewkes, ethnologist, at the beginning of the
fiscal year brought to a close his archeological researches in
the valley of the lower Rio Mimbres, N. Mex., reference to
which was made in the last annual report. These studies of
the many village sites of the prehistoric people of the section
named lead to the belief that the ancient habitations were
not terraced community houses, such as characterize typical
pueblos, but were of an older form, hence Dr. Fewkes
assigns them to a period and a people which he designates
pre-Puebloan. This conclusion is based not only on the
character of the house structures as indicated by their
ground plans, but also on the character and decoration of
the pottery vessels found under the floors. The most note
worthy feature of this earthenware is the remarkable painted
decoration on the inside of the bowls, consisting of repre
sentations of men engaged in various pursuits, animals, and
geometric designs of exceptional forms, suggesting the cul
ture of the Keres Indians of New Mexico rather than that
of other Pueblos. A distinctive feature of some of the
animal pictures on the Mimbres pottery is the fusion of
two different animal forms, as the antelope and a fish, in a
single representation. Dr. Fewkes suggests that the almost
constant presence of rectangular and other geometric designs
on the bodies of the animals depicted on the pottery may be
considered in a sense parallel with certain very ancient
paintings on the walls of caves in France, as described by
Dr. Capitan and others. The special value of the study of
the painted designs on the Mimbres pottery lies in the light
which they cast on general problems connected with the
culture-genesis and clan migrations of the sedentary Indians
of the Southwest. These designs are related, on the one
hand, to those on Pueblo painted pottery of northern New
Mexico and Arizona and, on the other, to the decorations
on the earthenware of the prehistoric inhabitants of the
valleys of the southern part of the Sierra Madre Plateau,
notably those of the celebrated Casas Grandes in Chihuahua.
ADMINISTRATIVE REPORT 11
An illustrated preliminary report, under the title "Arche
ology of the Lower Mimbres Valley, New Mexico," was pre
pared by Dr. Fewkes and published in Smithsonian Miscel
laneous Collections (Vol. 63, No. 10, pp. 1-53, pis. 1-8.
figs. 1-32).
In January Dr. Fewkes visited southern Arizona, where he
made several archeological reconnoissances, following the
Rio Santa Cruz almost to the Mexican boundary. He visited
the old Indian missions of San Xavier del Bac and Tumaca-
cori, and in their vicinity examined extensive aboriginal
ruins, which were found to belong to the same type as Casa
Grande, Ariz. The group of prehistoric ruins near the di
lapidated mission of Tumacacori (which imposing structure,
now preserved as a national monument, is greatly in need
of repair) presents unusual advantages for thorough archeo
logical investigations, with promise of important collections.
The walls of the compound can be traced readily, and if
uncovered by excavation would reveal important informa
tion on the ancient culture of the Santa Cruz Valley. Sim
ilar remains were noted in other parts of this valley and
elsewhere in southern Arizona. While in this general area
Dr. Fewkes observed that the Papago Indians of the desert
have been little affected by civilization, retaining many of
their original customs, beliefs, and ceremonies, and a wealth
of folklore.
Dr. Fewkes visited also the ruins of a large pueblo com
pound on the road between Phoenix and Tempe, chiefly for
the purpose of determining the advisability of its excavation
and repair, as an effort is being made by citizens of Phoenix
to preserve the ruins with a view of having the compound
created a national monument and receiving adequate scien
tific treatment.
Leaving Arizona in February, Dr. Fewkes proceeded again
to the Mimbres Valley, but found the weather unpropitious
for field work except for excursions with the view of locating
sites for possible future excavation. He returned to Wash
ington about the middle of the month and continued the
preparation of his memoir on "Antiquities of the West
Indies," which is to include the results of archeological
12 BUREAU OF AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY
research conducted in the Greater and the Lesser Antilles
under the joint auspices of the bureau and the Heye Museum
of New York, as referred to in a previous report. In con
nection with this work Dr. Fewkes visited New York for
the purpose of studying recently acquired collections, in the
Heye Museum, illustrating the culture of the ancient inhabit
ants of the West Indies.
The greater part of May was devoted by Dr. Fewkes to
the completion of a paper on " Prehistoric Hopi Pottery De
signs," which comprises 138 manuscript pages, 12 plates, and
105 figures. In this article the author treats of the pictog
raphy on the ceramics of the ancient village dwellers of the
East Mesa of the Hopi of northwestern Arizona, including
the Keres and Tewa colonists of early times, as well as the
designs of the more modern period. The memoir considers
in detail the probable genesis of modern Hopi symbolic fig
ures, and devotes attention also to their connection with clan
and other sociologic groups.
The opening of the fiscal year found Mr. James Mooney,
ethnologist, engaged in field studies among the Cherokee
Indians of North Carolina, which were continued until the
middle of September. Mr. Mooney devoted his efforts es
pecially to the further collection and translation of the
sacred formulas of the Indians named, together with the col
lection, for botanical identification, of the plants mentioned
in the formulas, with others of Indian economic importance.
The remainder of the fiscal year was spent by Mr. Mooney in
the office, most of the time being devoted to the final elabo
ration of the Cherokee formulas, of varying length, originally
written down by the priests of the tribe in the native Cherokee
alphabet and used by them for purposes of medicine, love,
hunting, fishing, agriculture, protection, etc. Each formula
consists usually of a prayer or a song, or both, in an archaic
and highly figurative form of the language, followed by brief
directions couched in the everyday language, and relating to
the manner of the ceremony or the plants to be used in the
prescription. The printed formula will consist of three parts,
namely, transliteration, translation, and explanation. The
glossary will comprise perhaps 4,000 words, largely archaic
ADMINISTRATIVE REPORT 13
and otherwise unusual in form. The botanical appendix
will deal with the names and uses of from 500 to 700 plants
mentioned in the formulas, nearly all of which have already
been collected and botanically identified. There will also
be an extended chapter on Cherokee religion and mythology.
Approximately a third of the transliterations and trans
lations have been written in final form from the interlinear
notebooks, and half of the work has been glossarized on cards.
Considerable time was spent by Mr. Mooney in furnishing
special information for use in answering inquiries of corre
spondents.
Dr. John R. Swanton, ethnologist, in addition to super
vising the final work incident to the publication, as Bulletin
45, of "Byington's Choctaw Dictionary," edited by himself
in conjunction with Mr. H. S. Halbert, devoted attention to
the study of the Creek Indians, to which reference is made
in former reports. The first draft of his memoir on the
Creeks is practically completed, but the amount of material
was found to be so great that it has seemed best to separate
it into two, if not three, sections. The first of these, em
bracing a discussion of the location and classification of the
southern tribes, their early history, and their population, Dr.
Swanton is now revising, incorporating new material and
making such changes as fuller information has shown to be
necessary. It is hoped that this section may be ready for
publication at a comparatively early date.
Through an Alibamu Indian living in Texas the bureau
has been able to add several hundred words and a few pages
of text to the Alibamu material gathered by Dr. Swanton.
During the first three months of the year Mr. J. N. B.
Hewitt, ethnologist, completed the translating and editing
of a collection of texts and legends for the memoir on " Sen
eca Myths and Fiction" to be published in the Thirty-
second Annual Report, consisting of material originally col
lected in native texts and in English by the late Jeremiah
Curtin and Mr. Hewitt. This material, aggregating 2,300
pages, besides 350 notes and additions by Mr. Hewitt, was
submitted early in October for publication. Subsequently,
and as opportunity was afforded throughout the year, Mr.
14 BUREAU OF AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY
Hewitt devoted special attention to the preparation of ma
terial for a grammatical sketch of the Iroquois languages,
especially as spoken by the Mohawk, Onondaga, and Cayuga,
for incorporation in the "Handbook of American Indian
languages."
In December Mr. Hewitt visited the Grand River Reser
vation in Canada for the purpose of prosecuting his studies
among the Indians dwelling thereon. A serious epidemic
of smallpox interfered somewhat with his work, but with
the efficient assistance of Mr. William K. Loft, a Mohawk
speaker, Mr. Hewitt was able to make a critical phonetic and
grammatic study of portions of the Mohawk texts relating
to the league of the Iroquois, recorded by him in former
years. Work was also done in recording a selected list of
Mohawk verbs for comparative use, and with the painstaking
aid of Mrs. Mary Gibson, widow of the late noted chief John
Arthur Gibson, Mr. Hewitt was able to supply the Cayuga
equivalents to this list, as well as to record other vocabulary
terms of the Cayuga. From Mrs. Gibson also was obtained
an extended text in Cayuga relating to the origin and the
ritual of the death feast of the women. On the same reserva
tion Mr. Hewitt, with the aid of Mr. Hardy Gibson, a Cayuga
chief, elucidated certain mooted points in regard to the
ritual significance of a number of words and phrases em
ployed in the chants of the condoling and installation council
of the Iroquois league. From Miss Emily Carrier, a mixed-
blood Nanticoke, he obtained a list of 50 Nanticoke words.
This short list is of singular interest, as the Nanticoke dialect
of the Algonquian stock has become practically extinct
through absorption of its speakers by the Iroquois-speaking
peoples. Mr. Hewitt also made about 70 photographs,
principally of persons.
On his return to Washington on January 15 Mr. Hewitt at
once resumed his analytic study of the Mohawk, Onondaga,
and Cayuga dialects for the purpose of obtaining proper
material for the preparation of the grammatic sketch above
referred to.
In addition to these investigations, Mr. Hewitt furnished
much information for use in preparing replies to inquiries
ADMINISTRATIVE REPORT 15
from correspondents, some of them requiring considerable
research. No fewer than 130 such letters were answered by
means of data supplied by Mr. Hewitt. As in the past, he
performed the duties connected with the custodianship of
manuscripts, which required more than the usual time and
effort owing to the preparation of more thoroughly fireproof
quarters and transfer of the manuscripts thereto, as will
later be mentioned. During June Mr. Hewitt was engaged
in reading the first proofs of "Seneca Myths and Fiction."
Mr. Francis La Flesche, ethnologist, was engaged during
the year chiefly in assembling his notes on the Non'zhizhon,
or fasting degree, of the tribal rites of the Osage called Non/
honzhinga le Ita, or Sayings of the Non'honzhinga. Of the
seven degrees, the Non/zhizhon is said to be the longest and
the next in importance to the Ni'kie degree; it is also said
that this degree contains nearly all the symbols and cere
monial forms (we'gaxe), for which reason it is regarded as
higher in rank than the other degrees, excepting the Ni'kie.
From information given by Watse'monin of the Black Bear
gens and by Waxthi'zhi of the Puma gens, both of the Hon/-
ga dual division, their version of the ritual of the Non'zhizhon
degree is composed of 116 songs, 14 wi'gie (parts of the ritual
that is spoken), and a number of ceremonial acts and forms.
Waxthi'zhi, from whom the songs and wi'gie were obtained,
gave 14 wi'gie and 74 songs ; he was unable to give the entire
116 songs, having lost some of them by reason of long disuse
of the ritual. To the close of the year 206 pages of this
ritual have been completed by Mr. La Flesche ; these comprise
9 wi'gie with literal and free translations, 25 songs with trans
lations, and explanations of the songs, ceremonial acts, and
movements, as well as of the various symbols and parapher
nalia used in the ceremonies.
Mr. La Flesche' s work on the Non'zhizhon ritual has twice
be-on interrupted by visiting Osage, from whom, however,
furti •'!• information has been obtained concerning the great
war nil's of the Osage people. First, Wa'thuxage, who
visited Washington in the autumn of 1914, gave the ritual of
the Wax'obt degree of the Tsi'zhu Wash tage gens, of which he
was ;i member. The wi'gie and songs of this ritual cover 76
16 BUREAU OF AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY
typewritten pages, including the music, which has been
transcribed from the dictaphone. Besides the Wax'obe
ritual, Wa'thuxage gave, in fragmentary form, the Ni'kie
ritual of his gens; this covers 20 typewritten pages, includ
ing the music of the songs, which also have been transcribed
from the dictaphone. The translations of the songs and
wi'gie of these rituals have yet to be made and the explana
tory texts written. Wa'thuxage died in May, 1915.
. The second interruption was by Xutha Watonin and
Watse/monin,from whom additional information was obtained.
The former gave three of the wi'gie : Wi'gie Tonga or Great
Wi'gie, Ki'non Wi'gie or Symbolic Painting Wi'gie, and Waz-
ho'igathe Wi'gie or Gentile Symbol Wi'gie, which it was his
part to recite at the tribal ceremonies. These cover 37
typewritten pages. Besides the three wi'gie, Xutha' Watonin
gave the ritual of the Ni'kie degree of his gens. The wi'gie
and songs of the ritual, including the music, comprise 15
pages. The translations of the three wi'gie, and the wi'gie
and songs of the Ni'kie ritual, have yet to be made and the ex
planatory notes assembled. Watse'monin gave another ver
sion of the Ni'dse Wacpe Wi'gie, or Black Bear Wi'gie, which
he had already given some time ago. This new version is
the one recited when the widow of a deceased member of
the Non/honzhinga is admitted to take his place in the order;
it comprises 6 typewritten pages and will form a part of the
Non'zhizhon ritual. This informant also gave some informa
tion concerning his great grandfather, who was a prominent
"medicine-man." The notes recorded from the dictation of
Watse'monin have yet to be transcribed. The story will form
a part of the chapter on the WakoMagi, or " medicine-men."
Mrs. M. C. Stevenson, ethnologist, continued her researches
among the Tewa Indians of New Mexico, but failing health
prevented her from completing the final revision of the n i.anu-
script of her memoir as she had hoped, and it remained un
finished at the time of her unfortunate death, on June 24,
in the suburbs of Washington. It is believed, however, that
when an opportunity of fully examining Mrs. Stevenson's
"completed manuscript and notes is afforded it will be found
in condition for publication after the customary editorial
ADMINISTRATIVE REPORT 17
treatment. Mrs. Stevenson was an efficient and industrious
investigator of the ethnology of the Pueblo Indians, to which
subject she had devoted many years of her life, giving special
attention to the Sia, the Zuni, and the Tewa tribes. Three
memoirs on these Indians, published in the annual reports,
are replete with information on the subjects of which they
treat, and there is no doubt that when Mrs. Stevenson's
memoir on the Tewa Indians finally appears much valuable
knowledge will be added to that which she has already given
on the sedentary Indians of the extreme Southwest.
With the opening of the fiscal year Dr. Truman Michelson
proceeded to Wisconsin in the hope of obtaining ethnologic
and linguistic information regarding the Stockbridge Indians
residing in that State. It was found that, with respect to
the language of this remnant tribe, about a dozen members
remembered isolated words, but only one could dictate
connected texts, half a dozen of which were recorded.
Although knowledge of the language is now too limited to
enable restoration of the grammar, enough material was
obtained to show that Stockbridge was intimately related
to Pequot and Natick, as well as to Delaware-Munsee.
The Stockbridges have long since abandoned all their native
customs and beliefs, consequently their ethnology may be
regarded as beyond recovery.
While in Wisconsin Dr. Michelson procured also ethnologic
and linguistic notes on the Menominee. A visit to the
Brotherton Indians resulted in the acquirement of little
information excepting historical data, as these people have
become greatly modified.
Dr. Michelson next visited Tama, Iowa, for the purpose
of renewing his researches among the Fox Indians, to which
he has been devoting his energies for some time. He was
especially successful in obtaining accounts of the mythical
origin ascribed to the Fox people, given in the form of
rituals, and he gave attention also to the phonetics of the
Fox language. A noteworthy result of Dr. Michelson's Fox
investigations was the acquirement, through Horace Powa-
2786—21 2
18 BUKEAU OF AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY
shiek, of a complete translation of the two most important
Fox myths— the Culture Hero and Mother of All the Earth.
At the request of the Davenport Academy of Sciences,
Dr. Michelson conducted some archeological excavations for
that institution at its own expense, leave of absence having
been granted him for that purpose. En route to Washington,
he examined the Sauk and Fox collections in the Field
Museum of Natural History at Chicago.
In the office Dr. Michelson paid special attention to the
observations on the Sauk and Fox by early writers, especially
by the authors in the Annals of the Propaganda Fide, and by
Marston, Long, Carver, Beltrami, and others. With the
view of definitely settling the question of the relationship of
the Yurok and Wiyot languages of California to the Algon-
quian linguistic stock, Dr. Michelson devoted further study
to the subject, reaching the conclusion that whether or not
further material would prove these languages to be divergent
members of Algonquian, the existing data do not warrant
such a classification. Dr. Michelson also devoted attention
to the linguistic classification of Potawatomi, based on cer
tain grammatical treatises by the late Father Gailland in
possession of St. Mary's College at St. Marys, Kans., which
the bureau was permitted to copy through the courtesy of
Rev. George Worpenberg, S. J., librarian of the college. By
these studies Dr. Michelson concludes from the verbal pro
nouns of Potawatomi that it belongs to the Ojibwa division
of the central Algonquian languages, but that the language
is further removed from Ojibwa, Ottawa, and Algonkin than
any of these is from the others.
Mr. John P. Harrington, ethnologist, became a member of
the staff of the bureau, with the approval of the Civil Service
Commission, on February 20, from which time until the close
of May he finished 600 pages of manuscript and more than
3,000 slips of linguistic information regarding the Chumash
Indians of California, the result of researches conducted by
him before entering the service of the bureau. He also has,
in various stages of elaboration, a quantity of other Chumash
ethnologic and linguistic material in the preparation of
which for publication satisfactory progress is being made.
ADMINISTRATIVE REPORT 19
At the end of May Mr. Harrington proceeded to Santa Ines
Mission, where, among its documents, he found an old man
uscript bearing the title "Padron que contiene todos las
Neofitas de esta Mision de la Purisima Concepcion con ex-
presion de su edad, y partida de Bautismo segun se halla hoy
dia 1° de Enero de 1814," by Father Mariano Payeras, of the
greatest importance to the study of the former Chumash
Indians of La Purisima and Santa Ines. A complete copy
of this splendid manuscript) which does not seem to have
been known to historians, was made by Mr. Harrington, who
also extracted a considerable amount of other material from
the mission records. While at Santa Ines Mr. Harrington
located the site of the former large rancheria of Nojogui
(which had not before been known), and also the site of the
rancheria of Itias, mentioned in the records. On June 19
Mr. Harrington visited Arroyo Grande, where he worked for
a week with a poor, sick old woman, the sole survivor of the
San Luis Obispo Indians, for which reason, to use Mr. Har
rington's own expression, "the words of her language are
precious beyond the power of money to buy," especially as
her speech is the most archaic of all the Chumashan dialects.
For the convenience of his field studies Mr. Harrington has
established headquarters at Los Angeles, where he has been
granted the facilities of the Southwest Museum by the cour
tesy of its officials.
SPECIAL RESEARCHES
The preparation of the second volume of the " Handbook
of American Indian Languages," under the editorship of Dr.
Franz Boas, honorary philologist, has progressed slowly, on
account of the impossibility of sending proofs to Russia,
where the author of the section on the Chukchee and Eskimo
resides. The chapter on Siuslaw, by Dr. Frachtenberg, has
been corrected and made up in pages, forming pages 431 to
605 of the second volume. At the beginning of the year Dr.
Boas concluded his collection of Kutenai material, which was
studied preliminary to the writing of the grammar of this
language. The texts collected by him were written out, and
the completed manuscript, consisting of 263 pages of Indian
20 BUREAU OF AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY
texts and 269 pages of translation, has been submitted and set
in type, forming 125 galleys. The texts include some mate
rial collected by the late Dr. A. F. Chamberlain, which was
acquired by the bureau and was revised by Dr. Boas.
Much time has been spent by Dr. Boas in work on his me
moir, "Tsimshian Mythology," to accompany the thirty-first
annual report. During the fiscal year 1913-14 the tales them
selves had been set up. During the year now under considera
tion the manuscript of the discussion of this material was
completed and put in type; it forms pages 394 to 867 of the
annual report. In the mechanical work of preparing the
manuscript Dr. Boas was assisted by Miss H. A. Andrews,
who, besides the preparation of manuscript and proof reading,
did much of the laborious work of extracting and collating
material needed for the investigation.
The manuscript on Eskimo mythology, intrusted to Walde-
mar Bogoras and accepted for publication, together with an
introduction by Mr. Ernest Hawkes, is held in abeyance,
owing to the impossibility at the present time of communicat
ing with the author in Russia.
Dr. L. J. Frachtenberg, special ethnologist, left Washington
on July 6, 1914, going directly to Oregon for the purpose of
concluding his investigations of the language, mythology,
and culture of the Kalapuya Indians, commenced during
the previous fiscal year. After a short trip to the Siletz
and Grande Ronde Agencies in northwestern Oregon for the
purpose of interviewing all available informants, he pro
ceeded to Chemawa, Oreg., where he conducted his Kalapuya
investigations until December, and completed them at the
Grande Ronde Agency between December 13 and 20, which
time was spent chiefly in the collection of linguistic material
for a comparative study of the Kalapuya dialects. Special
attention was given to the Yamhill and Yonkalla variations.
Dr. Frachtenberg's field work proved highly successful. He
obtained 30 myths, tales, historical narratives, and ethno
graphic descriptions, told in the various Kalapuya dialects,
an unusually large amount of grammatical notes, sufficient
material for a linguistic map showing the original distribu
tion of the several Kalapuya dialects, and some data on
ADMINISTRATIVE REPORT 21
Kalapuya ethnology. A glance at this material reveals
some interesting facts: The Kalapuya Indians in former
times were the most powerful and numerous family of
Oregon. They claimed the whole of the fertile valley of the
Willamette, extending from the Coast Range to the Cascade
Mountains, their settlements reaching as far north as the
present Portland and as far south as the middle course of
Umpqua River, an area of approximately 12,000 square
miles. These Indians were placed on the Grande Ronde
Reservation in 1857, at the close of the Rogue River war.
Previous tribal wars and frequent epidemics of smallpox
and other infectious diseases have reduced the Kalapuya
tribes to such an extent that Dr. Frachtenberg has found
but a mere handful of survivors; hence the time is not far
off when the stock will become extinct.
The Kalapuya family embraces a large number of tribes,
the most important of which are: (1) Atfalati (or Wapato
Lake), living formerly on the banks of the Tualatin River;
(2) Yamhill, claiming the banks of the river of the same
name; (3) Lakmayuk, who obtained their name from the
river Luckiamute; (4) Marys River (Calapooia proper),
whose settlements were situated along the banks of the
Calapooia and Marys Rivers ; (5) Yonkalla, the most south
erly Kalapuya tribe; (6) Ahantsayuk, also called Pudding
River Indians; and (7) Santiam, who formerly lived on
the banks of Santiam River. These tribes speak varieties
of the Kalapuya language, which show remarkable lexi
cographic diversities. Morphological differentiations exist
also, but are chiefly of a phonetic nature. All differences
between the dialects seem to have been caused by a geo
graphic distribution, resulting in the three subdivisions men
tioned in the last annual report. Long and continued con
tact of the Kalapuya Indians with white settlers has resulted
in a complete breaking down of the native culture and mode
of living; consequently the ethnologic data obtainable were
very meager and in most cases were given as information
obtained through hearsay.
In the early part of January Dr. Frachtenberg made a
short trip to the Siletz Agency for the purpose of settling a
22 BUREAU OF AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY
few questions pertaining to Alsea phonetics. In view of the
fact that the allotment made for his field researches during
the fiscal year became exhausted, Dr. Frachtenberg was
obliged to remain in the field until the close of June. On
January 15 he resumed the work of preparing a grammatical
sketch of the Alsea language, which was finished late in
May; this consists of 158 sections, approximating 600 manu
script pages. During June he was engaged in typewriting
this grammatical sketch, which will be published in part 2
of the " Handbook of American Indian Languages."
In addition to his field investigations Dr. Frachtenberg
corrected the proofs of his grammatical sketch of the Siuslaw
language, special attention being given to the insertion of
the proper references taken from his Lower Umpqua texts,
printed in the Columbia University Contributions to An
thropology.
Mr. W. H. Holmes continued the preparation of the
"Handbook of American Antiquities" whenever his exact
ing duties in behalf of the National Museum permitted.
Part 1 of this work is well advanced toward completion;
much attention has been given to part 2, and the preparation
of the numerous illustrations is well in hand.
During the month of July Mr. Gerard Fowke was engaged,
under instructions from the bureau, in making limited arche-
ological investigations in northeastern Kansas and south
eastern Nebraska, the purpose of which was to ascertain the
value of certain recent determinations regarding the age of
the prehistoric aboriginal occupancy of this region. Respect
ing the large mounds, the age of which has been under dis
cussion, Mr. Fowke reports that three points must be taken
into consideration in fixing a definite age for these remains,
as follows:
1. The relics found in and around the lodge sites, except for the
markings on some of the pottery, are in no wise different from those
found on the sites of villages which were occupied when Lewis and
Clark came through here.
2. Fairly solid bones of animals, and occasionally human bones, are
found in the bottoms of the lodge sites, even where these are damp
most of the year. In the pits, where such remains are preserved by
ashes, this would not mean much; but where they are found in clayey
ADMINISTRATIVE REPORT 23
earth it is evident that "thousands of years" is a meaningless term
to apply to them.
3. Persons who claim these "thousands of years" for pretty much
everything they find in the ground, must explain why it is that while
the bones and implements of these assumed "ancients" are found in
such quantities and in such good preservation, those of later Indians
should have entirely disappeared.
The only tenable theory of age is the amount of accumulation in
the depressions of the lodge sites. Above the clay which formed the
roof, and is next to the floor now, is a depth of material sometimes, it
is said, as much as 20 or even 22 inches of mingled silt, decayed vege
tation, and soil from the surrounding wall. It is used as an argu
ment of age; that as these sites are on hilltops where there can be no
inwash, this depth must indicate a very remote period for their con
struction. But a large amount of the earth thrown out into the sur
rounding ring or wall will find its way back into the depression. The
water will stand in them a good part of the year, and the soil remain
damp even in prolonged drought; vegetation is thus more luxuriant
than on the outside, and its decay will fill up rather rapidly. In addi
tion, much sand blows from the prairies as well as from the bottom
lands, and whatever finds its way into the pit will stay there; it will
not blow away again, as it would in open ground. Weeds also will
catch and retain much of this dust, which would pass on over a dry
surface. Consequently the allowance of an inch in a century, which
is the most that advocates of great age will allow for accumulation,
is too small.
The topography of the region was essentially the same when these
remains were constructed as it is now. The hills and valleys were as
they now exist; the erosion has been very slight as compared with
that which has taken place since the loess was brought above the
water to which it owes its origin. This statement is fully proved by
the position of the mounds and lodge sites. Any estimate of ago
must be only conjecture at best; but it is safe to say that no earth
work, mound, lodge, site, or human bones along this part of the
Missouri River has been here as long as 10 centuries.
With regard to the discoveries of human remains at ex
ceptional depths in loess formations on Longs Hill, near
Omaha, Mr. Fowke states that excavation of the site has been
so exhaustive that further investigations are out of the ques
tion, and that determinations of age, therefore, must rest,
in the main at least, with the published statements of the
original explorers.
During recent years observers have reported the existence
of mounds and other evidences of prehistoric occupancy in
24 BUREAU OF AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY
western Utah; these reports, however, contained little defi
nite information regarding the character of existing ruins
and described only briefly the artifacts associated with them.
The possible relationship of such remains with those of the
ancient pueblo dwellers of Arizona, New Mexico, and Colo
rado suggested the necessity of a preliminary examination
of the western Utah field, with the view of determining the
nature and range of former settlements, and also the de
sirability of more detailed investigations. This work of
reconnoissance was commenced by the bureau in May and
extended through the close of the fiscal year, the field obser
vations being made by Mr. Neil M. Judd, of the National
Museum. A group of small mounds near Willard, on the
northeastern shore of Great Salt Lake, were first examined.
Many other mounds in this locality have been completely de
stroyed by cultivation during recent years, and of those re
maining all show modifications resulting from recent tillage.
Four mounds were selected for special investigation, and
from these sufficient information was gathered to indicate
the chief characteristics of the primitive dwellings over which
the mounds had accumulated.
Following the work at Willard, an examination was made
of certain well-defined mounds on the outskirts of Beaver
City, in Beaver County, where three house sites of the Willard
type were found in close proximity to larger mounds con
taining groups of dwellings. Two weeks' work resulted in
the complete excavation of one house group comprising 16
rooms and the partial examination of a still larger group.
The Beaver mounds, like those at Willard, have resulted from
the gradual accumulation of drifting sand and dust over the
fallen walls of more or less permanent dwellings. Unlike
the isolated structures at Willard, however, the mounds at
Beaver City disclosed groups of associated rooms, arranged
with some degree of regularity and exhibiting a certain unity
of purpose. In each of the two groups studied, small series
of contiguous rooms were uncovered, but the majority were
single compartments separated from the other dwellings by
varying distances. The walls of these primitive dwellings
at Beaver were built of adobe, sometimes placed in wide
ADMINISTRATIVE REPORT 25
layers but more often forming a solid mass. No openings
that could be identified definitely as doors were found in any
of these walls; this fact, together with the comparative abun
dance of circular stone slabs, leads to the belief that entrance
to the dwellings was gained through roof openings which
could be closed with the stone disks. Post holes in several
floors, with charred fragments of cedar logs, and masses of
clay bearing impressions of logs, willows, and grass, give a
fairly complete indication as to the nature of the roof con
struction. Large timbers crossed in the direction of the
shorter dimensions, their ends resting upon the side walls of
the rooms; when necessary these were supported by upright
timbers. The roof beams in turn supported lesser timbers
with layers of willows and grass. Layers of clay, varying in
thickness from 1 inch to 6 inches with the unevenness of
roof materials, covered the grass, thus completing a truly
substantial shelter.
Four small mounds, similar to those at Beaver City, were
excavated at Paragonah, in Iron County. These contained
one room only, but there are larger mounds in the vicinity
whose superficial indications suggest as many if not more
rooms than the group at Beaver. Twenty years ago, it is
reported, there were about 100 mounds in this vicinity;
to-day more than half of them have disappeared through
cultivation of the soil.
A brief examination was made by Mr. Judd of several
house sites overlooking the Rio Virgen, near St. George, in
the extreme southwestern corner of the State. From this
village eastward to Kanab only a few mounds were noted,
although cowboys reported the existence of others in the
vicinity of Short Creek, on the Utah-Arizona line.
From Kanab as a base, the mounds in Johnson Canyon
and the small cliff houses in Cottonwood Canyon were visited
and partially examined. From superficial observations the
former were judged to contain the remains of house structures
similar to those at Beaver and Paragonah, although the
availability of suitable stone for building purposes has re
sulted in its partial substitution for adobe, with certain
accompanying structural modifications.
26 BUREAU OF AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY
Several caves in Cottonwood Canyon 12 miles westward
from Kanab contained evidences of human occupancy. The
walls of nearly all bear pictographs of more than ordinary
interest, and three of the caves visited sheltered the remains
of small dwellings, the most interesting of which is a group
of four detached rooms and one circular kiva. The walls
of these are of stone with a rather greater proportion of mud
plaster than is common in cliff dwellings of the Southwest.
The ceremonial room measures 14 feet in diameter, but,
except in its lack of recesses, does not differ greatly from
similar structures in ruins previously reported throughout
the San Juan drainage.
Mr. Judd's preliminary observations among a limited
number of ruins in western Utah indicate the former exist
ence of a people whose dwellings developed in natural
sequence from single earth-covered shelters, such as those
at Willard, to groups of more permanent structures like
those at Beaver, Paragonah, and elsewhere, and finally to
allied cliff houses similar to those in Cottonwood Canyon.
The construction of these several types of houses and the
character of the artifacts found in them point to close rela
tionship between their builders and the better-known pre-
Puebloan peoples of New Mexico, Arizona, and Colorado.
Whether these primitive structures in Utah actually ante
date the communal dwellings in the States named or whether
they represent an offshoot from the more highly developed
Pueblo culture is a point not yet determined. The relation
ship is certain, however, and future investigation may be
expected to determine its limits. It is hoped that the op
portunity to continue this investigation may soon be af
forded, as the progress of agriculture in most of the areas
investigated by Mr. Judd is resulting in the rapid disappear
ance of all superficial evidences of aboriginal occupancy.
En route to Washington from Utah, Mr. Judd spent a day
at the so-called "Spanish diggings," the ancient quarries in
Wyoming where generations of western Indians quarried the
flint and chert utilized in the manufacture of various
weapons and household implements.
ADMINISTRATIVE REPORT 27
Excellent progress has been made in the study and analy
sis of Indian music, to which subject Miss Frances Dens-
more has devoted special attention. The principal work
in this direction has been the completion of the manuscript
on "Teton Sioux Music," consisting of 1,067 pages, in addi
tion to transcriptions of 240 songs *and about 100 illustra
tions. This material was submitted in June for publica
tion. Miss Densmore also made considerable progress in the
preparation of a paper on the music of the Ute Indians, 92
pages of manuscript, 28 transcriptions of songs, 11 analyses
of songs, and 8 original photographic illustrations being sub
mitted. This work is not yet finished.
Mr. D. I. Bushnell, jr., ha# continued the preparation of
the " Handbook of Aboriginal Remains East of the Missis
sippi, " under a small allotment by the bureau for this pur
pose, and has made steady progress. During the year
circulars were addressed to county officials in those sec
tions from which no information had been received, and
good results were obtained. The thanks of the bureau are
due Mr. Arthur C. Parker, State archeologist of New York,
for a large body of valuable data regarding the archeological
sites in New York, and to Mr. Warren K. Moorehead, of
Phillips Academy, Andover, Mass., for similar information
respecting aboriginal remains in the State of Maine, derived
from his personal observations.
Mr. James R. Murie, as opportunity offered, continued
his studies of the ceremonies of the Pawnee Indians, under
a small allotment by the bureau. During the year Mr.
Murie submitted, as a result of these investigations, a manu
script of 266 pages on "The New Fire Ceremony" of the
Pawnee.
Dr. A. L. Kroeber, of the University of California, has
made good progress in the preparation of the "Handbook
of the Indians of California." At the inception of this
work it was believed practicable to confine the treatment
to a very limited number of pages. By reason of the great
diversity in the languages and the culture of the Indians of
California, past and present, however, it was found that no
28 BUREAU OF AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY
adequate treatment of the subject was possible within the
limits originally prescribed, consequently the handbook
when published will comprise approximately 200 pages. Dr.
Kroeber expects to submit the manuscript in readiness for
publication in the early part of 1916.
The "List of Works Relating to Hawaii" has been added
to from time to time by the surviving compiler, Prof. Howard
M. Ballou, of Honolulu. Mr. Felix Neumann has devoted
attention to its editorial revision, but it was found at the
close of the year that much work of a mechanical nature
remained to be done before plans for publication could be
completed.
MANUSCRIPTS
As in the past, the valuable collection of manuscripts of the
bureau has been in the immediate custody of Mr. J. N. B.
Hewitt, whose work in this direction was considerably in
creased by reason of the necessity of returning the manu
scripts to the newly fireproofed room in the north tower of
the Smithsonian building and reclassifying them. For the
first time the manuscripts of the bureau, which now number
about 1,700 items, many of which are of priceless value, are
believed to be safe from possible fire, being contained in
steel cases or on steel shelves, surrounded by brick, cement,
and terra-cotta walls, floor, and ceiling. In addition to
manuscripts submitted for immediate publication or else
where referred to in this report, the following accessions
were made during the year:
Laguna Indian Dictionary. Deposited by the wife and son of the
late John B. Dunbar, of Bloomfield, N. J.
Dr. A. L. Kroeber. Forty-nine Arapaho and Gros Ventre note
books, six packages of slips containing an Arapaho vocabulary, and a
carbon copy of a study of Arapaho dialects.
War record of Sitting Bull, depicted in 55 pictographs, with a
letter of authentication. Deposited by Dr. D. S. Lamb, of the Army
Medical Museum.
J. P. Dunn. The third part of the translation of the anonymous
Miami-Peoria Dictionary, the original of which is in the John Carter
Brown Library at Providence, 11. I.; 36 pages, Assomer to Bercer.
ADMINISTRATIVE REPORT 29
Photostat copy of "A Grammar of the Pottewatomy Language,"
by Rev. Maurice Gailland, the original of which is in possession of
St. Mary's College at St. Marys, Kans.; 452 pages.
Note should here be made of the great usefulness of the
photostat apparatus acquired by the bureau during the last
fiscal year, which has enabled the photographic copying at
slight cost of various manv scripts, field notes, and rare books
and pamphlets needed for reference in the researches of the
bureau. These copies have been made in the photographic
laboratory of the bureau by Mr. Albert Sweeney, assistant
to Mr. De Lancey Gill, illustrator.
PUBLICATIONS
The editorial work of the bureau has been continued by
Mr. J. G. Gurley, editor, who from time to time has been
assisted by Mrs. Frances S. Nichols. The publications
issued during the year were:
Bulletin 46. "Byington's Choctaw Dictionary," edited by John
R. Swanton and Henry S. Halbert.
Bulletin 58. "List of Publications of the Bureau," which ap
peared in August, 1914, with a second impression in May, 1915.
Miscellaneous publications:
No. 10. Circular of Information Regarding Indian Popular Names.
No. 11. Map of Linguistic Families of American Indians North of
Mexico. This map, which is a revision of the linguistic map pub
lished in Bulletin 30 (Handbook of American Indians), was reprinted
in advance from the plate in the report on "Indian Population in
the United States and Alaska," subsequently published by the
Bureau of the Census.
No. 12. List of Indian words denoting "man," prepared in placard
form for use in the Smithsonian exhibit at the Panama-Pacific
Exposition.
The status of other publications now in press is as follows :
Twenty-ninth annual report. The "accompanying paper" of this
report is "The Ethnogeography of the Tewa Indians," by J. P.
Harrington, a work presenting many technical difficulties. The
solution of these was retarded by the illness of the author, which
resulted in his incapacity for several months to deal with the various
questions arising in connection with the text. The reading of the
proof has been carried forward as rapidly as circumstances would
30 BUREAU OF AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY
permit, and at this time the entire report is paged with exception
of the list of place names, 2,650 in number, and the index. Consid
erable progress has been made in the final reading of the page proof.
The number of pages in the volume (estimated) will be 660, with 21
plates, 31 maps, and 1 diagram.
Thirtieth annual report. This report, which contains as "accom
panying papers" "The Ethnobotany of the Zufii Indians," by Mrs.
M. C. Stevenson, and "Animism and Folklore of the Guiana Indians,"
by Walter E. Roth, has been "made up" and read through three
page proofs. At the end of the year the report (453 pages) was prac
tically ready for the bindery.
Thirty-first annual report. With this report is incorporated a
memoir on "Tsimshian Mythology," by Dr. Franz Boas. Of this
material less than half (365 pages) had been paged at the beginning
of the fiscal year. With the progress of the work a large amount of
new matter has been inserted, necessitating considerable revision
from time to time and the reading of several galley and page proofs
of the greater part of the memoir. At this writing the make-up has
been carried through page 682, and Dr. Boas looks forward to paging
the remaining material at an early day. The memoir will contain in
all about 850 pages, with 3 plates and 24 text figures.
Thirty-second annual report. The memoir accompanying this
report is entitled "Seneca Fiction, Legends, and Myths," the mate
rial of which was collected by the late Jeremiah Curtin and J. N. B.
Hewitt and edited by the latter. The manuscript reached the
bureau for publication about the middle of October and when the
fiscal year closed more than one-fourth (82 galleys) had been set up.
The number of pages will approximate 900.
Bulletin 40. "Handbook of American Indian Languages," part
2 (Boas). During the year two sections of the above-named hand
book have received attention — the Chukchee (Bogoras) and the
Siuslaw (Frachtenberg). After the former had been put into page
form to the extent of 50 pages work thereon had to be suspended by
reason of the impossibility of communicating with the author of the
section, who is in Russia. The Siuslaw section (75 galleys) is now
at the Government Printing Office for paging. Two of the "illustra
tive sketches" of part 2 of this bulletin, namely, Takelma (Sapir),
298 pages, and Coos (Frachtenberg), 133 pages, have already appeared
in separate form.
Bulletin 55. "The Ethnobotany of the Tewa Indians" (Robbins,
Harrington, and Freire-Marreco). After the manuscript of this
bulletin had been prepared by the other authors here named and had
passed into galley proof, Miss Freire-Marreco incorporated therewith
additional material to the extent of greatly enlarging and practically
ADMINISTRATIVE REPORT 31
recasting the memoir. Subsequently, on account of the European
war it was found impracticable to get from Miss Freire-Marreco the
proof sent to her for correction and in the absence of her revision the
task of putting the bulletin into final form has proved difficult. Half
of the material, however, has been paged and it will be possible to
complete the work in the near future.
Bulletin 57. "An Introduction to the Study of the Maya Hiero
glyphs" (Morley). The first proof of this publication bearing the
author's corrections reached the bureau the middle of September.
Since then two additional proofs have been revised, the character
of the material being such as to require great care and exactness in
the work. The author is now engaged in a final reading of the pages.
Unfortunately the progress of the work has been delayed several
months by his absence in Central America. The volume will contain,
when completed, about 320 pages, with 32 plates and 85 figures.
Bulletin 59. "Kutenai Tales" (Boas and Chamberlain). The
manuscript of this bulletin was received in March and, after being
edited, was placed in the hands of the Public Printer. By the middle
of June the first proof, complete (125 galleys), had been forwarded
to Dr. Boas.
Bulletin 61. "Teton Sioux Music" (Densmore). The material of
this bulletin, comprising 1,067 pages of manuscript, and copy for 80
plates, 20 text figures, and 263 folios of music, was approved for
publication in June, too late for inclusion by the Printing Office
under the bureau's allotment for this fiscal year.
As during the last few years, the correspondence arising
from the large demand for the publications of the bureau
has been in the immediate charge of Miss Helen Munroe and
Mr. E. L. Springer, of the Smithsonian Institution, assisted
during part of the year by Mr. Thomas F. Clark, jr., and
later by Mr. William A. Humphrey. The distribution has
been made, in accordance with law, by the superintendent
of documents on order of the bureau. The total number of
publications issued during the fiscal year was 10,185, dis
tributed as follows:
Annual reports 1,239
Bulletins. 8,515
Contributions to North American Ethnology 25
Introductions
Miscellaneous . . 398
Total.. 10,185
32 BUREAU OF AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY
This total shows a decrease of 2,634 volumes in compari
son with the year 1913-14, due largely to the retention in
the transmission of certain publications to Europe by reason
of the war.
ILLUSTEATIONS
The preparation of illustrations for the publications of the
bureau and of photographic portraits of the members of vis
iting Indian deputations has continued in charge of Mr. De
Lancey Gill, illustrator, assisted by Mr. Albert Sweeney.
The photographic work during the year may be classed as
follows :
Portrait negatives of visiting delegations (Crow, Osage, Chip-
pewa, and Sioux tribes) 10
Negatives of ethnologic subjects to illustrate publications 52
Development of negatives exposed by field parties 548
Photographic prints for distribution and for office use, 690
Photographic prints for publication and for office use. 120
Photographic prints for exhibition purposes 115
Small photographic prints distributed chiefly for scientific pur
poses. 350
Drawings prepared for illustrations 30
Photostat copies (pages) of books and manuscripts 1, 452
In addition, Mr. Gill gave the usual attention to the
critical examination of engraver's proofs of illustrations
designed for the publications of the bureau, submitted by
the Public Printer.
In the last report mention was made of a series of photo
graphs of Indian subjects that has been exhibited succes
sively by the New York Public Library, the Library Commis
sion of Indiana, and the Providence Public Library. In
September, 1914, in response to the request of the Public
Library of Haverhill, Mass., this series of pictures was sent
for public exhibition in that library. In addition, collec
tions of photographs of Indian subjects, designed to illustrate
in part the work of the bureau, were sent for exhibition at
the Panama-Pacific Exposition in San Francisco and at the
Panama-California Exposition in San Diego.
LIBRARY
The reference library of the bureau has been in the con
tinuous charge of Miss Ella Leary, librarian, assisted by
Mrs. Ella Slaughter until her death on November 1, 1914,
ADMINISTRATIVE REPORT 33
and subsequently by Charles B. Newman, messenger boy.
During the year 997 books were accessioned, but of this
number only 448 were newly acquired, the remainder being
represented by the binding and by entry on the records of
serial publications that had been in possession of the bureau
for some time. Of these accessions 138 volumes were
acquired by purchase and 310 by gift or through exchange.
The serial publications currently received number about 700,
of which only 17 are obtained by subscription, the remainder
being received by exchange of the bureau's reports and
bulletins. Of pamphlets, 294 were acquired. The number
of volumes bound was 678. The library contained 20,237
volumes, 13,188 pamphlets, and several thousand unbound
periodicals at the close of the year. The number of books
borrowed from the Library of Congress for the use of th*e
staff of the bureau in prosecuting their researches was about
450.
The new steel bookstacks in the eastern end of the main
hall of the Smithsonian building, referred to in the last
annual report, were finished and placed at the disposal of the
bureau in August, when the work of reinstallation of the
library was undertaken by the librarian and promptly
carried to completion. The facilities afforded by the new
stacks are an improvement over those of the old library
equipment, while safety is greatly increased.
COLLECTIONS
The following collections were acquired by the bureau or
by members of its staff and transferred to the National
Museum, as required by law:
Model of Cherokee packing basket from the East Cherokee Itescrva-
tion, Swain County, N. C. Collected by James Mooney, Bureau
of American Ethnology. (57699.)
179 archeological objects from the lower Mimbres Valley and an
earthenware vase from Casas Grandes, Chihuahua, Mexico.
Collected by Dr. J. Walter Fewkes, Bureau of American Eth
nology. (57777.)
Three stone figurines from the Tewa Indians of New Mexico. Col
lected by Mrs. M. C. Stevenson, Bureau of American Ethnology.
(58129.)
2786—21 3
34 BUREAU OF AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY
Snipe flute of the Sioux Indians. Received from Rev. A. McG.
Beede, of North Dakota. (58254.)
Five archeological objects from Virginia. Gift of Dr. W. B. Barham,
of Newsoms, Va. ; and a necklace presented by Mrs. J. II. Kello
and her daughter, Miss Hattie Kello. (58177.)
PROPERTY
The most valuable property of the bureau consists of its
library (of which brief statistics have been given), a collec
tion of unpublished manuscripts, and several thousand pho
tographic negatives. Comparatively little of this material
could be duplicated. The other property of the bureau is
described in general terms in the last annual report. The
total cost of furniture, typewriters, and other apparatus ac
quired during the fiscal year was $553.35.
MISCELLANEOUS
QUARTERS
The quarters of the bureau have been improved by the
completion of the library bookstacks, previously referred to,
and the installation of additional electric lights in the library
and in one of the office rooms.
PERSONNEL
The personnel of the bureau has been changed by the ap
pointment of Mr. John P. Harrington, ethnologist, on Feb
ruary 20; the death of Mrs. Matilda Coxe Stevenson, ethnol
ogist, on June 24; the death of Mrs. Ella Slaughter, classified
laborer, on November 1, 1914; the transfer of Thomas F.
Clark, jr., to the National Museum; the appointment of
William Humphrey, stenographer and typewriter; and the
appointment of Dennis Sullivan, messenger boy. The corre
spondence of the bureau and other clerical work has been
conducted with the assistance of three clerks and a stenog
rapher and typewriter.
Respectfully submitted.
F. W. HODGE,
Ethnologist-in- Charge .
DR. CHARLES D. WALCOTT,
Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution.
ACCOMPANYING PAPER
35
THE OSAGE TRIBE
RITE OF THE CHIEFS; SATINGS OF THE ANCIENT MEN
By FRANCIS LA FLESCHE
37
CONTENTS
Fast.
Introduction 43
Ancient home of the Osage 43
Influence of traders 43
Visit of Captain Pike 44
Present home and condition of the Oeage 44
Ritea given in this volume 47
Symbolic organization of the tribe 51
Gentile organization 51
Gentes of the Hon/-ga Great Division 52
Wa-zha'-zhe Subdivision 52
IIoD/-ga Subdivision 52
Gentes of the Tsi'-zhu Great Division 53
Sacred fireplaces 53
Sanctuaries 54
Rituals presented in three forms 54
Acknowledgments 55
PART I. THE OSAGE TRIBAL RITES. FREE TRANSLATION
Rite of the chiefs 59
Allegorical story of the organization 59
Summary: Development of the military branch of the Government 65
Civil government: Chieftainship and duties 67
The Wa-xo'-be Ton-ga, the Great Portable Shrine 71
Initiation into the rite of the chiefs 73
The Ki'-non, or ceremonial painting of the Xo'-ka 74
Xolta Wi'-gi-e 74
Wi'-gi-e of the Chief's vigil 84
Wa-the'-the, or ceremony of Sending 91
Simultaneous recital of the wi'-gi-es of the gentes 92
U-dse'-the A-do"-be, Keeper of the Fireplace 139
Instructions to the wife of the Initiate 140
The Mon'-gthu-stse-dse (Arrow ceremony) 145
The Ton/-won A-don-be (Overseer of the Village) 146
Ni'-ki Non-k'oD rite (Hearing of the Sayings of the Ancient Men) 152
Place of the Ni'-ki No°-k'°n in the Order of the Rites 152
Requirements for initiation 154
Wa-the'-the, or ceremony of Sending 155
Ni'-ki Wi'-gi-es 15G
Version of the Puma gens 157
Deer songs 185
Songs of setting up the house of mystery
Songs of the gathering 200
The Hi'-ca-da story of the Finding of the Foe 211
Ni'-ki Wi'-gi-e, version of the Black Bear gens 219
39
40 CONTENTS
Page
Ni'-ki Wi'-gi-es of the Tsi'-zhu Wa-non and Tsi'-zhu Wa-shta'-ge gentes 238
Ni'-ki Wa-thon of the Tsi'-zhu Wa-non. 238
Moccasin Wi'-gi-e 239
Kl'-non, or Painting Ceremony 242
Ki'-non Wi'-gi-e 242
Ki'-non Wi'-gi-e 247
Wi'-gi-e of the Ceremonial Approach 249
The Song of Death ' 252
The Little Song of the Gathering 253
The Great Wi'-gi-e 254
Instructions to the wife of the Initiate 270
Paraphrase of the Ni'-ki ritual of the Ci^-dse-a-gthe gens 272
Ni'-ki Wi'-gi-e of the Tei'-zhu Wa-shta'-ge gens 274
A fragmentary Ni'-ki Ritual of the Tsi'-zhu Wa-shta'-ge gens 285
PART II. OSAGE VERSION
The two rites as given in the Osage language 303
PART III. LITERAL TRANSLATION
Literal translation of the two rites into English 461
Index 599
ILLUSTRATIONS
PLATES
1. Map of parts of Vernon and Bates Counties, Missouri 44
2. Photograph of Shon'-ton-ca-be 45
3. The Wa-xo'-be 64
4. a, Portable shrine, outer case, b, Complete portable shrine 65
5. Portable shrine, inner case 72
6. Fresh- water mussel and shell gorget 73
7. a, Cedar; 6, Deer 96
8. a, Otter; b, Beaver; c, Buffalo bull 97
9. a, Golden eagle; b, Hawk 104
10. Black bear 105
11. a, Puma; 6, Male elk 108
12. a, Sagittarialatifolia; 6, Nelumbolutea; c, Glycineapiosjd, Falcatacomosa. 109
13. a, Crawfish; 6, Pileated woodpecker; c, Buffalo bull face 116
14. Ratibida columnaris 117
15. Photograph of Wa-xthi'-zhi 152
L6. Photograph of Wa-thu'-ts'-a-ga-zhi 153
17. a, Pipe; 6, War club 196
18. Photograph of Wa-t8e'-mon-in 197
19. Photograph of Xu-tha'-wa-ton-i" 238
20. Heart-sack pouch and captive strap 239
21. The Poppy Mallow and the Blazing Star 280
22. Photograph of Mo"-zhon-a/-ki-da 284
23. Photograph of Wa'-thu-xa-ge 285
TEXT FIGURES
1. Map of Osage County, Oklahoma, showing locations of villages 4fi
2. Movements of tribal divisions and gentes 60
3. Camps of the two great divisions of the tribe 69
4. Pelican 85
5. Snapping turtle 92
6. Cat-tail 93
7. Bow and two arrows , 99
8. Conventional Osage design of the spider 102
9. Rising sun, showing symbolic rays 119
10. Burden-strap 153
11. The water beetle 222
12. The water spider 223
13. The water strider 223
14. The leech 224
15. White swan 230
41
THE OSAGE TRIBE
By FRANCIS LA FLESCHE
INTRODUCTION
ANCIENT HOME OF THE OSAGE
According to data gathered from the brief references to the Osage
people made by the early travelers it appears that during the seven
teenth century these Indians were living on the banks of the Little
Osage near its confluence with the main Osage River. Marquette
(1673) was the first traveler to mention the Osage. He did not visit
the people in their villages, but, guided by information obtained from
members of other tribes, he located the Osage upon his map as living
at the head of the river bearing their name. How long prior to that
time the Osagas had made that particular locality their home, held
it and the surrounding country by their valor while they lived upon
its natural products, is not known, but it is certain that for more than
a century since this first mention of them they had made this
place their fixed abode. From this locality they went forth upon
their hunting excursions and to this spot they returned. From here
their war parties, both great and small, started when they went against
their enemies, and when the fighting was over the war parties came
back to this place. It was here that all their various ancient tribal
ceremonies were held, and the hills that surrounded their villages were
hallowed to the people by the graves of their ancestors, who were
always remembered in the daily orisons of the tribe.
INFLUENCE OF TRADERS
As trading relationship was establish ed with the Osage by the
Spanish and French traders they introduced among the people woven
goods, such as blankets and strouding, also implements of iron, which
changed to a large extent the native industries and even crept into
the ancient ceremonials of the tribe. No serious interference, how
ever, was made in the social organization of the Osage until there
came about a trade rivalry between certain traders, who, to further
their own enterprises, recognized as chiefs certain influential and
ambitious men who were not within the established order of chieftain
ship. In this way a breach was made in the tribal organization — an
43
44 THE OSAGE TEIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
organization that was interwoven with the religious rites of the
people — and thus gradually the authority of the real chiefs was
weakened.
VISIT OF CAPTAIN PIKE
In 1806 Capt. Zebulon M. Pike visited the Osages in their villages
on the Little Osage River, where he stayed about a fortnight and
became personally acquainted with the people and their condition.
The year of this visit (1806) is epochal in the history of the Osage.
It marks the beginning of a gradual process by which this people
relinquished from time to time to the United States their territorial
possessions. By the treaties of 1808 and 1818 they ceded large por
tions of their land. The treaty of 1825 followed, by which they were
obliged to give up their ancient home along the Little Osage River and
take a reservation in Kansas. The treaties of 1834 and 1865 followed,
and then, by an act of Congress passed in 1870, they gave up their
homes in Kansas to remove to what was then the Indian Territory.
The ancient home of the Osage is now a part of Vernon County,
Missouri.1 (PL 1.) The sites of the two villages may be located as
follows :
The Great Osage village was on the east side of the Little Osage
River near the confluence of the Marmaton; the Little Osage village
was 6 miles farther up on the west side of the Little Osage River.
In letters written by missionaries in 1821, while these villages were
still in existence, the following statements appear:
Harmony (the name of the mission) is situated upon the Marias de Cein (Marais des
Cygnes) River about 6 miles above its junction with the Osage. We (the mission) are
within 15 miles of the Great Osage village.2
PRESENT HOME AND CONDITION OF THE OSAGE
The present home of the Osage tribe is in Osage County, Oklahoma,
to which the people moved from their old reservation in Kansas in
1872 and took possession of the land. The Commissioner of Indian
Affairs, in his report for the year 1872, speaking of the Osage and their
new home, says:
Their reservation is bounded on the north by the south line of Kansas, east by the
ninety-sixth degree of west longitude, and south and west by the Arkansas River, and
contains approximately 1,760,000 acres. * * * By the act of July 15, 1870, pro
vision was made for sale of all the lands belonging to the Osages within the limits of
Kansas and for their removal across the line into the Indian Territory. * * * They
still follow the chase, the buffalo being their main dependence for food.* * * They
have since their removal begun farming to some extent, having already about 2,000
acres under cultivation. Their agent reports the reservation "poorly adapted for
civilizing purposes," there being only one small valley of fertile soil, barely affording
enough good farming land for 4,000 Indians. Having just located, they have at pres
ent but one school in operation, with an attendance of 38 scholars.
' "Expeditions of Zebulon M. Pike," Coues's edition, pp. 385, 389, notes 41, 42, 45.
'Morse's Report on Indian Affairs, pp. 222, 223.
BUREAU OF AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY TH I RTY-SIXTH AN N U AL REPO RT PLATE 1
MAP OF PARTS OF VERNON AND BATES COUNTIES
Homes of the Great and Little Usages on the Little OsaRC River at the I line of the visit cif Capt. Zcbulon
M. Pike in I six).
BUREAU OF AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY
THIRTY-SIXTH ANNUAL REPORT PLATE 2
(BLACK DOG )
Member of the Ho»'-ga (Mottled Kaglc)gcnsof the llu..'-Kasul.<livisii
Also Known hy his people us Zhl"-ga'-wa-«a, which is his irnc Kni
latable, as the last part is archaic and the meaning is lost.
of ihc ureat Ilo"'-Ka tribal division.
il ..... inic. This name is not trans
LA KJ5BCHE] INTRODUCTION 45
Since that time it has been discovered that the land reported to be
"poorly adapted for civilizing purposes" is rich in minerals, particu
larly in oil, which has of late years been developed. The royalties
received by the Osages on their oil leases have greatly increased their
wealth, so that they are now reputed to be the richest people in this
country as a community. They live in well-built houses, furnished
with the best of furniture the stores can supply, and many of them
have automobiles, which they have learned to drive themselves.
Up to the present time the Osages have lived upon their new reser
vation in three village communities, thus perpetuating the story of a
division of the tribe that was forced by accident. The story handed
down concerning this division is as follows: The Osage people had
built their village upon the banks of a large river (perhaps the Missis
sippi), where they dwelt for a long period of time. It happened that
the river overflowed its banks, forcing the people to flee in a panic
toward a high hill for safety, taking with them only the things
necessary for their living. A large group continued its flight until it
reached the summit of the hill, where the people established their
temporary camp. From that time this group was spoken of as
Pa-ciu'-gthin, Dwellers-Upon-the-Hilltop. Another group halted at
a forest where the people pitched their camp. These were spoken of
as the ^on-dseu'-gthin, Dwellers-in-the-Upland-Forest. A third
group was caught in a thicket of thorny trees and bushes, where the
people set up their temporary dwellings and became known by the
name Wa-xa'-ga-u-gthin, Dwellers-in-the-Thorny-Thicket. A fourth
group stopped near the foot of the hill, where they camped and were
known by the name Iu-dse'-ta, The-Dwellers-Below. In later times
the people of this group united with the Dwellers-in-the-Thorny-
Thicket, and now their identity as a distinct group is practically lost.
To-day the Dwellers-Upon-the-Hilltop have their village at Gray-
horse; the Dwellers-in-the-Upland-Forest at Hominy; and the
Dwellers-in-the-Thorny-Thicket at Pawhuska. (See fig. 1.)
This .accidental division of the tribe into separate village groups,
made permanent by tacit agreement, in no way disturbed the tribal
and gentile organizations, and the tribal rites were continued by all
three groups, although at times the villages were located long dis
tances apart. It is said that in each of the villages all the gentes
were represented, so that there was never any difficulty in making
up the number of gentes required in a ceremony. In recent times,
however, as the people were reduced in numbers from various cause-,
the three groups became dependent upon each other for a full gentile
representation in a ceremony.
The Osage tribe belongs to the great Siouan linguistic family. Its
nearest kindred tribes are the Ojnaha, Ponca, Quapaw, and Kaw.
For many years the Quapaw and the Kaw have been intimately
46
THE OSAGE TRIBE
[ETH. ANN. 36
associated with the Osage, but the Poncas did not have friendly
intercourse with them until their removal from Nebraska to the
Indian Territory in the late seventies, and it is only within the last
five or six years that the Omahas came into close touch with them.
Owing to the similarity of the languages the Omaha, Ponca, and
Osages find little difficulty in understanding each other.
The Osage tribe is rapidly approaching extinction, not by death
but by absorption into the white race. The census taken bv the
Bortiarillt
FIG. 1.— Map of Osage county, Oklahoma (1920), showing locations of the villages of the Pa-c.iu'-gthi»
Co°-dse-u'-gthi», and the Wa-xa'-ga-u-gthi" in the present Osage reservation. In English these names
are: Dwellers-on-the-Hilltop, Dwellers-in-the-Forest, and Dwellers-in-the-Thorny-Thicket.
agent in 1910 shows that out of the 2,100'persons enrolled as Osages
only 825 are full-bloods, but it is stated by reliable authority that
many of those counted as full-bloods are mixed-bloods. The Census
Bureau in its report on the Indian Population in the United States
and Alaska for 1910 (p. 145) gives the entire population of the Osage
tribe as 1,373 and that of the full-bloods as 591. Along with the
process of absorption is also carried the gradual obsolescence of the
language. Most of the people can speak English, but in their con
versation they prefer to use the nativ-e language. This, however,
offers only a feeble resistance and will in time pass away. Many of
LA FLESCHK] INTRODUCTION 47
the children are attending the public schools, where they freely
associate with the white scholars and speak with them in English.
When at home the little ones use both languages, often dropping
from one to the other in their conversation without a break in the
sentence or flow of thought, both languages being spoken with equal
fluency.
RITES GIVEN IN THIS VOLUME
The Osage tribal rites, which for generations running back beyond
the historic period were to the Osage people their law and their
religion, which kept them in constant touch with Wa-kon'-da, are
now rapidly dying, as are the few old men to whom these rites were
transmitted with reverent care. Under the new conditions and the
new ideas introduced among the people by the white race these rites
will soon fade from the memory of the coming generations and be
lost beyond recovery. It was because of these rapid changes that
the ceremonial life of the people was given immediate attention when
taking up the study of the Osage tribal life.
In this volume of the study of the Osage tribe the first place is
given to the rite called Ga-hi'-ge O-k'on, Rite of the Chiefs, for the
reason that in this rite is perpetuated the story of the vital changes
that took place in the ceremonial life of the Osage people during
the protracted transitional period through which the tribe passed.
Although the ancient Non'-hon-zhi"-ga (the Seers) handed down the
story of the tribe's experiences in cryptic form, the story revealed
clearly to the studious members of the tribe that these men of the
ancient days were well aware of the historic fact that the tribal life
of the people, as well as their tribal institutions, were developed
gradually; that this gradual development was a process continually
stimulated not only by the desire for the preservation of the tribal
existence, but by actual hard experiences that taxed both the
physical and mental powers of the people and their leaders. This
rite also points back to the time when the life of the people as a
tribe was in a chaotic state; to their emergence therefrom; and to
their achievement of a tribal government well suited to safeguard
the people, as an organized body, from internal as well as from
external perils. Under this peculiar form of government the people
lived contentedly until within the last few decades.
The second rite given in this volume is the Ni'-ki Non-k'on, Hear
ing of the Sayings of the Ancient Men. In this rite is recorded the
thoughts that occupied the minds of the Non'-hon-zhin-ga when they
were formulating the external forms set forth in the preceding rite.
These thoughts were regarded by the ancient men as fundamental
to the tribal organization, which was to constitute the means by
which the people must meet the various demands of tribal existence.
48 THE OSAGE TRIBE [BTH. ANN. 36
The theme of the rite is abstract; it deals with life, not only in its
diverse manifestations, but, in particular, with that mysterious
power known to the people as Wa-kon'-da, which gives life to all
things and whose abode is believed to be within everything and in
every place, both celestial and terrestrial.
It would appear from the story handed down by the old men, in
mythical form, of the origin of the people, that the Non'-hon-zhin-ga
arrived at the idea that life was conceived between two great fructi
fying forces — namely, the sky and the earth — and continued forever
to proceed therefrom. This conception the Non'-hon-zhin-ga not
only expressed in the mythical story mentioned above, but also in
dividing the tribe in two parts — one to represent the sky and the
other the earth — they further emphasized this symbolic expression
by requiring the men belonging to one division to take wives from
among the women belonging to the other division. This tribal
arrangement did not arise from an idle thought, but from a belief,
born of a long study of nature, that such was the means employed
by Wa-koI"-da to bring forth life in bodily form.
The mythical story, telling of the origin of the people, the Non'-hon-
zhin-ga distributed in modified versions among the various gentes of
the tribe. The version given to a gens was made to conform to that
part of nature which the gens represented in the tribal and the
gentile organizations, for the tribe in its entirety symbolized the
visible universe in all its known aspects.
In the course of this study of the Osage tribe, covering a number
of years, it was learned from some of the older members of the Non'-
hon-zhin-ga of the present day that, aside from the formulated rites
handed down by the men of the olden days who had delved into the
mysteries of nature and of life, stories also came down in traditional
form telling of the manner in which these seers conducted their
deliberations. The story that seemed most to impress the Non/-
hon-zhin-ga of to-day is the one telling of how those men, those stu
dents of nature, gradually drifted into an organized association that
became known by the name Non'-hon-zhin-ga, Little-Old-Men. As
time went on this association found a home in the house of a man who
had won, by his kindness and hospitality, the affection of his people.
It was at the house of this big-hearted man that the Little-Old-Men
assembled for their discussions. Since that time it has been regarded
by prominent men as an honor to entertain the Non'-hon-zhin-ga.
There were times in the long career of these holy men— for they were
sometimes designated by that term of reverence — when, as they sat
around the fire of their home, they were confronted with perplexing
questions, questions that affected their conclusions or the application
of their conceptions to human affairs. At such times of doubt they
would choose two of their number to go and seek divine aid and guid-
LA FLESCHE] INTRODUCTION 49
ance. The men chosen performed this sacred duty by secluding
themselves from all human associations and by taking upon them
selves the rite of Non'-zhin-zhon (vigil), which usually lasted four
days, or at the longest seven days. The report made by the men
taking this rite usually decided the action to be taken by the No"'-
hon-zhin-ga as a body.
Every rite to which the Osage people clung from the earliest times
of their tribal existence is regarded by them as religious and suppli
catory in character. Those relating to war, to peace, and to life are
held with equal veneration. The thoughts embodied in the symbolic
tribal organization and in the formulated rites were gathered by the
"holy men" from the open book of nature, not in a single season nor
in a single lifetime but through years of patient mental toil.
From these ancient tribal rites the Osage people learned to depend
always upon Wa-kon'-da for continued existence. Although they
were a peace-loving people, they were often forced to the necessity of
marching against their enemies in defensive or offensive warfare.
At such times the warriors did not rely solely upon their personal
prowess, but, vicariously, they cried without ceasing for divine aid
in overcoming their foes. Therefore their first act in preparing for
war was to choose a man upon whom devolved the duty of making a
constant appeal to Wa-kon'-da. This officer was called Do-don/-
hon-ga, a title which may be freely translated as The-sacred-one-of-
the-war-movement. If the war party achieved success, all the honors
were accredited to this mediator.
The people also learned that as a tribe they must daily appeal to
Wa-kon'-da for a long and healthful life. Therefore at dawn, when
they saw the reddened sky signaling the approach of the sun, men,
women, and children stood in the doors of their houses and uttered
their cry for divine help; as the sun reached midheaven they repeated
their prayer; and their supplications again arose as the sun touched
the western horizon.
Mention was made of these daily orisons from actual observation
by men who traveled in the far West in 1806 and 1811. Later, in
the year 1820, Governor Miller, in a letter addressed to the Rev.
Jedidiah Morse, says:
These Indians have a native religion of their own and are the only tribe I ever knew
that had. At break of day every morning I could hear them at prayer for an hour.
They appeared to be as devout in their way as any class of people.
In 1840 the Rev. Isaac McCoy, a Baptist missionary, in mentioning
this custom, says:
It has been reported that the Osages did not believe in the existence of the Great
Spirit. I was astonished that anyone who had ever been two days among them or
the Kanzas, who are in all respects similar, should be so deceived. I have never
before seen Indians who gave more undoubted evidence of their belief in God.
2786—21 4
50 THE OSAGE TRIBE IKTII. ANN. 36
Other writers of those early times have also mentioned this custom
of devotions, but none of them with the human sympathy and under
standing manifested by Thomas Asche, Governor Miller, and Isaac
McCoy. Kecently an Omaha Indian, in speaking of the Osages, said:
My father and I visited them when they had moved to their new reservation (in
the early seventies). Before sunrise in the morning following the first night of our
visit I was awakened by the noise of a great wailing. I arose and went out. As far
as I could see men, women, and children were standing in front of the doors of their
houses weeping. My parents explained to me that it was the custom of the people to
cry to Wa-kon/-da morning, noon, and evening. When I understood the meaning of
the cry I soon learned not to be startled by the noise.
Such was the manner in which the Osage kept in touch with Wa-
kon'-da, whom they believed to be present in all things. To-day the
voices of only a few old men like Ku'-zhi-wa-tse and (^on-dse'-kon-ha
can be heard in the summer mornings appealing to the All-con
trolling Power.
There is another rite to which a number of the mixed-bloods and
all of the full-bloods still cling, a rite which seems to have escaped
the notice of travelers. It is the ceremonial bestowal of a gentile
name upon a child. The giving of the gentile name installs the
child in his proper place in the tribal organization and entitles him
to recognition as a person. The ceremonies of this rite are supplica
tory, inasmuch as they are an appeal for help that the little one
may successfully reach maturity, even to old age, and that he may
be blessed with an abundance of the foods necessary to his comfort
and existence. 'Parents who love their children (and all do) make
many personal sacrifices in order to have their children given a
proper place in the tribe and blessed with a long and fruitful life.
Trifling is frowned upon and is not permitted in the ceremonies.
If a mistake occurs, which under ordinary circumstances would pro
voke merriment, such an incident is ignored and the exercires are
continued with due solemnity. The tribal rites of the Osage, all of
which deal with serious matters, have been kept pure and free from
meaningless, vulgar tales, such as are found among civilized as well
as uncivilized peoples.
The thoughts of the ancient seers, the continual theme of which
is life, are given expression not only in formulated rites, but also in
symbols which are often more expressive than words. The tribal
organization, for instance, symbolically expresses the idea con
ceived by those old men, that the part of the universe visible to
them is a great unit; also that life issues from the combined force
and influence of the various bodies that compose the unit. This
expression is emphasized in the recited parts of some of the rituals
of the tribal rites which tell of the descent of the people from the
sky to take possession of the earth and make it their abode. In
the rituals those old men have even gone so far as to personify and
LA FLESCHE] INTRODUCTION 51
to pair some of the visible bodies, as the sky and earth, sun and
moon, morning and evening stars, and some of the constellations,
implying a procreative relationship.
SYMBOLIC ORGANIZATION OF THE TRIBK
The symbolic organization of the tribe is as follows :
N.
W.
Tsi'-ihu Great Division
B A *7 6 5 4 3 21
7654321 C 7654321
Ho°'-ga Subdivision Wa-zha'-zhe Subdivision
Ho°'-ga Great Division
E.
The tribe is divided into two great divisions, one to symbolize the
sky and the other the earth. The division symbolizing the sky is
called Tsi'-zhu, a word which may be interpreted as Household.
The division symbolizing the earth is called Hon'-ga, the Sacred One.
The great division symbolizing the earth is subdivided so 'that one
part is made to represent the dry land of the earth and is dignified
with the name Hon'-ga. The other part represents the waters of
the earth, the great lakes, the rivers and their tributaries, and is
called Wa-zha'-zhe — a name by which the whole tribe is known.
In accordance with the religious significance of these two great
divisions, a rule was prescribed which required the men of one
division to take wives only from the women belonging to the opposite
division. This rule was strictly and religiously observed until the
people were reduced in numbers from various causes and in recent
times by the disturbing influences of the white race.
It is clear from the religious thoughts embodied in the symbolisms
of the two great divisions, and from the mythical stories told of the
appeals of the people to some of the heavenly bodies for long life
when about to descend to the earth, that the old men intended the
organization to stand as a perpetual supplication, not only for long
life to the individual member, but to the tribe as well, and for an
orderly marital relationship between the peoples of the two great
divisions.
GENTILE ORGANIZATION
For ceremonial purposes, and for completing the tableau depicting
the sky with its celestial bodies, the earth with its water and the
52 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 86
various forms of life belonging to it, together with the dry land and
its many kinds of animals, the tribe was further divided into gentes
and subgentes. Each gens or subgens had its own mythical life-
story, its life-symbol or set of life-symbols, its sacerdotal functions,
and a definite part or parts to perform in the great tribal rites, all
of which are composite in character. As a rule a subgens is that
part of a gens segregated for the purpose of choosing therefrom a
priestly messenger called Sho'-ka — an office necessary for communi
cating with the other gentes in a ceremonial and authoritative manner.
The names of the gentes of the two great divisions, in their sequen
tial order, was obtained from several men, but none of the lists
agreed in every particular, due, possibly, to the fact that each gens
had its own way of telling of the rites. Some of the men said: "We
tell the same story, but each one tells it in a little different way,"
meaning that each gens had its own version of the mythical story.
The list obtained by Miss Alice C. Fletcher in 1896 from Chief Shon'-
ton-ca-be (pi. 2), better known as "Black-dog," of the Eagle gens, is
the nearest approach to a complete list and is here given.
GENTES OF THE HON'-GA GREAT DIVISION
WA-ZHA'-ZHE SUBDIVISION
1. Wa-zha'-zhe cka; White Wa-zha'-zhe. Kefers to its gentile life-
symbol, the mussel with its shell.
In-gthon/-ga Ni MoMse; Puma-in-the-Water. Sho'-ka.
2. Ke'-k'in; Carrier-of-the-Turtle.
Ba-k'a Zho-i-ga-the; Cotton-tree People. Sho'-ka.
3. Mi-ke'-the-stse-dse; Cat-tail (TypJia latifolia) .
Ka'-xe-wa-hu-ca; Youngest brother. Sho'-ka. (See foot
note, p. 278.)
4. Wa'-tse-tsi; Star-that-came-to-Earth.
Xu-tha' Pa-con Zho-i-ga-the; Bald Eagle People. Sho'-ka.
5. O-cu'-ga-xe; They-who-make-Clear-the-Way.
Mon-sho'-dse-mon-in; Travelers-in-the-Mist. Sho'-ka.
6. Ta-tha'-xin; Deer's Lungs, or Ta-cin'-dse-cka; White-tailed-Deer.
Wa-dsu'-ta-zhin-ga; Small- Animals. Sho'-ka.
7. Ho I-ni-ka-shi-ga; Fish-People.
E-non' Min-dse-ton; Exclusive-Owners-of-the-Bow. Refers to
its office of making the ceremonial bow and arrows that
symbolize night and day. Sho'-ka.
C Hon'-ga U-ta-non-dsi; The-Isolated-Hon-ga. The Earth.
Mon'-hin-ci; Flint-Arrow-Point. Sho'-ka.
1. Wa-ca'-be-ton; They-Who-Own-the-Black-Bear.
Wa'-ca-be-cka; The-White-Bear. Sho'-ka.
LA rmscHB] INTRODUCTION 53
2. In-gthon'-ga; Puma.
Hin-wa'-xa-ga; The Porcupine. Sho'-ka.
3. O'-pxon; Elk.
TaHeSha-be; Dark-horned Deer. Sho'-ka.
4. Mon'-in-ka-ga-xe; Maker-of-the-Earth.
5. Hon'-gaGthe-zhe; The-Mottled-Sacred-One (the immature golden
eagle).
6. Xu-tha', Eagle (The adult golden eagle).
7. Hon'-ga Zhin-ga; The Little-Sacred-One.
I'-ba-tse Ta-dse; The-Gathering-of- the- Winds. Sho'ka.
GENTES OF THE TSI'-ZHU GREAT DIVISION
1. Tsi'-zhu Wa-non; Elder Tsi'-zhu, or Wa-kon'-da Non-pa-bi; The-
God-Who-is-Feared-by-All. Refers to its life symbol, the Sun.
Wa-ba'-xi; The-Awakeners. Refers to its office of urging the
messengers to prompt action. Sho'-ka.
2. Cin'-dse A-gthe; Wearers-of-Symbolic-Locks.
Shon'-ge Zho-i-ga-the; Dog-People. Refers to its life-symbol,
the dog star. The name Shon'-ge includes coyotes, gray
wolves, and all other kinds of dogs. Sho'-ka.
3. Pe'-ton Ton-ga Zho-i-ga-the; Great-Crane-People.
Tsi'-zhu Wa-shta-ge; The-Gentle-Tsi'-zhu. Refers to its office
of Peacemaker.
4. Tse-do'-ga In-dse; Buffalo-Bull-Face-People. Related to the Tsi'-
zhu Wa-non.
Tse-a'-kon, corruption of Tse-thon'-ka; Buffalo-Back. Sho'-ka.
5. Mi-k'in' Wa-non; Carriers-of-the-Sun-and-Moon. Refers to its life
symbols, all the heavenly bodies.
6. Hon' Zho-i-ga-the; Night-People. Refers to its life symbol, the
Night.
Ta-pa' Zho-i-ga-the; Deer-head or Pleiades People. Sho'ka.
7. Tsi'-zhuTI-thu-ha-ge; The-Last-Tsi'-zhu, or the last in the order.
THE Tei' HA-SHI (THOSE- WHO-WERE-LAST-TO-COMB)
A Ni'-ka Wa-kon-da-gi; Men of Mystery, or Thunder People.
Xon'-dse Wa-tse; Cedar Star. Sho'-ka.
B Tho'xe; Buffalo Bull (archaic name for the buffalo bull).
SACRED FIREPLACES
The three groups of seven gentes each are spoken of as: The
Wa-zha'-zhe, who possess seven fireplaces; The Hon'-ga, who possess
seven fireplaces; The Tsi'-zhu, who possess seven fireplaces. All of
these 21 fireplaces are war fireplaces, for the people of these three
groups were organized as military bodies for defensive purposes. At
54 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
the war ceremonies of these three groups of gentes the recited parts
of the rituals are usually prefaced with the lines:
The Wa-zha'-zhe (or Hon/-ga or Tsi'-zhu), a people who possess seven fireplaces, a
people among whom there are none that are craven.
The Ni'-ka Wa-kon-da-gi, marked A on the diagram; the Tho'-xe,
marked B; the Hon'-ga U-ta-non-dsi, marked C, each has a war
fireplace; but these war fireplaces are kept separate when speaking
of the gentile order for the purpose of commemorating certain portions
of the story of the tribe.
In course of time and as governmental ideas developed two special
fireplaces were established and given the title U-dse-the Wa-shta'-ge,
Gentle or Peace Fireplace. A new gens was also created within the
Tsi'-zhu Great Division, to which was given one of these Peace
Fireplaces, the office of Peacemaker, and the name Tsi'-zhu Wa-
shta'-ge, Gentle Tsi'-zhu. Within the Hon'-ga Great Division was
also created a new gens out of the Wa'-tse-tsi gens and called Pon'-ka
Wa-shta'-ge, Gentle Pon'-ka, and to it was given the other Peace
Fireplace together with the office of Peacemaker. Two hereditary
chiefs were chosen out of these new gentes, one for the Tsi'-zhu
Great Division, the other for the Hon'-ga Great Division. To the
Tsi'-zhu chief was given precedence in official rank. The duty of
these hereditary chiefs was to enforce peace within the tribe.
SANCTUARIES
The houses of these two chiefs became sanctuaries not only for the
people of the tribe but also for members of other tribes, including
enemy tribes, who were allowed to seek refuge there. These two
houses were made to represent the earth and all life contained
therein. Two doors were given to each of these sacred houses, one
facing east and the other west, and an imaginary line running from
door to door symbolized the path of the sun, which daily traverses
the middle of the earth. The story of these two chiefs is given in
the first ritual of this volume.
RITUALS PRESENTED IN THREE FORMS
The rituals of the two tribal rites presented in this volume are
given in three forms, as follows:
The first form is in a free English translation of the intoned or
recited parts of the rituals. For convenience in reading, and to
avoid the monotony of constant repetition, the refrain, "it has been
said, in this house," that occurs at the end of every line in the original
is generally omitted from the line> of the free translation.
The second form is in the Osage language as transcribed from the
dictaphone records made by Wa-tse'-mon-in and other members of
LA PLESCHE] INTRODUCTION 55
the tribe versed in the tribal rites. The refrain, "it has been said,
in this house," is retained throughout the rituals as originally given,
for the reason that to the Osage it is necessary to show that every
line intoned is authoritative and originated in the house where the
ancient Non'-hon-zhin-ga (the Little-Old-Men) gathered to formulate
the rites. This original form is included in this volume in order that
the educated Osage may read the rituals of his ancestors in his own
language unconfused by the English translations.
The third form is an English translation given as literally as it
could be made under certain difficulties. The language employed in
these rituals is not that in ordinary use, but tropas, figures of speech,
and metaphorical expressions were freely used by the Non/-hoD-
zhin-ga to convey their ideas, thus making it difficult for the uniniti
ated to fully understand the ritualistic language. This peculiar
mode of expression is characterized by the Indians as Non'-hon-
zhi"-ga I-e, Language of the Little-Old-Men.
All the songs included in the two rituals presented in this volume
were sung by Osages into the dictaphone and transcribed from the
records thus made by Alice C. Fletcher.
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
Acknowledgment is here made of the assistance given by Dr. Fred
erick V. Coville and Mr. Paul C. Standley in identifying the plants
mentioned in some of the rituals; also of the courtesy of Dr. Chas. W.
Richmond in identifying certain birds that figure in the rites. The
writer is indebted to Dr. William E. Safford for valuable assistance
given by him in identifying certain food plants and water insects that
have important places in the sacred rituals and in the assembling of
the illustrations showing these symbolic plants and insects.
PART I.-THE OSAGE TRIBAL RITES
FREE TRANSLATION
57
THE GA-HI'-GE O-K'ON, KITE OF THE CHIEFS
The title Ga-hi'-ge O-k'on, freely translated, means the Eite of the
Chiefs. To understand its significance in the tribal development the
following statement is necessary:
The ancient No°'-hon-zhin-ga (The Little-Old-Men) who formulated
the organization of the people made it religious in character and based
it upon the duality they observed throughout nature. These thought
ful seers had arrived at the conception that all life issues which take
on manifold forms result from the combined influence of two great
physical forces — namely, the Sky, including all the heavenly bodies,
and the Earth, including the waters distributed over it. This
duality they represented • in the tribal organization, the Tsi'-zhu
great division representing the Sky, the Hon'-ga great division the
Earth. The duality was also reflected in all the tribal rites, those
which pertained to war and those which related to peace and civil
government. During the early stages of the tribal life it appears
that the Osage were mainly under a military form of government,
which had passed through certain experimental stages, all of which
occupied a long period of time. Although this form had served the
tribe well in defending it against external dangers, yet it was not
considered as a completed form of government, for it lacked the civil
branch necessary for the welfare of the people as a whole.
It is this stage of the tribal organization that is dealt with in the
following story of the Rite of the Chiefs. The first part of the story
as told by four different members of the Non'-hon-zhi"-ga is alle
gorical in form and about the same in substance, from which the
element of time and the details of many experiences are omitted.
The story is as follows :
ALLEGORICAL STORY OF THE ORGANIZATION
In the beginning the peoples of the Wa-zha'-zhe, the Hon'-ga, and
the Tsi'-zhu came from the sky to the earth. After these three
groups of people had descended they started forth to wander over
the earth, observing, as they marched, the sequence in which they
had reached the earth; first the Wa-zha'-zhe, then the Hon'-ga, and
last the Tsi'-zhu. One day, after they had wandered for a great
length of time, the Wa-zha'-zhc suddenly halted, and the leader
looked back over his shoulder to his followers, who had also halted,
and in an undertone said: " We have come to the village of a strange
people." (See chart, fig. 2.) The leader of the Hon'-ga looked back
59
60
THE OSAGE TRIBE
[BTH. ANN. 36
over his shoulder and in the same manner passed the word to the
Tsi'-zhu.
Overhearing the words cautiously spoken by the Wa-zha'-zhe
leader and his followers, the people of the village sent a messenger
to inquire who these strangers were and what was their mission. On
the invitation of the messenger the Wa-zha'-zhe alone entered the
village, for the Hon'-ga and the Tsi'-zhu declined to follow because
they had noticed with revulsion that the bones of animals and of
Fio. 2.— Movements of tribal divisions and gentes. This chart is from a rough sketch drawn by Wa-
xthi'-zhi to illustrate the allegorical story of the organization of the Osage tribal government.
No. 1 in the diagram indicates the place occupied by the Ho°'-ga U-ta-no»-dsl where they were found by
the group called Wa-zha'-zhe who possess Seven Fireplaces.
No. 2 indicates the place to which the Ho°'-ga U-ta-no»-dsi moved at the request of the Wa-zha'-zhe who
possess Seven Fireplaces; at this place came the people called Hon'-ga who possess Seven Fireplaces.
Later came the people called Tsi'-zhu, including the Tho'-xo and the Ni'-ka Wa-ko°-da-gi. These six
groups hero formed a council that established the military branch of the government and the great
warpath.
No. 3 indicates the place to which all the people moved and at which the war rites were reorganized and
the small warpath established.
Nos. 4 and 5 indicate another place to which all the people moved and where the civil branch of the
government was organized. Here were formed two new gentes from which two hereditary chiefs
were to be chosen, one for the Tsi'-zhu and the other for the Ho°'-ga Great Division. Rules and rites
were also formulated for the maintenance of peace and order within the tribe.
men lay scattered and bleaching around the village. It was the
village of death to which they had come, when they had been seeking
for life.
The Wa-zha'-zhe leader was conducted to the house of the leader
of the strange people and there the two men exchanged words in
friendly terms. The Wa-zha'-zhe presented a ceremonial pipe to
the leader of this strange village, who in turn gave a pipe to the
Wa-zha'-zhe, and then the two leaders conversed freely about the
life and customs of their peoples. In the course of their conversa
tion the Wa-zha'-zhe said that he belonged to a people who called
themselves Hon'-ga, whereupon the stranger said: "I also am a
LA FLESCHBJ TRIBAL, RITES FREE TRANSLATION 61
Hon'-ga." He then told the Wa-zha'-zhe the manner in which his
people destroyed life wherever it appeared on the earth, using for
their weapons the four winds, and that whichever way the people
turned the winds, the animals and men stricken by them fell and
died. It was at this point that the Wa-zha'-zhe leader made known
to his host that the Hon'-ga and the Tsi'-zhu desired to dwell with
him and his people, but did not like their habit of destroying life.
The Wa-zha'-zhe leader then suggested that his host and his people
move to a new country, where the land was pure and free from the
signs of death. The Hon'-ga U-ta-non-dsi (the Isolated Hon'-ga), as
the Wa-zha'-zhe called these strange people, willingly accepted the
invitation and moved with the Wa-zha'-zhe to a "new country,"
where they joined the Hon'-ga and the Tsi'-zhu.
All the four groups, the Wa-zha'-zhe, the Hon/-ga, the Tsi'-zhu, and
the Hon'-ga U-ta-non-dsi, thereupon moved to a new country, where
the land was undefded by decaying carcasses and where there were no
visible signs of death. There they united themselves in friendship,
each pledging to the other its strength and support in resisting the
dangers that might beset them in the course of their united tribal life.
It was at this time that the following dramatic incident took place
between the Wa-zha'-zhe and the Hon'-ga. The Wa-zha'-zhe
offered to the Hon'-ga a symbolic pipe, but before accepting it the
Hon'-ga asked, "Who are you ?" The Wa-zha'-zhe replied:
I am a person who has verily made of a pipe his body,
When you also make of the pipe your body,
You shall be free from all causes of death, 0, Hon'-ga.
The Hon'-ga took the pipe and said in response:
I am a person who has made of the red boulder his body,
When you also make of it your body,
The malevolent gods in their destructive course,
Shall pass by and leave you unharmed, O , Wa-zha'-zhe.
The expression of the Wa-zha'-zhe, "I am a person who has made
of a pipe his body," is figurative and means that the pipe is the life
symbol' of his people, the medium through which they approach
Wa-kon'-da with their supplications. The words used by the Hon'-ga
in his response, "I am a person who has made of the red boulder his
body," are also figurative and mean that the red boulder is the life
symbol of the Hon'-ga people. The red boulder has a dual symbol
ism; it is the symbol of endurance and is also a symbol of the sun,
the emblem of never-ending life.
It was thus that the two groups, the Wa-zha'-zhe and the Hon'-ga,
pledged support to one another in times of danger so long as tribal
life should last. The words of the Wa-zha'-zho and those of the
Hon'-ga were put in the wi'-gi-e form and are embodied in the rite
62 THK OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
called Ni'-ki-e, The Words of the Ancient Men, where the wi'-gi-es
will be found in full (pp. 195-197). These two wi'-gi-es are also used
in a certain part of the Wa-sha'-be A-thin, a war ceremony that will
appear in a later volume, where it is intimated that the Wa-zha'-zhe
also presented a ceremonial pipe to the Tsi'-zhu. The narrator of the
foregoing paraphrase offered no information concerning the part of
the Tsi'-zhu in this council of alliance, as he was not a member of
that division.
At the time of this council the people of the three groups gave to
the Hon'-ga U-ta-non-dsi a house which they called Tsi' Wa-kon-da-gi,
House of Mysteries. Both the house and its fireplace they conse
crated to ceremonial uses and made them to represent the life-giving
earth. To this House of Mysteries were to be brought all the infants
of the four groups to be ceremonially fed upon the sacred foods of life
that they might arrive safely at the age of maturity, and the children
were here to be given their gentile names in order to take their estab
lished places in the tribal organization.
The council at this time also established another house, Tsi' Wa-kon-
da-gi, House of Mysteries, which they called Hon'-ga Tsi, and placed it
in the keeping of the Wa-ca'-be gens of the Hon'-ga group. In this
house were to be performed the ceremonies that pertain to war.
Within its fireplace, which was called Ho'-e-ga, Snare, were placed
four stones, arranged at the cardinal points, one for each of the four
winds. Upon these four stones was placed the Tse'-xe Ni-ka-po, a
caldron for the boiling of certain plants that represented certain per
sons belonging to enemy tribes.
When the Tsi'Wa-kon-da-gi of the Wa-ca'-be gens and its fireplace
had been consecrated, each of the gentes of the four groups placed
within the house its life symbol. This statement is not meant to be
understood in a literal sense, as some of the gentile life symbols are
of the great objects in nature, such as the sun, moon, stars, earth,
while there are others that are intangible, as the day, the night, and
the sky. Therefore the act of placing the sacred life symbols in the
House of Mysteries was represented by the reciting of the wi'-gi-es
that relate to these various sacred life symbols.
These four warrior groups conducted both the war and hunting
movements of the people, and no one group could act independently
of the others. A war party thus ceremonially organized by all of
these four groups was called Do-don'-hin-ton-ga, War Party in Great
Numbers.
After living for a long period of time under this form of government
the people were again seized with a desire to "move to a new country "
(a term expressive of a slow movement that preceded a change in the
government of the tribe). It was while the tribe was in the "new
LA FLESCHE] TRIBAL RITES FREE TRANSLATION 63
country " that the people made the Wa-xo'-be Zhin-ga (pi. 3) , the Little
Wa-xo'-be, one for each of the seven fireplaces of the Tsi'-zhu great
division; one for each of the seven fireplaces of the Hon'-ga subdivi
sion; and one for each of the seven fireplaces of the Wa-zha'-zhe sub
division of the great Hon'-ga division.
These wa-xo'-be were made of hawk skins and symbolized the
courage of the warriors of each fireplace. The choice of the hawk to
symbolize the courage and combative nature of the warrior proved
satisfactory to all the people, for the courage of the hawk was con
sidered as equal to that of the eagle, while the swift and decisive man
ner in which the smaller bird always attacks its prey ever excited the
admiration of the warrior.
From the story relating to the adoption of the hawk as the warrior
symbol, given in wi'-gi-e form by a member of the P-gtho^-gagens
and by a member of the Tho'-xe gens in a paraphrase of the wi'-gi-e,
it would appear that the ceremonies of the formal adoption and the
acts of preparing the hawk skin for preservation were accompanied
by dramatic action.
In the version' of the In-gthon'-ga, a gens belonging to the Hon'-ga
Great Division, the principal characters of the drama are left vague
as to identity. But in the version of the Tho'-xe, a gens belonging
to the Tsi'-zhu Great Division that symbolizes the sky, it becomes
clear that the warrior whom the hawk typifies is a child born of the
god of day and the goddess of night. In this version the principal
characters are four brothers (stars), their sister (the moon), and
the sun.
The supernatural birth of the wa-xo'-be, the symbolic hawk, is
referred to in the words of three songs belonging to the ritual of the
Wa-xo'-be degree of the Tho'-xe gens. The three songs bear in com
mon the title "Little Songs of the Sun." (These songs, with their
music, will appear in a later volume.)
SONQ 1
1
I go to the call of those who are assembled, .
To the call of those who are gathered around the hawk.
o
I go to the call of those who are assembled,
To the call of those who are gathered around the black bird.
3
I go to the call of those who are assembled,
To the call of those who are gathered around the One of the Night.
4
I go to the call of those who are assembled,
To the call of those who are gathered around the One of the Day.
64 THE OSAGE TRIBE [BTH. ANN. 36
SONO 2
1
He is born ! He is born !
Behold, the hawk, he is born,
They have said. They have said ,
He is born I
2
He is born ! He is born !
Behold, the black bird, he is born,
They have said. They have said,
He is born !
3
He is born 1 He is born !
Behold, he is born of the One oi the Night,
They have said. They have said,
He is born !
4
He is born ! He is born !
Behold, he is born of the One of the Day,
They have said. They have said,
He is born !
SONG 3
1
Lo, it has come to pass,
Behold, the hawk that lies outstretched.
Is now born they proclaim. Is now born they proclaim.
Welcome! be it said. Lo, it has come to pass.
2
Lo, it has come to pass,
Behold, it is of the One who is of the Day,
He is born they proclaim. He is born they proclaim.
Welcome! be it said. Lo, it has come to pass.
3
Lo, it has come to pass,
Behold, the black bird that lies outstretched,
Is now born they proclaim. Is now born they proclaim.
Welcome! be it said. Lo, it has come to pass.
4
Lo, it has come to pass,
Behold, it is of the One who is of the Night,
He is born they proclaim. He is born they proclaim.
Welcome! be it said. Lo, it has come to pass.
The Non'-hon-zhin-ga sat within their long house as they worked
on the wa-xo'-bes. Their heads were still bent over the last one
when they were startled by the angry bellowing of an animal. All
eyes turned upon the Sho'-ka, who hastened to the door and quickly
threw aside the flap. There stood an angry buffalo with his head
lowered and his tail trembling in the air, pawing the earth and
throwing clouds of dust toward the sky. Stricken with fear, the
Sho'-ka asked with unsteady voice, "Who are you?" The bull
BUREAU OF AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY THIRTY-SIXTH ANNUAL REPORT PLATE 3
THE WA-XO'-BE
u. Tin- wa-xo'-be, made of I he skin of a hawk, is a symbol of courage, and is carried by a comma
oflk
l poi
, ,
T on his back when leading his men in an attack. It. The deerskin pouch in which the
c is carried when not in actual use. r. The deerskin si rap for carrying (he wa-xo'-be when
s pouch. This strap is put around Ilie neck of the carrier and the wa-xo'-be in its pouch
liis back, suspended from the si rap. 1'ermission to use the deerskin for making ihe si rap
cb niiisl be ceremonially obtainnl from I he I>crr gens.
BUREAU OF AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY
THIRTY-SIXTH ANNUAL REPORT PLATE 4
a. PORTABLE SHRINE, OUTER CASE
The outer case of I lie portable slirinr of the tattooing rite. The case is made of biifTalo hair. I'cr-
niissiini for tin1 list- of the bulYitlo liair must be ceremonially obtained from the Tho'-xe gens.
6. COMPLETE PORTABLE SHRINE
The eagle's leg attached to the hanging strap of the portable shrine is a symbol commemorative
of the "liiuling of the foe" and belongs to the Ili'-ca-da (Leg Stretched) subgens oMhe IIo"'-ga
A-hhi-lo" gens of the Ho°'-ga great division.
LA FLBSCHK] TRIBAL, RITES FREE TRANSLATION 65
answered, "I am Tho'-xe, lift ye your heads!" (See p. 134,
Name of gens.) At that moment there came a crash of thunder
that seemed to issue from the end of the ridgepole of the house. In
an excited manner the Non'-hon-zhin-ga gathered up all the wa-xo'-bes
and threw them toward the bull, who at once lowered his tail, ceased
pawing the earth, and became friendly.
These two angry visitors, the bull and the thunder, were repre
sentatives of the Tho'-xe and the Ni'-ka Wa-kon-da-gi gentes. It was
in this dramatic manner that these two gentes were jointly given the
office of caring for the wa-xo'-bes. At an initiation of a member of
one of the various gentes into the mysteries of the war rite, the heredi
tary caretaker of the wa-xo'-be, who belongs to the Ni'-ka Wa-kon-
da-gi gens, is given the bird to redecorate, an act equivalent to its
reconsecration for the benefit of the initiate. If the hereditary
caretaker happens to be absent from the initiation, this duty is
performed by the second official caretaker, who belongs to the
Tho'-xe gens. It is said that all the wa-xo'-bes belong to these two
gentes because the Non'-hon-zhin-ga had given them to the two gentes
through fear; also that the Tho'-xe and the Ni'-ka Wa-kon-da-gi had
originally brought the birds from the sky and given them to the
people.3
The Tho'-xe and the Ni'-ka Wa-kon-da-gi were also spoken of as
the Tsi Ha-shi, Those Last to Come — that is, those of the gentes
who were last to take part in the formulating of the war rite.
SUMMARY: DEVELOPMENT OF THE MILITARY BRANCH OF THE
GOVERNMENT
From the foregoing story it appears that the military branch of the
tribal government in the course of its development passed through
two stages, each one of which was spoken of as a " departure to a new
country." The introductory statement that the peoples of the
Wa-zha'-zhe, the Hon'-ga, and the Tsi'-zhu came from the sky to
the earth expresses the conception that all life descends from the
sky to the earth. The story that immediately follows has a historical
basis and indicates the point of departure from a chaotic to an orderly
state of tribal existence.
It also appears that at the beginning the affairs of the tribe were
under the control of the Hon'-ga U-ta-non-dsi, a division representing
> There is, however, reason to suspect that these two gentes, feeling that they were slighted in the dis
tribution of the sacred articles, threatened to depart , and in order to prevent the rupture the Non'-hon-zhii»-ga
gave them the office of official keeper. An incident of that kind occurred among the Omaha at the time
of their reorganization, when the seven ceremonial pipes were distributed among certain gentes of the
tribe. The distributors of the sacred pipes passed by an important and influential subgens of the Tha'-(a-da
without leaving a pipe. This subgens, taking offense at the slight, prepared to leave the tribe, when the
leading men presented to the subgens a buffalo head for a wa-xo'-be. As a result the gens remained, the
buffalo head became sacred to the members, and from that time they were known as the Te-ya' I-ta-zhl
They Who do not Touch Buffalo Heads.
2786—21 5
66 THE OSAGE TRIBE fETH. ANN. 36
the earth. During this period the tribe was in a continual state of
confusion from external and internal disturbances. In order to pre
serve the tribal existence, a movement toward reorganization became
necessary, and in time such a movement was initiated by the Wa-zha'-
zhe, a subdivision of the great Hon'-ga division.
In this reorganization certain offices were established and distrib
uted as follows: To the Hon'-ga U-ta-non-dsi was given the priestly
office of keeping the house wherein the children of all the people were
initiated into the tribal life and given their gentile personal names.
To the Hon'-ga, a subdivision of the great Hon'-ga division, was given
the office of keeping the house wherein the ceremonies pertaining to
war were to be conducted. This house was placed in the direct keep
ing of the Wa-ca'-be gens and the In-gthon'-ga gens, both of which
were related gentes. The authority for the initiation of all war move
ments was conferred upon these four tribal divisions: Wa-ca'-be,
Wa-zha'-zhe, Tsi'-zhu, Hon'-ga U-ta-non-dsi, each having an eagle
for its war symbol. The authority with which they were vested in
cluded the management of the tribal hunting expeditions. Such
was the first stage of the development of the military branch of the
tribal government.
The reorganized government proved effective in the maintenance
of peace and order within the tribe and in upholding the dignity of
the people as an organized body, but it was burdened with ceremonial
forms which did not admit of the prompt action often necessary for
moving against aggressive and troublesome enemies.
The Non'-hon-zhin-ga, becoming conscious of this defect, again made
a "move to a new country" to bring their organization to final com
pletion. In this second move the various gentes of the tribe were
empowered to organize war parties in three classes, as follows:
1. A war party composed of the warriors from the gentes of one of
the two great divisions.
2. A war party made up of two or more of the gentes of one of the
two great divisions.
3. A war party organized by one gens.
War parties of the first two classes were called Tsi'-ga-xa Do-don;
Tsi'-ga-xa probably meaning Outside of the House of Mystery;
Do-don, War Party — i. e., war party organized outside of the House
of Mystery. War parties of the third class were called Wa-xo'-be
U-kon-dsi; Wa-xo-be, the Sacred Hawk; U-ko"-dsi, Isolated; An Iso
lated Wa-xo'-be. War parties of these three classes were not required
to observe the tedious ceremonial forms prescribed for the war parties
organized under the rule of the four divisions. Under this new move
ment each gens of the tribe was given a hawk wa-xo'-be for cere
monial purposes. This was the second stage in the development of
the military branch of the tribal government. (See chart, fig. 2.)
LA FLESCHE] TRIBAL RITES FREE TRANSLATION 67
For the perpetuation of the memory of these events, as well as for
the guidance of the people in organizing their forces for defensive or
aggressive warfare, the Non'-hon-zhin-ga formulated rites and cere
monial acts which were memorized by men capable of such a task
and handed down by them to the successive generations.
CIVIL GOVERNMENT: CHIEFTAINSHIP AND DUTIES
In the progress of time the Non'-hon-zhin-ga made a third ''move
to a new country." (See chart, fig. 2.) At this time the civil branch
of the tribal government was instituted. It was then agreed that the
people should be governed by two men, one for each of the two great
tribal divisions, who should bear the official title of Ga-hi'-ge, Chief.
The duties assigned to these two chiefs were as follows:
1. When two men quarrel, come to blows, and threaten to kill each
other, the chief shall compel them to cease fighting.
2. When a murder is committed and a relative of the person slain
threatens to take the life of the murderer in revenge, the chief shall
compel the relative to keep the peace.
3. If the relative persists in his effort to take the life of the slayer,
the chief shall expel him from the tribe.
4. If the relative takes the life of the slayer when the chief had
already offered him the sacred pipe to smoke, the chief shall give the
order for him to be put to death.
5. The chief shall require the murderer to bring gifts to the rela
tives of the man he has slain as an offering of peace.
6. If the murderer refuses to do this, the chief may call upon the
people to make the peace offering and then expel the murderer from
the tribe.
7. If a man's life is threatened by another and he flees to the house
of the chief, he shall protect the fleeing man.
8. If a murderer pursued by the relatives of the slain man flees
into the house of the chief, he shall protect the man.
9. If a stranger, although he be from an enemy tribe, enters the
house of the chief for safety, the chief shall protect him.
10. When a war party comes home with captives, the chief shall
give them their lives and have them adopted into the tribe.4
When the tribe goes out for the annual buffalo hunt it shall be the
duty of the chief to designate the route to be taken and the site in
which the camp is to be pitched, and the order shall be proclaimed
by a crier. The two chiefs shall take turns each day in conducting
the journey, both when going forth and when returning to the home
village.
< It is from this sacred duty that the IM'-ihu Wa-shta-ge gons have as one of their gentile personal names
the name Ni'-wa-the, The flivpr of Life; also \V<i-ni'-e-to», which has the samp meaning.
68 THE OSAGE TRIBE [BTH. ANN. 36
For the enforcement of their orders the two chiefs shall be empow
ered to select and appoint 10 officers, one from each of the following
gentes:
On the Hon'-ga side: Wa-ca'-be or In-gthoQ'-ga; Ta I-ni-ka-shi-ga;
O'-pxon; Hon'-ga A-hiu-ton; Hon'-ga U-ta-non-dsi.
On the Tsi'-zhu side: Ni'-ka-wa-kon-da-gi; Tho'-xe; Tsi'-zhu
Wa-non; Mi-k'in Wa-non; Tse-do'-ga-in-dse.
These officers shall bear the title A'-ki-da, Soldier, and shall be
chosen because of the military honors that they had won as well as
for their personal friendship for the chief. The chief in selecting his
officers shall not be restricted to his own division, but he may,
according to his own preference, choose his officers from any of the
designated gentes of the opposite division. These officers shall have
their houses close to that of the chief.
The officers selected from three of these designated gentes were
honored with special titles, which afterwards became in these gentes
personal names. These titles, and later the names, were: A'-ki-da
Ton-ga, Great Soldier, for the officer chosen from the Wa-ca'-be gens
or the related In-gthon'-ga gens; A'-ki-da Zhin-ga, Little Soldier, for
the one chosen from the Ta' I-ni-ka-shi-ga gens; and A'-ki-da
Ga-hi-ge,5 Chief Soldier, for the one from the Ni'-ka-wa-kon-da-gi gens.
It was agreed at this time that the office of the chief shall descend
to the lineal male heirs. In case the heir is disqualified for the office
owing to mental infirmity or indifference to the customs held sacred
by the people, the A'-ki-da in council shall determine who of the
nearest kin to the former chief shall succeed to the office.
The gentes from which the two Ga-hi-ges or chiefs were chosen
were the Wa'-^se-tsi gens (the people who descended from the stars),
of the Wa-zha'-zhe subdivision of the HoQ'-ga great division; and the
Tsi'-zhu gens of the Tsi'-zhu great division. The title Wa-shta'-ge,
Gentle, was at that time added to the names of these two gentes, so
that in speaking of them both the name and the title were men
tioned, as Wa'-tse-tsi Wa-shta'-ge (sometimes called the Pon'-ka
Wa-shta'-ge), and the Tsi'-zhu Wa-shta'-ge. This gens was some
times called Tsi'-zhu Wa-bin' I-ta-zhi, the Tsi'-zhu who do not
touch blood, because the people of that gens are supposed to refrain
from the shedding of blood. The rule that required the chief to
protect a man fleeing to his house for refuge applied to all the families
of this gens.
It was also agreed that the house of the chief should be held as
sacred as it repre-ents two life-giving powers — the Earth and the
Sun. The house stands for the earth and must have two doors, one
opening toward the rising sun and the other toward the setting sun.
5 This title appears as a personal name in the Omaha Ta-pa' gens. See 27th Ann. Kept. Bur. Amer.
Ethn.. p. 182.
LA FLESCHE] TRIBAL RITES FREE TRANSLATION (JQ
The fire that is placed midway between the two doors represents the
sun, whose pathway symbolizes endless life, and thus passes through
the middle of the house that stands for the earth. The fireplace was
also consecrated and the fire taken therefrom by the people to start
their home fires was thought of as holy and as having power to give
life and health to those who WORTH
use it.' It was also declared O O O O O O O
that the two doors, which U U U U U U U
represent the continual flow P P P P P P P
of life, shall be closed to the U U U U U U U
man who approaches them O O O O O (]
when contemplating mur-
••- 0 C 0 0 C C C
The ceremonial position of C\ C\ (~\ (~\ (~^ C\
the chief's house in the vil- lj U U U U w
lage was also established at O O O Pi O O
this time. (See diagram, U U U U U U
fig- 3.) p p n n p p p
Some time after the crea- U U U U U U
tion of the office of chief for ^fsr TS/'-ZHU
each of the two great divi- HO«-C,A
sions, and the men chosen P P P P P P P
had been inducted into their W U U O ,^ '
office, the two chiefs went P P P P P P P
out separately to seek for U U U U U U U
some sign of approval from C U U U C C C
theSupernatural. Forseven
days and six nights the men U U lj U lj U lj
fasted and cried to Wa- C\ C*\ (~\ C~\ C\ C\ C\
ko"'-da. U U U U U U U
As the darkness of even- O O O O O O O
ing spread over the land, on LjwljOLjOvJ
the sixth day of his vigil, the P P P P P P O
Tsi'-zhu Wa-shta'-ge chief U U U U U U U
removed from his face the -SOUTH
sign Of vigil and sat down tO FlG- 3-Ceremonially arranged camps of the two great divi-
' if ' I turu'i i, sions of the tribe, the Tsi'-zhu and the Ho°'-ga. Adotin-
rest for the night. W Illle he dicates the houses of the chiefs. The Tsi'-zhu represent
Was yet awake and in deep the sky and the Ho-'-ga the earth.
thought he heard approaching footsteps, and as he looked up
he beheld a man standing before him, as though in the light of
day. The stranger spoke, saying: ''I have heard your cry. I am
a person who can heal all the pains and the bodily ailments of
your people. When the little ones make of me their bodies they
• Xu-tha'-wa-to»-i° of the Tsi-zhu \Va-no» gens said that "the fireplaces of the houses of the two chiefs
were called U-dse'-the Wa-shta'-ge," Cientle or Peaceful Fireplaces, in contradistinction to the seven fire
places of each of the Ho°'-ga, Wa-zha'-zhe, and the Tsi'-zhu divisions that were dedicated to warfare and
were associated with violence and death.
70 THE OS AGE TRIBE CBTH. ANN. 36
shall always live" to see old age. In the morning when the mists
have cleared away go to yonder river, follow its course until you
come to a bend, and there, in the middle of its bank, you will see me
standing in the midst of the winds."
When morning came the chief followed the course of the river, as
the stranger bade him, until he came to a sharp bend, where the
waters had washed away the earth, leaving a high bank. The chief
looked up and there, in the middle of the bank, he saw the stranger,
who was Mon-kon Ni-ka-shi-ga,7 the Man Medicine (Cucurbita per-
ennis). The chief removed from its place the strange man-shaped
root, being careful not to break any part of it. As this was the
seventh and the last day of his fast, the chief then started toward
his home, following the course of the river. He had not gone far
when he came to another bend of the stream where there was a high
bank. In the middle of it he beheld another root which he examined
and found to be of the female sex. The chief carried home these two
roots, which afterwards were used to cure bodily ailments.
For ceremonial purposes a portable shrine was made for these two
roots and wi'-gi-es relating to their revelation, but as they did not
belong to the gens of the narrator, Wa-xthi'-zhi, he declined to give
further details of the ceremonies.
Old Shon'-ge-mon-in said that Ni'-ka-wa-zhin-ton-ga's wife had the
shrine, but she had given it to Ni'-ka-u-kon-dsi, and it is supposed
that when he died the shrine was buried with him.
The story of the vigil of the Wa'-tse-tsi chief is given in three
wi'-gi-es. The first is entitled Non'-zhin-zhon Wi-gi-e, The Wi'-gi-e
of the Vigil; the second, Hon'-ga Wa-gthin Ts'a-ge, The Aged
Eagle; the third, Mon'-ce Wi'-gi-e, The Wi'-gi-e of the Metal. These
wi'-gi-es form a part of the ritual relating to the tattooing ceremony
and will follow later, but a paraphrase of the story given by the nar
rator is here repeated because it supplies two omissions in the wi'-gi-es
presented :
On the evening of the sixth day of his vigil the Wa'-tse-tsi chief
removed from his face the sign of vigil and sat down to rest for the
night. While he was yet awake there appeared before him a very
aged man, who spoke to him, saying,1' I have heard your cry and have
come to give myself to your people. I am Old Age. When the little
ones make of me their bodies they shall always live to see old age.
When morning comes, go to yonder river, and in a bend where the
water, sheltered by a high bank, lies placid you will find me. Take
from my right wing seven feathers. Let your people make of them
their bodies and they shall always live to see old age." In the dawn
of the morning which was the seventh day of his vigil the chief arose
and again put upon his face the sign of vigil. He went to the river,
' The Omahas also use this root for medicine. See 27th Ann. Kept. Bur. Amer. Ethn., p. 585.
LA FLESCHK] TRIBAL RITES — FREE TRANSLATION 71
and in a bend where the water was sheltered from the winds by a high
bank he saw, on the water's edge, a white pelican so old that he could
not move. In this bird the chief recognized his visitor of the night
before. From the right wing of the bird the chief plucked seven
feathers and started for home. As he was approaching a brook he
met an eagle, who gave him a downy feather as a symbol of old age.
When he was nearing home he beheld lying on the ground a piece of
black metal, which he also took as a symbol of old ago.
Lines 121 to 127 of the Wi'-gi-e of the Vigil and lines 39 to 46
of that of The Aged Eagle refer to healing by scarification and cup
ping as revealed by the two birds to the chief and the material to be
used as instruments. The Wi'-gi-e of the Metal indicates the aban
donment of the use of the wing bones of the pelican and the eagle
and the adoption of metal upon its introduction by Europeans for
the making of the instruments required for scarifying.
From these stories it would seem that the two chiefs directed their
efforts toward the understanding of bodily ailments and the finding
of suitable remedies. The chiefs thus sought by combating disease
to maintain the numerical strength of the tribe. The people on their
part put faith and confidence in the healing powers of the chiefs,
which led to the adoption of " Wa-stse'-e-don," The Good Doctor, by
the two Wa-shta'-ge gentes for a gentile personal name.
On his return to the village the chief assembled the people of both
great divisions, to whom he told the story of his vigil. The people
were well pleased and formally consecrated the Pelican to be thence
forth their sacred symbol of old age, and it thus became wa-xo'-be.
The portable shrine which held the sacred symbols and the symbols
themselves are spoken of collectively as wa-xo'-be.
THE WA-XO'-BE TO"-OA, THE GREAT PORTABLE SHRINE
The portable shrine, called Wa-xo'-be Ton-ga, held not only the
sacred object, the symbol of the older rite, the skin of the cormorant,
but in it was placed the sacred object and symbols of the newer rite
which was born of the visions of the chief — namely, the skin of the
pelican, seven feathers of that bird, a downy feather of the eagle,
and a piece of black metal. This composite shrine, called the
Wa-xo'-be Ton-ga, when completed was consecrated in the same man
ner as was the portable shrine of the older rite, by the simultaneous
recital by each of the gentes of the tribe of the wi'-gi-e which related
to certain Me symbols called Wa-zho'-i-ga-the, a term which, freely
translated, means the object of which they made their bodies. At
each initiation and trail ;fer of a Wa-xo'-be Ton-ga the shrine was in
like manner reconsecrated. The wi'-gi-es used at such a ceremony will
be given in the order in which they are recited at the ritual of the
72 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
chief, which is also the order in which they are recited at the tattooing
ceremony.
For the purpose of initiation into the mysteries of these combined
rites a number of the Wa-xo'-be Ton-ga were made and consecrated.
These, in contrast with the other shrines, were circulated by transfer
among the members of the tribe without regard to the tribal divisions
or to the gentes to which the candidates may belong.
In the month of February, 1911, one of these wa-xo'-bes was
secured for the National Museum from the widow of Wa-9e'-ton-
zhin-ga. The outer case, like those of the hawk wa-xo'-bes, was made
of woven buffalo hair (pi. 4, a). The inner case, within which are
kept the pelican and the cormorant wa-xo'-be and other sacred
articles, was made of woven rush, with symbolic designs similar to
those on the rush cases of the hawk wa-xo'-bes (pi. 5).
The two wa-xo'-bes were folded one inside of the other, so as to
make one roll. The tattooing wa-xo'-be, which is the skin of a cor
morant (Phalacrocorax auritus) is split down the entire length of the
back. Around the base of the tail is wound a string of scalp locks,
10 or 12 in number, that hang down like a skirt. Within the body
of the skin are placed eight tattooing instruments, the points toward
the head and the tops toward the tail. The shafts of some of the
instruments are flat, others round, and about the length of a lead
pencil. To the lower ends of the shafts are fastened steel needles,
some in straight rows and others in bunches. To the tops of some of
the shafts are fastened small rattles made of pelican or eagle quills.
The needle parts of the shafts are covered with buffalo hair to protect
them against rust. The skin of the cormorant was folded over the
tattooing instruments, the neck of the bird doubled over the back
and tied down. The skin of a pelican, split down the back, is wrapped
around the cormorant and tied around the middle with a band of
woven fiber. The bill, head, and neck of the pelican are missing.
Within the woven rush case, placed without any particular order,
are seven weasel skins; one tobacco pouch made of a buffalo heart-
sack; bits of braided sweet-grass; half of the shell of a fresh-water
mussel for holding the coloring matter; four tubes, one of bamboo and
three of tin, worn by the operator on his fingers as guides for the in
struments when he is at work; two bunches of the wing-f eathers of
small birds used in applying the coloring matter; an old burden-
strap; four wing-bones of a pelican or an eagle, tied together with a
twisted cord of wood or nettle fiber; two rabbits' feet, used for
brushing the skin of the parts that have been gone over with the
instruments when the subject becomes nervous by the irritation of
the wounds; and a large brass ring worn by the operator around his
neck as a part of his symbolic paraphernalia.
BUREAU OF AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY
THIRTY-SIXTH ANNUAL REPORT PLATE 5
PORTABLE SHRINE. INNER CASE
This is the case which forms the shrine for the sacred articles. The white part running the pocket with
dark and red lines running across its width represents the days and nights. The part covered with
nights. The part covered with
its clouds, with itsstarry figures,
.
geometrical designs and which forms the Map symbolizes the sky with its clouds, with itsstarry figures,
such as the (Ireat liea.r, Orion, Pleiades, the (ialaxy, etc. One end of the pocket has six fastenings and
the other seven, each representing one of the two great tribal divisions. The case is made of a slender
,
cylindrical rush ( Eleocharis inifrxlincta).
:
>-
3
•
y
Q
IU a ~-
CO £ 2.'-
co a.S
D ar
iu -f.i
iS
I Jx
CO "**
Ul '-
K. -52
u. i-
C3 =.i
LA FLBSCHE] TRIBAL RITES FREE TRANSLATION 73
These articles will be described in detail and their pictures given,
together with that of the cormorant skin, in the tattooing rite, which
will be included in a later volume.
The Wa-xo'-be Ton-gas that have been seen and remembered
within recent years are as follows:
The one owned by Wa-ce'-ton-zhin-ga was secured for the United
States National Museum in 1911.
That owned by Wa-thu'-ts'a-ga-zhi, Wa-xthi'-zhi's father, was
buried with him when he died in 1910.
The one that was owned by Wa-zhin-pi-zhi, Btho'-ga-hi-ge's father,
is now in the Museum of the American Indian, Heye Foundation,
New York City (No. 4/776).
The one owned by Ton-won-i'-hi-zhiD-ga was sold by him several
years ago to a traveler and its whereabouts is unknown.
The one that was owned by Ton-won-i'-hi-ton-ga is now in the
private collection of Mr. Charles Evanhoe, of Ralston, Oklahoma.
The general description of the Wa-zhin'-pi-zhi wa-xo'-be in the
Museum of the American Indian, obtained through the courtesy of
Dr. George H. Pepper, is about the same as the Wa-ce'-ton-zhin-ga
wa-xo-be in the National Museum.
INITIATION INTO THE RITE OF THE CHIEFS
The transfers of the Wa-xo'-be Ton-gas and the initiation of candi
dates into the mysteries of this composite rite do not occur as fre
quently as the transfers of the Hawk wa-xo'-bes and the accom
panying initiations into the mysteries of the rites pertaining to war.
The man who has a Wa-xo'-be Ton-ga is apt to keep it until he is
incapacitated for tattooing work by old age or loss of eyesight.
For this reason there is less opportunity through frequent use for a
man to carry accurately all the details of this rite and the sequence
of the ceremonial acts than there is those of the war rites.
When a man has been ceremonially presented with a Wa-xo'-be
Ton-ga he becomes an involuntary candidate for initiation into the
mysteries of the rite of which the Wa-xo'-be Ton-ga is the central
figure. He will ask his wife and his relatives for permission to accept
the offer, and these persons readily grant the request, because it is
an honor in which they also have a share.
The man and his relatives having agreed to accept the Wa-xo'-be
Ton-ga, the candidate, with the help of his relatives, proceeds to
collect the various symbols, such as a buffalo robe, an elk skin, a
turtle shell, a mussel shell, an eagle skin, a deer skin, a swan skin,
all of which are necessary for use in the ceremonies. They also store
awiiv food supplies, such as buffalo, meat, sweet corn, dried squash,
roots of the lotus, and, in recent years, beef, flour, coffee, and sugar
74 THE OSAGE TRIBE IETH. ANN. 36
for entertaining the members of the Non'-hon-zhin-ga order during
the initiatory ceremonies. Fees are also collected for the members
who are to take part in the performance of the ceremonies. In
early days these fees consisted of buffalo robes, articles of clothing,
weapons, and, in recent times, of horses, woolen blankets, broadcloth,
silks, calico, and articles of clothing made of manufactured goods.
When all of these preparations have been made the candidate sends
his Sho'-ka,8 who carries a pipe as his badge of office, to give notice
to his Xo'-ka 9 (Initiator), whom the candidate has selected, that he
will be ready to take his initiation on a certain day. The Sho'-ka
then gives notice to the Non'-hon-zhin-ga of all the gentes of the
tribe to attend the ceremonies and to take part in their performance.
THE KI'-NON, OR CEREMONIAL PAINTING OF THE XO'-KA
At dawn of the day appointed for the initiation the candidate goes
with his Sho'-ka to the house of the Xo'-ka. The Sho'-ka carries
with him the skin of a black bear, the skin of a swan, a shell gorget,
and a woven belt, all of which articles are to be worn by the Xo'-ka
as his sacerdotal apparel. The Sho'-ka also takes with him a wooden
bowl, in which is put pulverized charcoal mixed with water, the
ceremonial paint to be used by the Xo'-ka. When the candidate
and his Sho'-ka have entered and are assigned to their places in the
lodge, the Xo'-ka strips himself of his own clothing, preparatory to
putting on his official apparel. When about to paint himself with
the charcoal the Xo'-ka recites the following wi'-gi-e, called Xo'-ka
Wi'-gi-e, which is in three parts. The first relates to the Black Bear
and to certain symbols given by that animal to the people.
THE XO'-KA WI'-GI-E
(Osage version, p. 305; literal translation, p. 463)
PART I
1. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
2. The Hon'-ga, a people who possess seven fireplaces,
3. Spake to one another, saying: O, younger brothers,
4. We have nothing that is fit to use as a symbol.
5. Then to the male Puma, who stood by, they turned
6. And spake, saying: O, younger brother,
7. We have nothing that is fit to use as a symbol.
8. Then, in quick response, the Puma went forth,
9. Verily, to the brow of a hill,
s Sho'-lfais the title of a gentile ceremonial messenger. Inthelist of gentes given on page 52 of the intro
duction certain subgentes are given the title Sho'-fca. This means that from a subgens bearing this title
must be chosen a man or a woman to act as ceremonial messenger in the initiatory ceremonies of a rite.
9 Xo'-fca is the title of a man who acts as initiator in the initiatory ceremonies of a tribal rite. Such a
man must be one who has taken the degree he confers. He may choose his own candidate or he may be
chosen by a man offering himself as a candidate for initiation into the degree.
I.A PLESCIIK] TRIBAL RITES — FREE TRANSLATION 75
10. Where stood the Black Boar that is without blemish,
11. And, standing in his presence, spake to him,
12. Saying: O, grandfather,
13. We have nothing that is fit to use as a symbol.
14. Then quickly the Bear spake, saying: O, little one,
15. You say you have nothing that is fit for use as a symbol.
16. I am one who is fitted for the little ones to use as a symbol.
17. Verily, I am a person who is never absent from any part of life.
18. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
19. The Bear came to a bunch of grass,
20. Which he plucked and threw to the ground, where it lay in a
twisted shape,
21. And spake, saying: The grasses also
22. The little ones shall use as a symbol as they travel the path of life-
23. With quickened footsteps, the Bear went forth
24. To a bunch of stunted oaks,
25. Which he also tore up
26. And threw to the ground, where it lay in a twisted shape,
27. Then spake, saying: The stunted oaks also
28. The little ones shall use as a symbol as they travel the path of life.
29. Again, with quickened steps, the Bear went forth
30. To a brook, along the banks of which grew groves of trees,
31. To a bush of red-bud trees which stood in their midst,
32. And spake, saying: The red-bud trees also
33. The little ones shall always use as a symbol.
34. Out of their branches they shall make their charcoal.
35. When they use the branches of this tree to make their charcoal,
36. They shall enable themselves to live to see old age as they travel
the path of life.
37. Again the Bear went forth, with quickened footsteps,
38. To a bush of arrowshaft trees (Cornus circinata L'Hor),
39. Where he sat down to rest,
40. Then spake, saying: These trees also
41. The little ones shall use as symbols as they travel the path of life.
42. Again the Bear went forth, with quickened steps,
43. To a bunch of grapevine roots,
44. Which he tore up and threw to the ground, where it lay in a
twisted shape,
45. Then spake, saying: The roots of the grapevine also
46. They shall use as a symbol as they travel the path of life.
47. When the little ones put to use the grapevine roots,
48. They shall be as cords with which to tie their captives.
49. Symbolic cords they shall make of the grapevine roots.
76 THE OSAGE TRIBE [BTH. ANN. 36
50. The Bear went forth again, with quickened steps,
51. To the summit of a hill,
52. To a stony point,
53. From which he selected four stones,
54. Gathered them together, and placed them in a pile
55. As he said: Stones such as these
56. They shall use as symbols as they travel the path of life.
57. The little ones shall use them to purify their bodies, as with the
heat of fire.
58. They shall thus make use of these stones as they travel the path
of life.
59. The little ones shall also use them as weights to support the frame
of their house,
60. Then the frame of their house shall never loosen but stand firmly
as they travel the path of life.
61. Their house is the house of Wa-kon'-da.
62. The frame of my house
63. Is the frame of the house of Wa-kon'-da.
64. When the little ones make of it their bodies as they travel the
path of life
65. They shall become the owners of a house of Wa-kon'-da.
66. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
67. The Bear made a line of footprints.
68. A line of seven footprints he placed upon the earth,
69. Leading from the right side of the door of his house.
70. A line of seven footprints he made
71. And spake, saying: These footprints also
72. I have made to be symbols.
73. Symbols of seven o-don/ (military honors) to be won by the
warrior.
74. I have made them all to be symbols of the o-don/.
75. The Bear made another line of six footprints
76. Leading from the left side of the door of his house.
77. A line of six footprints he made upon the earth
78. And spake, saying: These footprints also
79. I have made to be symbols,
80. Symbols of the six o-don' to be won by the warriors.
81. Symbols I have made them to be.
82. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
83. He said: Of these footprints the little ones shall make their
bodies, and for that purpose the footprints shall stand.
LA FLESCHE] TRIBAL, BITES — FREE TRANSLATION 77
84. The people spake to one another, saying: There is also the great
white swan,
85. Of which the little ones, O, younger brothers, shall make their
bodies.
86. Then spake the swan, saying: When the little ones make of me
their bodies,
87. Let them know that of all living creatures
88. None are my equal in strength of wings.
89. When I make my flight, even before half of the day has passed,
90. I am on the farther side of the great lake,
91. Swinging up and down upon the waves of its waters.
92. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
93. Their arms shall become strong as are my wings as they travel
the path of life.
94. To the four great divisions of the days (stages of life)
95. They shall succeed in bringing themselves as they travel the path
of life.
96. They shall enable themselves to live to see old age.
97. When the little ones make of me the means of reaching old age,
98. Then they shall live to see old age as they travel the path of life.
After a short pause the Xo'-ka recites the next wi'-gi-e, which
relates to the actions of the female Black Bear when about to hyber-
nate and to her awakening after her long sleep when she appeals to
the god of day for long life for her little ones born during the long
period of rest. This wi'-gi-e is also entitled Ki'-non Wi'-gi-e, The
Painting Wi'-gi-e, and it is introductory to the next part, which is
recited when the Xo'-ka paints himself preparatory to making his
ceremonial approach to the house of meeting.
PART II
(Osage version, p. 307; literal translation, p. 466)
1. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
2. The Black Bear that is without a blemish,
3. When the moon of the mating of the deer was still young
(October),
4. Was seized with a sudden desire to rest her body.
5. Being perplexed by this sudden desire,
6. She ran to each of the four winds,
7. Returning again and again to the starting point.
8. After a time she paused and stood,
9. Then quickly went forth, with hurried footsteps,
10. And came to a patch of bunch grass.
11. Verily, at that time and place,
78 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
12. She gathered together the bunches of grass and laid them upon
the ground.
13. But she rested not her body thereon.
14. She then quickly went forth, with hurried footsteps,
15. And came to a patch of stunted oaks.
16. She gathered together the stunted oaks and laid them upon the
ground,
17. But she rested not her body thereon.
18. Again she went forth, with hurried footsteps,
19. And came to a rivulet on the banks of which were groves of trees,
20. Among which grew bushes of red-bud trees.
21. These she gathered together and placed upon the ground,
22. But she rested not her body thereon.
23. Again she went forth, with hurried footsteps,
24. And came to a rivulet on the banks of which were groves of trees,
25. Among which grew vines of grapes.
26. The roots of the vines she gathered together and placed upon the
ground,
27. But she rested not her body thereon.
28. Again she went forth, with hurried footsteps,
29. And came to the summit of a cliff,
30. Where she found a number of stones.
31. She gathered them together,
32. But she rested not her body thereon.
33. Verily, at that time and place,
34. She quickly went forth, with hurried footsteps,
35. And came to the summit of another cliff,
36. Where were a number of stones.
37. These she arranged in the shape of a house.
38. She entered, placing over her head a slab,
39. And between these walls she sat to rest her body.
40. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
41. Close to the period of seven moons,
42. The Black Bear sat to rest her body.
43. Verily, at that time and place,
44. She thought as she sat: Even now I have reached the end of a
great division of the days.
45. Verily, in every direction she heard the voices of the birds,
46. Heard them calling to one another as she sat.
LA FLESCHE] TRIBAL RITES FREE TRANSLATION 79
47. Again she thought: Even now I have reached the end of a great
division of the days.
48. Swarms of little insects
49. She saw swiftly flying hither and thither in the air as she sat.
50. Again she thought: Even now I have reached the end of a great
division of the days.
51. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
52. She thought: Behold, I have come to Wa-kon'-da.
53. These little ones
54. Must dwell in the great divisions of the days.
55. Then she gathered up her little ones in her arms
56. And to the great god of day, newly risen,
57. She held them up
58. As she said: O, Venerable Father! These little ones have now
become persons.
59. Give them strength to bring themselves to see old age, O, Ven
erable Father ! as they travel the path of life.
After a slight pause the Xo'-ka recites the third part of the Ki'-no°
wi'-gi-e, which prescribes the manner in which certain symbols are
to be put upon his face and body. All these acts are called Ki'-non,
a name given to the entire wi'-gi-e.
PART III
(ALSO CALLED KI'-NON WI'-GI-E)
(Osage version, p. 309; literal translation, p. 468)
1. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
2. They (the people of the gentes) said: The little ones have nothing
with which to paint their faces.
3. And he (the Priest representing the Black Bear) replied: When
the little ones paint their faces,
4. They shall use for their paint the god that appears first in the day,
5. The god that strikes the sky with a red glow.
6. It is the color of that god the little ones shall put upon their faces.
7. When the little ones put upon their faces this color,
8. They shall always live to see old ago as they travel the path of life.
9. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
10. The Black Bear that is without a blemish (pi. 10, a).
11. By that animal also
12. The little ones shall cause themselves to be identified by
Wa-ko"'-da.
13. It was he who said: My body which is black in color
80 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
14. I have made to be as my charcoal.
15. When the little ones also make it to be as their charcoal,
16. They shall always be identified by Wa-kon'-da, as they travel the
path of life.
17. Behold the white spot on my throat.
18. Behold the god of day who sitteth in the heavens.
19. Close to this god (as its symbol) we shall place this spot.
20. When we place this spot close to the god of day_as its symbol,
21. The little ones shall always live to see old age as they travel the
path of life.
22. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
23. They spake to the great white swan,
24. Saying: O, grandfather,
25. The little ones have nothing of which to make their bodies.
26. Verily, at that time and place,
27. The swan spake, saying: You say the little ones have nothing of
which to make their bodies.
28. The little ones shall make of me their bodies.
29. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
30. They shall always live to see old age.
31. Behold my feet that are dark in color.
32. I have made them to be as my charcoal.
33. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
34. When they make my feet to be as their charcoal,
35. They shall always be identified by Wa-kon'-da as they travel the
path of life.
36. Behold the tip of my beak, which is dark in color.
37. I have made it to be as my charcoal.
38. When the little ones make the tip of my beak to be as their
charcoal,
39. They shall cause themselves to be identified by Wa-kon'-da as
they travel the path of life.
40. Behold also my wings.
41. The feathers of my wings the little ones shall use as plumes.
42. When they use the feathers of my wings as plumes,
43. The days of cloudless skies
44. Shall always be at their command as they travel the path of life.
45. The four great divisions of the days
46. They shall always be able to reach as they travel the path of life.
At the close of the recitation the Xo'-ka puts upon himself the
sacred symbols, following the order in which they were mentioned
LA FLESCHB] TRIBAL RITES FREE TRANSLATION 81
throughout the wi'-gi-e: First, he colors his face with red paint, the
symbol of the dawn that promises a peaceful day. Second, he black
ens his face with charcoal, that color being the emblem of an unquench
able fire and a never-ending life. It represents the bear and also the
feet and beak of the swan, as both these animals gave the symbol.
Third, he suspends at his throat a gorget made of the shell of the
fresh-water mussel as a symbol of the god of day, who possesses never-
ending life. The gorget also represents the white spot on the chest
of the black bear who gave the symbol. Fourth, he plucks from the
swan skin some of the down and scatters it upon his head as a symbol
of his priestly office. He strips the barbs from some of the wing-
feathers of the swan, ties the lower ends together, and fastens the
tuft to the base of the braided lock of hair which hangs from the
crown of his head. This tuft of feathers symbolizes the days of cloud
less skies, the days of perpetual peace.
TSI TA-PE, PROCESSIONAL APPROACH TO THE HOUSE OF MYSTERY
When about to rise, the Xo'-ka says to the candidate and to the
Sho'-ka:
Ha! wi-con-ga e',
A-non/-zhi° ta a-ton he a', wi-con-ga e'!
Wa-ca'-be u-^a'-ka thin-ge kshe,
E'-ki-go" xtsi a-non/-zhin ta a-to" he a, wi-con-ga e".
Zhin-ga' zho-i-ga tha bi don,
U'-no" a bi i'-the kt-the moI1-thi1" ta ba don.
A-non/-zhin ta a-ton he a,', wi-co"-ga e'!
FREE TRANSLATION
0, my younger brothers,
I am about to rise, my younger brothers !
As the Black Bear that has no blemish,
Verily, as his likeness I shall rise, O, younger brothers!
So that when the little ones make of him their bodies,
They shall always live to see old age as they travel the path of life.
I am about to rise, my younger brothers !
The Xo'-ka rises and, followed by the candidate and the Sho'-ka,
goes out of the door of his house, where he pauses for a moment;
then starting from the right side of the door he takes seven steps
forward. He then returns to the house and from the left side of the
door he takes six steps forward. These 13 steps represent the seven
and six o-don/ (military honors) to be won by the warriors.
When the 13 steps have been taken, the Xo'-ka sings the following
song, while the candidate and the Sho'-ka take their places at his
right side.
2786—21 6
82
THE OSAGE TRIBE
[ETH. ANN. 36
SONG
Transcribed by Alice C. Fletcher.
Tsi win e-dsi tse don dsi the he non . a, Tsi
p^^-S^jVj-xJ=^.^^^^T^Rr^&^;
• r f *• f +3- * •
win e-dsi tse don dsi the he non a,Tsi win e-dsi tse don dsi the he non ha, Dsi
the he no" ha a, Qa be to™ ga e-dsi a-ka do" dsi the he non a, Tsi
rrf-fcr
f <- r .
i r
win e-dsi a-ka do" dsi the he no" a, Tsi win e-dsi a-ka don dsi the he no".
1. Tsi win e-dsi tse do" dsi the he non a,
2. Tsi win e-dsi tse don dsi the he no" a,
3. Tsi win e-dsi tse do" dsi the he no" ha.
4. Dsi the he non ha a,
5. £a-be to"-ga e-dsi a-ka do" dsi the he no" a,
6. Tsi wi" e-dsi a-ka do" dsi the he no" a,
7. Tsi win e-dsi a-ka do" dsi the he non.
FREE TRANSLATION
To a house that stands yonder I go forth, etc. (lines 1-4, 6, 7).
To the house where dwell the great black ones (bears) I go forth (line 5).
At the close of the song the Xo'-ka says:
Wi-tsi'-go wa-ra'-be u-ca-ka thin-ge e do"
Wa-shko" no"-pe-wa-the e thi" a bi a, wi-con-ga.
Wa-zha'-zhe, Tsi-zhu e-tho°-ba e,
Non-be'-hi the mo"-thi" bi don shki,
U-no" a' bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta bi a, wi-con-ga e'.
FREE TRANSLATION
My grandfather is the Black Bear that is without a blemish,
A person of amazing power, O, younger brothers!
When the Wa-zha'-zhe and the Tsi'-zhu
Make use of his strong hands,
They shall have the means by which to reach old age.
At the close of this recitation the Xo'-ka touches the ground with
the palm of his right hand, and then the three men, walking side by
LA PLESCHE] TRIBAL KITES— FREE TRANSLATION 83
side, march toward the house prepared for the ceremony. At the
second stop, as they approach the ceremonial house, the song and
accompanying talk are repeated and the Xo'-ka touches the ground
with the palm of his left hand. The three then continue their march
toward the house, making two more ceremonial stops before they
arrive. The Non'-hon-zhin-ga of all the gentes of the Hon'-ga division
follow the three men in a procession to the house in the order of their
positions in the lodge. The three men enter, take their places at
the east end of the lodge, and the members of their gens sit on either
side of them. Then the other gentes of the Hon'-ga and of the
Tsi'-zhu Divisions enter and take their established places.
N.
w. U OX E.
c
B
7.
6
5
4 3
2
1
Tsi'zhu
Great Division
0
0
X
Ho°'-ga
Great Division
7
65432
1
A 7
6
543
2
1
Ho°-'ga Subdivision
Wa-zha'-zhe Subdivision
s.
This diagram, drawn under the direction of Wa-xthi'-zhi, shows
the established ceremonial positions of the two Great Tribal Divi
sions, the Tsi'-zhu and the Hon'-ga. The lodge in which the cere
monies of the tribal rites are performed is erected so that its length
extends from east to west. The place of the Tsi-zhu, which sym
bolically represents the sky, is on the north side of the lodge and is
indicated by figures and the letters A and B. The place of the
Hon'-ga, which symbolically represents the earth, is on the south
side of the lodge, and is indicated by two groups of figures, for this
Great Tribal Division is subdivided into two parts, one to represent
the waters of the earth and called Wa-zha'-zhe, the other to represent
the dry lands and called Hon'-ga. The space, indicated by the letter
A, between the Wa-zha'-zhe and Hon'-ga subdivisions, belongs to a
gens called Hon'-ga U-ta-non-dsi, the Isolated Hon'-ga. This gens
symbolizes the earth in its entirety, and the name expresses the
tribal belief that the earth is isolated from the other cosmic bodies.
A gens belonging to either one of the two great tribal divisions,
when initiating one of its members into the tribal rites, shifts its
regular gentile position to the eastern end of the lodge and occupies
all of the space marked X on the diagram. The two fireplaces, one
at each end of the lodge, are indicated by the letter O.
84 THE OSAGE TRIBE [BTH. ANN. 36
The Tsi'-zhu Great Division — Its Gentes
1. Tsi'-zhu Wa-non, Elder Tsi'-zhu,
2. Tse-do'-ga In-dse. Buffalo Bull Face.
3. Mi-k'in/ Wa-non, Elder Sun Carrier.
4. Hon/ I-ni-ka-shi-ga. Xight People.
5. Xu-tha' Zhu-dse, Red Eagle.
6. Tsi'-zhu We-ha-ge. The Last Tsi'-zhu.
7. Tse-thon'-ka, Buffalo Back.
B. Ni'-ka Wa-kon-da-gi, Men of Mystery.
C. Tho'xe, Buffalo Bull ^archaic).
Hon/-ga Great Division
Wa-zha'zhe Subdivision— Its Gentes
1. Wa-zha'-zhe Wa-non, Elder Wa-zha'-zhe.
2. Wa-ke'-stse-dse, Typha Latifolia.
3. Wa-zha'-zhe Cka, White Wa-zha'-zhe.
4. Pon'-ka Wa-shta'-ge, Peace Pon'-ka.
5. Ta' I-ni-ka-shi-ga, Deer People.
6. E-non/ Min-dse-ton, Bow People.
7. Ga-tsiu, Turtle with Serrated Tail.
A. Hon'-ga U-ta-no^-dsi, Isolated Ho"'-ga.
, Ho^'-ga Subdivision— Its Gentes
1. Hon'-ga A-hiu-to", Winged Hon'-ga.
2. Wa-ca'-be, Black Bear.
3. In-gthoI1/-ga, Puma.
4. Mo^-ce Ba-tse, Metal Bunched.
5. 0'-pxon, Elk.
6. Mon'-shkon, Crawfish.
7. I'-ba-tse Ta-dse, Wind People.
When the Non'-hon-zhin-ga has come to order the Xo'-ka recites
the Non'-zhin-zhon Wi-gi-e, The Wi'-gi-e of the Vigil. (Referred
to on pp. 70, 71.) This wi'-gi-e is in three parts, each one relating
to a mystical revelation during the vigil. The first part bears the
subtitle Mon-thin'-the-don-ts'a-ge, He-Who-Becomes-Aged-While-yet-
Traveling (a Pelican) (fig. 4); the second part is called Hon'-ga Wa-
gthin-ts'a-ge, The-Very- Aged-Eagle; the third part is the Mon'-ce
Wi'-gi-e, The Metal Wi'-gi-e. The third wi'-gi-e indicates a foreign
influence, the substitution of steel needles or awls as scarifiers in
place of the wing-bones of the pelican and eagle.
WI'-GI-E OF THE CHIEF'S VIGIL
PART I. VISION OF THE AGED PELICAN
(Osage version, p. 310; literal translation, p. 470)
1. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
2. The Wa-zha'-zhe, a people who possess seven fireplaces, were
gathered together.
3. One of the Wa-zha'-zhe (of the Pon'-ka gens)
4. Fell into deep meditation (upon his future course).
LA FLESCHE]
TRIBAL, RITES FREE TRANSLATION
85
5. Verily, at the end of the lodge he sat,
6. Where he fell prostrate and lay with head bowed low.
7. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said in this house,
8. He took that which was made sacred by the people (the soil of
the earth)
9. And put it upon his face (the forehead).
10. Then, in the early dawn,
11. He cried without ceasing as he moved
12. And walked away forthwith (toward the unfrequented parts of
the land).
13. Verily, he arrived at
the borders of the
village, where he
sat to rest,
14. While the god of day
(the sun) reached
mid-heaven.
15. As the darkness of
the evening came
upon him,
16. Verily, in the midst
of an open prairie,
where trees grow
not,
17. He inclined his head
toward his right
side,
18. Sat to rest upon the
earth, with his
body bent low,
19. And Wa-ko.n'-da
made him close his
eyes in sleep.
20. Night passed while
he yet sat.
21 . He woke and saw the
signs of the approach of the God of Day.
22. Then he took that which was made sacred by the people
23. And put it upon his face.
24. At break of day
25. He cried without ceasing as he wandered away.
26. Then, as he paused and stood to rest,
27. The God of Day reached mid-heaven.
28. The darkness of evening came upon the man,
29. Yet he ceased not his cry as he wandered.
30. In the midst of the open prairie, where trees grow not,
FIG. 4.— Do'-dse-t<)"-ga (Pelican). Lite symbol of the Chief of
the Ho°'-Ra great tribal division. In the ritual the pelican is
called " He-who-becomc.s-uged-while-yet-traveling," a title
which refers to its symbol of great age. The office of chief is
hereditary, and must be kept within the Wa'-tse-tsi (Star)
pens of the Wa-zha'-zhe subdivision of the great Ho°'-ga tribal
division.
86 THE OSAGE TRIBE IBTH. ANN. 36
31. As he sat upon the earth to rest he thought: This spot, also, may
be Wa-kon'-da's abode.
32. Then he inclined his head toward his right side,
33. Bent his body low,
34. And Wa-kon'-da made him close his eyes in sleep.
35. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
36. He awoke and thought: The light of the God of Day is spreading
over me.
37. Then he took that which was made sacred by the people,
38. Put it upon his face,
39. And in the early dawn
40. He cried without ceasing as he moved,
41. Even as he went forthwith to wander.
42. As he sat down upon the earth to rest the God of Day reached
mid-heaven.
43. The darkness of evening came upon the man,
44. Yet he ceased not his cry as he wandered.
45. In the midst of the open prairie, where trees grow not,
46. As he sat down upon the ground he thought: This spot may, also,
be Wa-kon'-da's abode.
47. Then he inclined his head toward his right side,
48. Bent his body low to rest,
49. And Wa-kon'-da made him close his eyes in sleep.
50. He awoke while yet he sat and thought:
51. Even now the light of the God of Day is spreading over me.
52. He raised his head and arose,
53. Took that which was made sacred by the people,
54. Put it upon his face.
55. Then, in the early dawn,
56. He cried without ceasing as he wandered.
57. He sat down upon the earth to rest.
58. The God of Day reached mid-heaven.
59. The darkness of evening came upon the man,
60. Verily, in the midst of the open prairie, where trees grow not,
61. And he thought: In this spot, also,
62. Wa-kon'-da must make his abode, and he sat upon the earth to
rest.
63. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
64. He inclined his head toward his right side,
65. Bent his body low for rest,
66. And Wa-kon'-da made him close his eyes in sleep.
67. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
68. He arose as day approached, took that which was made sacred
by the people,
69. Put it upon his face.
LA FLESCHK] TRIBAL RITES FREE TRANSLATION 87
70. Then, in the early dawn,
71. He cried without ceasing as he wandered.
72. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
73. While he yet cried and wandered,
74. The God of Day reached mid-heaven.
75. In the evening of the sixth day (of his vigil)
76. He approached the head of a stream.
77. Close to its banks he stood and thought:
78. Here, in this spot, also, Wa-kon'-da must make his abode.
79. Here, in this very spot, I shall rest and sleep.
80. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
81. Wa-kon'-da made him close his eyes in sleep.
82. He awoke, saw that night had passed, and he thought: The
light of the God of Day is spreading over me.
83. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
84. He raised his head and arose,
85. Took that which was made sacred by the people,
86. Put it upon his face.
87. Then, in the early dawn,
88. He cried without ceasing as he wandered.
89. He came to the head of a stream
90. And stood close to it.
91. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
92. There sat thePelican, He-who-becomes-aged-while-yet-traveling.
93. The man stood near to him and spake, saying:
94. O, grandfather,
95. The little ones have nothing of which to make their bodies!
96. In quick response, the Pelican said: O, little one,
97. You have said the little ones have nothing of which to make
their bodies.
98. The little ones shall make of me their bodies.
99. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
100. They shall always live to see old age.
101. Behold, the skin of my feet,
102. Which I have made to be the means to reach old age.
103. They (the little ones), also, shall always live to see old age by
its means.
104. Behold, the muscles of my jaws,
105. Which I have made to be the means by which to reach old age.
106. When the little ones, also, make of them the means by which to
reach old age,
107. They shall always live to see old age.
108. Behold, the inner muscles of my thighs,
109. Which I have made to be the means by which to reach old age.
110. When the little ones make of them the means by which to
reach old age,
88 THE OSAGE TRIBE [BTH. ANN. 36
111. They shall always live to see, in the muscles of their thighs, the
signs of old age.
112. Behold, the muscles of my breast, gathered in folds by age,
113. Which I have made to be the means by which to reach old age.
114. When the little ones, also, make of them the means by which
to reach old age,
115. They shall always live to see old age.
116. Behold, the flaccid muscles of my arms,
117. Which I have made to be the means to reach old age.
118. When the little ones, also, make of them the means to reach
old age,
119. They shall always live to see, in the muscles of their arms, the
signs of old age.
120. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
121. He said: Behold, my wings.
122. They, also,
123. Are not without meaning.
124. I offer them for use as awls.
125. When the little ones make use of them as awls,
126. They shall always have awls that are sharp, indeed.
127. When they make use of them as awls,
128. The little ones shall always live to see old age.
129. Even though they pass away to the realm of spirits,
130. They shall, by the use of the awls (as scarifiers), bring them
selves back to consciousness.
131. Behold, the stooping of my shoulders,
132. That I have made to be the means by which to reach old age.
133. When they, also, make it the means by which to reach old age,
134. They shall always live to see old age.
135. Behold, the muscles of my throat,
136. Which I have made to be the means to reach old age.
137. When they make of them the means by which to reach old age,
138. They shall always live to see, in the flaccid muscles of their
throats, the sign of old age.
139. Behold, the locks on the crown of my head that have grown
scant with age.
140. When they make of them the means by which to reach old age,
141. They shall always live to see, in their thinned locks, the sign of
old age.
PART ii. HOV'-GA-WA-GTHIN-TS'A-GE (AGED EAGLE)
(Osage version, p. 314; literal translation, p. 473)
1. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
2. He (the Chief), with the close of the words (of the pelican), arose
to his feet
LA FLESCHB] TRIBAL RITES — -FREE TRANSLATION 89
3. And thought as he stood: I will now go to my home,
4. It being the seventh day (of his vigil).
5. He approached a small stream as he moved homeward.
6. As he drew near to it
7. He came face to face with Hon'-ga-Wa-gthin-ts' a-ge (The Very
Aged Eagle).
8. He stood close to him and spake, saying:
9. O, my grandfather,
10. The little ones have nothing of which to make their bodies.
11. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
12. The Aged Eagle made reply: The little ones shall make of me
their bodies.
13. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
14. They shall always live to see old age.
15. Behold, the skin of my feet,
16. That I have made to be the means to reach old age.
17. When the little ones, also, make of it the means to reach old age,
18. They shall always live to see old age.
19. Behold, the wrinkles upon my ankles,
20. Which I have made to be the means to reach old age.
21. When they, also, make of them the means to reach old age,
22. They shall always live to see, upon their ankles, the signs of old
age.
23. Behold, the inner muscles of my thighs,
24. Which I have made to be the means to reach old age.
25. When they make of them the means to reach old age,
26. They shall always live to see, in the inner muscles of their thighs,
the signs of old age.
27. Behold, the muscles of my breast, gathered in folds,
28. Which I have made to be the means to reach old age.
29. When they, also, make of them the means to reach old age,
30. They shall always live to see, in the folds of the muscles of their
breasts, the signs of old age.
31. Behold, the flaccid muscles of my arms,
32. Which I have made to be the means to reach old age.
33. When they, also, make of them the means to reach old age,
34. They shall always live to see old age.
35. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
36. He said: Behold, my wings!
37. The little ones shall make awls (of the bones) of my wings.
38. When they take to making awls of my wings,
39. They shall have awls that will be sharp, indeed.
40. Even if any of the little ones pass into the realm of spirits,
41. They shall, by the use of the awls (as scarifiers), bring them
selves back to consciousness.
90 THE OSAGE TRIBE [BTH. ANN. 36
42. When they use the awls to bring the little ones back to life,
43. They shall always live to see old age.
44. Behold, the stooping of my shoulders,
45. That I have made to be the means to reach old age.
46. When they, also, make of it the means to reach old age,
47. They shall always live to see old age.
48. Behold, the muscles of my throat,
49. Which I have made to be the means to reach old age.
50. When the little ones make of them the means to reach old age,
51. They shall always live to see, in the flaccid muscles of their
throat's, the signs of old age.
52. Behold, the locks on the crown of my head that are thinned with
age.
53. These locks, also,
54. I have made to be the means to reach old age.
55. When they, also, make of them the means to reach old age,
56. They shall always live to see, in their scant locks, the sign of old
age.
PART in. MON'-<?E (METAL) WI'-GI-E
(Osage version, p. 315; literal translation, p. 475)
1. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
2. On the seventh day (of his vigil)
3. He (the Chief) came to the borders of the village
4. And he paused and stood.
5. There, upon the ground, lay a piece of metal.
6. Close to it he stood and spake, saying:
7. O, grandfather,
8. The little ones have nothing of which to make their bodies, O,
grandfather.
9. The metal spake, in quick response: O, little one,
10. You say the little ones have nothing of which to make their
bodies.
11. They shall make of me their bodies.
12. I am difficult to overcome by death.
13. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
14. They shall be as I, difficult to overcome by death.
15. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
16. He also said: The little ones shall make awls of me.
17. When the little ones take to making bone awls of me,
18. They shall have awls that will be sharp, indeed.
19. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
20. When they take to making awls of me,
21. And should any of them pass, even to the realm of spirits,
22. They shall, by the use of the awls (as scarifiers), bring them
selves back to consciousness.
LA FLESCUK] TRIBAL RITES — -FREE TRANSLATION 91
23. When, by this means, they bring themselves back to life,
24. They shall always live to see old age.
25. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
26. They shall always be free from all causes of death.
27. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
28. They shall know that there is no god whose skin is as hard as
mine.
29. I am the only god whose skin is hard.
30. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
31. Their skins shall become as hard as mine.
32. The four great divisions of the days (stages of life)
33. They shall always successfully reach.
34. The day that is free from anger and violence,
35. I, as a person, can bring to your presence.
36. The little ones shall, as a people, dwell in the days that have no
anger as they travel the path of life.
WA-THE'-THE, OR CEREMONY OF SENDING
At the close of the recitation of the " Wi'-gi-e of the Vigil" the
Xo'-ka takes up the ceremonial act next in order, called Wa-the'-the
(The Sending) — i. e., the sending to the various gentes of the two
great tribal divisions the life symbols belonging to each. The candi
date, in his preparations for initiation, is required to collect such of
the life symbols of the various gentes as are of a tangible character.
At the beginning of the Wa-the'-the ceremony these symbolic
articles are brought by the Sho'-ka and placed in a pile before the
Xo'-ka. While these symbolic articles are not actually sent to
each gens, yet they must be present. The symbols that are of an
intangible nature and therefore not collectible, such as the earth,
sun, moon, stars, sky, night, and day, are borne in mind by the
Xo'-ka and are counted by him as being actually present. Before
the Wa-the'-the ceremony begins the heads of the gentes having
symbols that are collectible ask of the Sho'-ka if the symbolic articles
are actually present. When all the gentes are satisfied that such is
the case, the Xo'-ka begins the ceremony. He sends to each of the
gentes the fees collected and offered by the candidate for his initia
tion. Ceremonial etiquette requires the Xo'-ka to begin the "send
ing" with the gens sitting nearest to him but belonging to the divi
sion opposite to his own, then to the gens nearest to him belonging
to his own division, after which the distribution proceeds in sending
alternately to the gentes of the two great divisions. (See dia
gram, p. 83.) When all the fees have been thus distributed the mem
bers of each gens recite simultaneously the wi'-gi-e which tells of the
meaning of some of its own life symbols.
92 THE OSAGE TRIBE IBTH. ANN. 36
SIMULTANEOUS RECITAL OF THE WI'-GI-ES OF THE GENTES
This simultaneous recitation by all the gentes is not in unison.
The members of one gens pay no attention to the recitation of those
of another gens. Each person is busy with his own part of the cere
mony. The result is a confused sound of words, and the sight is
expressive of individual devotion to the task in hand.
THE WA-ZHA'-ZHE SUBDIVISION
THE WA-ZHA'-ZHE WA-NON GENS
(Osage version, p. 316 literal translation, p. 477
1 . Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
2. The Wa-zha'-zhe, a people who possess seven fireplaces,
3. Spake to the Wa-zha'-zhe Wa-non (gens),
FIG. 5.— Ke Ci°-dse Ga-fse (Turtle with Serrated Tail). A life symbol of the Wa-zha -zhe Wa-iio"
(Elder Wa-zha'-zhe) gens, the war gens of the Wa-zha'-zhe subdivision of the Ho->'-ga great tribal
division. The seven willow saplings used by the warriors in recounting their military honors are
made to symbolize an equal number of serrations on the turtle's tail.
4. Saying: O, grandfather,
5. The little ones have nothing fit for their use as symbols.
6. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
7. The Wa-zha'-zhe Wa-non replied, saying:
8. Behold the turtle that has a tail with seven serrations (snapping
turtle) (fig. 5).
9. That turtle
10. The little ones shall always use as a symbol.
1 1 . Behold the seven serrations on the tail of the turtle.
12. Those also
13. I have made to be symbols.
14. The o-don', spoken of as the seven o-don/ (military honors),
15. I have made them to symbolize.
16. Six of the serrations on the tail of the turtle
17. I have also
18. Made to symbolize
I.A FLESCMKl
TRIBAL RITES FREE TRANSLATION
93
19. The o-don/, spoken of as the six o-clon'.
20. The o-don/ of every description I have made them to symbolize.
21. Verily at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
22. He continued: Behold the figures on the back of the turtle.
23. I have not made them without a purpose.
24. The little ones shall use them as a means to
reach old age as they travel the path [of
life.
25. When they use these figures as a means to
reach old age,
26. They shall always live to see old age.
27. When the little ones make of me their
bodies,
28. Their skins shall become impenetrable.
29. Behold the figures on my breast (the tur
tle).
30. Those figures also
31 . I have made to be a symbol.
32. A symbol of the god of the upper regions (the
arch of the sky),
33. The gray line that lies across my breast,
34. A god of the upper regions (the galaxy),
35. I, as a person, have verily made to sym
bolize.
36. When the little ones make of me their
bodies,
37. They shall enable themselves to live to see
old age.
38. When the little ones of the HoD'-ga and those
of the Tsi'-zhu (divisions)
39. Make of me their bodies,
40. They shall. enable themselves to live to see
old ago.
41. The four great divisions of the davs (stages
of life)
42. They shall always successfully reach and enter, as they travel
the path of life.
THE WA-KE'-STSE-DRK GENS
The Wa-ke'-stse-dse gens is brought to this ceremony to take its
place, as a mute representative of an aquatic plant, its gentile symbol
namely, the Typha laf.ifolia, commonly called cat-tail (fig. 6). The
presence of this gens is necessary to complete the tableau representing
the water part of the earth, for the reason that the plants which draw
FIG. 6. — Wa-kc'-stse-dse
( Typha lijtifolia). Life
symbol of the Wa-ke'stse-
dse (Cat-tail) gens of the
Wa-zhu'-zhe subdivision
of the Ho"'-ga great divi
sion. (From a drawing
by F. C. Walpole.)
94 THE OSAGE TRTBE IKTH. ANN. 36
their nourishment from within the water are regarded as a part of
that element. Although the Non'-hon-zhin-ga of this gens remain
silent throughout the ceremony, a fee is sent to its head, and the
members share in the distribution of the supplies furnished by the
candidate. This silent representation by a gens of its gentile symbol
explains the statement that each gens is a we'-ga-xe (we, that with
which; ga-xe, to make) — i. e., that part which is used to make a
whole; in this instance the universe is the whole. This gens takes a
more active part in some of the other tribal rites.
THE WA-ZHA'-ZHE QKA GENS
(Osagc version, p. 317; literal translation, p. 479)
1 . Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
2. The Wa-zha'-zhe, a people who possess seven fireplaces,
3. Spake to the Wa-zha'-zhe ^ka (gens),
4. Saying: O, grandfather,
5. The little ones have nothing that is fit for their use as symbols.
6. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
7. The Wa-zha'-zhe ^/"ka replied, saying: You say the little ones
have nothing that is fit for their use as symbols.
8. I am one who is fit for use as a symbol.
9. Behold the tsiu'-ge (the mussel) that sitteth in the water (pi. 6)
10. Verily, I am the person who has made of the tsiu'-ge his body.
1 1 . When the little ones make of me their bodies,
12. They shall always live to see old age.
13. Behold the wrinkles upon my skin (shell),
14. Which I have made to be the means of reaching old age.
15. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
16. They shall always live to see the signs of old age upon their skins.
17. The seven bends of the river (river of life)
18. I always pass successfully,
19. And in my travels the gods themselves
20. Have not the power to see the trail I make.
21. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
22. No one, not even the gods, shall be able to see the trails they
make.
23. Behold the god of day that sitteth in the heavens.
24. Verily, I am a person who has made of that god his body.
25. Behold, the god of day that sitteth in the heavens.
26. The little ones also shall make of that god their bodies.
27. Then the four great divisions of the days (stages of life)
28. They shall always reach and enter, as they travel the path of life,
29. And they shall always live to see old age as they travel the path
of life.
LA PLESCHE] TRIBAL RITES FREE TRANSLATION 95
THE WA-'-TSE-TSI (STAR PEOPLE) GENS
(Osage version, p. 318; literal translation, p. 480)
1 . Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
2. The Wa-zha'-zhe, a people who possess seven fireplaces.
3. Spake to one of the Wa-zha'-zhe (gentes),
4. The Wa'-tse-tsi (They who came from the stars'),
5. Saying: O, grandfather,
6. We have nothing that is fit for use as a symbol.
7. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
8. He replied, saying: You say you have nothing that is fit for
use as a symbol.
9. I am a person who is fit for use as a symbol.
10. Behold, the female red cedar (pi. 7, a).
1 1 . Verily, I am a person who has made of that tree my body.
12. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
13. They shall always live to see old age.
14. Behold, the male red cedar.
15. The little ones shall always use the male red cedar as a symbol.
16. Behold the male red cedar.
17. When the little ones use that tree for a symbol,
18. They shall always live to see old age.
19. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
20. He said to them: Behold these waters,
21. That we shall make to be companions to the red cedar.
22. When the little ones make use of these waters
23. The means by which to reach old age,
24. They shall always live to see old age.
25. Behold the grass that never dies (the sedge).
26. When the little ones make of it the means to reach old age,
27. They shall always live to see old age.
28. I, myself, have made it to be the means to reach old age.
29. Behold the bend of my shoulders (refers to the drooping of the
sedge),
30. That I have made to be the means to reach old age.
31. Behold, the white blossoms on the top of my stalk,
32. Which I have made to be the means to reach old age.
33. The little ones shall reach old age
34. And see their scanty locks turn yellowish with age as have these
blossoms.
THE TV I-NI-KA-SHI-OA (DEER PEOPLE) GENS
(Osagc version, p. 319; literal translation, p. 481)
1. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
2. The Wa-zha'-zhe, a people who possess seven fireplaces,
3. Spake to a Wa-zha'-zhe (a gens of the Wn-zha'-zhe subdivision),
96 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 30
4. Called Ta-tha'-xin (the Lungs of the Deer).
5. Saying: O, grandfather,
6. We have nothing that is fit to use as a symbol.
7. The Ta-tha'-xin hastened to say: O, little ones,
8. You say you have nothing that is fit to use as a symbol.
9. I am a person who is fit for use as a symbol.
10. There is a little animal (the deer) (pi. 7, &),
11. Of which I have always made my body.
12. The little ones shall use that animal as a symbol.
13. When they use that little animal as a symbol,
14. They shall have a symbol that will satisfy their desires.
15. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
16. He said to them: Behold the color of my hoofs, that is black in
color.
17. I have made that color to be as my charcoal.
18. When the little ones also make that color as their charcoal,
19. They shall have charcoal that will easily sink into their skin.
20. Behold the tip of my nose, that is black in color.
21. I have made that color to be as my charcoal.
22. When the little ones make that color as their charcoal,
23. They shall have charcoal that will easily sink into their skin.
24. Behold the color of the tips of my ears, that are black.
25. I have made that color to be as my charcoal.
26. When the little ones make of that color their bodies,
27. They shall have charcoal that will easily sink into their skin.
28. All these shall stand as symbols for the little ones.
29. Behold the young male deer whose horns are still of a dark gray
hue.
30. That animal shall always be a symbol to the little ones.
31. They shall have power, even as I have, to evade all dangers.
32. When my enemies hurl at me their shafts that fly around me in
forked lines
33. As they pursue and surround me and my companions,
34. Yet with the power (of fleetness) I possess I can escape these
dangers.
35. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
36. They also shall have power to overcome the dangers that lie in
their life's pathway.
37. The four successive days (stages of life)
38. I successfully reach and cause myself to enter.
39. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
40. The four successive days (stages of life),
41. They also shall successfully reach and enter.
42. When they make of me the means to reach old age,
43. They shall always live to see old age.
_ f>i
DC §•.£ § i
UJ .?.?•= =
III!!
Ill
•His
H
Ul
z
-
:
-
BUREAU OF AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY THIRTY-SIXTH ANNUAL REPORT PLATE 8
«. TO-SHNQN'-GE fOTTER)
A life symbol of the E-no"' Mi"-dse-to" (Bow) gens of the
\Va-/lm'-zhe subdivision of the Ho"'-ga great tribal divi
sion. The otter is one of the- animals used to represent
Ihe water part of the earth, (Courtesy of Dr. E. W. Nelson.)
6. ZHA'-BE DO-GA (MALE BEAVER)
A life symbol of the E-no»' Min-dse-to" (Bow) gens. This
water animal gave to the people thirteen willow saplings
for the use of the warriors in counting their o-do"' (military
honors) al the initiatory war ceremonies. (Courtesy of
Dr. E. W. Nelson.)
c. TSE'-DO-GA (BUFFALO BULL)
The buflalo bull is the life symbol of the Tho'-xe (archaic
name for the bull) gens of the Tsi'-zhti great division. This
animal gave to the people medicines, com, and sauashes.
The Buflalo and the Corn songs belong to this gens." (Cour
tesy of Dr. E. W. Nelson.)
LA PLESCHi] TRIBAL, RITES FREE TRANSLATION 97
44. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
45. He said: Why should they make of this little animal a symbol?
46. It is for the little ones to use for making the animals to appear.
47. When they use it for making the animals appear,
48. The animals shall not fail to appear.
49. Under the branches of the white oak,
50. Where the earth is trodden soft by many hoofs,
51. I have made a playground for the little animals (the deer).
52. When the little ones use. this playground to make the animals
appear,
53. The animals shall not fail to appear.
54. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
55. He continued: Under the branches of the red oak,
56. Where the earth is trodden soft by many hoofs,
57. I have made a playground for the little animals.
58. When the little ones use this playground to make the animals
appear,
59. There, under the branches of the red oak, the animals shall not
fail to appear.
60. Under the branches of the long-acorn tree,
61. Where the earth is trodden soft by many hoofs,
62. I have made a playground for the little animals.
63. When the little ones use this playground to make the animals
appear,
64. There, under the branches of the long-acorn tree, the animals
shall not fail to appear.
65. Under the branches of the gray-acorn tree,
66. Where the earth is trodden soft by many hoofs,
67. I have made a playground for the little animals.
68. When the little ones use the playground to make the animals
appear,
69. There, under the branches of the gray-acorn tree, the animals
shall not fail to appear.
70. Under the branches of the twisted oak,
71. Where the earth is trodden soft by many hoofs,
72. I have made a playground for the little animals.
73. There, under the branches of the twisted oak the animals shall
not fail to appear.
74. Under the branches of the dark-acorn tree,
75. Where the earth is trodden soft by many hoofs,
76. I have made a playground for the little animals.
77. When the dark-acorn tree is
78. Approached by the little ones when hunting,
79. There the animals shall not fail to appear.
2786—21 7
98 THE OS AGE TRIBE [BTH. ANN. 36
80. Under the branches of the low stunted oaks,
81. Where the earth is trodden soft by many hoofs,
82. I have made a playground for the little animals.
83. When the low stunted oaks
84. Are approached by the little ones,
85. There the animals shall not fail to appear.
86. These (the playgrounds)
87. I have not made without a purpose.
88. I have made them to be ho'-e-ga (places in which the little
animals are ensnared).
89. When the little ones also make ho'-e-ga of the playgrounds,
90. The animals shall not fail to appear.
91. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
92. He said to them: Behold, this bunch of grass,
93. Which is also not without a purpose.
94. When the little ones approach the grasses of the earth,
95. The animals shall not fail to appear.
96. Even before the beginning of the day
97. The animals shall not fail to appear,
98. And in the evening of the day
99. The animals shall not fail to appear.
100. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
101. Those of the Hon'-ga,
102. And those of the Tsi'-zhu,
103. The animals shall not fail to appear.
THE E-NON/ MIN-DSE-TON (OWNERS OF THE Bow) GENS
(Osage version, p. 322; literal translation, p. 484)
1. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
2. The Wa-zha'-zhe, a people who possess seven fireplaces,
3. Spake to the E-non' Min-dse Ton (the Bow gens of the Wa-zha'-zhe
subdivision) (fig. 7),
4. Saying: O, Wa-zha'-zhe,
5. We have nothing that is fit for use as a symbol.
6. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
7. The E-non'-Min-dse Ton replied: You say you have nothing that
is fit for use as a symbol.
8. I am a person who is fitted for use as a symbol.
9. Verily, in the midst of the rushing waters (in the midst of the
shallow rapids)
10. Abides my being.
11. Verily, I am a person who has made of the waters his body.
12. Behold the right side of the river.
13. Of it I have made the right side of rny body.
LA FLBSCHB] TRIBAL, RITES FREE TRANSLATION 99
14. When the little ones make of me their bodies
15. And use the right side of the river
16. To make their bodies,
17. The right side of their bodies shall be free from all causes of death.
18. Behold the left side of the river.
19. Of it I have made the left side of my body.
20. When the little ones also make of that the left side of their bodies,
21. That side of their bodies shall always be free from all causes of
death.
22. Behold the channel of the river.
23. Of it I have made the hollow of my body.
24. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
25. The hollow of their bodies shall always be free from all causes of
death.
FIO. 7.— Ml«'-dse (Bow). Life symbol of the E-no»' Mi°-dse To" (Sole Owners of the Bow) gens of the
Wa-zha'-zhe subdivision of the Ho°'-ga great division. This gens has the office of making a bow and
two arrows for use at the initiatory ceremony. The three symbolize night and day, and also long life.
The back of the bow is painted black and the front red; one arrow is painted red and the other black.
26. There is also an animal of which I have made my body.
27. It is the redfish
28. Of which I have made my body,
29. That I might be free from all causes of death.
30. When the little ones make of the redfish their bodies,
31. They shall always live to see old age.
32. Behold the blackfish.
33. Of it I have made my body.
34. When the little ones make of it their bodies,
35. They shall always live to see old age.
36. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
37. He said to the people: Behold the otter (pi. 8, a).
38. Of it also I have made my body.
39. When the little ones make of the otter their bodies,
40. They shall always live to see old age.
41. When the people of the Tsi'-zhu
42. And of the Hon'-ga
43. Make of the otter their bodies,
44. They shall always be free from all causes of death.
100 THE OSAGE TRIBE IBTH. ANN. 30
45. Behold the male beaver (pi. 8, b).
46. Of it also I, as a person, have, verily, made my body.
47. When the little ones make of the beaver their bodies,
48. They shall always live to see old age.
49. Seven willow saplings
50. The beaver brought to the right side of his house,
51. Dragging them with his teeth to his house, laying them down in
a pile.
52. Then he spake, saying: These saplings
53. I have made to represent certain things,
54. The things spoken of as o-don' (military honors).
55. Verily, I, as a person, have made them to represent the o-don'.
56. Against the current of the river the beaver went forth,
57. Rippling the surface of the water as he made his way,
58. Saying as he did so: Behold the parting of the waters in forked
lines as I push forth.
59. The ripples of the waters I have made the means to reach old age.
60. When the little ones make of me their bodies
61. The gods shall always make way for them as do these waters
for me.
62. He struck the surface of the water with his tail, making a cracking
noise, as he pushed forth,
63. And he said: These strokes
64. I make not without a purpose.
65. Toward the setting of the sun are our enemies.
66. In striking the waters I strike our enemies.
67. The beaver went again against the current and came to the sec
ond bend of the river,
68. Where stood a sapling of the never-dying willow.
69. He cut down the sapling and dragged it to his house,
70. Then he spake, saying: When the little ones use this for counting,
71. They shall always count their o-don' with accuracy.
72. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
73. The beaver went again against the current and came to a third
bend of the river,
74. Where stood a sapling of the never-dying willow.
75. He cut down the sapling and dragged it to his house,
76. Then he spake, saying: When the little ones use this for counting,
77. They shall always count their o-don/ with accuracy.
78. The beaver went again against the current and came to the
fourth bend of the river,
79. Where stood a sapling of the never-dying willow.
LA ri-ESCHB] TRIBAL, RITES FREE TRANSLATION 101
80. He cut down the sapling and dragged it to his house,
81. Then he spake, saying: When the little ones use this for counting,
82. They shall always count their o-don/ with accuracy.
83. The beaver went again against the current and came to the fifth
bend of the river,
84. Where stood a sapling of the never-dying willow.
85. He cut down the sapling and dragged it to his house,
86. Then he spake, saying: When the little ones use this for counting,
87. They shall always count their o-don/ with accuracy.
88. The beaver went again against the current and came to the sixth
bend of the river,
89. Where stood a sapling of the never-dying willow.
90. He cut down the sapling and dragged it to his house,
91. Then he spake, saying: When the little ones use this for counting,
92. They shall always count their o-don/ with accuracy.
93. The beaver went again against the current and came to the
seventh bend of the river,
94. Where stood a sapling of the never-dying willow.
95. He cut down the sapling and dragged it to his house,
96. Then he spake, saying: This also the little ones shall use.
97. When the little ones use this for counting,
98. They shall always count their o-don' with accuracy.
In bringing this wi'-gi-e to a close, Wa-xthi'-zhi remarked that he
omitted the section relating to the six willow saplings for counting
o-don', it being the practice of the Non'-hon-zhin-ga to omit it when
giving this ritual. It seems that where a practice of this kind is
established it is not necessary to ask the customary permission to make
such omission. The candidate or his relatives may, however, insist
upon the reciting of the wi'-gi-es without any omissions, although
the lines may be merely tiresome repetitions. Wa-xthi'-zhi remarked,
further, that to recite the section relating to the six willow saplings
would be a repetition of the first six lines, word for word, of the
section relating to the seven' willow saplings. Wa-tse'-mon-in, of the
Black Bear gens, gave the willow sapling wi'-gi-e in full. It is
included in the description of the Non'-zhin-zhon degree of the war
rite, to appear in a later volume.
THE OX-TSUI' GENS
According to Wa-xthi'-zhi, this gens has no gentile symbol of its
own: nevertheless it is given a place in this ceremony as a we'-ga-xe
and counted as the seventh gens of the Wa-zha'-zhe subdivision,
102
THE OSAGE TRIBE
[ETII. ANN. 36
because of its office of Sho'-ka. It is the Sho'-ka of both the TV
I-ni-ka-shi-ga (Deer people) and the Ho' I-ni-ka-shi-ga (Fish people)
gentes. Wa-xthi'-zhi hesitated to give the meaning of the name
Ga-tsiu', but suggested that possibly it means Ke-ga'-tsiu, or Ke'-cin-
dse-ga-tsiu, Turtle with a serrated tail. (See line 8, wi'-gi-e of the
Wa-zha'-zhe Wa-non, p. 92.)
THE HON'-GA U-TA-NON-DSI GENS
(Osage version, p. 324; literal translation, p. 487)
1. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
2. They (the people) spake to the Hon'-ga U-ta-non-dsi,
3. Saying: O, grandfather,
4. We have nothing that is fit to use as a symbol.
5. The Hon'-ga U-ta-non-dsi replied: O, little ones,
6. You say you have nothing fit to use
as a symbol.
7. I am one who is fitted for use as a
symbol.
8. Verily, at that time and place, it has
been said, in this house)
9. He set up a house,
10. And then he said : I have not set up
this house without a purpose.
I have set it up so that within it the
necks of living creatures shall be
broken.
I have not set up this house without
Fio. 8.— Tse'-xo-be (Spider). Conventional
design of the spider, one of the life sym- a purpose.
bois of the Ho»'-ga u-ta-no»-dsi (isolated 13. I have made it to represent and to
Ho«'-ga) gens. This design is tattooed on , , , . , . , , ,
the back of both hands of a woman to D6 a Symbol OI the tse -XO-D6 (the
whom is accorded the honor. spider) (fig. 8)
14. Verily, this house, like a snare, draws to itself
15. All living creatures, whosoever they may be.
16. Into it they shall throw themselves and become ensnared.
17. When the little ones use its power to make the animals appear,
18. Even before the break of day
19. The animals shall not fail to appear;
20. And in the evening of the day
21. The animals shall not fail to appear.
22. The oldest of all animals (the buffalo bull),
23. That lies upon the earth,
24. The little ones shall use its power to make the animals appear.
25. With the life blood of that animal,
26. Even before the break of day,
11.
LA rLESCHK] TRIBAL RITES— FREE TRANSLATION 103
27. They shall always renew their own life blood.
28. And in the evening of the day
29. The little ones shall renew their life blood with that of this animal.
30. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
31. He spake again, saying: These are the things that shall stand as
symbols for the little ones:
32. The short snake (the spreading adder)
33. Shall always be a symbol to the little ones.
34. Then above the bunches of tall grass
35. The short snake lifted his head and spake, saying:
36. Even though the little ones pass into the realm of spirits,
37. They shall, by the use of my fangs, bring themselves back to life
and consciousness.
38. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
39. The four successive days,
40. They shall always successfully reach and enter.
41. The Hon'-ga U-ta-non-dsi continued, saying: The little ones shall
use for a symbol
42. The long snake dotted with yellow spots (the bull snake).
43. The little ones shall always use this snake for a symbol.
44. Then above the bunches of tall grass
45. The long snake with yellow spots lifted his head.
46. This snake also
47. The little ones shall always use as a symbol.
48. Then spake the snake, saying: Even though the little ones pass
into the realm of spirits,
49. They shall by the use of my strength recover consciousness.
50. The four successive days,
51. They shall always successfully reach and enter.
52. The Hon'-ga U-ta-non-dsi continued, saying: The little ones shall
use for a symbol
53. The black snake.
54. The little ones shall always use it as a symbol.
55. Then above the bunches of tall grass
56. The black snake lifted his head.
57. This snake also spake, saying:
58. Even though the little ones pass into the realm of spirits,
59. They shall by my aid bring themselves back to consciousness.
60. The four successive days
61. They shall always successfully reach and enter.
104 THE OSAGE TRIBE [BTH. ANN. 30
62. The Hon'-ga U-ta-non-dsi continued, saying: The little ones shall
use as a symbol
63. The great snake (the rattlesnake).
64. From amidst the bunches of tall grass
65. The snake caused itself to be heard by making a buzzing sound.
66. That snake also spake, saying:
67. Even though the little ones pass into the realm of spirits,
68. They shall, by clinging to me and using my strength, recover
consciousness.
69. The great snake,
70. Making a sound like the blowing of the wind,
71. Close to the feet (of the sick),
72. He repeatedly sounded his rattle as he stood.
73. Close to the head (of the sick)
74. He repeatedly sounded his rattle.
75. Toward the east winds
76. He repeatedly sounded his rattle.
77. Toward the west winds
78. He repeatedly sounded his rattle
79. Toward the winds from the cedars (the north)
80. He repeatedly sounded his rattle.
81. Then spake, saying: Even though the little ones pass into the
realm of spirits,
82. They shall always with my aid bring themselves back to con
sciousness.
§3. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
84. The four great divisions of the days
85. They shall reach successfully,
86. And then into the days of peace and beauty
87. They shall always make their entrance.
HON/-GA A-HIU-TO" GENS
(Osagc version ,p. 326; literal translation ,p. »90 )
1. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
2. The Hon'-ga, a people who possess seven fireplaces,
3. Spake to the Hon'-ga A-hiu-ton (the Winged Hon'-ga),
4. Saying: O, grandfather,
5. The little ones have nothing that is fit to use as a symbol.
6. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
7. The Hon'-ga A-hiu-ton replied, saying: You say the little ones
have nothing that is fit to use as a symbol.
8. I am one who is fitted for use as a symbol.
9. Of the bird that is without stain (evil disposition, the golden
eagle) (pi. 9, a)
0.
<
H-
h-
5 8*11
'
o
z
111
cc
D
UJ
I
2g ftjij
gs *1£
(fl
(3 = "~ '' •'•
':~y.-~
z 0^«2
e H
BUREAU OF AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY T H I RTY-SI XTH AN N U AL REPO RT PLATE 10
a. WA-QA'-BE (BLACK BEAR)
In the Ki'-non ceremony of (he Chief's ritnal the while-throated black boar becomes em
blematic of the sun,' the great symbol of life. (Courtesy of J)r. ('. Hart Merriam.)
b. WA-QA'-BE (BLACK BEAR)
],ifc symbol of I lie Wa-ea'-bo-lo" flilack Bear") gens of (ho ]Io"'-ga subdivision of I he IIo"'-(;a
great tribal division. This animal symbolizes lire and charcoal. (Courtesy of Dr. C. Hart
Merriam.)
LA H.BSCHB] TRIBAL RITES FREE TRANSLATION 105
10. I, as a person, have, verily, made my body.
11. I am continually watched over by all the gods as one worthy of
their notice.
12. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
13. They too shall be watched over by all the gods as worthy of their
notice.
14. I am fitted for the use of the little ones as a means to reach old age.
15. Behold the skin of my feet.
16. I have made it to be the means to reach old age.
17. When the little ones make of it the means to reach old age,
18. They shall always live to see old age.
19. Behold the skin of my feet where they are dark in color.
20. I have made these dark parts of my feet to be as my charcoal.
21. When the little ones make them to be as their charcoal,
22. They shall have charcoal that will easily sink into their skin.
23. Behold the tip of my beak is black in color.
24. My black beak I have made to be as my charcoal.
25. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
26. They shall have charcoal that will easily sink into their skins.
27. Behold the parts of my body that are black.
28. I have made the parts of my body that are black to be as my
charcoal.
29. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
30. They shall have charcoal that will easily sink into their bodies.
31. Behold the tip of my tail, that is dark in color.
32. I have made the black tip of my tail to be as my charcoal.
33. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
34. They shall have charcoal that will easily sink into their skin.
THE WA-CA'-BB-TON (BLACK BEAR) GENS
(Osago version, p. 327; literal translation, p. 491)
1. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
2. The Hon'-ga, a people who possess seven fireplaces,
3. Spake to the Wa-ca'-be-ton, the gens whose symbol is the Black
Bear (pi. 10, b),
4. Saying: O, grandfather,
5. The little ones have nothing of which to make their bodies.
6. The Wa-ca'-be-ton made quick response: O, little ones,
7. You say the little ones have nothing of which to make their
bodies.
S. Let the little ones make of me their bodies.
9. Let them also make of me their charcoal.
106 THE OSAGE TRIBE [BTH. ANN. 36
10. Behold the skin of my feet, that is dark in color.
11. I have made my feet to be as my charcoal.
12. Behold the tip of my nose, that is dark in color.
13. I have made the tip of my nose to be as my charcoal.
14. When the little ones make the tip of my nose to be as their
charcoal,
15. They shall always have charcoal that will easily sink into their
skin as they travel the path of life.
16. Behold my body that in all its parts is black in color.
17. I have made my body to be as my charcoal.
18. When the little ones also make my body to be as their charcoal,
19. They shall always have charcoal that will easily sink into their
skin as they travel the path of life.
20. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
21. The people spake again to the Wa-fa'-be-to", saying: O, grand
father,
22. The little ones have nothing of which to make their bodies.
23. The Wa-ca'-be-ton replied: The little ones shall make of me their
bodies.
24. Of the male puma that lies upon the earth,
25. I, as a person, have, verily, made my body.
26. Of the god of day that sitteth in the heavens,
27. I, as a person, have, verily, made my body.
28. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
29. He continued (speaking as the puma): Behold the soles of my
feet, that are black in color.
30. I have made the skin of the soles of my feet to be as my charcoal.
31. When the little ones also make of the skin of the soles of my feet
to be as their charcoal,
32. They shall always have charcoal that will easily sink into their
skin as they travel the path of life.
33. Behold the tip of my nose, that is black in color.
34. I have made the tip of my nose to be as my charcoal.
35. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
36. They shall always have charcoal that will easily sink into their
skin.
37. Behold the tips of my ears that are black in color.
38. I have made the tips of my ears to be as my charcoal.
39. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
40. They shall always have charcoal that will easily sink into their
skin.
LA FLBSCHE] TRIBAL RITES FREE TRANSLATION 107
41. Behold the tip of my tail that is black in color.
42. I have made the tip of my tail to be as my charcoal.
43. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
44. They shall always have charcoal that will easily sink into their
skin as they travel the path of life.
45. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
46. The people spake to the great white swan (a subgens of the
Wa-ca'-be-ton),
47. Saying: O, grandfather,
48. The little ones have nothing of which to make their bodies.
49. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
50. The great white swan replied: Behold the skin of my feet that
is dark in color.
51. I have made the dark skin of my feet to be as my charcoal.
52. When the little ones make the dark skin of my feet to be as their
charcoal,
53. They shall always have charcoal that will easily sink into their
skin as they travel the path of life.
54. Behold the tip of my beak that is dark in color.
55. I have made the dark tip of my beak to be as my charcoal.
56. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
57. They shall always have charcoal that will easily sink into their
skin as they travel the path of life.
58. Thus shall it be with the little ones when they make of me their
bodies.
59. Even within half of a day
60. I reach, when making my flight, the farther side of the great lake,
61. Where I sit upon its waves swinging up and down.
62. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
63. Their arms, like my wings, I shall cause to become strong as
they travel the path of life.
64. When all animals are gathered together for a test of endurance,
65. They become breathless sooner than I on my life's journey.
66. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
67. Verily, none of the living creatures shall surpass them
68. In power of strength and endurance as they travel the path of life.
THE IK-OTHON'-GA (PUMA) GENS
(Osage version, p. 329; literal translation, p. 493)
1. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this houae,
2. The Hon'-ga, a people who possess seven fireplaces,
3. Spake to the one who had made of the Puma his body,
4. Saying: O, grandfather,
108 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
5. We have nothing that is fit to use as a symbol.
6. Tne Puma quickly replied: O, little ones,
7. You say you have nothing that is fit to use as a symbol.
8. I am one who is fitted for use as a symbol.
9. Behold the male puma, that lieth upon the earth.
10. Verily, I am a person who has made of the male puma his body
(pi. ll,o).
11. The knowledge of my courage has spread over the land.
12. Behold the god of day, that sitteth in the heavens.
13. Verily, I am a person who sitteth close to the god of day.
14. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
15. They shall always be free from all causes of death as they travel
the path of life.
16. Behold the great red boulder, that sitteth upon the earth.
17. Verily, I am a person who draws to himself the power of the great
boulder.
18. Behold the great red boulder, that sitteth upon the earth.
L9. Even the great gods themselves
20. Stumble over me as I sit immovable as the great red boulder.
21. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
22. Even the great gods shall stumble over them and fall.
23. Even the great gods themselves
24. As they move over the earth pass around me as I sit immovable
as the great red boulder.
25. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
26. Even the great gods themselves shall pass around them in forked
lines as they travel the path of life.
27. Even the great gods themselves
28. Fear to stare me in the fare with insolence.
29. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
30. Even the gods themselves
31. Shall fear to stare them in the face, as they travel the path of life.
32. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
33. He said to them: Behold the Black Bear, that is without a blem
ish, that lieth upon the earth.
34. Verily, I am a person who has made of the Black Bear his body.
35. Behold the god of night, that sitteth in the heavens.
36. Verily, I am a person who maketh the Black Bear to draw from
the god of night its power.
37. Behold the great black boulder, that sitteth upon the earth.
38. Verily, I am a person who sitteth close to the great black boulder.
39. Behold the great black boulder, that sitteth upon the earth.
40. When the little ones make of the great black boulder their bodies,
41. Even the great gods themselves
BUREAU OF AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY THIRTY-SIXTH ANNUAL REPORT PLATE II
a. |N-GTHON'-GA (PUMA)
A life symbol of the I"-gtho"'-ga (Puma) gens of the Ho"'-ga great tribal division. This
animal is closely associated with the sun, the great life symbol, and the relentless flrc of
which the charcoal is emblematic. (Courtesy of Dr. N. Hollister.)
6. O'-PXQN (ELK)
The elk is the life symbol of the O'-pxo- (Elk) gens of the IIo"'-ga subdivision of the great Ho"'-ga tribal
division. The elk symbolizes the entire earth and was instrumental in making it a suitable abode
it was who caused the waters to recede and the land to appear and become habitable. He made the
grasses to grow so that the animals might thrive and become plentiful for the benefit of man. The elk
figures in the rites pertaining to both peace and war.
BUREAU OF AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY
THIRTY-SIXTH ANNUAL REPORT PLATE 12
a. QlN (SAGITTARIA LATIFOLIA)
b. iTSE'-WA-THE (NELUMBO LUTEA)
r. DO IGLYCINE APIOS) d. HO~-BTHI "'-QU (FALCATA COMOSA"
FOOD PLANTS OF THE OSAGE
The rails of these plants wore used as food. Those of c and rf \vere also used ceremonially.
(Courtesy of Dr. Win. K. Satlord.)
LA FLBSCHB] TRIBAL, RITES FREE TRANSLATION 109
42. Shall stumble over them and fall.
43. Even the gods themselves
44. As they move over the earth pass around me in forked lines as I
sit immovable as the great black boulder.
45. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
46. Even the gods themselves
47. Shall pass around them in forked lines as they travel the path
of life.
48. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
49. He said to them: Behold the great white swan.
50. Verily, I am a person who has made of the great white swan his
body.
51. Behold, the god of night (the Wa'-tse Do-ga, The Male Star, the
morning star).
52. Verily, I am a person who has made of the god of night his body.
53. Behold, the great white boulder, that sitteth upon the earth.
54. Verily, I am a person who has made of the great white boulder
his body.
55. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
56. Even the gods themselves
57. Shall stumble over them and fall.
58. Even the gods themselves
59. As they move over the earth pass around me as I sit immovable
as the great white boulder.
60. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
61. Even the gods themselves
62. Shall pass around them as they pass around the great white
boulder.
63. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
64. He said to them: Behold the male elk, that lieth upon the earth.
65. Behold, the yellow boulder, that sitteth upon the earth.
66. Verily, I am a person who maketh the male elk to draw from the
yellow boulder its power.
67. Behold Wa'-tse Mi-ga (the Female Star, the evening star).
68. Verily, I am a person who maketh the yellow boulder to draw
from the evening star its power.
69. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
70. Even the gods themselves
71. Shall stumble over them and fall.
72. Even the gods themselves
73. As they move over the earth pass around me as I sit immovable
as the great yellow boulder.
74. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
110 THE OSAGE TRIBE [BTH. ANN. 36
75. Even the gods themselves
76. Shall pass around them as they pass around the great yellow
boulder.
77. Even the gods themselves
78. Fear to set teeth upon me in anger.
79. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
80. The gods themselves shall fear to set teeth upon them in anger.
81. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
82. He said to them: Even the gods themselves
83. Fear to stare me in the face with insolence.
84. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
85. Even the gods themselves
86. Shall fear to stare them in the face with insolence.
87. I am difficult to overcome by death.
88. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
89. They also shall always be difficult to overcome by death.
90. The four successive days
91. They shall cause themselves to reach and to enter.
92. The people of the Wa-zha'-zhe
93. And those of the Tsi'-zhu
94. Shall make of me their bodies.
95. When they make of me their bodies,
96. They shall cause themselves to be difficult to overcome by death.
97. The gods themselves shall fear to set teeth upon them in anger.
98. They shall always live to see old age.
99. The four successive days
100. They shall always reach and enter.
101. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
102. The Hon'-ga, a people who possess seven fireplaces,
103. Spake to the one who had made of the Puma his body,
104. Saying: O, grandfather,
105. We have nothing that is fit to use as a symbol.
106. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
107. The Puma replied: You say you have nothing that is fit to use
as a symbol.
108. I shall go forth and make search.
109. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
110. He strode away forthwith to make search,
111. And he came to the margin of a lake,
112. Where, within its bed of mud, sat the cin (the bulbous root of
Sagittaria latifolia) (pi. 12, a).
113. He dug it up and sent it rolling on the bank, where he stood.
114. Then in haste he carried it home to the people
LA FLESCHE] TRIBAL RITES FREE TRANSLATION HI
115. And standing before them said : How will this serve as a symbol,
O, elder brothers?
116. With eager haste the people munched the bulbous root,
117. Then said: It can not be used as food.
118. Verily, it is not what we desire, O, younger brother.
119. Although that be true, nevertheless
120. We shall put it to use in other ways, O, younger brother, as we
travel the path of life.
121. Again he strode away forthwith
122. And came to the middle of a lake,
123. Where, within its bed of mud, lay the tse'-wa-the (the root of
the Nelumbo lutea) (pi. 12, &).
124. With a quick movement of his foot he lifted the root from its
bed of soft earth.
125. Then in haste he brought it home to the people,
126. To whom he said: How will this serve as a symbol, O, elder
brothers 1
127. With eager haste the people munched the root,
128. And, like milk, its juice squirted out as they pressed the root
between their teeth,
129. And they spake, saying: It is fit for the little ones to use as food.
130. It is fit for them to use as a symbol, O, younger brother.
131. The little ones shall use this for food in their life's journey.
132. The people of the Wa-zha'-zhe
133. And those of the Tsi'-zhu
134. Shall always use this root for food.
135. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
136. The people said to one another: Verily, we shall make the
young bull
137. And this plant to be companions, O, younger brothers.
138. The little ones shall use the two together as food.
139. When the little ones eat of these foods, as they travel the path
of life,
140. Their limbs shall always stretch in growth.
141. Again the Puma went forth and came to the farther margin of
the lake,
142. Where, within the soft earth of its borders, sat the Do (the
root of the Glycine apios) (pi. 12, c).
143. He dug it up and sent it rolling upon the earth.
144. Then in haste he brought it home to the people,
145. Who said to him: This is what you have been continually
searching for, O, younger brother.
146. They munched it, and, like milk, its juice squirted within their
mouths,
112 THE OSAGE TRIBE [BTH. ANN. 36
147. And they said: The little ones shall use this root as food in their
life's journey.
148. When the little ones use this root as food,
149. Their limbs shall always stretch in growth.
150. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
151. The people said to one another: The deer with dark horns
152. We shall make this plant to draw, O, younger brothers.
153. When we make this plant to draw to us the dark-horned deer,
154. The people of the Wa-zha'-zhe
155. And those of the Tsi'-zhu
156. Shall always use these two foods together in their life's journey.
157. When they use these two foods together,
158. Their limbs shall always stretch in growth.
159. When they use these two foods to make their limbs to grow,
160. They shall always live to see old age.
161. Again the Puma went forth to the farther bank of the lake.
162. Verily, to a lowland forest,
163.. Where, in the mellow earth, sat the Hon-bthin'-cu (a wild bean,
Falcata comosa) (pi. 12, d).
164. He dug it up and sent it rolling upon the earth.
165. This root also, the people said,
166. The little ones shall use as food in their life's journey.
167. When the little ones use this root as food in their life's journey
168. They shall always live to see old age.
169. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
170. The people said: The turkey
171. Shall be drawn toward us by this plant, O, younger brothers.
172. When the little ones use the two together for food,
173. They shall always live to see old age.
174. When the people of the Wa-zha'-zhe
175. And those of the Tsi'-zhu
176. Use the bean and the turkey as food,
177. They shall always live to see old age.
178. The four great divisions of the days
179. They shall always reach and cause themselves to enter.
•
THE O'-PXQN (ELK) GENS
(Osage version, p. 334; literal translation, p. 497)
1. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
2. The Hon'-ga, a people who possess seven fireplaces,
3. Spake to the gens who made of the Puma his body,
4. Saying: O, younger brother,
5. We have nothing that is fit to use as a symbol.
6. Whereupon the Puma with hastened steps went forth
I.A FLESCHB] TRIBAL RITES FREE TRANSLATION 113
7. And came suddenly upon the male elk, (pi. 11, 6),
8. Who stood upon the earth.
9. The Puma returned in haste to his elder brothers,
10. Who said to him: O, younger brother!
11. The Puma replied, saying: O, elder brothers, I went forth and
came upon a man who stands yonder.
12. The people spake to one another, saying: O, younger brothers,
13. Whoever the man may be who stands yonder,
14. We will send him to the abode of spirits.
15. With heads bent thitherward they hastened to the man,
16. The oldest of the brothers moistening in his mouth his index
finger in readiness to slay the stranger.
17. With quickened footsteps they set forth
18. Toward the male elk.
19. They came upon him and stood with heads inclined toward him.
20. The male elk hastened to say: O, elder brothers,
21. I am a Hon'-ga (a sacred person), he stood saying.
22. I am O'-pxon Ton-ga, the Great Elk, O, elder brothers.
23. I am a person who is never absent from any important act.
24. I am a person who can be of use to you as a symbol.
25. O'-pxon Ton-ga, Great Elk,
26. Is a name that I have taken to myself, O, elder brothers.
27. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
28. He repeated: I am a person who can be of use to you as a symbol.
29. When the little ones use me as an instrument for making the
animals to appear,
30. The animals shall always appear for them.
31. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
32. The Great Elk started to perform some mysterious acts.
33. In the midst of each of the four winds
34. He threw himself upon the earth.
35. In the midst of the east wind
36. He threw himself upon the earth,
37. And as he stood the sky of the day became calm and peaceful.
38. In the midst of the north wind
39. He threw himself upon the earth,
40. And the sky as though touched with gentle hands became per
meated with gentleness and peace, as he stood.
41. In the midst of the west winds
42. He threw himself upon the earth,
43. And from the god above (the overarching heaven)
44. As he stood he swept away all traces of anger.
2786—21 8
114 THE OSAGE TRIBE [BTH. ANN. 36
45. In the midst of the south wind
46. He threw himself upon the earth,
47. And as he stood from every part of the earth
48. He verily cleansed the land of all anger.
49. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
50. He spake to the people, saying: I am a person who is suitable
to be used by you as a symbol.
51. Then again he threw himself upon the earth.
52. As he arose to his feet he left the surface of the earth covered
with the hairs of his body,
53. And he spake again, saying: These hairs
54. I have scattered upon the earth so that the animals may appear
in their midst.
55. They are the grasses of the earth.
56. I have made them for you for making the animals to appear,
in order that you might live.
57. The little ones shall always see the animals appear in the midst
of the grasses of the earth.
58. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
59. The Great Elk threw himself once more upon the earth,
60. And as he arose to his feet he stood with his buttocks toward
the people,
61. And he spake, saying: Behold the ball-like muscles of my
buttocks.
62. They are the round hills of the earth.
63. I have made them to represent all the round hills of the earth.
64. Amidst the round hills of the earth the little ones shall always
see the animals appear.
65. Behold the right side of my body.
66. It is the level lands of the earth.
67. I have made it to represent all the level lands of the earth.
68. Behold the ridge of my back.
69. It is the .ridges of the earth.
70. I have made it to represent all the ridges of the earth.
71. When the little ones approach the ridges of the earth,
72. They shall always see the animals appear in their midst.
73. Behold the curve of my neck.
74. It is the gaps in the ridges of the earth.
75. I have made it to represent all the gaps in the ridges of the
earth.
76. When the little ones approach these gaps of the ridges,
77. They shall always see the animals appear in the gaps.
LA FLBSCHB] TRIBAL, RITES FREE TRANSLATION 115
78. Behold also the tip of my nose.
79. It is the peaks of the earth.
80. I have made it to represent all the peaks of the earth.
81. When the little ones approach the peaks,
82. They shall always see the animals appear in the midst of the
peaks.
83. Behold the bases of my horns.
84. They are the loose rocks of the earth.
85. When the little ones approach the loose rocks, they shall always
see the animals appear in their midst.
86. Behold the branches of my horns.
87. They are the branches of the rivers.
88. The little ones shall always see the animals appear along the
branches of the rivers.
89. Behold the smaller tines of my horns.
90. They are the creeks of the earth.
91. The little ones shall always see the animals appear along the
creeks of the earth.
92. Behold the large tines of my horns.
93. They are the large streams that are dotted here and there with
forests.
94. I make them to represent all the large streams of the earth.
95. When the little ones approach one of these streams in their life's
journey,
96. They shall always see the animals appear along the banks.
97. Behold the largest parts of my horns.
98. They are the rivers.
99. I have made them to be the places where the animals shall
appear.
100. When the little ones approach one of these rivers,
101. They shall always see the animals along the banks.
102. When the little ones go forth to hunt,
103. Even before the break of day,
104. They shall always see the animals appear,
105. And in the evening of the day
106. They shall always see the animals appear.
107. The people of the Wa-zha'-zhe
108. And those of the Tsi'-zhu
109. Shall always make use of me as a symbol as they travel the path
of life.
116 THE OSAGE TRIBE [BTH. ANN. 36
THE MONV-SHKON (CRAWFISH) GENS
(Osage version, p. 337; literal translation, p. 502)
1. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
2. The Hon'-ga, a people who possess seven fireplaces,
3. Spake to the gens who had made of the Puma his body,
4. Saying: O, younger brother,
5. We have nothing that is fit to use as a symbol.
6. Verily, upon the utterance of these words by the people,
7. The Puma went forth to an open prairie, where trees grow not,
8. Where he came face to face with a man who stood upright
9. In the midst of the prairie with uplifted hand.
10. The Puma turned and hastened toward home.
11. The people spake to one another, saying: Our younger brother is
returning.
12. His manner indicates that he bears great tidings.
13. Soon he stood before the people, saying: A man stands yonder,
O, elder brothers.
14. What sayest thou ? O, younger brother, they said to him.
15. And he repeated: A man stands yonder, O, elder brothers,
16. With a cloven hand uplifted.
17. Then the people spake to one another, saying: O, younger
brothers,
18. Whatever man he may be who stands yonder
19. We shall send him to the abode of spirits, O, younger brothers.
20. Then with heads bent toward the man
21. The people strode forth in haste,
22. And soon came face to face with the man who stood in the prairies.
23. Stood with a cloven hand uplifted.
24. Ho! younger brother, they said to him,
25. What man art thou that stands before us?
26. The man replied: I am a Hon'-ga (a sacred person).
27. I am Mon'-shkon (the Crawfish) (pi. 13, a).
28. I am Mon-in'-ka-zhin-ga (the Little Earth), O, elder brothers.
29. The man continued quickly: O, elder brothers,
30. I am a person who is ever present at any important movement.
31. I am a person who, in truth, is a symbol.
32. A person who holds himself ready to be used as a symbol, O, elder
brothers.
33. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
34. Within a hillock of soft mud
35. He disappeared as though sucked into his home
36. And quickly reappeared with a bit of dark soil
37. Which he held aloft as he stood offering it to the people, and he
spake to them, saying:
Z
-
h-
o ^Jff
win ai^if
Q< 4||fi
_J c .-_!. ~ £ i.
9
OT
... *
Q ; =
d 'K
m c:
ou i_-§:
-J Q. t. 5 a«
UJ§ IIP
«S K= o a
9 2 T^a.s
LU5 g = ^S
rf) — rt
UlS # = 3^
C3
z Q
N CO
I
Si %
_i
z
-
I|RSl
S*'' JS O S
I
en
o:
O
z
o
BUREAU OF AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY THIRTY-SIXTH ANNUAL REPORT PLATE M
RATIBIDA COLUMNARIS
LA FLESCHE] TRIBAL RITES FREE TRANSLATION 117
38. This bit of dark earth, O, elder brothers,
39. You shall use as a symbol when offering your supplications.
40. Then, even before the sun rises to the height of your houses,
41. You shall never fail to have your prayers granted in your life's
journey, O, elder brothers.
42. I have bestowed upon you a gift that will make you gratefullv
happy, O, elder brothers.
43. Then, gently and slowly,
44. The man again descended into the earth
45. And reappeared with a bit of blue clay,
46. Which he stood offering to the people as he spake to them, saying:
47. This bit of blue clay, O, elder brothers,
48. You shall always use as a symbol, O, elder brothers.
49. When you use it as a symbol while offering your supplications,
50. You shall never fail to have your prayers granted, O, elder
brothers.
51. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
52. He continued: You shall always use the blue clay as a symbol,
O, elder brothers.
53. For a third time
54. The man descended into the earth
55. And reappeared with a bit of red clay,
56. Which he stood offering to the people as he spake to them, saying:
57. This bit of red clay also
58. You shall always use as a symbol, O, elder brothers.
59. By its aid you shall with ease excite compassion and your prayers
shall be granted, O, elder brothers.
60. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
61. The man for the fourth time
62. Descended into the earth
63. And brought forth a bit of yellow clay,
64. Which he stood offering to the people as he spake to them, saying;
65. This bit of yellow clay also
66. You shall always use as a symbol.
67. When you use it as a symbol while offering your supplications,
68. Then, even before the sun rises to the height of your houses,
69. You shall never fail to have your prayers granted on your life's
journey, O, elder brothers.
70. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
71. He spake again, saying: Behold my cloven hand.
72. My cloven hand also
73. You shall always use as a symbol, O, elder brothers.
118 THE OSAGE TBIBE [«TH. ANH. 38
74. There are poles that are spoken of as forked poles.
75. My cloven hand shall be represented by the forked poles that you
may use for any purpose, O, elder brothers.
76. When toward the setting sun you go against your enemies,
77. With a craving for success to vanquish them,
78. By the aid of this symbol you shall not fail to win success, O, elder
brothers.
THE F-BA-TSE TA-DSE (THE WINDS) GENS
(Osage version, p. 339; literal translation, p. 504)
1. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
2. The people spake to one another, saying: O, younger brothers,
3. We have nothing that is fit to use as a symbol.
4. Then he who had made the Puma to be his body
5. Hastened forth to make search..
6. In the midst of an open prairie, where trees grow not,
7. There stood the Hon'-ga We-ha-ge (The youngest, or the last of
the Hon'-ga subdivision in the tribal order),
8. With whom he stood face to face.
9. The Hon'-ga We-ha-ge spake quickly, saying: O, elder brother.
10. The Puma asked: What man art thou?
11. Hon'-ga We-ha-ge replied: I am Hon'-ga Gthe-zhe (the sacred
spotted eagle).
12. I am a Hon'-ga (a sacred person), O, elder brother,
13. A person who is fitted for use as a symbol.
14. The people shall always use me as a symbol as they travel the
path of life.
15. When they so use me,
16. The people of the Wa-zha'-zhe
17. And those of the Tsi'-zhu
18. Shall always use me as a symbol.
18. When they so use me,
20. Even before the sun rises to the height of their houses,
21. They shall easily win compassion and their prayers shall be
granted as they travel the path of life.
22. I, who stand here, have given you that which will make you
gratefully happy.
THE TSl'-ZHU DIVISION
THE TSI'-ZHD WA-NON (ELDER HOUSEHOLD) GENS
(Osage version, p. 340; literal translation, p. 505)
1. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
2. The Tsi'-zhu, a people who possess seven fireplaces,
3. Spake to the Tsi'-zhu Wa-non (Elder Tsi'-zhu gens),
LA FLESCHE]
TRIBAL, RITES FREE TRAKSLATION
119
4. Saying: O, grandfather,
5. We have nothing that is fit for use as a symbol.
6. The Tsi'-zhu Wa-non replied:
7. You say you have nothing that is fit to use as a symbol.
8. I am a person who is fit to use as a symbol,
9. For of the god of day who sitteth in the heavens (fig. 9),
10. I, as a person, have verily made my body.
1 1 . When the little ones make of me their bodies,
12. Even of the god of day who sitteth in the heavens,
13. The little ones as a people shall make their bodies.
14. When the little ones make of the god of day their bodies,
15. They shall be free from all causes of death.
16. When they make of the god of day the means of reaching old age,
17. They shall always live to see old age as they travel the path of life.
FIQ. 9.— Mi Ga-gthe'-ce (Sun rays). In certain atmospheric conditions the sun as it rises throws up
broad spreading rays. Thirteen of these rays are the war symbols of the Tsi'-zhu Wa-no" gens. The
rods used by the warriors in recounting their military honors are made to symbolize these thirteen
rays.
18. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
19. Of these gods the little ones shall make their bodies,
20. Of the god of night who sitteth in the heavens,
21. I, as a person, have verily made my body.
22. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
23. Even I, who am difficult to be overcome by death,
24. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
25. They shall cause themselves to be difficult to overcome by death
as they travel the path of life.
26. Of the male star, who sitteth in the heavens (the morning star),
27. That god also,
28. The little ones shall make their bodies.
120 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
29. When the little ones make of the morning star their bodies,
30. They shall enable themselves to live to see old age as they travel
the path of life.
31. The female star, who sitteth in the heavens (the evening star),
32. Of that god also
33. The little ones shall make their bodies.
34. Then they shall cause themselves to be difficult to overcome by
death.
35. When they make of her the means of reaching old age,
36. They shall enable themselves to live to see old age as they travel
the path of life.
37. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
38. There is a god who never fails to appear at the beginning of day.
39. Upon the left side of this god
40. There stand six rays (stripes, as though made by strokes).
41. These six rays
42. I have made to be symbols,
43. Symbols of the acts spoken of as o-don' (valorous or warlike acts).
44. When they make of these rays the symbols of their o-don',
45. They shall enable themselves to count with accuracy their o-don/
as they travel the path of life.
46. Upon the right side of this god
47. There stand seven rays (rays of like appearance to the six rays).
48. Those seven rays also
49. I have made to be symbols,
50. Symbols of the acts spoken of as o-don/ I have made them to be.
51. Verily, I have made them all to stand as the o-don' of the people.
52. When the little ones use these rays for counting their o-don',
53. They shall enable themselves to account with accuracy the deeds
by which they won their o-don' as they travel the path of life.
54. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
55. It was said: Of what else shall the little ones make their bodies?
56. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
57. The Tsi'-zhu Wa-non replied:
58. There is a bird that has a long bill (the pileated woodpecker)
(pi. 13, 6),
59. Of that bird also
60. I, as a person, have verily made my body.
61. The god of day, who sitteth in the heavens,
62. I have made the bird to symbolize.
63. The god of night, who sitteth in the heavens,
64. I have made the bird to symbolize.
LA FLESCHE] TRIBAL RITES FREE TRANSLATION 121
65. The male star, who sitteth in the heavens,
66. I have made that bird to symbolize.
67. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
68. They shall always find a plentiful supply of the earth's riches.
69. When they go toward the setting sun against their enemies,
70. Taking with them the bird as a symbol through which to offer
their supplications,
71. They shall never fail to succeed as they travel the path of life.
72. The female star, who sitteth in the heavens,
73. I have caused that bird to symbolize.
74. When the little ones go toward the setting sun against their
enemies,
75. Taking with them the bird as a symbol through which to offer
their supplications,
76. They shall never fail to succeed as they travel the path of life.
77. They shall always find a plentiful supply of the earth's riches.
78. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
79. They shall enable themselves to live to see old age as they travel
the path of life;
80. The four great divisions of the days
81. They shall enable themselves to reach and enter.
82. When the people of the Wa-zha'-zhe
83. And those of the Hon'-ga
84. Make of me their symbol throughout their life's journey,
85. They shall never fail to succeed as they travel the path of life.
THE TSE-DO'-GA IN-DSE GENS
The presence of the Tse-do'-ga In-dse (Buffalo-face Gens) (pi. 13, c)
is necessary in this ceremony in order to complete the tableau of the
sky, the great bodies that move therein, and the animal life in the
earth to which they are related. This gens occupies the second place
in the ceremonial order of the gentes composing the Tsi'-zhu division,
but, as in the case of the Wa-ke'-stse-dse (Cat-tail) gens (see p. 93),
its members remain silent throughout the ceremony. The head of
the gens, however, is given a fee for his services, and the members
share in the distribution of the provisions provided by the candidate.
The office of this gens in certain degrees of the war rites is to per
form the ceremony of cutting into shape the symbolic buffalo-skin
moccasins to be worn by the Xo'-ka and the Sho'-ka and to recite
the wi'-gi-e relating to the moccasins.
122 THE OSAGE TRIBE CBTH. ANN. 38
THE MI-K'IN/ WA-NON (SuN CARRIER) GENS
(Osage version, p. 342; literal translation, p. 508)
1. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
2. The Tsi'-zhu, a people who possess seven fireplaces,
3. Spake to the Mi-k'in' Wa-non (Elder Sun Carrier),
4. Saying: O, grandfather,
5. We have nothing that is suitable to use as a symbol.
6. The Mi-k'in' Wa-non quickly replied:
7. You say you have nothing that is suitable to use as a symbol.
8. I am a person of whom you may well make your bodies,
9. For of the god of day who sitteth in the heavens,
10. I, as a person, have verily made my body.
1 1 . When the little ones make of me their bodies,
12. Of the god of day who sitteth in the heavens,
13. They, as a people, shall verily make their bodies, as they travel
the path of life.
14. When they make of the god of day their bodies,
15. They shall be free from all causes of death;
16. When they also make of him the means of reaching old age,
17. They shall enable themselves to live to see old age, as they travel
the path of life.
18. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
19. He said to them: Of the god of night who sitteth in the heavens
(moon),
20. I, as a person, have verily made my body.
21. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
22. Of the god of night who sitteth in the heavens,
23. They, as a people, shall make their bodies, as they travel the path
of life.
24. I am difficult to be overcome by death.
25. When of the god of night
26. The little ones also make their bodies,
27. They shall cause themselves to be difficult to overcome by death;
28. When they make of the god of night the means of reaching old age,
29. They shall enable themselves to live to see old age, as they travel
the path of life.
30. Of the male star (the morning star),
31. Who sitteth in the heavens,
32. I, as a person, have verily made my body;
33. When the little ones also make of him their bodies,
34. When they make of the morning star
35. Their bodies as they travel the path of life,
36. They shall cause themselves to be difficult to overcome by death.
LA FUKCHE] TRIBAL BITES — FREE TBANSLATION 123
37. When they make of him the means of reaching old age,
38. They shall enable themselves to live to see old age, as they travel
the path of life.
39. Of the female star (the evening star)
40. I, as a person, have verily made my body.
41. When the little ones also make of her their bodies
42. They shall cause themselves to be difficult to overcome by death;
43. When they make of her the means of reaching old age,
44. They shall enable themselves to live to see old age as they travel
the path of life.
45. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
46. He said to them: Of these gods the little ones shall make their
bodies.
47. The god who never fails to appear at the beginning of day (the
sun),
48. Has upon his left side (see lines 37 to 53 of the Tsi'-zhu Wa-non
Wi'-gi-e)
49. Six rays (stripes) that stand upright.
50. These six rays
51. I have made to be symbols (of warlike acts).
52. When the little ones use these six rays for counting their o-don/
53. They shall count with accuracy their o-don' as they travel the
path of life.
54. The god who never fails to appear at the beginning of day
55. Has upon his right side
56. Seven rays that stand upright.
57. These seven rays (stripes)
58. I have made to be symbols.
59. When the little ones use these seven rays for counting their o-don/
60. They shall count with accuracy their o-don' as they travel the
path of life.
THE Ho"' I-NI-KA-SHI-QA (NIOHT PEOPLE) GENS
(Osage version, p. 343; literal translation, p. 510)
1. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
2. The Tsi'-zhu, a people who possess seven fireplaces,
3. Spake to the Hon/ I-ni-ka-shi-ga (People of the Night) gens,
4. Saying: O, grandfather,
5. We have nothing that is suitable to use as a symbol.
6. He hastened to reply, saying: O, little ones,
7. I am a person who is suitable for use as a symbol.
8. Of the Black Bear, who is without a blemish,
9. I, as a person, have verily made my body.
124 THE OSAGE TRIBE IETH. ANN. 36
10. When the little ones also make of him their bodies
11. They shall always be free from all causes of death,
12. And they shall enable themselves to live to see old age as they
travel the path of life.
13. Behold the skin of my feet wherein it is dark in color.
14. The dark soles of my feet I have made to be as my charcoal;
15. When the little ones also make it to be as their charcoal
16. They shall have charcoal that will easily sink into their skin as
they travel the path of life.
17. Behold, the tip of my nose is dark in color.
18. The dark tip of my nose I have made to be as my charcoal;
19. When the little ones also make it to be as their charcoal
20. They shall have charcoal that will easily sink into their skin.
21. Behold my body that is black in color.
22. My body that is black in color I have made to be as my charcoal;
23. When the little ones also make it to be as their charcoal
24. They shall have charcoal that will easily sink into their skin.
25. When the little ones make of me the means of reaching old age
26. They shall always live to see old age;
27. And the four great divisions of days
28. They shall not fail to reach and to enter as they travel the path
of life.
THE XU-THA' ZHU-DSE (RED EAGLE) GENS
(Osage version, p. 344; literal translation, p. 511)
1. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
2. The Tsi'-zhu, a people who possess seven fireplaces,
3. Spake to the Tsi'-zhu Wa-shta'-ge (Tsi'-zhu Peace gens),
4. Who had made of the Red Eagle their body (red is here used
as a trope),
5. Saying: O, grandfather,
6. The little ones have nothing of which to make their bodies.
7. The Tsi'-zhu Wa-shta'-ge quickly replied: O, little ones,
8. You say the little ones have nothing of which to make their
bodies.
9. I am a person of whom the little ones may well make their
bodies.
10. When they make of the Red Eagle
11. Their bodies in their life's journey,
12. They shall enable themselves to live to see old age as they travel
the path of life.
LA FLESCHE] TRIBAL RITES FREE TRANSLATION 125
13. The folds of the skin of my feet
14. I have made to be the means of reaching old age.
15. When the little ones also make of them the means of reaching old
age,
16. They shall enable themselves to live to see old age as they travel
the path of life.
17. The wrinkles of the muscles of my ankles also
18. I have made to be the means of reaching old age.
19. When the little ones also make of them the means of reaching old
age,
20. They shall enable themselves to live to see in the muscles of their
ankles the signs of old age.
2 1 . The loose muscles of my legs
22. I have made to be the means of reaching old age.
23. When the little ones also make of them the means of reaching old
age,
24. They shall enable themselves to live to see in the loose muscles
of their legs the signs of old age.
25. The loose inner muscles of my thighs
26. I have made to be the means of reaching old age.
27. When the little ones also make of them the means of reaching old
age,
28. They shall enable themselves to see old age as they travel the
path of life.
29. The skin of my breast, gathered into folds,
30. I have made to be the means of reaching old age.
31. When the little ones also make of them the means of reaching old
age,
32. They shall enable themselves to live to see in the skin of their
breasts the signs of old age.
33. The loose muscles of my arms
34. I have also made to be the means of reaching old age.
35. When the little ones also make of them the means of reaching old
age,
36. They shall enable themselves to live to see the muscles of their
arms loosen with old age.
37. Behold my shoulders, that are bent with age,
38. Which I have also
.39. Made to be the means of reaching old age.
40. When the little ones make of them the means of reaching old age,
41. They shall enable themselves to live to see in their shoulders the
signs of old age.
126 THE OSAGE TRIBE [»TH. ANN. 36
42. The loose muscles of my throat
43. I have also
44. Made to be the means of reaching old age.
45. When the little ones make of them the means of reaching old age,
46. They shall enable themselves to live to see in the loosened muscles
of their throats the signs of old age.
47. The hair on the crown of my head, grown thin with age,
48. I have also
49. Made to be the means of reaching old age.
50. When the little ones also make of my thin hair the means of
reaching old age,
51. They shall enable themselves to live to see in the thinned hair of
the crown of their heads the signs of old age.
52. The white hair on my head
53. I have also
54. Made to be the means of reaching old age.
55. When the little ones also make of my white hair the means of
reaching old age,
56. They shall enable themselves to live to see that the hair on their
heads has grown yellowish with age.
57. Of the god of day
58. I, as a person, as a people, have verily made my body.
59. Verily, there is a god who never fails to appear at the beginning
of day,
60. The god who lies as though dipped in red (the dawn).
61. Of that god also
62. I, as a person, as a people, have verily made my body.
63. By the side of the god who never fails to appear at the begin
ning of day (the sun),
64. Even at his left side,
65. Stands a plumelike shaft of light.
66. I, as a person, as a people, have made my body of this plume.
67. When the little ones make their plumes like this shaft of light,
68. They shall always live to see old age.
69. When the little ones approach old age,
70. Having made their plumes like to the shaft of light,
71; Their symbolic plumes shall never droop as they travel the path
of life.
72. By the side of the god who never fails to appear at the begin
ning of day (the sun),
73. Even at his right side,
74. There stands a plumelike shaft of light.
LA FLBSCH«] TRIBAL RITES — FREE TRANSLATION 127
75. Of that shaft of light I have made my symbolic plume.
76. When the little ones make of that shaft of light their symbolic
plumes,
77. They shall always live to see old age.
78. When the little ones approach old age,
79. Having made of that shaft of light their symbolic plumes,
80. Their symbolic plumes shall never droop as they travel the path
of life.
HON/-BA THA-GTHIN (PEACEFUL DAY)10
81. I, as a person, verily make my abode in the days that are calm
and peaceful.
82. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
83. They shall enable themselves to dwell as a people in the days
that are calm and peaceful as they travel the path of life.
84. Verily, from all the gods
85. I, who stand here, have removed all signs of anger.
86. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
87. They shall enable themselves to remove from the gods
88. All signs of anger as they travel the path of life.
89. From the god who lies below (the earth)
90. I have removed all anger and violence.
91. From the god of daylight, who stands in the midst of the
heavens,
92. I have removed all anger and violence.
93. From the god who lies above (the overarching sky)
94. I have removed all anger and violence.
95. Verily, from all the gods,
96. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
97. They shall enable themselves to remove all anger and violence
as they travel the path of life.
98. When the people of the Wa-zha'-zhe,
99. Together with those of the Hon'-ga,
100. Make of me their bodies,
101. Verily, from over all the land,
102. They shall enable themselves to remove all anger and violence
as they travel the path of life.
'• Wa-xthi'-ihi gave this subtitle, but he offered no explanation as to its meaning. However, It gives
reason for the belief that It is the title of a subgens of the Red Eagle gens. This title appears as a personal
woman's name in the Omaha I*-shta-co*-da gens. (See 27th Ann. Kept. Bur. Amer. Kthn., p. 194.)
128 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
U'-XTHI THIN-GE (NO ANGER)
103. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
J04. The Tsi'-zhu, a people who possess seven fireplaces,
105. Spake to one of the Tsi'-zhu (gentes),
106. Verily, a person (gens) who stands having no anger or violence,
107. Saying: O, my grandfather,
108. The little ones have nothing of which to make their bodies.
109. "No Anger" (the subgens of that name) replied, saying:
110. You say the little ones have nothing of which to make their
bodies.
111. I am a person (a people) of whom the little ones may well make
their bodies.
112. I am a person whose being abides in the moist, vibrating air of
the earth.
113. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
114. They shall enable themselves to become a people of the moist,
vibrating air of the earth as they travel the path of life.
115. Verily, in the days that are calm and peaceful,
116. I, as a person, make my abode.
117. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
118. They, as a people, shall abide in the days that are calm and
peaceful as they travel the path of life.
119. The Peaceful Day
120. Is a personal name that I have taken.
121. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
122. They, as a people, shall abide in the days that are calm and
peaceful, as they travel the path of life.
123. Of a little pipe (the Peace Pipe) I have made my body.
124. When the little ones also
125. Make of it their bodies,
126. They shall live without anger or violence as they travel the
path of life.
127. When they use the pipe in seeking earthly riches,
128. They shall enable themselves to find riches in abundance.
129. It (the Pipe) shall also be the means by which they may obtain
food.
130. When they use it as a means to obtain food,
131. They shall enable themselves to live to see old age as they travel
the path of life.
132. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
133. He (No Anger) said to them: Of a little yellow flower
i* PLESCUE] TRIBAL RITES— FREE TRANSLATION 129
134. I, as a person, have, verily, made my body.
135. The little Ba-skta'-e-gon (Ratibida columnaris") (pi. 14)
136. I, as a person, have, verily, made my body.
137. When the little ones make of it their bodies,
138. They shall cause themselves to live together without anger or
violence,
139. And they shall live to see old age as they travel the path of life.
140. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
141. He further said to them: And when the little ones eat of this
plant
142. They shall enable themselves to live to see old age as they trave
the path of life.
143. Of the red corn
144. I, as a person, have, verily, made my body.
145. The little ones shall at all times make of the red corn their food.
146. When they make of it their food,
147. They shall enable themselves to live to see old age as they travel
the path of life.
148. The blue corn
149. They shall also
150. Make to be their food at all times.
151. When they make the blue corn to be their food,
152. They shall enable themselves to live to see old age as they travel
the path of life.
153. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
154. The speckled corn
155. They shall also
156. Make to be their food at all times.
157. When the little ones use the speckled corn for food,
158. They shall enable themselves to live to see old age as they travel
the path of life.
159. When the little ones make the speckled corn to be their food,
160. They shall live to see their limbs stretch in growth as they travel
the path of life.
161. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
162. He said to them: The yellow corn
163. They shall also
164. Use for food at all times.
165. When they use the yellow corn for food,
" The heads of the children belonging to the Tsi'-zhu Wa-shta'-ge gens are ceremonially shorn so as
to resemble this sacred flower.
2786—21 9
130 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 86
166. They shall enable themselves to live to see old age.
167. When the little ones use the yellow corn for food,
168. They shall live to see their limbs stretch in growth as they travel
the path of life.
169. The people of the Wa-zha'-zhe
170. And those of the Hon'-ga
171. Shall use the corn for food at all times.
172. When they use it for food,
173. They shall enable themselves to live to see old age as they travel
the path of life.
174. The four great divisions of the days,
175. They shall always cause themselves to reach and to enter,
176. Even to the days that are calm and peaceful
177. They shall bring themselves as they travel the path of life.
THE TSI'-ZHU WE-HA-GE (THE LAST TSI'-ZHU) GENS
(Osage version, p. 349; literal translation, p. 516)
1. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
2. The Tsi'-zhu, a people who possess seven fireplaces,
3. Spake to the Tsi'-zhu We-ha-ge (The Last Tsi'-zhu),
4. Saying: O, grandfather,'
5. We have nothing that is suitable to use as a symbol.
6. Tsi'-zhu We-ha-ge hastened to reply, saying: O, little ones,
7. You say you have nothing that is suitable to use as a symbol.
8. I am a person who may well be used as a symbol.
9. Of the Red Black Bear (red is here used as a trope),
10. I, as a person, have verily made my body.
11. When the little ones seek refuge in me as they travel the path
of life,
12. They shall always live to see old age.
13. When they make of me the means of reaching old age,
14. They shall enable themselves to live to see old age as they travel
the path of life.
1 5. The skin of my feet that is dark in color
16. I have made to be as my charcoal.
17. When the little ones make it to be as their charcoal,
18. They shall have charcoal that will easily sink into their skin as
they travel the path of life.
19. The tip of my nose, that is dark in color,
20. I have made to be as my charcoal.
21. When the little ones make it to be as their charcoal,
22. They shall have charcoal that will easily sink into their skin as
they travel tb ipath of life.
LAFLESCHH] TRIBAL RITES FREE TRANSLATION 131
23. My body, that is black in color,
24. I have made to be as my charcoal.
25. When the little ones make it to be as their charcoal,
26. They shall have charcoal that will easily sink into their skin.
27. They shall also find in it the means of reaching old age.
28. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
29. They shall enable themselves to live to see old age as they travel
the path of life.
30. The skin of my feet, that is gathered in folds,
31. I have made to be the means of reaching old age.
32. When the little ones also make it to be the means of reaching
old age,
33. They shall enable themselves to live to see old age as they travel
the path of life.
34. The muscles of my ankles, that are wrinkled,
35. I have made to be the means of reaching old age.
36. When the little ones also make them to be the means of reaching
old age,
37. They shall always live to see in the muscles of their ankles the
signs of old age.
38. The inner muscles of my thighs, that are gathered in folds,
39. I have made to be the means of reaching old age.
40. When the little ones make them to be the means of reaching old
age,
41. They shall enable themselves to live to see old age.
42. The muscles of my breast, that are gathered in folds,
43. I have made to be the means of reaching old age.
44. When the little ones make of them the means of reaching old age,
45. They shall enable themselves to live to see old age as they travel
the path of life.
46. The muscles of my arms, that are gathered in folds,
47. Shall be to them the means by which they shall see old age as
they travel the path of life.
48. My shoulders also that are bent with age
49. I have made to be the means of reaching old age.
50. When the little ones make them to be the means of reaching old
age,
51 . They shall always live to see in their shoulders the sign of old age.
52. The muscles of my throat, that are loosened with age,
53. I have made to be the means of reaching old age.
132 THE OSAGE TEIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
54. When the little ones also make of them the means of reaching old
age,
55. They shall always live to see in the loosened muscles of their
throats the sign of old age.
56. The thin hair on the crown of my head also
57. 1 have made to be the means of reaching old age.
58. The little ones in their old age
59. Shall always see the hair on the crowns of their heads thinned with
age.
60. The thin, yellowish hair of my head
61. I have also
62. Made to be the means of reaching old age.
63. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
64. They shall always live to see the hair of their heads thinned and
yellowish with age.
65. The four great divisions of the days
66. They shall always enable themselves to reach and to enter.
67. When the people of the Wa-zha'-zhe
68. And those of the Hon'-ga
69. Make of me their bodies,
70. They shall enable themselves to live to see old age as they travel
the path of life.
THE TSE THON'-KA (BUFFALO BACK) GENS
(Osage version, p. 351; literal translation, p. 518)
1. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
2. The Tsi'-zhu, a people who possess seven fireplaces,
3. Spake to one of their number, the Tse Thon'-ka (Buffalo Back),
4. Saying: O, grandfather,
5. We have nothing that is suitable to use as a symbol.
6. Tse Thon'-ka quickly replied, saying: O, little ones,
7. You say you have nothing that is suitable to use as a symbol.
8. I am a person who is suitable to use as a symbol.
9. The people of the Wa-zha'-zhe
10. And those of the Hon'-ga
11. Shall always use me as a symbol.
12. On their account I shall always be burning my fingers (referring
to his duties as Sho'-ka, kindling fires, etc.).
13. When they cause me to burn my fingers by calling me to their
service,
14. They shall enable themselves to live to see old age as they trave
the path of life.
I.AFLBSCHK] TRIBAL, RITES FREE TRANSLATION 133
15. When they make of me the means of reaching old age,
16. The four great divisions of days
17. They shall enable themselves to reach and to enter as they travel
the path of life.
THE NI'-KA WA-KON-DA-GI (MEN OF MYSTERY) GENS
(Osage version, p. 352; literal translation, p. 519)
1. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
2. The Tsi'-zhu, a people who possess seven fireplaces,
3. Spake to one of their number, the Ni'-ka Wa-kon-da-gi (Men of
Mystery),
4. Saying: O, grandfather,
5. We have nothing that is suitable to use as a symbol.
6. The Ni'-ka Wa-kon-da-gi quickly replied, saying: O, little ones,
7. You say you have nothing that is suitable to use as a symbol.
8. I am a person who is suitable to use as a symbol.
9. Of the red metal
10. I, as a person, have verily made my body.
1 1 . When the little ones make of it their bodies,
12. They shall enable themselves to live to see old age as they travel
the path of life.
13. When they make of it the means of reaching old age,
14. They shall be free from all causes of death as they travel the
path of life.
15. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
16. He spake again, saying: Of the black metal
17. I, as a person, have, verily, made my body.
18. When the little ones make of it their bodies,
19. They shall enable themselves to live to see old age as they travel
the path of life.
20. When of the black metal
21. They make their bodies in their life's journey,
22. Their skin, like that metal, shall be difficult to penetrate.
23. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
24. He spake again, saying: Of the loose, rough metal
25. I, as a person, have, verily, made my body.
26. When the little ones make of it their bodies,
27. When of the loose rough metal,
28. They make their bodies,
29. They shall cause themselves to be difficult to overcome by death.
30. When they make of it the means of reaching old age,
31. They shall live to see old age, as they travel the path of life.
134 THE OSAGE TRIBE [KTH. ANN. 36
32. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
33. He spake again, saying: Of the yellow metal,
34. I, as a person, have verily made my body.
35. When the little ones make of it their bodies,
36. They shall be free from all causes of death.
37. They shall enable themselves to be difficult to overcome by death.
38. When they make of it the means of reaching old age,
39. They shall live to see old age, as they travel the path of life.
40. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
41. To the four great divisions of the days
42. They shall cause themselves to reach and to enter as they travel
the path of life.
43. These shall stand for the bodies of the little ones.
44. Of the hard hailstone,
45. Also,
46. I, as a person, have verily made my body.
47. Of the hard corn (the flint corn),
48. Together with the hailstone, I have made myself to be a person.
49. When the little ones make of these their bodies,
50. They shall enable themselves to live to see old age as they travel
the path of life.
51. When the little ones use the hard corn for food,
52. They shall enable themselves to live to see old age as they travel
the path of life.
THO'-XE PA THI-HO" (BUFFALO BULL) GENS
(Osage version, p. 353; literal translation, p. 521)
1 . Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
2 The Tsi'-zhu, a people who possess seven fireplaces,
3. Spake to the Tho'-xe Pa Thi-hon (Tho'-xe, archaic name for buf
falo bull; Pa Thi-hon, Lift ye your heads, refers to story, p. 64),
4. Saying: O, grandfather,
5. We have nothing that is suitable to use as a symbol:
6. Come down to us, O, grandfather! they said to him (the Tho'-xe
are a sky people).
7. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
8. The Tsi'-zhu Wa-shta'-ge (here personified), who sat with the
Tsi'-zhu of the seven fireplaces,
9. Had with him his red plume (symbol of the dawn and of peace),
10. Which he quickly took from its coverings
1 1. And shot into the mouth of the angry bull; it lodged by the left
side of his tongue,
12. Where it lay lengthwise by the side of the tongue.
I.AFHSCHE] TRIBAL RITES FREE TRANSLATION 135
13. Thereupon the Bull lowered his tail, which he had lifted in anger,
and stood subdued by the magic of peace.
14. Then the Tho'-xe spake, saying: O, Tsi'-zhu,
15. You say you have nothing that is suitable to use as a symbol.
16. I, who stand here, am a person who is suitable to use as a symbol.
17. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
18. The Bull, preparatory to an extraordinary effort, expanded with
a quick motion the hairs of his tail
19. And tossed into the air a cloud of dust that obscured the scenes,
20. And he spake, saying: J am a person who is never absent from
the activities of life, O, Tsi'-zhu.
21. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
22. The Bull threw himself with a quick motion upon the earth,
23. And the bulbous root of the little great medicine (the poppy
mallow, pi. 21),
24. Rolled forth from his body upon the earth.
25. Whereupon he said : This root
26. Shall always be a medicine to the people.
27. When the little ones use it for medicine,
28. They shall enable themselves to live to see old age as they travel
the path of life.
29. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
30. The Bull again threw himself, with a quick motion, upon the
earth,
31. And the root of the Ha'-ba-kon-pe ci-da, "Ripens-with-the-corn"
(Ladniaria pycnostachya),
32. Rolled forth from his body upon the earth,
33. And the people said: Shall this root also
34. Be used by the people as medicine, O, grandfather?
35. Then hastily they put pieces of it into their mouths to test its
taste,
36. And said: It is bitter within the mouth, O, grandfather!
37. It is astringent, O, grandfather!
38. From this sacred plant we shall take a personal name, O, grand
father, that it may ever be remembered.
39. The name " Astringent "
40. Shall have a place among our sacred names, O, grandfather.
41. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
42. He (the Buffalo) led them to the Mon-kon-ton-ga, Great Medicine
( Cucurbita foetidissima) ,
43. Before which they stood, and they said:
44. Shall this plant be a medicine to the people, O, grandfather?
136 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 86
45. And the Bull spake, saying: When the little ones use this plant
as medicine,
46. They shall enable themselves to live to see old age as they travel
the path of life.
47. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
48. In the presence of the Mon-kon/ Ni-ka-shi-ga, Man Medicine
(Cucurbita perennis),
49. They came and stood,
50. And the people said: Shall this plant be a medicine to the little
ones, O, grandfather?
51. The Bull replied : When the little ones use this plant as medicine,
52. They shall enable themselves to live to see old age as they travel
the path of life.
53. When the people of the Wa-zha'-zhe
54. And those of the Hon'-ga
55. Use this plant also for medicine,
56. They shall enable themselves to live to see old age as they travel
the path of life.
57. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
58. The people said: Of what shall the little ones make their bodies ?
59. And, in response, the Bull caused the red corn
60. To roll forth upon the earth.
61. In like manner he sent forth the red squash
62. To accompany the red corn.
63. Then the red-haired animal also
64. He made to accompany them.
65. All these he sent rolling forth upon the earth, out of sight (refers
to the creation),
66. And he said: When the little ones use all of these as medicine,
67. They shall enable themselves to live to see old age as they travel
the path of life.
68. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
69. The people said: What else shall the people use as medicine?
70. Then the Bull spake, saying: The blue corn
71. Shall also
72. Be used by the little ones as medicine.
73. And the people said to one another: The black squash
74. We shall make to accompany it, O, younger brothers.
75. The dark-haired animal,
76. We shall make to accompany it, O, grandfather.
77. The Bull spake, saying: When the little ones use these as medicine,
78. They shall enable themselves to live to see old age as they travel
the path of life.
I.AFI.ESCHE] TRIBAL, RITES— FREE TRANSLATION ] 37
79. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
80. The Bull caused a speckled corn
81. To roll forth upon the earth,
82. Saying, as he did so: The speckled corn also
83. The little ones shall use as medicine.
84. When they use this corn as medicine,
85. They shall cause their limbs to stretch in growth as they travel
the path of life.
86. And the people said: The speckled squash
87. We shall make to accompany it, O, grandfather.
88. The speckled animal
89. We shall make to accompany it.
90. The Bull spake, saying: When the little ones use all of these as
medicine,
91. They shall enable themselves to live to see old age as they travel
the path of life.
92. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
93. The Bull spake, saying: These shall stand as medicine for the
little ones.
94. The yellow corn,
95. The little ones shall use as medicine.
96. When the little ones use the yellow corn as medicine,
97. They shall enable themselves to live to see old age as they travel
the path of life.
98. The people spake, saying: The yellow squash,
99. We shall make to accompany it, O, grandfather,
100. The animal with yellow hair,
101. We shall make it to be the means of bringing, O, grandfather,
102. And the Bull spake, saying: When the little ones use all of these
as medicine,
103. They shall enable themselves to live to see old age.
104. When the people of the Wa-zha'-zhe,
105. And those of the Hon'-ga,
106. Use all of these as medicine,
107. They shall enable themselves to live to see old age as they travel
the path of life.
108. All of these they shall use to make their limbs to stretch in
growth.
109. The four great divisions of the days,
110. Verily the four great divisions,
111. They shall enable themselves to reach and to enter,
112. To the days that are calm and peaceful,
1 13. They shall enable themselves to come and to enter as they travel
the path of life.
138 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
114. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
115. The people said: What shall the little ones use as medicine?
116. The Bull replied: The aged animal (the buffalo bull),
117. The little ones shall use as medicine (the fat of the buffalo is used
in various ways for medicine, and also for ceremonial pur
poses).
118. When the little ones use the aged animal as medicine,
119. They shall enable themselves to live to see old age as they travel
the path of life.
120. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
121. The Bull spake, saying: Behold the thick ball-like muscles of
my hind quarters.
122. When the little ones use this part of my body as medicine,
123. They shall enable themselves to live to see old age as they travel
the path of life.
124. Behold, the left side of my body,
125. Which I have made for use as medicine.
126. When the little ones use this part of my body as medicine,
127. They shall enable themselves to live to see old age as they
travel the path of life.
128. Behold, the muscles of my spine (one side),
129. Which I have made for use as medicine.
130. When the little ones use this part of my body as medicine,
131. They shall enable themselves to live to see old age as they travel
the path of life.
132. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
133. The Bull spake, saying: Behold, the muscles of my spine (the
other side),
134. The fat of which I, who stand here, have made for use as a
healing ointment, and oil for ceremonial purposes.
135. The people of the Wa-zha'-zhe
136. And those of the Hon'-ga
137. Shall use the fat of this part of my body as ointment.
138. When they use the fat of this part of my body as a healing oint
ment, and oil for ceremonial purposes,
139. They shall enable themselves to live to see old age as they travel
the path of life.
140. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
141. He said to the people: Behold, the right side of my body,
142. Which I, who stand here, have made for use as medicine.
LAPLESCHB] TRIBAL RITES — FREE TRANSLATION 139
143. When the little ones use this part of my body as medicine,
144. They shall enable themselves to live to see old age as they travel
the path of life.
145. Behold, the muscles of my breast,
146. Which I have made for use as medicine.
147. When the little ones use this part of my body as medicine,
148. They shall enable themselves to live to see old age as they travel
the path of life.
149. Behold also my heart sack,
150. Which I have made for use as medicine (used as a receptacle
for the medicinal fat).
151. When the little ones use this part of my body as medicine,
152. They shall enable themselves to live to see old age as they travel
the path of life.
153. The muscles of my limbs,
154. Those of the various parts of my body,
155. Verily, the muscles of every part of my body,
156. The little ones shall use as medicine.
157. When they use my body in all its parts as medicine,
158. Verily they shall enable themselves to live to see old age as they
travel the path of life.
159. When the people of the Wa-zha'-zhe
160. And those of the Hon'-ga
161. Use my body in all its parts as medicine,
162. They shall enable themselves to live to see old age as they travel
the path of life.
U-DSE'-THE A-DON-BE, KEEPER OF THE FIREPLACE
At the beginning of this ceremony the man who was the last to be
initiated into the mysteries of this rite is chosen to act as U-dse'-the
A-don-be, Keeper of the Fireplace. As the Non'-hon-zhin-ga enter
the lodge to take their places this officer takes his appointed seat
near the door, where he does not represent any gens but, rather, all
of the people. When the A'-ki-hon Xo-ka performs the ceremony of
Wa-the'-the, The Sending (of the Symbolic Articles), he sends with
a fee a bundle of counting sticks to the U-dse'-the A-doD-be. The
Sho'-ka, who carries the bundle of sticks, divides it into two parts,
one containing 70 and the other 60 sticks. He holds in his right
hand the bunch containing 70 sticks and in his left the bunch having
60. He crosses his forearms at the wrists and in this manner carries
the counting sticks to the U-dse'-the A-don-be, who receives and
140 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
holds the sticks in the same ceremonial manner. When the Non/-
hon-zhin-ga begin to recite the wi'-gi-es, this officer sings a song,
beating from time to time the two bundles of sticks against each
other. (Wa-xthi'-zhi, the informant, declined to give the song but
offered no reason for declining.)
When the reciting of the wi'-gi-es had come to a close, the U-dse'-
the A-don-be speaks, saying: "I am about to return these counting
sticks to the Xo'-ka, but before doing so I wish to give to all the
Non'-hon-zhin-ga present a word of warning before they rise to
depart. These counting sticks are now to be put in the care of the
wife of the Initiate (his ceremonial title is Wa-thon', Singer), and as
long as these sticks are in her keeping she shall be exempt from the
seizure of -any of her property for ceremonial use — namely, her wood;
her tent frames; stores of meat, fresh or dried; stores of corn; dried
squash; or any other food supplies. If an officer, notwithstanding
her claims to exemption, persists in seizing her property, then she
shall present to him this bundle of counting sticks and challenge
him to count the seven and six o-don/ he may have won in battle in
defending the homes of his people. Should the officer accept the
challenge and count the prescribed number of o-don/, she shall then
yield to him the property he demands, but let the officer beware of
speaking falsely in counting his o-don/."
Having given his word of warning, the U-dse'-the A-don-be beckons
to the Sho'-ka to come and take the counting sticks, which he hands
to him in the same ceremonial manner as they were received.
The U-dse'-the A-don-be, in addition to the fee that accompanied
the counting sticks, later receives two shares of the provisions fur
nished by the candidate.
INSTRUCTIONS TO THE WIFE OF THE INITIATE
The Sho'-ka, after presenting the bundle of counting sticks to the
Xo'-ka, goes out of the lodge. In a short tune he returns with the
wife of the Initiate and conducts her to a place where she sits facing
the Xo'-ka, his assistant, and the Initiate. The Sho'-ka then takes
the counting sticks from the Xo'-ka, in the ceremonial manner in
which he gave them to the U-dse'-the A-don-be, and presents them to
the woman with the same ceremony. After the counting sticks have
been thus ceremonially presented to the woman the Xo'-ka begins
the next ceremonial act, called Ki'-non U-tha-ge, the Symbolic
Painting — that is, the instructions to be given the woman as to how
she shall paint herself when seeking food for her children and in
caring for their bodily comfort. This ceremony opens with two
songs, called Tse Wa'-thon, Buffalo Songs.
i A i i I.M'III: |
TRIBAL RITES FREE TRANSLATION
TSE WA'-THON
SONG 1
141
Transcribed by Alice C. Fletcher.
M.M. , '.i-!
zSiii- -
no, Tso-zhin hin
i - no" ga, Wi - tsi - go, Wi - tsi
go.
Wi-tsi-go a, i-no°-ga,
Wi-tsi-go, Wi-tsi-go,
Tse-zhi" hi" 5! i-no"-ga,
Wi-tsi-go, Wi-tsi-go.
Wi-tsi-go a, i-non-ga,
Wi-tsi-go, Wi-tsi-go,
Tse-zhin hi" sha-be i-no"-ga,
Wi-tsi-go, Wi-tsi-go.
3
Wi-tsi-go a, i-no°-ga,
Wi-tsi-go, Wi-tei-go,
Tse-he-xo-dse i-no°-ga,
Wi-tsi-go, Wi-tsi-go.
Wi-tsi-go a, i-no"-ga,
Wi-tsi-go, Wi-tsi-go,
TBe-do-zhin-ga i-non-ga,
Wi-tsi-go, Wi-tsi-go.
Wi-tsi-go a, i-non-ga,
Wi-tsi-go, Wi-tsi-go,
Tse-no°-xtsi-non i-non-ga,
Wi-tsi-go, Wi-tsi-go.
6
Wi-tsi-go a, i-no"-ga,
Wi-tsi-go, Wi-tsi-go,
Tse-do-ta' a-ge i-no"-ga,
Wi-tsi-go, Wi-tsi-go.
142 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
FREE TRANSLATION
1
Grandfather, come hither,
Grandfather, O, Grandfather,
Little yellow-haired buffalo, come hither,
Grandfather, O, Grandfather.
2
Little dark-haired buffalo, come hither, etc.
3
Little gray-horned buffalo, come hither, etc.
4
Young male buffalo, come hither, etc.
5
Young female buffalo, come hither, etc.
6
Thou aged male buffalo, come hither, etc.
SONG 2
Transcribed by Alice C. Fletcher.
M..M. , - 92
r r r r r r ~r~ rrr r * rrr
i i I i i i i i Mi
\Vi Ni fjo a. i- non-ga, \\'i -tsi - jjo, \\i-tsi-go,
- rr ......... .
! I I I I I i , I !
Tse-zhi" hi" ci hiu-gthe, Do - ba non-non - ga, Wi - tsi • go.
1
Wi-tsi-go a, i-non-ga,
Wi-tsi-go, Wi-tsi-go,
Tse-zhin hin ci hiu-gthe,
Do-ba no°-non-ga, Wi-tsi-go.
Wi-tsi-go a, i-non-ga,
Wi-tsi-go, Wi-tsi-go,
Tse-zhin hin sha-be hiu-gthe,
Do-ba no°-non-ga, Wi-tsi-go.
3
Wi-tsi-go a, i-no°-ga,
Wi-tsi-go, Wi-tsi-go,
Tse-he-xo-dse hiu-gthe,
Do-ba non-no"-ga, Wi-tsi-go.
I.A FLUSCHBJ TRIBAL, KITES — FREE TRANSLATION 143
Wi-tsi-go a, i-no"-ga.
Wi-tsi-go, Wi-tsi-go,
Tse-do-zhin-ga hiu-gthe
Do-ba non-non-ga, Wi-tsi-go.
Wi-tsi-go a, i-no°-ga,
Wi-tsi-go, Wi-tsi-go,
Tee-no"- xtsi-non hiu-gthe
Do-ba non-no"-ga, Wi-tai-go.
6 •
Wi-tsi-go a, i-non-ga,
Wit-si-go, Wi-tsi-go,
Tse-do ts' a-ge hiu-gthe
Do-ba non-non-ga, Wi-tsi-go.
FREE TRANSLATION
1
Grandfather, come hither,
Grandfather, O, Grandfather,
Little yellow-haired buffalo, with four
Legs, come running, O, Grandfather.
Little dark-haired buffalo, with four
Legs, come running, O, Grandfather.
Young gray-horned buffalo, with four
Legs, come running, O, Grandfather.
Young male buffalo, with four
Legs, come running, O, Grandfather.
Young female buffalo, with four
Legs, come running, O, Grandfather.
Aged male buffalo, with four
Legs, come running, O, Grandfather.
As in the songs and wi'-gi-es of other tribal rites, the preceding
two songs hold a deeper meaning than the mere words convey. The
kinship term " Wi-tsi'-go" (grandfather) frequently mentioned in the
songs is not used'in its ordinary sense, but as an expression of vener
ation when contemplating the mystery of life, which is the actual
144 THE OSAGE TEIBE [ETH. ANX. 3G
theme of the songs. The Indian is thinking that upon these animals
his own bodily sustenance depends, and the song is a call to that
mysterious power of animal life so needed by man to come to his
help. and to come in an endless and constant succession. The stanzas
of the song are arranged so as to suggest the growth of the animal
from birth to old age, beginning in the first stanza with the yellowish
color of the hair of the newborn, through the changes in the coloring
of the hair, the growth of the horns, to the full maturity of the
animal, when the mating with the female occurs and the perpetua
tion of the species is assured, until finally the animal reaches old age,
when all its functional powers are at an end.
The second song relates to the activities of the animal when it has
attained all its capabilities. The call in these songs is not only to
the mysterious life embodied in the animal but to that of the human
race as well and represented by the Initiate and his wife.
In this connection it is of historic interest that the Omaha in their
call to the life of the buffalo begin with the bodily formation of the
animal while in its embryonic state, bringing it to its actual birth,
when it rises and places the imprints of its feet upon the bosom of
the earth. (See Twenty-seventh Ann. Kept. Bur. Amer. Ethn.,
p. 289.)
At the close of the songs the A'-ki-hon Xo-ka gives the instructions
to the woman as to certain supplicatory ceremonies to be performed
by her on behalf of her children as each one is born. These instruc
tions are the same as those in the Tse Wa'-thon given by Wa-xthi'-zhi
in his description of the Non/-zhin-zhon degree of the war rites, and
those given by Xu-tha'-wa-ton-in in his description of the Ni'-ki-e
degree of his gens. (See p. 270.)
When the A'-ki-hon Xo-ka has finished his instructions the woman
returns the counting sticks to him and then goes out of the lodge.
The leader of the Crawfish gens then speaks, saying: "O, Non'-hon-
zhin-ga, you may now remove from your faces the symbolic paint
ings." The women bring water and all the men, excepting those of
the Tsi'-zhu Wa-non, the Hon'-ga U-ta-non-dsi, and the gens of the
Initiate, wash their faces, while the men appointed to distribute the
provisions furnished by the Initiate perform their duties. Then, as
the women carry away the portions given to the families, all the
Non'-hon-zhin-ga, excepting those of the Hon'-ga U-ta-non-dsi, the
Tsi'-zhu Wa-non, and the initiating gens, go out of the lodge, those
of the Tsi'-zhu Division passing out by the south door and those of
the Hon'-ga by the north. Each Non'-hon-zhin-ga as he passes the
Initiate addresses him by the name of his gens and greets him with
the words, "O, Hon'-ga, living creatures shall come to you," meaning
that children will be born to him and to his wife and that they shall
have plenty of animal food on which to live.
I.A FLKSCHEJ TRIBAL RITES FREE TRANSLATION 145
THE MON'-GTHU-STSE-DSE (ARROW CEREMONY)
When the Non'-hon-zhin-ga has left the lodge, the Sho'-ka
approaches the A'-ki-hon Xo-ka and places in his hands a small bow,
the front of which is painted red to symbolize the day and the back
black to symbolize the night. . The bow is accompanied by two
arrows, each of which has a dual significance — namely, the arrow
painted red symbolizes day and the posterity of the Initiate; the one
painted black symbolizes night and also the posterity of the Initiate.
(See p. 99 for illustration.)
These symbolic weapons are in turn put by the A'-ki-hon Xo'-ka
into the hands of the Xo'-ka. The Initiate rises and with him the
Xo'-ka, who is to fit the arrows to the bow and to speed them one
after the other on an eternal course, even as the days and the nights
move on in endless succession.
The Xo'-ka addresses the members of the two gcntes who remained
to lend themselves for use as symbols, one as the sky and the other
as the earth, in this ceremony relating to the life force, and says,
''I call upon you, O, Tsi'-zhu and Hon'-ga, to assist me" (in the
speeding of this life). Ho then adjusts the red arrow to the string
of the bow, and as he does so he speaks to the Tsi'-zhu Wa-no",
saying, ''O, Tsi'-zhu, I am about to set in flight this arrow toward
you, and it shall not be without success. Toward the setting of the
sun there are seven villages; it is the seventh one at which I aim this
arrow." At this the Non'-hon-zhin-ga of the Tsi'-zhu Wa-non begin
to recite their wi'-gi-e relating to life (seep. 118). The Xo'-ka points
the arrow over the heads of the Non'-hon-zhin-ga and goes through
the motion of releasing it. At the same time he cries, "A-tha-tha
tha tha-tha . . .!" a cry uttered by a person when suddenly
stricken with pain, and follows the cry with the words, "Tsi'-zhu
o-xo-be xtsi e-dsi a-ka, we-ton-in da!" "It is apparent the Tsi'-zhu
(the Sky) sits yonder in mystery!" It was explained that the cry
is a mimicking of the cries of the persons tattooed, but most likely
this statement is to mislead the uninitiated, and the act undoubtedly
has a deeper significance, one touching closely upon the coming of
life into bodily form. The Xo'-ka then takes the black arrow,
adjusts it to the string of the bow, turns to the Non'-hon-zhin-ga of
the IIon'-ga U-ta-non-dsi (the Earth) and addresses them in the same
words he used to the Tsi'-zhu Wa-no". These also reply by reciting
their wi'-gi-o (see p. 102), while the Xo'-ka goes through the motion
of releasing the arrow over their heads and utters the cry of pain.
Each of these acts is repeated, and the last brings the ceremony to a
close.
2786— 21 10
146 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 30
THE ToN'-woN A-DON-BE (OVERSEEK OF THE VILLAGE)
Initiation into this rite confers upon the Initiate the office of con
ducting the ceremonies connected with the tattooing (to be given in
a later volume), as well as bestowing upon him an office bearing the
title of Ton'-won A-don-be, The Overseer of the Village. The cere
monies connected with the latter (a priestly office) are described as
follows :
At the beginning of the month of TV We-da-tha-bi, When-the-
Deer-give-birth-to-the-young (April), theNon'-hon-zhin-ga of the Tsi'-
zhu Wa-shta'-ge and those of the Wa'-tse-tsi Wa-shta'-ge gentes
assemble at the house of the Chief of the Tsi'-zhu Wa-shta'-ge to con
sider the ceremonies incident to that month when the people enter
upon a new year.
When all the Non'-hon-zhin-ga have taken their places, the Tsi'-zhu
Wa-shta'-ge Chief addresses them, saying: "O, Non'-hon-zhin-ga, we
have just passed through a great division of the days (year). We
have been free from any serious misfortune, free from disturbances
from without or within the tribe. The days just passed have been
calm and peaceful, and all the people have been happy, for there has
been no hatred among them. We are now entering a new period
(year), and we assemble, according to custom, to prepare for the
ceremonies by which we call upon certain great gods to help us so
that we may enjoy another period (year) of tranquillity, another term
(year) of happiness. It is our duty at this time to make the neces
sary arrangements for the performance of these ceremonies."
The Non'-hon-zhin-ga members of both gentes then offer contribu
tions toward the fees that are to be paid to the Ton'-won A-don-be for
his priestly services. These fees consist of articles of value — clothing,
weapons, household goods, and in later tunes of horses. When most
or all of the members present have made their contributions, the
Non'-hon-zhin-ga form a procession and approach the house of the
Ton'-won A-don-be, taking with them the goods they have collected for
fees. When all have entered and taken their places the Chief of the
Tsi'-zhu Wa-shta'-ge gens addresses the priest as Grandfather and
asks him to perform the supplicatory ceremony. The Ton'-won
A-don-be is addressed as Grandfather because he represents the Power
to be appealed to for aid. When the Ton'-won A-don-be has given
his formal assent to act, he is conducted to the western end of the
lodge to a place and seat always reserved for the Wa'-don-be at the
ceremonies of the Non'-zhin-zhon- and the Wa-xo'-be degrees of the
war rites (see diagram, p. 83). At this ceremony the last Initiate
into the mysteries of the rites of the Mon-kon'-ton-ga Wa-xo'-be, the
Great Medicine Wa-xo'-be, is also given a seat beside the Ton'-wo"
A-don-be, so that the two great tribal divisions, the Tsi'-zhu and the
Hon'-ga, may be represented in this supplicatory ceremony.
LAFLESCHE] TRIBAL RITKS FREE TRANSLATION 147
When the two priests have taken their places the Ton'-won A-don-be
puts upon himself a buffalo robe with the hair outside, and upon his
head a bunch of feather barbs stripped from the shafts of the wing
feathers of the pelican, the bird symbolizing long life. These sym
bolic, articles make up his sacerdotal apparel.
Having put on this priestly attire, the Ton'-won A-don-be recites a
wi'-gi-e, which is divided into five sections. The first relates to the
priestly office. The second is an appeal to Hon'-ba Wa-cu, the god
of the cloudless day; this god is pure and free from the destructive
influences of anger and hatred; to him the people of the Wa'-tse-tsi
Wa-shta'-ge and of theTsi'-zhu Wa-shta'-ge gentes appeal for aid in
helping all the people to pass through another period (year) of peace
and good will. The third is an address to Wa-kon'-da Hon'-non-pa-ce,
the goddess of darkness; she is not only benevolent, but possesses the
power of reproduction, and to her these people of peace appeal for
aid in leading all the people along the paths of peace so that the little
ones may successfully be brought to maturity. The fourth is an
appeal to Wa-kon'-da Mo"-shi'-ta, god of the upper region (sky), who
also exerts his power toward the production of life; to him these
people appeal for aid in leading the people along the paths of peace.
The fifth is an appeal to Wa-ko"'-da Hiu-dse-ta, the goddess of the
lower region (the earth), she who possesses power to bring forth life;
to her the two chiefs and their followers appeal for aid in their task
of leading all the people safely along the paths of peace and prosperity.
The choice of the month in which the deer bring forth their young
for the beginning of this ceremonial year is in itself an implied suppli
cation for the natural increase of the tribe. It is during that month
that the "goddess of the lower region" begins to put forth her energy
and brings into bodily existence both vegetable and animal life in all
its variety of forms.
The two pairs of gods addressed in this wi'-gi-e are personified
attributes of the unseen Wa-kon'-da.
Wl'-GI-E OF THE TON'-WON A-DON-BE
(Osage version, p. 357; literal translation, p. 525)
1 . Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
2. The people spake to him (the Ton'-won A-don-be), saying: O,
grandfather,
3. We have nothing suitable for use as a symbol, O, grandfather.
4. Verily, at that time and place,
5. He made haste to reply: You say you have nothing suitable for
use as a symbol,
6. O, little ones,
7. There are four great gods.
148 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
8. Then they spake again, saying: Let these four great gods
9. Be assembled, 0, grandfather.
10. Verily, at that time and place,
11. They beheld standing Hon'-ba Wa-cu, the god of the cloudless
days, to whom they spake,
12. Saying: O, grandfather,
13. The little ones have nothing of which to make their bodies.
14. The god of cloudless days replied: O, little ones,
15. I am the only great god.
16. The little ones shall make of me their bodies.
17. When they make of mo their bodies,
18. They shall enable themselves to live to see old age as they travel
the path of life.
19. The four divisions of the days
20. They shall enable themselves to reach and enter as they travel
the path of life.
21. The people of the Wa-zha'-zhe,
22. Those of the Hon'-ga,
23. And those of the Tsi'-zhu,
24. The four great divisions of the days,
25. They shall enable themselves to reach and enter as they travel
the path of life.
26. Verily, the days that are calm and peaceful,
27. They shall enable themselves to reach and enter as they travel
the path of life.
28. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
29. They shall enable themselves to live to see old age as they travel
the path of life.
30. Then to Wa-kon'-da Hon-non-pa-ce, the goddess of darkness
standing there,
31. They spake, saying: O, grandmother,
32. The little ones have nothing of which to make their bodies.
33. Quickly the goddess of darkness replied: O, little ones.
34. You say the little ones have nothing of which to make their
bodies.
35. The little ones shall make of me their bodies as they travel the
path of life.
36. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
37. They shall enable themselves to live to see old age as they travel
the patli of life.
38. The people of the Wa-zha'-zho,
39. Those of the IIon'-ga,
LAPLBSCHE] TRIBAL RITES FREE TRANSLATION 149
40. And those of the Tsi'-zhu
41. Shall make of mo their bodies as they travel the path of life.
42. When they make of me their bodies,
43. The four great divisions of the days
44. They shall enable themselves to reach and enter as they travel
the path of life.
45. Little ones,
46. Verily, an unbroken line of descendants they shall live to see as
they travel the path of life.
47. In the days that are calm and peaceful
48. They shall abide as a people as they travel the path of life.
49. I am not the only great god.
50. Then to Wa-kon'-cla Mon-shi-ta, god of the upper region (sky),
they spake,
51. Saying: O, grandfather,
52. The little ones have become a people, O, grandfather.
53. The god of the sky replied: The little ones shall make of me their
bodies.
54. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
55. They shall enable themselves to live to see old age as they travel
the path of life.
56. When the people of the Wa-zha'-zhe,
57. Those of the Hon'-ga,
58. And those of the Tsi'-zhu
59. Make of me their bodies as they travel the path of life,
60. They shall enable themselves to live to see old age as they travel
the path of life.
61. The four divisions of the days
62. They shall enable themselves to reach and enter as they travel
the path of life.
63. I am not the only great god.
64. To Wa-kon'-da Hiu-dse'-ta, the goddess of the lower region
(earth), they spake,
65. Saying: O, grandmother,
66. The little ones have nothing of which to make their bodies.
67. The goddess of the lower region replied : The little ones shall make
of me their bodies.
68. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
69. They shall enable themselves to live to see old age as they travel
the path of life.
70. Little ones,
71. Verily, an unbroken line of descendants they shall live to see as
they travel the path of life.
150 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
72. When the people of the Wa-zha'-zhe,
73. Those of the Hon'-ga,
74. And those of the Tsi'-zhu
75. Make of me their bodies as they travel the path of life,
76. Children, in an unbroken line of births, they shall live to see, as
they travel the path of life,
77. The four great divisions of the days,
78. They shall enable themselves to reach and enter, as they travel
the path of life,
79. The days that are calm and peaceful,
80. They shall enable themselves to reach and enter, as they travel
the path of life.
81. Verily, all the gods,
82. I, who stand here, have made to lie purified of anger and of
violence.
83. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
84. Children, in an unbroken line of births, they shall live to see, as
they travel the path of life.
At the close of the wi'-gi-e the Ton'-won A-don-be rises. He goes
out, stands in front of the door, and calls in a loud voice:
1. Wa-kon-da hon-ba tha-gthin ga-xe ta a-ka i11 da,
2. Tsi-zhu a-ka Wa-kon-da hon-ba tha-gthin tse e a-ka tha,
3. Zhin-ga-zhin-ga- u-ki-wa-wa-the xtsi ni-ka-shi-ga tse e a-ka in da.
He then walks to the eastern part of the village, where he proclaims.
4. Wa-kon-da hon-ba tha-gthin xtsi ta a-ka in da,
5. Ta-dse mi-hiu-dsi hon-ba tha-gthin xtsi ta a-ka in da!
He then turns and walks to the southern part of the village, where
he pauses and cries:
6. Ta-dse a-k'a dsi Wa-ko"-da hon-ba tha-gthin ga-xe ta a-ka in da!
He then turns and walks to the western part of the village, when
he pauses and calls:
7. Ta-dse ga-xpa dsi Wa-kon-da ho"-ba tha-gthin ga-xe ta a-ka in da!
Then he walks to the northern part of the village, where he stands
and cries:
8. Ta-dse ba-con dsi Wa-kon-da hon-ba tha-gthi" ga-xe ta a-ka i" da!
FREE TRANSLATION
1. Wa-kon/-da will cause the coming days to be calm and peaceful,
2. The Tsi'-zhu have called upon Wa-kon'-da to make the days calm and
peaceful,
3. That little ones may come to us in unbroken succession and we become a
people.
4. Wa-ko"'-da will make the days beautiful.
LAPLESCHB] TRIBAL RITES FREE TRANSLATION 151
5. Toward the winds of the rising of the sun the days will surely be calm and
peaceful.
6. Toward the winds of the south Wa-kon/-da will make the days to be calm
and peaceful.
7. Toward the winds of the setting sun Wa-ko"'-da will make the days to be
calm and peaceful.
8. Toward the winds of the land of cedars (the north) Wa-kon/-da will make
the days to be calm and peaceful.
Thus concludes the supplication of the Tsi'-zhu Wa-shta'-ge and the
Wa'-tse-tsi Wa-shta'-ge gentes to the four great gods. In this cere
mony is also an implied appeal to all the members of the tribe to
exercise self-control, so that no contentions may arise to excite anger
and hatred among the people but that all may live peacefully as in
days of cloudless skies.
Old men of the Tsi'-zhu Wa-shta'-ge gens, familiar with the
tribal traditions, say, in speaking of the office of chief, "When we
(the Tsi'-zhu) were called to the great council we were given a place
and the spokesman of the council said to us: "We have completed
the organization and have distributed the offices necessary for the
management of our government. You are the last to come into the
organization, but you shall have an office that shall be greatest in
sanctity and in dignity. The little ones (the people) shall be yours
to govern, and the title of your office shall be Ga-hi'-ge (Chief)
Your office shall be one of kindliness, and within your house there
shall be no anger, no hatred. You shall lead, and the people shall
follow you in the paths of peace that they may live long and increase
in numbers." (See fig 2, No. 4.)
The hereditary office then established was religious in character
and was held through centuries in reverence by the people, even with
superstitious awe. The advent of the European trader introduced a
strange element, one that in time interfered with tribal affairs and
opened the way to changes that finally led to the abandonment of
the consecrated office. These historic changes will be treated in a
later volume.
NI'-KI NON-K'ON RITE (HEARING OF THE SAYINGS OF
THE ANCIENT MEN)
(THE SEVENTH DEGREE OF THE OSAGE RITES)
The second Rite here presented is called by some of the gentes
Ni'-ki Non-k'on, Hearing of the Sayings of the Ancient Men, and by
other gentes Ni'-ki Wa-thon, Songs of the Sayings of the Ancient Men.
As has been previously pointed out (see introduction), this rite
deals with life in the abstract. It sets forth in particular the tribal
belief in the mysterious power known to the people as Wa-kon'-da
and of the conception concerning the close relationship between
Wa-kon'-da and all celestial and terrestrial forms.
PLACE OF THE NI'-KI NON-K'ON IN THE ORDER OF THE RITES
The Osage rites are divided into seven ceremonial divisions that
partake of degrees. According to the statements of certain men
familiar with the tribal rites it appears that the various gentes of the
tribe do not follow in an initiation a single fixed order of the seven
divisions, but that each gens has its own order, which it observes inde
pendently of the others. Whatever may be the differences in the
order of six of the degrees, the one about to be described is by all the
gentes placed last, and thus becomes the seventh degree.
The following example will illustrate this tribal custom:
ORDER FIXED BY THE THO-XE GENS
1. Wa-xo'-be A-wa-thon, The Singing of the Wa-xo'-be Songs. (The
Wa-xo'-be is the sacred hawk, the symbol of courage.)
2. Ca Tha-dse Ga-xe, The Making of the Rush Mat Shrine for the
Sacred Hawk.
3. Mon'-sha-kon U-gthon, The Placing of the Sacred Burden-Strap
Within.12
4. Non'-zhin-zhon Wa-thon, The Songs of the Vigil Rite.
5. Wa-zhin'-ga-o, The Rite of the Shooting of a Bird.
6. Wa-do'-ka We-ko, The Call to the Ceremonial Distribution of
Scalps.
7. Ni'-ki Wa-thon, Songs of the Sayings of the Ancient Men.
12 No intimation is given as to what the words "placing within" refer to, but possibly they mean the
placing of the rite pertaining to the symbolic burden-strap within the list of the tribal rites. A man who
desires to honor his wife and to give her social standing, has a symbolic burden-strap ceremonially made
for her. This sacred article she is enjoined to give a conspicuous place in her house— to the left of the door
if her father belongs to the Tsi'-zhti tribal division, or to the right of the door if her father belongs to the
Hon'-ga division.
152
BUREAU OF AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY
THIRTY-SIXTH ANNUAL REPORT PLATE 15
WA-XTHI'-ZHI
Member of ihr I»-Klhon'-K» ( I'uma) gens, son of Wa-lhu'-ts'a-t:a-7.hi. from whom he acquired his wide knowledge
of i lid I rihal riles. Wa-xthi'-ihilg gifted with a retentive memory, and In May. IHIN. at two consecutive sittings
of several hours each, recited I he WV-gi-ce of ID gentro, and lhal of I he tvrcmony of I he Tim'-wo" A-dim-lir, mak-
inj;iii all 1..W7 lines.
BUREAU OF AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY THIRTY-SIXTH ANNUAL REPORT PLATE 16
WA-THLT-TS'A-GA-ZHI (NEVER-FAILS)
Member of (he l"-clho"'-ca (Puma) gens, father of \Va-xthi'-zhi. II is said thai \Va-lhu'-1s'a-i;a-zhi
was well versed in all of the tribal riles and that he communicated much of his knowledge of the
riles to his son. lie died in 1910 at about SO years of age.
I. A n.ESCIIE]
Nl'-KI NON-K'ON RITE
153
ORDER FIXED BY THE IN-GTHON/-GA GENS
1. Wa-zhin'-ga-o, The Rite of the Shooting of a Bird.
2. Non'-zhin-zhon Wa-thon, The Songs of the Vigil Rite.
3. Wa-xo'-be A-wa-thon, The Singing of the Wa-xo'-be Songs.
4. £a Tha-dse Ga-xe, The Making of the Rush Mat Shrine.
5. Slon'-sha-kon Ga-xe, The Making
of the Sacred Burden-Strap (fig.
10).
6. Wa-do'-ka Wc-ko, The Call to
the Ceremonial Distribution of
Scalps.
7. Ni'-ki Non-k'on, The Hearing of the
Sayings of the Ancient Men.
The word Ni'-ki, the first part of the
title of the seventh degree, is a com
bination of two words, Ni'-ka, men,
and i'-e, words or sayings. The last
part of the title used by the Tho'-xe
(Buffalo) gens is Wa-thon/, songs,
"Songs of the Sayings of the Ancient
Men." In the title used by the I"-
gthon'-ga (Puma) gens the word used
is Non-k'on, to hear, making the full
title Ni'-ki Non-k'on, The Hearing of
the Sayings of the Ancient Men.
As the version about to be presented
of the Ni'-ki degree is that belonging
to the In-gthon'-ga (Puma) gens, the
title given by that gens to the degree
will be used in the rendition given by
Wa-xthi'-zhi (pis. 15, 16), who is a
member of that gens and a recognized
authority on the tribal rites.
Both Wa-xthi'-zhi and Tse-zhi1"-
ga-wa-da-in-ga stated that a candi
date taking the Ni'-ki degree of the war
rites is entitled to sit at the initiatory ceremonies of all the other six
degrees, for the reason that the Ni'-ki contains all the ceremonial forms
embodied in each of those degrees. An initiate into one of the seven
degrees who wishes to learn the ritual is required first to memorize the
titles of these degrees in the order as fixed by his own gens.
For some unexplained cause Wa-xthi'-zhi did not give a detailed
description of the preliminary .ceremonies of the Ni'-ki degree —
namely, the Ki'-non, the symbolic painting of the face and body of
the Xo'-ka; the putting on of his sacerdotal attire in a prescribed
manner; and the Tsi Ta'-pe, the ceremonial approach of the candi-
Fio. 10. — Mo»'-sha-ko" (Burden-strap). The
burden strap is the wa-xo'-be of the woman.
It is the emblem of her duty as a home-
buildor. The Mon'-sha-ko" ceremonially
made Tor a woman must never be used for
ordinary purposes. Its place is at the right
of the door of her house if she is by birth a
Hon'-ga, and at the left if she was born ;i
Tsi'-zhu. The Mo°'-sha-koo was made of
untanned buffalo skin.
154 THE OSAGE TRIBE [B?TH. ANN. 36
date, his initiator, the master of ceremonies, and the official messenger
to the House of Mystery. He made, however, the general statement
that a man wishing to be initiated into the degree sends the Sho'ka
(official messenger) of his gens for the Non'-hon-zhin-ga whom he desires
to act as Xo'-ka (initiator) and to confer the degree. On the arrival of
the chosen Xo'-ka the candidate makes his formal application for
initiation. During the formal conversation the two address each
other by the ceremonial kinship terms, elder brother and younger
brother.
REQUIREMENTS FOR INITIATION
Having come to an understanding as to the initiation, the two send
their Sho'-ka to summon the members of the order belonging to two
gentes — namely, the Tsi'-zhu Wa-non, the principal war gens of the
Tsi'-zhu division, and the Wa-zha'-zhe Wa-non, the principal war
gens of the Hon'-ga division. On the arrival of the Non'-hon-zhin-ga
summoned, the Xo'-ka, in a formal address, tells them that the
candidate wishes to be initiated into the mysteries of the Ni'-ki
degree of the war rites and asks permission to initiate him. When
the Non'-hon-zhin-ga of these two gentes have given their consent, a
matter of mere formality, the Xo'-ka himself, or a man chosen to
assist him, recites, for the benefit of the candidate, the Wa-dsu'-ta
I-hi-thon-be Wi'-gi-e, "Wi'-gi-e of the Appearance of the Animals"
(the appearance of life in bodily form), which is given in lines 341
to 427 of the Ni'-ki Wi'-gi-e (p. 167). This act binds the candidate
to carry out his determination to take the degree and the Xo'-ka to
confer it upon him. The candidate is given seven years within
which to prepare himself for the initiation. This he does by hunting
for the animal skins to be used as symbols in the ceremonies.
When the candidate has collected the animal skins required for the
ceremony, the fees for the Xo'-ka, the A'-ki-hon Xo'-ka, the leaders
of the gentes that take an active part in the ceremonies, and the pro
visions for the entertainment of all the members of the order, he is
then ready to take the degree. Having thus prepared himself for
the initiation, the candidate sends his Sho'-ka to give formal notice
to the Xo'-ka that he is ready to "sing" the "Ni'-ki Songs."
The following day, before sunrise, the Sho'-ka, A'-ki-hon Xo'-ka,
and the candidate go together to the house of the Xo'-ka, the Sho'-ka
carrying the Xo'-ka mi, ceremonial robe for the Xo'-ka, which is
a dressed buffalo skin, and also other ceremonial articles to be worn
by the Xo'-ka throughout the ceremony. The symbolic painting and
dressing of the Xo'-ka having been finished, the four men make the
Tsi-ta'-pe, the ceremonial approach, to the house of the candidate,
which, for the time, is the House of Mystery.
LAFUBSCHE] Nl'-KI NON-K'ON KITE 155
Ordinarily the ceremony begins from the Ki-cto' Songs, which
include the Tsi-gi'-ka-xe, Songs of Setting up the House of Mystery
(pp. 198-201), but when the Xo'-ka, on examining the fees, finds that
his candidate has been very liberal he shows his pleasure by beginning
with line 1 of the wi'-gi-e and reciting it to the end. A Xo'-ka
will also do this if his candidate is a personal friend.
When the Non'-hon-zhin-ga of the Wa-ca'-be or the In-gthon'-ga
gens, who are the first to enter, have taken their place at the east
end of the lodge, the Xo'-ka and his assistant sing the Ki-cto' Wa-tho,
Songs of the Gathering of the Non'-hon-zhin-ga. As before stated, the
version here given of this degree is that of the In-gthon'-ga (Puma)
gens, who use it in common with the Wa-ca'-be (Black Bear) gens.
When the singing of the songs has begun, the Non'-hon-zhin-ga of the
Tsi'-zhu division, being in this case guests, enter first, according to
gentcs, in single file and take their places at the north. Then,
according to gentes, the Non'-hon-zhin-ga of the Hon'-ga division enter
in single file and take their places at the south side of the lodge (see
diagram, p. 83).
When all have taken their places and the songs come to a close,
the A'-ki-hon Xo'-ka performs the Wa-the'-the, Sending Ceremony —
that is, the sending to the various gentes to whom they belong the
animal skins and the other articles collected by the candidate to be
used as symbols.
Wa-xthi'-zhi did not give the details of the Wa-the'-the ceremony
of the Ni'-ki Wa-thon, but Tse-zhin'-ga-wa-da-in-ga gave them not long
before his death and Wa-tse-mon-in recently.
WA-THE'-THE, OR CEREMONY OF SENDING
GIVEN BY TsE-zHi"'-OA-WA-DA-in-GA (Tno'-XE GENS)
Ta' I-ni-ka-shi-ga (Deer people). Mon'-ca, arrow shafts, seven in
number.
Fsi'-zhu Wa-non (War gens of the Tsi'-zhu). Mon'-hin-cpe, battle-ax.
Tsi'-zhu WTa-shta'-ge (Tsi'-zhu Peace gens). Red plume, downy eagle
feather.
Hon'-ga A-hiu-ton (Hon'-ga Eagle gens). White plume, downy eagle
feather.
Wa-ca'-be (Hon/-ga Black Bear gens). Mon'-hin, Knife. (See lines
1391 to 1439 of this ritual.)
Hon'-ga U-ta-non-dsi (Isolated Hon'-ga). I'-ga-mon, down of the
eagle.
(llVl.N BY \Y.\-TSK/-MON-IN (WA-fA-BK (il.S-
Tsi'-zhu Wa-non (Tsi'-zhu War gens). Mon'-ge tse-ha-\va-gthon,
Breast shield.
156 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
Wa-zha'-zhe Wa-non (Wa-zha'-zhe War gons). Arrow shafts, seven
in number.
Tse'-do-ga In-dse (Buffalo face gens). Buffalo skin for ceremonial
moccasins.
Wa'-tse-tsi Wa-shta'-ge (Hon'-ga Peace gens). E-dsi-u'-gthin, sit as a
symbol.
Mi-k'in' (Sun and moon people). E-dsi-u-gthin.
Hon'-ga U-ta-non-dsi (Isolated Hon'-ga). E-dsi-u'-gthin.
Ho1" I-ni-ka-shi-ga (Night people). E-dsi-u'-gthi".
Hon'-ga U-ga-shon (Hon'-ga Eagle gens). White plume, downy eagle
feather.
Ni'-ka Wa-kon-da-gi (Men of Mystery). E-dsi-u'-gthin.
Wa-ca'-be (Hon'-ga Black Bear gens). Mon'-hin, Knife.
Tho'-xe (Buffalo Bull gens). Wa-ton'-ci-wa-mon-dse, seed corn.
O'-pxon (Elk gens). Mon'-ce-e, iron hoe, and I'-ga-mon, eagle down.
The enumerations given by Tse-zhin'-ga-wa-da-in-ga (Tho'-xe gens)
and by Wa-tse'-mon-in (Wa-ca'-be gens) indicate that each gens has
its own version of the Wa-the'-the ceremony. In the enumeration
given by Tse-zhin'-ga-wa-da-in-ga the symbol he sends to the Tsi'-zhu
Wa-non is a Mon'-hin-cpe, battle-ax, a modern weapon substituted for.
the ancient one called I'-tsi", " a club to strike with." (For explana
tion of the substitution and for the story of the I'-tsin, see lines 182 to
292 of the Wi'-gi-e Ton-ga of the Tsi'-zhu Wa-non; also lines 139 to
292 of the Wa-sha'-be A-thin version of the same wi'-gi-e, to be given
in a later volume. Wa-tse'-mon-in, in his enumeration, sends to the
Tsi'-zhu Wa-non a Mon'-ge tse-ha-wa-gthon, breast shield. (For the
story of the symbolic breast-shield, see Ki'-non Wi'-gi-e, lines 24 to
44, and lines 529 to 549 of the Wi'-gi-e Ton-ga of the Tsi'-zhu Wa-non.)
Nl'-KI Wl'-GI-ES OF THE F-GTHON'-GA, WA-£A'-BE AND THE HoN'-GA
A-HIU-TON GENTES OF THE HON'-GA SUBDIVISION
Tse-zhin'-ga-wa-da-in-ga sends to the TV I-ni-ka-shi-ga, Deer gens,
of the Wa-zha'-zhe subdivision seven symbolic arrow shafts. Wa-
tse'-mon-in sends the arrow shafts to the Wa-zha'-zhe Wa-non gens,
the chief war gens of the Wa-zha'-zhe subdivision. (For story of the
seven symbolic arrows, see wi'-gi-e of the Hon'-ga A-hiu-ton, Eagle
gens, given by Wa-tse'-mon-in, lines 237 to 527.)
At the close of the Wa-the'-the ceremony the A'-ki-hon Xo'-ka and
the members of each of the gentes to whom fees were sent recite,
simultaneously, their wi'-gi-es. The A'-ki-hon Xo'-ka, when the
degree is being conferred by the I"-gthon'-ga gens, usually begins with
line 1199 of his wi'-gi-e, but if he is a personal friend of the candi
date, or if he is pleased with the quality of his share of the fees, he
will recite from line 1 of the wi'-gi-e and continue to the end, thus
giving to the candidate the full story.
I.A FI.ESCHH] Nl'-KI NON-K'0N RITE 157
VERSION OF THE PUMA GENS
(Osagc version, p. 359; literal translation, p. 527)
1. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
2. The Hon'-ga, a people who possess seven fireplaces, were gathered
together;
3. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
4. They spake to one another as they stood, saying: O, my younger
brothers,
5. Should not the little ones go below (to the earth) to become a
people? they said, as they stood facing one another.
6. Then, verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
7. They turned to four great gods in appeal for aid;
8. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
9. They spake first to the god of Day, who sitteth in the heavens,
10. Saying: O, my grandfather,
1 1. Should not the little ones go below to become a people?
12. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
13. The god of Day replied, saying: You have said the little ones
have become persons;
14. You have said the little ones should go below to become a people.
15. The little ones shall make of me their bodies.
16. When the little ones go below and become a people,
17. They shall find in me the means of reaching old age.
18. Behold my toes that are gathered in a cluster,
19. In which the little ones shall find the means of reaching old age.
20. Behold my ankles, that are wrinkled with age,
21 . In which the little ones shall find the means of reaching old age.
22. Behold my knees, that are wrinkled with age,
23. In which the little ones shall find the means of reaching old ago.
24. Behold the inner muscles of my thighs,
25. In which the little ones shall find the means of reaching old age.
26. Behold also the muscles of my breast, that are gathered in folds.
27. In which the little ones shall find the means of reaching old age.
28. Behold the muscles of my arms, they have grown flabby with age.
29. In which the little ones shall find the means of reaching old age.
30. Behold the muscles of my throat, that have grown flabby with age,
31. In which the little ones shall find the means of reaching old age.
32. Behold my hair, that has grown scant and yellowish with age,
33. In these scant locks of hair also
34. The little ones shall find the means of reaching old age.
35. When the little ones make of me the moans of reaching old age,
36. They shall always live to see their hair grown scant and yellowish
with age.
158 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. AXN. 36
37. Behold the hair on the crown of my head, that has grown scant
with age,
38. In which the little ones shall find the means of reaching old age.
39. When the little ones make of me the means of reaching old age,
40. They shall always live to see the hair on the crown of their heads
grown scant with age.
41. In the four great divisions of the days (stages of life)
42. I dwell as a person.
43. When the little ones make of me their bodies
44. These four great divisions of the days
45. They shall enable themselves to reach and enter as they travel
the path of life.
46. And in the days that are calm and peaceful
47. The little ones shall abide as a people as they journey upon life's
pathway.
48. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
49. The Hon'-ga, a people who possess seven fireplaces, were
gathered together.
50. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
51. They spake to one another as they stood, saying: O, younger
brothers,
52. Should not the little ones go below to become a people, they said
as they stood facing one another.
53. Then, verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
54. They turned to four great gods in appeal for aid.
55. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
56. They next spake to the god of Night, who sitteth in the heavens,
57. Saying: O, my grandmother,
58. Should not the little ones go below to become a people ?
59. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
60. The god of Night replied, saying: You say the little ones should
go below to become a people.
61. When the little ones go below and become a people,
62. They shall find in me the means of reaching old age.
63. Behold my toes, that are gathered in a cluster,
64. In which the little ones shall find the means of reaching old age.
65. Behold my ankles, that are wrinkled with age,
66. In which the little ones shall find the means of reaching old age.
67. Behold my knees, that are wrinkled with age,
68. In which the little ones shall find the means of reaching old age.
69. Behold the inner muscles of my thighs,
70. In which the little ones shall find the means of reaching old age.
LAFLKSCHE] Nl'-KI NON-K'oN KITE 159
71 . Behold also the muscles of my breast, that are gathered in folds,
72. In which the little ones shall find the means of reaching old age.
73. Behold the muscles of my arms, that have grown flabby with age,
74. In which the little ones shall find the means of reaching old age.
75. Behold my hair, that has grown scant with age,
76. The little ones
77. Shall always live to see their hair grown scant with age.
78. Behold the hair on the crown of my head, that has grown scant
with age,
79. These locks of hair also
80. The little ones
81. Shall always live to see the hair on the crown of their heads
grown scant with age.
82. The four great divisions of the days,
83. They shall enable themselves to reach and enter.
84. In the four great divisions of the days
85. The little ones shall always dwell as a people,
86. And in the days that are calm and peaceful,
87. The little ones shall always abide as a people.
88. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
89. The Hon'-ga, a people who possess seven fireplaces, were gathered
together.
90. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
91. They spake to one another as they stood, saying: O, younger
brothers,
92. The little ones have become persons; O, younger brothers, they
stood saying to one another,
93. Should not the little ones go below to become a people?
94. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
95. They turned to four great gods in appeal for aid.
96. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
97. They spake to the Male Star (Morning Star), who sitteth in the
heavens,
98. Saying, O, grandfather,
99. Should not the little ones go below to become a people?
100. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
101. The Male Star replied, saying. You say the little ones should go
below to become a people.
102. When the little ones go below and become a people,
103. The little ones shall find in me the means of reaching old age.
104. Behold my toes, that are gathered in a cluster,
105. In which the little ones shall find the means of reaching old age.
160 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANX. 36
106. Behold my ankles, that arc wrinkled with age,
107. In which the little ones shall find the means of reaching old age.
108. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
109. He continued: Behold my knees, that are wrinkled with age,
110. In which the little ones shall find the means of reaching old age.
111. Behold the inner muscles of my thighs,
112. In which the little ones shall find the means of reaching old age.
113. Behold the muscles of my breast, that are gathered in folds,
114. In which the little ones shall find the means of reaching old age.
115. Behold also the muscles of my arms, that have grown flabby
. with nge,
116. In which the little ones shall find the means of reaching old age.
] 17. Behold the muscles of my throat, that have grown flabby with
age,
118. In which the little ones shall find the means of reaching old age.
119. Behold my shoulder, that is bent with age,
120. In which the little ones shall find the means of reaching old age.
121. Behold my hair, that has grown scant and yellowish with age.
122. The little ones
123. Shall always live to see their hair grown scant and yellowish
with ago.
124. Behold the hair on the crown of my head, that has grown scant
with age.
125. The little ones
126. Shall always live to see the hair on the crown of their heads
grown scant with age.
127. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
128. He said to them: The four great divisions of the days
129. The little ones shall enable themselves to reach and enter.
130. In the four great divisions of the days
131. The little ones shall always abide as a people,
132. And in the days that are calm and peaceful
133. The little ones shall always abide as a people.
134. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
135. The Hon'-ga, a people who possess seven fireplaces, were gathered
together.
136. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
137. They spake to one another as they stood, saying: O, younger
brothers,
Nl'-KI NON-K'ON KITE 161
138. The little ones have become persons; O, younger brothers, they
stood saying to one another,
139. Should not the little ones go below to become a people?
140. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
141. They turned to four great gods in appeal for aid.
142. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
143. They spake to the Female Star (the Evening Star), who sitteth
in the heavens,
144. Saying: O, grandmother,
145. The little ones have become persons; O, grandmother, they said
to her,
146. Should not the little ones go below to become a people?
147. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
148. The Female Star replied: You say the little ones have become
persons.
149. When the little ones go below and become a people,
150. They shall find in me the means of reaching old age.
151. Behold my toes that are gathered in a cluster,
152. In which the little ones shall find the means of reaching old age.
153. Behold my ankles that are wrinkled with age,
154. In which the little ones shall find the means of reaching old age.
155. Behold my knees that are wrinkled with age,
156. In which the little ones shall find the means of reaching old age.
157. Behold the inner muscles of my thighs,
158. In which the little ones shall find the means of reaching old age.
159. Behold the muscles of my breast that are gathered in folds,
160. In which the little ones shall find the means of reaching old age.
161. Behold the muscles of my arms that have grown flabby with age,
162. The little ones shall always live to see the muscles of their arms
grown flabby with age.
163. Behold the muscles of my throat, that have grown flabby with
age,
164. The little ones shall always live to see the muscles of their throat
grown flabby with age.
165. Behold my shoulder that is bent with age,
166. The little ones shall always live to see their shoulder bent with
age.
2786—21 11
162 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 38
167. Behold my hair that has grown scant and yellowish with age,
168. The little ones
169. Shall always live to see their hair grown scant and yellowish
with age.
170. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
171. She said to them: The four great divisions of the days
172. The little ones shall enable themselves to reach and enter.
173. In the four great divisions of the days
174. The little ones shall always abide as a people.
175. In the days that are calm and peaceful
176. The little ones shall always abide as a people.
177. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
178. The people spake to one another, saying: Should not the little
ones go below to become a people?
179. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
180. They spake to one another, saying: O, younger brothers.
181. Then they turned to Hon'-ga A-hiu-ton, the Hon'-ga with wings
(the immature golden eagle),
182. To whom they spake, saying: O, younger brother,
183. Let the little ones go below to become a people; O, younger
brother, they said to him.
184. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
185. The Hon-ga A-hiu-ton replied, saying: You say the little ones
should go below to become a people.
186. I shall make search for a way and lead them thither, O, elder
brothers, he said, in quick response.
187. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
188. He led the people downward, passing through four heavens as
he descended,
189. Soaring swiftly in wide circles.
190. Four times he soared.
191. Without a pause he sped downward.
192. Verily, at that time and place, it has bt,^n said, in this house,
193. He came within sight of the tops of seven trees.
194. Close to these tree tops he soared and paused.
195. Then on the tops of the seven rees
196. The people alighted.
197. The people who possess seven fireplaces
198. Alighted upon the tops of the seven trees.
199. And set their feet firmly upon them.
200. They spake to one another, saying: O, younger brothers,
201. Behold it is not possible for the little ones to become a people
here below, O, younger brothers, they said to one another.
LAFUBSCHB] Nl'-KI NON-K'ON KITE 163
202. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
203. They spake again to one another, saying: O, younger brothers.
204. Then they turned to the Hon'-ga Wa'-tse-ga-wa (Star-radiant),
205. To whom they spake, saying: O, younger brother,
206. It is not possible for the little ones to become a people here
below, O, younger brother, they said to him.
207. Then the Hon'-ga Wa'-tse-ga-wa
208. Hastened, as these words were spoken,
209. To the Spider-like (the water-spider)
210. And spake to him, saying: O, grandfather,
211. It is not possible for the little ones to dwell upon the surface of
the water, O, grandfather.
212. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
213. The Spider-like replied, saying: You say it is not possible for
the little ones to dwell upon the surface of the water.
214. I shall make search for a way to help them, O little one.
215. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
216. Verily, against the current,
217. The Spider-like ran upon the surface of the water,
218. And he spake, saying: Even Wa-kon'-da himself
219. Is not able to see my footprints,
220. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
221. Even Wa-kon'-da himself
222. Shall not be able to see their footprints.
223. Behold the parting of the waters in forked lines as I push onward.
224. It is the parting of the gods of the waters to make way for me as
I push onward.
225. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
226. The gods themselves shall make way for them as they push
onward .
227. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
228. Wa'-tse-ga-wa hastened to the Black-bean-like (the water-
beetle, the whirligig) ,
229. To whom he spake, saying: O, grandfather,
230. It is not possible for the little ones to dwell upon the surface of
the water.
231. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
232. The Blaok-bean-like replied, saying: You say it is not possible
for the little.-ones to dwell upon the surface of the water.
233. I shall make search for a way to help them, O, little one.
234. Verily, as he spake these words,
235. He pushed forth, even against the current,
236. Rippling the waters as he sped onward,
237. And he spake, saying: Behold the parting of the waters as I
push onward.
164 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
238. It is the parting of the gods of the waters to make way for me as
I push onward.
239. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
240. The gods themselves shall make way for them as they push
onward.
241. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
242. The Hon'-ga, a people who possess seven fireplaces, were gathered
together.
243. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
244. They spake to one another, saying: The little ones have nothing
of which to make their bodies, O, younger brothers, they said
to one another.
245. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
246. The Hon'-ga Wa'-tse-ga-wa,
247. Even as these words were spoken,
248. Hastened to the Whitleather-like (a white leech),
249. To whom he spake, saying: O, grandfather,
250. It is not possible for the little ones to dwell upon the surface of
the water, O, grandfather.
251. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
252. The Whitleather-like replied, saying: You say it is not possible
for the little ones to dwell upon the surface of the water.
253. I shall make search for a way to help them, O, little one.
254. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
255. Even as he spake these words he pushed forth
256. And said to Wa'-tse-ga-wa: Behold the parting of the waters as
I push onward.
257. It is the parting of the gods of the waters to make way for me
as I push onward.
258. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
259. The gods themselves shall make way for them as they push
onward.
260. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
261. The Wa'-tse-ga-wa,
262. Even as these words were spoken,
263. Hastened to the Leech,
264. To whom he spake, saying: O, grandfather,
265. It is not possible for the little ones to dwell upon the surface of
the water, O, grandfather.
266. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
267. The Leech replied, saying: You say it is not possible for the
little ones to dwell upon the surface of the water.
268. I shall make search for a way to help them, O, little one.
269. Even as he spake these words he pushed forth,
LAFU5SCHB] Nl'-KI NQN-K'O* KITE 165
270. And he said to Wa'-tse-ga-wa: Behold the parting of the waters
as I push onward.
271. It is the parting of the gods of the waters to make way for me
as I push onward.
272. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
273. The gods themselves shall make way for them as they push
onward.
274. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
275. The people spake to one another, saying: O, younger brothers,
276. It is not possible for the little ones to dwell upon the surface of
the water, O, younger brothers, they said to one another.
277. Then they turned to Wa'-tse-ga-wa,
278. To whom they spake, saying: O, younger brother,
279. It is not possible for the little ones to dwell upon the surface of
the water, O, younger brother, they said to him.
280. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
281. Even as these words were spoken,
282. The Wa'-tse-ga-wa hastened forth and came to O'-pxon Ton-ga
(the Great Elk),
283. With whom he stood face to face.
284. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
285. He quickly returned and, standing before his elder brothers,
286. Spake to them, saying: Behold, elder brothers, a man stands
yonder.
287. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
288. The elder brothers spake, saying: In truth, what man's son is he?
289. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
290. The Great Elk himself replied, saying: I %m a Ho"'-ga (a sacred
person), O, elder brothers.
291. I am O'-pxon Ton-ga, O, elder brothers.
292. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
293. The elder brothers spake to him, saying: O, younger brother,
294. It is not possible for the little ones to dwell as a people upon
the surface of the water, O, younger brother, they said to him.
295. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
296. O'-pxon Ton-ga replied, saying: You say it is not possible for
the little ones to dwell as a people upon the surface of the
water.
297. I am a person who is never absent from any place or any
important movement.
298. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
299. O'-pxon Ton-ga suddenly threw himself violently upon the earth
300. And disturbing the water in all its vastness.
301. For a second time
166 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 30
302. He threw himself violently upon the earth,
303. And the depth of the waters began to lower.
304. The elder brothers then spake to one another, saying: O, younger
brothers,
305. It is certain from the signs that our younger brother is about to
perform some great deed, O, younger brothers.
306. For the third time O'-pxon Ton-ga
307. Threw himself violently upon the earth,
308. Again making the depth of the waters to lower.
309. For the fourth time
310. He threw himself violently upon the earth,
311. And he made the land of the earth to appear, to become dry
and habitable.
312. The elder brothers again spake to one another, saying: Behold,
younger brothers,
313. It is certain from the signs that our younger brother is about
to perform another great deed.
314. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
315. The Great Elk stood and faced the winds of the four corners of
the earth,
316. Faced each in turn in sacred sequence.
317. First the winds that come from the rising sun
318. He approached as in a hollow, stood therein,
319. And called loudly over the lands of the earth.
320. At the second movement
321. The winds that come from the land of cedars, the winds of the
north,
322. He approached as in a hollow and stood facing.
323. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
324. He called loudly over the lands of the earth.
325. Then the winds that come from where drops the sun (the west)
326. He approached as in a hollow, stood therein,
327. And called loudly over the lands of the earth.
328. At the fourth movement
329. The winds that come from A-k'a (A-k'a, the name for the south
winds, is archaic and can not be interpreted)
330. He approached as in a hollow, stood therein,
331. And called loudly over the lands of the earth.
332. Thus, for the winds of the four corners of the earth,
333. For the winds of each of the four corners,
334. He made and gave the breath of life.
335. Then he spake, saying: In this manner the little ones shall call
to the winds when in distress.
336. Verily, in this manner they shall call to the winds,
LA FLESCHKj Nl'-KI NON-K'O" RITE 167
337. And their voice shall always be heard by Wa-kon'-da.
338. It is my breath of life.
339. When the little ones seek protection therein,
340. They shall enable themselves to live to see old age as they travel
the path of life.
341. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
342. The elder brothers spake to one another, saying: Behold, younger
brothers,
343. It is certain that our younger brother is about to perform another
great deed.
344. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
345. The Great Elk
346. Again threw himself violently upon the earth.
347. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
348. He strew upon the earth the hairs of his body, where they lay
in profusion.
349. Then the Great Elk spake, saying: Behold these hairs of my
body,
350. I have not scattered them upon the earth without a purpose.
351. Grasses of the earth,
352. Of every kind I have made them to be.
353. When the little ones approach the grasses of the earth (in search
for food),
354. There, in their midst the animals shall always appear for them
in abundance.
355. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
356. The Great Elk turned his head away from the elder brothers
357. And spake, saying: Behold the ball-like muscles of my rump,
358. The rounded hills of the earth.
359. Verily, all the rounded hills of the earth I have made them to be.
360. When the little ones approach the rounded hills of the earth,
361. There the animals shall always appear for them in abundance.
362. Behold the side of the upper part of my body.
363. This also shall be
364. The wide plains of the earth.
365. Verily, all the plains of the earth I have thus made them to be.
366. When the little ones approach the plains of the earth,
367. There the animals shall always appear for them in abundance.
368. Behold the middle of my back, my spine,
369. That also shall be
370. The ridges of the earth.
371. Verily, all the ridges of the earth I have made my spine to be.
168 THE OSAGE TRIBE [BTH. ANN. 36
372. When they approach the ridges of the earth,
373. For the use of the little ones,
374. The animals shall always appear on the ridges of the earth.
375. Verily, at that time and place, it has heen said, in this house,
376. He spake again to the elder brothers, saying: Behold the inward
curve of my neck.
377. This is the gaps in the ridges of the earth,
378. Verily, all the gaps of the ridges of the earth I have made to be
as the curve of my neck.
379. When the little ones approach the gaps of the ridges of the earth,
380. There the animals shall always appear for them in abundance.
381. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
382. He spake again, saying: Behold the tip of my nose,
383. That is not in its place without a purpose,
384. The ends of the ridges of the earth,
385. Verily, all the ends of the ridges of the earth I have made it to be.
386. When the little ones approach the ends of the ridges,
387. There the animals shall always appear for them in abundance.
388. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
389. He said to them: Behold the topmost tines of my horns.
390. These are the small creeks of the earth.
391. Verily, all the small creeks of the earth I have made them to be.
392. When the small creeks of the earth
393. The little ones approach,
394. There the animals shall always appear for them in abundance.
395. Behold the branch of my horn next in line below.
396. They are the larger branches of the streams of the earth.
397. Verily, all the larger branches of the streams I have made them
to be.
398. When the little ones approach the larger branches,
399. There the animals shall always appear for them in abundance.
400. Behold the largest of the tines,
401. The branches of the rivers on whose banks stand groves of trees.
402. Verily, all the branches of the rivers on whose banks stand groves
of trees I have made them to be.
403. When the little ones approach the branches of these rivers,
404. Along the banks of these branches also
405. The animals shall appear for them in abundance.
406. Behold the main beams of my antlers,
407. They are also
408. The great rivers of the earth.
LAFLESCHE] . Nl'-KI NO*-K'ON RITE 169
409. Verily, all the great rivers of the earth I have made them to be.
410. When the little ones approach the banks of the rivers of the earth,
411. There also,
412. The animals shall always appear for them in abundance.
413. Behold the bases of my horns,
414. The loose rocks of the earth.
415. Verily, all the loose rocks of the earth I have made them to be.
416. When the little ones approach the loose rocks of the earth,
417. The animals shall always appear for them in abundance;
418. When they approach the loose rocks of the earth,
419. The little ones shall always cause the animals to appear in
abundance.
420. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
421. He continued: Behold the center of my forehead,
422. It is not in its place without a purpose,
423. I have made it to be a snare (for all creatures) for my own use;
424. When the little ones also make of it a snare for their use,
425. They shall always make use of it when they go against their
enemies toward the setting of the sun,
426. To overcome their foes and make them to fall.
427. Behold my brow antlers, that are curved downward.
428. They are not curved without a purpose.
429. I have made them to be standards for my own use.
430. Toward the setting of the sun are my enemies.
431. It is toward them that I have menacingly turned my curved
antlers.
432. They shall be used by the little ones when they go against their
enemies toward the setting of the sun,
433. To overcome their foes and make them to fall.
434. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
435. The Hon'-ga, a people who possess seven fireplaces,
436. Spake to one another, saying: O, younger brothers,
437. It is not possible for the little ones to dwell upon the surface of
the water.
438. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
439. The Hon'-ga Wa'-tse-ga-wa
440. Set forth with quickened footsteps
441. Toward an open prairie where trees grow not,
442. And there, before the open prairie, he paused and stood.
443. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
444. He beheld there a man,
445. Standing plainly in sight,
170 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
t
446. Standing with uplifted hand,
447. With the fingers divided, giving the hand a cloven, a forked
appearance.
448. Wa'-tse-ga-wa returned in haste
449. And spake to his elder brothers, saying: O, elder brothers,
450. A man stands yonder in the open prairie.
451. Then the elder brothers spake, saying: O, younger brothers,
452. It matters not what man's son he may be.
453. Let us send him to the abode of spirits, O, younger brothers.
454. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
455. With heads bent forward and with firm resolve,
456. They hastened thitherward with quickened footsteps.
457. His index finger the leader
458. Moistened between his lips to slay the man by pointing at him
with it.
459. It matters not what man's son he may be,
460. Let us send him to the abode of spirits, O, younger brothers,
they said to one another.
461. The brothers came close to the man and paused,
462. Whereupon the man spake, saying: O, elder brothers,
463. I am a Hon'-ga,
464. I am Hon'-ga Mon-in'-ka-zhin-ga, The Little Earth.
465. I am he, O, elder brothers.
466. I am a person who is never absent from movements of impor
tance.
467. I am about to give you the things that will cause you to be
heartily grateful, O, elder brothers.
468. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
469. The elder brothers spake to one another, saying: O, younger
brothers,
470. It is certain by the signs that our younger brother
471. Is about to perform some important deed.
472. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
473. A bit of the dark soil of the earth,
474. The Little Earth brought forward and stood holding it aloft and
offering it to the brothers,
475. Saying, as he did so: This bit of the earth's soil
476. I give to you ; it is a gift that will satisfy your hearts' longings,
O, elder brothers.
477. When you use it (as a sacred symbol), when offering your suppli
cations,
478. Your prayers shall always be readily granted, O, elder brothers.
IAFI.ESCHE] Nl'-KI NQN-K'O" RITE 171
479. When, in the dawning of the day,
480. You put upon your face a bit of the dark soil of the earth
481. And shed your tears of longing,
482. Even before the sun has risen to the height of your houses,
483. Your prayers shall always be readily granted, O, elder brothers.
484. Although this be true,
485. When you have put upon your face the dark soil of the earth
486. Beware of closing your eyes in sleep, O, elder brothers,
487. For when you close your eyes in sleep, while yet this sign is upon
your face,
488. You shall cause yourself to fail to reach old age, O, elder brothers.
489. Verily, at that time and place; it has been said, in this house,
490. The Little Earth brought forward a bit of the blue soil of the
earth
491. And stood offering it to the brothers,
492. Saying, as he did so: This bit of the earth's soil, I also,
493. Give to you, it is a gift that will satisfy your hearts' longings.
494. When you use it when offering your supplications,
495. Your prayers shall always be readily granted, O, elder brothers,
496. When, in the dawning of the day,
497. You put upon your face a bit of the blue soil of the earth,
498. Even before the sun has risen to the height of your houses,
499. You shall never fail to secure fulfillment of your desires, O, elder
brothers.
500. Verily, at that time and place; it has been said, in this house,
501. Little-earth sank into the ground as though gulped in by it,
502. And quickly reappeared with a bit of the red soil of the earth,
503. Which he stood offering to the brothers,
504. Saying as he did so: This bit of the earth's soil also,
505. I give to you, it is a gift that will satisfy your hearts' longings,
O, elder brothers.
506. When you put upon your face a bit of the red soil of the earth,
507. You shall not shed tears, O, elder brothers,
508. For when you shed tears while yet this sign is upon your face,
509. There are penalties which I shall make you to suffer, O, elder
brothers,
510. Although this be true,
511. When you go forth toward the setting of the sun,
512. You shall surely succeed in making your enemies to fall in death,
O, elder brothers,
513. You shall always succeed with ease in making your enemies to
fall in death, O, older brothers,
172 THE OS AGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
514. Verily, at that time and place; it has been said, in this house,
515. He again sank into the earth as though gulped in,
516. And quickly reappeared with a bit of the yellow soil cf the earth,
517. Which he stood offering to the brothers,
518. Saying, as he did so; This bit of the earth's soil also,
519. You shall carry with you as you offer your supplications,
520. When you go forth toward the setting of the sun,
521. And when the fair captive,
522. You cause yourself to find and take,
523. You shall put upon his face this bit of earth as a captive sign,
O, elder brothers,
524. The fair captive you shall always succeed in finding and taking,
O, elder brothers, he said to them.
525. Verily, at that time and place; it has been said, in this house,
526. He further said to them: Behold my cloven hands,
527. Which I hold up not without a purpose.
528. It is toward the setting of the sun,
529. That I raise these cloven hands in menace;
530. When the little ones turn to these hands for protecting aid,
531. They shall always succeed in making their enemies to fall.
532. I have made these cloven hands to be the forked poles,
533. Verily, every kind of forked pole and for every use;
534. Verily, at that time and place; it has been said, in this house,
535. He said to them: When the little ones turn to these hands for
protecting aid,
536. The little ones shall always find with ease a protecting aid,
O, elder brothers, he said to them.
537. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
538. The Hon'-ga, a people who possess seven fireplaces, spake to one
another,
539. Saying: O, younger brothers,
540. The little ones have nothing of which to make their bodies,
541. Whereupon the Hon'-ga Wa'-tse-ga-wa,
542. Quickly went forth to the great red boulder, that sitteth firmly
upon the earth.
543. Close to the red boulder he paused and stood;
544. Then in haste he returned to his elder brothers, to whom he said :
545. O, elder brothers,
546. A grandfather of ours sits yonder, O, elder brothers.
547. Then the elder brothers spake to one another, saying: O, younger
brothers,
548. Our younger brother
549. Tells us a grandfather of ours sits yonder.
r.A FI.ESCHK] Nl'-KI NQN-K'QN BITE 173
550. Then with heads bent thitherward
551. They set forth with quickened footsteps
552. To the red boulder that sitteth firmly upon the earth.
553. Around it they gathered, close to it they stood and spake rev
erently,
554. Saying: O, grandfather.
555. O, grandfather, they said to him,
556. The little ones have nothing of which to make their bodies.
557. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
558. The red boulder spake, saying: You say the little ones have
nothing of which to make their bodies.
559. I am a person of whom the little ones may well make their bodies.
560. I am difficult to be overcome by death.
561. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
562. They also shall always be difficult to overcome by death.
563. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
564. He spake again, saying: Even the malevolent gods in their
destructive course
565. Pass by me in divergent lines, leaving me unmolested.
566. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
567. The malevolent gods shall pass by, leaving them unmolested.
568. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
569. He continued: Even the malevolent gods
570. Stumble and fall when they happen to strike against me.
571. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
572. Even the malevolent gods
573. Shall stumble and fall when they happen to strike against the
little ones.
574. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
575. He said: Even the malevolent gods
576. Fear to sot teeth upon me in anger.
577. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
578. Even the malevolent gods
579. Shall fear to set teeth upon the little ones in anger.
580. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
581. He continued: Even the malevolent gods
582. Are stricken with pain when they dare to set teeth upon me.
583. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
584. Even the malevolent gods
585. Shall draw in their breath as when stricken with pain when they
dare to set teeth upon the little ones.
586. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
587. He said: Even the malevolent gods
5K8. Break their teeth when thcv set them upon me in anger.
174 THE OSAGE TRIBE IETH. ANN. 36
589. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
590. Even the malevolent gods
591. Shall break their teeth when they set them upon the little ones
in anger.
592. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
593. The Hon'-ga, a people who possess seven fireplaces, spake to one
another,
594. Saying: O, younger brothers,
595. The little ones have nothing of which to make their bodies,
596. Whereupon the Hon/-ga Wa'-tse-ga-wa
597. Quickly went forth
598. To the great black boulder that sitteth firmly upon the earth.
599. Close to the black boulder he paused and stood.
600. Then, in haste, he returned to his elder brothers, to whom he
said: O, elder brothers,
601. A grandfather of ours sits yonder, O, elder brothers.
602. Then the elder brothers spake to one another, saying: O, younger
brothers,
603. Our younger brother
604. Tells us a grandfather of ours sits yonder.
605. Then with heads bent thitherward
606. They set forth with quickened footsteps
607. To the black boulder, that sitteth firmly upon the earth.
608. Around it they gathered; close to it they stood and spake
reverently,
609. Saying: O, grandfather,
610. O, grandfather, they said to him,
611. The little ones have nothing of which to make their bodies.
612. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
613. The Black Boulder spake, saying: You say the little ones have
nothing of which to make their bodies.
614. I am a person of whom the little ones may well make their bodies.
615. I am difficult to be overcome by death.
616. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
617. They also shall always be difficult to overcome by death.
618. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
619. He spake again, saying: Even the malevolent gods in their
destructive course
620. Pass by me in divergent lines, leaving me unmolested.
621. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
622. The malevolent gods shall always pass by, leaving them
unmolested.
623. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
624. He continued: Even the malevolent gods
LAFLKSCam] Nl'-KI NON-K'QN RITE 175
625. Stumble and fall when they happen to strike against me.
626. When the little ones make of mo their bodies,
627. Even the malevolent gods
628. Shall stumble and fall when they happen to strike against the
little ones.
629. Verily, at that tune and place, it has been said, in this house,
630. He said: Even the malevolent gods
631. Fear to set teeth upon me in anger.
632. When the little ones make of mo their bodies,
633. Even the malevolent gods
634. Shall fear to set teeth upon the little ones in anger.
635. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
636. He continued: Even the malevolent gods
637. Are stricken with pain when they dare to set teeth upon me.
638. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
639. Even the malevolent gods
640. Shall be stricken with pain when they dare to set teeth upon
the little ones in anger.
641. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
642. He said: Even the malevolent gods
643. Break their teeth when they set them upon me in anger.
644. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
645. Even the malevolent gods
646. Shall break their teeth when they set them upon the little ones
in anger.
647. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
648. The Hon'-ga, a people who possess seven fireplaces, spake to one
another,
649. Saying: O, younger brothers,
650. The little ones have nothing of which to make their bodies.
651. Whereupon the Ho"'-ga Wa'-tse-ga-wa
652. Quickly went forth
653. To the White Boulder, that sitteth firmly upon the earth.
654. Close to the White Boulder he paused and stood.
655. Then in haste he returned to his elder brothers, to whom he said :
O, elder brothers,
656. A grandfather of ours sits yonder, O, elder brothers.
657. Then the elder brothers spake to one another, saying: O, younger
brothers,
658. Our younger brother
659. Tells us a grandfather of ours sits yonder, O, younger brothers.
660. Then, with heads bent thitherward,
661. They set forth, with quickened footsteps,
662. To the White Boulder, that sitteth firmly upon the earth.
176 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
663. Around it they gathered; close to it they stood and spake rev
erently,
664. Saying: O, grandfather,
665. O, grandfather, they said to it,
666. The little ones have nothing of which to make their bodies.
667. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
668. The White Boulder spake, saying: You say the little ones have
nothing of which to make their bodies.
669. I am a person of whom the little ones may well make their bodies.
670. I am difficult to be overcome by death.
671. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
672. They also shall always be difficult to overcome by death.
673. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
674. Even the malevolent gods, in their destructive course
675. Pass by me in divergent lines, leaving me unmolested.
676. When the little ones make of rne their bodies,
677. The malevolent gods shall always pass by, leaving them unmo
lested.
678. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
679. He continued: Even the malevolent gods
680. Stumble and fall when they happen to strike against me.
681 . When the little ones make of me their bodies,
682. Even the malevolent gods
683. Shall stumble and fall when they happen to strike against the
little ones.
684. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
685. He said: Even the malevolent gods
686. Fear to set teeth upon me in anger.
687. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
688. Even the malevolent gods
689. Shall fear to set teeth upon the little ones in anger.
690. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
691. He continued: Even the malevolent gods
692. Are stricken with pain when they dare to set teeth upon me.
693. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
694. Even the malevolent gods
695. Shall be stricken with pain when they dare to set teeth upon
the little ones.
696. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
697. He said: Even the malevolent gods
698. Break their teeth when they set them upon me in anger.
699. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
700. Even the malevolent gods
701. Shall break their teeth when they set them upon the little ones
in anger.
LAFLBSCHB] Nl'-KI NON-K'O" KITE 177
702. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
703. The Hon'-ga, a people who possess seven fireplaces, spake to
one another,
704. Saying: O, younger brothers,
705. The little ones have nothing of which to make their bodies.
706. Whereupon the Hon'-ga Wa'-tse-ga-wa
707. Quickly went forth
708. To the Yellow Boulder, that sitteth firmly upon the earth.
709. Close to the Yellow Boulder he paused and stood.
710. Then, in haste, he returned to his elder brothers, to whom he
said: O, elder brothers,
711. A grandfather of ours sits yonder, O, elder brothers.
712. Then the elder brothers spake to one another, saying: O, younger
brothers,
713. Our younger brother
714. Tells us a grandfather of ours sits yonder.
715. Then with heads bent thitherward
716. They set forth with quickened footsteps
717. To the Yellow Boulder that sitteth firmly upon the earth.
718. Around it they gathered, close to it they stood and spake rev
erently,
719. Saying: O, grandfather,
720. O, grandfather, they said to it,
721. The little ones have nothing of which to make their bodies.
722. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
723. The Yellow Boulder spake, saying: You say the little ones have
nothing of which to make their bodies.
724. I am a person of whom the little ones may well make their
bodies.
725. I am difficult to be overcome by death.
726. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
727. They also shall always be difficult to overcome by death.
728. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
729. He spake again, saying; Even the malevolent gods in their
destructive course
730. Pass by me in divergent lines, leaving me unmolested.
731. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
732. The malevolent gods shall always pass by, leaving them
unmolested ;
733. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
734. He continued: Even the malevolent gods
735. Stumble and fall when they happen to strike against me.
736. When the little ones make of n:o their bodies,
2786—21 - 12
178 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
737. Even the malevolent gods
738. Shall stumble and fall when they happen to strike against the
little ones.
739. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
740. He said to them: Even the malevolent gods
741. Fear to set teeth upon me in anger.
742. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
743. Even the malevolent gods
744. Shall fear to set teeth upon the little ones in anger.
745. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
746. He continued: Even the malevolent gods
747. Are stricken with pain when they dare to set teeth upon me.
748. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
749. Even the malevolent gods
750. Shall be stricken with pain when they dare to set teeth upon
the little ones.
751. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
752. He said to them: Even the malevolent gods '
753. Break their teeth when they set them upon me in anger.
754. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
755. Even the malevolent gods
756. Shall break their teeth when they set them upon the little ones
in anger.
757. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
758. The Hon'-ga, a people who possess seven fireplaces, spake to
one another,
759. Saying: O, younger brothers,
760. The little ones have nothing of which to make their bodies.
761. Whereupon the Hon'-ga Wa'-tse-ga-wa,
762. Even as these words were spoken,
763. Hastened to the Soft Yellow Rock, who sitteth firmly upon the
earth.
764. Close to the Soft Yellow Rock he paused and stood,
765. As he spake, saying: O, grandfather,
766. The little ones have nothing of which to make their bodies.
767. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
768. Then Wa'-tso-ga-wa hastened back to his brothers, to whom he
spake, saying: O, elder brothers,
769. A grandfather of ours sits yonder, O, elder brothers.
770. Then the elder brothers spake to one another, saying: O, younger
brothers,
771. Our younger brother tells us that a grandfather of ours sits
yonder.
772. Then, with heads bent thitherward,
I.A Kr,F.scHE] Nl'-KI NQN-K'QN RITE 179
773. The brothers set forth with quickened footsteps,
774. To the Soft Yellow Rock, who sitteth firmly upon the earth.
775. Around it they gathered, close to it they stood and spake
reverent!)',
776. Saying: O, grandfather,
. 777. The little ones have nothing of which to make their bodies.
778. Then. the Soft Yellow Rock spake, saying: O, little ones,
779. I am a person of whom the little ones may well make their bodies.
780. I am difficult to be overcome by death.
781 . When the little ones make of me their bodies,
782. They also shall always be difficult to overcome by death.
783. When the little ones sicken and their bodies burn with fever,
784. They shall always make of me the means of removing the heat
of fever (the vapor bath).
785. When the little ones fall ill and arc fretful,
786. They shall always make of me the means of curing their illness,
removing their fretfulness.
787. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
788. They shall enable themselves to live to see old age,
789. And they shall abide as a people in the days that are calm and
peaceful.
790. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
791. The Hon'-ga Wa'-tse-ga-wa
792. Went forth, with quickened footsteps,
793. To the Friable Rock.
794. Close to the Friable Rock he stood and spake,
795. Saying: O, grandfather,
796. The little ones have nothing of which to make their bodies.
797. The Friable Rock replied: I am a person of whom the little ones
may well make their bodies.
798. Then Wa'-tse-ga-wa hastened back and standing before his
brothers said to them:
799. O, elder brothers,
800. A grandfather of ours sits yonder, O, elder brothers.
801 . Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
802. The elder brothers spake to one another, saying: Our younger
brother
803. Tells us a grandfather of our sits yonder.
804. Then with heads bent thitherward
805. They set forth, with quickened footsteps,
806. To the Friable Rock, who sitteth firmly upon the earth.
807. Around him they gathered, close to him they stood and spake
reverently,
808. Saying: O, grandfather,
180 THE OSAGE TRIBE IKTH. ANN. 36
809. The little ones have nothing of which to make their bodies.
810. The Friable Rock replied: O, little ones,
811. You say the little ones have nothing of which to make their
bodies.
812. I am a person of whom the little ones may well make their bodies.
813. I am difficult to be overcome by death.
814. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
815. They also shall always be difficult to overcome by death.
816. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
817. When the little ones fail in health,
818. They shall always make of me the means of restoring their
strength.
819. When the little ones sicken and their bodies burn with heat of
fever,
820. They shall always make of me the means of removing the
burning of fever.
821. When the little ones make of me the means of reaching old age,
822. The little ones shall enable themselves to live to see old age.
823. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
824. The Hon'-ga, a people who possess seven fireplaces, spake to
one another,
825. Saying: O, younger brothers,
826. The little ones have nothing of which to make their bodies.
827. Then turning to the Hon'-ga A-hiu-ton (Hon'-ga with wings, the
dark-plumaged eagle), they spake to him,
828. Saying: O, elder brother, and stood in mute appeal.
829. Then, in quick response, Hon'-ga A-hiu-ton set forth in haste
830. To a deep miry marsh,
831. To the Little Rock, who sitteth firmly upon the earth.
832. Close to the Little Rock he stood and spake reverently,
833. Saying: O, grandfather,
834. The little ones have nothing of which to make their bodies.
835. The Little Rock spake in quick response: O, little one,
836. I am a person of whom the little ones may well make their bodies.
837. Then Hon'-ga A-hiu-ton hastened back to his younger brothers,
to whom he spake, saying: O, younger brothers,
838. A Little Rock sits yonder, O younger brothers, he said to them.
839. The younger brothers spake to one another, saying: Our elder
brother
840. Tells us a Little Rock sits yonder, O, younger brothers.
841. Then, with heads bent thitherward,
842. They set forth in haste
843. To the Little Rock, who sitteth firmly upon the earth in the
marsh.
LAFLESCHE] Nl'-KI NQN-K'ON KITE 181
844. Around him they gathered, close to him they stood as they spake
reverently,
845. To the Little Rock, sitting with algae clinging to him and
floating about him, like looks of hair blowing in the wind.
846. O, grandfather, they said to him,
847. The little ones have nothing of which to make their bodies.
848. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
849. The Little Rock made reply: You say the little ones have
nothing of which to make their bodies.
850. I am a person who is difficult to be overcome by death.
851. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
852. They also shall always be difficult to overcome by death.
853. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
854. He said to them: Behold my locks, that float about the edges of
my head.
855. When the little ones reach old age,
856. Their locks shall float about the edges of their heads.
857. The little ones shall always live to see their locks grown scant
with age.
858. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
859. He continued: When the little ones become aged
860. They shall always see the locks of their heads grown scant
with age.
861. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
862. The brothers spake to one another, saying: Close to the God of
Day, who sitteth in the heavens,
863. We shall place the Little Rock, O, younger brothers.
864. When the little ones make of the Little Rock their bodies,
865. Of the God of Day who sitteth in the heavens,
866. The little ones as a people shall surely make their bodies, 0;
younger brothers.
867. The four days,
868. The four great divisions of the days,
869. The little ones shall always reach and enter.
870. They shall always live to see old age, O, younger brothers.13
871. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
872. The Hon'-ga, a people who possess seven fireplaces, spake to
one another,
873. Saying: O, younger brothers,
874. The little ones have nothing that will serve them as food.
« The Little Rock of the marsh is spoken ol as !'»' Wa-shta-gc, the Gentle Rock, because it is a special
symbol of the life of the people for whom there must always be peace. As a memorial of the flmling of
the Little Rock of the marsh the members of the Ho»'-ga A-hiu-to» gens in cutting the hair of their little
ones leave a fringe around the entire edge.
182 THE OSAGE TRIBE [KTH. ANN. 30
875. Then they turned to the Hon'-ga Wa'-tse-ga-wa, to whom they
spake,
876. Saying: O, younger brother,
877. The little ones have nothing that will serve them as food.
878. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
879. Wa'-tse-ga-wa set forth with quickened footsteps
880. To the margin of a lake,
881. To the Ho'-xthon-ta-xe hi (Sparganium).
882. Close to it he came and paused,
883. Then plucked it root and stalk and hastened back to his brothers,
to whom he spake,
884. Saying; O, elder brothers,
885. How will this plant serve as food for the little ones?
886. With eager haste they tested the taste of the root,
887. With noisy smacking of the lips,
888. Then they spake to Wa'-tse-ga-wa, saying: O, younger brother,
889. This plant is not fit for use as food, O, younger brother,
890. Though this may be, O, younger brothers, they said to one
another,
891. We shall put it to use when we go forth toward the setting of
the sun,
892. To overcome our enemies and make them to fall in death,
O, younger brothers.
893. The elder brothers spake to Wa'-tse-ga-wa, saying: Behold,
younger brother,
894. The little ones have nothing that will serve them as food.
895. Then Wa'-tse-ga-wa set forth with quickened footsteps,
896. To the margin of a lake,
897. To the cin'mon-non-ta-hi (Nymphaea advena),
898. Close to it he came and paused,
899. Then plucked it root and stalk and hastened back to his brothers,
to whom he spake,
900. Saying: How will this plant serve, O, elder brothers, as food for
the little ones ?
901. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
902. The elder brothers with eager haste tested the taste of the root,
903. Then they spake to one another, saying: This plant is not fit
for use as food, O, younger brothers,
904. Though this may be,
905. We shall put it to use when we go forth toward the setting of
the sun,
906. To overcome our enemies and make them to fall in death, O,
younger brothers.
907. The elder brothers spake to Wa'-tse-ga-wa, saying: Behold,
younger brother,
LiFLESCHE] Nl'-KI NQN-K'ON RITE 183
908. The little ones have nothing that will serve them as food, O,
younger brother.
909. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
910. Wa'-tse-ga-wa hastened to the middle of the deep waters of a
lake,
911. To the tse'-wa-the (Nelumbo lutea) (pi. 12, 6).
912. With his foot he pried into the soft bed of the lake and brought
to the surface a root,
913. Which he carried in haste to his brothers, to whom he spake,
914. Saying: How will this plant serve, O, elder brothers, as food for
the little ones ?
915. O, younger brother, they said to him, with hopeful expectation,
916. Then, with eager haste, they tested the taste of the root.
917. Like milk, it has been said, in this house,
918. The juice of the succulent root squirted within their mouths.
919. Then they spake to Wa'-tse-ga-wa, saying: O, younger brother,
920. This, indeed, is the object of your continual search, O, younger
brother,
921 . And, speaking to one another, the elder brothers said : This plant
will serve as food for the little ones in their life's journey, O,
younger brothers.
922. When the little ones use this plant as food,
923. Their limbs shall stretch in growth as they move onward in their
life's journey, O, younger brothers.
924. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
925. The elder brothers spake to Wa'-tse-ga-wa, saying:
926. Look you, O, younger brother,
927. We bid you go forth again in quest of food, O, younger brother,
928. Whereupon Wa'-tse-ga-wa set forth, with quickened footsteps,
929. To the farther margin of the lake
930. To the do (Glycine apios) (pi. 12, a).
931. Close to it he came and paused.
932. Then he plucked it, root and vine, and hastened back to his
brothers, to whom he spake,
933. Saying: How will this plant serve, O, elder brothers, as food for
the little ones 1
934. Then, with eager haste, they tested the taste of the root.
935. Like milk, it has been said, in this house,
936. The juice of the succulent root squirted within their mouths.
937. Then they spake to Wa'-tse-ga-wa, saying: O, younger brother,
938. This, indeed, is the object of your continual search, O, younger
brother,
939. And, speaking to one another, the elder brothers said : This plant
will serve as food for the little ones in their life's journey, O,
younger brothers.
184 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
940. When the little ones use this plant as food,
941. They shall enable themselves to live to see old age.
942. Their limbs shall stretch in growth as they move onward in their
life's journey, O, younger brothers.
943. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
944. The elder brothers spake to one another, saying: Behold,
O, younger brother,
945. The little ones have nothing that will serve them as food, O,
younger brother.
946. They turned to the Hon'-ga Wa'-tse-ga-wa, to whom they spake,
947. Saying: O, younger brother,
948. We bid you go again in quest of food.
949. Wa'-tse-ga-wa set forth, with quickened footsteps,
950. To the cin (Sagittaria latifolia) (pi. 12, c),
951. To the farther margin of the lake,
952. Where sat the cin within the soft bed.
953. He plucked it up, root and stalk, and hastened back to his
brothers, to whom he spake,
954. Saying: How will this serve, O, elder brothers, as food for the
little ones ?
955. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
956. The elder brothers tested the taste of the root with eager haste.
957. Like milk the juice of the succulent root squirted within their
mouths.
958. Then in tones of pleasure they spake to Wa'-tse-ga-wa, saying:
O, younger brother,
959. This plant will serve as food for the little ones, O, younger
brother.
960. When the little ones prepare this plant for use,
961. They shall always immerse it in boiling water, O, younger
brother,
962. Though this may be,
963. We shall always put it to use when we set forth against our ene
mies toward the setting of the sun,
964. To overcome them and make them to fall in death, O, younger
brothers.
965. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
966. The elder brothers spake to W"a'-tse-ga-wa, saying: O, younger
brother,
967. Look you, we bid you go once more in quest of food.
968. Then Wa'-tse-ga-wa set forth,
969. To the farther margin of the lake,
970. To a lowland forest, beyond,
971. Where sat the hon'-bthin'-cu (Falcata comosa) (pi. 12, d).
972. Close to it he came and paused;
I.AFLESCHE] Nl'-KI NQN-K'ON RITE 185
973. Then plucking it, root and vine, he hastened back to his brothers.
to whom he spake,
974. Saying: How will this plant serve, O, elder brothers, as food for
the little ones ?
975. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
976. The elder brothers tested the taste of the bulbous root with
eager haste,
977. Then spake to Wa'-tse-ga-wa, saying: This plant will serve as
food for the little ones, O, younger brother,
978. Though this may be,
979. When the little ones prepare the plant for use,
980. They shall always immerse it in boiling water, O, younger
brother,
981. Though this may be,
982. We shall put it to use when we set forth against our enemies
toward the setting sun,
983. To overcome them and make them to fall, O, younger brothers.
DEER SONGS
Following the wi'-gi-e relating to the quest of food are the Ta
Wa'-thon, Deer Songs, six in all, arranged in sequence of action. The
first song pictures the hunter as he stands in wait for the deer, while
his sister who remains at home follows him with expectant wish that
a stag or a doe might approach the spot where her brother stands
and be shot by him. These kinship terms, brother and sister, are
here used in the generic sense. The second song depicts the anxiety
of the sister as time passes and the strengthening of her hope that
her brother will succeed. The third song refers to the mind relief
of the sister as she divines the actual shooting of a deer by her brother.
The fourth song refers to the wounding of a deer by the hunter and
the pursuit of it. The fifth song recounts the cutting of the skin of
the caught deer in such a manner as to make it convenient for shaping
into clothing. The sixth song deals with the attributing by the hunter
of his success to the sacred wi'-gi-e that describes the haunts of the
deer. (See p. 97, lines 49 to 103, wi'-gi-e of the Deer gens.)
The order in which the wi'-gi-e relating to the food plants and the
deer songs appear may have some historical value. At any rate the
sequence implies that the natural products of the earth were depended
upon by the Wa-zha'-zhe for sustenance, and that the first to be pro
tected by force as against intrusion by unfriendly tribes were the food
plants. Later, when the people became possessed of an effective
weapon, as the bow and arrow, the deer was given a place among
the natural food products and figured prominently in both the religious
and practical life of the tribe. There are two titles to the Deer
Songs— Ta Wa'-thon, Deer Songs; and Ta Gi'-bo" Wa'-thon, Songs of
Calling the Deer.
186
THE OSAGE TRIBE
[ETH. ANN. 36
THE WORDS OF THE DEER SONGS
SONG 1
(Osage version, p. 386)
Transcribed by Alice C. Fletcher
Time beats
Wi - tsi" - do no" she-tho to" no", \\ i - tsi" - do no" she -tho to" no",
r
r f
i i
f ' ' r f r
Dsi no"-no" - ge ho, dsi no"-no" e, Dsi no"-no" - ge he, Wi-tsi" -
r f f f "r
do no" she-tho to" no", Wi-tsi"-do no" she-tho to" no", Dsi no" non-ge he,
^^^^HEfciSEEEd =t^*z
-4--]— j^ J ^g^^tF-g-M-- •— *^P— ^j— t
T r
f f
dsi no"-no" e, Dsi no"-no" ge he,
Wi-tsi" - do non she-tho to" no".
Wi-tsin-do non she-tho to" no",
Wi-tsi"-do non she-tho ton no",
Dsi non-non-ge he, dsi non-non e,
Dsi non-non-ge he,
Wi-tsin-do no" she-tho to" no",
Wi-tsi n-do non she-tho ton no",
Dsi no°-non-ge he, dsi non-non e,
Dsi non-non-ge he,
Wi-tsi "-do non she-tho to" non.
Yonder stands my elder brother waiting,
Yonder stands my elder brother waiting,
Run thither upon thy feet, run thither,
Run thither upon thy feet, etc.
Yonder stands my elder brother waiting,
Yonder stands my elder brother waiting,
Run thither with thy horns, run thither,
Run thither with thy horns, etc.
I.A FI.B8CHE]
Nl'-KI
RITE
187
SONG 2
(Osage version, p. 387)
Transcribed by Alice C. Fletcher
Time heats
Tsin - do ho cka gthe he, Tsi" - do he cka gthe he,
r r r *
ii II
r'i no'Mio'M;, C' - non-no" - ge he, Tsin-do he cka gthe he,
^gF^ ^±^?=£=T f ?. — w=f • w=\\
^& =t= =H
r . r~ r~ '
I. . I ,., 1 I !
Tsin - do he cka gthe he, Tsin - do he cka gthe he.
Tsin-do he cka gthe he,
Tsin-do he cka gthe he,
<^i no" non-e, ^i non-non-ge he,
Tsin-do he ?ka gthe he,
Tsi"-do he fka gthe he,
^i non-non-e, §i non-non-ge he,
Tsin-do he fka gthe he,
Tsin-do he cka gthe he.
To my brother, thou with white horns, thou with white horns,
Run thither upon thy feet, run tnither upon thy feet, etc.
To my brother, thou with white horns, thou with white horns,
Run thither with thy white horns, thou with white horns run thither, etc.
The words of these songs are figurative. Nevertheless they reveal
the many thoughts that played upon the minds of the ancient
Non'-hon-zhin-ga, who composed them. The words convey the sup
plicatory wish for the success of the hunters, as upon their success
depends the very life of all the people. They pray for the continual
reproduction of this animal, so necessary to man's physical existence.
This thought is expressed in the sequence of the stanzas, in which are
mentioned the various parts of the deer, beginning with the feet, the
hind legs, the body, the forelegs, and closing with the antlers, used
188
THE OSAGE TRIBE
[ETH. ANN. 36
as a trope for the head. (When giving these songs, Wa-xthi'-zhi
took advantage of the privilege granted to the A'-ki-hon Xo'-ka and
omitted all stanzas but the first and last in order to shorten the
monotony of repetition.) In the sequence of the stanzas is not only
indicated the physical growth of the animal and the endless repro
duction of that particular form of life, but as the call to the animal
is made by a woman, this call is not only for the continued life of
the animal but is a prayer for the continuity and the perpetuation of
the people of the tribe.
SONG 3
(Osage version, p. 387)
Transcribed by Alice C. Fletcher
—^ ^ «= 9 V — i~ W - -»"•; » w i
[ |"
Wi-tsi" do no" ku-dse ton non, Wi-tsin do no" ku-dse ton non,
-=a^=~ ^FI-4— --(— ^— — D—
*"
O-e non-non-ge he,
r r
O-e no"-no"-e,
r
O-e no"-non - t;e he, Wi-tsi" -
r r r f r r
do non ku-dse ton no", Wi-tsin-do no" ku-dse to" no", O-e non-non-ge he,
r r r f " f
II i
O-e non-non-e, O-e non-non-ge he,
r " r r
Wi-tsi" do no" ku-dse ton non.
Wi-tei '-do non ku-dse to" no",
Wi-tsi"-do no" ku-dse ton non,
O-e non-non-ge he, o-e non-non-e,
O-e non-non-ge he,
Wi-tsi n-do non ku-dse to" no",
Wi-tsi n-do no" ku-dse to" non,
O-e non-non-ge he, o-e non non-e,
O-e no"-non-ge he,
Wi-tsin-do non ku-dse ton non.
My brother shoots from where he stands,
My brother shoots from where he stands,
He wounds the deer, it runs, he wounds the deer, it runs,
He wounds the deer, it runs, etc.
LA FI.ESCHE]
NI-KI NQN-K Os KITE
189
SONG 4
(Osage version, p. 387)
M.M. J-160
Transcribed by Alice C. Fletcher
Turn- beats
O - da the, o - da ni - \va, O - da the ha o - da ni - wa,
r r
Wa-dsi tha-the ho-tha-dse,
3T
<-=— m — w —
r r r
\\"u-dsi tha - the ho- tha-dse wa-to.
r r r r r r r
II I i I i
O - da tlie, o - da ni - wa, O - da the ha o - da ni - wa t<»
O-da the, o-da ni-wa,
0-da the ha o-da ni-wa,
Wa-dsi tha-the ho-tha-dse,
Wa-dsi tha-the ho-tha-dse wa-to,
O-da the, o-da ni-wa,
O-da the ha o-da ni-wa to.
It is stricken, it still lives and flees,
It is stricken, it still lives and flees,
I shall pursue and find it, wherever it goes,
I shall pursue and find it, wherever it goes, etc.
It is stricken, it still lives and flees,
It is stricken, it still lives and flees,
Though it has gone afar I have found it,
Though it has gone afar I have found it, etc.
190
THE OSAGE TRIBE
SONG 5
(Osagc version, p. 388)
[ETII. ANN. 36
Transcribed by Alice C. Fletclit
•- =3=3=^3 =5=£ =5=
E - giun ba - ha gu - vva, E - giun ba - ha gu - wa, Zhe -
f r
ga - ba-ha gu-wa, E - giun ba-ha gu-wa, E -
r-f-j -v — | 1- — p
giun ba - ha gu - vva a,
giun ba - ha gu - wa, E
giun ba-ha gu-wa, Zhe-ga ba-ha gu-wa, E - giun ba-ha gu-wa a.
E-giun ba-ha gu-wa, E-giu" ba-ha gu-wa,
Zhe-ga ba-ha gu-wa, E-giu" ba-ha gu-wa,
E-giu" ba-ha gu-wa a,
E-giu" ba-ha gu-wa, E-giu" ba-ha gu-wa,
Zhe-ga ba-ha gu-wa, E-giu" ba-ha gu-wa.
1
I cut with care the skin, I cut with care the skin,
Down the legs I cut the skin with care,
I cut with care the skin, etc.
I cui with care the skin, I cut with care the skin,
Up the breast I cut the skin with care,
I cut with care the skin, etc.
I cut with care the skin, I cut with care the skin,
Around the head and neck I cut the skin with care,
I cut with care the skin, etc.
LA FLESCHE]
NI-KI NQN-K O* KITE
191
SONG 6
(Osage version, p. 389)
T-aoinilxnl by Atici! (J. Flu
M.M. J=160
ib,.»r rrr r r • r r "^^
Ta - xtsi-e ta-xtsi-e wa - dsu - ta zhin - ga, I - wi - the thon -
rrr
i i i
Ta-xtsi-e wn-dsu - ta-zhi" -
r r
r r
O' N_^»
r r^r
*-*-*-
rrr
ga, pi - §i ca- be hi-dsi to", I - wi - the tho™ dse, ta - xtsi-e, ta-xtsi-e.
Ta-xtei-e, ta-xtsi-e wa-dsu-ta zhin-ga,
I-wi-the thon-dsi-e, ta-xtsi-e, ta-xtsi-e,
Ta-xtei-e wa-dsu-ta /hin-ga, pi-ci ca-be hi dsi to",
I-wi-the thon-dsi-e, ta-xtei-e, ta-xtei-e.
Ta-xtsi-e,14 ta-xtsi-e, you little creature,
Where did I find you, ta-xtsi-e, ta-xtsi-e.
Ta-xtsi-e, you little creature,
Beneath the black oak,
I have found you, ta-xtei-e, ta-xtsi-e.
Beneath the red oak,
I have found you, ta-xtsi-e, ta-xtsi-e.
3
Beneath the white oak,
I have found you, ta-xtsi-e, ta-xtei-e.
Amidst the bunch grpss,
I have found you, ta-xtei-e, ta-xtsi-e.
» The archaic name for the deer.
192 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
(NI'-KI WI'-GI-E — CONTINUED)
984. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
985. The Hon'-ga, a people who possess seven fireplaces, spake to
one another,
986. Saying: O, younger brothers,
987. There is yet one thing lacking, O, younger brothers.
988. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this-house,
989. The little ones have nothing that will serve them as a symbol
of their courage, they said to one another.
990. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
991. The Hon'-ga Wa'-tse-ga-wa (Radiant Star)
992. Went forth, with quickened footsteps,
993. To the very summit of a hill,
994. To the Male Puma,
995. With whom he stood face to face, as he spake to him,
996. Saying: O, grandfather,
997. The little ones have nothing that will serve them as a symbol
of their courage.
998. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
999. The Puma replied, saying: You say the little ones have no thing
that will serve them as a symbol of their courage.
1000. I am a person whom the little ones may well choose to be a
symbol of their courage.
1001. Thereupon he expanded his tail as though in great anger and
spake,
1002. Saying: Behold the dark tip of my tail.
1003. The little ones shall make of it a symbol of fire.
1004. When they make of it a symbol of fire,
1005. They shall have fire that can not be extinguished.
1006. Behold the soles of my feet, that are dark in color.
1007. I have made them to be as my charcoal.
1008. Behold the tip of my nose, that is dark in color.
1009. I have made it to be as my charcoal.
•
1010. Behold the tip of my ears, that are dark in color.
1011. I have made them to be as my charcoal.
1012. When the little ones make the soles of my feet, the tip of my
nose, and the tips of my ears to be as their charcoal,
1013. They shall always have charcoal that is dark indeed.
1014. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
1015. The Hon'-ga Wa'-tse-ga-wa,
1016. When the elder brothers had thus spoken,
I.AFLESCHE] Nl'-KI NON-K'O" RITE 193
1017. Went forth to an open prairie, where trees grow not,
1018. To the Black Bear, that is without a blemish,
1019. Who stood in its midst,
1020. Who stood as in flames of fire,
1021. With hands uplifted, with whom (the Sacred Radiant Star)
stood face to face as he spake,
1022. Saying: O, grandfather,
1023. The little ones have nothing that will serve them as a symbol
of their courage.
1024. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
1025. The Black Bear spake, saying; I am a person whom the little
ones may well choose to be a symbol of their courage.
1026. Behold my outspread claws.
1027. I have made them to be as my flames of fire.
1028. When the little ones make them to be their symbols of fire,
1029. They shall always have fire that can not be extinguished.
1030. Behold the soles of my feet, that are dark in color.
1031. I have made them to be as my charcoal.
1032. When the little ones make them to be as their charcoal,
1033. They shall always have charcoal that is black indeed.
1034. Behold the tip of my nose, that is dark in color.
1035. I have made it to be as my charcoal.
1036. When the little ones make it to be as their charcoal,
1037. They shall always have charcoal that is dark indeed.
1038. Behold my body, that is black in color.
1039. I have made it to be as my charcoal.
1040. When the little ones make it to be as their charcoal,
1041. They shall always have charcoal that is black indeed.
1042. The Hon'-ga Wa'-tse-ga-wa
1043. Went forth, with quickened footsteps,
1044. To an open prairie, where trees grow not,
1045. To the Great White Swan, who sat in its midst.
1046. Close to the Great White Swan (the Radiant Star) stood and
spake,
1047. Saying: O, grandfather,
1048. The little ones have nothing that will serve them as a symbol
of their courage.
1049. The Great White Swan replied, saying: O, little one,
1050. You say the little ones have nothing that will serve them as
a symbol of their courage.
278G— 21 13
194 THE OSAGE TRIBE [BIH. ANN. 38
1051. I am a person whom the little ones may well choose to be a
symbol of their courage.
1052. Behold the edges of my feet, that are dark in color.
1053. I have made them to be as my fire.
1054. Behold also the tip of my bill, that is dark in color.
1055. I have made it to be as my fire.
1056. When the little ones make these to be as their fire,
1057. They shall always have fire that can not be extinguished.
1058. When the little ones make me to be a symbol of their courage,
1059. Even the gods
1060. Are not my equals in strength and endurance.
1061. When the little ones make me to be a symbol of their courage,
1062. No one shall be their equal in strength and courage.
1063. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
1064. The elder brothers spake, saying: The little ones have nothing
that will serve them as a symbol of courage.
1065. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
1066. The Hon'-ga Wa'-tse-ga-wa
1067. Went forth, with quickened footsteps,
1068. To the Male Puma,
1069. With whom he stood face to face and spake,
1070. Saying: The little ones have nothing that will serve them as a
symbol of their courage, O, grandfather.
1071. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
1072. The Puma replied, saying: 1 am a person whom the little ones
may well choose to be a symbol of their courage.
1073. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
1074. The brothers spake to one another in muffled tones, saying:
O, younger brothers,
1075. He is a Puma,
1076. We shall take personal names from him, O, younger brothers.
1077. The Great Puma
1078. Shall be our name, O, younger brothers.
1079. Young Puma
1080. Shall be our name, O, younger brothers.
1081. Young Puma
1082. Shall always be our name, O, younger brothers, they said to
one another.
1083. The Hon'-ga Wa'-tse-ga-wa
1084. Went forth, with quickened footsteps,
1085. To the Black Bear, that is without a blemish,
1.AFLESCHE] Nl'-KI NQN-K'O' RITE 195
1086. Who stood as in flames of fire, to him he (the Radiant Star)
spake,
1087. Saying: The little ones have nothing that will serve them as a
symbol of their courage, O, grandfather.
1088. The Black Bear replied, saying: I am a person whom the little
ones may well choose to be a symbol of their courage.
1089. Then spake the elder brothers, saying: O, younger brothers,
1090. And all spake to one another, saying: He is a Black Bear, O,
younger brothers.
1091. He is very dark in color.
1092. We shall take from him personal names, O, younger brothers;
1093. The Dark One
1094. Shall always be our name, O, younger brothers.
1095. You have found the Dark One, O, younger brothers,
4)96. Finder-of-the Dark One,
1097. Shall always be our name, O, younger brothers.
1098. Look you, O, younger brothers, they said to one another,
1099. The little ones have nothing that will serve them as a symbol
of courage.
1100. They went forth in a body to an open prairie, where trees grow
not,
1101. Where sat the Great White Swan.
1102. Face to face with him they stood and spake,
1103. Saying: The little ones have nothing that will serve them as a
symbol of their courage, O, grandfather.
1104. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house
1105. The brothers spake to one another in low tones, saying: O,
younger brother,
1106. We shall take from him personal names, O, younger brothers.
1107. How white he is, O, elder brothers, the younger ones said.
1108. He is a bird, O, younger brothers,
1109. A White Swan.
1110. White Swan also
1111. Shall be our name, O, younger brothers.
1112. He is a bird, O, younger brothers.
1113. How white he is, they said to one another.
1114. White-bird, also,
1115. Shall be our name, O, younger brothers.
1116. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
1117. The Wa-zha'-zhe, a people who possess seven fireplaces,
1118. Verily, a people among whom there are none that are craven,
1119. A people who show no mercy and spare none of their enemies,
1120. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
1121. Had made of a pipe (pi. 17, a),
196 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
1122. Their bodies, a pipe by which they had become a people.
1123. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
1124. These people spake to the Hon/-ga, saying: O, Hon'-ga,
1125. I have made of a pipe my body, O, Hon'-ga.
1126. When you also make of the pipe your body,
1127. Your body shall be free from all causes of death, O, Hon'-ga.
1128. Behold the joint of its neck,
1129. I have made of it the joint of my own neck.
1130. When you, likewise, make of it the joint of your own neck,
1131. The joint of your neck shall be free from all causes of death,
O, Hon'-ga.
1132. Behold the hollow of its mouth (bowl),
1133. I have made 'of it the hollow of my own mouth,
1134. As of all the bowl also,
1135. When you make of it the hollow of your own mouth,
1136. The hollow of your mouth shall be free from all causes of death,
O, Hon'-ga.
•
1137. Behold the right side of its body,
1138. I have made of it the right side of my own body.
1139. When you, likewise,
1140. Make of it the right side of your own body,
1141. The right side of your body shall be free from all causes of
death, O, Hon/-ga.
1142. Behold the muscles of its spine,
1143. I have made of them the muscles of my own spine.
1144. When you, likewise, make of them the muscles of your own
spine,
1145. The muscles of your spine shall be free from all causes of death,
O, Ho"'-ga. ,
1146. Behold the left side of its body.
1147. I have made of it the left side of my own body.
1148. When you, likewise, make of it the left side of your own body,
1149. The left side of your body shall be free from all causes of death,
O,Hon/-ga.
1150. Behold the hollow of its body (the stem),
1151. I have made of it the hollow of my own body.
1152. When you, likewise, make of it the hollow of your own, body,
1153. The hollow of your body shall be free from all causes of death,
O, Hon'-ga.
i
z
:
--
-
.
:
S £
Ul 5|.
a. ~S
Eb ll
< ?i
CQ d5
fif
O S3
II
1 1
•- i
1!
CO t-
H S
UJ "
BUREAU OF AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY
THIRTY-SIXTH ANNUAL REPORT PLATE 18
WA-TSE'-MON.|N (STAR THAT TRAVELS)
Member of the Wa-sa'-be (Black Bear) gens of the Ilon'-pa subdivision of the Ho"'-ga great tribal divi
sion. This man is an orator of the tribe and is well versed in the rites of his people. He is better known
as Wa-shi"'-ha, a name that has been misinterpreted as "Bacon Rind." The name refers to the fat
that adheres to the skin of the black bear. (Courtesy of Mr. B. H. Love.)
LAFLESCHE] Nl'-KI NO"-K'O>f RITE 197
1154. Behold its windpipe (the thong that holds bowl and stem
together),
1155. I have made of it my own windpipe.
1156. When you, likewise, make of it your own windpipe,
1 157. Your windpipe shall be free from all causes of death, O,Hon'-ga.
1158. When you go toward the setting of the sun against your
enemies,
1159. And carry the pipe as an offering when you make your sup
plications for aid,
1160. Your prayers shall always be readily granted,
1161. Even before the sun rises to the height of your houses,
1162. Your prayers shall always be readily granted, O, Hon'-ga.
1163. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
1164. The Hon'-ga, a people who possess seven fireplaces,
1165. Verily, a people among whom there are none that are craven,
1166. A people who show no mercy and spare none of their enemies,
1167. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
1168. These people made reply, saying: O, Wa-zha'-zhe,
1169. Of the red boulder, that sitteth firmly upon the earth,
1170. I have made my body and become a people, O, Wa-zha'-zhe.
1171. As of the God of Day, who sitteth in the heavens,
1172. I have made my body and become a people, O, Wa-zha'-zhe.
1173. The red boulder, that sitteth firmly upon the earth,
1174. When you likewise make of it your body,
1175. Even the malevolent gods in their destructive course
1176. Shall pass by you in divergent lines and leave you unmolested,
O, Wa-zha'-zhe.
1177. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
1178. Of the red boulder, that sitteth firmly upon the earth,
1179. I have verily made my body and become a people, O, Wa-
zha'-zhe.
1180. When you likewise make of it your body,
1181. Even the malevolent gods in their destructive course
1182. Shall stumble and fall when they happen to strike against you.
1183. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
1184. The red boulder, that sitteth firmly upon the earth,
1185. When you likewise make of it your body,
1186. Even the malevolent gods in their destructive course,
1187. And none of them set teeth upon me in anger,
1188. Even the malevolent gods in their destructive course
1189. Shall fear to set teeth upon you in anger, O, Wa-zha'-zhe.
1190. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
1191. The red boulder, that sitteth firmly upon the earth,
198
THE OSAGE TRIBE
[ETH. ANN. 36
1192. When you likewise make of it your body,
1193. Even the malevolent gods in their destructive course,
1194. And they break their teeth when they set them upon me in
anger.
1195. The red boulder, that sitteth firmly upon the earth,
1 196. When you likewise make of it your body,
1197. Even the malevolent gods in their destructive course
1198. Shall break their teeth when they set them upon you in anger,
O, Wa-zha'-zhe.
TSI Gl'-KA-XE WA-THON (SONGS OP SETTING UP THE HOUSE OF
MYSTERY)
SONG 1
(Osago version, p. 395)
Transcribed by Alice C. Fletcher
M.M.
liri
.. — _
Wi-e twi win ga - xa
r r
thin - e,
r r r
Wi-e tsi wi" ga - xa
T T r" r" r f f
thi" - e ho the, Ga - xa thin-e e, tsi wi - ta no" ga - xathin-c,
r r ' r
r r "r
Wi-e tsi wi" ga - xa thi"-e e,
— ^P —
• •
1 ' I I
Wi-e tsi win ga - xa thi"-e.
Wi-e tsi win ga-xa thin-e,
Wi-e tsi win ga-xa thin-e he the,
Ga-xa thi°-e e, tsi wi-ta non ga-xa thin-e,
Wi-e tsi win ga-xa thin-e e,
Wi-e tsi win ga-xa thin-e.
Make ye a house for me.
Make ye a house for me,
Make ye
A house that shall be my own,
Make ye a house for me,
Make ye a house for me.
Make ye
A House of Mystery for me.
I.A FLESCHE]
XI-KI NO*-K ON KITE
3
Make ye
The frame of my house.
4
Make ye
A fireplace therein that shall be mine.
SONG 2
(Osnge version, p. 39C)
199
Transcribed by Alice C. Fletcher
M.M. ^-1
-4
Time heats f r ~
Tsi win ga - xa thin,ga - x:i thin o he the, Tsi win ga - xa,thin, gn-xa
? f r
I I I
thin-(> he the, Tsi \vi - ta no" ga-xa thin, ga - xa thin-e he the, Tsi win
"
[|_y 1-tX-Zt
=
r r-' r* ft
ga-xa thi",ga-xa thin-e lie the, Tsi \vin ga-xa t hi", ga-xa thin-e he the.
Tsi win ga-xa thi", ga-xa thin e he the,
Tsi win ga-xa thin, ga-xa thin-e he the,
Tsi wi-ta no" ga-xa thin ga-xa thin-e he the,
Tsi win ga-xa thin, ga-xa thin-e he the,
Tsi wi" ga-xa thi", ga-xa thi°-e he the.
Make ye a house, make ye a house,
Make ye a house, make ye a house,
A house that shall be my own, make ye a house,
Make ye a house, make ye a house.
Make ye a House of Mystery, make ye a house.
3
Make ye the frame of the house, make ye the frame.
Make for me a fireplace, make a fireplace.
200
THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
WA-THON (SONGS OF THE GATHERING)
SONG 1
). 397)
Transcribed by Alice C. Fletcher
(Osage version, p. 397)
M.M. J=72
y ^1=d
-^~t* — •—*^+-m
s^ts r r r r r ^
Ki-gto -ba do" tsi- tha, ki-gto l>a-don tsi -tha, Ki-gto ba don tsi -tha,
\L^ if
— ^x '** ._ — — __J^^^3 f
s3HQ—i~ — :f
:> — • — •— -• — • — ^
r r
15 Hon-ga ki - gto ba don tsi - tha, ki - gto ba don tsi - tho.
Ki-gto ba don tsi-tha, ki-gto ba do" tsi-tha,
Ki-gto ba don tsi-tha,
Hon-ga ki-gto ba don tsi-tha, ki-gto ba don tsi-tho.
Go ye to the gathering,
Go ye to the gathering,
Go ye to the gathering of the Hon/-ga,
Go ye to the gathering.
Go ye to the gathering of the eagles.
3
Go ye to the gathering of the white eagles.
4
Go ye to the gathering of the mottled eagles.
SONG 2
(Osagc version, p. 397)
M.M. J=102
)it it i ^™ (
-M&-3+1
Transcribed by Alice C. Fletcher
'ime beats
r r r
rr
Ts'a-ge do-ba ki-^to ba don. E-dsi u - wi ha thin he, E - dsi u wi - ha thin
=1=
^
^-=t
r r
r r
r r r r ! ' .!. f. f r^' r f r
I ! ! I ' I I I I
he he, E-dsiu - wi -ha thin ho, E-dtiu - wi - ha thin he,
— I 1
---w
r r
Ts'a - ge do - ba ki - gto
1 r r r r r r
ba don, e - dsiu - wi - ha thin he.
* In third stanza one note added to bar. In fourth stanza two notes added to bar.
LAFLESCHE] Nl'-KI XO'-K'O* RITE 201
Ts'a-ge do-bft ki-cto ba do',
E-dsi u-wi-ha thin he, E-dsi u-wi-ha thi" he he,
E-dsi u-wi-ha thi" he, E-dsi u-wi-ha thin he,
Ts'a-ge do-ba ki-cto ba do", e-dsi u-wi-ha thi" he.
The aged men are gathering,
I walk with the aged men.
The men are now gathering,
I walk with the men.
(NI'-KI wi'-ai-E — CONTINUED)
1199. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
1200. The Hon'-ga, a people who possess seven fireplaces,
1201 . Verily, a people among whom there are none that are craven,
1202. There was among the Hon/-ga a man,
1203. A man who had made of the elk his body,
1204. And of the forehead of the elk,
1205. A snare, verily, he was a person who possessed a snare.
1206. Of this snare the IIon'-ga spake to one another, saying: What
ever strange beings they may be, or whosesoever offspring
they may be,
1207. We shall make them to fall into this snare, O, younger brothers.
1208. The people of the Wa-zha'-zhe,
1209. And those of the Tsi'-zhu,
1210. Shall always use this snare,
1211. Whatever strange beings they may be, or whosesoever offspring
they may be,
1212. We shall always make them to fall into this snare, O, younger
brothers.
1213. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
1214. The Hon'-ga, a people who possess seven fireplaces,
1215. Gathered together some small stones,
1216. Seven small stones they gathered together,
1217. Of which they verily made their bodies and became a people.
1218. Four of these stones,
1219. They brought to the fireplace of their House of Mystery,
1220. And within each corner,
1221. They placed one of these stones,
1222. And they spake, saying: Let each of these stones be to the
people of the Wa-zha'-zhe,
1223. And to those of the Tsi'-zhu,
1224. As a place of refuge in their life's journey,
1225. Then we shall always easily find a place of refuge in times of
danger, O, younger brothers.
202 THE OS AGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
1226. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
1227. Among the Hon'-ga, a people who possess seven fireplaces,
1228. There was a man,
1229. Whose name was Little Earth.
1230. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
1231. He appeared before the people with a cloven hand uplifted,
1232. In which he held a bit of the dark soil of the earth,
1233. Which he offered to the people as he spake,
1234. Saying: This bit of the dark soil of the earth
1235. They shall carry when they go to offer their supplications,
1236. Then shall their prayers be readily granted, O, elder brothers.
1237. When the people of the Wa-zha'-zhe
1238. And those of the Tsi'-zhu
1239. Put it upon their faces as they offer their supplications,
1240. Then, even before the sun has risen to the height of their houses,
1241. Their prayers shall always be readily granted, O, younger
brothers, they said to one another.
1242. Although that may be,
1243. When they put it upon their faces,
1244. They shall not close their eyes in sleep, O, younger brothers,
they said to one another.
1245. When they close their eyes in sleep,
1246. They shall shorten their lives as men, O, younger brothers, they
said to one another.
1247. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, hi this house,
1248. A bit of the blue soil of the earth
1249. He brought forth and stood offering it to the people.
1250. This bit of the blue soil of the earth
1251. They shall carry when they go to offer their supplications,
O, younger brothers, they said to one another.
1252. When they carry this bit of blue earth as they offer their sup
plications,
1253. When they go forth toward the setting of the sun against their
enemies,
1254. Their prayers shall always be readily granted, O, younger
brothers, they said to one another.
1255. When they carry this bit of blue earth as they offer their
supplications,
1256. Even before the sun has risen to the height of their houses,
1257. Their prayers shall always be readily granted, O, younger
brothers, they said to one another.
LAFLESCHK] Nl'-KI NQN-K'ON RITE 203
1258. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
1259. He brought forth a bit of the red soil of the earth
1260. And stood offering it to the people.
1261. This bit of the red soil of the earth
1262. They shall carry when they go to offer their supplications, O,
younger brothers, they said to one another.
1263. The people of the Wa-zha'-zhe
1264. And those of the Tsi-'-zhu
1265. Shall use this bit of red earth as they offer their supplications,
O, younger brothers, they said to one another.
1266. When they use it as they offer their supplications,
1267. Even before the sun has risen to the height of their house's,
1268. Their prayers shall always be readily granted, O, younger
brothers, they said to one another.
1269. Although that may be,
1270. When they put it upon their faces,
1271. They shall not shed tears, O, younger brothers, they said to one
another.
1272. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
1273. He brought forth a bit of the yellow soil of the earth
1274. And stood offering it to the people.
1275. This bit of the yellow soil of the earth
1276. Shall be used in offering their supplications
1277. By the people of the Wa-zha'-zhe
1278. And those of the Tsi'-zhu,
1279. So that their prayers may always be readily granted, O,
younger brothers, they said to one another.
1280. When they go to seek for fair captives
1281 . They shall put this bit of yellow earth upon his face, O, younger
brothers, they said to one another.
1282. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
1283. Behold the flaring rim of the entrance of my house,
1284. That also is not made without a purpose.
1285. It is the Tse'-xe ni-ka-pu, the vessel in which men are seethed.
1286. I have made it to represent all such vessels.
1287. The people of the Wa-zha'-zhe
1288. And those of the Tsi'-zhu
1289. Shall use it for seething the bodies of men,
1290. When they go forth toward the setting of the sun against their
enemies,
1291. And use it in their supplications for aid,
1292. Their prayers shall always bo readily granted, O, younger
brothers, they said to one another.
204 THE OSAGE TRIBE [EIII. ANN. 36
1293. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
1294. The Hon/-ga, a people who possess seven fireplaces,
1295. A people among whom there are none that are craven.
1296. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
1297. Spake to one another, saying: O, younger brothers,
1298. There is yet lacking a necessary article, O, younger brothers.
1299. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
1300. TheTse'-xe ni-ka-pu, the vessel in which the bodies of men are
seethed,
1301. They quickly brought forth
1302. And spake to one another, saying:
1303. This is an article that we shall always use as a symbol in our
ceremonies, O, younger brothers.
1304. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
1305. They said to one another: Let us now put water into the
sacred vessel to boil.
1306. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
1307. They placed the vessel of water upon the fire to boil.
1308. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
1309. They spake to one another, saying: What shall we put into the
boiling water to seethe,
1310. O, younger brothers?
1311. There are four kinds of food plants,
1312. That we have dedicated to use for ceremonial purposes, O,
younger brothers.
1313. Those we shall put into the vessel of boiling water to seethe,
O, younger brothers.
1314. Verily, at that tune and place, it has been said, in this house,
1315. They brought forth the Sparganium
1316. And said to one another: This, O, younger brothers,
1317. We shall put into the vessel to seethe, O, younger brothers.
1318. Although that may be,
1319. We shall not put it into the vessel to seethe without a purpose.
1320. Toward the setting of the sun there is, among our enemies,
1321. A young man in his adolescence, whose voice is broken.
1322. With this plant we shall put the young man into the vessel to
seethe, O, younger brothers.
1323. In this manner the people of the Wa-zha'-zhe
1324. And those of the Tsi'-zhu
1325. Shall always make their enemies to fall in death.
1326. There is yet one more lacking, O, younger brothers, they said
to one another.
1327. Then they brought forth the Nymphse advena
I.AFLESCHE] Nl'-KI NON-K'o* KITE 205
1328. And said: This plant also
1329. We shall put into the vessel to seethe, O, younger brothers.
1330. Although that may be,
1331. We shall not put it into the vessel without a purpose.
1332. Toward the setting of the sun there is, among our enemies,
1333. A maiden in her adolescence.
1334. With this plant we shall put the maiden into the vessel to
seethe, O, younger brothers.
1335. In this manner the people of the Wa-zha'-zhe
1336. And those of the Tsi'-zhu
1337. Shall always make their enemies to fall in death.
1338. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
1339. They said to one another: There is yet one more lacking, O,
younger brothers.
1340. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
1341. They brought forth the root of the water lily (Sagittaria latifolia) .
1342. And said to one another: This we shall put into the vessel to
seethe, O, younger brothers.
1343. Although that may be,
1344. We shall not put it into the vessel to seethe without a purpose.
1345. Toward the setting of the sun there is, among our enemies,
1346. A man who is honored for his deeds of valor.
1347. With this plant we shall put the valorous man into the vessel
to seethe, O, younger brothers.
1348. In this manner the people of the Wa-zha'-zhe
1349. And those of the Tsi'-zhu
1350. Shall always make their enemies to fall in death.
1351. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
1352. They said to one another: There is yet one more lacking, O.
younger brothers.
1353. Then they brought forth the Falcata comosa,
1354. And they said: This plant also
1355. We shall put into the vessel to seethe, O, younger brothers.
1356. Although that may be,
1357. We shall not put it into the vessel to seethe without a purpose.
1358. Toward the setting of the sun there is among our enemies
1359. A woman who has given birth to her first child.
1360. With this plant we shall put the woman who has given birth
to her first child into the vessel to seethe, O, younger
brothers.
1361. In this manner the people of the Wa-zha'-zhe
1362. And those of the Tsi'-zhu
1363. Shall alwnvs make their enemies to fall in death.
206 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
1364. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
1365. The Hon'-ga, a people who possess seven fireplaces,
1366. Verily, a people among whom there are none that are craven,
spake to one another,
1367. Saying: O, younger brothers,
1368. There is yet lacking a necessary article, O, younger brothers.
1369. Then they turned to the Hon'-ga Wa'-tse-ga-wa, to whom
they spake,
1370. Saying: O, younger brother,
1371. There is yet lacking a necessary article, O, younger brother.
1372. Thereupon Wa'-tse-ga-wa set forth, with quickened footsteps,
1373. To an open prairie where trees grow not,
1374. To the stone that bursts when heated.
1375. Close to the stone he paused and stood; •
1376. Then hastened with it to his brothers, to whom he spake, saying:
How will this serve, O, elder brothers?
1377. The elder brothers replied: O, younger brother,
1378. The stone can not be used for any purpose, O, younger brother.
1379. Wa'-tse-ga-wa set forth again, with quickened footsteps,
1380. To the conglomerate stone.
1381. Close to the stone he paused and stood;
1382. Then hastened with it to his brothers, to whom he spake,
1383. Saying: How will this stone serve, O, elder brothers?
1384. The elder brothers replied: It can not be used for any purpose,
O, younger brother.
1385. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
1386. He went forth again to an open prairie, where trees grow not,
1387. To the fragment of a rock.
1388. He returned with it in haste and spake to his brothers,
1389. Saying: How will this stone serve, O, elder brothers?
1390. The elder brothers replied: Verily, it is not the right kind of
stone, O, younger brother.
1391. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
1392. He went forth again to the side of a hill,
1393. Where he found a round-handled flint knife.
1394. With this he returned to his brothers, to whom he spake,
1395. Saying: How will this article serve, O, elder brothers?
1396. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
1397. The elder brothers replied : It will be a useful article, O, younger
brother.
1398. Then the brothers spake to one another, saying: From this
article we shall take a personal name, O, younger brothers.
1399. Round-handled knife
I.A FLKSCHE] Nl'-KI NQN-K'ON RITE 207
1400. We shall take for our personal names, O, younger brothers.
1401. Although that may be,
1402. The people of the Wa-zha'-zhe
1403. And those of the Tsi'-zhu
1404. Shall not use the round-handled knife for cutting, O, younger
brothers, they said to one another.
1405. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house.
1406. He went forth again, to the summit of a hill,
1407. To the black flint knife.
1408. Close to the knife he paused and stood,
1409. Then returned with it in haste,
1410. Returned with it to his elder brothers, to whom he spake,
1411. Saying: How will this article serve, O, elder brothers?
1412. Then the elder brothers spake to one another, saying: It will
be a useful article, O, younger brothers.
1413. However, for the people of the Wa-zha'-zhe
1414. And those of the Tsi'-zhu,
1415. It is not suitable for use in cutting, O, younger brothers, they
said to one another.
1416. Wa'-tse-ga-wa set forth again to the summit of a hill,
1417. To the flint knife that is sacred.
1418. Close to it he paused and stood,
1419. Then returned with it in haste to his brothers, to whom he
spake,
1420. Saying: How will this article serve, O. elder brothers?
1421. The elder brothers replied: O, younger brother,
1422. It will be a useful article, O, younger brother.
1423. Then the brothers spake to one another, saying: We shall take
a personal name from this article, O, younger brothers.
1424. The-sacred-knife
1425. We shall take to ourselves as a personal name, O, younger
brothers.
1426. The people of the Wa-zha'-zhe
1427. And those of the Tsi'-zhu,
1428. When they go forth toward the setting sun against their ene
mies,
1429. They shall always use this sacred knife, O, younger brothers,
they said to one another.
1430. Wa'-tse-ga-wa went forth again to the farther side of a hill,
1431. To the red flint knife.
1432. Close to the red flint knife he paused and stood,
1433. Then returned with it in haste to his brothers, to whom he
spake,
208 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
1434. Saying: How will this article serve, O, elder brothers?
1435. The elder brothers 'replied: O, younger brother,
1436. Verily, that has been the object of your continual search, 0,
younger brother.
1437. It will be a useful article, O, younger brother.
1438. Then the elder brothers spake to one another, saying: From
this article we shall take a personal name, O, younger
brothers.
1439. The-red-knife
1440. Shall be to us a personal name, O, younger brother, they said
to one another.
1441. The people of the Wa-zha'-zhe
1442. And those of the Tsi'-zhu
1443. Shall always use this knife for cutting, O, younger brothers,
they said to one another.
1444. When they go forth toward the setting sun against their
enemies
1445. And use this knife for cutting
1446. They shall have a knife that is sharp, indeed, O, younger
brothers, they said to one another.
1447. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
1448. The Hon'-ga, a people who possess seven fireplaces,
1449. A people among whom there are none that are craven, spake
to one another,
1450. Saying: There is yet lacking a certain part, O, younger
brothers.
1451. Then they turned to Hon'-ga Wa'-tse-ga-wa, to whom they
spake,
1452. Saying: O, younger brother,
1453. There is yet lacking a certain part, 0, younger brother.
1454. Then, at the beginning of day,
1455. Wa'-tse-ga-wa went forth into the far-off lands
1456. And came to a valley, where he paused and stood.
1457. In the evening of the day
1458. He stood before his elder brothers, his bare legs worn with the
grasses of the earth.
1459. The elder brothers spake to him, saying: How has it been with
you, O, younger brother?
1460. And he replied : I have traveled to a valley in the far-off lands,
O, elder brothers.
1461. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
1462. The elder brother spake to Wa'-tse-ga-wa, saying: Look you,
O, younger brother.
1463. We bid you go once more and make search.
LAFLESCHE] Nl'-KI NQN-K'o^ RITE 209
1464. Then, at the beginning of day,
1465. He went forth to the far-off lands
1466. And came to a second valley,
1467. Where he paused and stood.
1468. In the evening of the day
1469. He stood before his brothers, his bare legs worn with the grasses
of the earth.
1470. The elder brothers spake to him, saying: O, younger brother,
how has it been with you ?
1471. Wa'-tse-ga-wa replied: O, elder brothers,
1472. I have traveled to a second valley in the far-off lands, O, elder
brothers.
1473. The elder brothers spake again to Wa'-tso-ga-wa, saying: Look
you, O, younger brother,
1474. We bid you go once more and make search.
1475. Then, at the beginning of day,
1476. He went forth to the far-off lands
1477. To a third valley,
1478. Where he paused and stood.
1479. In the evening of the day
1480. He stood before his brothers, his bare legs worn with the grasses
of the earth.
1481. The elder brothers spake to him, saying: How has it been with
you, O, younger brother?
1482. Wa'-tse-ga-wa replied: O, elder brothers,
1483. I have traveled to a third valley, O, elder brothers, into the
far-off lands.
1484. Again the elder brothers spake to Wa'-tse-ga-wa, saying: Look
you, O, younger brother,
1485. We bid you go once more and make search.
1486. Then, at the beginning of day,
1487. He went forth to the far-off lands
1488. To a fourth valley,
1489. Where he paused and stood.
1490. There he beheld the seven bends of a great river,
1491. Enwrapped in a cloud of white smoke from many fires.
1492. He stood gazing, with close attention
1493. Upon the seven bends of the river,
1494. And he saw through the smoke the dwellings of men, seven vil
lages, one in each bend of the river.
1495. I must take a closer view of the people of these villages, he
thought.
2786—21 14
210 THE OSAGE TRIBE [KTH. ANN. 36
1496. Then he cautiously approached a watering place.
1497. Close to it he stood concealed
1498. And watched the movements of the people.
1499. As they came near to his place of concealment to fetch water
for themselves
1500. He noticed the tattoo marks upon their foreheads,
1501. The tattoo marks upon their jaws,
1502. And the closely cut hair of their foreheads he saw distinctly.
1503. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
1504. He concealed himself from these strange people with care and
skill.
1505. As he hastened homeward with the tidings
1506. In the evening of the day
1507. He approached his village with quickened footsteps.
1508. Then the elder brothers spake to one another, saying: O,
younger brothers,
1509. Our younger brother is returning; the manner of his approach
betokens his bearing of important tidings.
1510. They arose and ran to meet him.
1511. They spake to him, saying: How has it been with you, O,
younger brother?
1512. And he replied, as he stood: O, elder brothers,
1513. I have traveled to four valleys in the far-off lands, O, elder
brothers.
1514. At the fourth valley
1515. I beheld seven bends of a river,
1516. Enwrapped with a white cloud of smoke from many fires.
1517. Among the seven bends of the river
1518. I saw villages, O, elder brothers,
1519. Villages of people, O, elder brothers.
1520. Very closely I watched the people of those villages,
1521. And saw the tattoo marks upon their foreheads,
1522. The tattoo marks upon their jaws,
1523. And the closely cut hair of their foreheads, O, elder brothers.
1524. Then the elder brothers spake to one another, saying: O,
younger brothers,
1525. Let the people of the Wa-zha'-zhe
1526. And those of the Tsi'-zhu
1527. Come together, O, younger brothers.
1528. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house.
1529. The people came together as bidden.
1530. The people of the Wa-zha'-zhe
1531. And those of the Tsi'-zhu
1532. And those of the Hon'-ga spake, saying: Our younger brother
I.A FLKSCHE] Nl'-KI NOP^O* RITE 211
1533. Has traveled to four valleys in the far-off lands, O, Wa-zha'-zhe.
1534. In the fourth valley
1535. He beheld seven bends of a great river
1536. Enwrapped in a cloud of white smoke from many fires.
1537. Seven villages he saw among the seven bends of the river
1538. Enwrapped in a cloud of white smoke from many fires.
1539. Very closely he watched the people
1540. And saw the tattoo marks upon their foreheads,
1541. The tattoo marks upon their jaws,
1542. Saw that they wore the hair of their foreheads cut short.
THE HI'CA-DA STORY OF THE FINDING OF THE FOE
The preceding mythical story (lines 1447 to 1542) ends abruptly,
leaving the impression that an essential part of the story has been
omitted. This impression might have remained but for a casual
question asked of Wa-tse'-mon-in in May, 1916, relating to the
significance of the leg of an eagle attached to the suspending strap
of the portable shrine belonging to each gens of the tribe. (See
pi. 4, &.) The question had been asked without a thought that the
reply might have a bearing upon the story of the finding of the
foe, which is necessary to the completion of the original war rite
which forms the concluding part of the Ni'-ki Wa-tho" ritual.
Wa-tse'-mon-in said in reply: "The Hi'-ca-da put the eagle's leg on
the wa-xo'-be as a memorial of their finding of the foe, a service
performed by a member of the gens chosen for that purpose and to
act as an official messenger." Wa-tse'-mon-in made it clear that the
full story of the finding of the foe is the exclusive property of the
Hi'-ca-da gens. The In-gthon'-ga and other gentes of the Hon'-ga
subdivision were permitted to use it in an epitomized form in order
to complete their own version of the ritual. Thus was explained the
reason for the abrupt ending of the story as given by Wa-xthi'-zhi.
The literal translation of Hi'-ca-da is "Leg-outstretched," a name
referring directly to the eagle leg attached to each wa-xo'-be belong
ing to the various gentes of the tribe. The Hi'-ca-da is a subgens
of the Hon'-ga A-hiu-ton gens which has for its gentile life symbol the
dark-plumaged golden eagle. The name Hon'-ga signifies the Sacred
or Consecrated One.
Wa-tse'-mon-in, whose gens is closely related to the In-gthon'-ga,
hesitated for some time before he made up his mind to give the
wi'-gi-e of the Hi'-ca-da gens which tells of the Finding of the Foe.
He justifies his final decision upon the facts that he belonged to the
division that originated the story and that, owing to the present
inevitable changes, these great tribal rites have now practically come
to their end.
212 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
Hl'-^A-DA Wl'-GI-E, FINDING OF THE FOE
(Osage version, p. 407; literal translation, p. 556)
1. It has been said, in this house,
2. That from among the Hon'-ga, a people who possess seven fire
places,
3. A younger brother went forth upon a sacred errand.
4. The elder brothers knew, from their divining sense, of his home
ward journey, though yet out of range of ordinary vision.
5. What tidings doth he bring?
6. What sufferings has he endured? the elder brothers said to one
another.
7. Then as he appeared before them they said: Receive him and
speak to him, some of you,
8. And in haste they received him and spake to him.
9. Then the younger brother spake, saying: I have been to a valley,
O, elder brothers.
10. I have been as far as the first valley, but
11. Saw nothing worthy of my notice.
12. Then they made room for them at the fireplace and the messengers
spake,
13. Saying: Our younger brother
14. Tells us he has been as far as the first valley, but
15. Saw nothing worthy of his notice.
16. It has been said, in this house,
17. The return of the younger brother, who had gone forth again upon
his errand,
18. Was known to the elder brothers, through their divining sense,
though yet out of range of ordinary vision.
19. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
20. The younger brother was nearing his home
21. When the elder brothers said to one another: Our younger
brother is nearing his home.
22. What sufferings has he endured ?
23. Then as he appeared before them they said: Receive him and
speak to him, some of you,
24. And in haste they received him and spake to him.
25. Then the younger brother spake, saying: I have been to a second
valley, O, elder brothers.
26. I have been as far as the second valley, but
27. Saw nothing worthy of my notice.
28. Then they made room for them at the fireplace and the mes
sengers spake,
29. Saying: Our younger brother
30. Tells us he has been as far as the second valley, but
31. Saw nothing worthy of his notice.
I.AFLESCHF.J Nl'-KI NQN-K/ON RITE 213
32. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
33. The return of the younger brother,
34. Who had gone again upon his sacred errand,
35. Was known to the elder brothers, through their divining sense,
though yet out of range of ordinary vision.
36. The sun had reached midheaven
37. When the younger brother was nearing his home,
38. And the elder brothers said to one another: We know our younger
brother is returning.
39. What sufferings has he endured? they said to one another.
40. Then as he appeared before them they said: Ileceive him and
speak to him, some of you,
41. And in haste they received him and spake to him.
42. Then the younger brother spake, saying: I have been to a third
valley, O, elder brothers.
43. I have been as far as the third valley
44. And saw nothing worthy of my notice.
45. Then they made room for them at the fireplace.
46. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
47. The return of the younger brother,
48. Who had gone again upon his sacred errand,
49. Was known to the elder brothers, through their divining sense,
though yet out of range of ordinary vision.
50. As he was nearing his home
51. The elder brothers said to one another: We know our younger
brother is returning,
52. Returning with swift strides, we know.
53. Then as he appeared before them they said: Receive him and
speak to him, some of you,
54. And in haste they received him and spake to him.
55. Then the younger brother spake, saying: I have been to a fourth
valley, O, elder brothers.
56. I have been as far as the fourth valley and
57. There I saw the footprints
58. Of some strange animal.
59. The remains of the grasses where it had fed, had cut the grass
with its teeth.
60. Verily, there are signs of some strange animal.
61. It has been said, in this house,
62. The elder brothers spake to one another, saying: O, younger
brothers,
63. Our younger brother,
64. Who has been upon a journey,
65. Tells us ho has been to a fourth valley,
214 THE OSAGE TRIBE [BTH. ANN. 36
66. That he has been as far as the fourth valley,
67. Where he saw signs of some strange animal,
68. Saw the footprints of the animal,
69. The remains of the grasses where it had fed;' had cut the grass
with its teeth.
70. He tells us they are surely the signs of some strange animal.
71. It has been said, in this house,
72. The elder brothers spake to one another, saying: O, younger
brothers,
73. Let the people of the Tsi'-zhu and those of the Wa-zha'-zhe
74. Come together, they said to one another.
75. The people of the Tsi'-zhu and of the Wa-zha'-zhe came together
forthwith.
76. Then the Hon'-ga spake to them, saying: O, Tsi'-zhu and Wa-
zha'-zhe,
77. Our younger brother,
78. Who has been upon a journey,
79. Tells us he has been to a fourth valley,
80. That he has been as far as the fourth valley, where
81. He saw the footprints
82. Of some strange animal
83. And the remains of the grasses where it had fed.
84. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
85. The people arose and departed without order and as though in
swarms,
86. Whereupon the speaker of the Hon'-ga said: I had thought the
Tsi'-zhu and the Wa-zha'-zhe
87. Would make some reply,
88. But without speaking, without a word,
89. They departed in disorder and as though in swarms.
90. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
91. It came to pass
92. That the return of the younger brother who had gone again
upon his errand
93. Was known to the elder brothers through their divining sense,
though yet out of range of ordinary vision,
94. And they spake to one another, saying: We know our younger
brother is returning,
95. Returning with swift strides.
96. Verily, with swift strides he is returning, we know.
97. Then as he appeared before them they said to one another:
Receive him and speak to him, some of you.
98. What sufferings has he endured? they said to one another.
99. The younger brother spake, saying: O, elder brothers,
LAFI.ESCHE] Nl'-KI NQN-K'O* RITE 215
100. I have been to a fifth valley,
101. Where I saw the footprints
102. Of some strange animal,
103. Footprints that show the animal to have cloven feet
104. And to be an animal of formidable size.
105. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
106. The Hon'-ga spake to one another, saying: O, younger brothers,
107. Let the people of the Tsi'-zhu and those of the Hon'-ga
108. Come together, they said to one another.
109. The people of the Tsi'-zhu and of the Wa-zha'-zhe came together
forthwith.
110. Then the Hon'-ga spake to them, saying: O, Tsi'-zhu and
Wa-zha'-zhe,
111. Our younger brother,
112. Who has been upon a journey,
113. Tells us he has been to a fifth valley,
114. That he has been as far as the fifth valley, where
115. He saw the footprints
116. Of some strange animal,
117. Footprints that show the animal to have, cloven feet
118. And to be an animal of formidable size.
119. It has been said, in this house,
120. The people of the Tsi'-zhu and of the Wa-zha'-zhe,
121. Without making a reply, without a word,
122. Arose and departed without order and as though in swarms.
123. Whereupon the speaker of the Hon'-ga said: I had thought the
Tsi'-zhu and the Wa-zha'-zhe
124. Would make a reply; and this they repeated to one another:
125. They made no reply.
126. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
127. The return of the younger brother,
128. Who had gone forth again upon his errand,
129. Was known to the elder brothers, through their divining sense,
though yet out of range of ordinary vision.
130. He was nearing home,
131. When the elder brothers said to one another: We know our
younger brother is returning.
132. He is returning with quickened strides, they said to one another.
133. Then as he appeared before them they said to one another:
Receive him and speak to him, some of you,
134. And in haste they received him and spake to him.
135. Then the younger brother spako, saying: f have been to a sixth
valley,
136. Where I saw the footprints
216 THE OSAGE TRIBE [EI-H. AXX. 36
137. Of some strange animals,
138. Whose paths led hither and thither, in every direction.
139. Verily, they appear to be strange animals.
140. The foam of the water passed by them to the ground indicated
their recent presence at this place.
141. Verily, they must be animals of formidable size.
142. It has been said, in this house,
143. The Hon'-ga spake to one another, saying: O, younger brothers,
144. Let the people of the Tsi'-zhu and those of the Wa-zha'-zhe
145. Come together, they said to one another.
146. The people of the Tsi'-zhu and of the Wa-zha'-zhe came together
forthwith.
147. Then the Hon'-ga spake to them, saying: O, Tsi'-zhu and
Wa-zha'-zhe,
148. Our younger brother,
149. Who has been upon a journey,
150. Tells us he has been to a sixth valley,
151. That he has been as far as the sixth valley,
152. Where he saw footprints
153. Of some stran-ge animals,
154. Whose paths led hither and thither, in every direction.
155. Even the foam of their urine still lay upon the ground and indi
cated their recent presence at that place.
156. Verily, they must be animals of formidable size. .
157. It has been said, in this house,
158. The people arose without making a reply and departed in dis
order and as though in swarms.
159. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
160. The return of the younger brother,
161. Who had again gone forth upon his errand,
162. Was known to the elder brothers, who said: We know he is
returning though he is yet out of range of ordinary vision.
163. Then as he was nearing home
164. They said to one another: We know our younger brother is
returning.
165. Then as he appeared before them he said to them: O, elder
brothers,
166. I have been to a seventh valley,
167. I have been as far as the seventh valley, and
168. There I saw the signs of some strange animals.
169. The grasses, that had been trampled by their feet, lay pointing
where their trail led,
170. Their dung that lay scattered upon the land.
171. Verily, they appear to be animals of formidable size.
LAFLESCHE] Nl'-KI NQN-K'ON RITE 217
172. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
173. The Hon'-ga spake to one another, saying: O, younger brothers,
174. Let the people of the Tsi'-zhu and those of the Wa-zha'-zhe
175. Come together, they said to one another.
176. The people of the Tsi'-zhu and of the Wa-zha'-zhe came together
forthwith.
177. Without speaking
178. The people arose and departed as though in swarms.
179. Then the speaker of the Hon'-ga said: I had thought the people
of the Tsi'-zhu and those of the Wa-zha'-zhe
180. Would make some reply, but
181. Without a word they arose and departed as though in swarms.16
182. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
183. The Hon'-ga spake to one another, saying: Our younger brother,
184. Who has been upon a journey,
185. Has been to a seventh valley,
186. Where herds of animals,
187. Seven in number,
188. He tells us he has seen.
189. He continued his journey beyond the seven herds of animals
190. To a prominent hill,
191. Upon the summit of which he stood,
192. From which place he beheld a line of groves cut here and there
by intervening spaces.
193. In each of these groves he saw people.
194. He tells us he saw smoke constantly shooting upward from their
dwellings among these groves,
195. That these strange people
196. Are formidable in their personal appearance and in their num
bers.
197. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
198. They said to one another: O, younger brothers,
199. Let the people of the Tsi'-zhu and those of the Wa-zha'-zhe
200. Come together, they said to one another.
201 . The people of the Tsi'-zhu and of the Wa-zha'-zhe came together
forthwith,
202. And the Hon'-ga spake to them, saying: O, Tsi'-zhu and Wa-
zha'-zhe,
203. Our younger brother
204. Has returned from his journey in a great state of alarm.
205. He has traveled to a seventh valley,
206. Where, he tells us, he saw herds of animals, seven in number,
" Lines 172 to 181 were evidently repeated unintentionally and should be skipped and the reading con
tinued from line 182 in order to complete the sense.
218 THE OSAGE TRIBE IETH. ANN. 36
207. Which he observed with care.
208. The animals, he tells us, are formidable in size,
209. Having sharp, curved horns upon their heads.
210. He continued his journey beyond these herds
211. To a prominent hill,
212. Upon the summit of which he stood,
213. From which place he beheld a line of groves of trees.
214. Smoke constantly shot upward therefrom, he tells us, O, Tsi'-
zhu and Wa-zha'-zhe.
215. Among these groves of trees dwell people,
216. Formidable in their personal appearance and in their numbers,
217. Our younger brother tells us.
218. These strange people
219. Wear the hair of their foreheads cut short,
220. That upon their foreheads are tattoo marks,
221. As also around their mouths.
222. They are a people
223. Abundantly supplied with sharp-pointed weapons,
224. A people whose arrows bristle and radiate in their grasp.
225. They are a people
226. Who possess shields of buffalo hide for the protection of their
bodies.
227. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
228. The Tsi'-zhu and the Wa-zha'-zhe replied, saying: That is well.
229. Then, speaking to one another, they said: O, younger brothers,
230. Let the Tsi'-zhu (gens) Who are Feared by the Gods
231. Be spoken to concerning this report.
232. Then quickly the Hon'-ga spake to the Tsi'-zhu, Who are Feared
by the Gods,
233. And as promptly the Tsi'-zhu replied: O, Hon'-ga,
234. I am not abundantly supplied with weapons; therefore
235. Let me bid you, O, Hon'-ga,
236. To speak to the Wa-zha'-zhe concerning this report.
237. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
238. The Hon'-ga approached the Wa-zha'-zhe Wa-non (the war gens
of the Wa-zha'-zhe),
239. And, standing over them with bowed heads, spake to them,
240. Saying: Our younger brother
241. Has returned from his journey in a great state of alarm, O,
Wa-zha'-zhe.
242. He saw a people,
243. Who are very formidable in their personal appearance and in
their numbers,
244. A people who wear the hair of their foreheads cut short,
LAFI.KSCHEJ Nl'-KI NO*-K'ON KITE 219
245. Upon whoso foreheads are tattoo marks,
246. As also around their mouths
247. And upon their breasts they have tattoo marks.
248. Verily, they are a people well supplied with weapons,
249. A people who have shields to protect their bodies.
250. It has been said, in this house,
251. The Wa-zha'-zhe promptly replied, saying: It is well, O, Hon'-ga.
252. You shall overcome these strange people and make them to fall.
O, Hon'-ga.
253. Seven tines of the antlers of the deer
254. I have made to be my weapons, mysterious and sacred.
255. Even the small tip of a tine of the deer's antlers
256. I can split with one of these arrows, O, Hon'-ga, so accurate are
their flight.
257. These mysterious arrows you shall use, O, IIon'-ga, to overcome
these strange people and make them to fall.
NI'-KI WI'-GI-E, VERSION OF THE BLACK BEAR GENS
(Osage version, p. 414; literal translation, p. 562)
In April, 1919, the following wi'-gi-e, another version of the Ni'-ki
Nonk'on of the Hon'-ga Division, was obtained from Wa-tse'-mon-in
(pi. 18). This version is used by the Wa-ca'-be-ton (Black Bear)
gens, of which Wa-tse'-mon-in is a member. The Black Bear and
the Puma gentes are closely related, and it is stated by members of
the two gentes that they use in common their set of rituals. It
appears, however, that each gens has its own version of the Ni'-ki
Non-k'on, and that in ceremonial rank the Black Bear gens has pre
cedence over the Puma gens.
In 1896, while on a visit in Washington City, Wa-tse'-mo"-in gave
to Miss A. C. Fletcher a paraphrase of this wi'-gi-e. At that time
very little was known of the elaborate tribal rites of the Osage, and
while the information gathered was interesting there were no means
then available for further and complete study of the rites of that tribe.
The important differences between the two wi'-gi-os arc as follows:
The four great gods to whom the Puma people appealed for aid
when about to descend from the sky to the earth are ignored by the
Black Bear people.
The Black Bear gens make no mention of the eagle spoken of by
the Puma gens as leading the people down to the earth, under whose
guidance the people alighted on seven trees. In the Black Bear story
the people alighted by their own volition upon seven rocks.
In the wi'-gi-e of the Puma gens Wa'-tse-ga-wa, The Radiant Star,
the sky name of the Black Bear gens, acts as messenger, while in the
Black Bear gens wi'-gi-e the Puma acts as messenger.
220 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
The Black Bear gens mention the Elk as the being who made the
waters to depart and exposed the four different colored soils of the
earth — namely, the dark, the blue, the red, and the yellow. The
wi'-gi-e of the Puma gens tells of the Crawfish as the being who gave
the people the four symbolic soils of the earth.
The wi'-gi-e of the Puma does not mention Wa'-tse-gi-tsi, He-Who-
is-from-the-Stars, met by the Black Bear people in their wanderings.
This person, in accordance with his office, bestowed upon the gens a
group of chief names, and he also exercised a definite peaceful influ
ence over the people, so that they agreed to banish from their acts
as a gens all anger and hatred. It may here be suggested that this
story offers a possible clew to the meaning of the name Wa-zha'-zhe,
which, literally translated, would be, wa-, an act; zha-zhe, name.
The word freely translated would be "The-Name-Giver."
No mention is made in the Black Bear wi'-gi-e of the Elk giving
the breath of life to the four winds, as described in the Puma wi'-gi-e.
The Black Bear wi'-gi-e makes the neck of the white swan to be
the war standard of the people, while the Puma wi'-gi-e makes the
brow antlers of the Elk to be the war standard.
In the month of December, 1919, Wa-tse'-mon-in conferred upon
Mon'-zhi (better known as William Pryor) the Ni'-ki degree in the
version belonging to the Wa-ca'-be or Black Bear gens, both of the
men being members of that gens.
THE Wl'-GI-E
1. What said they, it has been said, in this house,
2. The little ones were to become a people, it has been said, in this
house,
3. A thought which threw the people into profound meditation.
4. They sat in great perplexity,
5. For in the first of the great divisions of the heavens
6. They thought to make the abiding place of the little ones.
7. They sat in great perplexity,
8. For in the first divisions of the heavens it was not possible for
the little ones to abide.
9. They had made their first downward soaring.
10. They gathered together, it has been said, in this house,
11. The little ones had not yet become a people.
12. They gave their thought to making the second division of the
heavens
13. The abiding place of the little ones.
14. It was not possible for the little ones to abide therein.
15. They had made their second downward soaring.
I.AFLESCHE] Nl'-KI NON-K'ON RITE 221
16. Again they meditated upon a descent,
17. And they sat in great perplexity,
18. For in the third division of the heavens
19. They thought the little ones might become a people and abide.
20. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
21. The little ones did not become a people in the third heaven.
22. The little ones failed to become a people.
23. They had made their third downward soaring.
24. The people spake to one another, saying: O, younger brothers.
25. Look you, it is not possible for the little ones to become a people.
26. Let search be made for a way.
27. They meditated upon continuing the descent,
28. They sat in great perplexity,
29. Then they took the downward course to earth.
30. They found the earth engulfed in water that lay undisturbed.
31. They paused, then asked one another: What shall we do?
32. They descended and upon the tops of seven great rocks
33. They alighted.
34. The seventh rock,
35. The rock that was black in color,
36. Spake to the little ones of its great age,
37. Spake to them, saying: Verily, my little ones shall come closely
to me for protection as they travel the path of life.
38. When my little ones come close to me for protection,
39. There shall be no death among them as they travel the path of life.
40. When my little ones come close to me for protection,
41. They shall cause themselves to be difficult to overcome by death.
42. When my little ones come close to me for protection,
43. They shall enable themselves to live to see old age as they travel
the path of life.
44. The red rock spake to the little ones,
45. Spake to them of its great age,
46. Then said to them: My little ones shall come close to me for pro
tection as they travel the path of life.
47. When my little ones come close to me for protection,
48. There shall be no death among them as they travel the path of life.
49. When the little ones come close to me for protection,
50. They shall cause themselves to be difficult to be overcome by
death.
51. When the little ones come close to me for protection,
52. They shall enable themselves to live to see old age as they travel
the path of life.
53. The people spake to one another, saying: O, younger brothers,
54. What shall we do? they said to one another.
222 THE OSAGE TRIBE [KTH. ANN. 36
55. It is impossible for the little ones to dwell upon the surface of the
water.
56. Let us cause search to be made.
57. The Sho'-ka, who stood near,
58. Even as these words were spoken,
59. Hastened to the Black-bean-like (the Water-beetle, the whirligig)
(%. ID,
60. And quickly returned with him.
61. The people spake to the Water-beetle, saying: O, grandfather,
62. It is not possible for the little ones to dwell upon the surface of
the water.
63. We ask of you to make search for a way out of our difficulty.
64. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
65. The Water-beetle replied: O, my grandchildren,
66. You say it is not possible for the little ones to dwell upon the
surface of the water.
67. You ask me to search for a way out of your
difficulty.
I shall make search for a way.
Thereupon he pushed forth, even against
the current.
Running swiftly upon the surface of the
water,
He came to a bend of the water,
Then spake, saying: It is impossible for
me to give you help, O, my grandchildren.
. Although it is not possible for me to help
FIG. 11.— The water beetle.
you,
74. I will say to you : My walk of life is upon the surface of the water.
75. The little ones shall make of me their bodies.
76. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
77. They shall be free from all causes of death as they travel the
path of life.
78. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
79. They shall cause themselves to be difficult to overcome by death.
80. What said they? It has been said, in this house,
81. They spake to the Spider-like (WTater-spider) (fig. 12), it has been
said, in this house,
82. Saying: O, grandfather,
83. It is not possible for the little ones to dwell upon the surface of
the water.
84. You are asked to search for a way out of the difficulty.
85. It is the people who ask this of you, O, grandfather.
86. The Water-spider spake, saying: O, my grandchildren,
87. You say it is not possible for the little ones to dwell upon the
surface of the water.
I.A FLESCIIE]
Nl'-KI
KITK
223
88. You ask me to search for a way out of the difficulty.
89. I shall make search for a way.
90. Thereupn he pushed forth even against the current of the water.
91. Walking swiftly upon the surface,
92. He came to a second bend of the current.
93. Ho paused at this bend
and spake,
94. Saying: It is not possible,
O, my grandchildren.
95. Although it is not possible
to find a way out of the
difficulty,
96. The little ones shall make
of me their bodies.
97. My walk in life is upon the
surface of the water.
98. When the little ones make
of me their bodies,
99. They shall be free from
all causes of death as
they travel the path of
life.
100. When the little ones make
of me their bodies,
101 . They shall cause themselves to be difficult to overcome by death.
102. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
103. They shall enable themselves to live to see old age as they travel
the path of life.
104. It is well, the people replied,
105. What is said here shall stand.
To the Sho'-ka, who stood near,
The people spake, saying: O,
younger brother.
Then, verily, at that time and
place,
The Sho'-ka hastened to the
Walker-on-the-water (Water-
strider) (fig. 13), to whom lie
spake,
110. Saying: O, my grandfather,
111. It is not possible for the little ones to dwell upon the surface of
the water.
112. The people ask you to search for a way out of the difficulty.
The Watcr-strider replied: You say it is not possible for the
little ones to dwell upon the surface of the water.
You ask me to search for a way out of the difficulty.
Fio. 12.— The water spider. (Courtesy of Dr. Wm. K.
Saflord.)
108.
109.
Fio. 13.— The water strider. (Courtesy of
Dr. Wm. E. Saflord.)
113.
114.
224 THE OSAGE TRIBE [KTH. ANN. 36
115. I shall make search for a way.
116. Thereupon, even against the current,
117. He pushed forth in a zigzag line.
118. He came to a third bend in the current,
119. Where he paused and spake, saying: It is not possible, O, my
grandchildren.
120. Although it is not possible for me to give you help,
121. I will tell you that my walk in life is upon the surface of the
water.
122. The little ones shall make of me their bodies.
123. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
124. They shall be free from all causes of death as they travel the
path of life.
125. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
126. They shall cause themselves to be difficult to over
come by death.
127. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
128. They shall enable themselves to live to see old age as
they travel the path of life.
129. What is here said shall stand.
130. What said they? it has been said, in this house.
131. The people said: It is not possible for the little ones
to dwell upon the surface of the water.
FIG. i4. — The 132. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in
tTr.K this house,
wm. E. sat- 133. The Sho'-ka hastened to the Red-breasted leech
(fig. 14) '
134. And quickly returned with him.
135. To the Red-breasted-leech the people spake, saying: O, grand
father,
136. It is not possible for the little ones to dwell upon the surface of
the water.
137. We ask you to make search for a way out of our difficult}'.
138. The Leech replied: You say it is not possible for the little ones
to dwell upon the surface of the water.
139. You ask me to search for a way out of your difficulty.
140. I shall make search for a way.
141. Thereupon he pushed forth, even against the current,
142. Pulling himself repeatedly as he pushed on.
143. He came to a fourth bend in the current,
144. Where he paused and spake, saying: It is not possible, O, my
grandchildren.
145. Although it is not possible for me to give you help,
LAFLESCHB] Nl'-KI NO*-K'O* KITE 225
146. I will tell you: My walk in life is on the surface of the water.
147. The little ones shall make of me their bodies.
148. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
149. They shall be free from all causes of death.
150. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
151. They shall cause themselves to be difficult to overcome by death.
152. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
153. They shall enable themselves to live to see old age as they travel
the path of life.
154. The days that are calm and beautiful
155. The little ones shall also enable themselves to live to see.
156. What said they? it has been said, in this house.
157. The people spake to one another, saying: O, younger brothers,
158. It is not possible for the little ones to become a people.
159. It is not possible for the little ones to dwell upon the surface of
the water,
160. O, younger brothers, they said to one another,
161. Make search for a way out of our difficulty.
162. Then they spake to the Great Elk,
163. Saying: O, grandfather,
164. It is not possible for the little ones to dwell upon the surface of
the water, O, grandfather.
165. It is not possible for the little ones to make the waters to become
dry.
166. We ask you to seek for a way out of our difficulty.
167. It is not possible for the little ones to dwell upon the surface of
the water.
168. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
169. The Great Elk
170. Threw himself suddenly upon the water,
171. And the dark soil of the earth
172. Ho made to appear by his strokes.
173. Then he spake to the people, saying: O, elder brothers,
174. I have given you cause to be grateful and happy.
175. When the little ones go toward the setting sun against their
enemies
176. And take with them this dark soil as a sign of their supplications,
177. Their prayers shall never fail to be heard as they travel the path
of life.
178. For a second time
179. The Great Elk threw himself upon the water,
180. And the blue soil of the earth,
2786—21 15
226 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
181. He made to appear by his strokes.
182. Then he spake to the people, saying: O, elder brothers,
183. I have given you cause to be grateful and happy.
184. When the little ones go toward the setting sun against their
enemies,
185. They shall take with them this blue soil as a sign of their sup
plications.
186. When they use this soil as a sign of their supplications,
187. Their prayers shall never fail to be heard as they travel the path
of life.
188. For a third time
189. The Great Elk threw himself upon the water,
190. And the red soil of the earth,
191. He made to appear by his strokes.
192. Then he spake to the people, saying: O, elder brothers,
193. I have given you cause to be grateful and happy.
194. When the little ones go toward the setting sun against their
enemies,
195. And take with them the red soil as a sign of their supplications,
196. Their prayers shall never fail to be heard as they travel the path
of life.
197. For a fourth tune
198. The Great Elk threw himself upon the water,
199. And the yellow soil of the earth,
200. He made to appear by his strokes.
201. Then he spake to the people, saying: O, elder brothers,
202. I have given you cause to be grateful and happy.
203. When the little ones go toward the setting sun against their
enemies,
204. And take with them the yellow soil as a sign of their suppli
cations,
205. Their prayers shall never fail to be heard as they travel the
path of life.
206. O, elder brothers,
207. I, who stand here, am a Hon'-ga, a sacred person, The Great
Elk by name,
208. I, who stand here, am a Hon'-ga, a sacred person, The Little
Earth by name,
209. I, who stand here, am a Hon'-ga, a sacred person, Maker-of-the-
Earth's-Soil by name.17
" There is in the Omaha gentile organization a gens having this name, Mon'-thin-ka-ga-xe, Maker-of-the-
Earth's-Soil. See Twenty-seventh Annual Report, B. A. E., p. 171. Long, in referring to this gens, says
the "Mon-eka-tfoh-haor Earthmakers * * * are said to have originated the present mode of mourning
by rubbing the body with whitish clay" (Long's Expedition, Vol. 1, p. 327). While Mr. Long's state
ment is not strictly accurate, it is interesting in so far as it bears testimony to the fact that the Omaha
clung to the supplicatory rite they call "No"'-zhi"-zhO"" when long ago they separated from the Osage.
The Osage also still call this rite by the same name, "No»'-zhi»-zho"."
I.AFLKSCHK] Nl'-KI NQN-K'ON RITE 227
210. I am a Hon'-ga, Maker-of-the-land by name.
211. The dark soil of the earth,18
212. He held up to view
213. And spake to the people, saying: This dark soil of the earth
214. I have not made without a purpose.
215. When the little ones use it as a sign of their supplications,
216. When they put it upon their faces as a sign of their supplications,
217. And moisten, with their tears,
218. Even so much as their eyelids,
219. Their prayers shall never fail to be heard as they travel the path
of life.
220. Then he held to view the blue soil of the earth,19
221. And spake to the people, saying: This blue soil also
222. I have made for you to put upon your faces.
223. When the little ones go toward the setting sun against their
enemies
224. And take with them this blue soil as a sign of their supplications,
225. Their prayers shall never fail to be heard as they travel the path
of life.
226. What said they? it has been said, in this house.
227. The red soil of the earth
228. He held to view and spake to the people,
229. Saying: In making this soil I have given you cause to be grate
ful and happy.
230. When the little ones go toward the setting sun against their
enemies,
231. When you take the red soil with you as a sign of your supplica
tions,
232. Your prayers shall never fail to be heard.
233. The yellow soil of the earth
234. He held to view and spake, saying: This soil also
235. The little ones, when they go toward the setting sun against
their enemies,
236. They shall take with them as a sign of their supplications.
237. Their prayers shall never fail to be heard as they travel the path
of life.
" The dark soil of the earth must be used only in the rite of No»'-zhi°-zhO'>, or vigil.
" The blue soil of the earth is for the use of the woman who takes upon herself the rite of Wa-zhi«'-the-
the, the sending of strength and courage to' her brothers and other kindred who had gone to war. A cere
mony of the same name and meaning was performed by the women of the Omaha, but in a different form
and without the blue soil. (Sec Twenty-seventh Annual Report, B. A. E., p. 583.) The blue soil must
also be used to paint the seven and six stars on the face of the warrior chosen to act as Wa'-do»-be in the
ceremonies of certain degrees of the war rites. This officer must be able to count seven and six o-do«'
(military honors) won by himself.
228 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
238. What said they 3 it has been said, in this house.
239. The people spake to one another, saying: O, younger brothers,
240. We are a people who spare none of our foes,
241. A people who are never absent from any important movement,
242. And they spake to the one who had made of the Puma his body,
243. Saying: O, younger brother.
244. Even as these words were spoken the Puma went forth.
245. Then after a time the people said to one another: There are
signs that our younger brother is returning,
246. Stumbling, tripping again and again as he hastens
247. Running repeatedly as he hurries homeward.
248. Go, some of you, and speak to him,
249. And some of the brothers hastened to meet him and to speak to
him.
250. In response to their inquiries, the Puma spake, saying: O, elder
brothers,
251. Yonder stands a man, O, elder brothers,
252. Verily, a man whose appearance excites fear,
253. A man who is like us in form.
254. Then the people spake, saying: O, younger brothers,
255. Look you, I have said, we are a people who spare none of our
foes,
256. A people who are never absent from any important movement.
257. Whoever this man may be,
258. We shall send him to the abode of spirits.
259. It matters not whose little one he may be,
260. We shall make him to lie low.
261. In the direction of the man they hastened,
262. They made one ceremonial pause,
263. Then, at the fourth pause,
264. The Puma spake, saying: There he stands, O, elder brothers.
265. It is well, the people replied,
266. We shall send him to the abode of spirits.
267. Their index fingers
268. They thrust into their mouths,
269. To moisten them and to give them killing power.
270. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
271. The man spake, saying:
272. I am a Hon'-ga (a sacred person), O, elder brothers, he stood
saying.
273. Then the Puma spake, saying: O, elder brothers,
274. He speaks clearly our language.
275. I am a Hon'-ga, the stranger continued, who has come from the
midst of the stars,
LA FI.ESCBE] Nl'-KI NQN-K'ON KITE 229
276. O, elder brothers,
277. Young-chief is my name, I who stand here,
278. Star-chief is my name, I who stand here,
279. Radiant-star is my name, I who stand here,
280. Star-that-travels is my name.
281. Then the people replied: It is well.
282. The stranger continued: Young-chief
283. Is a name you shall use as you travel the path of life.
284. The Radiant star also
285. Is a name you shall use as you travel the path of life.
286. In giving you these names I give you cause to be grateful and
happy, O, elder brothers.
287. It is well, the people replied.
288. Then the people spake to one another, saying: O, younger
brothers,
289. It is well,
290. We shall henceforth banish from our midst all anger and hatred,
O, younger brothers,
291. We shall accept the names thus offered to us.
292. Young-chief,
293. Is a name that we shall make to be ours,
294. Radiant-star,
295. Is a name that we shall make to be ours.
296. This man
297. Speaks our language fluently,
298. And the name, Speaks-fluently,
299. We shall also use, O, younger brothers, they said to one another.
300. You say the man is like a stranger.
301. From that also,
302. We shall make a name for ourselves.
303. Sacred-stranger, also,
304. We shall make to be our name, O, younger brothers, they said
to one another.
305. What said they? it has been said, in this house.
306. They spake to one another, saying: O, younger brothers,
307. We have no ceremonial articles, they said to one another,
308. Let search bo made for materials to be used in making them.
309. They moved forward to make the search,
310. Then they spake to the one who had made of the Puma his body,
311. Saying: O, younger brother,
312. Go thou and make search.
313. Even as these words were spoken the Puma hastened away.
314. Then in a short time he was hastening toward home.
230
THE OSAGE TRIBE
[ETH. ANN. 36
315. The people spake to one another, saying: There are signs that
our younger brother is returning.
316. Go, some of you, and speak to him.
317. Then some of the brothers hastened out to speak to him.
318. In response to their inquiries, the Puma said: O, elder brothers,
319. Verily, there is an animal of some kind
320. In yonder place, O, elder brothers.
It is well, the elder brothers replied.
Then they spake to one another, saying: O, younger brothers,
Our younger brother has said
That an animal of some kind is in yonder place.
321
322
323
324
FiQ. 15.— Mi'-xa-5ka (White swan). A life symbol of the Wa-?a'-be (Black Bear)
gens of the Hon'-ga great tribal division. From the skin of this bird are made
the standards for a ceremonially organized war party.
325. It is well, the people said.
326. Make haste
327. That we may send him to the abode of spirits.
328. It matters not whose little one this animal may be,
329. We shall send him to the abode of spirits.
330. Look you, verily we are a people who spare none of the enemy.
331. They moved forward with quickened footsteps;
332. They made one ceremonial pause.
333. At the fourth pause
334. They came near to the place.
335. Then the Puma spake, saying: There he stands, O, elder brothers.
NI'-KI NON-K'O* RITE 231
336. An elder brother exclaimed: I have spoken, we shall send him
to the abode of spirits !
337. Then his index finger
338. He thrust into his mouth,
339. Quickly withdrew it, and pointed it at the animal.
340. The bird fell in death to the ground, its feathers strewing the
earth.
341. The people hastened to the bird
342. And spake to one another, saying: O, elder brothers.
343. It is a swan (fig. 15), O, elder brothers,
344. A white swan, O, elder brothers,
345. A bird fit for a symbolic article.
346. We shall use it for our ceremonial article.
347. Behold its feet are dark in color.
348. The tip of its bill is also dark.
349. Its feathers arc white.
350. From this bird also
351. We shall take personal names, O, elder brothers, they said to
one another.
352. White-swan
353. Shall be to us a personal name.
354. White-bird also
355. Shall be a personal name to us.
356. This shall be the name of the little ones as they travel the path
of life.
357. White-feather also
358. We shall use as a personal name.
359. Behold the dark color of the skin of the feet of the bird.
360. That also
361. We shall use as a symbol.
362. When we go toward the setting of the sun against our enemies,
363. That color shall be represented by charcoal.
364. When the little ones use the charcoal as a sign of their supplica
tions,
365. Their prayers shall never fail to be heard as they travel the path
of life.
366. Look you, we had nothing of which to make our ceremonial
articles.
367. We have killed a white swan.
368. Behold the curved neck of the bird.
369. That also we shall use.
370. We shall make of it a standard.
371. When we use it as a standard, as we travel the path of life,
232 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 86
372. And when we go toward the setting sun against our enemies,
373. The little ones shall not fail to overcome their enemies, as they
travel the path of life.
374. Behold the dark tip of the bird's bill.
375. That also shall be represented by charcoal.
376. When we use that color as our charcoal,
377. When we go toward the setting sun against our enemies,
378. We shall not fail to overcome our enemies, as we travel the path
of life.
379. The people spake to one another, saying: O, younger brothers,
380. Look you, the little ones have nothing of which to make their
ceremonial articles.
381. Let search be made for materials for such articles,
382. O, younger brothers, they said to one another.
383. Then to the one who had made of the Puma his body they spake,
384. Saying: O, younger brother.
385. Even as these words were spoken,
386. The Puma hastened to the side of a hill,
387. To the fragment of a rock,
388. With which he returned in haste,
389. And he spake to the people, saying: What think you of this?
390. Let us use this for a ceremonial article.
391. It is well, the people replied,
392. It is not suitable for the little ones to use as a ceremonial article.
393. Although the stone is not suitable for use as a ceremonial article,
394. The little ones shall make of it their bodies.
395. When the little ones make of it their bodies,
396. The little ones
397. Shall be free from all causes of death, as they travel the path
of life.
398. When the little ones make of it their bodies,
399. They shall cause themselves to be difficult to overcome by death.
400. When the little ones make of it their bodies
401 . They shall enable themselves to live to see old age as they travel
the path of life.
402. What is said here shall stand.
403 . To the one who had made of the Puma his body they spake,
404. Saying: O, younger brother,
405. Look you, the little ones have no ceremonial articles.
406. We bid you go and make search for material for the making of
the articles.
407. Even as these words were spoken,
LA FLKSCHB) Nl'-KI NON-K'O" RITE 233
408. The Puma hastened to the top of a hill,
409. To the rock that explodes with heat,
410. With which he returned in haste,
411. And he spake to the people, saying: What think you of this,
O. elder brothers?
412. It is well, the people replied.
413. It is not suitable for the little ones to use as a ceremonial article.
414. Although the rock is not suitable for the little ones to use,
415. They shall make of it their bodies.
416. When the little ones make of it their bodies,
417. They shall be free from all causes of death as they travel the
path of life,
418. When the little ones make of it their bodies,
419. They shall cause themselves to be difficult to overcome by death.
420. When the little ones make of it their bodies,
421. They shall enable themselves to live to see old age.
422. The people spake to one another, saying: O, younger brothers,
423. We have no ceremonial articles.
424. Then to the one who had made of the Puma his body they spake,
425. Saying: O, younger brother,
426. We bid you go and make search for the material for ceremonial
articles.
427. Then the Puma hastened to a gap in a ridge,
428. To the white rock,
429. With which he returned in haste,
430. And he spake to the people, saying: What think you of this,O,
elder brothers?
431. Is not this suitable for ceremonial articles, O, elder brothers?
432. It is not suitable for such purpose; nevertheless
433. The little ones shall make of it their bodies.
434. When the little ones make of it their bodies,
435. They shall be free from all causes of death as they travel the
path of life.
436. When the little ones make of it their bodies,
437. They shall cause themselves to be difficult to overcome by death
as they travel the path of life.
438. When the little ones make of it their bodies,
439. They shall enable themselves to see old age as they travel the
path of life.
440. The people spake to one another, saying: O, younger brothers.
441 . Then to the one who had made of the Puma his body they spake,
442. Saying: O, younger brother,
443. The little ones have no ceremonial articles.
234 THE OSAGE TRIBE (ETH. ANN. 36
444. We bid you go and make search for material for making them.
445. Even as these words were spoken the Puma hastened
446. To the yellow rock,
447. With which he returned in haste.
448. And he spake to the people, saying: What think you of this, O,
elder brothers ?
449. It is not suitable for use, the people replied; nevertheless
450. The little ones shall use it to make their bodies,
451. The little ones shall make of it their bodies.
452. When the little ones make of it their bodies,
453. They shall be free from all causes of death as they travel the
path of life.
454. When the little ones make of it their bodies,
455. They shall cause themselves to be difficult to overcome by death.
456. When the little ones make of it their bodies,
457. They shall also enable themselves to live
458. To see old age as they travel the path of life.
459. The people spake to one another, saying: O, younger brothers,
460. Look you, the little ones have no ceremonial articles.
461. Then to the one who had made of the Puma his body they spake,
462. Saying: O, younger brother,
463. We bid you go and make search for material for making them.
464. Even as these words were spoken the Puma hastened away
465. And was soon returning.
466. The people spake to one another, saying: There are signs that
our younger brother is returning,
467. Stumbling again and again in his haste,
468. Running from time to time as he hastens homeward.
469. Go, some of you, and speak to him.
470. Then some of the brothers hurried to him and spake to him,
471. Saying: O, younger brother.
472. To their inquiries the Puma replied: O, elder brothers,
473. Verily, an animal of some kind
474. Stands yonder, O, elder brothers,
475. An animal that is formidable in appearance,
476. An animal with cloven feet.
477. O, elder brothers,
478. The animal has horns upon its head,
479. That make it formidable in appearance.
480. Then the people spake to one another, saying: O, elder brothers,
481. Our younger brother
482. Has come home in great alarm.
483. He has seen an animal standing yonder.
484. Verily, an animal that is fear-inspiring in appearance,
I.A FLBSCHEj Nl'-KI XO'-K'O* RITE 235
485. An animal with cloven feet.
486. The animal has horns upon his head.
487. It is well! the people exclaimed.
488. Make haste, they said to one another.
489. Look you, we are a people who spare none of the foe,
490. A people who are never absent from any important movement.
491. It matters not whose little one that animal may be,
492. We shall send him to the abode of spirits.
493. They moved forward with quickened footsteps,
494. They made one ceremonial pause,
495. At the fourth pause they came near to the place,
496. Then the Puma spake, saying: There it stands, O, elder brothers.
497. The people drew near
498. To the animal, and stood in line,
499. Then spake, saying: It is a female, O, elder brothers.
500. Verily at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
501. The people spake, saying: We shall make of the animal the
sacred articles we need, O, elder brothers.
502. Even its skin
503. We shall consecrate to ceremonial use, O, elder brothers.
504. Behold the length of its back.
505. Even the back of this animal
506. Is fit for ceremonial use.
507. Out of its skin we shall make ceremonial robes,
508. To commemorate the consecration of the skin to ceremonial use.
509. We shall take from it a personal name.
510. The-sacred-robe
511. Shall be a name that shall be bestowed upon our little ones,
512. Woman-of-the-spine,
513. We shall also make to be a personal name,
514. The horns also, that spread out,
515. We shall make to be a personal name.
516. Even its head
517. Shall be referred to in a personal name.
518. Maker-of-the-head,
519. We shall use as a personal name.
520. What said they? It has been said, in this house,
521. The Hon'-ga, a people who possess seven fireplaces,
522. A people among whom there are none that are craven or timid,
523. Spake to one another, saying: The little ones have nothing of
which to make a knife, O, younger brothers.
524. Then to one who had made of the Puma his body, they spake,
525. Saying: O, younger brother.
526. Even as these words were spoken the Puma hastened forth,
236 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
527. And, with the stone that flakes,
528. He hurried home.
529. Then he spake, saying: What think you of this, O, elder brothers ?
530. Let the little ones make of this stone a knife,
531. The people replied: It is not fit for the little ones to use as a
knife,
532. Verily, it is not the right kind of stone for the little ones to use,
O, younger brother.
533. The people spake to one another, saying: O, younger brothers,
534. Look you, the little ones have nothing of which to make a knife.
535. Then the one who had made of the Puma his body went forth,
536. Even as these words were spoken,
537. And with the hard flint
538. He soon returned in haste,
539. And spake to the people, saying: What think you of this, O,
elder brothers 1
540. Let the little ones make of this stone a knife, O, elder brothers.
541. The elder brothers replied: Verily it is not the right kind of
stone for the little ones to use, O, younger brother.
542. The little ones have nothing of which to make a knife, they said.
543. The people spake to one another, saying: O, younger brothers,
544. Look you, the little ones have nothing of which to make a knife.
545. Then to the one who had made of the Puma his body, they spake,
546. O, younger brother.
547. Then, even as these words were spoken, the Puma hastened
forth,
548. And, with the red, round-handled knife,20
549. He returned in haste,
550. Then spake, saying: What think you of this, O, elder brothers?
551. It is well, the people replied.
552. That has been the object of your continual search, O, younger
brother.
553. It is fit for the little ones to use as a knife.
554. The little ones shall use this as a ceremonial knife, O, younger
brother, as they travel the path of life.
555. When the little ones go toward the setting sun, against their
enemies,
556. And when they take with them this knife,
557. Sharp, indeed, shall be their knives as they travel the path of life.
558. The little ones of the Tsi'-zhu
20 In the Omaha tattooing rite (See Twenty-seventh Annual Report, B. A. E., pp. 503, 613) the preference
given to a red-handled knife for ceremonial purposes may have some relation to the "red knife" mentioned
in this Osage wi'-gi-e.
LAPLHSCHE] Nl'-KI NO*-K'O* RITE 237
559. And those of the Wa-zha'-zhe
560. Shall use this knife as they travel the path of life.
561. When they use this as a knife,
562. They shall have a knife that will never be loose-jointed or broken.
563. When they use this as a sacred knife,
564. They shall be free from all causes of death as they travel the
path of life.
565. WThen they use this as a sacred knife,
566. They shall cause themselves to be difficult to overcome by death.
567. When they use this as a sacred knife,
568. The little ones shall enable themselves to live to see old age as
they travel the path of life.
569. Behold the red knife.
570. In commemoration of the consecration of this knife,
571. We shall take from it personal names, O, younger brothers,
572. Personal names that shall be bestowed upon our little ones.
573. The-red-knife
574. We shall use as a personal name, O, younger brothers, they said
to one another.
575. A personal name that shall be bestowed upon our little ones
shall be
576. The-sacred-knife.
577. That name we shall make to be ours, O, younger brothers, they
said to one another.
NI'-KI WI'-GI-ES OF THE TSI'-ZHU WA-NON AND THE TSI'-
ZHU WA-SHTA'-GE GENTES OF THE TSI'-ZHU DIVISION
NI'-KI WA-THON OF THE TSI'-ZHU WA-NON
The Tsi'-zhu Wa-non is the war gens of the Tsi'-zhu tribal division
called by the Osage Tsi-zhu U-dse-the Pe-thon-ba, The Tsi'-zhu who
Possess Seven Fireplaces. According to the mythical story of the
origin of the people of this division, the people came to a knowledge
of their existence as human beings within the sun, the place of their
origin. It was while the people of this division were still in the sun
that they established their Seven Fireplaces, an act that marked the
starting point of their traditions and tribal career. From the sun
they descended to the earth, upon which they were to make their
permanent abode. The manner of their descent, the story of their
subsequent movements which served as their guide in their cere
monial life, were transmitted by the wi'-gi-e, entitled Wi'-gi-e
Ton-ga, The Great Wi'-gi-e, a wi'-gi-e that forms the principal part
of this ritual and has for its theme the entrance of the people into
life — a life that touches all forms, including the sun and the earth.
This wi'-gi-e will be given in its proper place farther on.
The Tsi'-zhu Wa-non version of the Ni'-ki Wa-thon as given by
Xu-tha'-wa-ton-in (pi. 19), a member of that gens, is as follows:
When a candidate has prepared himself to take the Ni'-ki Wa-thon
degree of the war rites by securing certain symbolic articles, fees to
be paid to the Xo'-ka and other officials, and the provisions necessary
for entertaining the members of the order during the initiation, he
sends for the Sho'-ka of his gens. On the arrival of the Sho'-ka the
candidate hands to him a pipe and some tobacco, telling him at the
same time that he is ready to take the degree and that he is to go
after the Xo'-ka. The Sho'-ka fills the pipe with tobacco and carries
it to the house of the Xo'-ka and in presenting the pipe tells him
formally that the candidate is prepared to take the degree. The
Xo'-ka then takes a particle of the tobacco from the bowl of the
pipe and tosses it over his left shoulder; he takes a second piece and
tosses that over his right shoulder; the third piece he drops on his
left foot, the fourth on his right; and the fifth piece he offers to the
sky. The Xo'-ka then lights the pipe and takes a few whiffs as a
supplicatory act on behalf of his candidate, at the close of which he
follows the Sho'-ka to the candidate's house. On entering and taking
their places, the Xo'-ka instructs the Sho'-ka to assemble the Non'-
hon-zhin-ga of both the Tsi'-zhu and the Hon'-ga tribal divisions.
238
BUREAU OF AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY
THIRTY-SIXTH ANNUAL REPORT PLATE 19
XU-THA'-WA-TQN-|N (CONSPICUOUS EAGLE.
MernlHT of the Tsi'-zlm Wn-no" Rens, principal war gens of the Tsi'-zhn great trilml division. This man willingly
pave information concerning versions of the tribal rites as used by his gens. He made no omissions, as he said
his Initiator bade him make none, no mailer how small a fee he received, in order that the rile might not l» pro
faned. Xu-tha'-wa-to»-i" died in PcecmlKT, 1915, not long after he had given the rituals of his gens.
BUREAU OF AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY
THIRTY-SIXTH ANNUAL REPORT PLATE 20
HEART-SACK POUCH AND CAPTIVE STRAP
A heart-sack or bladder pouch in which the strap is carried. 6. A ceremonially made strap such as each member of
a war party carries to be used in tying a captive should one be secured.
[.ATLESCHE] Nl'-KI Wl'-GI-ES 239
The Non'-hon-zhin-ga come in the evening, at which time they per
form the ceremony of cutting the buffalo skin and making two pairs
of symbolic moccasins, each to be worn by the Xo'-ka at certain
stages of the great ceremony. The details of the acts of cutting the
skin were not given by the narrator. Each act of the cutting is pre
ceded by the reciting of a section of the following wi'-gi-e, partly
made up from lines 51 to 100 of the Wi'-gi-e Ton-ga, the Great
Wi'-gi-e (p. 254).
HON-BE'-$U (MOCCASIN) WI'-GI-E
(Osage version, p. 428; literal translation, p. 574)
1. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
2. Of what shall the little ones make their foot? they said to one
another.
3. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
4. They spake to the principal Sho'-ka,
5. Saying: O, my younger brother,
6. Of what shall the little ones make their foot?
7. We bid you go make search for some object suitable for use as
a foot.
8. The principal Sho'-ka
9. Went forth in haste to make search,
10. And in time returned, carrying with him a red boulder.
11. Then standing before his elder brothers he said to them: O, elder
brothers,
12. This red boulder shall henceforth be as a foot to the little ones.
13. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
14. When the little ones make of the red boulder their foot,
15. Their foot shall not be pierced by thorns and harmful grasses as
they travel the path of life.
16. They shall be able to trample down and crush all harmful grasses
as they travel the path of life.
17. When the little ones make of the red boulder their foot,
18. They shall have a foot that will cause them to be free from all
causes of death as they travel the path of life.
19. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
20. They said to one another: What shall the little ones use for a
moccasin string?
21. The red-breasted leech
22. The little ones shall use as a moccasin string, they said to one
another.
23. When the little ones use the red-breasted leech as a moccasin
string,
240 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
24. They shall have a moccasin string that will cause them to be free
from all causes of death.
25. They shall have a moccasin string that will never break.
26. They shall have a moccasin string that will cause them to be free
from all caitees of death.
27. Of what shall the little ones make their foot? they said to one
another.
28. Of the black boulder
29. The little ones shall make their foot as they travel the path of lite,
they said to one another.
30. When the little ones make of the bladk boulder their foot,
31. They shall have a foot that will cause them to be free from all
causes of death as they travel the path of life.
32. When the little ones make of the black boulder their foot,
33. Their foot shall not be pierced by thorns and harmful grasses as
they travel the path of life.
34. They shall be able to trample down and crush all harmful grasses
as they travel the path of life.
35. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
36. They said to one another: What shall the little ones use for a
moccasin string ?
37. The black-breasted leech
38. The little ones shall use as a moccasin string, they said to one
another.
39. When the little ones use the black-breasted leech as a moccasin
string,
40. They will have a moccasin string that will never break.
41. When the little ones use the black-breasted leech as a moccasin
string,
42. They shall have a moccasin string that will cause them to be free
from all causes of death.
43. Of what shall they make their foot? they said to one another.
44. Of the soft yellow boulder
45. The little ones shall make their foot as they travel the path of life.
46. When the little ones make of the soft yellow boulder their foot,
47. They shall have a foot that will cause them to be free from all
causes of death.
48. When the little ones make of the soft yellow boulder their foot,
49. They shall be able to trample down and crush all harmful grasses
as they travel the path of life.
50. Their foot shall not be pierced by thorns and harmful grasses as
they travel the path of life.
I,A FLE8CHB] Nl'-KI Wl'-GI-ES 241
51. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
52. What shall the little ones use for a moccasin string? they said to
one another.
53. The yellow-breasted leech
54. The little ones shall use as a moccasin string, they said to one
another.
55. When the little ones use the yellow-breasted leech as a moccasin
string,
56. They shall have a moccasin string that will cause them to be free
from all causes of death.
57. When the little ones use the yellow-breasted leech as a moccasin
string,
58. They shall have a moccasin string that will never break.
59. Of what shall the little ones make their foot? Th% said to one
another.
60. Of the soft dark boulder
61.. The little ones shall make their foot as they travel the path of life,
they said to one another.
62. When the little ones make of the soft dark boulder their foot,
63. They shall have a foot that will cause them to be free from all
causes of death.
64. WThen the little ones make of the soft dark boulder their foot,
65. Their foot shall not be pierced by thorns and harmful grasses as
they travel the path of life.
66. They shall be able to trample down and crush all the harmful
grasses as they travel the path of life.
67. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
68. They said to one another: What shall the little ones use for a
moccasin string?
69. The dark-breasted leech
70. The little ones shall use for a moccasin string, they said to one
another.
71. When the little ones use the dark-breasted leech as a moccasin
string,
72. They shall have a moccasin string that will never break.
73. When the little ones use the dark-breasted leech as a moccasin
string,
74. They shall have a moccasin string that will cause them to be free
from all causes of death.
At the close of the wi'-gi-e the moccasins are roughly made, the
left foot of each pair being given six fastenings to correspond with
the number of the Six Songs of the Tsi'-zhu division and seven
2786—21 16
242 THE OSAGE TRIBE [BTH. ANN. 36
fastenings to the right foot to correspond with the Seven Songs of
the Hon'-ga division. When the symbolic moccasins have been
finished meat and other provisions are distributed among the
Non'-hon-zhin-ga, who then adjourn until the following morning.
KI'-NON, OR PAINTING CEREMONY
Before sunrise of the next morning the Non'-hon-zhin-ga assemble
at the house of the candidate for the Ki'-non, or Painting Ceremony.
The Non'-hon-zhin-ga paint their faces according to the oustom of
their respective divisions and subdivisions. The Non'-hon-zhin-ga of
the Tsi'-zhu Division first paint their faces red, after which they put
upon their foreheads a bit of the soil of the earth.
The ceremonial attire of the Sho'-ka at this time consists of a
buffalo rob^which he wears with the hair outside and fastened with
a thong to his waist, and wears a pair of moccasins of buffalo skin,
cut and fashioned in the same manner as those made for the Xo'-ka.
When the Sho'-ka had put on his ceremonial attire, he and the can
didate go to the house of the Xo'-ka, carrying with them a buffalo
robe, a woven band of buffalo hair, a shell gorget, a woven girdle of
buffalo hair, and a pair of the moccasins that were made ceremonially.
The Sho'-ka leads the way, carrying on his arm his little pipe, the
badge of his office. The candidate is accompanied by the A'-ki-hon
Xo'-ka chosen by him to recite the wi'-gi-es, to sing the songs, and to
conduct the ceremonies.
When the three men have entered the Xo'-ka's house and taken
their places, the A'-ki-hon Xo'-ka recites the following wi'-gi-e,
entitled :
KI'-NON WI'-GI-E
(Osage version, p. 431; literal translation, p. 575)
1. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
2. They spake to one another, saying: What shall the little ones use
to paint their bodies ?
3. Verily, at that time and place,
4. They gathered together four stones,
5. Which they arranged in a pile, leaning one against the other.
6. Verily, at that time and place,
7. They gathered together the small dead branches of the surround
ing trees
8. And broke them to pieces, making a din of crackling sounds.
9. Verily, at that time and place,
10. They thrust the pieces of dead branches underneath the stones
and in the spaces between them.
1 1 . Verily, at that time and plac e,
12. They set fire to the pile of dead branches and the stones
LA FLESCHB] Nl'-KI Wl'-GI-ES 243
13. And made the air to tremble and vibrate with the flames and heat.
14. The darkened sides of the heavens.
15. They made to redden with the glow of the flames and heat.
16. Verily, at that time and place,
17. They spake to one another, saying: Let the little ones use the
fiery glow upon yonder heavens as paint for their bodies.
18. Verily, at that time and place,
19. The people of the Tsi'-zhu Who Possess Seven Fireplaces
20. Became stricken with the fiery glow, that left no part of their
bodies untouched.21
21. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
22. They spake to one another, saying: What beneficent power shall
this sacred fire draw toward us ?
23. Verily, at that time and place,
24. They said: The red shield,
25. Let the sacred fire draw toward us.
26. When the sacred fire draws toward us the red shield,
27. Then, when our enemies who dwell toward the setting sun,
28. Come against us with weapons in countless numbers,
29. Their weapons shall fail to strike the little ones, they said to one
another.
30. The red shield,
31. Let the sacred fire draw toward us.
32. Then, when our enemies who dwell toward the setting sun,
33. Come against us with sharp weapons standing out from their
bodies in countless numbers,
34. The little ones shall always be able to ward off the weapons, send
ing them away in forked lines, they said to one another.
35. The red shield,
36. Let the sacred fire draw toward us.
37. Then, when our enemies who dwell toward the setting sun,
38. Come against us with sharp weapons in countless numbers,
39. The little ones shall always be able to ward off the weapons,
making them to glance away on either side, they said to one
another.
40. The red shield,
41. Let the sacred fire draw toward us.
42. Then, when our enemies who dwell toward the setting sun,
« Here the A'-^I-bo« Xo'-lfa pauses while he puts red paint on the (ace and entire body of the Xo'-Ifu.
The preceding lines of the wi'-gi-e explain that the red paint symbolizes the reflection of the sacred fire.
The Non'-ho»-zhi'>-ga of the 'J'si'-zhu division who are gathered at the house of the candidate to make them
selves ready to attend the meeting at the same time perform their act of painting. In lieu of the entiru
body they paint only the face red. The color symbolizes the fiery glow cast upon their faces by the light
of the fire which has been ceremonially kindled.
244 THE OSAGE TRIBE [BTH. ANN. 36
43. Come against us with sharp weapons in countless numbers,
44. We shall always be able to ward off the weapons of our enemies,
they said to one another.
45. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
46. They spake to one another, saying: What other beneficent power
shall the sacred fire draw toward us ?
47. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
48. The God of Day that sitteth in the heavens
49. The sacred fire shall draw toward us.
50. When the God of Day that sitteth in the heavens
51. The sacred fire draws toward us,
52. Then all the gods shall always fear us, they said to one another.
53. When the God of Day that sitteth in the heavens
54. The sacred fire draws toward us,
55. Even the gods themselves
56. Shall always fear to stare us in the face, they said to one another.
At the close of the wi'-gi-e the following songs are sung. They
relate to the actions of the person going through the ceremony
called Non'-zhin-zhon, a supplicatory rite, by which an appeal is made
to the Life-Giving Power residing within the earth:
SONG 1
(Osage version, p. 432)
Transcribed by Alice C. Fletcher
MM. J-100
Time beats f f f f f
Wi-tsi-go ho ga-k'o-ga hi the the, E hi - thi - k'o - bi the the,
r r r^ - T I f f
E hi- hi-k'o-bi the the the the, Wi-tsi-go ho ga-k'o-ga bi the the,
fis J J
^h'
= P-
-f
? f~
& r r r *' ^ t f
E hi -thi - k'o bi the the,
f
E
f r
hi - thi - k'o
*
bi
r
the
the.
Wi-tsi-go ho ga-k'o-ga bi the the,
E hi-thi-k'o bi the the the the,
Wi-tsi-go ho ga-k'o-ga bi the the,
E hi-thi-k'o-ga bi the the,
E hi-thi-k'o-ga bi the the.
LAFLESCHE] Xl'-KJ Wl'-GI-ES 245
Into the earth my grandfathers dug,
In the palms of their hands they gathered its soil,
In the palms of their hands they gathered its soil,
Into the earth my grandfathers dug,
In the palms of their hands they gathered its soil,
In the palms of their hands they gathered its soil.
Into the earth my grandfathers dug,
In the palms of their hands they moistened its soil, etc.
3
Into the earth my grandfathers dug,
In the palms of their hands they rubbed its soil, etc.
SONG 2
(Osage version, p. 433)
Tranacribed by Alice C. Fletcher
M.M. , : 100
flbebeatof f f f f
Wi -tsi - go ho ga-k 'o - ga bi the the, E hu- bi - ka bi the the,
=£=£ =3=1= =*=.
r r * » - • 9 * 5t -ir r r r r
r r r r
E hu - bi - ka bi the the the the, Hon- ga \vi" wa - non non
r r i
hu-bi-ka bi the the.
Wi-tsi-go ho ga-k'o-ga bi the the,
E hu-bi-ka bi the the,
E hu-bi-ka bi the the the the,
Ho"-ga wi" wa-no° no" ga-k'o-ga bi the the,
E hu-bi-ka bi the the.
1
Into the earth my grandfathers dug,
In the palms of their hands they rubbed its soil,
In the palms of their hands they rubbed its soil,
Into the Sacred One, the Aged One,
They dug,
In the palms of their hands they rubbed ite soil.
Into the earth my grandfathers dug,
Upon their faces they put its soil, etc.
Into the earth my grandfathers dug,
Upon their foreheads they put its soil, etc.
246
THE OSAGE TRIBE
I KTH. ANN. 80
SONG 3
(Osage version, p. 433)
M.M. J = 80
Transcribed by Alice C. Fletcher
Time beats
r r
r
r r rr
Ki - no" the mon the gi-don-ba, Ki - no" the mo" the gi-don-ba,
rr
I-thi-k'o non themonthe gi-don-ba, Ki - non the mon - the gi-don-ba,
•v* 7>7 -rj5. 5
I -thi-k'onon the mon the gi- do"- ba, Ki - no" the mon-the gi-do" - ba.
Ki-non the mon the gi-do n-ba,
Ki-non the mo" the gi-don-ba,
I-thi-k'o no" the mon-the gi-don-ba,
Ki-non the mon-the gi-don-ba,
I-thi-k'o non the mon the gi-don-ba,
Ki-non the mott-the gi-don-ba.
Behold, I have put upon myself thy symbol,
Behold, I have put upon myself thy symbol,
That which is gathered in the hollow of the hands,
Behold, I have put upon myself thy symbol,
That which is gathered in the hollow of the hands,
Behold I have put upon myself thy symbol.
Behold I have put upon myself thy symbol,
Behold I have put upon myself thy symbol,
That which is moistened in the hollow of the hands, etc.
That which is rubbed in the hollow of the hands, etc.
4
That which is put upon the face, etc.
5
That which is put upon the forehead, etc.
At the close of these songs the Xo'-ka puts upon his face and fore
head the dark soil dug up from the earth, while the A'-ki-hon Xo'-ka
recites the following wi'-gi-e, that relates to the woven girdle to be
used by the Xo'-ka in fastening his symbolic buffalo robe, and the
LAFLESCHK] Nl'-KI Wl'-GI-KS 247
woven neckband to which is attached as a pendant a shell gorget, a
symbol of life. In the early days the material used in these woven
articles was the soft hair of the buffalo calf. In modern times these
symbolic girdles and neckbands were made of manufactured yarn
introduced by traders, but the ancient name, " Buffalo calf hair, " was
retained.
KI'-NON WI'-GI-E
(Osage version, p. 433; literal translation, p. 577)
1. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
2. They spake to one another, saying: What shall the little ones
use for a girdle ?
3. The hair of the young buffalo
4. They shall use as a girdle, they said to one another.
5. When the little ones use the hair of the young buffalo as a girdle,
6. They shall free themselves from all causes of death.
7. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
8. They spake to one another, saying: What shall the little ones use
for a neckband ?
9. The hair of the young buffalo
10. They shall use as a neckband, they said to one another.
11. When the little ones use the hair of the young buffalo as a neck
band,
12. They shall have a neckband that will free them from all causes
of death.
13. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
14. They spake to one another, saying: Behold this mussel shell,
15. Which the little ones shall use as a gorget pendant.
16. It was the mussel
17. Who traveled up the river, forcing his way against the current,
18. When coming to a shallow part of the river he said: Behold these
rushing waters,
19. I have not made them without a purpose.
20. I have made them to be the means of reaching old age.
21. When the little ones use these waters they shall free themselves
from all causes of death.
22. Behold the waves of the river,
23. I have made them to be the means of reaching old age.
24. When the little ones make of me their bodies
25. They shall always live to see old age.
26. Behold the hollow bed of the river,
27. I have not made it without a purpose.
28. When the little ones make of it the hollow of their own bodies,
29. Thev shall free the hollow of their bodies from all causes of death.
248 THE OSAGE TRIBE [BTH. ANN. 36
30 . Behold the swift current of the river,
31. I have not made it without a purpose.
32. When the little ones make of it their windpipe,
33. They shall free their windpipe from all causes of death.
34. Behold the ripples upon the surface of the river,
35. I have not made them without a purpose.
36. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
37. They shall always live to see their breasts wrinkled with age.
38. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
39. He spake again, saying: And it so happens,
40. That in my travel I come to the days that are calm and peaceful.
41. So shall it happen with the little ones; they also shall reach and
enter the days that are calm and peaceful.
When the A'-ki-hon Xo'-ka has finished reciting the wi'-gi-e the
Xo'-ka puts upon himself a pair of the symbolic moccasins, the
buffalo robe, the woven girdle, and the woven neckband with the
pendant shell gorget, and he is thus fully clothed as Initiator or
Priest. The candidate rises, takes the Xo'-ka by the arm and con
ducts him to the door, and when they are outside the ceremonial
approach to the "Little House," the place of meeting, begins. The
Sho'-ka takes his place a few paces ahead of the candidate, the
Xo'-ka, and the A'-ki-hon Xo'-ka, who stand abreast. The Xo'-ka,
being obliged to do so, now himself recites the Wa'-ci-thu-ce Wi'-gi-e,
literally Footsteps Wi'-gi-e, freely translated, Wi'-gi-e of the Cere
monial Approach to the "Little House." At the close of the first
section of the wi'-gi-e the Xo'-ka takes from the bowl of the pipe
he carries a bit of tobacco and tosses it backward over his left shoulder;
he. next tosses a similar bit over his right shoulder; then he drops a
bit on his left foot, then a bit on his right foot. After these acts the
procession moves forward, during which the Sho'-ka calls to the
people that the Xo'-ka and his candidate are approaching the "Little
House." Four pauses are made in the ceremonial march, at each of
which a section of the wi'-gi-e is recited and the tobacco ceremony
performed. At the fourth pause the four men have reached and
stand at the door of the "Little House."
From the allegorical story of "Finding the Enemy," of which the
wi'-gi-e of the Ceremonial Approach to the "Little House" is an
epitome, it would appear that the ultimate purpose of the move
ments toward a tribal military organization was not solely for acquir
ing territory (valleys and river bends) or for monopolizing the buffalo
herds but for the all-important aim of perfecting the most effective
means of protecting the individual as well as the tribal life, wherever
the people may be and whatever their pursuits. The safety of the
LAFLESCHB] Nl'-l£I Wl'-GI-ES 249
people as an aggregate body must always be regarded as of the first
importance. The perpetuity of the tribal existence must depend
upon the bodily strength and valor of the warrior.
The first movement of the people, in the allegorical story, in the
perfecting of their military organization, was toward a ''little
house" — a ''little house" in which certain prescribed ceremonies
must be performed not only for the orderly and authoritative organ
ization of war parties but as supplicatory acts, for the people must
not depend wholly upon their own physical strength and courage;
they must also call to their aid the Power that abides within the vast
universe. In that Power the people must place their abiding faith
and cry to it continually for aid when necessity compels them to
move against the foe. The crying of the people to the Ail-Powerful
for aid when going to war is done vicariously and must be a con
tinuous cry from the beginning to the end of the war. This is one
of the prescribed ceremonial acts.
While the Xo'-ka was preparing himself for the ceremonial approach
with his candidate to the "Little House," the Non'-hon-zhin-ga of the
Hon'-ga U-ta-no"-dsi gens were taking their places in the lodge in
order to represent the "strange people" spoken of in the story; in
other words, the enemy, which the candidate some day might meet
as the leader of a war party.
In line 2 of the following wi'-gi-e the Non'-hon-zhin-ga used the
term "Wa-xo'-be pi-zhi." The word "pi-zhi" in its ordinary sense
and usage would characterize the wa-xo'-be as bad or evil. But in
this instance the word is used metaphorically to express the mys
terious character of the consecrated article, the mystic power it
possesses to bring success to the warrior, and the evil consequences
that follow its misuse or desecration. Therefore the meaning
intended to be conveyed by the use of the word "pi-zhi" is not that
of its literal or ordinary sense. Wa-xo'-be Pi-zhi, Mysterious
Wa-xo'-be, is the correct interpretation. The same metaphorical
expression is used by the Omaha to characterize as mysterious the
seven divining arrows that are attached to their sacred pole. This
characterization of the sacred arrows is expressed in a personal
gentile name of the Hon'-ga gens, Mon'-pi-zhi, Mysterious Arrows.
(See Twenty-seventh Annual Eeport, B. A. E., p. 156.)
WI'-GI-E OF THK CEREMONIAL APPROACH
(Ossge version, p. 435; literal translation, p. 579.)
1. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
2. The people assembled the power of their mysterious Wa-xo'-be
3. To put to the test.
4. For this purpose they searched for a way by which they could
guide their footsteps.
250 THE OSAGE TRIBE [BTH. ANK. 36
5. Their footsteps led them to a valley,
6. But it was not a valley for which they made search.
7. Their footsteps led them to an animal (buffalo),
8. But it was not an animal for which they made search.
9. There are animals that keep together in a single herd.
10. Their footsteps led them to such a herd,
11. But it was not a single herd of animals for which they made search.
12. Toward the setting of the sun
13. There is a bend of a river.
14. Their footsteps led them to this river bend,
15. But it was not a river bend for which they made search.
16. Their footsteps led them to a "Little House."
17. When the little ones direct their footsteps to this "Little House,"
18. Then their footsteps shall always be guided and made easy as
they travel the path of life.22
19. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
20. Toward what shall we direct our footsteps? they said to one
.another.
21. Their footsteps led them to two successive valleys,
22. But it was not two valleys for which they made search.
23. Their footsteps led them to two animals,
24. But it was not two animals for which they made search.
25. There are animals that keep together in two herds.
26. Their footsteps led them to such herds,
27. But it was not two herds of animals
28. For which they made search.
29. Toward the setting of the sun
30. There are two bends of a river.
31. Their footsteps led them to those river bends,
32. But it was not two river bends for which they made searcn.
33. Their footsteps led them to a "Little House."
34. When the little ones direct their footsteps to this "Little House,"
35. Then their footsteps shall always be guided and made easy as they
travel the path of life.
36. Toward what shall we direct our footsteps? they said to one
another.
37. Their footsteps led them to three successive valleys,
38. But it was not three valleys for which they made search.
39. Their footsteps led them to three animals,
40. But it was not three animals for which they made search.
41. There are animals that keep together in three herds.
" Here Xu-tha'-wa-ton paused to say that the Xo'-ka is always obliged to recite this wi'-gl-e himself.
but the A'-ki-ho" Xo'-ka may prompt him. Therefore the wi'-gi-e is given the subtitle Xo'-ka Wi'gi-e
the Wl'-gi-e of the Xo'-ka.
LAFLESC-HE] Nl'-KI Wl'-GI-ES 251
42. Their footsteps led them to such herds,
43. But it was not three herds of animals for which they made search .
44. Toward the setting of the sun
45. There are three bends of a river, to which their footsteps led them ,
46. But it was not three river bends for which they made seardh.
47. Their footsteps led them to a "Little House."
48. When the little ones direct their footsteps to this ''Little House,"
49. Then their footsteps shall always be guided and made easy as
they travel the path of life.
50. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
51. They spake to one another, saying: Toward what shall we direct
our footsteps ?
52. Their footsteps led them to four successive valleys,
53. But it was not four valleys for which they made search.
54. Their footsteps led them to four animals,
55. But it was not four animals for which they made search.
56. There are animals that keep together in four herds.
57. Their footsteps led them to such herds,
58. But it was not four herds of animals for which they made search*
59. Toward the setting of the sun
60. There are four bends of a river.
61. Their footsteps led them to those river bends,
62. But it was not four river bends for which they made search.
63. Their footsteps led them to a "Little House."
64. When the little ones direct their footsteps to this "Little House,"
65. Then their footsteps shall always be guided and made easy as
they travel the path of life.
When the Xo'-ka has performed the tobacco ceremony at the
close of the wi'-gi-e, the candidate again takes him by the arm and
enters the lodge with him. The Xo'-ka puts his feet upon the second
pair of moccasins that had been carefully placed at the door so that
the toes pointed inward, and a pause is made, during which a wi'-gi-e
is recited by the A'-ki-hon Xo'-ka, which is addressed to the Hon'-ga
U-ta-non-dsi representing the enemy of the tribe. The Hon'-ga
U-ta-non-dsi at once begin to recite their wi'-gi-e in response.
Xu-tha'-wa-ton-in declined to give the wi'-gi-e recited by the A'-ki-hon
Xo'-ka, for the reason that it would not be proper for him to do so
without the responding wi'-gi-e of the Ho°'-ga U-ta-non-dsi. He
said, however, that both wi'-gi-es pertain to death and neither one
should be recited unless at a regular initiation.
At the close of the two wi'-gi-es the candidate, the Xo'-ka, and
the A'-ki-ho" Xo'-ka resume their march, moving slowly toward
their appointed seats at the oast end of the lodge, while the A'-ki-hon
Xo-ka sings the
252
THE OSAGE TRIBE
WA-TS'E'-THE WA-THON (SONG or DEATH)
(Osage version, p. 436)
[ETH. AfTN. 30
TraDHCribed by Alice C. Fletcher
M.M. -=
Time beats
O ho da-ge a wa-the a-thin he no", \Vi-e-wa-mo" a-thin he no",
=4
"r t " ? r r f r r r
II i i i i iii
A ho-o ho-o A ho-o ho-o, O
r r " r
ho da-cea-wa-thea-thin he
tr™r->~f f r *^ • r r r r r r r
ill . »
i i
no", Wi-e-wa - mona-thin he non, A ho-o ho-o, A -ho-o ho-o.
0 ho da-ge a- wa-the a-thin he no",
Wi-e-wa-mo" a-thin he no°,
A ho-o ho-o, A-ho-o ho-o,
0 ho da-ge a-wa-the a-thi" he no",
Wi-e-wa-mo" a-thi" he no",
A ho-o ho-o, A ho-o ho-o.
FREE TRANSLATION
O-ho, It is I who fall upon them unawares,
It is I who attack them thus,
A-ho ho, A-ho ho,
O-ho, it is I who fall upon them unawares,
It is I who attack them thus,
A-ho ho. A-ho ho.
O-ho, it is I who serves them thus,
I who brought these deeds to pass,
A-he the he, A-he the he,
It is I who cause them to lie blackening on the earth,
I who brought these deeds to pass,
A-he the he, A-he the he.
It is I who cause them to lie yellowing on the earth, etc.
It is I who takes from them their remaining days, etc.
The Xo'-ka takes his seat at the east end of the lodge; the candi
date sits at his right and the A'-ki-hou Xo'-ka at his left. The
A'-ki-hon Xo'-ka sings the Ki-cto' Wa-thoB ZhiD-ga, The Little Song
LA FLMCHE]
Nl'-KI Wl'-GI-ES
253
of the Gathering, during which all the Non'-hon-zhin-ga enter the
lodge, those of the Tsi'-zhu division taking their places by gentes at
the north side and those of the Hon'-ga at the south. The song has
but one stanza, which is repeated four times.
THE LITTLE SONG OF THE GATHERING
(Osage version, p. 437)
M.M. =92
Transcribed by Alice C. Fletcher
He no"
' r ' r r i
hi -ga-cko"-thea-tho"-ka, Ho no™ hi - ga-ckon-thea
V - - H?—
=t±A J IW-J-^-pSp EtHi4--rt
f r + +• -+ -+ * -*
r r * * r
thon - ka, He non hi -ga-cko"-thea-thon-ka ho - e he-e,
% fir] , ^gB^U/Lq^lPip
*" " ^ r rrrr
Hi-ga-ckoMhe a-thon-ka, He no" - hi-ga-ckon-the a-thoMca, ho - e he-e.
He no" hi-ga-oko°-the a-tho"-ka,
He no" hi-ga-ckon-the a-tho"-ka,
He no° hi-ga-ckoD-the a-tho"-ka he-e he-e,
Hi-ga-gko°-the a-thon-ka,
He no" hi-ga-ckon-the a-thon-ka he-e he-e.
They gather, its power (their wa-xo'-be), to tes^, etc.
At the close of the song and when all the Non'-ho"-zhin-ga are
seated the Xo'-ka speaks, saying: "O, Wa-zha'-zhe and Hon'-ga, I
have now come to that part of the ceremony called U'-wa-the-the"
(the act of sending certain symbolic articles to the various gentes
owning them). The Wa-zha'-zhe and the Hon'-ga reply: "O,
Tsi'-zhu, you will now perform the Wa-the'-the." The Xo'-ka then
sends by his Sho'-ka the articles to the various gentes in the following
order, in which the two divisions are taken alternately:
1. Arrow shafts, sinew, and feathers, with fee (Wa-zha'-zhe
(Wa-non)).
2. Red downy eagle feather, with fee (Tsi'-zhu Wa-shta'-ge).
'3. Fee only (Wa'-tse-tsi Wa-shta'-ge).
4. Seed corn, with fee (Tho'-xe).
5. WThite downy eagle feat hers, with fee (Hon'-ga).
6. Fee only (Ni'-ka Wa-kon-da-gi).
7. Knife, with fee (Wa-^a'-be).
8. Red paint and eagle down, with fee (O'-pxon).
254 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
9. Corn and hoe, with fee (Hon'-ga-zhiD-ga, or I'-ba-tse).
10. Fee only (Last Keeper of the Tattooing shrine).
11. Fee only (Last Keeper of the Great Healing Plant shrine).
The rites of the Tattooing and of the Great Healing Plant shrines
being tribal, the last keepers may be of any one of the gentes.
When all the articles had been "sent" theNon'-hon-zhin-gaof the
gentes, to whom the articles were sent, and the two keepers of the
Tattooing and the Great Healing Plant shrines begin, simultaneously,
to recite their wi'-gi-es. The Tsi'-zhu Wa-non recite the following
wi'-gi-e, called Wi'-gi-e Ton-ga, The Great Wi'-gi-e:
THE GREAT WI'-GI-E
(Osage version, p. 437; literal translation, p. 581)
1. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
2. The Tsi'-zhu, a people who possess seven fireplaces,
3. Verily, at that time and place,
4. Spake to one another, saying: O, younger brothers,
5. It seems certain that it is not possible for us to go below to dwell,
they said to one another.
6. Verily, at that time and place,
7. They spake to the principal Sho'-ka,
8. Saying: O, younger brother,
9. Is it not possible for us to go below to dwell?
10. We bid you go and make search for a way.
11. Verily, at that time and place,
12. The principal Sho'-ka
13. Hastened forth to make search for a way,
14. And found the bird that has no evil (the golden eagle).
15. Quickly he returned with it to his elder brothers.
16. Verily, at that time and place,
17. He spake to his brothers, saying: O, elder brothers,
18. By the aid of this bird we shall go downward.
19. The elder brothers replied: That is the person who shall lead us
downward.
20. Verily, at that time and place,
21. By the aid of the bird that has no evil,
22. They came downward,
23. Verily, at that time and place,
24. And came to earth in four soarings.
25. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
26. They moved onward over the earth,
27. Then upon the tops of seven trees
LiFLESCHE] Nl'-KI Wl'-GI-ES 255
28. They alighted and stood, it has been said, in this house.
29. Verily, at that time and place,
30. They moved onward over the earth.
31. Verily, at that time and place,
32. They came to a valley that was of no particular size,
33. In which there stood a willow, a tree that never dies.
34. Close to it they came and paused.
35. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
36. They moved onward over the earth.
37. They came to the top of a rocky cliff that was of no particular size.
38. Close to it they came and paused.
39. Verily, at that time and place,
40. They spake to one another, saying: White-Rock
41. We shall make to be a personal name for ourselves.
42. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
43. They moved onward,
44. And came to the seventh division of the heavens,
45. Where they paused and stood.
46. Verily, at that time and place,
47. They spake to one another, saying: O, younger brothers,
48. In this unorganized state it is not possible for us to take, with
certainty, our footsteps.
49. Verily, at that time and place,
50. They said to one another: Let search be made for a way.
51. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
52. The principal Sho'-ka
53. Hastened forth to make search for a way,
54. And found the red boulder that sitteth upon the earth.
55. He quickly returned with it to his brothers,
56. To whom he spake, saying: O, elder brothers,
57. Let this red boulder be as a foot to us, he said to them.
58. Verily, at that time and place,
59. The elder brothers replied: That has been the object of your
continual search, O, younger brother.
60. This red boulder shall be as a foot to the little ones as they
travel the path of life.
61. W^hen they use this red boulder as their foot,
62. Their foot shall never be pierced and wounded as they travel
the path of life.
63. Verily, at that time and place,
64. They shall crush the harmful grasses of the earth as they travel
the path of life.
256 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
65. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
66. The principal Sho'-ka
67. Hastened forth to make search for a way
68. And found the black boulder, that sitteth upon the earth.
69. He quickly returned with it to his brothers,
70. To whom he spake, saying: O, elder brothers,
71. Let this black boulder be as a foot to the little ones.
72. The elder brothers replied: The black boulder shall be as a foot
to the little ones as they travel the path of life.
73. When the little ones use this black boulder as their foot,
74. Their foot shall never be pierced and wounded as they travel the
path of life.
75. They shall crush the harmful grasses of the earth as they travel
the path of life.
76. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
77. The elder brothers spake, saying: We bid you go once more and
make search for a way.
78. The principal Sho'-ka
79. Hastened forth to make search for a way.
80. Verily, at that time and place,
81. He found the boulder streaked with yellow, that sitteth upon
the earth,
82. And returned with it to his brothers,
83. To whom he spake, saying: O, elder brothers,
84. Let this boulder be as a foot to the little ones.
85. The elder brothers replied: This boulder shall be as a foot to
the little ones as they travel the path of life.
86. When the little ones use this boulder as their foot,
87. Their foot shall never be pierced and wounded as they travel the
path of life.
88. They shall crush the harmful grasses of the earth as they travel
the path of life.
89. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
'90. The principal Sho'-ka
91. Hastened forth to make search for a way
92. And found the dark boulder, that sitteth upon the earth.
93. He quickly returned with it to his brothers,
94. To whom he spake, saying: O, elder brothers,
95. Let the dark boulder be as a foot to the little ones.
96. Verily, at that time and place,
97. The elder brothers replied: The dark boulder shall be as a foot
to the little ones as they travel the path of life.
98. When the little ones use the dark boulder as their foot.
LAFLESCHE] Nl'-KI Wl'-GI-ES 257
99. Their foot shall never be pierced and wounded as they travel
the path of life.
100. They shall crush the harmful grasses of the earth as they travel
the path of life.
101. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
102. The brothers spake to one another, saying: O, younger brothers,
103. Our mysterious Wa-xo'-be
104. Lacks the means necessary for the accomplishment of its pur
poses.
105. Let search be made for these means, they said to one another.
106. Verily, at that time and place,
107. They spake to the principal Sho'-ka,
108. Saying: O, younger brother,
109. We bid you go and make the search.
110. Verily, at that time and place,
111. The principal Sho'-ka
112. Hastened forth to make the search.
113. Verily, at that time and place,
114. He found the red flint
115. And quickly returned with it to his brothers,
116. To whom he spake, saying: O, elder brothers,
117. Let the little ones use this flint for a knife.
118. Verily, at that time and place,
119. The elder brothers replied: The red flint is not suitable for the
little ones to use for a knife, O, younger brother.
120. Verily, it is not the right kind of flint for them to use.
121. We bid you go forth and make further search.
122. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
123. The principal Sho'-ka
124. Hastened forth to make search
125. And found the blue flint.
126. He quickly returned with it to his brothers,
127. To whom he spake, saying: O, elder brothers,
128. Let the little ones use this flint for a knife.
129. The elder brothers replied: The blue flint is not suitable for the
little ones to use for a knife, O, younger brother.
130. Verily, it is not the right kind of flint for them to use.
131. We bid you go forth and make further search.
132. The principal Sho'-ka
133. Hastened forth to make further search
134. And found the flint that is streaked with yellow.
135. He quickly returned with it to his brothers,
2786—21 17
258 THE OSAGE TEIBE [BTH. ANN. 36
136. To whom he spake, saying: O, elder brothers,
137. Let the little ones use this flint for a knife.
138. The elder brothers replied: The streaked flint is not suitable for
the little ones to use for a knife, O, younger brother.
139. Verily, it is not the right kind of flint for them to use.
140. We bid you go forth and make further search.
141. Verily, at that tune and place, it has been said, in this house,
142. The principal Sho'-ka
143. Hastened forth to make further search
144. And found the black flint.
145. He quickly returned with it to his brothers.
146. Verily, at that time and place,
147. The elder brothers spake to one another, saying: O, younger
brothers,
148. Our mysterious Wa-xo'-be
149. Lacks the means necessary for the accomplishment of its pur
poses.
150. Let search be made for them, they said to one another.
151. Verily, at that time and place,
152. They spake to the principal Sho'-ka,
153. Saying: O, younger brother,
154. We bid you go and make search for the means required.
155. Verily, at that time and place,
156. The principal Sho'-ka
157. Hastened forth to make search
158. And found the white flint.
159. He quickly returned with it to his brothers,
160. To whom he spake, saying: O, elder brothers,
161. Let the little ones use this flint for a knife.
162. Verily, at that time and place,
163. The elder brothers replied : The white flint is not suitable for the
little ones to use for a knife, O, younger brother.
164. Verily, it is not the right kind of flint for them to use.
165. Verily, at that time and place,
166. They said to him: We bid you go forth and make further search.
167. The principal Sho'-ka
168. Hastened forth to make further search
169. And found the round-handled knife.
170. He quickly returned with it to his brothers,
171. To whom he spake, saying: O, elder brothers,
172. Let the little ones use this for a knife.
173. Verily, at that time and place,
174. The elder brothers replied: That is suitable.
LAFLIBCHE] Nl'-KI Wl'-GI-E8 259
175. That has been the object of your continual search, O, younger
brother.
176. Verily, at that time and place,
177. They said: The little ones shall use this for their knife.
178. When the little ones make use of the round-handled knife,
179. Nothing shall slip away from them that they undertake to cut
as they travel the patli of life.
180. Verily, at that time and place,
181. Their knife shall always be sharp and ready for use as they travel
the path of life.
182. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
183. The brothers spake to one another, saying: O, younger brothers,
184. Our mysterious Wa-xo'-be
185. Lacks the means necessary for the accomplishment of its pur
poses.
186. Let" search be made for them, they said to one another.
187. Verily, at that time and place,
188. They spake to the principal Sho'-ka,
189. Saying: O, younger brother,
190. Our mysterious Wa-xo'-be
191. Lacks the means necessary for the accomplishment of its pur
poses.
192. We bid you go and make search for them, they said to him.
193. Verily, at that time and place,
194. The principal Sho'-ka
195. Hastened forth to make search
196. And found the hickory tree.
197. He quickly returned with it to his brothers,
198. To whom he spake, saying: O, elder brothers,
199. Let the little ones use this as a club, he said to them.
200. Verily, at that time and place,
201. The elder brothers repled: The hickory tree is not suitable for
the little ones to use as a club.
202. Verily, it is not the right kind of tree for them to use as a club.
203. We bid you go and make further search.
204. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
205. The principal Sho'-ka
206. Hastened forth to make further search
207. And found the thick-barked hickory tree.
208. He quickly returned with it to his brothers,
209. To whom he spake, saying: O, elder brothers,
210. Let the little ones use this as a club, he said to them.
211. The elder brothers replied: The thick-barked hickory tree is not
suitable for the little ones to use as a club, O, younger brother.
260 THE OSAGE TRIBE IBTH. ANN. 38
212. Verily, it is not the right kind of tree for them to use as a club.
213. Verily, at that time and place,
214. They said to him: We bid you go and make further search.
215. The principal Sho'-ka
216. Hastened forth to make further search
217. And found the shagbark hickory tree.
218. Quickly he returned with it to his brothers,
219. To whom he spake, saying: O, elder brothers,
220. Let the little ones use this as a club, he said to them.
221. The elder brothers replied: The shagbark hickory tree is not
suitable for the little ones to use as a club, O, younger brother.
222. Verily, it is not the right kind of tree for them to use as a club.
223. We bid you go and make further search.
224. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
225. The principal Sho'-ka
226. Hastened forth to make further search.
227. And found the red-oak tree.
228. He quickly returned with it to his brothers,
229. To whom he spake, saying: O, elder brothers,
230. Let the little ones use this as a club, he said to them.
231. The elder brothers replied: The red-oak tree is not suitable for
the little ones to use as a club, O, younger brother.
232. Verily, it is not the right kind of tree for them to use as a club.
233. Verily, at that time and place,
234. They said to him: We bid you go forth and make further search.
235. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
236. The principal Sho'-ka
237. Hastened forth to make further search
238. And found the red-wood tree (the red oak).
239. He quickly returned with it to his brothers,
240. To whom he spake, saying: O, elder brothers,
241. Let the little ones use this as a club, he said to them.
242. The elder brothers replied: The red-wood (red oak) tree is not
suitable for the little ones to use as a club, O, younger brother.
243. Verily, it is not the right kind of tree for them to use as a club.
244. We bid you go and make further search.
245. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
246. The principal Sho'-ka
247. Hastened forth to make search
248. And found the dark-wood tree (the redbud tree).
249. He quickly returned with it to his brothers,
250. To whom he spake, saying: O, elder brothers,
LA FLKSCHE) Nl'-KI Wl'-GI-ES 261
251. Let the little ones use this as a club, he said to them.
252. The elder brothers replied: The dark-wood tree is not suitable
for the little ones to use as a club, O, younger brother.
253. Verily, it is not the right kind of tree for them to use as a club.
254. We bid you go and make further search.
255. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
256. The principal Sho'-ka
257. Hastened forth to make further search
258. And in a valley, that was of no particular size,
259. He found a willow tree, a tree that never dies.
260. He quickly returned with it to his brothers,
261. To whom he spake, saying: O, elder brothers,
262. Let the little ones use this as a club, he said to them.
263. The elder brothers replied: That has been the object of your
continual search, O, younger brother.
264. The little ones shall use the never-dying willow as their club as
they travel the path of life.
265. When the little ones use the willow as a club,
266. They shall always succeed in making their enemies to fall as
they travel the path of life.
267. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
268. Their round-handled knife
269. They quickly took from its resting place.
270. Verily, at that time and place,
271. They spake to one another, saying: It is a fear-inspiring knife.
272. Verily, it is a mysterious knife, they said to one another.
273. Mysterious-knife
274. The little ones shall take as their personal name, they said to
one another.
275. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
276. They lifted the round-handled knife
277. And quickly stabbed with it the body of the willow tree.
278. Then from its wound its lifeblood streamed forth.
279. Verily, at that time and place,
280. They cut with the knife the bark from the body of the tree,
281. First cutting from it four narrow strips, one strip for each of the
cardinal points.
282. Verily, at that time and place,
283. They cut down the tree and cut the body into the desired length.
284. Verily, at that time and place,
285. They hewed the body to the desired size.
286. Verily, at that time and place,
262 THE OSAGE TRIBE [BTH. ANN. 36
287. They fashioned out of the body of the tree a long club that
resembled the back of a fish (pi. 17, Z>),
288. And their task was done.
289. Verily, at that tune and place,
290. They caressed the club with their hands,
291. And at each stroke it uttered a cry of exultation.
292. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
293. They spake to one another, saying: O, younger brothers,
294. Our mysterious Wa-xo'-be,
295. Still lacks the means necessary to accomplish its purpose.
296. Let search be made for them, they said to one another.
297. Verily, at that time and place,
298. They spake to the principal Sho'-ka,
299. Saying: O, younger brother,
300. Our mysterious Wa-xo'-be
301. Still lacks the means necessary to accomplish its purpose.
302. We bid you go and make search for them.
303. Verily, at that time and place,
304. The principal Sho'-ka,
305. At the beginning of day,
306. Hastened forth to make search, his figure swaying from side to
side as he sped over the prairie.
307. Verily, at that time and place,
308. In the evening of the same day,
309. The elder brothers spake to one another, saying: Our younger
brother is returning.
310. Verily, at that time and place,
311. They said: Go, some of you, and speak to him.
312. Verily, at that time and place,
313. The Sho'-ka came and stood before his elder brothers, his bare
ankles worn by the grasses of the earth.
314. The elder brothers spake to him, saying: O, younger brother,
315. How has it fared with you ?
316. It has not been your wont to suffer such hardship.
317. Verily, at that time and place,
318. The Sho'-ka replied: O, elder brothers,
319. I have been to one valley,
320. And have seen nothing worthy of my notice.
321. Verily, at that time and place,
322. The elder brothers spake, saying: O, younger brother,
323. We bid you go and make further search.
LAFLESCHE] Nl'-KI Wl'-GI-ES 268
324. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
325. The principal Sho'-ka, ,
326. At the beginning of day,
327. Hastened forth to make search, his figure swaying from side to
side as he sped over the prairie.
328. Verily, at that time and place,
329. In the evening of the same day,
330. The elder brothers spake to one another, saying: Our younger
brother is returning.
331. Verily, at that time and place,
332. They said: Go, some of you, and speak to him.
333. Verily, at that time and place,
334. They said to him: O, younger brother,
335. How has it fared with you?
336. It has not been your wont to suffer such hardship.
337. Verily, at that time and place,
338. The Sho'-ka spake, saying: O, elder brothers,
339. I have been to a second valley,
340. And I have seen nothing worthy of my notice.
341. Verily, at that time and place,
342. The elder brothers spake, saying: O, younger brother,
343. We bid you go and make further search.
344. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
345. The principal Sho'-ka,
346. At the beginning of day,
347. Hastened forth to make search, his figure swaying from side to
side as he sped over the prairies.
348. Verily, at that time and place,
349. In the evening of the same day,
350. The elder brothers spake to one another, saying: Our younger
brother is returning.
351. Go, some of you, and speak to him.
352. Verily, at that time and place,
353. They spake to him, saying: O, younger brother,
354. How has it fared with you ?
355. It has not been your wont to suffer such hardship.
356. Verily, at that time and place,
357. With his bare knees worn by the grasses of the earth,
358. The Sho'-ka stood before his elder brothers.
359. Verily, at that time and place,
360. He spake, saying: O, elder brothers,
361. I have been to a third valley.
362. Verily, at that time and place,
363. He continued: O, elder brothers,
264 THE OSAGE TRIBE [BTH. ANN. 38
364. There, in that valley, I have seen upon the ground the signs of
a man.
365. The elder brothers asked: What were those signs?
366. Verily, at that time and place,
367. The Sho'-ka replied: O, elder brothers,
368. Verily, the footprints show him to be a man with cloven feet.
369. The grasses he had trodden upon were crushed by his weight.
370. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
371. The elder brothers spake to the Sho'-ka, saying: O, younger
brother,
372. Our mysterious Wa-xo'-be
373. Lacks the means necessary for the accomplishment of its pur
pose.
374. Therefore we bid you go forth and make further search.
375. Verily, at that time and place,
376. The principal Sho'-ka
377. Hastened forth to make further search.
378. Verily, at that time and place,
379. At the beginning of day,
380. His figure was seen swinging from side to side as he sped over
the prairie.
381. Verily, at that time and place,
382. In the evening of the same day,
383. The elder brothers spake to one another, saying: Yonder comes
our younger brother.
384. His rapid strides indicate that he bears good tidings.
385. Verily, at that time and place,
386. They said to one another: Go, some of you, and speak to him.
387. Verily, at that time and place,
388. They spake to the Sho'-ka, saying: O, younger brother,
389. How has it fared with you ?
390. It has not been your wont to suffer such hardship.
391. Verily, at that time and place,
392. The Sho'-ka replied: O, elder brothers,
393. I have been to a fourth valley,
394. And there I saw the man whose footprints I saw in the third
valley, O, elder brothers.
395. Verily, at that time and place,
396. The elder brothers asked: What is he like in appearance and
disposition ?
397. Verily, at that time and place,
398. The Sho'-ka replied: O, elder brothers,
399. The man is formidable in appearance, O, elder brothers.
400. Verily, at that time and place,
401. He continued: The man has weapons.
LA FLESCHE] Nl'-KI Wl'-GI-ES 265
402. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
403. The elder brothers spake to one another, saying: O, younger
brothers,
404. Our mysterious Wa-xo'-be
405. Lacks the means necessary for the accomplishment of its purpose.
406. Let us make haste, they said to one another.
407. Verily, at that time and place,
408. Their sacred club that resembles the back of a fish
409. They quickly took from its resting place.
410. Verily, at that time and place,
411. They hastened forth, making a single path.
412. Verily, at that time and place,
413. Four ceremonial pauses they made in their approach.
414. Verily, at that time and place,
415. At the fourth pause
416. They stood abreast in a single line.
417. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
418. The Sho'-ka spake, saying: O, elder brothers,
419. Yonder stands the man of whom I spake, O, elder brothers.
420. Verily, at that time and place,
421. The elder brothers asked: What is he like in appearance and dis
position ?
422. Verily, at that time and place,
423. The Sho'-ka replied: O, elder brothers,
424. The man is formidable in appearance.
425. He appears to me to be a man who, having no mercy, will permit
no enemy to live, O, elder brothers,
426. And he has weapons.
427. Verily, at that time and place,
428. He has small horns, O, elder brothers.
429. Verily, at that time and place,
430. The Sho'-ka said: He is formidable in appearance.
431. Verily, at that time and place,
432. He appears to be a man of great courage, O, elder brothers.
433. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
434. The elder brothers spake to one another, saying: Let us make
haste.
435. Verily, at that time and place,
436. Their club that resembles the back of a fish
437. They quickly took from its resting place,
438. And they caressed it with their hands,
439. And at each stroke it uttered an exultant cry.
266 THE OSAGE TRIBE [HTH. ANN. 36
440. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
441. The Sho'-ka spake, saying: O, elder brothers,
442. Yonder stands the man of whom I spake.
443. Verily, at that time and place,
444. The elder brothers asked: What is he like in appearance and
disposition ?
445. The Sho'-ka replied: O, elder brothers,
446. He has weapons.
447. He is formidable in appearance, O, elder brothers.
448. Verily, at that time and place,
449. He appears to be a man of great courage, O, elder brothers.
450. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
451. The elder brothers spake to one another, saying: O, younger
brothers,
452. Let us make haste.
453. The Tsi'-zhu, a people possessing seven fireplaces,
454. Are a people who have none among them that are craven or
timid.
455. Verily, at that time and place,
456. They said to one another: It matters not what man he is,
457. He shall go to the abode of spirits.
458. Verily, at that time and place,
459. It matters not what animal's son he may be,
460. He shall go to the abode of spirits.
461. Verily, at that time and place,
462. It matters not who he may be of the beings that stand erect,
463. He shall go to the abode of spirits, they said to one another.
464. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
465. Their club, that resembles the back of a fish,
466. They quickly took from its resting place.
467. Verily, at that time and place,
468. And caressed it with their hands,
469. And at each stroke it uttered an exultant cry.
470. Verily, at that time and place,
471. The elder brothers spake to one another, saying: Let us make
haste.
472. Verily, at that time and place,
473. Their club, that resembles the back of a fish,
474. They quickly brandished in the air,
475. And our grandfather plunged forward with a sudden shock.
476. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
477. Their club, that resembles the back of a fish,
478. For a second time
I.AFLISCHI] Nl'-KI Wl'-GI-ES 267
479. They quickly brandished in the air.
480. Verily, at that time and place,
481. Our grandfather staggered with the sudden shock.
482. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
483. For a third time
484. Their club, that resembles the back of a fish,
485. They quickly brandished in the air,
486. And our grandfather dropped to his knees stunned by the sudden
shock.
487. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
488. For the fourth time
489. Their club, that resembles the back of a fish,
490. They quickly brandished in the air,
491. And our grandfather whirled around
492. And fell to the ground in death, blood gushing from his mouth.
493. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
494. The brothers spake to one another, saying: O, younger brothers,
495. Let us make haste.
496. Verily, at that time and place,
497. And they put their hands upon the body.
498. Verily, at that time and place,
499. The skin of the left hind leg
500. They cut with eager haste,
501. And the fat issued forth from the incision.
502. Verily, at that time and place,
503. They quickly tasted of the fat.
504. Verily, at that time and place,
505. They said to one another: It is sweet and pleasant to the taste.
506. It shall be food for the little ones as they travel the path of life.
507. When the little ones use this fat as food,
508. Their limbs shall stretch and lengthen in growth.
509. Verily, at that time and place,
510. To prepare it for use the little ones shall seethe it in boiling
water.
511. The skin of the left leg
512. They cut into a narrow strip,
513. Verily, at that time and place,
514. And they said to one another: Verily, the skin is not elastic.
515. We shall always make use of it as we travel the path of life.
516. Verily, at that time and place,
517. They said to one another: Verily, it is a strong strap (pi. 20).
268 THE OSAGE TRIBE [BTH. ANN. 36
518. Verily, at that time and place,
519. They said to one another: We shall consecrate it for ceremonial
use,
520. Therefore, strong-strap
521. We shall make to be our sacred personal name.
522. Verily, at that time and place,
523. Strap-maker, also,
524. We shall make to be our sacred personal name.
525. Verily, at that time and place,
526. They said to one another: Slender-strap, also,
527. We shall make to be our sacred personal name.
528. They said to one another: Behold the remaining center,
529. We shall consecrate that for ceremonial use.
530. We shall always make of it a shield as we travel the path of life.
531. It shall be to the little ones a protection as they travel the path
of life.
532. Verily, at that time and place,
533. When our enemies who dwell toward the setting sun
534. Come against us with sharp weapons in countless numbers,
535. The little ones shall always succeed in making those weapons
ineffective as they travel the path of life.
536. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
537. When our enemies who dwell toward the setting sun
538. Come against us with sharp weapons in countless numbers,
539. None of those weapons shall penetrate our bodies as we travel
the path of life.
540. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
541. When our enemies who dwell toward the setting sun
542. Come against us with sharp weapons in countless numbers,
543. We shall succeed in warding off the weapons so that they shall
pass by us in forked lines, on either side, as we travel the
path of life.
544. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
545. When our enemies who dwell toward the setting sun
546. Come against us with sharp weapons in countless numbers,
547. We shall succeed in warding off the weapons so that they shall
pass by us in forked lines, as we travel the path of life.
548. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
549. The skin of the left side,
550. They quickly cut in a circle,
551. Verily, at that time and place,
LAFLISCHK] Nl'-KI Wl'-GI-ES 269
552. And seven slender straps,
553. They made of it for the Tsi'-zhu who possess seven fireplaces,
554. One for each fireplace.
555. Verily, at that time and place,
556. They said to one another: We shall consecrate these straps for
ceremonial use.
557. Verily, .at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
558. They said to one another: Behold the left horn,
559. We shall consecrate it for ceremonial use.
560. Verily, at that time and place,
561. They said to one another: Curved-horns, also,
562. We shall make to be our sacred personal name.
563. Verily, at that time and place,
564. Outspread-horns, also,
565. We shall make to be our sacred personal name.
566. Verily, at that time and place,
567. They said to one another: Behold the left horn,
568. We consecrate it for ceremonial use, they said to one another.
569. Verily, at that time and place,
570. They said to one another: Behold the tail,
571. We consecrate it for ceremonial use.
572. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
573. They said to one another: Behold the bladder,
574. We consecrate it for ceremonial use.
575. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
576. They said to one another: Behold the heart sack,
577. We consecrate it for ceremonial use.
578. Behold the hair of the head,
579. We consecrate it for ceremonial use.
580. Verily, at that time and place, it has been said, in this house,
581. They said to one another: Behold the chin,
582. We consecrate it for ceremonial use.
At the close of the recitation of the wi'-gi-es the A'-ki-hon, Xo'-ka
tells the Sho'-ka to bring water for the Non'-hon-zhin-ga, which he pro
ceeds to do with the aid of the women, the wives and daughters of
the members. When water has been set before each member, the
Bead of the O'-pxon (Elk) gens speaks, saying: "O, Wa-zha'-zhe,
Hon'-ga, and Tsi'-zhu, you may now wipe from your faces the sign
of the Non'-zhin-zhon." This office was given to the O'-pxon gens
because it was the O'-pxon who exposed the soil of the earth and made
270 THE OSAGE TRIBE CETH. ANN. 38
it habitable for all living creatures. He also gave to the people the
four clays of various colors for ceremonial use, and in this ceremony
two of these clays were used as signs of the Non'-zhin-zhon. The
Non'-hon-zhin-ga respond by saying, "Hau," and begin to wash their
faces. Xu-tha'-wa-ton-in remarked, with a smile, "If the head of
the O'-pxo" gens should neglect his duty, the Non'-hon-zhin-ga, to
this day, would be obliged to go about having on their faces the signs
of Non'-zhin-zhon."
At this stage of the ceremony the three men appointed to the duty
of dividing into equal shares the food provided by the candidate
busy themselves with this task and place a share before each member
of the order. Afterwards the wife or daughter of each member enters
to take home the food.
The division of the food supply being finished, all the members of
the Non'-hon-zhin-ga, excepting those who belong to the particular
gens that is conferring the degree, rise to go to their homes, having
performed their part of the ceremony. The Non'-hon-zhin-ga of the
Tsi'-zhu Wa-non gens, who, in this instance, are supposed to confer
the degree, remain seated as the members of the other gentes file out
in an orderly procession.
INSTRUCTIONS TO THE WIFE OF THE INITIATE
The A'-ki-hon Xo'-ka then directs the Sho'-ka to conduct the wife
of the candidate into the lodge, that she may receive instructions as
to the performance of certain ceremonial rites which she may desire
to observe in the course of her life. As she enters she is followed by
a number of women, most of whom are her relatives. Each one
brings her fees tied in a bundle, as does the wife of the candidate.
The Sho'-ka now hands each woman a digging pole and a woven
bag, symbolic of her vocation. Seats are assigned the women in a
row facing the initiator, the candidate, and the A'-ki-hon Xo'-ka.
When all have taken their places, the A'-ki-hon Xo'-ka, addressing
only the candidate's wife, begins his instructions as follows (Osage
version, p. 452):
Ho ! my daughter-in-law, I shall now tell you of the rite of Ki'-non.
The first part of the Ki'-non rite, which you may wish to observe
in order to successfully bring up your little ones to maturity, is this:
If it so happens that the animal brought home to your house is a
result of the first chase and the animal is a mature female buffalo
and you think the skin suitable for a covering for your little ones,
you shall dress the skin, making it pleasing to look upon, and make
it soft and pleasant to the touch. You shall then say: My father-
in-law has sanctioned the act I am about to perform and has said
that it shall not be without a purpose. You shall take red clay
that has been gathered from a cliff and with it redden the sides and
LAFL«SCHB] Nl'-KI Wl'-GI-ES 271
the leg parts of the robe, as also the full length of the back from the
head to the tail. Again you shall say: My father-in-law has sanc
tioned this act and has said that it shall not be without a purpose,
for in thus consecrating this robe I shall successfully bring to maturity
my little ones for whom it is made.
The next act in order is: That if the animal brought home to your
house happens to be a mature male buffalo you shall dress the skin,
make it pleasing to look upon, and make it soft and pleasant to touch.
You shall say: My father-in-law has sanctioned the act I am about
to perform and has said that it shall not be without a purpose. You
shall then redden the sides of the robe, as also the full length of the
back, and shall say: This act is not without a purpose, for it is
sanctioned. My father-in-law has said that by performing this act 1
shall successfully bring my little ones to maturity. This act shall
not be without a purpose, for it is sanctioned. My father-in-law has
said that by thus consecrating this robe I shall make my little ones
to be difficult to overcome bv death.
The next act in order is: That if the animal brought home to your
house happens to be an immature female buffalo, and you think the
skin suitable for a covering for your little ones, then you shall dress
the skin, make it pleasing to look upon, make it soft and pleasant
to the touch. You shall redden only the leg parts of the robe. Then
you shall say: My father-in-law has sanctioned this act and has said
that it shall not be without a purpose; that by thus consecrating
this little robe I shall successfully bring to maturity my little ones;
that by this act I shall make my little ones to be difficult to overcome
by death.
The fourth act is: That if the animal brought home to your house
happens to be an immature male buffalo, you shall take particular
pains in dressing the skin, make it pleasing to look upon, and make
it soft and pleasant to the touch; then you shall redden the leg parts
and the entire length of the back. When you have finished this,
you shall say: My father-in-law has sanctioned this act and has said
that it shall not be without a purpose; that by thus consecrating this
robe I shall successfully bring to maturity my little ones; and I shall
by this act make my little ones to be difficult to overcome by death.
Hau ! This is all.
By the observance of this supplicatory rite the young mother
appeals to the Power whence issues all forms of life to give to her little
ones the same thoughtful care that is bestowed upon the animals
that wander, shelterless, over the earth. The color put upon the
little robe is the sacred color of the Tsi'-zhu Wa-non people; it sym
bolizes the fire that draws its strength from the sacred fire of heaven
(the sun), which sheds upon all earthly life its animating heat.
272 THE OSAGE TEIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
The right to use this supplicatory ceremony must be formally
sought by a woman and the right conferred by a person having due
authority. The priest confers this right not only upon the wife of
the initiate but also upon all the women who accompanied her as she
entered the sacred lodge.
PARAPHRASE OF THE NI'-KI RITUAL OF THE QIN'-DSE-A-GTHE GENS
TSl'-ZHU DIVISION
The following paraphrase of the Ni'-ki Wi'-gi-e of the ^in'-dse-a-
gthe gens was given by Pa'-thin-wa-we-xta, a member of the Tsi'-zhu
Wa-non gens. This old man was regarded as one of the best authori
ties on the tribal rites. He initiated Xu-tha'-wa-ton-in, from whom
was obtained the Ni'-ki Ritual of the Tsi'-zhu Wa-non gens (see
pp. 238-272). At the tune Pa'-thin-wa-we-xta promised to give the
ritual in full he was very feeble, and before arrangements could be
made for him to record the rite in the dictaphone he was dead. The
old man regretted when he gave the promise that he could then give
only a brief paraphrase of the ritual, "for," he said, "no part of the
rite should be given in that form." The paraphrase is as follows:
The people, whose abode was in the heavens, assembled that they
might meditate upon the means by which they would descend to the
earth to come into bodily existence. They decided that the eagle
was the only person who could safely conduct them to the earth.
They, therefore, appealed to him and he led them downward. The
people, led by the eagle, came to the earth and alighted upon seven
trees: Pon'-ton-ga-hiu, the full-grown shagbark hickory; Pon'-ton-ga-
hiu zhin-ga, the young shagbark; Pi-ci' or Zhon'-zhi-hi (Pi-pi', acorn;
zhon'-zhi-hi, redwood), the red oak; ^a'-gthu-hi ha shu-ga, the thick-
barked bitter hickory; ^a'-gthu-hi, the smooth-bark bitter hickory;
Thiu'-xe, the willow. (The old man said seven trees, but he gave the
names of only six.)
The people found that in the willow tree there was a mystical
power — a power for resisting the forces inimical to life. They wished
to cut the tree to make of a part of its body a wa-xo'-be, a sacred
article for ceremonial use. They sent their Sho'-ka (official mes
senger) to find the material out of which to make a knife. Four times
he went out to make search, but without success. At the fifth time
he brought home a knife which he had made out of a stone of a grayish
color. He had made for it a handle that was round. The people
accepted the knife, consecrated it for ceremonial use, and called it
Mon'-hin-i-ba-btho-ga, the round-handled knife. With this sacred
knife they cut out of the body of the tree four small pieces, which
they threw into the air as sacred offerings, one to each of the four
winds. Blood flowed from each of the four wounds made with the
ceremonial knife.
LA FLESCHE] Nl'-KI Wl'-GI-ES 273
Then the people, using their sacred knife, proceeded to cut down
the tree, to shave the trunk to a proper size, and to shape it for a club.
This club they called wa-xo'-be (sacred) and consecrated it for cere
monial use. The natural color of the wood did not satisfy the people
and they regarded the sacred article as incomplete. Then, as though
by a common understanding and consent, they hastened to gather
leaves and dry twigs. These they placed in a great pile, to which
they set fire, and the smoke and flames tinged the darkened heavens
with a reddish hue — a color pleasing and satisfying to the minds of
the people. It resembled the color cast upon the eastern sky as it
rises and which the people always hailed with joy with uplifted hands.
It was this color they put upon the symbolic club to add to it the
life-giving power of the sun.
The weapon was thus finished, and there remained nothing more
to do with it but to test its magical power. For this purpose the
people sent their official messenger to a far-off country to search for
some creature upon which to make the test. The messenger returned
in the evening of the day, weary and footsore, to report that he had
been to a valley where he saw nothing worthy of notice. Again he
went out and returned from a second valley to report that he had
found nothing. He was bidden to go again, and in the evening of
that day he came home to report that he had been to a third valley,
where he had 'seen the footprints of a person (a buffalo bull). The
footprints showed the person's feet to be cloven, and the grasses upon
which he had trodden were crushed. To commemorate this event,
the people agreed to name their children Non-xthon'-zhe, Crushed-
with-his-feet. For the fourth time the messenger was sent out, and
in the evening of the day he came home to report that he had been
to a fourth valley, where he saw the person of the footprints, whom
he described as a person of formidable appearance and bearing upon
his head curved horns. . To make this report memorable, the people
agreed to name their children He-thi'-shi-zhe, Curved-horns. The
messenger gave a graphic description of the face of the person, and
from this the people agreed to name their children Tse-do'-ga-in-dse,
Buffalo-bull-face.
Upon hearing the last report, the keeper of the new weapon picked
it up and caressed it with four downward strokes of his hand. At
each stroke he uttered a word: We'-tsin-pi-zhi, Mysterious-weapon;
We'-tsin-zhin-ga, Little- weapon ; We'-tsin-hu-ton, Weapon-that-cries-
out; We'-tsin-don-a-thin, Possessor-of-a-good-weapon. These words
also became sacred names given to the children of the gens.
Then speaking to the messenger, the keeper of the sacred weapon
said: "That is the very person for whom we have been in search.
Whoever he may be, we shall send him to the abode of spirits."
2786—21 18
274 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 86
" What course shall we take in approaching that person ? " the people
asked, and the keeper of the sacred weapon replied: "We will take
the path always taken by the sun."
The people approached the person, moving in a westerly direction
in imitation of the sun. They made four ceremonial pauses on their
way. At the fourth pause the keeper of the sacred weapon lifted
the club, brandished it in the air, and the bull suddenly bellowed as
though stricken with instant pain. Again the keeper brandished the
weapon and the animal started to flee. A third time the keeper
brandished the club and the beast was stricken with mortal pain in
the hindquarters. At the fourth brandishing of the weapon the bull
whirled around and fell in death, his blood gushing from his mouth.
The people hastened to the fallen animal. They made a slight cut
in its skin, using the sacred knife, that with which they had cut the
willow tree, and from the cut fat protruded. They tasted of the fat
and said: "It is good; it shall be food for the little ones; they
shall seethe it in boiling water to prepare it for use." Out of the
skin of the left hind leg they cut a round piece, which they called
Mon'-ge-tse-ha-wa-gthe, Breast-shield; also two long narrow straps,
which they named We'-thin-zhu-dse, Red-strap, and We'-thin-ca-gi,
Strong-strap, which names they subsequently used as personal names.
From the skin of the left side of the body they cut seven narrow
straps, which they painted red. The straps thus cut they called
mon'-sha-kon, and these served as the original types of similar straps
to be ceremonially made whenever the warriors are about to go to
war, and to be used by them for tying their captives should they
succeed in taking any. The round piece of skin called breast-shield
and which symbolized the sun they also painted red, and it too
served as a type for similar shields to be ceremonially made for the
warriors and worn by them as symbolic shields as well as charms.
At the same time that they made these sacred articles they dedicated
the tails, the bladders, and the heart sacks of buffalo bulls to
ceremonial use and made them to be sacred types.
Nl'-KI Wl'-GI-E OF THE Tsi'-ZHU WA-SHTA'-GE GENS
The following Ni'-ki wi'-gi-e of the Tsi'-zhu Wa-shta'-ge, given by
Mon-zhoD-a'-ki-da (pi. 22) of that gens, may have lost, hi its trans
mission, some of its unimportant parts, but it has retained all of the
life symbols considered important by that gens. As old Tse-zhin'-
ga-wa-da-in-ga used to say to the writer, "My son, you may think
that parts of these great rites have become lost as they were handed
down. That is quite possible, but what is lost are the parts that are
unimportant; those that are of real value have come down to us."
LAFLISCHE] Nl'-KI Wl'-GI-ES 275
Like the other Ni'-ki wi'-gi-es given in this volume, this wi'-gi-e
opens the life scene of the Tsi'-zhu Wa-shta'-ge in midheaven, where
the people come into spiritual, bodiless existence and contemplate the
finding of some place where they can take on bodily form and abide
as a living people. They send a "younger brother" (Sho'-ka, or
Messenger) downward to make search for the place of abode. He
descends to the first division of the skies, as counted from the starting
point, and seeing that the "little ones" can not make an abiding
place there he returns to the "elder brothers" just as the heavens
are darkened by the god of darkness and reports to them the result
of his search.
At the second command of the "elder brothers" Ka'-xe-wa-hu-ca
(this title, most likely, is the archaic term for youngest of the broth
ers) descends to the second division of the heavens and as the god
of darkness strikes the heavens with a dark shadow the messenger
returns to the "elder brothers" to report his failure to find an abid
ing place for the "little ones."
A third command is given by the "elder brothers" for a further
search, and a younger brother descends to the third division of the
skies, and when the god of darkness strikes the heavens with a dark
shadow the messenger returns to his "elder brothers" to report his
failure to find an abiding place for the "little ones."
Again the elder brothers commanded that a further search be
made and Ka'-xe-wa-hu-ca descended to the fourth division of the
skies, where he came face to face with Ni'-ka-wa-kon-da-gi (the god
of the clouds). This section of the wi'-gi-e intimates that all the
brothers followed closely their messenger, so that on discovering
i'-ka-wa-kon-da-gi the messenger turns to them and says: "Here
stands a person, O, elder brothers." Ni'-ka-wa-kon-da-gi promises
that the little ones shall make of him their bodies, meaning that
from him they shall receive the means by which to sustain and pro
long life. He also gives them certain sacred names to use in the course
of their life.
The brothers move on and they come upon Tho'-xe, Buffalo, who
gives them two kinds of medicines, four kinds of corn, and three
kinds of squashes, all of which shall be used by the little ones in
making their bodies. In lines 107 and 108 in this section reference
is made to the sanctity of the reproduction of life.
The brothers continue their journey, this time upon the earth,
and come upon the red-oak tree, which they consecrate to be their
life symbol. They also take from it certain sacred gentile names.
They pass on and come to the red cedar, who promises them long
life. (In the ceremonial naming of the children the fronds of this
tree are used as a symbol of the tree itself and of life's persistency.)
276 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
They move on and come to the shallows of a river where the waters
tumble noisily over the rocky bed. They speak of the water as a
person and apply to him the name Wa-zha'-zhe. From this person
of the waters they receive promise of long life. (Water is also used
as a symbol of long life in the child-naming ceremonies, and the cedar
is associated with it.)
The brothers continue their journey and come to the sedge, a
"grass that never dies." From it they receive promise of long life.
(This grass is used as a life symbol in some of the ceremonies.)
They pass on and come to the Shin'-zha-hi, an evergreen water
plant, from which they also receive promise of long life. (This plant
is also used ceremonially.)'
From the Shin'-zha-hi the brothers go on and suddenly come upon
an animal that had just been slain. Mon-zhon-a'-ki-da could not
explain the symbolic significance of this scene; therefore it must
remain obscure until by some chance it is revealed by a person who
may happen to know its meaning.
The journey brings the brothers to " the greatest part of the earth."
The word earth is here used as a trope for a season or a particular
month (probably August) , 'when the yellow blossoms begin to give
color to the earth. A part of the Tsi'-zhu Wa-shta'-ge are people of
the flowers, particularly the yellow flowers. The brothers consecrate
this month as a life symbol and take from it a sacred gentile name.
The next move brings the brothers to a "beautiful house." This
is a cryptic reference to the principle for which the symbolic dwelling
stands — that of peace, which is beautiful. They refer to the occu
pant as a "fear-inspiring person." This really has reference to the
respect and the reverence that is manifested by all the people for the
office of Peacemaker — an office that belongs to this gens. The
brothers consecrate the House of Peace and take from it a sacred
gentile name.
The brothers move on quickly and come again to a dead animal
(an elk). Mon-zhon-a'-ki-da could not explain the meaning of this
finding.
The brothers continue their journey and come again to the " greatest
part of the earth." This refers, probably, to the month of Sep
tember, when the earth displays all of its yellow blossoms. These
two months make the middle of the seasons the " greatest part of the
earth." In the midst of its warm, moist, and vibrating air stands a
person as in his own abiding place. The brothers take from him a
personal gentile name, which they hope will bring them to the days
that are beautiful, fruitful, and peaceful.
They continue their journey and come to the bend of a river, where
stands a little house with many openings. The brothers gather closely
LAFLESCHE] Nl'-KI Wl'-GI-ES 277
around the house and find that the occupant is a Hon'-ga, a sacred
person. They speak to him, addressing him as ''grandfather," and
he replies, as though to anticipate a request to be made, and says:
"The little ones shall make of me their bodies." This scene is also
a cryptic reference to the house of the Hon'-ga U-ta-non-dsi, the only
gens that did not descend from the sky, but that belongs to the earth
and represents its power. In this house, the "house of many open
ings," the children of all the people are ceremonially named and by
that act are initiated into the tribal life. At the ceremonies of the
naming of a child a representative of the Tsi'-zhu Wa-shta'-ge gens
is brought to the "house of many openings" that is in the keeping of
the Hon'-ga U-ta-non-dsi gens, to take the leading part in the act of
sending the little ones forward upon the path of life.
The objective point of the mythical journey of the Tsi'-zhu Wa-
shta'-ge from the sky to the earth appears to be the two houses of
mystery, the sanctuary (the house of peace), and the house from
which the little ones are sent ceremonially upon their life journey.
Both of these houses occupy an important place in the ceremonial
life of the tribe. This mythical story is but another expression of
the belief that life is conceived in the sky and descends to earth to
take material form.
THE WI'-GI-E
(Osage version, p. 453; literal translation, p. 591)
1. Ha' tha tsi X, a bin da, tsi ga.23
2. The little ones have not become a people, O, younger brothers,
they said to one another.
3. The elder brothers spake, saying: O, younger brothers,
4. We bid you go and make search for a place wherein the little ones
may become a people.
5. Then, even as these words were spoken, a younger brother
hastened forth
6. To the first great divisions of the heavens,
7. Where he stood and paused.
8. Then he returned to his elder brothers, to whom he spake, saying:
O, elder brothers,
9. Verily, nothing of importance has come to my notice.
10. The elder brothers spake, saying: Make further search, O, younger
brothers,
11. The little ones have not become a people.
« The meaning of the words of this line has become obscure and can not be translated. Therefore the
line is given only In the first section of the translation of the wi'-gi-e. However, it appears in every section
of the original (the Osage version).
278 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 86
12. Then Ka'-xe-wa-hu-ca 24
13. Went forth in haste, even as the elder brothers spake,
14. To the second of the great divisions of the heavens.
15. Then, as the god of darkness struck the heavens with a dark
shadow,
16. He returned to his elder brothers and stood before them,
17. Who spake, saying: How has it been with you, O, younger
brother ? It has not been your wont to suffer so.
18. Ka'-xe-wa-hu-ca replied: I have been to the second division of
the heavens,
19. Where it is not possible for the little ones to exist, O, elder
brothers.
20. The elder brothers spake, saying: O, younger brothers,
21. Look you, we bid you go and make further search, O, younger
brothers.
22. Verily, as the elder brother uttered these words,
23. A younger brother went forth to the third division of the heavens.
24. Verily, he came close to the third heaven, where he paused and
stood.
25. Then the younger brother,
26. Even as the god of darkness struck the heavens with a dark
shadow,
27. Keturned to his elder brothers before whom he stood.
28. And they spake, saying: How has it been with you ? It has not
been your wont to suffer so.
29. It is not possible for the little ones to exist in the third heaven,
O, elder brothers, the younger brother replied.
30. The elder brothers spake, saying: O, younger brothers,
31. We bid you go forth and make further search.
32. The Ka'-xe-wa-hu-ca
33. Then hastened away,
34. To the fourth division of the heavens.
35. Close to it he stood and paused.
36. Then the Ni'-ka-wa-kon-da-gi, the Man-of-mysteries (god of the
clouds) ,
37. Appeared and stood before him.
38. The Ka'-xe-wa-hu-ca turned and spake to his elder brothers,
saying: Here stands a person, O, elder brothers,
39. Verily, a fear-inspiring person, O, elder brothers,
» Carelul inquiry concerning this name or title failed to bring any explanation from old Osage men as
to its meaning. J. Owen Dorsey, in his "Osage Traditions" (Sixth Annual Report, B. A. E., p. 384),
translates this title as "Crow bone white," but it is doubtful if this is the true meaning. Ka-xe-wa-hu-$a
may be a corruption of the title Ka'-ge-wa-hu-stsa,Youngest-of-the-brothers. In a Child Naming wi'-gi-e
given by sho«'-ge-mo«-i» he uses the title Ka'-(g)e-ha-ge, Last-of-the-brothers. This title is frequently used
in the wi'-gi-es. (See list of gentes given by Black-dog, p. 52.)
LAFLESCHK] Nl'-KI Wl'-GI-ES 279
40. Fear-inspiring 2° is his name, I verily believe.
41. Then they spake to the person, saying: O, grandfather.
42. He replied: I am a person of whom the little ones may well make
their bodies.
43. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
44. They shall free themselves from all causes of death, as they travel
the path of life.
45. When they make the name Little-hawk (pi. 9, 6)
46. To be their personal name, as they travel the path of life,
47. They shall enable themselves to live to see old age.
48. The-hawk- woman
49. Is also a name that is mine.
50. That name, too.
51. The little ones shall make to be their name as they travel the
path of life.
52. Then shall they enable themselves to live to see old age as they
travel the path of life.
53. I am not the only being.
54. The elder brothers spake: O, younger brothers.
55. Then a younger brother quickly went forth,
56. To the Buffalo-lift-ye-your-heads (for story of the origin of this
name see p. 65.)
57. Verily, the younger brother stood close to him and spake,
58. Saying: O, grandfather.
59. Then turning to his brothers he spake: Here stands a person,
60. Verily, a person who is fear-inspiring, O, elder brothers.
61. Then the Buffalo spake, saying: I am a person of whom the little
ones may well make their bodies (pi. 8, c).
62. Thereupon he threw himself upon the earth,
63. And the blazing star (Lacinaria pycnostachya) (pi. 21)
64. Sprang up from the soil and stood pleasing to the sense of sight
with its beauty.
65. Then the Buffalo spake, saying: Of this plant also the little ones
shall make their bodies.
66. The brothers quickly tasted the root of the plant,
67. And they said: It is bitter to the taste.
68. The Buffalo spake: This plant shall be medicine for the little ones.
69. When the little ones use it for medicine,
70. It shall be of value to them, it shall make their limbs to lengthen
in growth.
71. Then shall they be enabled to live to see old age as they travel
the path of life.
" The name No»'-R«-wa-the, Fear-inspiring, is used to this day by the Ni'-^a-wa-^o*-da-£l gens.
280 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 86
72. For a second time the Buffalo threw himself upon the earth,
73. And the poppy mallow (GallirrJi(e triangulata) (pi. 21)
74. Sprang from the soil and stood, beautiful, in its reddened
blossoms.
75. The Buffalo spake, saying: Of this plant, also,
76. The little ones shall make their bodies.
77. When the little ones use it as medicine as they travel the path
of life
78. It shall be of value to them; they shall use it to make their
limbs to lengthen in growth.
79. To the taste it is astringent.
80. Therefore your little ones shall be named Astringent.
81. When the little ones make of this plant their bodies,
82. They shall enable themselves to live to see old age as they travel
the path of life.
83. Then the Buffalo
84. Again threw himself upon the earth,
85. And the red corn
86. He tossed into the air,
87. Then spake, saying: The little ones shall make of the red corn
their bodies.
88. When the little ones make of the red corn their bodies,
89. They shall enable themselves to live to see old age as they travel
the path of life.
90. For a second time the Buffalo threw himself upon the earth,
91. And the blue corn,
92. Together with the blue squash,
93. He tossed into the air,
94. Then spake, saying: These plants also
95. The little ones shall use as food as they travel the path of life.
96. Then shall they enable themselves to live to see old age as they
travel the path of life.
97. For a third time the Buffalo threw himself upon the earth,
98. And the white corn,
99. Together with the white squash, he tossed into the air,
100. Then spake, saying: These plants the little ones shall use as
food as they travel the path of life.
101. They shall thus cause themselves to be difficult to overcome by
death as they travel the path of life.
102. They shall enable themselves to live to see old age as they travel
the path of life.
BUREAU OF AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY THIRTY-SIXTH ANNUAL REPORT PLATE 21
THE POPPY MALLOW AND THE BLAZING STAR
LAFLE8CHE] Nl'-KI Wl'-GI-ES 281
103. For the fourth time the Buffalo threw himself upon the earth,
104. And the speckled corn,
105. Together with the speckled squash,
106. He tossed into the air,
107. Then spake, saying: What living creature is there that has no
mate?
108. And thus he wedded together the speckled corn, a male, to the
speckled squash, a female.
109. He continued: The little ones shall use these plants for food as
they travel the path of life.
110. Thus they shall make themselves to be free from all causes of
death as they travel the path of life.
111. The elder brothers spake, saying: O, younger brothers, we bid
you go and make further search.
112. Then the younger brothers arose and went forth
113. To a place where stood a red oak tree.
114. Close to the tree they gathered and stood,
115. And they spake, saying: Of this tree also
116. We shall make our bodies.
117. As they put their feet upon the branches of the tree the acorns
fell to the earth in profusion.26
118. Whereupon they spake, saying: Of this act also (the falling of
the acorns to the earth in profusion)
119. The little ones shall make their bodies
120. And enable themselves to live to see old age as they travel the
path of life.
121. The brothers passed on and came to the red cedar tree" (an
evergreen) .
122. Close to the tree they gathered,
123. Then the tree spake, saying: I am a god who is difficult to be
overcome by death.
» At the close of the recitation of this wi'-gi-e Mo»-zho»-a'-ki-da explained that the Tsi'-zhu Wa-9ht»'-ge
in order to perpetuate the memory of the story of the people alighting on the red oak tree, adopted three
gentile names to be ceremonially given to their children: Pi-ci', U-bu'-dse,and No"-bu'-dse; Ti-ci', Acorn,
the fruit of the red oak tree: U-bu'-dse, Profuse; Non-bu'-dse, composed of Non, action of the feet, referring
to the mythical story of the alighting of the people upon the acorn tree, bu-dse, a part of the word u-bu-dse,
meaning profuse. The story as given in paraphrase tells that the people of this gens on their descent from
the sky alighted upon a red oak, the shock of their weight on the branches sending down a shower of acerns
from the tree, where they lay on the earth in profusion. This incident was regarded as prophetic of the
great number of children to be born to the gens. Centuries ago, when the break occurred which resulted
in the Osage and the Omaha becoming two distinct tribes, the Omaha preserved in the name they
retained for the red oak tree, " Bu-de," a memory of this ancient myth, which gave a prophetic promise,
to the people that their craving for a prolonged tribal life should be fulfilled through an abundan t posterity.
« Tradition Is silent as to the origin of the sacred pole that belonged to the Omaha We'-zhi«-ste gens
and as to the -time when the rites connected with it ceased to be observed. To the lower part of the cere
monial pole is fastened a piece, which is called zhi'-be, the leg. (See Twenty-seventh Annual Report,
B. A. E., p. 229.) The ceaar figures prominently in the rites of the Osage as a symbol of life persistency,
and it may be that the We'-zhKste sacred pole which was made of red cedar is a vestige of one of the rites
the Omaha took with them when they separated from the Osage. Whether this be so or not, It Is certain
that the red cedar is a sacred tree to both the Omaha and the Osage and that both had rites relating to that
tree which may at some time in the past have been In common use between them.
282 THE OSAGE TRIBE [BTH. ANN. 36
124. When the little ones make of me their bodies,
125. They shall enable themselves to live to see old age as they travel
the path of life,
126. They shall live to see their hair grown scant and yellowish with
age as they travel the path of life.
127. Behold the wrinkles upon my skin,
128. Which I have made to be the means of reaching old age.
129. The little ones shall make of me the means of reaching old age
as they travel the path of life.
130. Behold the base of my trunk from which spread my roots,
131. It is that part of me that is called the ankle.
132. The little ones shall live to see in their ankles the sign of old age,
133. They shall enable themselves to live to see old age as they travel
the path of life.
134. O, my grandchildren,
135. I am not the only being.
136. The brothers passed on, verily to the shallows of a river where
the waters rush on noisily.
137. Close to the shallows they stood,
138. Then one spake, saying: Behold a Wa-zha'-zhe stands before us,
139. Verily, a person who has made of the waters his body.
140. Then the Wa-zha'-zhe spake, saying: O, my grandchildren,
141. You say the little ones have nothing of which to make their
bodies.
142. When the little ones make of me their bodies
143. They shall cause themselves to be difficult to overcome by death
as they travel the path of life.
144. When the little ones make of me their bodies
145. They shall enable themselves to live to see old age as they travel
the path of life.
146. They shall enable themselves to reach and enter the days that
are beautiful and peaceful as they travel the path of life.
147. I am not the only being.
148. The elder brothers spake, saying: Make haste, 0, younger
brothers.
149. Then, even as these words were spoken, the younger brothers
hastened forth,
150. To the sedge (Carex), the grass that never dies, who spake,
151. Saying: O, my grandchildren, I am a god that is difficult to
overcome by death.
152. When the little ones make of me their bodies
153. They shall make themselves to be difficult to overcome by death
as they travel the path of life.
154. I am not the only being.
LAFLBSCHB] Nl'-KI Wl'-GI-E8 283
155. Then spake the Shin'-zha-hi (an unidentified evergreen water
plant),
156. Saying, I, also,
157. Am difficult to overcome by death.
158. When the little ones make of me their bodies
159. They shall make themselves to be difficult to overcome by death
as they travel the path of life.
160. I abide in the days that are beautiful and peaceful.
161. The little ones shall enable themselves to reach and enter into
the days that are beautiful and peaceful as they travel the
path of life.
162. The elder brothers spake: O, younger brothers,
163. Make haste, O, younger brothers.
164. The younger brothers moved quickly on,
165. Then one spake, saying: O, elder brothers,
166. Yonder lies an animal that has just been slain.
167. The elder brothers replied: O, younger brothers,
168. It is fit that the little ones make of the slain animal their bodies.
169. The little ones shall make of it their bodies.
170. When the little ones make of the slain animal their bodies,
171. They shall enable themselves to see old age as they travel the
path of life.
172. The elder brothers spake: O, younger brothers,
173. Make haste, O, younger brothers.
174. Then the younger brothers quickly moved on
175. To the greatest part of the earth. 28
176. Close to this place the brothers gathered and stood.
177. Then one spake, saying: Of this also
178. The little ones shall make their bodies,
179. And we shall take from it a personal name; Mid-earth shall be
our name.
180. Then the little ones shall make- themselves to be difficult to
overcome by death as they travel the path of life.
181. The elder brothers spake, saying: O, younger brothers,
182. Make haste and move on quickly.
183. Then one spake, saying: O, elder brothers,
184. There is a person in yonder place
185. Who dwells in a beautiful house.29
186. The person
187. Dwells in a house that has an opening at the top (smoke vent).
* This is figurative and means that part of the summer season when the greatness of the earth is
manifested by the ripeness of its fruits.
» This is figurative and refers to the House of Peace, the sanctuary of the Tsi'-ihu Wa-shta'-ge.
284 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
188. From this also
189. He may have taken a personal name.
190. He seems pleased with the beauty of his home, O, elder brothers.
191. It is a very beautiful house, O, elder brothers.
192. The little ones shall make of it their bodies.
193. They shall take from it the name House-beautiful.
194. Then the little ones shall enable themselves to live to see old
age as they travel the path of life.
195. The person
196. Is verily a f ear-inspiring person.
197. House-covering is also his name, I verily believe.
198. Of this also
199. The little ones shall make their bodies.
200. When the little ones make of it their bodies
201. They shall enable themselves to live to see old age.
202. They shall enable themselves to reach and enter the days that
are beautiful and peaceful as they travel the path of life.
203. The younger brothers spake,
204. Saying: The little ones have nothing of which to make their
bodies, O, elder brothers.
205. The elder brothers spake: O, younger brothers,
206. Make haste and move quickly on.
207. Then the younger brothers
208. Quickly moved on.
209. Then one spake, saying: O, elder brothers,
210. Yonder lies an animal (an elk)
211. That has just been slain, O, elder brothers.
212. The elder brothers replied: O, younger brothers,
213. The little ones shall make of it their bodies.
214. When they make of it their bodies
215. They shall make themselves to be difficult to overcome by death
as they travel the path of life.
216. The elder brothers spake: Make haste, O, younger brothers.
217. Then the younger brothers hastened on
218. To the greatest part of the earth,
219. Where stands a person.
220. Even at the greatest part of the earth
221. There the person stands,
222. As in his own abiding place, in the midst of the moist vibrating
warmth of the air.
223. The brothers spake, saying: The little ones shall make of this
person their bodies.
224. They shall take to themselves the name Mid-earth.
225. Earth also shall be their personal name.
BUREAU OF AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY
THIRTY-SIXTH ANNUAL REPORT PLATE 22
A member of one of the subgentes of the. Tsi'-7.hu "Wa-shta'-ge (Pcaee) gens of the Tsi'-zhu greal tribal
division. This man willingly gave the Ni'-ki \Vi'-gi-e of his gens beeause he said it should l>e preserved
as the ancient rites will soon'be forgotten. His name means Guardian of the Land.
BUREAU OF AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY
THIRTY-SIXTH ANNUAL REPORT PLATE 23
WA'-THU-XA-GE
Member of the Tsi'-zlui Wa-shta'-ge (Peace) gens of the Tsi'-zhu great tribal division. He was said to be well
versed in the rites of his people but he was in poor health when he gave his information concerning them,
therefore the rituals he gave were fragmentary. Wa'-thu-xa-ge died not long after his visit to Washington
where he gave the rites of his gens.
LAFLKSCHK] Nl'-KI Wl'-GI-ES 285
226. Then shall they enable themselves to live to see old age.
227. The days that are beautiful and peaceful they shall be able to
reach,
228. The four great divisions of the days they shall be able to reach,
as they travel the path of life.
229. The brothers spake to one another, saying: O, elder brothers,
230. Make haste, O, elder brothers.
231. Then they spake, saying: O, younger brothers.
232. Then the younger brothers moved hastily on,
233 . To a bend in the river.
234. Verily, at that time and place.
235. The younger brothers spake, saying: Yonder stands a little
house, O, elder brothers.
236. Then all the brothers gathered close to the little house,
237. When one spake, saying: The occupant is a Hon'-ga, O, elder
brothers.
238. Then they spake to the Hon'-ga, saying: O, grandfather.
239. The Hon'-ga replied: The little ones may well make of me their
bodies.
240. A younger brother exclaimed:
241. The person dwells in a beautiful house, O, elder brothers.30
242. The elder brothers replied: Of this house, also,
243. The little ones shall make their bodies as they travel the path
of life.
244. A younger brother spake: The house has many entrances, O,
elder brothers.
245. The elder brothers replied: Of that, also,
246. The little ones shall make their bodies.
247. Then shall the little ones enable themselves to live to see old age,
248. They shall enable themselves to reach and to enter into the four
great divisions of the days as they travel the path of life.
A FRAGMENTARY NI'-KI RITUAL OF THE TSI'-ZHU WA-SHTA'-GE GENS
At the time that Wa'-thu-xa-ge (pi. 23) gave the following initia
tory Ni'-ki Ritual of his gens, the Tsi'-zhu Wa-shta'-ge, he was quite
sick and scarcely able to give it his entire attention. Therefore his
rendition is somewhat fragmentary. The death of this old man
occurred not long after his return to his home.
Wa'-thu-xa-ge began the ritual from the Ki'-non Wi'-gi-e, which
relates to the symbolism of the ceremonial painting and dressing of
the Xo'-ka. The first section refers to the red paint used, which is
symbolic of the sacred fire built by the Tsi'-zhu people and reddening
of the heavens by its leaping flames. (See wi'-gi-e of the Tsi'-zhu
Wa-non gens given by Xu-tha'-wa-(on-in, p. 242.)
«• This is figurative arW refers to The Ho°'-ga house in which children are ceremonially named.
286 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 3d
The second section refers to the red paint as a symbol of the eastern
sky when struck with a red glow by the approaching sun.
The third section relates to the red downy feather to be worn by
the Xo'-ka on the crown of his head as a symbol of the eastern sky
reddened by the rising sun ; also the peculiar shaft of light that stands
at the left of the sun as it rises.
From the words of the wi'-gi-e it would appear that the Xo'-ka
personates the sun, the dawn, and the candidate in the initiatory
ceremony. At the close of the second section the Xo'-ka is painted
so that every part of his face and his entire body is reddened.
At the close of the third section the symbolic plume is fastened to
the base of the braided lock on the crown of the Xo'-ka's head.
Ceremonial moccasins are put upon his feet, a buffalo robe with the
hair outside is wrapped around his body, and thus he is clothed in
his sacerdotal attire.
Kl'-NON Wl'-GI-E
1. What shall the little ones use for the painting of their bodies?
they said, it has been said, in this house.
2. Then four small stones they gathered together,
3. And arranged them so that one stood leaning against the others.
4. This pile of stones they set on fire,
5. So that the darkened heavens above
6. Was reddened by the leaping flames.
7. Then they spake to one another, saying: The reddened heavens
shall be for the painting of the bodies of the little ones,
8. It shall be to them a refuge from all dangers as they travel the
path of life.
9. What shall the little ones use for the painting of their bodies?
they said, it has been said, in this house.
10. The God of Day, as he approaches,
1 1 . Strikes the heavens with a bright red glow.
12. That red glow shall be for the painting of the bodies of the little
ones.
13. When they seek refuge in its power, as they travel the path of life,
14. They shall make themselves free from all causes of death.
15. The words here spoken shall forever stand.
16. What shall the little ones use for the painting of their bodies?
they said, it has been said, in this house.
17. The God of Day, as he approaches,
18. Strikes the heavens with a bright red glow.
19. At his left side there stands
20. A light resembling a plume.
21. That light shall be a sacred plume for the little ones.
22. When they wear this plume as they travel the path of life,
23. They shall make themselves free from all causes' of death.
LA FLE8CHB]
Nl'-KI Wl'-GI-ES
287
The Xo'-ka, having thus been symbolically painted and dressed,
rises to make his ceremonial approach to the Mysterious House of
the Hon'-ga U-ta-non-dsi, the gens that at all times represents the
earth with all its life-giving power. The Xo'-ka, his candidate, and
the A'-ki-hon Xo'-ka (Master of Ceremonies) stand abreast, the Xo'-ka
in the middle in front of the door of the house, while the Sho'-ka takes
his place a few paces in advance. Then the Xo'-ka himself sings the
following song and recites the first section of the wi'-gi-e relating to
the approach to the House of Mystery. The song is sung before the
recitation of each of the four sections of the wi'-gi-e. At the close of
the recitation of each section of the wi'-gi-e the four men move toward
the House of Mystery, followed by the Non'-hon-zhin-ga, who arrange
themselves in groups according to gentes. The movement toward
the ceremonial house is arranged so that at the end of the fourth halt
the procession will be at the door of the house. The following song
is sung at each halt before the sections of the wi'-gi-e relating to the
ceremonial approach to the House of Mystery is recited. The music
of the song is not here repeated, it being understood that the song is
sung before each section during the halts.
TSI TA'-PE WA-THON (SONG OF APPHOACH TO THE HOUSE)
Transcribed by Alice C. Fletcher
M.M. J_138
ZWaC r ^^
1^"P"
1 [-
1 .- , 1 1 1
[pS f^=-~=*=
II' '
"-* B(-
-f^-*- *
»
Time beats |
Ho"-ga tsi a - dsi
r r rr
bthe don he non,
r r r
Hon-ga tsi a - dsi thi
/^" "> "
14
— 1
:R^i
—.— -^_ _i
-f-«=^
\ r
^ r r r
hthe do" he non
r r
thon a,
• 0
r
Hon ga
m r • f
r r r *
e-dsi a - ka don bthe don
1 1 \ ••
In P 0 '
r * p
• II
l^j"
•*
i I-'
E
1 V-.|/ J
1
•*^^**
|l
* ^
r r r
he no"
— 1-
r
a,
Ho°-ga
r rr
tsi a - dsi
r r
bthe do" he non.
Ho"-ga tsi a-dsi bthe don he non,
Ho°-ga tsi a-dsi bthe do" he no" thon a,
Ho"-ga e-dsi a-ka do" bthe do" he no" a,
Hon-ga e-dsi a-ka do" bthe do" he no".
FREE TRANSLATION
Toward the House of the Ho"'-ga I am traveling,
Toward the House of the Ho"'-ga I am traveling,
To the House where dwell the Hon/-ga,
Toward the House of the Hon/-ga I am traveling.
288 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
THE Wl'-GI-E
1. Toward what shall they direct their footsteps as they travel the
path of life ? they said, it has been said, in this house.
2. It is toward a little valley that they shall direct their footsteps.
3. Verily, it is not a little valley that is meant.
4. It is toward a herd of animals that they shall direct their foot
steps.
5. Verily, it is not a herd of animals that is meant.
6. It is a little house toward which they shall direct their footsteps
as they travel the path of life.
7. Toward what shall they direct their footsteps as they travel the
path of life? they said, it has been said, in this house.
8. It is toward two little valleys that they shall direct their footsteps.
9. Verily, it is not two little valleys that is meant.
10. It is toward two herds of animals that they shall direct their
footsteps.
1 1 . Verily, it is not two herds of animals that is meant.
12. It is toward a little house toward which they shall direct their
footsteps as they travel the path of life.
3
13. Toward what shall they direct their footsteps as they travel the
path of life ? they said, it has been said, in this house.
14. It is toward three little valleys that they shall direct their foot
steps.
15. Verily, it is not three little valleys that is meant.
16. It is toward three herds of animals that they shall direct their
footsteps.
17. Verily, it is not three herds of animals that is meant.
18. It is a little house toward which they shall direct their footsteps
as they travel the path of life.
4
19. Toward what shall they direct their footsteps as they travel the
path of life? they said, it has been said, in this house.
20. It is toward four little valleys that they shall direct their foot
steps as they travel the path of life.
21. Verily, it is not four little valleys that is meant.
22. It is toward four herds of animals that they shall direct their foot
steps.
23. Verily, it is not four herds of animals that is meant.
24. It is a little house toward which they shall direct their footsteps
as they travel the path of life.
LA FLESCHE]
Nl'-KI Wl'-GI-ES
289
This wi'-gi-e is also sometimes called Wa'-ci-thu-ce Wi'-gi-e, Foot
steps Wi'-gi-e, following the term used in some of the lines of the
wi'-g-e.
From the sequential arrangement of the lines relating to the valleys
and to the herds of animals, which means buffalo, it would appear
that this wi'-gi-e is an epitome of the Hi'-ca-da wi'-gi-e relating to
the finding of the foe. (See p. 212, and lines 1447 to 1542 of the
wi'-gi-e given by Wa-xthi'-zhi, p. 208; also Wi'-gi-e of the Cere
monial Approach given by Xu-tha'-wa-ton-in, p. 249.)
The fourth movement brings the procession to the door of the
house and the members of the Hon'-ga U-ta-non-dsi gens enter and
take their places at the east end of the long room on the south side.
The Xo'-ka sings the following song as he and his candidate and the
Nan'-hon-zhin-ga stand at the door:
Transcribed by Alice C. Fletcher
Time beats
Tsi
r r ' r
wi" e-dsi tsi do" dsi the he no" thon
r r
on, Tsi win e-dsi
' T
tse do" dsi the he non thon on, Tsi win e-dsi tse do" dsi the
he no" thon
hon, Dsi the he no" tho" on, Da-ko" ge ge don
|_ i i a. .. «i . ft) -.^ _i0*l L i
f TA T^"^» ~ __^^mt ii
f^-f-^-f1 ^-F^^ r^^J^r
r r r i r r -•
dsi the he non thon
o", Da - kon ge ge don dsi the he no".
Tsi wi" e-dsi tse don dsi the he no" thoa o",
Tsi-win e-dsi tse do" dsi the he no" tho" on,
Tsi wi" e-dsi tie do" dei the he nott thon ho",
Dsi the he non thon o",
Da-kon ge ge don dsi the he no" tho" o",
Da-ko" ge ge do" dsi the he no".
The first four lines are repeated at the beginning of all the stanzas.
Therefore one translation will suffice for the entire song.
2786—21 19
290 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
FREE TRANSLATION
To the house that stands yonder I am going,
To the house that stands yonder I am going,
To the house that stands yonder I am going,
To that house I am going,
Where there is a light I am going,
Where there is a light I am going.
Where lie the moccasins I am going,
Where lie the moccasins I am going.
Where lies a plume I am going,
Where lies a plume I am going.
Where lie the property (the moccasins) I am going,
Where lie the property I am going.
Where lies a feather I am going,
Where lies a feather I am going.
At the close of the song all the Non'-hon-zhin-ga enter the house,
the gentes belonging to the Hon'-ga Division taking their places at the
south side of the room and those of the Tsi'-zhu Division at the north
side. Then the Xo'-ka, his candidate, and the A'-ki-ho11 Xo'-ka
enter, pause within, and close to the door, while the Xo'ka recites
the following wi'-gi-e, which relates to the defending of the tribe
against its enemies by organized force.
MOCCASIN Wl'-GI-E
1. Upon what shall they slip off their moccasin as they travel the
path of life? they said, it has been said, in this house.
2. Toward the setting of the sun
3. There dwells a man who is honored for his valorous deeds.
4. It is upon that man they shall slip off their moccasin.
5. When they slip off their moccasin upon this man,
6. It shall always be easy for them to slip off their moccasin as they
travel the path of life.31
7. Upon what shall they slip off their moccasin as they travel the
path of life? they said, it has been said, in this house.
8. Toward the setting of the sun
ii Here the Xo'-ka slips oil the left foot of his ceremonial moccasins and puts on one of a pair that had
been placed at the door for him.
LA FLESCHE]
Nl'-KI Wl'-GI-ES
291
9. There dwells a woman who has given birth to her first child.
10. It is upon that woman they shall slip off their moccasin.
11. When they slip off their moccasin upon this woman,
12. It shall always be easy for them to slip off their moccasins as they
travel the path of life.32
This act of changing the symbolic moccasins and the feather marks
the beginning of the second stage of the sun's westward course, which
the Xo'-ka is personating and dramatically enacting. The first
movement of the change of moccasins represents the rising sun, the
second indicates the sun's onward and westward course over the earth.
When the Xo-ka has put on the new moccasins and feather he
sings the following song:
Transcribed by Alice C. Fletcher
lime beats *
Wa-kon-da ha tsi a - dsi
,
thi bthe do" he
~rr
no",
f
Wa-ko"
ha tsi a -
r r r r r
dsi thi bthe do" he no" tho"
r rr
Xi-tha do" e tho wi a-thin he non
^ijg-
r *
p— ff-
— i
I
3 — r~
~f
-* 3 r
^*»^
— L-
— 1_
~\ —
-F :
f
r r
Wa-ko°-da
ha
f
tsia-
r r r
dsi thi bthe
do"
r •
he no".
Wa-ko"-da ha tsi a-dsi bthe do" he no",
Wa-kon-da ha tei a-dsi bthe do" he non thon on,
Xi-tha do" e tho wi a-thin he non on,
Wa-kon-da ha tsi a-dsi bthe do" he no".
The words of lines 1, 2, and 4 are alike in all the stanzas. The
translation given for the first stanza will suffice for all the others.
FREE TRANSLATION
1
The House of Mystery 1 now enter,
The House of Mystery I now enter,
It is I, Good-eagle, who now enters,
The House of Mystery, I now enter.
2
It is I, Red-eagle, who now enters.
3
It is I, Good-eagle-woman, who now enters.
4
It is I, Mid-earth, who now enters.
* The Xo'-ka slips ofl his right loot its moccasin and puts on the other one o( tho pair placed for him
at the door. He also removes the feather from the crown of his head and puts on a new one In its place .
292 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
In this part of the ceremony the Xo'-ka represents the candidate,
so it is he who now enters the House of Mystery in the name of
Good-eagle, Red-eagle, Good-eagle-woman and Mid-earth. At the
close of the song the three men take their places at the middle of
the eastern end of the room, where they sit facing the west.
Here the Wa-the'-the ceremony is performed, but Wa'-thu-xa-ge
was in so much physical suffering that he was not in a condition to
remember the details of this elaborate ceremony. A description of
it has, however, been given in the Ni'-ki degree described by Wa-
xthi'-zhi on page 155; also in that given by Xu-tha'-wa-ton-in on
page 253. At the conclusion of the Wa-the'-the ceremony the Non'-
hon-zhin-ga of the various gentes simultaneously recite their wi'-gi-es
relating to the life symbols of their gentes, while the members belong
ing to the Tsi'-zhu Wa-shta'-ge gens recite the wi'-gi-e relating to the
gentile names mentioned in the song of the candidate's entering the
lodge.
When all have recited their wi'-gi-es a recess is taken, during which
the men appointed to the task busy themselves distributing among
the Non'-hon-zhin-ga in equal portions the provisions supplied by the
candidate for the entertainment of all who had taken part in the
ceremony. WThen the women have entered and carried away the
provisions, a Non'-hon-zhin-ga speaks, saying: "O, Tsi'-zhu (addressing
the initiating gens by name), we have performed the parts you have
required of us and now we will rise, leaving you to perform that part
of the ceremony that belongs individually to you." Thereupon the
members of the Wa-zha'-zhe Wa-non gens rise and in single file
march out of the door at the north side while those of the Tsi'-zhu
Wa-non rise soon after and go out of the door at the south side.
When the Non'-hon-zhin-ga have left the Xo'-ka sings the Buffalo
Songs. These songs are supplicatory and express a craving for the
continuous coming of the buffalo into bodily existence, for upon that
animal the Osage man depends for the prolongation of his own
bodily existence. In the first of these songs the buffalo is personified
and made to say that they are about to come from the unseen world
to the earth where all life takes on bodily form. The female buffalo
js first to speak, the male follows, then is heard the little ones, and,
lastly, the aged male who has reached that stage of life when he can
no longer perform the functions of Me. The fifth stanza refers to
the light of day into which all life ultimately comes that it may fulfill
its existence.
LA Fl ] M I] 1: |
Nl'-KI Wl'-GI-ES
293
THE BUFFALO SONGS
SONG 1
Transcribed by Alice C. Fletcher
M.M. J-
'(1
*4:
Time beats f
Mi - ga do" ho" mon hon bthin
da
— — ] — • — ^^^^ —
-w
H—
— i —
— H
1 ' 1 —
1
— T-
J • f
E he
m
mon
4
r
ho"
rTT
bthi" da he
i f *
the he - tho"
3
-be
:; *
the,
I 1
r"r~t a j^u
••--»- -»• -*• • -•• -S^ •*
r r f "^ T "^ "*" ^ " T "^r T 7 T T
i r r r r i r
Mo" ho" bthi" da he he-tho^be the, Mon hon bthi" da a he the he the.
Mi-ga do" ho" mo" ho" bthi" da he,
E he mo" ho° bthi" da he the he-tho"-be the,
Mo" hon bthi" da he he-thon-be the,
Mon ho" bthin da a he the he the.
FREE TRANSLATION
I, the female, go forth,
Go forth from the unseen to the visible,
I go forth from the unseen to the visible,
I go forth.
2
I, the male, go forth, etc.
3
1, the little one, go forth, etc.
4
I, the aged one, go forth, etc.
5
Into the light of the day, I go forth, etc.
294
THE OSAGE TRIBE
SONG 2
M.M. J-H2
[ETH. ANN. 36
Transcribed by Ailce C. Fletcher
Mi - ga ha mon hon thin be, E he the the he the, Mi- ga tha
f f r f f ' r ' f p r ' r r
ha mon hon thin be, Mi- ga tha ha mon hon thin be, E he the the
«g
y r r r r r r f r
he the, Mi-ga tha harnonhon thinbe, A he the the the the the he.
Mi-ga ha mon hon Jiiu be,
E he the the he the,
Mi-ga tha ha mon hon thin be,
Mi-ga tha ha mo° hon thi" be,
E he the the he the,
Mi-ga tha ha mo" ho" thi" be
A he the the the the the he.
FREE TRANSLATION
1
The females now go forth, etc.
2
The males now go forth, etc.
3
The little ones now go forth, etc.
4
The aged ones now go forth, etc.
5
They go forth into the light of day, etc.
The second song speaks objectively of the food-giving buffalo as
going forth upon their life journey, having come from the unseen
into the visible world. The translation of the first line of each
stanza is sufficient, as the other lines are composed of repetitions
of the first and of vocables.
The song next in order is the U'-zhi Wa-thon, Planting Song.
Before the A'-ki-hon Xo'-ka sings this song the Sho'-ka conducts the
wife of the candidate, together with her women companions, most
of whom are her relatives, into the lodge and gives them a place in
front of the Xo'-ka. The Sho'-ka puts into the hands of each of the
women a woven bag and a planting pole. Each woman throws upon
LA FLI8CHE]
Nl'-KI Wl'-GI-ES
295
her back the bag, drawing the carrying strap around her shoulders,
and stands with the pole in her right hand. The woman is the
planter, the cultivator, the harvester of the corn, and this little scene
is meant to portray the important part she plays in the drama of life.
In the song she is made to speak of her own actions as she plants the
grains that are to spring into life and bear the fruit that will feed
her people. As the season for planting draws near she clears the field
of dead stalks and weeds, mellows the earth with her crude hoe, and
then builds the little hills that stand with their faces looking upward
to the sun to receive its animating rays. When all the little hills
have been made, she begins her planting by thrusting a sharpened
pole into the center of the sunny side of a hill, and into the hole thus
made she drops five, six, or seven grains of corn. Then she performs
the last act, which is regarded as the most significant and sacred; she
places upon the mound, over the hole, the imprint of her foot. It
must be her right or her left foot, according to the tribal division to
which she belongs. It is this particular act to which each of the
11 stanzas of the song refers. As the A'-ki-hon Xo'-ka sings the
women stand beating time upon the ground with the lower ends of
their planting poles.
THE PLANTING SONG
Transcribed by Alice C. Fletcher
T^me beats f
f
A - 51- gthe no" don - ho0 non, A - 51 - gtho no" do" - ho" non,
r r r r ; r r r
A - si-gthe no" don-hon, A - $i-gthe non do" - hon no". A - gi-gthe non
f r r r
do" -ho" no", A-ci-gthenon don-honnon, A
i i r
he the the the he.
Only the first line of each stanza will be translated, as all the other
lines are repetitions or vocables:
A-<;i-gthe no" do"-hon non, A-gi-gthe no" do"-hon no",
A-fi-gthe no" don-hon,
A-fi-gthe no" don-hon no". A-gi-gthe no" do"-hoa no",
A-£i-gthe no" don-hoa no" A he the the the he.
296 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
i
FREE TRANSLATION
1
I have made a footprint, a sacred one.
2
I have made a footprint, through it the blades push upward.
3
I have made a footprint, through it the blades radiate.
4
I have made a footprint, over it the blades float in the wind.
5
I have made a footprint, over it the ears lean toward one another.
6
I have made a footprint, over it I pluck the ears.
7
I have made a footprint, over it I bend the stalk to pluck the ears.
8
I have made a footprint, over it the blossoms lie gray.
9
I have made a footprint, smoke arises from my house.
10
I have made a footprint, there is cheer in my house.
11
I have made a footprint, I live in the light of day.
At the close of this song the women put away their bags and poles
and sit down, facing the Xo'-ka, who instructs them in the details of
certain supplicatory rites to be observed by them in dressing a sym
bolic robe for their little ones, in planting the corn, and in gathering
the roots of the water lily (Nelumbo lutea) to be used for food.
Wa'-thu-xa-ge made only this general statement concerning these
rites, being too ill to go into all their details. (Examples of these
instructions will be found in other initiatory rituals.) Wa-non'-she-
zhin-ga, who was present, made the remark that this ceremony con
ferred upon the wife of the candidate the right to paint her face when
attending an initiation in this fashion: Two narrow parallel lines, one
red, the other blue, running across the width of the forehead; two
short narrow lines, one red, the other blue, upon each cheek running
upward. After the instructions the women go out of the lodge,
leaving in their seats the fees for the Xo'-ka.
The title of the next group of songs is Wa-tsi'-a-dsi Wa-thon, which
may be freely interpreted as Songs of Triumph. This title and the
words of the songs are in cryptic form, and the uninitiated or even
an initiated person who gives no special attention to the meaning of
these complex rites is not able to explain their true significance.
Song 1 voices the triumph of the initiating gens and is anticipatory
of the success to be achieved through the initiation of a new member
into the mysteries of life. The success particularly desired is an
unbroken line of descendants to be granted to the initiate.
LA FLE8CHE]
297
SONGS OF TRIUMPH
SONG 1
Transcribed by Alice C. Fletcher
M.M. __ 108
A - wa-to he-wa - to he wa, A -wa- to he - wa-to he wa, A -
htP^ri nl
is =
'-ttfT^^Ff^F
=m
Lij2 4_J — J J « lia-^ — «
rr r
wa - to he -wa - to
-114 J J — i — J « I, — ^_^_
• • * * » -
he wa, A - wa - to he - wa - to
»=n
a.
A-wa-to he-wa-to he wa,
A-wa-to he-wa-to he wa,
A-wa-to he-wa-to he wa, .
A-wa-to he-wa-to a.
The words composing the title may be analyzed thus: Wa-tsi', a
meaningless word save to one well versed in the rites, when it becomes
wa-tse', triumph; a-dsi, there; Wa-thon, Song. All four lines of the
song have the same words, as follows: A, I; wa-to'. In ordinary
usage the word would be wa-tse, triumph, but in the song it is veiled
under the meaningless term wa-to.
The burden of the second song is the same as that of the first and
the words may be given the same interpretation, but to it are added
words of praise of the Xo'-ka and the Sho'-ka for the parts they took
in the initiation. The first two lines of each of the two stanzas, the
rest being repetitions, may be freely translated thus:
SONG 2
M.M. J = 96
Transcribed by Alice C. Fletcher
• f f *^ •
line beats
I 1
r
He- wa - to he - wa -to tho ha Xo-ka hi - wa he
He - wa - to he - wa - to tho ha
the, He -.wa-to hc-wa-to thoha
He-wa-to he-wa-to tho ha Xo-ka hi-wa he the.
He-wa-^o he-wa-to tho ha Xo-ka hi wa-he the,
He-wa-to he-wa-to tho ha Xo-ka hc-wa he the.
Xo-ka he-wu he the.
298 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. AN.V. 38
FREE TRANSLATION
1
I have triumphed, I have triumphed,
With the aid given by the Xo'-ka, etc.
I have triumphed, I have triumphed,
With the aid given by the Sho'-ka, etc.
The song next in order is not as easily translated because most of
the words are purposely corrupted in order to hide their meaning
from the uninitiated. This practice of disguising the significance of
the words of a song, particularly one that is of a sacred nature, is
common not only among the Osage but also among the Omaha and
the Ponca. Two phrases of an Omaha Song of Peace will serve as
an illustration:
Transcribed by Alice C. Fletcher
Ya the ho o tha Ya the ho o tha
The corrupted words, "Ya the ho-o tha," have absolutely no sig
nificance to a person not familiar with the inner meaning of the rite.
But to one who knows, the undisguised words of these two phrases
are: The-thu ha-i ba, the-thu ha i ba; The-thu, here, at this house;
ha-i, coming; ba, they. The full meaning of these words and of the
song as explained by a man versed in the rites is as follows: When
the messengers of a peace-making party approach the village of the
tribe to be visited, the people hasten out of their houses and stand
watching to see whose house the strangers are approaching. The
song portrays this general scene and also that in front of the house
toward which the messengers are moving. The family give the glad
exclamation: "They are coming here! they are coming here!" (to
our house). The exclamation signifies that the messengers will be
hospitably received and that the family feels itself honored in the
choice of their house by the messengers of peace to be the place of
ceremony. (See Twenty-seventh Annual Report, B. A. E., p. 382.)
When the following song was sung in its sequential order by
Wa'-thu-xa-ge into the dictaphone, the opening lines of five
stanzas were unintelligible to the writer, and he asked what they
meant. With a slight frown Wa'-thu-xa-ge said: "O, they mean
nothing; they are only o'-ni-on" (vocables). The writer, being
unsatisfied and knowing the native custom of hiding the true meaning
of the words of sacred songs from an uninitiated person, remarked:
"The words to me sound like A ha a-tsin da ha the ka we." There
upon the old man, with a hearty laugh, said: "That's just what they
are!"
LA FI.ESi'llF.j
NI -KI WT-GI-ES
299
The cryptic words sung are "A ha wa-cin da ha we ka we;" but
the true words as acknowledged by Wa'-thu-xa-ge are put with the
music and may be interpreted as follows: First line, A ha, an excla
mation; a tsin da, I have come; ha, vocable; the ka, here, in this
place; we, vocable. Second line: E the, vocables; ci, feet; ta ha, in
the direction of; we the, vocables.
SONG 3
Transcribed by Alice C. Fletcher
M.M. =
|~->-t^5 —
•3-r
FP—j
r
Vj) y|
«-5 1
»^ •= • fc: — • ^~
Time beats
\-J?J>4. •
f
?a - xe
^ - v
r r r
wa cin da ha we ka we,
^— -rrrf-1^ — '"•• ' • — — i — '
Lp=*=«
fV-3 — P~
— •— shr-
^^-^ pH
H1^-^
^^3
E
m
I •
the ?i
^
ta ha we the,
? •• f yr^F -•-• -»:-»-. -•-
r' • •
Ka-xe wa-cin da ha we ka we,
r- 1
s
| ff^\) ' "7
-$r*F$
~:Fi— MW
f-SfH p™ F=? F=
\_y 4 (
E
J* n ^
the ci
T3'^ '
ta ha we the,
f *• T •• ? +• * ^- *
i i
Ka - xa wa cin da ha we ka we.
Ka-xe wa cin da ha we ka we,
E the 5! ta ha we the,
Ka-xe wa-ci" da ha we ka we,
E the c;i ta ha we the,
Ka-x,a wa 5!" da ha we ka we.
FREE TRANSLATION
1
A ha! I have come, here to this place,
To my feet I have come !
A ha! I have come, here to this place.
To my teet I have come !
A ha! I have come, here to this place!
The first, third, and fifth lines of each stanza are the same and are
not repeated in the following translation. The second and fourth
lines of the stanzas are also alike; therefore only the second line is
given.
2
To my legs I have come.
3
To my body I have come.
4
To my arms I have come.
5
To my head I have come.
6
To my mouth I have come.
300
THE OSAGE TRIBE
(ETH. ANN. 36
This song and other songs in which are used similar words to express
the same meaning, Wa'-thu-xa-ge said, are given the title "I'-ki
Wa-thon" — I, of; ki, themselves; Wa-thon, Sing; that is to say, the
members of the gens, having completed their task of the initiation
of a new member into the mysteries of life, sing of their own coming
to the earth, where they took bodily form and where their bodies
developed from infancy to maturity. First, the infant must achieve
the power of walking; second, he must learn to use his legs; third,
he must learn to care for the body; fourth, he must learn to use his
arms; fifth, then in his young manhood he must learn to use his head,
to formulate his thoughts; sixth, with his power of utterance he must
learn to express his thoughts through speech.
In the next song only one word stands out clearly, the word
" Wa-kon'-da." All the rest of the words are cryptic and unin
telligible. Even Wa'-thu-xa-ge could make no explanation concern
ing them or as to the purport of this song. However, there is strong
probability that it refers to the future success of the candidate as a
warrior. This very song was given by Shon'-ge-mon-in in a ritual
entitled "Non'-zhin-zhon Non-k'on," Hearing of the Vigil. It is the
fourth in a group of songs called " Wa-tsi'-a-dsi Wa-thon," Songs of
Triumph or of Victory. The songs and the ritual to which they
belong will be published in a later volume. The one word in the song,
" Wa-kon'-da," probably is to direct the thoughts of the candidate to
that unseen source of all power which enables man to act his part in life.
SONG 4
M.M. j: 120
Transcribed by Alice C. Fletcher
Time heats I* f~ r
' I
E da wa - kon-da ta ha we
, r
ha, Tho ka we da da,
gth^ is
1
PT
.^— ^—
1
— F
3—
9
— V
— _P_
""T"
-j
i=
I
J
J
•
•
ha
tho
ka
r ~T " r "
we da da, Ha
r
i
tho
ka
r
we
da
p
da,
r r r r
ii! I
tha ho ka we da da,
Ha tho
r r
ka we da da,
asfc
K i 1
— I
g
rt~ft
m^- 1
«
1 J"
•J
33
4
— H— H-4— P-
— I-
-^~"
* ~T"
ha tho ka
•
1
we
da da,
~J- -i -^- • •
r r r
E da tha wa - kon-
7
da
... ^
ta ha
- -•-
r
we.
E da wa-kon-da ta ha we ha,
Tho ka we da da ha tho ka we da da,
Ha tho ka we da da, tha ho ka we da da,
Ha tho ka we da da, ha tho ka we da da,
E da wa-kon-da ta ha we.
LA FLESCHE]
XI -KI WI -GI-ES
301
The fifth song is also given by Shon'-ge-mon-in in his Non'-zhin-zhon
ritual, in the Wa-tsi'-a-dsi group. It refers to certain ceremonial acts
to be performed by the candidate should he ever be chosen as a war
leader and return triumphant from a war expedition. The meaning
of these two songs will be explained in detail in the Vigil Rituals
in another volume to be published later.
SONG 5
Transcribed by Alice C. Fletcher
Time beats f f f
Da the the da we the sho-the the da we ni
3
da ho.
r" f r f r
Da the the da we the sho-the the da we ni
-f — f — P-
Da the the da we the
sho-the the da we
Da the the da we the sho-the the da we ni da ho,
Da the the da we the sho-the the da we ni da ha,
Da the the da we the sho-the the da we ni da.
The sixth and last song in this ritual belongs to the class of songs
called I'-ki Wa-thon, the meaning of which is explained on page 300.
Only the words "My feet, legs, body, arms, head, and mouth" are
intelligible. The rest of the words composing the song are disguised,
and thus rendered unrecognizable.
This class of songs refers not only to the initiating gens in the cere
mony and the mythic origin of all the gentes of the tribe, but they
also refer to the warriors as an organized body, which is here and
elsewhere in the tribal rites likened to a man perfect in all his physical
structure and capable of putting to effective use all his strength.
302
THE OSAGE TRIBE
SONG 6
M.M. J— 104
[ETH. ANN. 36
Transcribed by Alice C. Fletcher
jH f f. f ?• ~F |»*~ ,N -K — -Aj
3= -•-*—•. J ^IJlJ
Ha ge ke no" ke non ci wi - ta hi-a ka wo ho,
• .
~ f* E_— f» 1 — ^
-+-- — *• * *• *
i r
Qi wi - ta hi-a ka
r r
wo ho,
r r
Ha ge ke no" ke no"
wi - ta.
Ha ge ke no" ke no" 5! wi-ta hi-a ka wo ho,
Ha ge ke non ke no" ci wi-ta hi-a ka wa,
5i wi-ta hi-a ka wo ho,
Ha ge ke non ke no" ci wi-ta.
What has been gathered and here presented of the Ga-hi'-ge O-k'o"
and the Ni'-ki-e rites is but a small portion of the Osage tribal rites
as a whole. Were the 21 versions of these two rites to be recorded
and presented, years of labor would be required and many volumes
filled. However, the rituals of these two rites as here recorded, both
in the Osage and the English languages, give a fair idea of what the
other versions would be like.
The ancient NoD'-hon-zhin-ga in their years of pondering over life
attempted to embrace in their mental vision not only the visible part
of Nature, but even Wa-kon'-da, whom no man can see, but whom
they came to conceive of as a creative Power, a power that abides in
and moves among the great cosmic bodies, as well as the various forms
of life in and upon the earth.
PART II.— OSAGE VERSION
303
KEY TO PRONUNCIATION
a as in father.
b as in bad.
5 as in thin, thong.
d as in dog.
e as in prey.
'e exploded e.
g as in go. (>
h as in he.
i as in pierce.
'i exploded i.
in nasalized i.
'in nasalized exploded i.
j as in joy, jade.
k as in kin, kind.
k a medial k (between k and g).
m as in man, mine.
n as in no, nap.
hn The sound of the initial letter is expelled from
the nostrils and is scarcely audible.
o as in note.
'o exploded o.
on nasalized o.
p as in pipe.
P a medial p (between p and b).
r as in road, rope.
s as in sit, sing.
sh as in shun.
t as in ten.
t a medial t (between t and d).
th as in then, thou.
u as in rule.
'u exploded u.
w as in wet, win.
x rough German ch.
zh as in azure.
304
THE WI'-G1-ES OF THE GA-HI'-GE O-K'ON
THE XO'-KA WI'-GI-E
(Free translation, p. 74; literal translation, p. 463)
1. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
2. Hon'-ga u-dse-the pe-thon-ba ni-ka-shi-ga ba don a', a bin da, tsi
ga,
3. Ha! wi-con-ga, e-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
4. We'-ki-k'on thon-tse thi'n-ge a-tha, wi-con-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin
da, tsi ga,
5. In'-gthon-ga Do'-ga to" a', a, bin da, tsi ga,
6. Ha! wi-con-ga, e'-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
7. We'-ki-k'on thon-tse thin-ge a-tha, wl-con-ga, e'-gi-a bi a', a bin
da, tsi ga,
8. Tho'-e xtsi hi the do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
9. A'-ba-do a-ga-ha dsi xtsi a', a bin da, (si ga,
10. Wa'-^a-be u-pa-ka thin-ga to" non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
11. Tho' to" hi non-zhin bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
12. Ha! wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
13. We'-ki-k'on thoMse thin-ge a-tha, wi-tsi-go-e', e-gi-e a-ka', a bi"
da, tsi ga,
14. Ha! zhin-ga, e'-tsi-the a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
15. We'-ki-k'on thon-tse thin-ge' e-she don a', a bi° da, tsi ga,
16. We'-ki-k'on thon-tse a-ton-he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
17. E'-dsi zhi the thin-ge xtsi a-ni-ka-shi-ga in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
18. E'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
19. Xa'-dse ba-tse hon/ cka don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
20. Thi'-thi-shi-zhe gthi non-the ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
21. Ga' tse shki a, a bin da, tsi ga,
22. We'-ki-k'on the mon-thin ta bin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
23. Tho-e' xtsi ci-thu-ce the do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
24. Ba'-xpe ba-tse hon cka do" a', a bin, tsi ga,
25. Ga' thi"-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
26. Thi'-thi-shi-zhe gthi non-the ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
27. Ga' thi°-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
28. We'-ki-k'on the mon-thin ta bin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
29. Tho-e' xtsi ci-thu-$e the do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
30. Ga'-xa zhi"-ga pe'-gtha-gtha the xtsi ge dsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
31. Zhon'-sha-be-the hi ba-tse hon'-pka don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
2786—21 20 305
: - TH, .-,,i T?::-I
32. Ga' tUMdhe shki a'., a bi1 da. ta ga.
33. We'-b-k"o- die mo»-thi* ta i ts? da', a bi* da. tsi ga,
3ft. Xo*'-xthe gi the mo*-thix ta bi* da', a bi- da, tsi ga,
35. No* '-xth« gi the mo»-thi- bi do" a', a bi- da, tsi ga,
36. U -no* a bi i-the ki^he mo*-thi* ta bi* da . a i>i* da. tsi ga,
37. Tbo-e' itsi ci-thn-fe the do* a', a bi* da. tsi ga.
38. Mo* -ca ba-tse ho*' ^ka do* a . a bi* da. tsi ga.
39. E'-dsi itsi M gthi- thi"-kshe a', a bi* da. ta g«:
40. Ga' thi*-kdie shki a\ a bi* da. ta ga.
41. We -ki-kr'o* the mo--thi* ta bi* da', a bi* da. tsi ga.
42. Tco-« xta ^i-tha^« the do* a', a bi* da, tsi ga,
43. Ha'-^i-hi ko* ba-^ae ho-' ?ka do* a', a bi* da, tsi ga.
44. Tbi'-thi-^hi-zhe gthi no'-the to* a', a bi* da. tei ga.
45. Ga' thi»-k3he shki a', a bi* da. ta ga.
46. We -ki-k'o* Ac mo*-thi* ta bi* da', a bi* da. tsi ga.
47. Zhi* -ga we-ki-t'o* tha bi do* a'? a bi* da. tsi ga,
48. Da'-gth* i-thi-sha-wi* e' no* bi no* a', a bi* da. tsi ga,
49. 5ho* xtsi ga-xe mo»-thi* ta i ts1 da', a bi* da. tsi ga.
50. Ttko-f xts p-thn-ce the do* a', a bi* da. tsi ga.
51. A'-ba-do a-ga-ha dsi its a', a bi* da. tsi ga.
52. I * pa-p ho*' fka do* a', a bi* da, tsi ga.
53. r*' ihi*-ga do-ba'. a bi* da. ta ga.
54. ^ to -the zhn gthi no*-the to* a', a bi* da. tsi ga.
55. Ga' thi*-kshe shki a', a bi* da. ta ga.
56. We -ki-k'o* the mo*-thi* ta i tsi* da', a bi* da. tsi. ga.
57. Zhi»'-ga da-ri-hi ki-the mo*-thi* bi do* shki a', a bi* da. tsi ga,
5*. We'-ki-k-'o" the moMhi* ta bi* da', a bi* da. tsi ga.
59. Zhi*'-ga tsi-hi n-gthe the mo*-thi* bi do* shki a', a bi1 da, tsi ga,
60. Tsi lii-o-gthe gj-«ho*-tha zhi ki-the mo*-dii* ta i tsi* da', a bi* da!
'
61. Wa'-ko»-da tsi i*-da'. a bi- da, tsi ga.
62. Tsiti-a-gthe wi-ta'. a bi* da. tsi ga.
63. Wa'-ko*-da tsi i- da', a bi* da, tsi ga,
64. Zhi^-ga zho-i-ga the mo*-thi1 bi do- a', a bi> da, tsi ga.
65. Wa'-ko*-da ta to- ki-the mo»-thi* ta i tsi" da', a bi- da, tsi ga,
66. He'-dsi xtm a', a bi* da, ta ga.
67. U'-^i-gthe wi« i-tae-the to* a', a bi* da. ta ga,
68. U'-^i-fthe pe-tho*-ba'. a bi* da. tsi ga.
69. Thi'-o-ba-he i Ado gp dsi a', a bi* da, tsi ga,
70. U'-?i-gthe pe-tho»-ba'. a bi* da. tsi ga.
71. Ga' tse shki a' a bi- da. tsi ga.
72. Wa'-we-a-ga-?ko--the i- da', a bi* da. ^ ga,
73. O'-do* pe-tho--ba e7 no- bi no- a', a bi* da. ^si ga.
74. Sho-' xtsi pa-xe i- da', a bi- da, tsi ga,
TRIBAL KITES OSAGK LANGUAGE
75. U '-fi-gthe Ai in a', a bi* da, ta ga.
76. Thi'-u-ba-he tha-ta da a', a bi" da, tea ga.
77. U'-fi-gthe sha'-pe ha i-tse-the to* a', a bi* da. tsi ga.
78. Ga'-tee sbJti a', a bi* da. tsi ga,
79. Wa'-we-a-ga-£ko*-the im da', a bi1 da. tsi ga.
80. O'-do* sha-pe e' no* bi no* a', a bi* da. tsi ga.
81. I'-tha-ga-cko*-the i* da'r e to* a? a bi* da, tsi ga.
82. He -dsi xtsi a. a bi* da. tsi ga,
S3. Zhi« '-ga zho-i-ga tha bi ga' no*-zbi* da', a bi* da. tsi ga.
84. Mi -xa-^ka to*-ga thi*-kshe no* a', a bi* da. tsi ga?
85. Zhi*'-ga zho-i-ga the ta bi a'. wi-fo"-ga, e'4d-a bi a', a bi* daf
S6. Zhi*'-ga zho-i-ga o*-tha bi do* a', a bi* da. tsi ga,
87. Wa'-dsu-ta •hn^egn* xtsi a', a bt* da, tsi ga.
88. Wi'-no* a-hiu c*-gi bthi* da. c' to* a', a bi* da. tsi ga.
89. Ho* -ba he-be a', a bi* da', tsi ga,
90. Tse'-do* go-da-ha xta a', a bi* da. tsi ga.
91. Ga-ha'-ha a-hi-gthi' a-thi*-he no* i* da. e to* a', a bi* da, tsi'ga,
92. ZM*'-ga zho-i-ga o*-tha bi do*-a', a bi* da. tsi ga.
93. A'-hiu-ha ^a-gi a bi i-the ki-the mo*-thi* ta i tsi* da', a bi* da,
tsiga,
94. Ho*'-ba u-^a-ki-ba do-ba'. a bi* da. tsi ga.
95. U'-hi ki-the mo*-thi* ta bi* da', a bi* da. tsi ga.
96. U'-no* a bi shki i-the ki-the mo*-thi* ta bi* da*, a bi* da. tsi ga,
97. Zhi*'-ga u-no* o*-gi-the mo*-thi* bi do* a', a bi* da, tsi ga.
98. U'-no* a bi i-the ki-the mo»-thi* ta bi* da', a bi* da. tsi ga.
Ki'-so* WI'-GI-E
1. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bi* da. tsi ga,
2. Wa'-^a-be u-^a-ka thie-ge kshe a', a bi* da. tsi ga.
3. Ta' ki-thi-xa bi u-zhi*-ga xtsi thi*-kshe dsi a', a bi* da, |st ga,
4. Ni'-dse ki i-no*-the ta do* a', a bi* da. tsi ga,
5. U'-k'o* wa-no*-tha zhi xtsi thi* a', a bi* da, tsi ga.
6. Ta'-dse e-no* ha', a bi* da. tsi ga.
7. Ha'-shki-pa a-gthi no*-xhi*-xhi* the a', a bi* da. tsi ga,
8. Sho*' to* i* da', a bi* da, tsi ga,
9. Thu-e' xtsi ^i-thu-^e the do* a', a bi* da. tsi ga.
10. Xa'-dse ba-tse ho*'-cka do* a', a bi* da, fsi ga.
11. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bi* da. tsi ga,
12. Thi'-thi-^ki gthi noMhe thi*-kshe a', a bi* da, tsi ga,
13. Xi'-dse ki i-no*-tha zhi the a', a bi* da. tsi ga.
308 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
14. Thu-e' xtsi pi-thu-^e the don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
15. Ba'-xpe zhin-ga hon/-?ka don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
16. Thi'-thi-cki gthi non-the thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
17. Ni'-dse ki i-non-tha zhi the a', a bitt da, tsi ga,
18. Thu-e' xtsi pi-thu-ce the don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
19. Ga'-xa zhin-ga ?e gtha-gtha xtsi ge dsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
20. Zhon'-sha-be the hiu ba-tse hon'-cka don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
21. Thi'-thi-cki gthi i-non-the thin-kshe a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
22. Ni'-dse ki i-non-tha zhi the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
23. Thu-e' xtsi ci-thu-^e the don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
24. Ga'-xa zhin-ga ce' gtha-gtha xtsi ge dsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
25. Ha'-fi hi kon thin-kshe non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
26. Thi'-thi-cki gthi i-non-the thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
27. Ni'-dse ki i-non-tha zhi the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
28. Thu-e' xtsi ci-thu-fe tha do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
29. Mon'-ha pa-ci hon/-cka don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
30. 'In/ zhin-ga do-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
31. Thi'-ta-the gthi i-non-the ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
32. Ni'-dse ki i-non-tha zhi the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
33. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
34. Thu-e' xtsi ci-thu-ce the don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
35. 'In/ pa-ci a-ga-ha dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
36. 'In' z,hin-ga do-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
37. Thi'-con-tha gthi i-tse-the ton a', a biQ da, tsi ga,
38. 'In' ta-xpi a-gthon xtsi hi gthin thiQ-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
39. Ni'-dse ki i-non-the thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
40. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
41. Mi' pe-thon-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
42. He'-dsi xtsi hi gthi" thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
43. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
44. Hon'-ba u-ca-ki-ba win u-pshi sho" e'-ki-the thin-kshe a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
45. Wa'-zhin-ga ho-wa-gi ki-he shon e'-gon xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
46. Ho'-ton wa-non-k'on thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
47. Hon'-ba u-fa-ki-ba win u-pshi shon e'-ki-the thin-kshe a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
48. Wa'-gthu-shka zhin-ga', a bin da, tsi ga,
49. Kia'-hi-hi the xtsi wa-don-be thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
50. Hon'-ba u-ca-ki-ba win up-shi sho" e'-ki-the thin-kshe a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
LAFLESCHE] TRIBAL RITES OSAGE LANGUAGE 309
51. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
52. Wa'-kon-da u-pshi shon e'-ki-the thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
53. Zhin'-ga-zhin-ga', a bin da, tsi ga,
54. Hon'-ba u-ca-ki-ba u-ni-ka-shi-ga ta bi e'-ki-the thin-kshe a', a
bin da, tsi ga,
55. Zhin'-ga-zhin-ga gthu-ce do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
56. Wa'-kon-da tse-ga xtsi e-thon-be hi no" bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
57. Ba'-ha tsi non-zhin ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
58. Zhiu'-ga ni-ka-shi-ga bi a', wi-tsi-go e', e ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
59. Zhin'-ga u-non i-the ki-the mon-thin ta bi a', wi-tsi-go e', e to"
a', a bin da, tsi ga.
KI'-NON WI'-GI-E
(Free translation, p. 79; literal translation, p. 468)
1. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
2. Zhin'-ga ki-non gi-tha bi thin-ge a-tha, wi-tsi-go e', e to" a, a bin
da, tsi ga,
3. Zhin'-ga ki-non gi-tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
4. Wa'-kon-da tse-ga xtsi e-thon-be hi no" bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
5. Wa'-kon-da u-ga-zhu-dse hi non non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
6. Ga' ki-non gi-the mon-thin ta bi" da, a bin da, tsi ga,
7. Ki'-non gi-the mon-thin bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
8. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta bin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
9. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
10. Wa'-ca-be u-ca-ka thin-ge kshe non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
11. E'-shki do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
12. Wa'-kon-da u-ton-ba bi ki-the mon-thin ta bin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
13. Zhu'-i-ga pa-be ga ge a', a bin da, tsi ga,
14. Non'-xthe a-gi-the a-thin he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
15. Non'-xthe gi-the mon-thin bi do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
16. Wa'-kon-da u-ton-be bi ki-the mon-thin ta bin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
17. The'-shka cka ga thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
18. Wa'-kon-da hon-ba don thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
19. I'-bi-con-dse on-kshi-the ta i tse a-tha', a bin da, tsi ga,
20. I'-bi-con-dse on-kshi-tha bi do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
21. U'-no" a bi i-the ki-the mo"-thin ta bin da, a bin da, tsi ga,
22. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
23. Mi'-xa cka t°n-ga thin-kshe no" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
24. Ha! wi-tsi-go e' e-gi-a-bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
25. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga tha bi thin-ge a-tha, wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-a bi a',
a bin da, tsi ga,
26. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
27. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga tha bi thin-ge' e-she do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
310 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
28. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga on-tha ba thoa tse mi-kshe in da', a bia da, tsi ga,
29. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga on-tha bi do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
30. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
31. £i'-ha u-sha-be ga thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
32. Non'-xthe a-gi-the a-thin he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
33. Zbin'-ga zho-i-ga on-tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
34. Non'-xthe gi-the mon-thin bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
35. Wa'-ko°-da u-ton-ba bi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
36. Pa'-zhu-zhe i-ta-xe sha-be ga thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
37. Non'-xthe a-gi-the a-thin he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
38. Zbin'-ga non-xthe gi-the mon-thin bi don shki a',' a bin da, tsi ga,
39. Wa'-ko"-da u-ton-ba bi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da,
tsi ga,
40. A'-hiu ga thiVkshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
41. Wa'-gthe gi-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, ts; ga,
42. Wa'-gthe gi-the mo°-thin bi do" shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
43. Hon'-ba wa-<?u ga to" a', a biQ da, tsi ga,
44. I'-tha-thu-<?e on-ga-xe on-mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
45. Hon'-ba u-ca-ki-ba do-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
46. U'-hi ki-the mon-thin ta bi a', zhin-ga', a bin da, tsi ga,
I. MON-THIN'-THE-DON-TS'A-GE
(Free translation, p. 84; literal translation, p. 470)
1. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
2. Wa'-zha-zhe U-dse-the ]>e-thon-ba ba do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
3. Wa'-zha-zhe win/ a, a bin da, tsi ga,
4. Wa'-ki-gthi-gthon tsi-the thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga
5. Tsi'-xin-dse xtsi ge dsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
6. Ba'-mo°-xe hi-the kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
7. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
8. Hon'-ga wa-ga-xa bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
9. In'-dse-ha ga-xe to" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
10. Hon'-ba i-ta-xe thon dsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
11. Xa'-ge tha-shtoQ a-zhi thin a', a bin da, tsi ga,
12. Thu-e' xtsi ci-thu-fe the don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
13. Tsi-u'-hon-ge xtsi ge dsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
14. Wa'-kon-da tho-to" a-thin hi thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
15. U'-pa-ce thon dsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
16. Tse'-xe xtsi ge dsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
17. I'-sdo-ge }>a-gthe xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
18. Ba'-mon-xe hi-the kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
19. Wa'-kon-da in-shta a-ga-<?ta ga-xe kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
20. Shon'-thi-kshe in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
21. Wa'-kon-da hon-ba don thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
LATLESCHE] TRIBAL RITES — OSAGE LANGUAGE 311
22. Hon'-ga wa-ga-xa bi a', a bin da, (si ga,
23. In'-dse-ha ga-xe don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
24. Hon'-ba i-ta-xe thon dsi a', a bin da, (si ga,
25. Xa'-ge wa-tha-shton a-zhi thia a', a bin da, tsi ga,
26. Shon'-ton in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
27. Wa'-kon-da tho-ton a-thin hi thin a', a bin da, tsi ga,
28. U'-pa-ce thon dsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
29. Xa'-ge wa-tha-shton a-zhi thin a', a bin da, tsi ga,
30. Tse'-xe xtsi ge dsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
31. The' shki Wa-kon-da e-dsi a-ba thon-ta shon e'-the thin-kshe a', a
bin da, tsi ga,
32. I'-sdo-ge pa-gthe xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
33. Ba'-mon-xe hi-the kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
34. Wa'-kon-da in-shta a-ga-^ta ga-xe kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
35. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
36. Wa'-kon-da on-thi-don hi-the mi-kshe shon e'-ki-the kshe a', a bin
da, tsi ga,
37. Hon'-ga wa-ga-xa bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
38. In'-dse-ha ga-xe do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
39. Hon'-ba i-(a-xe thon dsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
40. Xa'-ge wa-tha-shton a-zhi thin a', a bin da, tsi ga,
41. Thu-e' xtsi ci-thu-ce the don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
42. Wa'-kon-da tho-ton a-thitt hi thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
43. U'-pa-ce thon dsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
44. Xa'-ge wa-tha-shton a-zhi thin a', a bin da, tsi ga,
45. Tse'-xe xtsi ge dsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
46. The' shki wa-kon'-da e-dsi a-ba thon ta shon e'-the thin-kshe a',
a bin da, tsi ga,
47. I'-sdo-ge pa-gthe xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
48. Ba'-moD-xe hi-the kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
49. Wa'-kon-da in-shta a-ga-cta ga-xe kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
50. Shon' thin-kshe in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
51. Wa'-kon-da on-thi-don hi-the mi-kshe shon e'-ki-the thin-kshe a',
a bin da, tsi ga,
52. Pa' thi-hon tsi-the do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
53. Hon'-ga wa-ga-xa bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
54. In'-dse-ha ga-xe don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
55. Hon'-ba i-ta-xe tho" dsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
56. Xa'-ge wa-tha-shton a-zhi thin a', a bin da, tsi ga,
57. Shon/ thin-kshe in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
58. Wa'-kon-da tho-ton a-thin hi thin-kshe a', a bi° da, tsi ga,
59. U'-pa-ce thon dsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
60. Tse'-xe xtsi ge dsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
61. The' shki do" a, a bin da, tsi ga,
312 THE OSAGE TRIBE [BT-H. ANN. 36
62. Wa'-kon-da e-dsi a-ba thon ta shon e'-the thin-kshe a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
63. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
64. I'-sdo-ge pa-gthe xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
65. Ba'-mon-xe hi the kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
66. Wa'-kon-da in-shta a-ga-cta ga-xe kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
67. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
68. Hon'-ga wa-ga-xa bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
69. In'-dse-ha ga-xe don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
70. Hon'-ba i-ta-xe thon dsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
71. Xa'-ge wa-tha-shton a-zhi thin a', a bin da, tsi ga,
72. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
73. Shon' the in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
74. Wa'-kon-da tho-ton a-thin hi thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
75. U'-zhon we-sha-pe kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
76. Ni'u-hon-ge win e-dsi do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
77. He'-dsi xtsi hi non-zhin ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
78. The' shki wa-kon-da e-dsi a-ba thon ta sho" e'-the thin-kshe a',
a bin da, tsi ga,
79. The' ga xtsi a-zhon tse e'-the thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
80. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
81. Wa'-kon-da iD-shta a-ga-?ta ga-xe kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
82. Wa'-kon-da on-thi-don hi- the mi-kshe shon e'-ki-the kshe a', a bin
da, tsi ga
83. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
84. Pa' thi-hon tsi- the don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
85. Hon'-ga wa-ga-xa bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
86. In'-dse-ha ga-xe don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
87. Hon'-ba i-ta-xe thon dsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
88. Xa'-ge wa-tha-shton a-zhi thin a', a bin da, tsi ga,
89. Ni'u-hon-ge win e-dsi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
90. He'-dsi xtsi hi non-zhin ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
91. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
92. Mon'-thin-the-doD-ts'a-ge don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
93. He'-dsi xtsi hi no°-zhin ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
94. Ha' ! wi-tsi-go e', e-tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
95. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga-tha bi thin-ge a-tha, wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-e ton a',
a bin da, tsi ga,
96. Ha' ! zhin-ga e' tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
97. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga-tha bi thin-ge' e-she don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
98. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga on-tha ba thon ta mi-kshe in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
99. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga on-tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
100. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta bin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
101. 9i'-Ra-ha ga thi"-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
102. U'-non a-gi-the a-ton he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
LAFLESCHK] TRIBAL RITES OSAGE LANGUAGE 313
103. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta bin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
104. Hi'-zhu-ga-wa ga thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
105. U'-non a-gi-the a-ton he in da', a bi° da, tsi ga,
106. Zhin'-ga u-non gi the mon-thin bi don ski a', a bin da, tsi ga,
107. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta bin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
108. Tse'-wa-tse-u-ga-wa ga thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
109. U'-non a-gi-the a-ton he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
110. Zhin'-ga u-non gi-the mon-thin bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
111. Tse'-wa-tse-u-ga-wa a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta bin da', a' bi"
da, tsi ga,
112. Mon'-ge thi-cto-the ga thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
113. U'-non a-gi-the a-ton he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
114. Zhin'-ga u-non gi-the mon-thin bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
115. U'-noD a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta bin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
116. A'-zhu-ga-wa ga thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
117. U'-non a-gi-the a-ton he i° da', a bin da, tsi ga,
118. Zhin'-ga u-non tha bi don shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1 19. A'-zhu-ga-wa a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta bin da', a biB da, tsi ga,
120. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
121. A'-hiu ga tse a', a bin da, tsi ga,
122. E'shki don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
123. Wa'-thin-e-cka zhi in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
124. Wa'-hiu-k'a a-gi-the a-ton he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
125. Zhin'-ga wa-hiu-k'a gi-the mon-thin bi do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
126. Wa'-hiu-k'a gi-pa-hi ki-the mon-thin ta bin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
127. Wa'-hiu-k'a gi-the mon-thin bi do" shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
128. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta bi a', zhin-ga', a bin da, tsi ga,
129. Zhin'-ga wa-non-xe i-thi-shton kshe shki don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
130. I'-ki-pa-non-xe-cka mon-thin ta bi a', zhin-ga, e-ton a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
131. A'-ba-t'o-xa ga thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
132. Un'-non a-gi-the a-ton he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
133. U'-non tha bi don shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
134. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta bin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
135. Do'-dse-u-ga-wa ga thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
136. U'-non a-gi-the a-ton he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
137. U'-non tha bi do" shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
138. Do'-dse u-ga-wa a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta bin da', a bin da(
tsi ga,
139. Ta'-xpi hin ca-dse ga thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
140. U'-non tha bi don shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
141. Ta'-xpi hin ca-dse a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta bin da', zhin-ga'
a bin da, tsi ga.
314 THE OSAGE TKIBE [BTH. ANN. 36
II. HON'-GA WA-GTHIN-TS'A-GE (THE AGED EAGLE)
(Free translation, p. 38; literal translation, p. 473) ,
1 . He-dsi xtsi a, a bin da, tsi ga,
2. He'-dsi xtsi i-non-zhin don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
3. Hin'-da a-gthe tse e'-ki-the ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
4. U'-zhon we-pe~thon-ba tse a', a bin da, tsi ga,
5. Ga'-xa zhin-ga xtsi ge dsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
6. He'-dsi xtsi gi thin a', a bin da, tsi ga,
7. Hon/-ga Wa-gthin-ts'a-ge don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
8. He'-dsi xtsi gthi non-zhin ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
9. Ha' ! wi-tsi-go e', e gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
10. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga-tha bi thin-ge a-tha, wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-a bi a', a
bin da, tsi ga,
11. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
12. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga on-tha ba thon ta mi-kshe in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
13. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga on-tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
14. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta bin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
15. £i'-pa-ha ga thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
16. U'-non a-gi-the a-ton he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
17. Zhin'-ga u-non tha bi don shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
18. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta bin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
19. Hi'-kon ba-p'in-tha ga ge shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
20. U'-non a-gi-the a-ton he ia da', a bin da, tsi ga,
21. U'-non tha bi don shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
22. Hi'-kon-ba-9'in-tha a' bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta bin da', a bin da,
tsi ga,
23. Tse'-wa-tse u-ga-wa ga thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
24. U'-non a-gi-the a-ton he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
25. U'-non tha bi don shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
26. Tse'-wa-tse-u-ga-wa a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta bin da', a bin da,
tsi ga,
27. Mon'-ge thi-ctu-the ga thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga.
28. U-non/ a-gi-the a-ton he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
29. U'-non tha bi don shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
30. Mon'-ge thi-£tu-the a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta bin da', a bin da,
tsi ga,
31. A'-zhu-ga-wa ga thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
32. U'-non a-gi-the a-ton he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
33. U'-non tha bi do" shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
34. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta bin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
35. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
36. A'-hiu ga tse shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
37. Wa'-hiu-k'a on-gi-tha ba thon ta a-ton he i" da", a bin da, tsi ga,
38. Wa'-hiu-k'a gi-the mon-thia bi do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
LAFLESCHK] TRIBAL RITES OSAGE LANGUAGE 315
39. Wa'-hiu-k'a gi-pa-hi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
40. Zhin'-ga wa-non-xe i-thi-shton kshe shki don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
41. I'-ki-pa-non-xe-9ka mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
42. I'-ki-pa-non-xe-9ka mon-thin bi do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
43. U'-non a bi i-thc ki-the mon-thin ta bin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
44. A'-ba-ku t'o-xa ga thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
45. U'-no" a-gi-the a-ton he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
46. U'-non tha bi don shki a', a bin da, (si ga,
47. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta bin da', a bi° da, tsi ga,
48. Do'-dse u-ga-wa ga thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
49. U'-non a-gi-the a-ton he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
50. Zhin'-ga u-non gi-the mon-thin bi don shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
51. Do'-dse u-ga-wa a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta bin da', a bin da,
tsi ga,
52. Ta'-xpi hi" pa-dse ga thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
53. E'-shki do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
54. U'-non a-gi-the a-ton he in-da', a bin da, tsi ga,
55. U'-non tha bi don shki a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
56. Ta'-xpi hi" pa-dse a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta bi a', zhin-ga',
a bin da, tsi ga.
III. MON'-£E (METAL) WI'-GI-E
(Free translation, p. 90; literal translation, p. 476)
1. He-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
2. U'-zhon we-pe-thon-ba tse a', a bin da, tsi ga,
3. Tsi-u'-hon-ge xtsi ge dsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
4. He'-dsi xtsi a-gthi-non-zhin e don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
5. Mon-pe u-shpe hon-£ka don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
6. He'-dsi xtsi a-gthi-non-zhin to" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
7. Ha'! wi-tsi-go e', e tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
8. Zhi°'-ga zho-i-ga tha bi thi"-ge a-tha, wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-a bi a', a
bin da, tsi ga,
9. Ha' ! zhin-ga e', e tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
10. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga tha bi thin-ge e-she do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
11. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga o"-tha ba thon ta mi-kshe in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
12. Ts'e wa-tse-xi mi-kshe in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
13. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga on-tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
14. Ts'e' wa-tse-xi ki-the mon-thin ta bin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
15. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
16. Zhin'-ga wa-hiu-k'a on-gi-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
17. Zhi°'-ga wa-hiu-k'a on-gi-the mon-thin bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
18. Wa'-hiu-k'a gi-pa-hi ki-the mon-thi" ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga;
19. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga on-tha bi do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
20. Wa'-hiu-k'a on-gi-the mon-thin bi do" a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
21. Zhin'-ga wa-non-xe i-thi-shton kshe shki don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
316 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
22. On-thon'-ki-pa-non-xe-cka mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
23. On-thon'-ki-pa-non-xe-cka mon-thin bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
•24. U'-non a-bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta bin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
25. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga on-tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
26. I<-ts'a thin-ge mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
27. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga on-tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
28. Wa'-kon-da xin-ha pa-gi thin-ga in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
29. Wi'-non Wa-kon-da xin-ha ca-gi bthin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
30. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga on-tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
31. Xin'-ha ca-gi a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsi" da', a binjda, tsi ga,
32. Hon'-ba u-ca-ki-ba do-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
33. U'-hi-ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
34. Hon'-ba wa-tha-xthi thin-ge ton non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
35. I'-tha-thu-ce xtsi a-ni-ka-shi-ga a-ton he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
36. Hon'-ba u-xthi thin-ge xtsi u-ni-ka-shi-ga ki-the mon-thin ta bi a',
zhin-ga', a bin da, tsi ga,
THE WI'-GI-ES OF THE GENTES
WA-ZHA'-ZHE SUBDIVISION
WA-ZHA'-ZHE WA-NON GENS
(Free translation, p. 92; literal translation, p. 477)
1. He-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
2. Wa'-zha-zhe u-dse-the pe-thon-ba ni-ka-shi-ga ba don a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
3. Wa'-zha-zhe Wa-non thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
4. Ha' ! wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
5. Zhin'-ga we-ki-k'on tha ba thon tse thin-ge a-tha, wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-a
bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
6. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
7. Wa'-zha-zhe Wa-non thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
8. Ke' cin-dse ga-tse pe-thon-ba thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
9. Ga' thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
10. We'-ki-k'on the mon-thin ta i tsi" da', a bin da, tsi ga,
11. ^in'-dse ga-tse pe-thon-ba ga tse a', a bin da, tsi ga,
• 12. E' shki don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
13. Wa-we-a'-ga-ckon-the in-da', a bin da, tsi ga,
14. O'-don pe-thon-ba e' non bi non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
15. I'-tha-ga-pkon-the in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
16. ^in'-dse ga-tse sha-pe ga tse a', a bin da, tsi ga,
17. E'shki don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
18. Wa-we-a'-ga-ckon-the in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
19. O'-don sha-pe e non bi no" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
20. Shon' xtsi i-tse-a-the in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
21. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
LA FUDBCHKJ TRIBAL, RITES OSAGE LANGUAGE 317
22. No"'-ka ga-gthe-zhe ga thi"-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
23. Wa'-thin-e-cka she-mon mon-zhi in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
24. U'-non-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
25. U'-non tha bi don shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
26. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
27. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga on-tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
28. Xin'-ha ca-gi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
29. Mon'-ge ga-gthe-zhe ga thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
30. E'shki don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
31. Wa'-we-a-ga-ckon-thc in da', a biQ da, tsi ga,
32. Wa'-kon-da mon-shi ta ga kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
33. A'-ki-thi-tse xo-dse ga thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
34. Wa'-ko"-da mon-shi ta ga kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
35. I'-tha-ga-<?ko"-the xtsi a-ni-ka-shi-ga in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
36. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga on-tha bi do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
37. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
38. Hon'-ga, Tsi-zhu e-thon-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
39. Zho'-i-ga on-tha bi don shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
40. U'-non a bi, i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsi" da', a bin da, tsi ga,
41. Hon'-ba u-ca-ki-ba do-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
42. U'-hi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga.
WA-ZHA'-ZHE QKA GENS
(Free translation, p. 94; literal translation, p. 479)
1. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
2. Wa'-zha-zhe u-dse-the pe-thon-ba ni-ka-shi-ga ba do" a', a bin da
tsi ga,
3. Wa'-zha-zhe ^ka thin-kshe non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
4. Ha' ! Wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
5. Zhin'-ga we-ki-k'on tha ba tho"-tse thin-ge a-tha, wi-tsi-go e',
e-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
6. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
7. Zhin'-ga wc-ki-k'on tha ba thoMse thin-ge e-she do" a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
8. We'-ki-k'on thon-tse mi-kshe i" da', a bin da, tsi ga,
9. Tsiu'-ge thin-kshe no" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
10. Zhu'-i-ga-the xtsi a-ni-ka-shi-ga mi-kshe in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
11. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga on-tha bi don a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
12. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thi" ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
13. Ha' ba-k'in-tha ga kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
14. U'-non pa-xe i" da', a bin da, tsi ga,
15. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga o°-tha bi do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
16. Ha' ba-k'in-tha a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da,
tsi ga,
318 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
17. Ni' u-ba-shon pe-thon-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
18. U'-pshi a-thin he non in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
19. Wa'-kon-da e-shki don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
20. Be' u-zhon-ge on-thon-kshi-tha mon-zhi a-thin he in da', a bi" da,
tsi ga,
21. Zhin-ga zhu-i-ga on-tha bi do" a, a bin da, tsi ga,
22. Be' u-zhon-ge i-kshi-tha ba zhi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin
da, tsi ga,
23. Wa'-kon-da hon-ba don thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
24. Zhu'-i-ga the xtsi a-ni-ka-shi-ga mi-kshe in da', a bi" da, tsi ga,
25. Wa'-kon-da hon-ba don thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
26. Zhu'-i-ga the xtsi ni-ka-shi-ga ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bi"
da, tsi ga,
27. Hon'-ba u-ca-ki-ba do-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
28. U'-hi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
29. U'-non a bi shki i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga.
WA-TSE-TSI GENS
(Free translation, p. 95; literal translation, p. 480)
1. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
2. Wa-zha-zhe u-dse-the pe-thon-ba ni-ka-shi-ga ba do" a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
3. Wa'-zha-zhe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
4. Wa'-tse-tsi thin-kshe no" a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
5. Ha' ! wi-tsi-go e', e gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
6. We'-ki-k'on thon-tse thin-ge a-tha, wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-a bi a', a bi" da,
tsi ga,
7. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
8. We'-ki-k'on thon-tse thin-ge e-she don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
9. We'-ki-k'on thon-tse mi-kshe in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
10. Xon'-dse mi-ga ton non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
11. Zhu'-i-ga the xtsi a-ni-ka-shi-ga mi-kshe in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
12. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga on-tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
13. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsi" da, a bin da, tsi ga,
14. Xon'-dse do-ga to" non"a', a bin da, tsi ga,
15. We'-ki-k'on the mon-thin ta i tsin da, a bin da, tsi ga,
16. Xon'-dse do-ga ton non a', a bia da, tsi ga,
17. We'-ki-k'on the mon-thin bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
18. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
19. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
20. Ni' ga ge shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
21. I'-tha-ki-thon-be xtsi on-ga-xe on-mo° thin ta i tsi" da', a bin da,
tsi ga,
22. Ni' ga ge shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
23. U'non tha bi do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
24. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsi" da', a bin da, tsi ga,
LAFLKSCHE] TRIBAL, RITES— OSAGE LANGUAGE 319
25. Mon'-hin ts'a-zhi ga ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
26. U'-non tha bi do" shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
27. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
28. U'-non a-gi-the a-ton he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
29. A'-ba t'u-xa ga ge a', a bin da, tsi ga,
30. U'-non a-gi-the a-ton he in da', a bin da tsi ga,
31. I'-ta-xe xtha fka ga thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
32. U'-non a-gi-the a-ton he in da', a bin da, (si ga,
33. Zhin'-ga non hi bi do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
34. Pa'-xiD ^a-dse fi-e-go" i-the ki-the mon-thin t& i tsin da', a bi"
da, tsi ga.
TA I-NI-KA-SHI-GA GENS
(Free translation, p. 95; literal translation, p. 481)
1. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
2. Wa'-zha-zhe u-dse-the pe-thon-ba ni-ka-shi-ga ba don a', a bin
da, tsi ga,
3. Wa-zha-zhe win/ a, a bin da, tsi ga,
4. Wa'-zha-zhe Ta-tha-xin thin-kshe non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
5. Ha' ! wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
6. We'-ki-k'on thon-tse thin-ge a-tha, wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-a bi a', a bin
da, tsi ga,
7. Ha' ! zhin-ga e', e-tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
8. We'-ki-k'on thoMse thin-ge e-she do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
9. We'-ki-k'on thon-tse mi-kshe in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
10. Wa'-dsu-ta zhin-ga wi" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
11. Zhu'-i-ga a-the a-thin he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
12. We'-ki-k'on the mon-thin ta i tsi" da', a bin da, tsi ga,
13. We'-ki-k'on the mon-thin bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
14. We'-ki-k'on gi-o-ts'e-ga ki-the mon-thin ta i tsi" da', a bi" da,
tsi ga,
15. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
16. (,,Y-ha u-sha-be ga-thin-kshe shki a', a bi° da, tsi ga,
17. Non'-xthe a-gi-the a-thin he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
18. Zhin'-ga non-xthe gi-the mon-thin bi do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
19. Non'-xthe gi-a-da-xe ki-the moMhi" ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
20. Pa'-zhu-zhe sha-be ga thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
21. Non'-xthe a-gi-the a-thin he in-da', a bin da, tsi ga,
22. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga tha bi do" a', a bin da, tsi ga/,
23. Non'-xthe gi-a-da-xe ki-the mon-thin ta i tsi" da', a bin da, tsi ga,
24. Non'-ta i-ta-xe sha-be ga thin-kshe shki a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
25. Non'-xthe a-gi-the a-thin he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
26. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
27. No"'-xthe gi-a-da-xe ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
28. We'-ki-k'on ga non-zhin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
320 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
29. Wa'-dsu-ta tse-he-xo-dse kshe non a', a bin da, (si ga,
30. Zhin'-ga we-ki-k'on the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
31. Tse'-xi a-shi-be a-thin he no" in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
32. Wa'-pa-hi on-bo-zha-zha-ga bi a-thin he shki don a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
33. Xthi' bi u-thi-?on-ha a-thin-he shki don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
34. Tse'-xi a-shi-be a-thin he non in da', a biQ da, tsi ga,
35. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga on-tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
36. Tse'-xi ga-shi-be ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, (si ga,
37. Hon'-ba u-pa-ki-ba do-ba, a bin da, tsi ga,
38. U'-hi a-ki-the a-thin he non in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
39. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga oa-tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
40. Hon'-ba u-ca-ki-ba do-ba', a-bin da, tsi ga,
41. U'-hi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
42. U'-non tha bi do" shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
43. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
44. He'-dsi xtsi a', a biB da, tsi ga,
45. Hon'-a-don we-ki-k'on tha bi go" non shki a, hin a', a bin da, tsi ga?
46. Zhin'-ga wa-dsu-ta i-hi-thon-be the mon-thin ta i-tsin da', a bin da,
tsi ga,
47. Wa'-dsu-ta i-hi-thon-be the mon-thin bi doQ shki a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
48. Wa'-dsu-ta gi-hi-thon-be mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
49. Ta'-shka-hi ton no" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
50. lu'-dse mon-no°-to-ba bi thin-kshe non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
51. Wa'-dsu-ta zhin-ga a-gi-shka-de pa-xe in-da', a bin da', tsi ga,
52. Zhin'-ga wa-dsu-ta i-hi-thon-be tha bi don shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
53. Wa'-dsu-ta gi-hi-thon-be mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
54. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
55. Zhiu'-dse-hi ton non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
56. lu'-dse mon-non-to-ba bi thin-kshe non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
57. Wa'-dsu-ta zhin-ga a-gi-shka-de pa-xe in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
58. Zhin'-ga wa-dsu-ta i-hi-thon-be tha bi don shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
59. Wa'-dsu-ta gi-hi-thon-be mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
60. Pi'-pi-stse-dse hi ton no" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
61. lu'-dse thin-kshe mon-non-to-ba bi thin-kshe non a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
62. Wa'-dsu-ta zhin-ga a-gi-shka-de pa-xe in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
63. Zhin'-ga wa-dsu-ta i-hi-thon-be tha bi don shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
64. Wa'-dsu-ta gi-hi-thon-be mon-thin ta i tsi° da', a bin da, tsi ga,
65. Pi'-ci-xo-dse hi ton non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
66. lu'-dse thin-kshe mon-non-to-ba bi thin-kshe no" a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
LAFLESCHE] TRIBAL, RITES OSAGE LANGUAGE 321
67. Wa'-dsu-ta zhi°-ga a-gi-shka-de pa-xe in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
68. Zhin'-ga wa-dsu-ta i-hi-thon-be tha bi do" shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
69. Wa'-dsu-ta gi-hi-thom-be mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
70. Zhon'-£a-ki-ba hi ton no" a', a bin da, (si ga,
71. lu'-dse thin-kshe mo°-non-to-ba bi thin-kshe no" a', a bi" da,
tsi ga,
72. Wa'-dsu-ta zhin-ga a-gi-shka-de pa-xe iQ da', a bin da, tsi ga,
73. Wa'-dsu-ta gi-hi-thon-be mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
74. Pi'-fi-sha-be hi ton no" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
75. lu'-dse thin-kshe mon-non-to-ba bi thin-kshe no" a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
76. Wa'-dsu-ta zhin-ga a-gi-shka-de pa-xe in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
77. Pi'-<?i-sha-be hi win a', a bin da, tsi ga,
78. Gi'-ta-pe mon-thin bi don shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
79. Wa'-dsu-ta gi-hi-thon-be mon-thin ta i-tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
80. Pa'-xpe tse-shka to" noQ a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
81. lu'-dse thin-kshe mon-noQ-to-ba bi thin-kshe non a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
82. Wa'-dsu-ta zhin-ga a-gi-shka-de pa-xe in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
83. Pa'-xpe win a, a bin da, tsi ga,
84. Gi'-ta-pe mon-thin bi do" shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
85. Wa'-dsu-ta gi-hi-thon-be mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
86. Ga' thin-kshe shki a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
87. Wa'-thin-e-9ka she-mon mon-zhi in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
88. Ho'-e-ga i-non-a-the in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
89. Ho'-e-ga tha bi do" shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
90. Wa'-dsu-ta gi-hi-thon-be mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bi° da, tsi ga,
91. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
92. Xa'-dse ba-tse ga thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
93. E'shki wa-thin-e-cka zhi in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
94. Xa'-dse ba-tse win gi-ta-pe mon-thin bi don shki a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
95. Wa'-dsu-ta gi-hi-thon-be mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
96. U'-ga-con-thin xtsi thin-ge a', a bin da, tsi ga,
97. Wa'-dsu-ta gi-hi-thon-be mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
98. U'-pa-pe thon dsi shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
99. Wa'-dsu-ta gi-hi-thon-be mon-thin ta i tsi" da', a bin da, tsi ga,
100. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga on-tha bi do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
101. Hon'-ga, a bin da, tsi ga,
102. Tsi'-zhu e-thon-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
103. Wa'-dsu-ta gi-hi-thon-be mon-thin ta i tsi" da', a bi" da, tai ga.
2786—21 21
322 THE OSAGE TRIBE [BTH. ANN. 36
E-NON/ MIN-DSE ToN GENS
(Free translation, p. 98; literal translation, p. 484)
1. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
2. Wa'-zha-zhe u-dse-the pe-thon-ba ni-ka-shi-ga ba don a', a bin
da, tsi ga,
3. Wa'-zha-zhe E-non-Min-dse Ton thin-kshe no" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
4. Ha' ! Wa-zha-zhe', e-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
5. We'-ki-k'on thon-tse thin-ge a-tha, Wa-zha-zhe', e-gi-a bi a', a
bin da, tsi ga,
6. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
7. We'-ki-k'on thoMse thin-ge e-she don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
8. We'-ki-k'on thon-tse mi-kshe in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
9. Niu'-i-xa-xa xtsi ge dsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
10. A-ni'-ka-shi-ga mi-kshe in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
11. Ni' zhu-i-ga the xtsi a-ni-ka-shi-ga mi-kshe in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
12. Ni thi'-u-ba-he i-sdu-ge ga kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
13. Thi'-u-ba-he a-gi-the a-thin he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
14. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga on-tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
15. Ni thi'-u-ba-he i-sdu-ge ga-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
16. Thi'-u-ba-he gi-the mon-thin bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
17. Thi'-u-ba-he i-ts'a thin-ge ki-the mon-thin ta i-tsin da', a bin da,
tsi ga, t
18. Thi'-u-ba-he tha-ta ga kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
19. Thi'-u-ba-he a-gi-the a-thin he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
20. Thi'-u-ba-he gi-the mon-thin bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
21. Thi'-u-ba-he i-ts'a thin-ge ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da,
tsi ga,
22. Ni'-u-thu-ga ga kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
23. Thiu'-thi xthu-k'a a-gi-the a-thin he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
24. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga on-tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
25. Thi-u'-thi-xthu-k'a i-ts'a thin-ge ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a
bin da, tsi ga,
26. Wa'-dsu-ta win zhu-i-ga a- the a-thi" he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
27. Ho' zhu-dse kshe non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
28. Zhu'-i-ga a-the a-thin he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
29. I'-ts'a thin-ge a-thin he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
30. Zhu'-i-ga the mon-thin bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
31. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
32. Ho' ca-be ga kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
33. Zhu'-i-ga a-the a-thin he i" da', a bin da, tsi ga,
34. Zhu'-i-ga the mon-thin bi do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
35. U'-non a bi i the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da', tsi ga,
LATLBSCHE] TRIBAL RITES — OSAGE LANGUAGE 323
36. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
37. To'-shnon-ge kshe non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
38. E'-shki don zhu-i-ga a-the a-thin he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
39. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
40. U'-no" a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
41. Tsi'-zhu a', a bin da, tsi ga,
42. Hon'-ga e-thon-ba, a bi" da, (si ga,
43. Zhu'-i-ga the mon-thin bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
44. I'-ts'a thin-ge mon-thin ta i tsin da, a bin da, tsi ga,
45. Zha'-be do-ga kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
46. Zhu'-i-ga the xtsi a-ni-ka-shi-ga in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
47. Zhu'-i-ga the mon-thin bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
48. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
49. Thiu'-xe zhin-ga pe-thon-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
50. Tsi'-u-ba-he i'-sdu-ge dsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
51. Tha'-xu-e gthi i-he-the to" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
52. Ga' tse shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
53. Wa'-we-a-ga-ckon-the a-ton he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
54. O'-don e-shnon bi no" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
55. I'-tha-ga-ckon-the xtsi a-ni-ka-shi-ga a-ton he in da', a bin da
tsi ga,
56. Ni' ki-mon-hon dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
57. Ba'-btha-btha-xe zho" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
58. Ni' a-ki-tha-zha-ta ga kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
59. U'-non pa-xe in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
60. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
61. Wa'-kon-da a-ki-tha-zha-ta bi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsi° da', a bin
da, tsi ga,
62. (^in'-dse ni i-ga-po-ki on-ha the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
63. Ga' tse shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
64. Wa'-thin-e-cka a-po-ki mon-zhi i° da', a bin da, tsi ga,
65. Mi'hi-e ge ta', a bin da, tsi ga,
66. Wa'-a-ga-po-ki the a-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
67. Ni'-u-ba-shon we-tho"-ba thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
68. Thiu'-xe- ts'a-zhi hon' fka don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
69. Tha'-xu-e gthi i-he-the to" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
70. Zhin'-ga we-tha-wa mon-thin bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
71. O'-don gi-tsi-fa ki-the mon-thin ta i tsi" da', a bin da, tsi ga,
72. He-dsi xtsi a, a bin da, tsi ga,
73. Ni'-u-ga-xthi we-tha-bthi" thin-kshe dsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
74. Thiu'-xe- ts'a-zhi ho"' pka don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
75. Tha'-xu-e gthi i-he-the to" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
76. Zhin'-ga we-tha-wa mon-thin bi do" shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
77. O'-don gi-tsi-ca ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bi" da, tsi ga,
324 THE OSAGE TRIBE [BTH. ANN. 36
78. Ni'-u-ba-shon we-do-ba thin-kshe dsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
79. Thiu'-xe-ts'a-zhi hon/ pka don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
80. Tha'-xu-e gthi i-he-the ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
81. Zhin'-ga we-tha-wa mon-thin bi don shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
82. O'-don gi-tsi-ca ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
83. Ni'-u-ba-shon we-ca-ton thin-kshe dsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
84. Thiu'-xe-ts'a-zhi hon' fka don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
85. Tha'-xu-e gthi i-he-the to" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
86. Zhin'-ga we-tha-wa mon-thin bi don shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
87. O'-don gi-tsi-ca ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
88. Ni'-u-ba-shon we-sha-pe thiMcshe dsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
89. Thiu'-xe ts'a-zhi hon ?ka do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
90. Tha'-xu-e gthi i-he-the ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
91. Zhin'-ga we-tha-wa moD-thin bi don shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
92. O'-don gi-tsi-?a ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
93. Ni'-u-ba-shon we-p.e-thon-ba thin-kshe dsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
94. Thiu'-xe-ts'a-zhi hon cka don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
95. Tha'-xu-e gthi i-he-the ton a', a bi° da, tsi ga
96. Ga'-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
97. Zhin'-ga we-tha-wa mon-thin bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
98. O'-don gi-tsi-ca ki-the mon-thin ta i tsi" da', a bin da, tsi ga.
(Free translation, p. 102; literal translation, p. 487)
1. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga
2. Hon'-ga U-ta-non-dsi thin-kshe non a', a bi° da, tsi ga,
3. Ha' ! wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
4. We'-ki-k'on thon-tse thin-ge a-tha, wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-a bi a', a
bin da, tsi ga,
5. Ha'! zhin-ga e', e-tsi-the a', a bin da, (si ga,
6. We'-ki-k'on thon-tse thin-ge e-she do" a', a bia da, tsi ga,
7. We'-ki-k'on thon-tse mi-kshe in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
8. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
9. Tsi'-zhin-ga win i-tse-the ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
10. Wa'-thin-e-9ka i-tse-a-tha mon-zhi in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
11. Wa'-dsu-ta pa u-thi-xon i-tse-the in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
12. Wa'-thin-e-$ka i-tse-a-tha mon zhi in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
13. Tse'-xo-be wa-ga-xe in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
14. I'-tha-thu-fe xtsi i-tse-a-the in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
15. Wa'-dsu-ta be zhin-ga i-ta i shki don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
16. U-ki'-on-the mon-thin ta i tsi" da', a bin da, tsi ga,
17. Zhin'-ga wa-dsu-ta i-hi-thon-be tha bi do" shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
LAFLKSCHE] TRIBAL, RITES OSAGE LANGUAGE 325
18. U'-ga-con-thin xtsi thin-ge a', a bin da, tsi ga,
19. Wa'-dsu-ta gi-hi-thon-be mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
20. U'-pa-ce thon dsi shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
21. Wa'-dsu-ta gi-hi-thon-be mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
22. Wa'-dsu-ta wa-non kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
23. Ga' kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
24. Wa'-dsu-ta i-hi-thon-be the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
25. Wa'-dsu-ta wa-bin a', a bin da, tsi ga,
26. U'-ga-con-thin xtsi thin-ge a', a bin da, tsi ga,
27. Wa'-bi" gi-tse-ga ki-the mon-thin \& bin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
28. U'-pa-^e thon dsi shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
29. Wa'-dsu-ta wa-bi" i-gi-tse-ga mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
30. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
31. We'-ki-k'on thon-tse ga non-non-zhi da', a bin da, tsi ga,
32. We'-ts' a-da-pa kshe no" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
33. Zhin'-ga we-ki-k'o" the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
34. Xa'-dse ba-tse xtsi ge dsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
35. Pa' thi-ho" tsi-the don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
36. Zhin'-ga wa-non-xe i-thi-shton kshe shki don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
37. On'-thon-ki-pa-non-xe cka mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
38. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga o"-tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
39. Hon'-ba u-ca-ki-ba do-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
40. U'-hi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
41. Hon'-a-don we-ki-k'on tha bi gon non shki a', hin a', a bia da, tsi ga,
42. We'-ts'a-ci-ci-e stse-dse kshe non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
43. Zhin'-ga we-ki-k'on the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
44. Xa'-dse xtsi ge dsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
45. Pa' thi-ho" tsi-the kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
46. Ga' kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
47. We'-ki-k'o" the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
48. Zhin'-ga wa-non-xe i-thi-shto" shki do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
49. On'-thon-non-xe cka mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
50. Hon'-ba u-ca-ki-ba do-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
51. U'-hi-ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
52. Hon'-a-dcn we-ki-k'on tha bi gon non shki a, hi" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
53. We'-ts'a ca-be kshe no" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
54. Zhin'-ga we-ki-k'on the mon-thin ta i tain da', a bin da, tsi ga,
55. Xa'-dse xtsi ge dsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
56. Pa' thi-hon tsi-the kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
57. Ga' kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
58. Zhin'-ga wa-non-xe i-thi-shton xtsi bi shki do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
326 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANX. 36
59. On'-thon-non-xe cka mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da tsi ga,
60. Hon'-ba u-pa-ki-ba do-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
61. U'-hi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
62. Hon'-a-don we-ki-k'on tha bi gon no" shki a, hi" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
63. We'-ts'a-ton-ga kshe non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
64. Xa'-dse xtsi ge dsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
65. (^u'-the tsi-gthe kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
66. Ga' kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
67. Zhin'-ga wa-non-xe i-thi-shton bi shki do" a', a bin da, (si ga,
68. On'-thon-ki-gthi-non-xe ?ka mon-thin ta i tsi" da', a bin da, tsi ga,
69. We'-ts'a-ton-ga kshe non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
70. Thi'-xo-e on-ha-ha-e kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
71. U'-fi-gthe tse a', a bin da, tsi ga,
72. Thi'-k'a-xe on-ha-ha-e ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
73. Pa' u-gthe ta ha', a bin da, tsi ga,
74. Thi'-k'a-k'a-xe ton-a', a bin da, tsi ga,
75. Ta'-dse ga-xpa dsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
76. Thi'-k'a-k'a-xe ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
77. Ta'-dse mon-ha dsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
78. Thi'-k'a-k'a-xe ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
79. Ta'-dse ba-?on dsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
80. Thi'-k'a-k'a-xe ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
81. Zhin'-ga wa-non-xe i-thi-shton shki don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
82. O'-thon-non-xe ?ka mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
83. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga on-tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
84. Hon'-ba u-ca-ki-ba do-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
85. U'-hi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
86. Hon'-ba tha-gthin shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
87. U'-hi ki-the mon-thiQ ta i tsiQ da', a bin da, tsi ga.
HON'-GA A-HIU-TON GENS
(Free translation, p. 104; literal translation, p. 490)
1. He'-dsi xtsi a, a bin da, tsi ga,
2. Hon'-ga u-dse-the pe-thon-ba ni-ka-shi-ga ba don a', a bi" da,
tsiga,
3. Hon'-ga A-hiu-ton thin-kshe non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
4. Ha' ! wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
5. Zhin'-ga we-ki-k'on tha ba thon tse thin-ge a-tha, wi-tsi-go e',
e-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
6. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
7. We'-ki-k'on thon tse thin-ge' e-she doD a', a bia da, tsi ga,
8. We'-ki-k'on thon-tse mi-kshe in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
9. Wa'-zhin-ga wa-tha-xthi thin-ge'thin-kshe no" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
LAPLISCHE] TRIBAL KITES — OSAGE LANGUAGE 327
10. Zhu'-i-ga the xtsi a-ni-ka-shi-ga mi-kshe i" da', a bin da, tsi ga,
11. Wa'-kon-da u-ton-ba bi mi-kshe in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
12. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga on-tha bi do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
13. Wa'-kon-da u-ton-ba bi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
14. U'-non on-gi-tha ba thon-tse mi-kshe in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
15. £i'-ha ga thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
16. U'-non a-gi-the a-thin he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
17. Zhin'-ga u-non on-tha bi do" shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
18. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin (a i tsin da', a bin da, (si ga,
19. ^i'-ha u-sha-be ga thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
20. Non'-xthe a-gi-the a-thin he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
21. Zhin'-ga non-xthe gi-the mon-thin bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
22. Non'-xthe gi-a da-xe ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
23. Pa'-zhu-zhe i-ta-xe sha-be ga-thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, (si ga,
24. Non'-xthe a-gi-the a-thin he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
25. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga on-tha bi do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
26. Non'-xthe gi-a-da-xe ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
27. Zhu'-i-ga ca-be ga kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
28. Non'-xthe a-gi-the a-thin he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
29. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga on-tha bi don a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
30. Non'-xthe gi-a-da-xe ki-the mon-thin ta i tsi" da', a bi° da, tsi ga,
31. In'-be i-ta-xe sha-be ga thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
32. Non'-xthe a-gi-the a-thin he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
33. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga on-tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
34. NoD'-xthe gi-a-da-xe ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
WA-PA'-BE-TON (BLACK BEAR) GENS
(Free translation, p. 105; literal translation, p. 491)
1. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bi° da, tsi ga,
2. Hon'-ga u-dse-the pe-thon-ba ni-ka-shi-ga ba don a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
3. Wa'-pa-be-ton thin-kshe non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
4. Ha' ! wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
5. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga tha bi thin-ge a-tha, wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-a bi a',
a bin da, tsi ga,
6. Ha' ! zhin-ga e', e-tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
7. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga tha bi thin-ge' e-she do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
8. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga on-tha ba thon-tse mi-kshe in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
9. Non'-xthe on-gi-tha ba thon-tse mi-kshe in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
10. pi'-ha u-sha-be ga thin-kshe shki a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
11. Non'-xthe a-gi-the a-thi" he i" da', a bin da, tsi ga,
328 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
12. Pa'-zhu-zhe i-ta-xe sha-be ga thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
13. Non'-xthe a-gi-the a-thin-he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
14. Zhin'-ga non-xthe gi-the mon-thin bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
15. Non/-xthe gi-a-da-xe ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
16. Zhu'-i-ga pa-be ga ge shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
17. Non'-xthe a-gi-the a-thin he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
18. Non'-xthe gi-the mon-thin bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
19. Non'-xthe gi-a-da-xe ki-the mon-thin ta i tsiD da', a bin da, tsi ga.
20. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
21. Ha' ! wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
22. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga-tha bi thin-ge a-tha, wi-tsi-go e', a-gi-a bi a', a
bin da, tsi ga,
23. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga on-tha ba thon-tse mi-kshe in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
24. In'-gthon-ga do-ga kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
25. Zhu'-i-ga the xtsi a-ni-ka-shi-ga mi-kshe in da, a bin da, tsi ga,
26. Wa'-kon-da hon-ba don thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
27. Zhu'-i-ga the xtsi a-ni-ka-shi-ga mi-kshe in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
28. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
29. ^i'-ha u-sha-be ga thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
30. Non'-xthe a-gi-the a-thin he i" da', a bin da, tsi ga,
31. Zhin'-ga non-xthe gi-the mo°-thin bi don shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
32. Non'-xthe gi-a-da-xe ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga.
33. Pa'-zhu-zhe sha-be ga thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
34. Non'-xthe a-gi-the a-thin he i" da', a bin da, tsi ga,
35. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga on-tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
36. Non'-xthe gi-a-da-xe ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga.
37. Non'-ta i-ta-xe sha-be ga thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
38. Non'-xthe a-gi-the a-thin he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
39. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga on-tha bi don a', a bi° da, tsi ga,
40. Non'-xthe gi-a-da-xe ki-the mon-thin ta i tsi" da', a bin da, tsi ga,
41. £in'-dse i-ta-xe sha-be ga thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
42. Non'-xthe a-gi-the a-thin he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
43. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga on-tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
44. Non'-xthe gi-a-da-xe ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
45. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
46. Mi'-xa-cka ton-ga thin-kshe non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
47. Ha' ! wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
48. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga tha bi thin-ge a-tha, wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-a bi a',
a bin da tsi ga,
49. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
50. pi'-ha u-sha-be ga thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
LAFLESCHK] TRIBAL, KITES- — OSAGE LANGUAGE 329
51. Non'-xthe a-gi-the a-thin he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
52. Zhin'-ga non-xthe gi-the mon-thin bi do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
53. Non'-xthe gi-a-da-xe ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
54. Pa'-zhu-zhe i-ta-xe sha-be ga thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
55. Xon'-xthe a-gi-the a-thin he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
56. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga on-tha bi do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
57. Non'-xthe gi-a-da-xe ki-the mon-thi11 ta i tsin da, a bin da, tsi ga,
58. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga on-tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
59. Hon'-ba he-be a', a bi° da, tsi ga,
60. Dse'-don go-da kon-ha dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
61. Ga-ha'-ha a-hi-gthin a-thin-he non in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
62. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga on-tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
63. A'-hiu-ha ?a-gi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
64. Wa'-dsu-ta shon-e-gon bi do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
65. Ni' on-won-ta-thin bi a-thin he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
66. Zhin/-ga zhu-i-ga on-tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
67. Wa'-dsu-ta shon-e-gon xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
68. Ni' u-ta-thin bi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da, a bin da, tsi ga.
I^GTHO^'-GA GENS
(Free translation, p. 107; liters'! translation, p. 493)
1. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
2. Hon'-ga u-dse-the pe-thon-ba ni-ka-shi-ga ba don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
3. In'-gthon-ga zhu-i-ga the ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
4. Ha'! wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-a bi a', a bin, da, tsi ga,
5. We'-ki-k'on-thon-tse thin-ge a-tha, wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-a bi a', a bi"
da, tsi ga,
6. Ha' ! zhin-ga e', e-tsi-the a, a bin da, tsi ga,
7. We'-ki-k'on thoMse thin-ge e-she don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
8. We'-ki-k'on thon-tse a-ton he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
9. In'-gthon-ga do-ga kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
10. Zhu'-i-ga the xtsi a-ni-ka-shi-ga a-ton he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
11. Wa'-zhin on-won-ta-thin bi a-thin he in-da', a bin da, tsi ga,
12. Wa'-kon-da hon-ba don thi"-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
13. I'-bi-con-dse xtsi a-ni-ka-shi-ga in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
14. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga o"-tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
15. I'-ts' a thin-ge mo"-thin ta i tsi" da', a bin da, tsi ga,
16. 'In' zhu-dse thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
17. I'-tha-thu-pe xtsi a-ni-ka-shi-ga in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
18. 'P' zhu-dse thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
19. Wa'-kon-da e-shki don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
20. O'-ta-kshin bi a-thin he i" da', a bin da, tsi ga,
21. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga on-tha bi do" a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
330 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
22. A'-ta-kshin bi ki-the mo-n-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
23. Wa'-kon-da e-shki do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
24. On'-ki-tha-zha-ta bi a-thin he in-da', a bin da, tsi ga,
25. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga on-tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
26. Wa'-kon-da a-ki-tha-zha-ta bi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin
da, tsi ga,
27. Wa'-kon-da e-shki do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
28. In'-dse on-won-kia-ta thin-ge in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
29. Zhin/-ga zhu-i-ga on-tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
30. Wa'-kon-da e-shki don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
31. In'-dse u-kia-ta ba zhi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsi" da', a bin da, tsi ga,
32. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
33. Wa'-pa-be u-ga-ka thin-ge kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
34. Zhu'-i-ga the xtsi a-ni-ka-shi-ga in-da', a bin da, tsi ga,
35. Wa'-kon-da hon don thiQ-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
36. I'-tha-thu-pe xtsi a-ni-ka-shi-ga in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
37. 'In/ ca-be thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
38. I'-bi-£On-dse xtsi a-ni-ka-shi-ga in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
39. 'I" pa-be thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
40. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga the mon-thin bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
41. Wa'-kon-da e-shki don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
42. A'-ta-kshin bi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
43. Wa'-kon-da e-shki don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
44. O°'-ki-tha-zha-ta bi a-thin he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
45. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga on-tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
46. Wa'-kon-da e-shki don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
47. A'-ki-tha-zha-ta bi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
48. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
49. Mi'-xa-cka t<>n-ga thin-kshe non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
50. Zhu'-i-ga the xtsi a-ni-ka-shi-ga in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
51. Wa'-kon-da hon-don thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
52. Zhu'-i-ga the xtsi a-ni-ka-shi-ga in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
53. 'P'-zhu-pka thin-kshe non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
54. Zhu'- i-ga the xtsi a-ni-ka-shi-ga in da, a biu da, tsi ga,
55. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga on-tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
56. Wa'-kon-da e-shki don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
57. A'-ta-kshin bi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bi" da, tsi ga,
58. Wa'-kon-da e-shki do" a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
59. On'-ki-tha-zha-ta bi a-thi" he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
60. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga on-tha bi don a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
61. Wa'-kon-da e-shki don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
62. A'-ki-tha-zha-ta bi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin/ da, tsi ga,
I,* FLBSCHB] TRIBAL RITES OSAGE LANGUAGE 331
63. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
64. O'-pxo11 do-ga kshe no" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
65. 'In'-zhu-ci thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
66. I'-tha-thu-^e xtsi a-ni-ka-shi-ga i" da', a bin da, tsi ga,
67. Wa'-tse mi-ga thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
68. I'-tha-thu-ce xtsi a-ni-ka-shi-ga i" da', a bin da, tsi ga,
69. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga o°-tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
70. Wa'-kon-da e-shki do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
71. A'-ta-kshin bi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
72. Wa'-kon-da e-shki do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
73. O'-ki-tha-zha-ta bi a-thin he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
74. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga on-tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
75. Wa'-kon-da e-shki do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
76. A'-ki-tha-zha-ta bi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
77. Wa'-kon-da e-shki don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
78. Be' hi on-gtha mon-zhi in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
79. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga on-tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
80. Be' hi a-gtha ba zhi ki-the mon-thia ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
81. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
82. Wa'-kon-da e-shki do" a', a bia da, tsi ga,
83. In'-dse on-won-kia-ta thin-ge in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
84. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga on-tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
85. Wa'-kon-da e-shki don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
86. In'-dse u-kia-ta ba zhi ki-the mo"-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
87. Ts'e' wa-tse-xi mi-kshe in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
88. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga on-tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
89. Ts'e' wa-tse-xi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bi° da, tsi ga,
90. Hon'-ba u-ca-ki-ba do-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
91. U'-hi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
92. Wa'-zha-zhe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
93. Tsi'- zhu e-thon-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
94. Zhu'-i-ga on-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
95. Zhu'-i-ga on-the mon-thi" bi do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
96. Ts'e' wa-tse-xi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
97. Be' hi a-gtha ba zhi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
98. U'-non a bi shki i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsi" da, a bin da, tsi ga,
99. Hon'-ba u-ca-ki-ba do-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
100. U'-hi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga.
101. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
102. Hon'-ga u-dse-the pe-tho°-ba ni-ka-shi-ga ba do" a', a bi" da,
tsiga,
103. In'-gthon-ga zhu-i-ga the to" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
104. Ha' ! wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
332 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 38
105. We'-ki-k'o" tho"-tse thi"-ge a-tha, wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-a bi a', a bi"
da, tsi ga,
106. E'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
107. We'-ki-k'o" thon-tse thin-ge e-she don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
108. O'-to"-be pa-xe ta mi-kshe, e'-tsi-the a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
109. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
110. Thu-e' xtsi fi-thu-ce the don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
111. Dse' ko"-ha dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
112. £i"' thin-kshe no" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
113. O'-ga-to°-tha tsi-the ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
114. E'-dsi xtsi a-thin gthi-e don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
115. The' hon, wi-zhiE-the, e a'-gthi noQ-zhi° a', a bin da, tsi ga,
116. I'-u-tha-btho"-ce a-tsi-a-tha ba don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
117. Non'-bthe thon-ta zhi a, wi-fOn-ga, e'-gi-a bi a', a bi" da, tsiga,
118. E'-zhi-zhi-cka u-to"-ga, wi-po"-ga, e-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
119. E thon-zha', a bin da, tsi ga,
120. We'-ki-k'o" on-the o"-mo°-thi" ta i tse a', wi-con-ga, e'-gi-a bi
a', a bin da, tsi ga,
121. Thu-e' xtsi $i-thu-ce the don a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
122. Dse' u-cko"-9ka dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
123. Tse'-wa-the kshe non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
124. Non'-ci-ge tsi-the ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
125. E'-dsi xtsi a-thin gi e don a', a bin do, tsi ga,
126. The hon/, wi-zhin-the, e-a-gthi-non-zhin ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
127. I'-u-tha-bthon-ce a-tsi-a-tha ba don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
128. Ba'-ce-ni e-gon tha-dsu-zhe the-tha bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
129. Zhin'-ga non-bthe tha ba tho"-tse a, wi-con-ga, e'-gi-a bi a', a bi"
da, tsi ga,
130. We'-ki-k'on tho°-tse a-ka, wi-con-ga, e'-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
131. Zhin'-ga non-bthe the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
132. Wa'-zha-zhe a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
133. Tsi'-zhu e-thon-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
134. Non'-bthe the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
135. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
136. Wa'-dsu-ta shin-to-zhin-ga kshe a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
137. E'-ki-tho"-ba xtsi on-ga-xe ta bi a', wi-con-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a
bin da, tsi ga,
138. Zhin'-ga non-bthe the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
139. Non'-bthe the mon-thin bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
140. A'-dsu-ta i-ga-pi-ge ki-the mon-thin ta i tsi" da', a bi" da, (si ga,
LA FLESOHE] TRIBAL RITES OSAGE LANGUAGE 333
141. Dse' go-da kon-ha dsi xtsi a', a bin da, (si ga,
142. Do' thin-kshe no" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
143. U'-ga-ton-tha a-tsi-a-tha ba don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
144. He'-dsi xtsi a-thin gi-e do" a', a bin da, (si ga,
145. She' e shnon u-tha-dse tha-thin-she a', wi-con-ga, e'-gi-a bi a',
a bin da, (si ga,
146. Ba'-pe-ni e-gon tha-dsu-zhe the-tha bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
147. Zhin'-ga non-bthe the mon-thin (a i tsin da', a bin da, (si ga,
148. Zhin'-ga non-bthe the mon-thin bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
149. A'-dsu-ta i-ga-pi-ge ki-the mon-thin (a i tsin da', a bin da, (si ga,
150. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
151. Ta he sha-be kshe non a', a bin da, tsi.ga,
152. I'-tha-thu-fe on-ga-xe (a bi a', wi-con-ga, e-ki-a bi a', a bin da,
tsiga,
153. I'-tha-thu-ce on-ga-xa bi don a', a bin da, (si ga,
154. Wa'-zha-zhe a', a bin da, (si ga,
155. Tsi'-zhu e-thon-ba', a bin da, (si ga,
156. Non'-bthe the mon-thin (a i tsin da', a bin da, (si ga,
157. Non'-bthe the mon-thinbi don a', a bi" da, (si ga,
158. A'-dsu-ta i-ga-ci-ge ki-the mon-thin (a i tsin da', a bin da, (si ga,
159. Non'-bthe the mon-thin bi do" a', a bin da, (si ga,
160. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsiQ da, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin
da, (si ga.
161. Dse' go-da kon-ha dsi xtsi a', a bin da, (si ga,
162. U'-pu u-gthon xtsi ge dsi a', a bin da, (si ga,
163. Hon'-bthi-pu thin-kshe no" a', a bin da, (si ga,
164. U'-ga-(on-tha a-tsi-a-tha bi a', a bin da, (si ga,
165. Ga' thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, (si ga,
166. Non'-bthe the mon-thin (a i tsin da', a bin da, (si ga,
167. Zhin-ga non-bthe the mon-thin bi do" a', a bin da, (si ga,
168. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin (a i tsin da', a bin da, (si ga,
169. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, (si ga,
170. £!iu'-ka ton-ga thin-kshe non a', a bin da, (si ga,
171. I'-tha-thu-fe on-ga-xe (a bi a', wi-con-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da,
(siga,
172. Zhin'-ga non-bthe tha bi don shki a', a bin da, (si ga,
173. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thiu (a i tsin da', a bi" da, (si ga,
174. Wa'-zha-zhe a', a bin da, (si ga,
175. Tsi'-zhu e-thon-ba', a bi" da, (si ga,
176. No"'-bthe the mon-thin bi don shki a', a bin da, (si ga,
177. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin (a i tsin da', a bin da, (si ga,
178. Hon'-ba u-pa-ki-ba do-ba', a bin da, (si ga,
179. U'-hi ki-the mon-thin (a i tsin da', a bin da, (si ga.
334 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 30
O'-PXON (ELK) GENS
(Free translation, p. 112; literal translation, p. 497)
1. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
2. Hon/-ga u-dse-the pe-thon-ba ni-ka-shi-ga ba don a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
3. In'-gthon-ga zhu-i-ga the ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
4. Ha' ! wi-c on-ga, e'-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
5. We'-ki-k'on thon-tse thin-ge a-tha, wi-£On-ga, e'-gi-a bi a', a bi" da,
tsi ga,
6. Thu-e' xtsi ci-thu-$e the do" a', a bi° da, tsi ga,
7. O'-pxon do-ga ton non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
8. Tho' to" hi non-zhin bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
9. Tho-e' xtsi gi e don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
10. Ha' ! wi-fo^-ga, e-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
11. Ni'-ka win e-dsi a-ka, wi-zhin-the, e' a-gthi non-zhin a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
12. Ha' ! wi-con-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, (si ga,
13. Ni'-ka be' the shki do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
14. Wa'-non-xe a-dsi the on-the ta bi a', wi-con-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a bi"
da, tsi ga,
15. E'-ta pa mon-gthe xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
16. We-a'-ba-cu i-u'-gtha-zhu-zhu-the tsi-the thin-kshe a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
17. Thu-e' xtsi ci-thu-fa ba don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
18. O'-pxon do-ga ton non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
19. E'-ta pa mon-gthe xtsi hi non-zhin ba do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
20. Ha' ! wi-zhin-the, e'-tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
21. Hon'-ga bthin a, wi-zhin-the, e' ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
22. O'-pxon-ton-ga wi a-ton he a', wi-zhin-the e ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
23. E'-dsi zhi the thin-ge xtsi a-ni-ka-shi-ga', wi-zhin-the, e' ton a', a
bin da, tsi ga,
24. We'-ki-k'on thoMse a-ton he a', wi-zhiD-the, e' ton a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
25. O'-pxon-ton-ga shki a', a bin da,tsi ga,
26. Zha'-zhe a-ki-ton a-ton he a', wi-zhin-the, e' to" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
27. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
28. We'-ki-k'on thon-tse a-ton he in da', a bin da, (si ga,
29. Zhin-ga wa-dsu-ta i-hi-thon-be on-tha bi don shki a', a bi" da,
tsi ga,
30. Wa'-dsu-ta gi-hi-thon-be mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
31. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
32. U'-k'on tsi-the to" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
33. Ta'-dse e-non-ha', a bin da, tsi ga,
34. Mon'-ki-cin-dse tsi-the to" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
LATLESCHB] TRIBAL RITES — OSAGE LANGUAGE 335
35. Ta'-dse ga-xpa dsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
36. Mon'-ki-fin-dse tsi-the ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
37. Hon'-ba tha-gthin i-he-the ton a', a bin da, (si ga,
38. Ta-dse ba-fOn dsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
39. Mon'-ki-cin-dse tsi-the do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
40. Mon'-xe ha-xpa-the tse e-gon i-he-the to" a', a bin da, tsi ga.
41. Ta'-dse mo°-ha dsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
42. Mon'-ki-cin-dse tsi-the don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
43. Wa'-kon-da', a bin da, tsi ga,
44. U'-xthi thin-ge i-he-the ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
45. Ta'-dse a-k'a dsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
46. Mon'-ki-$in-dse tsi-the do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
47. Mon'-zhon shon-e-gon xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
48. U'-xthi thi°-ge i-he-the to" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
49. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
50. We'-ki-k'on thoMse a-ton he i" da', a bin da, tsi ga,
51. Mon'-ki-£in-dse tsi-the don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
52. Hin/ u-bi-bu-dse i-he-the ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
53. Ga' tse shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
54. Wa'-dsu-ta i-hi-thon-be pa-xe in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
55. Xa'-dse win a', a bin da, tsi ga,
56. Wa'-dsu-ta i-hi-thon-be wi-kchi-xe in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
57. Zhin'-ga wa-dsu-ta gi-hi-thon-be mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da,
tsi ga.
58. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
59. Mon'-ki-cin-dse tsi-the do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
60. Go'-da pa-gthe i-non-zhin to" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
61. Ni'-dse ta-be ga thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
62. Ton'-dse da-pa e' non bi non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
63. Shon/ xtsi pa-xe in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
64. Ton'-dse win wa-dsu-ta gi-hi-thon-be mon-thin t& i tsin da', a bi"
da, tsi ga,
65. Thi'-u-ba-he i-sdu-ge ga kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
66. Ton'-dse e no" bi no" a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
67. Shon/ xtsi pa-xe i" da', a bin da, tsi ga,
68. Non'-ka on-he ga kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
69. A'-thin wi" she kshe e' no" bi no" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
70. Shon' xtsi pa-xe in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
71. A'-thin win gi-ta-pe mon-thin bi don shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
72. Wa'-dsu-ta gi-hi-thon-be mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
336 THE OSAGE TRIBE [BTH. ANN. 36
73. Ta'-hi u-k'a-be ga tse shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
74. A'-thin u-k'a-be e' non bi non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
75. Shon/ xtsi pa-xe in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
76. A'-thia u-k'a-be win gi-ta-pe mon-thin bi don shki a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
77. Wa'-dsu-ta gi-hi-thon-be mon-thin ta i tsin da', a biQ da, tsi ga,
78. Pa pa-pi ga tse shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
79. A'-thin pa-pi win she tse e' non bi non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
80. Shon/ xtsi pa-xe in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
81. A'-thin pa-pi win gi-ta-pe mon-thin bi don shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
82. A'-thin pa-pi win wa-dsu-ta gi-hi-thon-be mon-thin' ta i tsinda',
a bin da, tsi ga,
83. He' ga-xa u-dse ga thin-kshe, shki a bin da, tsi ga,
84. 'In' pa-ka e non bi no" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
85. 'In' pa-ka win wa-dsu-ta gi-hi-thon-be mon-thin ta i tsin da', abin
da, tsi ga,
86. He' ga-xa u-hon-ge ga kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
87. Ga'-xa zhin-ga wi" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
88. Wa'-dsu-ta gi-hi-thon-be mon-thin ta, i tsin da', a bin, da, tsi ga,
89. He' ga-xa u-wa-ton ga kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
90. Wa'-tsi-shka e' non bi non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
91. Wa'-tsi-shka win wa-dsu-ta gi-hi-thon-be mon-thin ta i tsin da',
a bi" da, (si ga,
92. He' ga-xa u-gthon-the ga kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
93. £on'-pan-ga win e non bi non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
94. Shon'xtsi pa-xe in-da', a bin da, tsi ga,
95. £on'-pon-ga win gi-ta-pe mon-thin bi do" shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
96. Wa'-dsu-ta gi-hi-thon-be mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
97. He' ga-xa u-gthon-the kshe shki a', a bin da, (si ga;
98. Ga'-xa gthon-the ga kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
99. Wa'-dsu-^a i-hi-thon-be pa-xe in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
100. Ga'-xa win gi-ta-pe mon-thin bi don shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
101. Wa'-dsu-ta gi-hi-thon-be mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bia da, tsi ga,
102. Zhin'-ga ta-bthe tha bi do" shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
103. U'-ga-pon-thin xtsi thin-ge a', a bin da, tsi ga,
104. Wa'-dsu-ta gi-hi-thon-be mon-thin ta i tsi" da', a bin da, tsi ga,
105. U'-pa-pe thon-dsi shki a', a bi' da, tsi ga,
106. Wa'-dsu-ta gi-hi-thon-be mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da tsi ga,
107. Wa'-zha-zhe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
108. Tsi-'zhu e-thon-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
109. We'-ki-k'on the moa-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga.
LA n-iscHE] TRIBAL RITES - OSAGE LANGUAGE 337
(Free translation, p. 116; literal translation, p. 502)
1. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
2. Hon'-ga u-dse-the pe-thon-ba ni-ka-shi-ga ba do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
3. In'-gthon-ga zhu-i-ga the to" non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
4. Ha' ! wi-?a"-ga, e-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
5. We'-ki-k'on thon-tse thin-ge a-tha, wi-9On-ga, e'-gi-a bi a', a bin
da, tsi ga,
6. Ga' xtsi hi tha i do" a', a bi° da, tsi ga,
7. Tse'-xe xtsi ge dsi a', a bi° da, tsi ga,
8. Ni'-ka win tho ton hi no°-zhin bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
9. Sha'-ge ba-ha to" hi non-zhin bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
10. E'-dsi xtsi gi-e don a, a bin da, tsi ga,
11. Wi'-90n-ga ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
12. O'-k'on xtsi a-gi a-ba, wi-£on-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
13. Ni'-ka win e-dsi a-ka, wi-zhi"-the, e'-a-gthi non-zhin a', a bi° da>
tsiga,
14. Ha' ! wi-fOn-ga, e-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
15. Ni'-ka win e-dsi a-ka, wi-zhia-the, e'-a-gthi-non-zhia toa a', a bi"
da, tsi ga,
16. Non'-be zha-ta ga-xe a-ka, wi-zhin-the, e' a-gthi-nan-zhin to" a',
a bin da, tsi ga,
17. Ha' ! wi-con-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
18. Ni'-ka be to" shki don a', a bin da, (si ga,
19. Wa'-non-xe a-dsi the on-the ta bi a', wi-con-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin
da, tsi ga,
20. E'-ta pa-mon-gthe xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
21. (^i'thu-fa ba don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
22. Ni'-ka win tho to" hi non-zhin bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
23. Non'-be zha-ta ga-xe no"-zhin ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
24. Ha' ! wi-9On-ga, e'-gi-a bi a', a bin da, (si ga,
25. Ni'-ka be tha ton she, e'-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
26. Hon'-ga bthin a, wi-zhin-the, e' toQ a', a bin da, tsi ga,
27. Mon'shkon wi a'-ton he a', wi-zhin-the, e ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
28. Mon'-thin-ka zhin-ga wi a'-ton he a', wi-zhin-the, e' to" a', a bi"
da, tsi ga,
29. Wi'-zhin-the, e' tsi-the a', a bin da, (si ga,
30. E'-dsi zhi the thin-ge a-ni-ka-shi-ga', wi-zhin-the, e' to" a', a bi°
da, tsi ga,
31. We'-ki-k'on a-ton he a', wi-zhin-the, e' to" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
32. We'-ki-k'on thon-tse a-to° he in da', a bi" da, tsi ga,
2786—21 - 22
THE OSAGE TEIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
33. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
34. Mon'-to-to-be hon'-pka don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
35. K'u'-shi kshi-gthe don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
36. Mon'-thin-ka sha-be thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
37. Ba'-ha tsi non-zhin ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
38. The', wi-zhin-the, e tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
39. We'-ki-k'on shka-xe tse a', wi-zhin-the, e' to" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
40. Thon'-dse ba-he e'-ton-ha no" shki don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
41. Da' i-sdu-ts'a-ga zhi tha thin-she ta tse a', wi-zhin-the, e' ton a', a
bin da, tsi ga,
42. We'-shnon wi-gi-the a-ton he a', wi-zhin-the, e' ton a', a bi" da,
tsi ga,
43. I'-tha-pi-thin xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
44. K'u'-shi kshi-gthe do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
45. Mon'-thin-ka to-ho thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
46. Ba'-ha tsi-non-zhin ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
47. The', wi-zhin-the, e' tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
48. We'-ki-k'on tha the tha thin-she ta tse a', wi-zhin-the, e' tsi-the
a', a bin da, tsi ga
49. We'-gon-tha a-ni tha thin-she don shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
50. Da' i-sdu-ts'a-ga zhi tha thin-she ta tse a', wi-zhin-the, e' tsi-the
a', a bin da, tsi ga,
51. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
52. We'-ki-k'on tha the tha thin-she ta tse a', wi-zhin-the, e' tsi-the
a', a bin da, tsi ga,
53. I'-tha-bthin on xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
54. K'u'-shi kshi-gthe don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
55. Mon-thin/-ka zhu-dse thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
56. Ba'-ha tsi non-zhin to" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
57. Ga' thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
58. We'-ki-k'on tha the tha thin-she ta tse a', wi-zhin-the, e' tsi-the
a', a bin da, tsi ga,
59. We'-mon-ka the thi'-o-ts'e-ga tha thin-she, ta tse a', wi-zhin-the,
e' tsi-the a, a bin da, tsi ga,
60. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
61. I'-do-ba on xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
62. K'u'-shi kshi-gthe don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
63. Mon-thin'-ka ?i thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
64. Ba'-ha tsi non-zhin ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
65. Ga' thi-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
66. We'-ki-k'on tha-the tha thin-she ta tse a', wi-zhin-the, e' ton a', a
bin da, tsi ga,
67. We'-ki-k'on tha-the tha thin-she do" shki a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
LAFLBSCHB] TRIBAL RITES — OSAGE LANGUAGE 339
68. Thon'-dse ba-he' e-tou-ha no" shki don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
69. Da' i-sdu-ts'a-ga zhi tha thi"-she ta tse a', wi-zhin-the, e' to" a', a
bin da, tsi ga,
70. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
71. Non'-be zha-ta ga tse a', a bin da, tsi ga,
72. E'shki do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
73. We'-ki-k'on tha-the tha thin-she ta tse a', wi-zhin-the, e' to" a', a
bin da, tsi ga,
74. Zhon/-xa zha-ta e' no" bi non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
75. Shon/ xtsi wi-kshi-the in da, wi-zhin-the, e' to" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
76. Mi'hi-e ge ta', a bin da, tsi ga,
77. We'-gon-tha a-ni tha thin-she don shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
78. Da' i-sdu-ts'a-ga zhi tha thin-she ta tse a', wi-zhin-the, e' to" a', a
bin da, tsi ga.
I'-BA-TSE TA-DSE GENS
(Free translation, p. US; literal translation, p. 504)
1. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
2. Ha' ! wi-pon-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
3. We'-ki-k'on thon-tse thin-ge a-tha, wi-pon-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin
da, tsi ga,
4. In'-gthon-ga zho-i-ga the ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
5. Thu-e' xtsi ci-thu-pe the don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
6. Tse'-xe xtsi ge dsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
7. Hon'-ga we-ha-ge to" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
8. Tho' ton hi non-zhi° bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
9. Ha' ! wi-zbin-the, e'-tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
10. Ni'-ka be tha-ton-she a', a bin da, tsi ga,
11. Hon'-ga Gthe-zhe wi a'-ton-he a', wi-zhin-the, e ton a', a bin da,
tsiga,
12. Hon'-ga bthin a', wi-zhin-the, e' to" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
13. We'-ki-k'on thon-tse a-ton-he a', wi-zhin-the, e' to" a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
14. We'-ki-k'on on-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
15. We'-kink'on on-the mon-thin bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
16. Wa'-zha-zhe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
17. Tsi'-zhu e-thon-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
18. We'-ki-k'on on-the mon-thin ta i tsi" da', a bin da, tsi ga,
19. We'-ki-k'on on-the mon-thin bi do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
20. Thon'-dse ba-he e-ton-ha no" shki do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
21. We'-ki-k'on gi-o-ts'e-ga ki-the mon-thin t» i tsi" da', a bi° da,
tsiga,
22. We'-shnon wi-gi-the a-ton-he a', wi-zhin-tlie, e ton a', a bin da,
tsiga.
340 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
TSl'-ZHU DIVISION
THE TSI'-ZHU WA-NQN GENS
(Free translation, p. 118; literal translation, p. 505)
1. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
2. Tsi'-zhu u-dse-the pe-thon-ba ni-ka-shi-ga ba don a', a bin da,
tsiga,
3. Tsi'-zhu Wa-no"-thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
4. Ha' ! wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
5. We'-ki-k'on thon-tse thin-ge a-tha, wi-tsi-go, e', e-gi-a bi a', a bin
da, tsi ga,
6. Ha'! zhin-ga, e-tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
7. We'-ki-k'on thon-tse thin-ge' e-she don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
8. We'-ki-k'on thon-tse mi-kshe in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
9. Wa'-kon-da Hon-ba don thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
10. Zhu'-i-ga the xtsi a-ni-ka-shi-ga mi-kshe in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
11. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga on-tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
12. Wa'-kon-da Hon-ba dou thi°-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
13. Zhu'-i-ga the xtsi ni-ka-shi-ga ki-the mon-thiQ ta i tsin da', a bin
da, tsi ga,
14. Zhu'-i-ga the mon-thin bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
15. I'-ts'a thin-ge mon-thin ta i tsia da', a bin da, tsi ga,
16. U'-non tha bi don shki a', a bia da, tsi ga,
17. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thiD ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
18. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
19. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga tha bi ga' non-zhiQ da', a bin da, tsi ga,
20. Wa'-kon-da Hon-don thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
21. Zhu'-i-ga the xtsi a-ni-ka-shi-ga mi-kshe in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
22. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga on-tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
23. Ts'e' wa-tse-xi mi-kshe in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
24. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga on-tha bi do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
25. Ts' e' wa-tse-xi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, (si ga,
26. Wa'-tse Do-ga thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
27. Ga' thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
28. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga the mon-thin ta i tsin-da', a bi" da, tsi ga,
29. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga tha bi don a', a biQ da, tsi ga,
30. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsi" da', a bin da, (si ga,
31. Wa'-tse Mi-ga thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
32. Ga' thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
33. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga the mon-thin bi don a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
34. Ts'e' wa-tse-xi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
35. U'-non tha bi doQ shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
36. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsiu da', a bin da, tsi ga,
L.AFLISCHI] TRIBAL, RITES — OSAGE LANGUAGE 341
37. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
38. Wa'-kon-da tse-ga xtsi e-thon-be hi non bi a', a bin da, (si ga,
39. Tha'-ta dsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
40. Ga'-gthe-zhe sha-pe tse non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
41. E'-shki do" a', a bin da, (si ga,
42. Wa'-we-a-ga-?kon-the in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
43. O'-don e nbn bi non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
44. O'-don tha bi don shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
45. O'-do" a bi gi-tsi-?a ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
46. Thi'-u-ba-he i-sdu-ga dsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
47. Ga'-gthe-zhe pe-tho°-ba ha tse no" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
48. Ga' tse shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
49. Wa'-we-a-ga-fkon-the in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
50. O'-don e no" bi non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
51. Shon/ xtsi i-tse a- the in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
52. Zhin'-ga we-tha-wa mon-thin bi do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
53. O'-do" a bi gi-tsi-ca ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bi" da, tsi ga.
54. He-dsi xtsi a, a bin da, tsi ga,
55. Hon' a-don zhin-ga zhu-i-ga tha bi gon no" shki a, hin a', a bin da,
tsiga,
56. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
57. Tsi'-zhu Wa-non thin-kshe a', a,bin da, tsi ga,
58. Wa'-zhin-ga pa stse-dse don a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
59. Ga' thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
60. Zhu'-i-ga the xtsi a-ni-ka-shi-ga mi-kshe in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
61. Wa'-kon-da Hon-ba don thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
62. I'-tha-thu-ce xtsi a-ni-ka-shi-ga mi-kshe in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
63. Wa'-kon-da Hon-don thin-kshe a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
64. I-tha-thu-^e xtsi a-ni-ka-shi-ga i° da', a bin da, tsi ga,
65. Wa'-tse Do-ga thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
66. I'-tha-thu-ce xtsi a-ni-ka-shi-ga in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
67. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga on-tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
68. Wa'-shi-shi u-bu-dse xtsi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin
da, tsi ga,
69. Mi'hi-e ge ta', a bin da, tsi ga,
70. We'-gon-tha a-thin mon-thin bi do" shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
71. Da' thu-ts'a-ga zhi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
72. Wa'-tse Mi-ga thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
73. I'-tha-thu-ce xtsi a-ni-ka-shi-ga in da', a bi° da, tsi ga,
74. Mi'hi-e ge ta', a bin da, tsi ga,
75. We'-go"-tha a-thin mon-thin bi don shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
342
THE OSAGE TRIBE
! ETII. ANN. 36
76. Da' thu-ts'a-ga zhi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
77. Wa'-shi-shi u-bu-dse xtsi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a
bin da,
78. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga on-tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
79. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
80. Hon'-ba u-ca-ki-ba do-ba shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
81. U'-hi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsi" da', a bin da, tsi ga,
82. Wa'-zha-zhe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
83. Hon'-ga e-thon-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
84. We'-ki-k'on on-the mon-thin bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
85. Da thu-ts'a-ga zhi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da, a bin da, tsi ga.
ga,
MI-K'IN/ W
(Free translation, p. 122; literal translation, p. 508)
1. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
2. Tsi'-zhu u-dse-the pe-thon-ba ni-ka-shi-ga ba do" a', a bin da>
tsi ga,
3. Mi'-k'i11 Wa-non thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
4. Ha' ! wi-tsi-go-e', e-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
5. We'-ki-k'on thon-tse thin-ga a-tha, wi-tsi-go-e', e-gi-a bi a, a bi"
da, tsi ga,
6. Ha' ! zhin-ga, e' tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga
7. We'-ki-k'an than-tse thin-ge' e-she don a', a bin da, ts
8. We'-ki-k'on thon-tse mi-kshe in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
9. Wa'-kon-da Hon-ba don thin-kshe a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
10. Zhu'-i-ga the xtsi a-ni-ka-shi-ga mi-kshe in da', a bia da, tsi ga,
11. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga on-tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
12. Wa'-kon-da Hon-ba don thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
13. Zhu'-i-ga the xtsi ni-ka-shi-ga ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bi"
da, tsi ga,
14. Zhu'-i-ga the mon-thin bi do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
15. I'-ts'a thin-ge mon-thin ta i tsi" da', a bin da, tsi ga,
16. U'-non tha bi don shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
17. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
18. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
19. Wa'-kon-da Hon-don thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
20. Zhu'-i-ga the xtsi a-ni-ka-shi-ga mi-kshe in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
21. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga on-tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
22. Wa'-kon-da Hon don thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
23. Zhu'-i-ga the xtsi ni-ka-shi-ga ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a
bin da,
24. TsV wa-tse-xi mi-kshe in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
25. Wa'-kon-da Hon do" thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
26. Zhu'-i-ga the mon-thin bi do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
LAFLBSCHE] TRIBAL RITES OSAGE LANGUAGE 343
27. Ts'e' wa-tse-xi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
28. U'-non tha bi don shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
29. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
30. Wa'-tse Do-ga thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
31. Ga' thin-kse shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
32. Zhu'-i-ga the xtsi a-ni-ka-shi-ga mi-kshe in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
33. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
34. Wa'-tse Do-ga thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
35. Zhu'-i-ga the mon-thin bi do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
36. Ts'e' wa-tse-xi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
37. U'-no" tha bi don shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
38. U'-no" a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsi° da', a bin da, tsi ga,
39. Wa'-tse Mi-ga thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
40. Zhu'-i-ga the xtsi a-ni-ka-shi-ga mi-kshe in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
41. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
42. Ts'e wa-tse-xi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
43. U'-non tha bi don shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
44. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
45. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
46. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga tha bi ga non-zhin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
47. Wa'-kon-da tse-ga xtsi e-thon-be hi non bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
48. Tha'-ta dsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
49. Ga'-gthe-zhe sha-pe tse non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
50. Ga' tse shki a, a bin da, tsi ga,
51. Wa'-we-a-ga-9kon-the in da', a bi° da, tsi ga,
52. Zhin'-ga we-tha-wa mon-thin bi do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
53. O'-don gi-tsi-pa a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da,
tsi ga.
54. Wa'-kon-da tse-ga xtsi e-thon-be hi no" bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
55. Thi'-u-ba-he i-sdu-ge dsi a', a bin da, tsi ga
56. Ga'-gthe-zhe pe-thon-ba tse non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
57. Ga' tse shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
58. Wa'-we-a-ga-ckon-the in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
59. Zhin'-ga we-tha-wa mon-thin bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
60. O'-don gi-tsi-pa a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da,
tsiga.
HO1" I-NI-KA-BHI-OA
(Free translation, p. 123; literal translation, p. 510)
1. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
2. Tsi'-zhu u-dse-the pe-thon-ba ni-ka-shi-ga ba don a', a bin da,
tsiga,
3. Ho"' I-ni-ka-shi-ga thin-kshe no" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
344 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
4. Ha' ! wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
5. We'-ki-k'on thon-tse thin-ge a-tha, wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-a bi a', a bin
da, tsi ga,
6. Ha' ! zhin-ga, e'-tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
7. We'-ki-k'on thon-tse mi-kshe in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
8. Wa'-pa-be u-pa-ka thin-ge kshe non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
9. Zhu'-i-ga the xtsi a-ni-ka-shi-ga mi-kshe in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
10. Zhu'-i-ga the moMhi" bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
11. I'-ts'a thin-ge mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
12. U'-non a bi shki i-the ki-the mo°-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, (si ga,
13. (^i'-ha u-sha-be ga thin-kshe shki a', a bi° da, tsi ga,
14. Non'-xthe a-gi-the a-thin he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
15. Non'-xthe gi-the mon-thin bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
16. Non'-xthe gi-a-da-xe ki-the mon-thin ta i tsi" da', a bin da, tsi ga,
17. Pa'-zhu-zhe sha-be ga thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
18. Non'-xthe a-gi-the a-thin he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
19. Non'-xthe gi-the mon-thin bi don shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
20. Non'-xthe gi-a-da-xe ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
21. Zhu'-i-ga ca-be ga kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
22. Non'-xthe a-gi-the a-thin he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
23. Zhin'-ga non-xthe gi-the mon-thin bi don shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
24. Non'-xthe gi-a-da-xe ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
25. Zhin'-ga u-non gi-the mon-thin bi don shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
26. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
27. Hon'-ba u-pa-ki-ba do-ba shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
28. U'-hi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsi" da', a bin da, tsi ga.
XU-THA ZHU-DSE
(Free translation, p. 124; literal translation, p. 511)
1. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
2. Tsi'-zhu u-dse-the pe-thon-ba ni-ka-shi-ga ba do" a', a bin da,
tsiga,
3. Tsi'-zhu Wa-shta-ge thin-kshe non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
4. Xu'-tha zhu-dse zhu-i-ga the thin-kshe no" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
5. Ha' ! wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
6. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga tha bi thin-ge a-tha, wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-a bi a', a
bin da, tsi ga,
7. Ha' ! zhin-ga, e'-tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
8. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga tha bi thin-ge' e-she don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
9. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga on-tha ba thon-tse mi-kshe in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
10. Xu'-tha zhu-dse thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
11. Zhu'-i-ga the mo°-thin bi do"', a bin da, tsi ga,
12. U'-non a bri-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsi" da', a bin da, tsi ga,
LA FLISCHE] TRIBAL RITES — OSAGE LANGUAGE 345
13. ^i'-ha u-thi-<?tu-be ga thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
14. U'-non a-gi-the a-thin he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
15. Zhin'-ga u-non tha bi don shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
16. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga.
17. Hi'-kon ba-k'in-tha ga ge shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
18. U'-non a-gi-the a-ton he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
19. U'-non tha bi don shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
20. Hi'-kon ba-k'in-tha' a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bi"
da, tsi ga,
21. Hi'-zhu-ga-wa ga thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
22. U'-non a-gi-the a-ton he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
23. U'-non tha bi don shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
24. Hi'-zhu-ga-wa a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da,
tsiga,
25. Tse'-wa-tse u-ga-wa ga thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
26. U'-non a-gi-the a-ton he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
27. U'-non tha bi don shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
28. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsi" da', a bin da, tsi ga,
29. Mon'-ge u-thi-ctu-the ga thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
30. U'-non a-gi-the a-thin he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
31. U'-noh tha bi do" shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
32. Mon'-ge u-thi-ftu-the a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a
bin da, tsi ga.
33. A'-zhu-ga-wa ga thi°-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
34. U'-non a-gi-the a-ton he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
35. U'-non gi-the mon-thin bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
36. A'-zhu-ga-wa a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga.
37. A'-ba-t'u-xa ga thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi, ga,
38. E'-shki do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
39. U'-non a-gi-the a-ton he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
40. Zhin'-ga u-non gi-the mon-thin bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
41. A'-ba-t'u-xa a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga.
42. Du'-dse u-ga-wa ga thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
43. E'-shki do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
44. U'-non a-gi-the a-ton he in-da', a bin da, tsi ga,
45. U'-no" gi-the mon-thin bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
46. Du'-dse u-ga-wa a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsi" da', a bin da,
tsiga.
346 THE OSAGE TRIBE CETH. ANN. 36
47. Ta'-xpi hi" ca-dse ga thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
48. E' shki do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
49. U'-non a-gi-the a-ton he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
50. U'-non tha bi do" shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
51. Ta'-xpi hin ?a-dse a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da,
tsi ga.
52. Pa'-xin cka ga thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
53. E' shki don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
54. U'-non a-gi-the a-ton he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
55. U'-non tha bi do" shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
56. Pa'-xin ci e-gon a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da,
tsiga.
57. Wa'-kon-da Hon-ba-don thin-kshe a', a bin da, (si ga,
58. Zhu'-i-ga the xtsi a-ni-ka-shi-ga a-ton he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
59. Wa'-kon-da tse-ga xtsi e-thon-be hi non bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
60. Wa'-kon-da zhu-dse u-ga-ton e'-gon kshe non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
61. Ga' kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
62. Zhu'-i-ga the xtsi a-ni-ka-shi-ga in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
63. Wa'-kon-da tse-ga xtsi e-tho°-be hi non bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
64. Tha'-ta ta-thi-shon dsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
65. Wa'-gthe to" e-gon ton noQ a, a bin da, tsi ga,
66. Wa'-gthe a-gi-the a-ton he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
67. Zhin'-ga wa-gthe gi-the mon-thin bi don shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
68. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
69. Ni'-ka non hi do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
70. Wa'-gthe gi-the mon-thin bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
71. Wa'-gthe gi-xi-tha zhi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga.
72. Wa'-kon-da tse-ga xtsi e-thon-be hi no" bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
73. I'-sdu-ga dsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
74. Wa'-gthe ton e-gon to" non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
75. Ga' wa-gthe a-gi-the a-thin he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
76. Zhin'-ga wa-gthe gi-the mon-thin bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
77. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
78. Ni'-ka non hi do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
79. Wa'-gthe gi-the mon-thin bi do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
80. Wa'-gthe gi-xi-tha zhi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga.
HON'-BA THA-GTHIN
81. Hon'-ba tha-gthin xtsi u-wa-ni-ka-shi-ga in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
82. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga on-tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
83. Hon'-ba tha-gthin xtsi u-ni-ka-shi-ga ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da',
a bin da, tsi ga.
LA FUtscHB] TRIBAL RITES — OSAGE LANGUAGE 347
84. Wa'-kon-da shon e-gon xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
85. U'-xthi thin-ge i-he-a-the a-ton he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
86. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga on-tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
87. Wa'-kon-da shon e-gon xtsi a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
88. U'-xthi thin-ge i-he-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
89. Wa'-kon-da hiu-dse ga kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
90. U'-xthi thin-ge i-he-a-the a-ton he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
91. Hon'-ba wa-£u ga ton a', bin da, tsi ga,
92. U'-xthi thin-ge i-he-a-the a-ton he in da', a bin da, tsi ga.
93. Wa'-kon-da mon-shi ta ga kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
94. U'-xthi thin-ge i-he-a-the a-ton he in da', a bin da, tsi ga.
95. Wa'-kan-da shon e-gon xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
96. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga on-tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
97. U'-xthi thin-ge i-he-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga.
98. Wa'-zha-zhe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
99. Hon'-ga e-thon-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
100. Zhu'-i-ga on-the mon-thin bi do" a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
101. Mon'-zhon shon e-gon xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
102. U'-xthi thin-ge i-he-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga.
U'-XTHI THIN-OB
103. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
104. Tsi'-zhu u-dse-the pe-thon-ba ni-ka-shi-ga ba do" a', a bin da,
tsiga,
105. Tsi'-zhu wi° a, a bin da, tsi ga,
106. U'-xthi thin-ge xtsi ni-ka-shi-ga ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
107. Ha'! wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
108. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga tha bi thin-ge a-tha, wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-a bi a',
a bin da, tsi ga,
109. Ha' ! zhin-ga, e' tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
110. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga tha bi thin-ge e-she don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
111. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga tha ba thon-tse a-ton he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
112. U'-da-bthu-bthu-e xtsi a-ni-ka-shi-ga in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
113. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga on-tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
114. U'-da-bthu-bthu-e xtsi ni-ka-shi-ga ki-the mon-thin ta i tsi" da',
a bin da, tsi ga.
115. Hon'-ba tha-gthin xtsi a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
116. U'-wa-ni-ka-shi-ga in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
117. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga on-tha bi do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
118. Hon'-ba tha-gthin xtsi u-ni-ka-shi-ga ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da',
a bi" da, tsi ga.
348 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
119. Hon/-ba Tha-gthin shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
120. Zha'-zhe a-ki-ton a-thin he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
121. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga on-tha bi do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
122. Hon'-ba tha-gthin xtsi u-ni-ka-shi-ga ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da,
a bin da, tsi ga.
123. Non'-ni-on-ba zhi°-ga win zhu-i-ga a-the a-to" he i" da', a bin da',
tsiga,
124. Zhin'-ga, a bin da, tsi ga,
125. Zhu'-i-ga tha bi do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
126. U'-xthi thin-ge a-ki-gtha-thin mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da,
tsiga,
127. Wa'-shi-shi u-dse a-thin mon-thin bi don shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
128. Wa'-shi-shi u-bu-dse i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da,
tsi ga,
129. We'-non-bthe mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
130. We'-non-bthe mon-thin bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
131. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga.
132. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
133. Xtha'-ci zhin-ga win a', a bin da, tsi ga,
134. Zhu'-i-ga the xtsi a-ni-ka-shi-ga in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
135. Ba'-shta e-gon ton non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
136. Zhu'-i-ga the xtsi a-ni-ka-shi-ga in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
137. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
138. U'-xthi thin-ge ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, (si ga,
139. U'-non a bi shki i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsi" da', a bin da, tsi ga.
140. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
141. Zhin'-ga non-bthe tha bi do" shki a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
142. U'-no" a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga.
143. Ha'-ba zhu-dse kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
144. Zhu'-i-ga the xtsi a-ni-ka-shi-ga in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
145. Zhin'-ga non-bthe mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
146. Non'-bthe the mon-thin bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
147. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga.
148. Ha'-ba to-ho kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
149. Ga' kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
150. Non'-bthe the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
151. Non'-bthe the mon-thin bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
152. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thi" ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
153. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
154. Ha'-ba gthe-zhe kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
155. Ga' kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
LAFLISCHE] TRIBAL RITES OSAGE LANGUAGE 349
156. Non'-bthe the mo"-thin ta i tsin da, a bin da, tsi ga,
157. Zhin'-ga non-bthe gi-the mon-thin bi do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
158. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thiD ta i tsi" da', a bi" da, tsi ga,
159. Zhin'-ga non-bthe the mon-thin bi do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
160. A'-dsu-ta i-ga-pi-ge a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsi" da', a bin
da, tsi ga.
161. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
162. Ha'-ba ci kshe a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
163. Ga' kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
164. Non'-bthe the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bi° da, tsi ga,
165. Non'-bthe the mo"-thin bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
166. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thi" ta i tsi" da', a bi° da, tsi ga,
167. Zhin'-ga non-bthe the mon-thin bi do" a', a bin da, (si ga,
168. A'-dsu-ta i-ga-ci-ge ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bi° da, tsi ga,
169. Wa'-zha-zhe a', a hi" da, tsi ga,
170. Hon'-ga e-thon-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
171. Non'-bthe the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
172. Non'-bthe the mo"-thin bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
173. U'-no" a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bi" da, tsi ga,
174. Hon'-ba u-ca-ki-ba do-ba', a bi" da, tsi ga,
175. U'-hi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsi" da', a bin tsi ga,
176. Hon'-ba tha-gthin shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
177. U'-hi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga.
TSI'-ZHU WE-HA-GE (THE LAST TSI'-ZHU) GENS
(Free translation, p. 130; literal translation, p. 516)
1. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
2. Tsi'-zhu u-dse-the pe-thon-ba ni-ka-shi-ga ba do0 a', a bin da,
tsiga,
3. Tsi-'zhu We-ha-ge thin-kshe non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
4. Ha! wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
5. We'-ki-k'on than-tse thin-ge a-tha, wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-a bi a', a bin
da, tsi ga,
6. Ha' ! zhi"-ga, e-tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
7. We'-ki-k'on thon-tse thin-ge e-she do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
8. We'-ki-k'on thon-tse mi-kshe in da', a bi" da, tsi ga,
9. Wa'-ca-be hin zhu-dse kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
10. Zhu'-i-ga the xtsi a-ni-ka-shi-ga mi-kshe i" da', a bi" da, tsi ga,
11. Zhin'-ga on-thon-gi-ni-tha mon-thin bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
12. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
13. U'-non o"-the mon-thin bi don shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
14. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsi" da', a bin da, tsi ga,
350 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
15. pi'-ha u-sha-be ga thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
16. Non'-xthe a-gi-the a-thin he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
17. Zhin'-ga non-xthe gi the mon-thin bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
18. Non'-xthe gi-a-da-xe ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
19. Pa'-zhu-zhe sha-be ga-thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
20. Non'-xthe a-gi-the a-thin he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
21. Zhin'-ga non-xthe gi-the mon-thiD bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
22. Non'-xthe gi-a-da-xe ki-the mon-thin ta i tsi" da', a bin da, tsi ga,
23. Zhu'-i-ga ca-be ga kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
24. Non'-xthe a-gi-the a-thin he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
25. Zhin/-ga non-xthe gi-the mon-thin bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
26. Non'-xthe gi-a-da-xe ki-the mon-thin ta i tsi" da', a bin da, tsi ga,
27. U'-non a bi shki i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsi" da', a bin da, tsi ga,
28. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga on-tha bi do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
29. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
30. ^i'-ha u-thi-ftu-the ga thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
31. U'-non a-gi-the a-ton he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
32. Zhin'-ga u-non tha bi don shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
33. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, (si ga,
34. Hi'-kon ba-k'i-tha ga thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
35. U'-non a-gi-the a-ton he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
36. U'-non gi-tha bi don shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
37. Hi'-kon ba-k'in-tha a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a
bin da,
38. Tse'-wa-tse u-ga-wa ga tliin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
39. U'-non a-gi-the a-ton he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
40. U'-non gi-the mon-thin bi do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
41. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
42. Mon'-ge u-thi-ptu-the ga thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
43. U'-non a-gi-the a-ton he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
44. Zhin'-ga u-non tha bi don shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
45. U'-no" a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsi" da', a bin da, tsi ga,
46. A'-zhu-ga-wa ga thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
47. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
48. A'-ba-t'u-xa ga thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
49. U'-non a-gi-the a-ton he in da', a bi" da, tsi ga,
50. U'-non tha bi do" shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
51. A'-ba-t'u-xa a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bi" da, tsi ga.
LAFLISCHI] TKIBAL RITES — OSAGE LANGUAGE 351
52. Du'-dse-u-ga-wa ga thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
53. U'-non a-gi-the a-ton he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
54. U'-non gi-the mon-thin bi do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
55. Du'-dse-u-ga-wa a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da,
tsi ga.
56. Ta'-xpi hi" ca-dse ga thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
57. U'-non a-gi-the a-ton he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
58. Zhin'-ga no" hi bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
59. Ta'-xpi hi" ca-dse a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da,
tsi ga,
60. Pa'-xin ca-dse pi e-gon ga thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
61. E'shki don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
62. U'-no" a-gi-the a-ton he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
63. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga on-tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
64. Pa'-xin ca-dse ci e-gon a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsi" da', a
bin da, tsi ga,
65. Hon'-ba u-ca-ki-ba do-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
66. U-hi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da, a bin da, tsi ga,
67. Wa'-zha-zhe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
68. Hon'-ga e-thon-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
69. Zhu'-i-ga on-the mon-thin bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
70. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga.
TSE
(Free translation, p. 132; literal translation, p. 518)
1. He-dsi xtsi a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
2. Tsi'-zhu u-dse-the pe-thon-ba ni-ka-shi-ga ba do" a', a bin da,
tsiga,
i 3. Tse' Tho"-ka ton no" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
4. Ha! wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-a bi a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
5. We'-ki-k'on thon-tse thin-ga a-tha, wi-tsi-go e', e-gi a, bi a', a
bin da, tsi ga,
6. Ha' ! zhin-ga, e-tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
7. We'-ki-k'o" thoMse thin-ga e-she do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
8. We'-ki-k'on thon-tse a-to" he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
9. Wa'-zha-zhe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
10. Tsi'-zhu e-thon-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
11. We'-ki-k'on on-the moMhi" ta i tsi" da', a bin da, tsi ga,
12. Non'-be dsu-dse on-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
13. Non'-be dsu-dse on-the mon-thin bi do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
14. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
15. U'-non o°-tha bi do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
16. Hon'-ba -uca-ki-ba do-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
17. U'-hi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga.
352 THE OSAGE TRIBE [BTH. ANN. 36
NI'-KA WA-KON-DA-GI
(Free translation, p. 133; literal translation, p. 519)
1. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
2. Tsi'-zhu u-dse-the pe-thon-ba ni-ka-shi-ga ba don a', a bi" da,
tsi ga,
3. Ni'-ka Wa-kon-da-gi thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
4. Ha'! wi-tsi-go e', e-gi a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
5. We'-ki-k'on thon-tse thin-ga a-tha, wi-tsi-go e, e-gi-a bi a', a bi"
da, tsi ga,
6. Ha' ! zhin-ga, e'-tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
7. We'-ki-k'on thon-tse thin-ge e-she don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
8. We'-ki-k'on thoQ-tse mi-kshe in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
9. Mon'-<?e zhu-dse thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
10. Zhu'-i-ga the xtsi a-ni-ka-shi-ga in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
11. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga on-tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
12. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
13. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin bi do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
14. I'-ts'a thin-ge moD-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
15. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
16. Mon'-fe fa-be thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
17. Zhu'-i-ga the xtsi a-ni ka-shi-ga in da, a bin da, tsi ga,
18. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
19. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bi" da, tsi ga,
20. Mon'-ce pa-be thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
21. Zhu'-i-ga the mon-thin bi do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
22. Xin'-ha ca-gi a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga.
23. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
24. Mon'-<?e pa-tha-ge thin-kshe non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
25. Zhu'-i-ga the xtsi a-ni-ka-shi-ga in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
26. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
27. Mon'-9e ca-tha-ge thin-kshe non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
28. Zhu'-i-ga tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
29. Ts'e wa-tse-xi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsi" da', a bin da, tsi ga,
30. U'-non tha bi do" shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
31. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
32. He'-dsi xtsi a', a biQ da, tsi ga,
33. Mon'-pe ci thin-kshe non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
34. Zhu'-i-ga the xtsi a-ni-ka-shi-ga in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
35. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
36. I'-ts'a thin-ge mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
37. Ts'e wa-tse-xi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bi° da, tsi ga,
38. U'-non tha bi don shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
39. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga.
LA FLESCHE] TRIBAL RITES OSAGE LANGUAGE 353
40. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, (si ga,
41. Hon'-ba do-ba shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
42. U'-hi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, (si ga,
43. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga tha bi ga non-zhin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
44. Ba'-pi pa-gi thin-kshe no" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
45. Ga' thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
46. Zhu-i-ga the xtsi a-ni ka-shi-ga i" da', a bin da, tsi ga,
47. Wa'-to°-pi ca-gi thin-kshe no" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
48.. I'-tha-ki-thon-ba xtsi a-ni-ka-shi-ga in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
49. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga tha bi do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
50. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
51. Zhin'-ga non-bthe gi-the mon-thin bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
52. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
THO'-XE PA THI-HO*
(Free translation, p. 134; literal translation, p. 521)
1. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
2. Tsi'-zhu u-dse-the pe-thon-ba ni-ka-shi-ga ba do" a', a bi" da,
tsi ga,
3. Tho'-xe Pa Thi-hon to" no" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
4. Ha' ! wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
5. We'-ki-k'on thon-tse thin-ge a-tha, wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-a bi a', a bi"
da, tsi ga,
6. Hiu'-dse shi tse a, wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
7. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
8. Tsi'-zhu Wa-shta-ge thin-kshe non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
9. £ka'-gthe zhu-dse kshe non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
10. Gthiu'-pe tsi-the don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
11. The'-pe tha-ta dsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
12. U'-ha i-tse-the to" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
13. ^}in'-dse u-thi-xpa-the i-non-zhin ga-xe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
14. Ha' ! Tsi'-zhu e', e-tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
15. We'-ki-k'on thon-tse thin-ge e-she do" a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
16. We'-ki-k'on thon-tse a-ton he i" da', a bin da, tsi ga,
17. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
18. ^in'-dse thi-bo-xa tsi-the don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
19. Mon'-sho-dse the-ton-ha shki wa-ton'-i° a-zhi i-non-zhin ga-xe to"
a', a bin da, tsi ga,
20. E'-dsi zhi the thin-ge a-ni-ka-shi-ga, Tsi-zhu e', e-ton a', a bin da,
tsiga,
21. E'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
22. Mon'-ki-cin-dse tsi-the do" a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
23. Mon'-kon-ton-ga zhin-ga thin-kshe no" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
2786—21 23
354 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
24. U'-ga-ton-tha tsi-the ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
25. Ga' thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
26. Mon'-kon the mon-thiu fa i tsi" da', a bin da, tsi ga,
27. Zhin'-ga mon-kon the mo°-thin bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
28. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
29. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
30. Mon'-ki-pin-dse tsi-the don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
31. Ha'-ba-kon-ce-ci-da to" non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
32. U'-ga-ton-tha tsi-the to" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
33. Ga' thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
34. Mon'-kon tha ba thoMse a, wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-a bi a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
35. I-u'-tha-bthon-pe a-tsi-a-tha ba dan a', a bin da, tsi ga,
36. I'u-wa-pa xtsi a, wi-tsi-go e', a bi" da, tsi ga,
37. Ts'u'-xe a, wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
38. Zha'-zhe on-ki-ton ta bi a, wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
39. Ts'u'-xe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
40. Zha'-zhe on-ki-ton ta bi a', wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
41. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
42. Mon'-kon-ton-ga ton no" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
43. Tho' ton hi non-zhin ga-xe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
44. Zhin'-ga mon-kon the mon-thin ta bi a', wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-a bi a',
a bin da, tsi ga,
45. Zhin'-ga mon-kon tha bi don shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
46. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsi" da', a bin da, tsi ga,
47. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
48. Mon'-kon ni-ka-shi-ga to" no" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
49. Tho' ton hi non-zhin bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
50. Zhin'-ga mon-kon the mon-thin ta bi a', wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-a bi a', a
bi" da, tsi ga,
51. Zhin'-ga mon-kon tha bi do" shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
52. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
53. Wa'-zha-zhe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
54. Hon'-ga e-thon-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
55. Mon'-kon the mon-thin bi do" shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
56. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga.
57. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
58. Hon-a'-don zhin-ga zhu-i-ga tha bi go" non shki a, hin a', a bin
da, tsi ga,
59. Ha'-ba zhu-dse kshe non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
60. U'-ga-ton-tha tsi-the ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
61. Wa'-ton zhu-dse thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
62. E'-ki-thon-ba xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
LA FLESCHIC] TRIBAL RITES — OSAGE LANGUAGE 355
63. Wa'-dsu-ta hin zhiu-dse kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
64. E'-ki-thon-ba xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
65. U'-ga-ton-tha i-the-the a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
66. Zhin'-ga mon-kon the mon-thin bi don shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
67. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsi" da', a bin da, tsi ga.
68. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
69. Hon'-a-don mon-kon tha bi go" no" shki a', hin a', a bin da, tsi ga,
70. Ha'-ba to-ho kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
71. Ga' kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
72. Zhin/-ga mon-kon the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bi° da, tsi ga,
73. Wa'-ton pa-be thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
74. E'-ki-thon-ba on-ga-xe ta bi a', wi-con-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
75. Wa'-dsu-ta hin sha-be kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
76. E'-ki-thon-ba on-ga-xe ta bi a', wi-tsi-go e'. e-gi-a bi a', a bin
da, tsi ga,
77. Zhin'-ga mon-kon the raon-thin bi don shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
78. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsi" da', a bin da, tsi ga,
79. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
80. Ha'-ba gthe-zhe kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
81. U'-ga-ton-tha tsi-the ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
82. Ga' kshe shki a', a biQ da, tsi ga,
83. Mon'-kon the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
84. Mon'-kon the mon-thin bi do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
85. A'-dsu-ta i-ga-gi-ge ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
86. Wa'-ton gthe-zhe thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
87. I'-tha-ki-thon-ba on-ga-xe ta bi a', wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-a bi a', a bin
da, tsi ga,
88. Wa'-dsu-ta gthe-she kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
89. I'-tha-ki-thon-ba on-ga-xe ta bi a', wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-a bi a', a
bin da, t»i ga,
90. Zhin'-ga mon-kon the mon-thin bi do" shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
91. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
92. He-dsi xtsi a, a bin da, tsi ga,
93. Zhin'-ga mon-kon tha bi ga non-zhin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
94. Ha'-ba ?i kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
95. Zhin'-ga mon-kon the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
96. Zhin'-ga mon-kon the mon-thin bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
97. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsi" da', a bin da, tsi ga,
98. Wa'-to" ci thin-kshe no" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
99. I'-tha-ki-thon ba on-ga-xe ta bi a', wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-a bi a', a bi"
da, tsi ga,
100. Wa'-dsu-ta hin ci kshe a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
356 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 38
101. I'-tha-thu-ce on-ga-xe (a bi a', wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-a bi a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
102. Zhin'-ga mon-kon the moQ-thin bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
103. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bfn da, tsi ga,
104. Wa'-zha-zhe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
105. Hon'-ga e-thon-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
106. Mon'-kon the mon-thia bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
107. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
108. A'-dsu-ta i-ga-ci-ge ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
109. Hon'-ba u-ca-ki ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
110. Hon'-ba u-ca-ki-ba do-ba shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
111. U'-hi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
112. Hon'-ba tha-gthin shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
113. U'-hi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a biQ da, tsi ga,
114. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
115. Hon-a'-don zhin-ga mon-kon tha bi gon non shki a', hin a', a bin da,
taiga,
116. Wa'-dsu-ta wa-non ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
117. Zhin'-ga mon-kon the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
118. Zhin'-ga mon-kon the mon-thin bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
119. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga.
120. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
121. Ni'-dse sho-ga ta-be ga thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
122. Mon'-kon the mon-thin bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
123. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
124. Thi'-u-ba-he tha-ta ga kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
125. Mon'-kon a-gi-the a-thin he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
126. Mon'-kon the mon-thin bi do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
127. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
128. Non'-ka-on-he ga kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
129. Mon'-kon a-gi-the a-thin he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
130. Zhin'-ga mon-kon the mon-thin bi do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
131. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
132. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
133. Non'-ka-on-he ga kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
134. We'-cda-the a-gi-the a-ton he in da', a bi° da, tsi ga,
135. Wa'-zha-zhe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
136. Hon'-ga e-thon-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
137. We'-cda-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
138. We'-cda-gi-the mon-thin bi do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
139. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
LAFt-ESCHE] TRIBAL RITES OSAGE LANGUAGE 357
140. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bi° da, tsi ga,
141. Tlii'-u-ba-he i-sdu-ge ga kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
142. Mon'-kon a-gi-the a-ton he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
143. Zhin'-ga mon-kon the mon-thin bi do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
144. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
145. Mon'-ge-on-he ga kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
146. Mon'-kon a-gi-the a-ton he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
147. Mon'-kon gi-tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
148. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bi" da, tsi ga,
149. Thon'-dse u-thi-xin ga thiVkshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
150. Mon'-kon a-gi-the a-ton he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
151. Zhin'-ga mon-kon the mon-thin bi don shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
152. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga.
153. A'-hiu-ha wi-ta', a bin da, tsi ga,
154. Zhu'-i-ga wi-ta', a bin da, tsi ga,
155. Zhu'-i-ga shon-e-gon xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
156. Mon'-kon gi-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
157. Mon'-kon gi-the mon-thin bi do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
158. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
159. Wa'-zha-zhe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
160. Hon'-ga e- thon-ba', a bin da, tai ga,
161. Mon'-kon gi-the mon-thin bi don a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
162. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga.
TON'-WON A-DON-BE Wl'-GI-E
(Free translation, p. 147; literal translation, p. 525)
1. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
2. Ha' ! Wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
3. We'-ki-k'o" thon-tse thin-ge' a-tha, Wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-a bi a', a bi"
da, tsi ga,
4. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
5. We'-ki-k'on thon-tse thin-ge' e-she do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
6. Ha' ! zhin-ga, e' tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
7. Wa'-kon-da gthoMhe do-ba', a bin da, tsi ga.
8. Wa'-kon-da gthon-the do-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
9. Ki'-pto tse a', wi-tsi-go e', e tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
10. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
11. Hon'-ba Wa-cu ga to" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
12. Ha' ! Wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-a bi a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
13. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga tha bi thin-ge a-tha, Wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-a bi a', a
bin da, tsi ga,
358 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
14. Ha' ! zhin-ga, e' tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
15. Wa'-kon-da gthon-the wi non bthin in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
16. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga on-tha ba thon-tse mi-kshe in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
17. Zbin'-ga zho-i-ga on-tha bi do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
18. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-tbin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
19. Hon'-ba u-ca-ki-ba do-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
20. U'-hi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
21. Wa'-zha-zhe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
22. Hon'-ga i-da-be a', a bin da, tsi ga,
23. Tsi'-zhu i-da-be a', a bin da, tsi ga,
24. Hon'-ba u-ca-ki-ba do-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
25. U'-hi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
26. Hon'-ba tha-gthi" xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
27. U'-hi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da, a bin da, tsi ga,
28. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga on-tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
29. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga.
30. Wa'-kon-da Hon-non-pa-pe ga ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
31. Ha' ! I-ko e', e-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
32. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga tha bi thin-ge a-tha, I-ko e', e-gi-a bi a', a bi"
da, tsi ga,
33. Ha' ! zhin-ga, e' tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
34. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga tha bi thin-ge e-she don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
35. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga o°-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
36. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga on-tha' bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
37. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bi" da, tsi ga,
38. Wa'-zha-zhe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
39. Hon'-ga i-da-be a', a bin da, tsi ga,
40. Tsi'-zhu i-da-be a', a bin da, tsi ga,
41. Zho'-i-ga on-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
42. Zho'-i-ga on-the mon-thin bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
43. Hon'-ba u-ca-ki-ba do-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
44. U'-hi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
45. Zhin'-ga-zhin-ga', a bin da, tsi ga,
46. U'-ki-wa-wa-the xtsi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da,
tsi ga,
47. Hon'-ba tha-gthin shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
48. U'-ni-ka-shi-ga ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
49. Wa'-kon-da gthan-the wi-non bthi" mon-zhi in da', a bin da, tsi ga.
50. Wa'-kon-da Mon-shi-ta ga kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
51. Ha' ! Wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
52. Zhin'-ga ni-ka-shi-ga bi a, Wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
53. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga on-tha ba thon tse mi-kshe in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
54. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga on-tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
55. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
LA FLESCHK] TRIBAL, RITES OSAGE LANGUAGE 359
56. Wa'-zha-zhe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
57. Hon'-ga i-da-be a', a bin da, tsi ga,
58. Tsi'-zhu i-da-be a', a bin da, tsi ga,
59. Zho'-i-ga on-the mon-thin bi do" a', a bin da, (si ga,
60. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsi" da', a bin da, (si ga,
61. Hon-ba u-^a-ki-ba do-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
62. U'-hi ki-the raon-thin tai tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
63. Wa'-kon-da gthon-the wi no" bthin mon-zhi in da', a bi° da, tsi ga,
64. Wa'-kon-da hiu-dse ta ga kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
65. Ha' ! I-ko e', e-gi-a bi a', a bi° da, tsi ga,
66. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga tha bi thin-ge a-tha, I-ko-e', e-gi-a bi a', a bin da,
tsiga,
67. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga tha ba thoMse mi-kshe i" da', a bin da, tsi ga,
68. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga on-tha' bi do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
69. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
70. Zhin'-ga-zhin-ga', a bin da, tsi ga,
71. U'-ki-wa-wa-the xtsi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsi" da', a bin da,
tsiga,
72. Wa'-zha-zhe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
73. Hon'-ga i-da-be a', a bin da, tsi ga,
74. Tsi'-zhu i-da-be a', a bin da, tsi ga,
75. Zho'-i-ga on-the mon-thin bi do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
76. Zhin'-ga-zhin-ga u-ki'-wa-wa-the xtsi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i
tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
77. Hon'-ba u-?a-ki-ba do-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
78. U'-hi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsi" da', a bin da, tsi ga,
79. Hon'-ba tha-gthin xtsi shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
80. Hon'-ba tha-gthin u-hi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga.
81. Wa'-kon-da sho" e-gon xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
82. U'-xthi thin-ge i-he' a-the a-ton he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
83. Zhin'-ga gho-i-ga on-tha bi don a', a biQ da, tsi ga,
84. Zhin'-ga-zhin-ga u-ki'-wa-wa-the xtsi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i
tsi° da', a bin da, tsi ga.
THE WI'-GI-ES OF THE NI'-KI NOM-K'ON
THE Wl'-GI-E OF THE IN-GTHON/-GA GENS
(Free translation, p. 157; literal translation, p. 527)
1 . He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
2. Hon'-ga u-dse-the pe-thon-ba ni-ka-shi-ga bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
3. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
4. Ha' ! wi-con-ga, e'-ki-e non-zhin bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
5. Zhin'-ga hiu-dse ta ni-ka-shi-ga ba thon-ta zhi-a', wi-con-ga,
e'-ki-e non-zhin bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
360 THE OSAGE TRIBE [KTH. ANN. 36
6. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
7. Wa'-kon-da gthon-the do-ba bin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
8. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
9. Wa'-kon-da Hon-ba don thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
10. Ha' ! Wi-tsi-go-e', e-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
11. Zhin'-ga hiu-dse ta ni-ka-shi-ga ba thon-ta zhi a', Wi-tsi-go-e',
e-gi-a bi a, a bin da, tsi ga,
12. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
13. Zhin'-ga ni-ka-shi-ga bi e'-sha bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
14. Zhin'-ga hiu-dse ta ni-ka-shi-ga ta bi e'-sha in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
15. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga on-tha ba thon ta mi kshe in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
16. Zhin'-ga hiu-dse ta ni-ka-shi-ga bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
17. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the moMhi" ta bi a', zhin-ga', a bin da, tsi ga,
18. Pi'-pa thi-ctu-the ga thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
19. U'-non on-gi-the mon-thin ta bi a', zhin-ga', a bin da, tsi ga,
20. Hi'-kon ba-ci'n-tha ga kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
21. U'-non on-gi-the mon-thin ta bi a', zhin-ga', a bin da, tsi ga,
22. Shi'-non-dse ba-ci'n-tha ga kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
23. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta bi a', zhin-ga', a bin da, tsi ga,
24. Tse'-wa-tse u-ga-wa ga thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
25. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta bi a', zhin-ga, a bin da, tsi ga,
26. Mon'-ge thi-ctu-the ga thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
27. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta bi a', zhin-ga', a bin da, tsi ga,
28. A'-zhu-ga-wa ga thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
29. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta bi a', zhin-ga', a bin da, tsi ga,
30. Do'-dse-u-ga-wa ga thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
31. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta bi a', zhin-ga', a bin da, tsi ga,
•
32. Pa'-hin ca-dse ci e-gon ga thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
33. E'-shki don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
34. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta bi a' zhin-ga'7 a bin da, tsi ga,
35. U'-non on-tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
36. Pa' hi" ca-dse ci e-gon a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta bi a', zhin-ga',
a bin da, tsi ga,
37. Ta'xpi hi" ca-dse ga thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
38. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta bi tse a', zhin-ga', a bin da,
tsiga
39. U'-non on-tha bi do" shki a', a bin da, tsi-ga,
40. Ta'-xpi hin ca-dse a bi i-the ki-the moMhi" ta bi" da', a bin da,
tsi ga,
LAFLKSCHK] TRIBAL RITES OSAGE LANGt'AGE 861
41. Hon'-ba do-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
42. Hon'-ba do-ba u-wa'ni-ka-shi-ga a-thin he in da', a bi" .da, tsi ga,
43. Zhi"'-ga zho-i-ga on-tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
44. Hon'-ba u-?a-ki-ba do-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
45. U'-hi ki-the mon-tliin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsiD ga,
46. Hon'-ba tha-gthin shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
47. U'-ni-ka-shi-ga ki-the mon-thin ta bi a', zhin-ga', a bin da, tsi ga,
48. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
49. Hon'-ga u-dse-the pe-thon-ba ni-ka-shi-ga bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
50. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
51. Ha'! wi-con-ga, e'-ki-e non-zhin bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
52. Zhin'-ga hiu-dse ta ni-ka-shi-ga ba thon-ta zhi a', wi-con-ga, e'-ki-e
non-zhin bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
53. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
54. Wa'-kon-da gthon-the do-ba bin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
55. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
56. Wa'-kon-da hon-don thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
57. Ha'! I-ko-e', e-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
58. Zhin'-ga hiu-dse ta ni-ka-shi-ga ba thon-ta zhi a', I-ko-e', e-gi-a
bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
59. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
60. Zhin'-ga hiu-dse ta ni-ka-shi-ga ta bi e'-sha bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
61. Zhin'-ga hiu-dse ta ni-ka-shi-ga bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
62. U'-no" a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta bi a', zhin-ga', a bin da, tsi ga,
63. ^i'-pa-hi thi-ctu-the ga thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
64. U'-non on-gi-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
65. Hi'-kon ba-ci'n-tha ga kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
66. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsiD da', zhin-ga', a bin da,
taiga,
67. Shi'-non-dse ba-£i'n-tha ga kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
68. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta bi a', zhin-ga', a bin da, tsi ga,
69. Tse'-wa-tse u-ga-wa ga thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
70. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta bi a'. zhin-ga', a bin da, tsi ga,
71. Mon'-ge-u-thi-ftu-the ga thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
72. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta bi a'-zhin-ga', a bin da, tsi ga,
73. A'-zhu-ga-wa ga thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
74. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thia ta bi a', zhin-ga', a bin da, tsi ga,
75. Pa'-hin $a-dse ci e-gon ga thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
%76. Zhin'-ga, a bin da, tsi ga,
77. Pa'-hin ca-dse pi e-gan a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta bi a', zhin-ga',
a bin da, tsi ga,
362 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 38
78. Ta'-xpi hin ca-dse ga thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
79. E'-shki don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
80. Zhin'-ga, a bin da, tsi ga,
81. Ta'-xpi hi" ca-dse a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', zhin-ga',
a bin da, tsi ga,
82. Hon'-ba u-pa-ki-ba do-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
83. U'-hi ki-the mon-thin ta bi a', zhin-ga', a bin da, tsi ga,
84. Hon'-ba u-pa-ki-ba do-ba', a biQ da, tsi ga,
85. U'-ni-ka-shi-ga ki-the mon-thin ta bi a', zhin-ga', a bin da, tsi ga,
86. Hon'-ba tha-gthin a', a bin da, tsi ga,
87. U'-ni-ka-shi-ga ki-the mon-thin ta bi a', zhin-ga', a bi" da, tsi ga.
88. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
89. Hon'-ga u-dse-the pe-thon-ba ni-ka-shi-ga bi a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
90. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
91. Ha'! wi-con-ga, e'-ki-e non-zhin bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
92. Zhin'-ga ni-ka-shi-ga bi a', wi-co"-ga, e'-ki-e non-zhin bi a', a
bin da, tsi ga,
93. Zhin'-ga hiu-dse ta ni-ka-shi-ga ba thon-ta zhi a', wi-con-ga,
e'-ki-e non-zhin bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
94. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
95. Wa'-kon-da gthon-the do-ba bin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
96. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
97. Wa'-tse Do-ga thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
98. Ha'! Wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
99. Zhin'-ga hiu-dse ta ni-ka-shi-ga ba thon-ta zhi a', Wi-tsi-go e',
e-gi-a bi a, a bin da, tsi ga,
100. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
101. Zhin'-ga hiu-dse ta ni-ka-shi-ga ta bi e'-sha in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
102. Zhin'-ga hiu-dse ta ni-ka-shi-ga bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
103. U'-no" a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tse a', zhiQ-ga', a bin da,
tsi ga,
104. ^i'-pa-hi thi-ctu-the ga thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
105. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta bi a', zhin-ga', a bin da,
tsi ga,
106. Hi'-kon ba-ci'n-tha ga ge a', a bin da, tsi ga,
107. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta bi a', zhin-ga', a bin da, tsi ga,
108. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
109. Shi'-non-dse ba-9i'n-tha ga ge a', a bin da, tsi ga,
110. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta bi a', zhin-ga', a bin da, tsi ga,
111. Tse'-wa-tse u-ga-wa ga thia-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
112. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta bi a', zhin-ga', a bin da, tsi ga,
LA FLBSCHE] TRIBAL, KITES OSAGE LANGUAGE 363
113. Mon'-ge u-thi-ptu-the ga thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
114. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta bi a', zhin-ga', a bin da, tsi ga,
115. A'-zhu-ga-wa ga thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
116. ll'-no" a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta bi a', zhin-ga', a bin da, (si ga,
117. Do'-dse u-ga-wa ga thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
118. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta bi a', zhin-ga', a bin da, tsi ga,
119. A'-ba t'u-xa ga thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
120. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta bi a', zhin-ga', a bin da, tsi ga,
121. Pa'-hin pa-dse ci e-gon ga thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
122. Zhin'-ga, a bin da, tsi ga,
123. Pa'-hin ca-dse ci e-gon a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta bi a', zhin-ga',
a bin da, tsi ga,
124. Ta'-xpi hin pa-dse ga thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
125. Zhin'-ga, a bin da, tsi ga,
126. Ta'-xp.i hi" ca-dse a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta bi a', zhin-ga', a
bin da, tsi ga,
127. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
128. Ho"'-ba u-ca-ki-ba do-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
129. U'-hi ki-the mon-thin ta bi a', zhin-ga', a bin da, tsi ga,
130. Hon'-ba u-ca-ki-ba do-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
131. U'-ni-ka-shi-ga ki-the mon-thin ta bi a', zhin-ga', a bi" da, tsi ga,
132. Hon'-ba tha-gthin a', a bin da, tsi ga,
133. U'-ni-ka-shi-ga ki-the mon-thin ta bi a', zhin-ga', a bin da, tsi ga.
134. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
135. Hon'-ga u-dse-tho pe-thon-ba ni-ka-shi-ga bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
136. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
137. Ha' ! wi-con-ga, e'-ki-e non-zhin bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
138. Zhin'-ga ni-ka-shi-ga bi a, wi-con-ga, e'-ki-e non-zhin bi a', a bin
da, tsi ga,
139. Zhin'-ga hiu-dse ta ni-ka-shi-ga ba thon-ta zhi a', wi-con-ga,
e'-ki-e, non-zhin bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
140. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
141. Wa'-kon-da gthon-the do-ba bin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
142. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
143. Wa'-tse mi-ga thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
144. Ha! I-ko e', e-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
145. Zhin'-ga ni-ka-shi-ga bi a, I-ko e', e-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
146. Zhin'-ga hiu-dse ta ni-ka-shi-ga ba thon-ta zhi a', I-ko e', e-gi-a
bi a, a bi° da, tsi ga,
147. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
364 THE OSAGE TRIBE [HTH. ANN. 36
148. Zhin'-ga ni-ka-shi-ga bi e-sha in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
149. Zhin'-ga hiu-dse ta ni-ka-shi-ga bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
150. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
151. fi'-pa-hi u-thi-ctu-the ga thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
152. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta bi a', zhin-ga', a bin da, tsi ga,
153. Hi'-kon ba-ci'n-tha ga thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
154. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta bi a', zhin-ga', a bin da, tsi ga,
155. Shi'-non-dse ba-ci'n-tha ga thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
156. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta bi a', zhin-ga', a bin da, tsi ga,
157. Tse-wa-tse u-ga-wa ga thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
158. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta bi a', zhin-ga', a bin da, tsi ga,
159. Mon'-ge u-thi-^tu-the ga thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
160. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta bi a', zhin-ga', a bin da, tsi ga,
161. A'-zhu ga-wa ga thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
162. A'-zhu-ga-wa a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta bi a', zhin-ga', a bi"
da, tsi ga,
163. Do'-dse u-ga-wa ga thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
164. Do'-dse u-ga-wa' a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta bi a', zhin-ga',
a bin da, tsi ga,
165. A'-ba-t'u-xa ga thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
166. A'-ba-t'u-xa a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta bi a', zhin-ga', a bin da,
tsi ga,
167. Pa'-hin ca-dse pi e-gon ga thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
168. Zhin'-ga, a bin da, tsi ga,
169. Pa'-hin pa-dse pi e-gon a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta bi a', zhin-ga',
a bin da, tsi ga,
170. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
171. Hon'-ba u-ca-ki-ba do-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
172. U'-hi ki-the mon-thi" ta bi a', zhin-ga', a bin da, tsi ga,
173. Hon'-ba u-ca-ki-ba do-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
174. U'-ni-ka-shi-ga ki-the mon-thin ta bi a', zhin-ga', a bin da, tsi ga,
175. Hon'-ba tha-gthin a', a bin da, tsi ga,
176. U'-ni-ka-shi-ga ki-the mon-thin ta bi a', zhin-ga', a bin da, tsi ga,
177. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
178. Zhin-ga hiu-dse ta ni-ka-shi-ga ba thon-ta zhi a', wi-pon-ga,
e'-ki-e non-zhin bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
179. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
180. Ha' ! wi-cofi-ga, e'-ki-e non-zhin bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
181. Hon'-ga A-hiu-ton ton non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
LA PLSSCHB] TRIBAL RITES OSAGE LANGUAGE 365
182. Ha' ! wi-pon-ga, e', e-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
183. Zhin'-ga hiu-dse ta ni-ka-shi-ga ta bi a', wi-pon-ga e', e-gi-e non-
zhin bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
184. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
185. Zhin'-ga hiu-dse ta ni-ka-shi-ga ta bi e'-sha in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
186. O'-ton-be pa-xe ta mi kshe a', wi-zhin-the', e-tsi-the a', a bin
da, tsi ga,
187. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
188. Mon'-xe u-pa-ki-ba do-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
189. O'-ga-win-xe non-zhin a', a bin da, tsi ga,
190. O'-ga-win-xe do-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
191. O'-ga-win-xe non-zhin a', a bin da, tsi ga,
192. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
193. Zhon'-pa-ci pe-thon-ba' a bin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
194. E'-dsi xtsi hi non-zhin ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
195. Zhon' pa-pi pe-thon-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
196. A'-hiu-he a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
197. Hon'-ga u-dse-the pe-thon-ba bin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
198. Zhon'-pa-pi pe-thon-ba ha', a bin da, tsi ga,
199. A'-ton i-he a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
200. Ha' ! wi-90n-ga, a bin da, tsi ga,
201. Non/ zhin-ga hiu-dse ta ni-ka-shi-ga ba thon-ta zhi a', wi-pon-ga,
e-ki-e non-zhin bi a, a bin da, tsi ga,
202. He'-dsi xtsi a, a bin da, tsi ga,
203. Ha'! wi-pon-ga, e'-ki-e non-zhin bi a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
204. Hon'-ga wa-tse-ga-wa ton non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
205. Ha' ! wi-pon-ga, e'-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
206. Zhin'-ga hiu-dse ta ni-ka-shi-ga ba thon-ta, zhi a', wi-pon-ga,
e'-gi-e non-zhin bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
207. Hon'-ga wa-tse-ga-wa ton no" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
208. Ga' xtsi hi tha i do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
209. Tse'-xo-be e-gon e-de a', a bin da, tsi ga,
210. Ha' ! Wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
211. Zhin'-ga ni a-ga-ha ba thoMa zhi a', Wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-a bi a', a
bi° da, tsi ga,
212. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
213. Zhin'-ga ni a-ga-ha ba thon-ta zhi e-sha in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
214. O'-ton-be pa-xe ta mi-kshe a' zhin-ga, e' ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
215. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
216. Ni' ki-mon-hon xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
217. Ni' a-ga-ha a-ton-thin e-gon zhon a', a bin da, tsi ga,
218. Wa'-ko"-da e-shki do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
219. Be' pi-gthe on-thon-gi-tha mon-zhi a-thin he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
220. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga on-tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
366 THE OSAGE TRIBE [BTH. ANN. 36
221. Wa'-kon-da e-shki don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
222. Be' pi-gthe i-kshi-tha ba zhi ki-the mon-thin ta bi a', zhin-ga', a
bin da, tsi ga,
223. Ni' a-ki-tha-zha-ta ga kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
224. Wa'-kon-da on-ki-tha-zha-ta bi a-thiQ he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
225. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga on-tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
226. Wa'-kon-da a-ki-tha-zha-ta bi ki-the mon-thi11 ta bi a', zhin-ga',
a bin da, tsi ga,
227. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
228. Hon'-bthiu sha-be' e-gon e de a', a bin da, tsi ga,
229. Ha' ! Wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
230. Zhin'-ga ni a-ga-ha ba thon-ta zhi a, Wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-a bi a', a
bin da, tsi ga,
231. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
232. Zhin'-ga ni a-ga-ha ba thon-ta zhi e'-sha in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
233. O'-ton-be pa-xe ta mi-kshe a', zhin-ga', a bin da, tsi ga,
234. Ga' xtsi hi tha i do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
235. Ni' ki-mon-hon xtsi a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
236. Ba'-btha-btha-xe zhon a', a bin da, tsi ga,
237. Ni'a-ki-tha-zha-ta ga kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
238. Wa'-kon-da on-ki-tha-zha-ta bi a-thin he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
239. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga on-tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
240. Wa'-kon-da a-ki-tha-zha-ta bi ki-the mon-thin ta bi a', zhin-ga',
a bin da, tsi ga,
241. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
242. Hon'-ga u-dse-the pe-thon-ba ni-ka-shi-ga ba don a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
243. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
244. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga tha bi thin-ge a-tha, wi-con-ga, e'-ki-e non-zhin
bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
245. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
246. Hon'-ga wa-tse-ga-wa ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
247. Ga' xtsi hi tha i don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
248. Ta'-biu-fka e-gon e-de a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
249. Ha' ! Wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
250. Zhin'-ga ni a-ga-ha ba thon-ta zhi a', Wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-a bi a', a
bin da, tsi ga,
251. He-dsi xtsi a, a bin da, tsi ga,
252. Zhin'-ga ni a-ga-ha ta bi e'-gon a-zhi e'-she don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
253. O'-ton-be pa-xe ta mi-kshe in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
254. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
255. Ga' xtsi hi tha i don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
256. Ni'a-ki-tha-zha-ta ga kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
257. Wa'-kon-da on-ki-tha-zha-ta bi a'-thin he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
LAFLESCHE] TRIBAL, RITES OSAGE LANGUAGE 367
258. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga on-tha bi don a', a bin da, (si ga,
259. Wa'-kon-da a-ki-tha-zha-ta bi ki-the mon-thin ta bin da', zhin-ga',
a bin da, tsi ga,
260. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
261. Hon'-ga wa-tse-ga-wa ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
262. Ga' xtsi hi tha i do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
263. Ki'-pda e-de a', a bin da, tsi ga,
264. Ha' ! Wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-e ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
265. Zhin'-ga ni a-ga-ha ta bi e'-gon a-zhi a', Wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-e to"
a', a bin da, tsi ga,
266. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
267. Zhin'-ga ni a-ga-ha ta bi e'-gon a-zhi e'-she do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
268. O'-ton-be pa-xe ta a-ton he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
269. Ga' xtsi hi tha i don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
270. Ni'a-ki-tha-zha-ta ga kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
271. Wa'-kon-da on-ki-tha-zha-ta bi a-thin he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
272. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga on-tha' bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
273. Wa'-kon-da a-ki-tha-zha-ta bi ki-the mon-thin ta bi a', zhin-ga',
a bin da, tsi ga.
274. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
275. Ha' ! wi-£On-ga, e'-ki-e no"-shin bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
276. Zhin'-ga ni a-ga-ha ta bi e'-gon a-zhi a', wi-con-ga, e'-ki-a bi a',
a bin da, tsi ga,
277. Hon'-ga wa-tse-ga-wa ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
278. Ha' ! wi-9On-ga, e'-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
279. Zhin'-ga ni a-ga-ha ta bi e'-gon a-zhi a', wi-con-ga, e'-gi-a bi a',
a bin da, tsi ga,
280. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
281. Ga' xtsi hi tha i do" a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
282. O'-pxo"-ton-ga to" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
283. Tho' to" hi non-zhin ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
284. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
285. Non', wi-zhin-the, e a'-gthi-non-zhin to" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
286. Ni'-ka win e-dsi a-ka', wi-zhin-the, e a'-gthi non-zhin to" a', a
bin da, tsi ga,
287. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
288. Ni'-ka be i-zhin-ge xtsi to" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
289. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
290. Hon'-ga bthin a', wi-zhin-the', e to" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
291. O'-pxon-ton-ga wi-e a'-ton he a', wi-zhin-the, e'-ton a', a bin da,
tsiga,
292. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
293. Ha' ! wi-?on-ga, e'-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
368 THE OSAGE TRIBE [BTH. ANN. 36
294. Zhin'-ga ni a-ga-ha ni-ka-shi-ga ba thon-ta zhi a', wi-9On-ga.
e'-gi-a, bi a', a bin da, (si ga,
295. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
296. Zhin'-ga ni a-ga-ha ba thon-ta zhi e'-she don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
297. E'-dsi-zhi the thin-ge a-ni-ka-shi-ga a-ton he a', wi-zhin-the', e
ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
298. He'-dsi xtsi a, a bin da, tsi ga,
299. Mon'-ki-cin-dse tsi-the don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
300. Ni' ga-shkon he ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
301. I'-thon-be-on tse a', a bin da, tsi ga,
302. Mon'-ki-£in-dse tsi-the don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
303. Ni' a-tha-don i-he-the ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
304. Non/, wi-£on-ga', a bin da, tsi ga,
305. Wi'-pon-ga u-k'on (a a-ka we-ton-in a'-tha, wi-?on-ga, e'-ki-a bi
a', a bin da, tsi ga,
306. We'-tha-bthi" on tse a', a bin da, tsi ga,
307. Mon'-ki-cin-dse tsi-the don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
308. Ni' a-tha-don i-he-the ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
309. We'-do-ba on tse a', a bin da, tsi ga,
310. Mon'-ki-cin-dse tsi-the do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
311. Mon'-zhon a-bi-^e i-he-the toQ a', a bin da, tsi ga,
312. Non', wi-pon-ga', a bin da, tsi ga,
313. Wi'-con-ga u-k'on ta a-ka we-ton-in a-tha, wi-fon-ga, e'-ki-e non-
zhin, bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
314. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
315. Ta'-dse do-ba ha', a bin da, tsi ga,
316. E'-non-ha hi non-zhin ton a', a bin da, (si ga,
317. Ta'-dse mon-ha tse a', a bin da, tsi ga,
318. U'-hi non-zhin ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
319. Mon'-zhon u-hu-ca-gi ton a', a bin da, (si ga,
320. I'-thon-ba on tse a', a bin da, tsi ga,
321. Ta'-dse ba-con tse a', a bin da, (si ga,
322. U'-hi non-zhin to" a', a bin da, (si ga,
323. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
324. Mon'-zhon u-hu-ca-gi ton a', a bin da, (si ga,
325. Ta'-dse ga-xpa tse a', a bin da, tsi ga,
326. U'-hi non-zhin ton a', a bin da, (si ga,
327. Mon'-zhon u-hu-pa-gi ton a', a bin da, (si ga,
328. We'-do-ba-on tse a', a bin da, (si ga,
329. Ta'-dse a-k'a tse a', a bin da, (si ga,
330. U'-hi non-zhin to" a', a bin da, (si ga,
331. Mon'-zhon u-hu-ca-gi to" a', a bin da, (si ga,
332. Ta'-dse we-do-ba', a bin da, (si ga,
LAFLISCHE] TRIBAL RITES OSAGE LANGUAGE 369
333. E'-non-ha', a bin da, (si ga,
334. U'-niu ga-xe ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
335. Zhin'-ga mon-zhon u-hu-ca-gi bi don shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
336. Ga'-xton mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
337. Wa'-kon-da hu a-non-k'on bi ki-the mon-thin ta bin da', a bi" da,
tsiga,
338. Niu' wi-ta', a bin da, tsi ga,
339. I'-gi-ni-tha bi don shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
340. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta bi a', zhin-ga', a bin da, tsi ga,
341. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
342. No"', wi-con-ga, e'-ki-e non-zhin bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
343. Wi'-90n-ga u-k'on ta a-ka we-ton-in a-tha, wi-con-ga, e'-ki-a bi
a', a bin da, tsi ga,
344. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
345. O'-pxon-ton-ga ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
346. Mon'-ki-cin-dse tsi-the don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
347. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
348. Hi"' u-ga-bu-dse i-he-the ton a', a biQ da, tsi ga,
349. Ga' tse shki a, a bin da, tsi ga,
350. Wa'-thin-e pka she-mon-zhi in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
351. Xa'-dse e shnon bi non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
352. Shon' xtsi pa-xe in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
353. Xa'-dse win gi-ta-pe mon-thin bi don shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
354. Wa'-dsu-ta gi-hi-thon-be mon-thia ta bi a', zhin-ga', a bin da,
tsi ga,
355. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
356. Gu'-da pa-gthe i-non-zhin to" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
357. Ni'-dse ta-be ga thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
358. Ton'-de da-pa e non bi no" a', a bia da, tsi ga,
359. Shon/ xtsi pa-xe in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
360. Ton'-de da-pa win gi-ta'-pe mon-thin bi do" shki a', a bin da,
tsiga,
361. Wa'-dsu-ta gi-hi-thon-be mon-thin ta bi a', zhin-ga', a bin da,
tsi ga.
362. Thi'-u-ba-he ga kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
363. He'-shki do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
364. To" '-de win she kshe e nou bi no" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
365. Shon' xtsi pa-xe in da', a bi° da, tsi ga,
366. To" '-de win gi-ta-pe mo"-thin bi don shki a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
367. To" '-de win wa-dsu-ta gi-hi-thon-be mon-thin ta bi a', zhin-ga', a
bin da, tsi ga.
2786—21 24
370 THE OSAGE TEIBE [ETH. ANN. 8«
368. Non'-ka on-he ga kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
369. He'-shki don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
370. A'-thin win ga-kshe e' non bi non a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
371. Shon/ xtsi pa-xe in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
372. A'-thin win gi-ta-pe mon-thin bi do" shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
373. Zhin'-ga, a bin da, tsi ga,
374. A'-thin win wa-dsu-ta gi-hi-thon-be mon-thin ta bi a', zhin-ga', a
bin da, tsi ga.
375. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
376. Ta'-hiu-ga-cta ga tse shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
377. A'-thin u-k'a-be win she tse e' non bi non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
378. Shon' xtsi pa-xe in da', a bi" da, tsi ga,
379. A'-thin u-k'a-be win gi-ta-pe mon-thin bi don shki a', a bin da,
tsiga,
380. Wa'-dsu-ta gi-hi-thon-be mon-thin ta bi a', zhin-ga', a bin da,
tsiga,
381. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
382. Pa' pa-ci ga tse shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
383. He'-shki wa-thin-e cka zhi in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
384. A'-thi° pa-ci win' e non bi no" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
385. Shon' xtsi pa-xe in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
386. A'-thin pa-pi win gi-ta-pe mon-thin bi do" shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
387. A'-thin pa-pi win wa-dsu-ta gi-hi-thon-be mon-thin ta bi a',
zhin-ga, a bin da, tsi ga,
388. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
389. He' ga-xa u-gthon-the ga kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
390. Wa'-tsi-shka zhin-ga e' non bi non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
391. Shon/ xtsi pa-xe in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
392. Wa'-tsi-shka zhin-ga win a', a bin da, tsi ga,
393. Gi'-ta-pe mon-thin bi don shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
394. Wa'-dsu-ta gi-hi-thon-be mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
395. He' ga-xa u-wa-ton ga kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
396. Ga'-xa zhin-ga win she kshe e' non bi non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
397. Shon/ xtsi pa-xe in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
398. Ga'-xa zhin-ga win gi-ta-pe mon-thin bi do" shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
399. Wa'-dsu-ta gi-hi-thon-be mon-thin ta bi a', zhin-ga', a bin da,
tsi ga.
400. He' ga-xa u'-gthon-the ga kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
401. £on'-con-ga win she kshe e' no" bi non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
402. Shon' xtsi pa-xe in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
403. £ton'-con-ga win gi-ta-pe mon-thin bi don shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
404. He'-shki don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
405. Wa'-dsu-ta gi-hi-thon-be mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga.
LAFLMSCHI] TKIBAL KITES OSAGE LANGUAGE 371
406. He' ga-xa u'-gthon-the ga kshe a', a bin da, (si ga,
407. He' shki don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
408. Wa'-tsi-shka e non bi no" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
409. Sho"' xtsi pa-xe in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
410. Wa'-tsi-shka wi" gi-ta-pe mon-thin bi don shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
411. He' shki do" a', a bin da, (si ga,
412. Wa'-dsu-ta gi-hi-thon-be mon-thin ta bi a', zhin-ga', a bin da,
tsiga.
413. He' ga-xa u'-gthon-the ga thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, (si ga,
414. 'In/ ca-ka e no" bi non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
415. Shon/ xtsi pa-xe in da', a bia da, tsi ga,
416. T" ca-ka wi° gi-ta-pe mon-thin bi do" shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
417. Wa'-dsu-ta gi-hi-tho"-be mon-thin ta bi a', zhin-ga', bin da, tsi ga,
418. 'In/ ?a-ka win gi-ta-pe mon-thin bi don shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
419. Wa'-dsu-ta gi-hi-thon-be mon-thin ta bi a', zhin-ga', a bin da,
tsiga.
420. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
421. Pe'-o-ton ga thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
422. Wa'-thin-e cka she mon mon-zhi in da', a bi" da, tsi ga,
423. Ho'-e-ga a-gi-the a-ton he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
424. Zhi"'-ga ho-e-ga gi-the mon-thin bi do0 shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
425. Mi' hi-e ge ta', a bin da, tsi ga,
426. We'-ki-i-he-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a biQ da, tsi ga,
427. He' a-thi-ku-sha ga tse shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
428. E' shki wa-thin-e cka zhi in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
429. Wa'-xthe-xthe a-gi-the a-ton he i" da', a bin da, tsi ga,
430. Mi' hi-e ge ta', a bin da, tsi ga,
431. Wa'-bthi-ku-sha a-ton he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
432. Mi' hi-e ge ta', a bin da, tsi ga,
433. We'-ki i-he-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga.
434. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
435. Hon'-ga u-dse-the pe-thon-ba ni-ka-shi-ga ba don a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
436. Ha' ! wi-con-ga, e'-ki-e no°-zhin bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
437. Zhin'-ga ni a-ga-ha ba thon-ta zhi a', wi-con-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a
bin da, tsi ga,
438. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
439. Hon'-ga wa-tse-ga-wa to" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
440. Thu-e' xtsi ci-thu-ce the do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
441. Tse'-xe xtsi ge dsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
442. He'-dsi xtsi hi non-zhin ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
443. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
372 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
444. Ni'-ka win a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
445. Tho' ton hi non-zhin ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
446. Non'-be ba-ha hi non-zhin ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
447. Non'-be zha-ta ga-xe ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
448. He'-dsi xtsi gi-e don a', a bin da, (si ga,
449. Ha' ! wi-zhin-the', e a-gthi-non-zhin to" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
450. Ni'-ka win e-dsi a-ka', wi-zhin-the, e a'-gthi-non-zhin ton a', a bin
da, tsi ga,
451. Ha'! wi-con-ga, a bin da, tsi ga,
452. Ni'-ka be zhin-ga i-ta shki don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
453. Wa'-non-xe a-dsi the on-the ta bi a', wi-con-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a
bin da, tsi ga,
454. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
455. E'-ta pa-mon-gthe xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
456. (^i' thu-ce tsi-tha ba don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
457. We'-a-ba-cu a', a bin da, tsi ga,
458. I'-u-tha-zhu-zhu the hi-the thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
459. Ni'-ka be zhin-ga i-ta' shki do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
460. Wa'-non-xe a-dsi the on-the ta bi a', wi-con-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a
bin da, tsi ga,
461. He'-dsi xtsi hi non-zhin bi do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
462. Ha' ! wi-zhin-the, e' tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
463. Hon'-ga bthin a', wi-zhin-the, e' ton a', a biQ da, tsi ga,
464. Hon'-ga Mon-in-ka-zhia-ga', a bin da, tsi ga,
465. Wi a'-ton he a', wi-zhin-the, e to" a', a bi° da, tsi ga,
466. E'-dsi-zhi the thin-ge a-ni-ka-shi-ga a-toQ he a', wi-zhin-the, e
ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
467. We'-shnon wi-gi-the a-ton he a', wi-zhin-the, e ton a', a bin da,
tsi ga.
468. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
469. Wi'-con-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
470. Wi'-con-ga a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
471. O'-k'on ta a-ka we-ton-in a-tha, wi-con-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
472. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
473. Mon'-thi°-ka sha-be thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
474. Ba'-ha a-tsi-non-zhin ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
475. Ga' thin-kshe shki a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
476. We'-shno" wi-gi-the a-ton he a', wi-zhin-the, e to" a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
477. We'-gon-tha a-ni tha-thin-she do" shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
478. We'-gon-tha thi-wa-ts'e-ga tha-ki-the tha-thin-she t& tse a'(
wi-zhin-the e ton a, a bin da, tsi ga,
479. Hon'-ba i-ta-xe thon dsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
LAFLESCHE] TRIBAL, RITES OSAGE LANGUAGE 373
480. In'-dse-ha tha-the <lon a', a bin da, tsi ga,
481. In'-shta-bthi a-tha-ga-xton do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
482. Thon'-dse ba-he e'-ton-ha no" shki don a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
483. We'-gon-tha thi-wa-ts'e-ga tha-ki-the tha thin-she ta tse a
wi-zhin-the e ton a, a bin da, tsi ga,
484. E'thon-zha', a bin da, tsi ga,
485. In'-dse-ha tha-the don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
486. In'-shta-ha a-tha ga-cta zhi (a tsin da', wi-zhin-the', e-ton a', a
bin da, tsi ga,
487. In'-shsa-ha a-tha ga-cta do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
488. U'-non u-tha-xtha zhi tha-ki-the tha thin-she ta tse a', wi-zhin-
the, e ton a', a bin da, tsi ga.
489. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
490. Mon'-thin-ka to-ho thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
491. Ba'-ha a-tsi non-zhin ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
492. The' shki don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
493. We'-shnon wi-gi-the a-ton he a', wi-zhin-the, e to" a', a bin da,
tsiga,
494. We'-go°-tha a-ni'tha shin-she do" shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
495. We'-gon-tha thi-wa-ts'e-ga tha-ki-the tha thin-she ta tse a';
wi-zhin-the, e to" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
496. Hon'-ba i-ta-xe tho" dsi a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
497. I"'-dse-ha tha-the do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
498. Thon'-dse ba-he' e-ton non shki don a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
499. Da' thu-ts'a-ga zhi tha-ki-the tha thin-she ta tse a', wi-zhin-the,
e ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
500. Ile'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
501. K'u'-shi kshi-gthe do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
502. Mon'-thin-ka zhu-dse thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
503. Ba'-ha a-tsi no"-zhin to" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
504. The' shki do" e-tsi-thc a', a bin da, tsi ga,
505. We'-shnon wi-gi-the a-ton he a', wi-zhin-the', e to" a', a bin da,
tsiga,
506. In'-dse-ha tha-the don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
507. In'-shta, btlii a-tha-ga-xton a-zhi ta tse a, wi-zhin-the', e ton a',
a bin da, tsi ga,
508. In'-shta-bthi a-tha-ga-xto" do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
509. U'-hu-shi-go wi-kshi-the a', wi-zhin-the, e ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
510. E'thoD-zha, a bin da, tsi ga,
511. Mi'hi-e ga ta', a bin da, tsi ga,
512. We'-ki-i-he-thc tha the ta tse a', wi-zhin-the, e ton a', a bin da,
, tsiga,
513. We'-ki-i-he-the thi-wa-ts'e-ga tha-ki-the tha thin-she ta tse a',
wi-zhin-the', e to" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
374 THE OSAGE TRIBE [BTH. ANN. 86
514. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
515. K'u'-shi kshi-gthe don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
516. Mon'-thin-ka ci thin-kshe non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
517. Ba'-ha a-tsi-non-zhin to" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
518. Ga' thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
519. We'-gon-tha a-ni'tha thin-she do" shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
520. Mi'hi-e ge ta', a bin da, tsi ga,
521. Da'-gthe u-k'u-pi e' non bi non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
522. I'the tha-ki-the do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
523. In'-dse-ha tha kshi-the tha thin-she ta tse a', wi-zhi"-the, e to
a', a bin da, tsi ga,
524. Da'-gthe u-k'u-pi a' bi i-the tha-ki-the tha thin-she ta tse a',
wi-zhin-the, e ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
525. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
526. Non'-be zha-ta ga tse shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
527. Wa'-thi-e pka she mon mon-zhi in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
528. Mi' hi-e ge ta, a bin da, tsi ga,
529. Non'-be zha-ta pa-xe a-ton he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
530. Zhin'-ga i-gi-ni-tha mon-thin bi do" shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
531. We'-ki-i-he-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
532. Zhon'-xa zha-ta e non bi non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
533. Shon/ xtsi pa-xe in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
534. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
535. Zhin'-ga i-gi-ni-tha mon-thin bi don shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
536. I'-gi-ni-tha gi-wa-ts' e-ga ki-the mou-thin ta i tse a', zhin-ga', a
bin da, tsi ga.
537. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
538. Hon'-ga u-dse-the pe-thon-ba ni-ka-shi-ga ba do" a', a bin da,
tsiga,
539. Ha' ! wi-con-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
540. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga tha bi thin-ge a-tha, wi-con-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a
bin da, tsi ga,
541. Hon'-ga wa-tse-ga-wa to" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
542. Thu-e' xtsi ci-thu-ce the do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
543. 'In'-zhu-dse thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
544. He'-dsi xtsi hi non-zhin to" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
545. Ha' ! wi-zhin-the, e a'-gthi-non-zhin to" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
546. Wi'-tsi-go win e-dsi a-ka', wi-zhin-the, e a'-gthi-non-zhin ton a',
a bin da, tsi ga,
547. Ha' ! wi-9On-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
548. Wi'-?on-ga a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
549. Wi'-tsi-go win e-dsi thin-kshe e a-ka', wi-pon-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a
bi" da, tsi ga,
LA JTLESCHE] TRIBAL, BITES OSAGE LANGUAGE 375
550. E'-ta {>a-mon-gthe xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
551. (,)i'-thu-ca ba do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
552. 'In'-zhu-dse thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
553. He'-dsi xtsi hi non-zhin bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
554. Ha' ! Wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
555. Wi'-tsi-go e', e-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
556. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga tha bi thin-ge a-tha, Wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-a bi a',
a bin da, tsi ga,
557. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
558. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga tha bi thin-ge' e-she don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
559. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga on-tho ba thon ta mi'-kshe in da', a bin da,
tsiga,
560. Ts'e' wa-tse-xi mi-kshe in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
561. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga on-tha' bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
562. Ts'e' wa-tse-xi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
563. He'-dsi xtsi a', a"bin da, tsi ga,
564. Wa'-kon-da e-shki don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
565. Wa'-kon-da on-ki-tha-zha-ta bi a-thi" he in da', a bi" da, tsi ga,
566. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga on-tha' bi do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
567. Wa'-kon-da a-ki-tha-zha-ta bi ki-the mon-thin t-a bi a', zhin-ga',
a bin da, tsi ga,
568. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
569. Wa'-kon-da e-shki do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
570. On'-ta-kshin bi a-thin he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
571. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga on-tha bi do" a', a bi° da, tsi ga,
572. Wa'-kon-da e-shki do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
573. A'-ta-kshin bi ki-the mon-thin ta bi a', zhin-ga', a bin da, tsi ga,
574. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
575. Wa'-kon-da e-shki do" a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
576. Be' hi on-gtha mon-zhi in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
577. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga on-tha' bi do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
578. Wa'-kon-da e-shki don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
579. Be' hi a-gtha ba zhi bi ki-the mo°-thin ta bi a', zhin-ga', a bin
da, tsi ga,
580. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
581. Wa'-kon-da e-shki do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
582. Hi' on-won-ga ci-da bi a-thin he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
583. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga on-tha' bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
584. Wa'-kon-da e'-shki do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
585. Hi' u-^i-da bi ki-the mon-thin ta bi a', zhin-ga', a bin da, tsi ga,
586. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
587. Wa'kon-da e-shki don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
588. Hi' on-ki-tha-shon bi a'-thin he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
376 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH, ANN. 36
589. Zhin/-ga zho-i-ga o"-tha' bi do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
590. Wa'-kon-da e-shki don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
591. Hi' a-ki-tha-shon bi ki-the mon-thin ta bi a', zhin-ga', a bin da,
tsi ga,
592. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
593. Hon'-ga u-dse-the pe-thon-ba ni-ka-shi-ga ba don a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
594. Ha' ! wi-con-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
595. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga tha bi thin-ge' a-tha, wi-con-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a
bin da, tsi ga,
596. Hon'-ga wa-tse-ga-wa to" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
597. Thu-e' xtsi pi-thu-?e the don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
598. I'n'-9a-be thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
599. He'-dsi xtsi hi non-zhin ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
600. Ha' ! wi-zhin-the, e a'-gthi non-zhin to" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
601. Wi'-tsi-go win e-dsi a-ka', wi-zhin-the, e a'-gthi non-zhin to" a',
a bin da, tsi ga,
602. Ha' ! wi-con-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
603. Wi'-con-ga a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
604. Wi'-tsi-go win e-dsi thin-kshe e a-ka', wi-con-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a
bin da, tsi ga,
605. E'-ta pa-mon-gthe xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
606. ^i' thu-ca ba don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
607. 'In'-ca-be thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
608. He'-dsi xtsi hi non-zhin bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
609. Ha' ! Wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
610. Wi'-tsi-go e', e-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
611. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga tha bi thin-ge a-tha, Wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-a bi a',
a bin da, tsi ga,
612. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
613. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga tha bi thin-ge' e-she don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
614. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga on-tha ba thon-ta mi-kshe in da', a bin da, tsi-ga,
615. Ts'e' wa-tse mi-kshe in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
616. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga on-tha' bi do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
617. Ts'e' wa-tse-xi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsi" da', a bin da, tsi ga,
618. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
619. Wa'-kon-da e-shki don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
620. Wa'-kon-da on-ki-tha-zha-ta bi a-thin he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
621. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga on-tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga
622. Wa'-kon-da a-ki-tha-zha-ta bi ki-the mon-thin ta bi a', zhin-ga',
a bin da, tsi ga,
623. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
624. Wa'-kon-da e-shki don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
625. On/-ta-kshin bi a-thin he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
LA TLESCHE]
TRIBAL RITES OSAGE LANGUAGE
377
626. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga on-tha' bi do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
627. Wa'-kon-da e-shki don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
628. A'-ta-tshin bi ki-the mon-thin ta bi a', zhin-ga', a bin da, tsi ga,
629. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
630. Wa'-kon-da e-shki don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
631. Be' hi on-gtha mon-zhi in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
632. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga on-tha' bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
633. Wa'-kon-da e'-shki do" a', a bin da. tsi ga,
534. Be' hi a-gtha ba zhi bi ki-the mon-thin ta bi a', zhin-ga', a bi" da,
tsi ga,
635. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
636. Wa'-kon-da e'-shki don a', a b'in da. tsi ga,
637. Hi' on-won-ga-fi-da bi a-thin he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
638. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga on-tha' bi do" a', a bin da, (si ga,
639. Wa'-kon-da e-shki do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
640. Hi' u-ci-da bi ki-the mon-thin ta bi a', zhin-ga', a bin da, tsi ga,
641. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
642. Wa'-kon-da e'-shki don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
643. Hi' on-ki-tha-shon bi a-thin he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
644. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga on-tha' bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
645. Wa'-kon-da e-shki don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
646. Hi' a-ki-tha-shon bi ki-the mon-thin ta bi a', zhin-ga', a bin da,
tsi ga.
647. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
648. Hon'-ga u-dse-the pe-thon-ba ni-ka-shi-ga ba don a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
649. Ha' ! wi-9On-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
650. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga tha bi thin-ge a-tha, wi-con-ga, e'-ki-a bi a',
a bin da, tsi ga,
651. Hon'-ga wa-tse-ga-wa ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
652. Thu-e' xtsi fi-thu-ce the do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
653. 'In'-zho-cka thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
654. He'-dsi xtsi hi non-zhin ton a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
655. Ha' ! wi-zhin-the, e-a'-gthi non-zhin to" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
656. Wi'-tsi-go win e-dsi a-ka', wi-zhin-the, e a'-gthi non-zhin ton a',
a bin da, 'tsi ga,
657. Ha' ! wi-fOn-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
658. Wi'-con-ga a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
659. Wi'-tsi-go win e-dsi thin-kshe e a-ka', wi-con-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a
bin da, tsi ga,
660. E'-ta fm-mon-gthe xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
661. ^i'-thu-pa ba do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
662. 'In'-zho-cka thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
378 THE OSAGE TBIBE [BTH. ANN. 36
663. He'-dsi xtsi hi non-zhin bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
664. Ha' ! Wi-tsi-go e, e-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
665. Wi'-tsi-go-e', e-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
666. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga tha bi thin-ge a-tha, Wi-tsi-go-e', e-gi-a bi a',
a bin da, tsi ga,
667. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
668. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga tha bi thin-ge' e-she doa a', a bin da, tsi ga,
669. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga on-tha ba thon ta mi-kshe in da', a bin da, (si ga,
670. Ts'e' wa-tse-xi mi-kshe in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
671. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga on-tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
672. Ts'e' wa-tse-xi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
673. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
674. Wa'-kon-da e'-shki doa a', a bin da, tsi ga,
675. Wa'-kon-da on-ki-tha-zha-ta bi a-thin he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
676. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga on-tha' bi do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
677. Wa'-kon-da a-ki-tha-zha-ta bi ki-the mon-thin ta bi a', zhin-ga',
a bin da, tsi ga,
678. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
679. Wa'-kon-da e'-shki don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
680. O'-ta-kshiD bi a-thin he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
681. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga on-tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
682. Wa'-kon-da e-shki don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
683. A'-ta-kshin bi ki-the mon-thin ta bi a', zhin-ga, a bin da, tsi ga,
684. He'-dsi xtsi a', a' bin da, tsi ga,
685. Wa'-kon-da e-shki don a', a biQ da, tsi ga,
686. Be' hi on-gtha man-zhi in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
687. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga on-tha bi don a', a biQ da, tsi ga,
688. Wa'-kon-da e'-shki don a, a bi" da, tsi ga,
689. Be' hi a-gtha ba zhi bi ki-the mon-thin ta bi a', zhin-ga', a bia
da, tsi ga,
690. He-dsi xtsi a, a bin da, tsi ga,
691. Wa'-kon-da e-shki don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
692. Hi' on-wan-ga-?i-da bi a-thin he in da, a bin da, tsi ga,
693. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga on-tha' bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
694. Wa'-kon-da e-shM don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
695. Hi' u-pida bi ki-the mon-thin ta bi a', zhin-ga', a bin da, tsi ga,
696. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
697. Wa'-kon-da e-shki don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
698. Hi' on-ki-tha-shon bi a-thin-he i" da', a bin da, tsi ga,
699. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga on-tha bi do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
700. Wa'-kon-da e-shki do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
701. Hi' a-ki-tha-shon bi ki-the mon-thin ta bi a', zhin-ga', a bin da,
tsi ga.
LATLISCM] TRIBAL, RITES OSAGE LANGUAGE 379
702. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
703. Hon'-ga u-dse-the pe-tho"-ba ni-ka-shi-ga ba do" a', a bin da,
taiga,
704. Ha' ! wi-pon-ga, e'-ki-a, bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
705. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga tha bi thin-ge a-tha, wi-pon-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a
bin da, tsi ga,
706. Hon'-ga wa-tse-ga-wa ton a', a bin da, (si ga,
707. Thu-e' xtsi pi-thu-pe the do" a', a bi" da, (si ga,
708. 'In'-zho pi thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
709. He'-dsi xtsi hi non-zhin to" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
710. Ha' ! wi-zhin-the, e a'-gthi non-zhin to" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
711. Wi'-tsi-go win e-dsi a-ka', wi-zhin-the, e a'-gthi non-zhin to" a',
a bin da, (si ga,
712. Ha' ! wi-pon-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, (si ga,
713. Wi'-pon-ga a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
714. Wi'-tsi-go win e-dsi thin-kshe, e a-ka', wi-pon-ga, e'-ki-a', bi a',
a' bin da, tsi ga,
715. E'-ta {>a-mon-gthe xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
716. £$' thu-pa ba don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
717. 'In'-zho 91 thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
718. He'-dsi xtsi hi non-zhin bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
719. Ha' ! Wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
720. Wi'-tsi-go e', e-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
721. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga tha bi thin-ge a-tha, Wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-a bi a',
a bin da, tsi ga,
722. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
723. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga tha bi thin-ge' e-she do0 a', a biQ da, tsi ga,
724. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga on-tha ba thon-ta mi-kshe in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
725. Ts'e' wa-tse-xi mi-kshe i" da', a bin da, tsi ga,
726. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga on-tha' bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
727. Ts'e' wa-tse-xi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
728. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
729. Wa'-kon-da e-shki do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
730. Wa'-kon-da on-ki-tha-zha-ta bi a-thi"-he in-da', a bin da, tsi ga,
731. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga on-tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
732. Wa'-kon-da a-ki-tha-zha-ta bi ki-the mo-'-thi11 ta bi a', zhin-ga',
a bi° da, tsi ga,
733. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
734. Wa'-kon-da e'-shki don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
735. O'-ta-kshin bi a-thi" he in-da', a bin da, tsi ga,
736. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga o"-tha' bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
737. Wa'-kon-da e'-shki do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
738. A'-ta-kshin bi ki-the mon-thin ta bi a', zhin-ga', a bin da, tsi ga,
739. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
380 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
740. Wa'-kon-da e'-shki don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
741. Be' hi on-gtha mon-zhi in da', a hi" da, tsi ga,
742. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga on-tha' bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
743. Wa'-ko"-da e'-shki don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
744. Be' hi a-gtha ba zhi bi ki-the moMhi" ta bi a', zhin-ga', a bin da,
tsi ga,
745. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
746. Wa'-ko"-da e'-shki don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
747. Hi' on-wo"-ga-ci-da bi a-thin he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
748. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga on-tha' bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
749. Wa'-ko"-da e-shki don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
750. Hi' u-ci-da bi ki-the mon-thin ta bi a', zhin-ga', a bin da, tsi ga,
751. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
752. Wa'-ko"-da e-shki don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
753. Hi' o"-ki-tha-sho" bi a-thi" he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
754. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga on-tha' bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
755. Wa'-ko"-da e'-shki do" a', a bin-da, tsi ga,
756. Hi' a-ki-tha-sho° bi ki-the mon-thin ta bi a', zhin-ga', a bi" da,
tsi ga,
757. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
758. Hon'-ga u-dse-the pe-thon-ba ni-ka-shi ga ba don a', a bia da,
tsi ga,
759. Ha' ! wi-c on-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
760. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga tha bi thin-ge' a-tha, wi-po"-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a
bi" da, tsi ga,
761. Hon'-ga wa-tse-ga-wa ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
762. Ga' xtsi hi tha i-don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
763. 'In'-xe shto"-ga thin-kshe non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
764. He'-dsi xtsi hi non-zhin ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
765. Ha' ! Wi-tsi-go e', e tsi-the a, a bin da, tsi ga,
766. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga tha bi thin-ge a-tha, Wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-a bi a',
a bin da, tsi ga,
767. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
768. Ha' ! wi-zhin-the, e agthi non-zhin to" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
769. Wi'-tsi-go wi" e-dsi a-ka', wi-zhi"-the', a a-gthi no°-zhi" to" a',
a bin da, tsi ga,
770. Ha' ! wi-co"-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
771. Wi'-tsi-go wi" e-dsi thi"-kshe e a-ka', wi-co"-ga a-ka', a bi" da,
tsi ga,
772. E'-ta pa-mo°-gthe xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
773. £i' thu-?a ba do" a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
774. 'In'-xe shto"-ga thi°-kshe a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
775. E'-dsi xtsi hi no°-zhi" bi a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
LA FLISCHE] TRIBAL, RITES OSAGE LANGUAGE 381
776. Ha' ! Wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-a hi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
777. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga tha hi thi"-ge a-tha, Wi-tsi-go c', c-gi-a bi a'
a bin da, tsi ga,
778. Ha' ! Zhin-ga', a bin da, tsi ga,
779. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga o"-tha ba thon-ta mi-kshe in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
780. Ts'e' wa-tse-xi mi-kshe in da', a' bin da, tsi ga,
781. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga on-tha' bi do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
782. Ts'e' wa-tse-xi ki-the mo"-thin ta i tsi" da', a bin da, tsi ga,
783. Zhin'-ga zho da-ka-da bi do" a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
784. Zhin'-ga zho da-ka-de da-ci-ge on-ki'-gtha-thin mon-thin ta i tsi"
da', zhin-ga, a bi" da, tsi ga,
785. Zhin'-ga o-ho-shi-ga bi do" a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
786. O'-ho-shi-ge da-ci-ge o"-ki'gtha-thi" mo"-thi° ta i tsi" da',
zhi"-ga, a bi" da, tsi ga,
787. Zhi"'-ga zho-i-ga o°-tha' bi do" a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
788. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mo"-thin ta i tsi" da', a bi" da, tsi ga,
789. Ho"'-ba tha-gthi" shki u-ni'-ka-shi-ga ki-the mo"-thi" ta i tsin
da', a bin da, tsi ga.
790. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
791. Ho°'-ga wa-tse-ga-wa to" a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
792. Thu-e' xtsi fi-thu-ce the do" a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
793. '!"' shu-shu-dse thi"-kshe no" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
794. He'-dsi xtsi hi non-zhi" to" a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
795. Ha' ! Wi-tsi-go e', a bin da, tsi ga,
796. Zhi"'-ga zho-i-ga tha bi thin-ge' a-tha, Wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-a bi a';
a bi" da, tsi ga,
797. Zhi°'-ga zho-i-ga o"-tha ba thon ta mi-kshe in da', a bi" da, tsi ga,
798. He'-dsi xtsi a-gthi no"-zhin to" a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
799. Wi'-zhi°-the, e a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
800. Wi'-tsi-go win e-dsi a-ka', wi-zhi"-the, e a'-gthi non-zhi" to" a',
a bin da, tsi ga,
801. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
802. Wi'-co"-ga a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
803. Wi'-tsi-go win e-dsi thi"-kshe e a-ka', wi-$o"-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a,
bi" da, tsi ga,
804. E'-ta pa-mo"-gthe xtsi a, a bin da, tsi ga,
805. (,'i'-thu-ca ba do" a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
806. 'I" '-shu-shu-dse thin-kshe no" a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
807. He'-dsi xtsi hi no"-zhi" bi a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
808. Ha' ! Wi-tsi-go e, e a', a bin da, tsi ga,
809. Zhi"'-ga zho-i-ga tha bi thin-ge' a-tha, Wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-a bi a',
a bi" da, tsi ga,
810. Ha' ! Zhi"-ga, e'-tsi-the a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
811. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga tha bi thi"-ge' e-she do" a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
382 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
812. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga on-tha ba thon ta mi-kshe in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
813. Ts'e' wa-tse-xi mi-kshe in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
814. Zbin'-ga zho-i-ga on-tha' bi do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
815. Ts'e' wa-tse-xi ki-the mon-thin ta i tse a', zhin-ga', a bin da,
tsiga,
816. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
817. Zhin'-ga a-ho-shi-ga bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
818. O'-ho-shi-ge da-ci-ge on-ki'-gtha-thin mon-thin ta i tse a', zhin-ga',
a bin da, tsi ga,
819. Zhin'-ga zho da-ka-da bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
820. Zho'-da-ka-de da-ci-ge on-ki'-gtha-thin mon-thin t& i tse a'
zhin-ga', a bin da, tsi ga,
821. Zhin'-ga u-non on-gi-the mon-thin bi don shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
822. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tse a', zhin-ga', a bin da,
tsiga.
823. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
824. Hon'-ga u-dse-the pe-thon-ba ni-ka-shi-ga ba do" a', a bin da,
tsiga,
825. Ha' ! wi-<?on-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
826. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga tha bi thin-ge a-tha, wi-con-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a
bin da, tsi ga,
827. Hon'-ga A-hiu-ton ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
828. Ha' ! wi-zhin-the, e'-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
829. Thu-e' xtsi ci-thu-ce the don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
830. Ni' mon-hon dsi xtsi ge dsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
831. 'In'-zhin-ga thin-kshe non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
832. E'-dsi xtsi hi non-zhin ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
833. Ha' ! Wi-tsi-go e', a bin da, tsi ga,
834. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga tha bi thin-ge' a-tha, Wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-a bi a',
a bin da, tsi ga,
835. Ha' ! zhin-ga, e'-tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
836. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga on-tha ba thon ta mi-kshe in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
837. Ha' ! wi-con-ga, e' a-gthi non-zhin ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
838. 'In'-zhi"-ga win e-dsi a'-ka, wi-con-ga, e' a-gthi non-zhin to" a',
a bin da, tsi ga,
839. Wi'-zhin-the a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
840. 'In'-zhin-ga win e-dsi thin-kshe e a-ka', wi-con-ga, e'-ki-a bi a',
a bin da, tsi ga,
841. E'-ta pa-mon-gthe xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
842. (,/Y thu-ca ba don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
843. 'In'-zhin-ga thin-kshe non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
844. He'-dsi xtsi hi non-zhin bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
845. Ni'-ha ga-mi'-mi-tha xtsi thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
846. Ha' ! Wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
TRIBAL KITES — OSAGB LANGUAGE 883
847. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga tha bi thin-ge' a-tha, Wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-a bi a',
a bin da, tsi ga,
848. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
849. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga tha bi thin-ge' e-she don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
850. Ts'e' wa-tse-xi mi-kshe in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
851. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga on-tha' bi don a, a bin da, tsi ga,
852. Ts'e' wa-tse-xi ki-the mon-thin ta bi a', zhin-ga', a bin da, tsi ga,
853. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
854. Kon'-ha ga-mi-mi-the ga ge shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
855. Ni'-ka non hi do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
856. Ko°'-ha ga-mi-mi-the ga ge shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
857. Ta'-xpi hi" ca-dse a bi i-the ki-the mo°-thin ta bi a', zhin-ga', a
bin da, tsi ga,
858. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
859. Ni'-ka ts'a-ge hi bi don a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
860. Ta'-xpi hi" ca-dse a bi, i-the ki-the mon-thin ta bi a', zhin-ga',
a bin da, tsi ga,
861. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
862. Wa'-kon-da Hon-ba do" thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
863. I'-bi-con-dse on-kshi-the ta bi a',' wi-pon-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a bi"
da, tsi ga,
864. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga on-tha' bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
865. Wa'-kon-da Hon-ba.don thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
866. Zho'-i-ga the xtsi ni-ka-shi-ga ki-the mon-thin ta bi a', wi-con-ga,
e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
867. Hon'-ba do-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
868. Hon'-ba u-ca-ki-ba do-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
869. U'-hi ki-the mon-thin ta bi a', wi-fOn-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da,
tsiga,
870. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta bi a', wi-9On-ga, e'-ki-a bi a',
a bin da, tsi ga.
871. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
872. Hon'-ga u-dse-the pe-thon-ba ni-ka-shi-ga ba do" a', a bin da,
tsiga,
873. Ha' ! wi-?o"-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
874. Zhin'-ga non-bthe tha ba thon-tse thin-ge' atha, wi-fon-ga, e'-ki-a
bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
875. Hon'-ga wa-tse-ga-wa to" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
876. Ha' ! wi-£On-ga, e'-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
877. Zhin'-ga non-bthe tha ba thon-tse thin-ge' atha, wi-pon-ga, e'-gi-a
bi a, a bin da, tsi ga,
878. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
879. Thu-e' xtsi ci-thu-^e the do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
880. Dse' kon-ha dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
384 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
881. Ho'-xthon-(a-xe hi ton noa a', a bin da, tsi ga,
882. He'-dsi xtsi hi non-zhin to" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
883. He'-dsi xtsi a-thin gi e don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
884. Ha' ! wi-zhin-the', e a-gthi-non-zhin ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
885. The' hon, wi-zhi"-the', e a-gthi non-zhin ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
886. I'-k'u-tse a-tsia-tha ba don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
887. I'-u-tha-mon-ce a-tsia-tha ba don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
888. Ha' ! wi-9On-ga, e'-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
. 889. Non'-bthe thon-ta zhi a', wi-con-ga, e'-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
890. E' thon-zha', a bin da, tsi ga,
891. Mi' hi-e ge ta', a bin da, tsi ga,
892. We'-ki-i-he-on-the ta bi a', wi-con-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
893. Non', wi-con-ga, e'-gi-a, bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
894. Zhin'-ga non-bthe tha ba thon-tse thin-ge' a-tha, wi-9<>n-ga, e'-gi-a'
bi a, a bin da, tsi ga,
895. Thu-e' xtsi pi-thu-ce the do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
896. Dse' kon-ha dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
897. £in' mon-non ta hi ton non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
898. E'-dsi xtsi hi non-zhin ton-a', a bin da, tsi ga,
899. E'-dsi xtsi a-thin gi-e do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
900. The hon/, wi-zhin-the', e a-gthi non-zhin ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
901. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
902. I'-k'u-tse a-tsia-tha ba don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
903. Non'-bthe thon-ta zhi a', wi-con-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsiga,
904. E' tho" zha', a bin da, tsi ga,
905. Mi' hi-e ge ta, a bin da, tsi ga,
906. We'-ki-i-he-on-the ta bi a, wi-con-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
907. Non/, wi-con-ga, e'-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
908. Zhin'-ga non-bthe tha ba thon-tse thin-ge' a-tha, wi-con-ga, e'-gi-a
bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
909. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
910. Dse' u-ckon-9ka dsi xtsi a', a bia da, (si ga,
911. Tse'-wa-the kshe non a', a bin da, (si ga,
912. Non'-pa-hon a-tsia-tha ba do" a', a bin da, (si ga,
913. He'-dsi xtsi a-thin gi-e don a', a bin da, (si ga,
914. The hon/, wi-zhin-the', e a-gthi-non-zhin ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
915. Ha' ! wi-con-ga, e'-gi-a bi a', a bin da, (si ga,
916. I'-k'u-tse a-tsi a-tha ba do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
917. Ba'-ce-ni e-gon a', a bin da, tsi ga,
918. Tha'-dsu-zhe gthe a-ka', a bin da, (si ga,
919. Ha' ! wi-£On-ga, e'-gi-a bi a, a bin da, (si ga,
920. The e' shnon u-tha-dse tha to" she a', wi-con-ga, e'-gi-a bi a', a
bin da, (si ga,
LAFLBSCHE] TRIBAL RITES OSAGE LANGUAGE 385
921. Zhin'-ga non-bthe the mon-thin ta bi a', wi-9On-ga, e'-ki-a bi a, a
bin da tsi ga,
922. Zhin'-ga non-bthe the mon-thin bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
923. A'-dsu-ta i-ga-ci-ge ki-the mon-thin ta bi a', wi-con-ga, e'-ki-a bi
a, a bi" da, tsi ga,
924. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
925. Non', wi-con-ga, e'-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
926. U'-ton-be tha-the tse a', wi-?on-ge, e'-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
927. Hon'-ga wa-tse-ga-wa ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
928. Thu-e' xtsi ci-thu-pe the don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
929. Dse' go-da kon-ha dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
930. Do' thin-kshe non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
931. He'-dsi xtsi hi non-zhin ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
932. He'-dsi xtsi a-thin gi-e don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
933. The hon/, wi-zhin-the', e a-gthi-non-zhin ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
934. I'-k'u-tse a-tsia-tha ba don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
935. Ba'-pe-ni e-gon a', a bin da, tsi ga,
936. Tha'-dsu-zhe gthe a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
937. Ha' ! wi-£On-ga, e'-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
938. The e'-shnon u-tha-dse tha-ton-she a', \vi-con-ga, e'-gi-a bi a', a
bi" da, tsi ga,
939. Zhin'-ga non-bthe the mon-thin ta bi a', wi-pon-ga, e'-ki-a bi a',
a bin da, tsi ga,
940. Zhin'-ga non-bthe tha bi don shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
941. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta bi a', wi-90n-ga, e'-ki-a bi a',
a bin da, ^si ga,
942. A'-dsu-ta i-ga-fi-ge ki-the mon-thin ta bi a', wi-con-ga, e'-ki-a bi
a, a bin da, tsi ga,
943. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
944. Non/ wi-con-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
945. Zhin'-ga non-bthe tha ba thon tse thin-ge' a-tha, wi-<?on-ga, e'-ki-a,
bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
946. Hon'-ga wa-tse-ga-wa ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
947. Ha' ! wi-con-ga, e'-gi-a bi a, a bin da, tsi ga,
948. U'-ton-be tha-the tse a', wi-9on-ga, e'-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
949. Thu-e' xtsi fi-thu-pe the do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
950. ^in'" thin-kshe dsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
951. Dse' go-da kon-ha dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
952. ^in/ thin-kshe non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
953. He'-dsi xtsi a-thin gi-e do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
954. The hon', wi-zhin-the, e a'-gthi non-zhin to" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
955. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
956. I'-k'u-tse a-tsia-tha ba don a', a biB da, tsi ga,
2786—21 25
386 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
957. Ba'-ce-ni e-gon tha-dsu-zhe gtha bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
958. Ha' ! wi-£On-ga, e'-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
959. Zhin/-ga non-bthe tha ba thon ta a-ka', wi-con-ga, e'-gi-a bi a',
a bin da, tsi ga,
960. Zhin'-ga non-bthe tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
961. Ni' da-ka-dse u-bi-don mon-thin ta bi a', wi-con-ga, e'-ki-a, bi a',
a bin da, tsi ga,
962. E'thon-zha', a biQ da, tsi ga,
963. Mi' hi-e ge ta', a bin da, tsi ga,
964. We'-ki-i-he-the on-mon-thin ta bi a', wi-con-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a
bin da, tsi ga,
965. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
966. Non/, wi-con-ga, e'-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
967. U'-ton-be tha-the ta tse a', wi-con-ga, e'-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
968. Hon'-ga wa-tse-ga-wa ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
969. Dse' go-da kon-ha dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
970. U'-cu-u-gthon xtsi ge dsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
971. Hon'-bthin-cu thin-kshe non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
972. He'-dsi xtsi hi non-zhin ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
973. He'-dsi xtsi a-thin gi-e don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
974. The hon/, wi-zhin-the, e a'-gthi non-zhin ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
975. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
976. I'-k'u-tse a-tsia-tha ba don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
977. Zhin'-ga non-bthe the ta a-ka', wi-con-ga, e'-gi-a bi a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
978. E'thon-zha', a bin da, tsi ga,
979. Zhin'-ga non-bthe tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
980. Ni' da-ka-dse u-bi-don mon-thin ta bi a', wi-con-ga, e'-ki-a bi a',
a bin da, tsi ga,
981 E'thon-zha', a bin da, tsi ga,
982 Mi' hi-e ge ta, a bin da, tsi ga,
983 We'-ki-i-he-on-the ta bi a', wi-con-ga, e'-ki-a, bi a', a bin da,
tsi ga.
THE TA WA'-THON (DEER SONGS)
SONG 1
(Free translation and music, p. 186)
1
Wi-tsin-do non she-tho ton no",
Wi-tsin-do non she-tho ton non,
£i no"-noI!-ge he, <;i non-non-e,
Qi non-non-ge he,
Wi-tsin-do no" she-tho to" no",
Wi-tsin-do non she-tho to" no",
Ci non-non-ge he, ?i no"-noI1-e)
Ci non-no"-ge he,
Wi-tsin do no" she-tho to" no".
LAFLKSCUE] TRIBAL RITES OSAGE LANGUAGE 387
Wi-tsin-do no" Bhe-tho to" no",
Wi-tsin-do non she-tho ton no",
He non-non-ge he, he no"-non-e,
He non-non-ge he,
Wi-tsin-do non she-tho ton non,
Wi-tsin-do non she-tho to" no",
He non-non-ge he, he non-non-e,
He non-non-ge he,
Wi-tsi"-do no" she-tho to" no".
SONG 2
(Free translation and music, p. 187)
1
Tsin-do he ska gthe he, tsin-do he fka gthe he,
£i non-no°-e, yi no"-non-ge he,
Tsi"-do he fka gthe he, tsin-do he ?ka gthe he,
Qi non-no"-e, gi non-non-ge he,
Tsin-do he gka gthe he, tsi°-do he ?ka gthe he.
Tsin-do he cka gthe he, tsin-do he gka gthe he,
He non-non-e, he no°-non-ge he,
Tsin-do he gka gthe he, tsin-do he fka gthe he,
He non-no"-e, he non-non-ge he,
Tsin-do he ?ka gthe he, tsi"-do he ?ka-gthe he.
SONG 3
(Froo translation and music, p. 188)
Wi-tsin-do no" ku-dse to" non,
Wi-tsin-do nou ku-dse to" non,
O-e no"-non-ge he, o-e non-no"-e,
O-e non-non-ge he,
Wi-tsin-do non ku-dse to" no",
Wi/-tsi"-do no" Vu-dse to" non,
O-e non-no°-ge he, o-e non-non-e,
O-e non-non-ge he,
Wi/-tsin-do no" ku-dse to" no".
SONG 4
(Free translation and music, p. 189)
O da the, o da ni-wa,
O da the ha, o da ni wa,
Wa-dsi-tha the ho-tha-dse,
Wa-dei-tha the ho-tha-dse wa-to,
O da the. o da ni wa,
O da the ha. o da ni wa {o
388 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
O da the, o da ni wa,
O da the ha, o da ni wa,
Wa-dsi tha the hi-tha-the,
Wa-dsi-tha the hi-tha-the wa-to,
O da the, o da ni wa,
O da the ha, o da ni wa to.
SONG 5
(Free translation and music, p. 190)
E-gi-u" ba ha 511 wa, e-gi-un ba ha gu-wa,
Zhe-ga ba ha gu-wa, e-gi-un ba ha gu-wa,
E-gi-u n ba ha gu-wa,
E-gi-un ba ha gu-wa, e-gi-un ba ha gu-wa,
Zhe-ga ba-ha gu-wa, e-gi-u " ba ha gu-wa
E-gi-un ba ha gu-wa, e-gi-u" ba ha gu-wa,
Mon-ge ba ha gu-wa, e-gi-u° ba ha gu-wa,
E-gi-u" ba ha cu-wa a,
E-gi-un ba ha gu-wa, e-gi-un ba ha fu-wa,
Mon-ge ba ha gu-wa, e-gi-ua ba ha fu-wa,
E-gi-u n ba ha gu-wa, e-gi-u n ba ha gu-wa,
Pa nu" ba ha fu-wa, e-gi-u" ba ha gu-wa,
E-gi-u " ba ha gu-wa a,
E-gi-u° ba ha gu-wa, e-gi-un ba ha gu-wa,
Pa non ba ha gu-wa, e-gi-un ba ha gu-wa.
SONG 6
(Free translation and music, p. 191)
Xo. 9
1
Ta-xtsi-e, ta-xtsi-e wa-dsu-ta zhin-ga,
I-wi-the thon-dsi-e, ta-xtsi-e, ta-xtsi-e,
Ta-xtsi-e wa-dsu-ta zhi°-ga,
Pi-gi ga-be hi dei ton,
I-wi-the thon-dsi-e, ta-xtsi-e, ta-xtsi-e.
Ta-xtsi-e, ta-xtsi-e wa-dsu-ta zhin-ga,
I-wi-the thon-dsi-e, ta-xtsi-e, ta-xtsi-e,
Ta-xtsi-e wa-dsu-^a zhin-ga,
Pi-gi hi dsi to",
I-wi-the tho" dsi-e, ta-xtsi-e, ^a-xtsi-e.
LAFLESCHE] TRIBAL KITES— OSAGE LANGUAGE 389
Ta-xtsi-e, ta-xtsi-e wa-dsu-ta zhi°-ga,
I-wi-the thon dsi-e, ta-xtsi-e, ta-xtsi-e,
Ta-xtei-e wa-dsu-ta zhi" ga,
fa-shka hi dsi to",
I-wi-the thon dsi-e, ta-xtsi-e, ta-xtsi-e.
Ta-xtsi-e, ta-xtsi-e wa-dsu-ta zhi" ga,
I-wi-the thon dsi-e, ta-xtsi-e, ta-xtsi-e,
Ta-xtsi-e wa-dsu-ta zhin-ga,
Xa-dse ba-tse he dsi to",
I-wi-the tho" dsi-e, ta-xtsi-e, ta-xtsi-e.
984. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
985. Hon'-ga u-dse-the pe-thon-ba ni-ka-shi-ga ba don a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
986. Ha' ! wi-?on-ga, e'-ki-e non-zhin bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
987. We'-ki-k'on win thin-ge a-tha, wi-con-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
988. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
989. Zhin'-ga wa-zhin gi-tha bi thin-ge a-tha, wi-fOn-ga, e'-ki-a bi a',
a bin da, tsi ga,
990. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
991. Hon'-ga wa-tse-ga-wa ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
992. Thu-e' xtsi ci-thu-ce the do" a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
993. A'-ba-do a-ga-ha dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
994. In'-gthon-ga do-ga to" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
995. Tho' to" hi non-zhin bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
996. Ha' ! Wi-tsi-go-e', e-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
997. Zhin'-ga wa-zhin gi-tha bi thin-ge a-tha, Wi-tsi-go-e', e-gi-a bi
a', a bin da, tsi ga,
998. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
999. Zhin'-ga wa-zhin gi-tha bi thin-ge' e-she do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1000. Zhin'-ga wa-zhin gi-tha ba thon ta a-ton he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
1001. ^in'-dse thi-bo-xa tsi-the do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1002. ^in'-dse i-ta-xe sha-be ga thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1003. Pe'-dse gi-the mon-thin ta i tsi° da', a bin da, tsi ga,
1004. Pe'-dse gi-the mon-thin bi don shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1005. Pe'-dse gi-shon-tha zhi ki-the mon-thin ta bin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
1006. (^i'-ha u-sha-be ga thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1007. Non'-xthe a-gi-the a-thin he in da, e'-tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1008. Pa'-zhu-zhe i-ta-xe sha-be ga thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1009. Non'-xthe a-gi-the a-thin he in da' e to", a bin da, tsi ga,
390 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
1010. Non-ta i-ta-xe sha-be ga-thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1011. Non'-xthe a-gi-the a-ton he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
1012. Zhin'-ga non-xthe tha bi don shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1013. Non'-xthe gi-sha-be ki-the mon-thin ta bin da', a bin da tsi ga,
1014. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1015. Hon'-ga wa-tse-ga-wa to" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1016. Ga' xtsi hi tha i don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1017. Tse'-xe xtsi ge dsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1018. Wa'-ca-be u-ca-ka thin-ge ton non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1019. Tho' ton hi non-zhin bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1020. Po'-e to" hi non-zhin bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1021. Non'-be ba-ha to" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1022. Ha! Wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1023. Zhin'-ga wa-zhin gi-tha bi thin-ge' a-tha, Wi-tsi-go e', e-gi a bi
a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1024. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1025. Zhin'-ga wa-zhin gi-tha ba thon ta a ton he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
1026. Non'-be zha-ta ga ge a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1027. Pe'-dse a-gi-the a-ton he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
1028. Zhin'-ga pe-dse gi the mon-thin bi don shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1029. Pe'-dse gi-shon-tha zhi ki-the mon-thin ta bin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
1030. Q' ha u-sha-be ga thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1031. Non'-xthe a-gi-the a-thin he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
1032. Zhin'-ga non-xthe gi tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1033. Non'-xthe gi-ca-be ki-the mon-thin ta bin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
1034. Pa'-zhu-zhe i-ta-xe sha-be ga thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1035. Non'-xthe a-gi-the a-thin he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
1036. Zhin'-ga non-xthe gi tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1037. Non'-xthe gi-sha-be ki-the mon-thin ta bin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
1038. Zhu'-i-ga ca-be ga kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1039. Non'-xthe a-gi-the a-thin he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
1040. Zhin'-ga non-xthe gi-the mon-thin bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1041. Non'-xthe gi-ca-be ki-the mon-thin ta bin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
1042. Hon'-ga wa-tse-ga-wa ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1043. Thu-'e xtsi ci-thu-ce the don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1044. Tse'-xe xtsi ge dsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1045. Mi'-xa cka ton-ga thin-kshe non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1046. He'-dsi xtsi hi non-zhin to" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1047. Ha' ! Wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1048. Zhin'-ga wa-zhin gi-tha bi thin-ge a-tha, Wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-a bi
a', a bin da, tsi ga,
LAFLESCHB] TRIBAL KITES OSAGE LANGUAGE 391
1049. Ha'! zhin-ga, e'-tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga, '
1050. Zhin'-ga wa-zhin gi-tha bi thin-ga bi e'-she do" a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
1051. Zhin'-ga wa-zhin gi-tha ba thon ta a-ton he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
1052. (Ji' kon-ha sha-be ga thin-kshc shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1053. Pe'-dse a-gi-the a-thin he in da, e ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1054. Pa'-zhu-zhe i-ta-xe sha-be ga thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1055. Pe'-dse a-gi-the a-thin he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
1056. Zhin'-ga pe-dse gi-the mon-thin bi don shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1057. Pe'-dse gi-shon-tha zhi ki-the mon-thin ta bin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
1058. Zhin'-ga wa-zhin gi-tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1059. Wa'-kon-da e-shki don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1060. Ni' on-won-ta-thin bi a-thin he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
1061. Zhin-ga wa-zhin gi-tha bi don a, a bin da, tsi ga,
1062. Ni' u-ta-thin bi ki-the mon-thin ta bi a', zhin-ga, a bin da, tsi gn.
1063. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
1064. Zhin'-ga wa-zhin gi-tha bi thin-ge a-tha- wi-con-ga, e'-ki-a bi a',
a bin da, tsi ga
1065. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1066. Hon'-ga wa-tse ga-wa ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1067. Thu-e' xtsi ci-thu-?e the don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1068. In'-gthon-ga do-ga ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1069. Tho' ton hi non-zhin bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1070. Zhin'-ga wa-zhin thi-gi-the ta bi a', Wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-a bi a', a
bin da, tsi ga,
1071. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1072. Zhin'-ga wa-zhin gi-tha ba thon ta a-ton he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
1073. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1074. Wi-?on-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1075. In'-gthon-ga bi a, wi-con-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1076. Zha'-zhe on-ki-ton ta bi a', wi-con-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a bln da,
tsi ga,
1077. In'-gthon-ga ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1078. Zha'-zhe on-ki-ton ta bi a', wi-fOn-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
1079. In'-gthon-ga zhin-ga, a bin da, tsi ga,
1080. Zha'-zhe on-ki-ton ta bi a', \vi-con-ga, e'-kia bi a', a bin da.
tsi ga,
1081. In'-gthon-ga zhin-ga', a bin da, tsi ga,
1082. Zha'-zhe on-ki-ton on-mon-thin ta bi a', wi-9On-ga, e'-ki-a bi a'
a bi° da, tsi ga.
392 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
1083. Hon'-ga wa-tse-ga-wa ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1084. Thu-e' xtsi ci-thu-ce the don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1085. Wa'-ca-be u-ca-ka thin-ge ton non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1086. Po'-e ton hi non-zhin bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1087. Zhin'-ga wa-zhin gi-tha bi thin-ge a-tha, Wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-a' bi
a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1088. Zhin'-ga wa-zhin gi-tha ba thon ta a-ton he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
1089. Ha' ! wi-con-ga, e' ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1090. Wa'-ca-ba bi a', wi-con-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1091. Sha'-ba bi a, wi-con-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1092. Zha'-zhe on-ki-ton ta bi a', wi-con-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
1093. Sha'-be tsi-gthe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1094. Zha'-zhe on-ki-ton on-mon-thin ta bi a', wi-con-ga, e'-ki-a bi a',
a bin da, tsi ga,
1095. Sha'-be i-tha-tha bi a', wi-con-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1096. Sha'-be i-the shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1097. Zha'-zhe on-ki-ton ta bi a', wi-con-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
1098. Non/, wi-con-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1099. Zhin'-ga wa-zhin gi-tha bi thin-ge' a-tha, wi-con-ga, e'-ki-a bi a',
a bin da, tsi ga,
1100. Tse'-xe xtsi ge dsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1101. Mi'-xa-cka ton-ga thin-kshe non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1102. Tho' thin-kshe hi non-zhin bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1103. Zhin'-ga wa-zhin gi-tha bi thin-ge' a-tha, Wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-a bi
a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1104. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1105. Ha'! wi-con-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1106. Zha'-zhe on-ki-ton ta bi a', wi-con-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
1107. £ka' bi a, wi-zhin-the, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1108. Wa'-zhin-ga bi a', wi-con-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1109. Mi'-xa-cka bi a, wi-con-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1110. Mi'-xa-cka shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1111. Zha'-zhe on-ki-ton ta bi a', wi-con-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
1112. Wa'-zhin-ga bi a, wi-con-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1113. (,)ka' bi a, wi-con-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1114. Wa'-zhin-pka shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1115. Zha'-zhe on-ki-ton ta bi a', wi-pon-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da,
tsi ga.
LAFLESCHE] TRIBAL, RITES OSAGE LANGUAGE 393
1116. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1117. Wa'-zha-zhe u-dse-the pe-thon-ba ni-ka-shi-ga ba don a', a bin
da, tsi ga,
1118. Xtha'-xtha thin-ge xtsi ni-ka-shi-ga thon-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
1119. Da' ni-the thin-ge xtsi ni-ka-shi-ga thon-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
1120. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1121. Non'-ni-on-ba win a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1122. Zho'-i-ga the xtsi ni-ka-shi-ga tho°-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
1123. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1124. Ha'! Hon-ga e', e-tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1125. Non'-ni-on-ba win zho-i-ga a-the a-thin he a', Hon-ga e', e-tsi-the
a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1126. Zho'-i-ga tha-the tha-thin-she don shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1127. Zho'-i-ga i-ts'a thin-ge tha-thin-she ta tse a', Hon-ga e', e-ton
a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
1128. Pa' u-shon ga thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1129. Pa'-u-shon-sho" a-gi-the a-thin he a', IIon-ga a', e-ton a', a bin
da, tsi ga,
1130. Pa' u-shon-shon tha-the don shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1131. Pa' u-shon-shon i-ts'a thin-ge' tha ki-the tha-thin-she ta tse a',
Hon-ga e', e ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1132. U'-thu-ga ga thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1133. I'-u-thu-ga a-gi-the a-thin he a', Hon-ga e', e ton a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
1134. Non'-ni-on-ba ga thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1135. I'-u-thu-ga tha-the tha-thin-she don shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1136. I'-u-thu-ga i-ts'a thin-ge tha-thin-she ta tse a', Hon-ga e', e to"
a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1137. Thi'-u-ba-he i'-sdu-ge ga kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1138. Thi'-u-ba-he a-gi-the a-thin he a', Hon-ga e', e to" a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
1139. Thi'-u-ba-he i'-sdu-ge ga kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1140. Thi'-u-ba-he tha-gi-the tha-thin-she do" shki a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
1141. Thi'-u-ba-he i-ts'a thin-ge tha-thin-she ta tse a', Hon-ga e', e
ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1142. Non'-ka on-he ga kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1143. Non'-ka on-he a-gi-the a-thin he a', Hon-ga e', e ton a', a bin da,
tsiga,
1144. Non'-ka on-he tha-the tha-thin-she don sliki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1145. Non'-ka on-he i-ts'a thin-ge tha-thin-she ta tse a', Hon-ga e', e
to" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
394 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
1146. Thi'-u-ba-he tha-ta ga kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1147. Thi'-u-ba-he a-gi-the a-thin he a', Hon-ga e', e ton a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
1148. Thi'-ii-ba-he tha gi the tha thin-she don shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1149. Thi'-u-ba-he i-ts'a thin-ge tha thin-she ta tse a', Hon-ga e', e
ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1150. U'-xtho-k'a ga kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1151. Thi'-u-thi-xthu-k'a a-gi-the a-thin he a tha, e' ton a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
1152. Thi'-u-thi-xtho-k'a tha the tha thin-she don shki a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
1153. Thi'-u-thi-xtho-k'a i-ts'a thin-ge tha-thin-she ta tse a', Hon-ga
e', e ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1154. We'-thin zhin-ga i-thi-don ga kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1155. Ni' a-kon-gthe a-gi-the a-thin he a-tha, e' ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1156. Ni' a-kon-gthe tha-gi-the tha-thin-she don shki a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
1157. Ni' a-kon i-ts'a thin-ge tha-thin-she ta tse a', Hon-ga e', e to"
a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1158. Mi' hi-e ge ta, a bin da, tsi ga,
1159. We'-gon-tha a-ni tha-thin-she don shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1160. We'-gon-tha thi-wa-ts'e-ga tha ki-the tha thin-she ta tse a',
Hon-ga e', e ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1161. Thon'-dse ba-he e-ton-ha non shki do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1162. We'-gon-tha thi-u-mon-ka tha-ki-the tha-thin-she ta tse a'.
Hon-ga e', e ton a', a bin da, tsi ga.
1163. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1164. Hon'-ga u-dse-the pe-thon-ba ni-ka-shi-ga ba don a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
1165. Xtha'-xtha thin-ge xtsi ni-ka-shi-ga thon-ka', a bin da, t-si ga,
1166. Da' ni-the thin-ge xtsi ni-ka-shi-ga thon-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
1167. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1168. Ha' ! Wa-zha-zhe', e tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1169. 'In' zhu-dse thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1170. Zho'-i-ga the xtsi a-ni-ka-shi-ga a-ton he a', Wa-zha-zhe', e ton
a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1171. Wa'-kon-da Hon-ba don thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1172. Zho'-i-ga the xtsi a-ni-ka-shi-ga a-ton he a', Wa-zha-zhe', e ton
a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1173. 'In' zhu-dse thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1174. Zho'-i-ga tha the tha thin-she do" shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1175. Wa'-kon-da e-shki do" a', a biQ da, tsi ga,
LAFLESCHB] TRIBAL KITES OSAGE LANGUAGE 395
1176. A'-ki-tha-zha-ta bi tha-ki-the tha-thin-she ta tse a', Wa-zha-
zhe', e-gi-a bi a, a bin da, tsi ga,
1177. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1178. 'In' zhu-dse thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1179. Zho'-i-ga the xtsi a-ni-ka-shi-ga a-thin he a', Wa-zha-zhe', e
ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1180. Zho'-i-ga tha the tha thin-she don shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1181. Wa'-kon-da e-shki do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1182. A'-ta-kshin bi tha-ki-the tha-thin-she ta tse a', Wa-zha-zhe', e
gi-a bi a', a biQ da, tsi ga,
1183. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bi° da, tsi ga,
1184. 'In/ zhu-dse thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1185. Zho'-i-ga tha the tha thin-she don shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1186. Wa'-kon-da e-shki don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1187. Be' hi on-gtha mon-zhi in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
1188. Wa'-kon-da e-shki don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1189. Be' hi a-gtha ba zhi tha-ki-the tha-thin-she ta tse a', Wa-zha-
zhe', e-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1190. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1191. 'In/ zhu-dse thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1192. Zho'-i-ga tha-the tha-thin-she don shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1193. Wa'-kon-da e-shki don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1194. Hi' on-ki-tha-shon bi a-thin he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
1195. 'In' zhu-dse thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1196. Zho'-i-ga tha-the tha-thin-she don shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1197. Wa'-kon-da e-shki don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1198. Hi' a-ki-tha-shon bi tha-ki-the tha-thin-she ta tse a', Wa-zha-
zlie', e-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga.
TSI Gl'-KA-XE WA-TIION (SONGS OF SETTING UP THE HOUSE OF
MYSTERY)
SONG 1
(Free translation and music, p. 198)
1
Wi-e tsi win ga-xa thin-e,
Wi-e tsi wi° ga-xa thin-e he the,
Ga-xa thin-e e,
Tsi wi-ta no" ga-xa thi"-e,
Wi-e tsi wi" ga-xa thi"-e e,
Wi-e tsi wi" ga-xa thin-e.
2
Wi-e tsi wi" ga-xa thin-e,
Wi-e tsi wi" ga-xa thin-e he the,
Ga-xa thin-e e,
Wa-kon-da tsi ga-xa thin-e,
Wi-e tei wi" ga-xa thin-e e,
Wi-e tsi wi° ga-xa thin-e.
396 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
3
Wi-e tsi wi" ga-xa thin-e,
Wi-e tsi win ga-xa thin-e he the,
Ga-xa thin-e e,
Tsi hiu-gthe wi-ta non ga-xa thi"-e
Wi-e tsi win ga-xa thin-e e,
Wi-e tsi win ga-xa thin-e.
Wi-e tsi win ga-xa thin-e,
Wi-e tsi win ga-xa thi"-e he the,
Ga-xa thin-e e,
U-zhe-tsi wi-ta non ga-xa thin-e,
Wi-e tsi win ga-xa thin-e e,
Wi-e tsi win ga-xa thin-e.
SONG 2
(Free translation and music, p. 199)
Tsi wi° ga-xa thin, ga-xa thin-e he the,
Tsi win ga-xa thin, ga-xa thin-e he the,
Tsi wi-ta non ga-xa thi°, ga-xa thin-e he the,
Tsi win ga-xa thin, ga-xa thin-e he the,
Tsi win ga-xa thin, ga-xa thin-e he the.
Tsi win ga-xa thin, ga-xa thin-e he the,
Tsi win ga-xa thin, ga-xa thin-e he the,
Wa-koE-da tsi ga-xa thin, ga-xa thin-e he the,
Tsi wi" ga-xa thin, ga-xa thin-e he the,
Tsi win ga-xa thin, ga-xa thin-e he the,
Tsi win ga-xa thin, ga-xa thin-e he the,
Tsi win ga-xa thin ga-xa thin-e he the,
Tsi hiu-gthe wi-ta no11 ga-xa thin, ga-xa thin-e he the,.
Tsi win ga-xa thin ga-xa thin-e he the,
Tsi win ga-xa thi", ga-xa thin-e he the.
Tsi win ga-xa thi", ga-xa thin-e he the,
Tsi win ga-xa thin, ga-xa thin-e he the,
U-zhe-tsi wi-ta non ga-xa thin, ga-xa thin-e he the,
Tsi win ga-xa thi°, ga-xa thi°-e he the.
LAFLESCHE] TRIBAL RITES OSAGB LANGUAGE 397
' WA-THON (SONGS OF THE GATHERING)
SONG 1
(Free translation and music, p. 200)
1
Ki-gto ba do" dsi tho,
Ki-gto ba don dsi tho,
Ho°-ga ki-gto ba don dsi tho,
Ki-gto ba do" dsi tho.
Ki-gto ba do" dsi tho,
Ki-gto ba don dsi tho,
Xi-tha ki-gto ba do" dsi tho,
Ki-gto ba do" dsi tho,
Ki-gto ba don dsi tho,
Ki-gto ba don dsi tho,
Xi-tha gka ki-gto ba don dsi tho,
Ki-gto ba don dsi tho.
Ki-gto ba do" dsi tho,
Ki-gto ba don dsi tho,
Xi-tha gthe-zhe ki-gto ba do" dsi tho,
Ki-gto ba do" dsi tho.
SONG 2
( Free translation and music, p. 200)
1
Ts'a-ge do-ba ki-gto ba don,
E-dsi u-wi-he a-thin he,
E-dsi u-wi-he a-thin he, he,
E-dsi u-wi-he a-thin he,
E-dsi u-wi-he a-thin he,
Ts'a-ge do-ba ki-gto ba do",
E-dsi u-wi-he a-thin he.
Ni-ka do-ba ki-gto ba do",
E-dsi u-wi-he a-thin he,
E-dsi u-wi-he a-thi" he, he,
E-dsi u-wi-he a-thi" he,
E-dsi u-wi-he a-thi " he,
Ni-ka do-ba ki-gto ba do",
E-dsi u-wi-he a-thi n he.
398 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
1199. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bia da, tsi ga,
1200. Hon'-ga u-dse-the pe-thon-ba ni-ka-shi-ga ba dan a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
1201. Xtha'-xtha thin-ge xtsi ni-ka-shi-ga thon-ka', a bin da, tsi ga.
1202. Hon'-ga win a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1203. 0'-pxon zho-i-ga the xtsi ni-ka-shi-ga ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1204. Pe'-o-toa thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1205. Ho'-e-ga gi-the xtsi ni-ka-shi-ga ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1206. Wa'-gthu-shka be zhin-ga i-ta-i shki don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1207. U-ki'-on-the on-ga-xe on-mon-thin ta bi a', wi-con-ga, e'-ki-a bi
a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1208. Wa'-zha-zhe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1209. Tsi-zhu e-thon-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
1210. Ho'-e-ga gi-the mon-thin bi don shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1211. Wa'-gthu-shka be zhin-ga i-ta i shki don a', a biQ da, tsi ga,
1212. U'-ki-on-the on-ga-xe on-mon-thin ta bi a', wi-con-ga, e'-ki-a bi
a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1213. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1214. Hon'-ga u-dse-the pe-thon-ba ni-ka-shi-ga ba do" a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
1215. 'In'-zhin-ga', a bin da, tsi ga,
1216. 'In'-zhin-ga pe-thon-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
1217. Zho'-i-ga the xtsi ni-ka-shi-ga thon-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
1218. 'In'-zhin-ga do-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
1219. U'-she-tsi do-ba ha', a bin da, tsi ga,
1220. E'-non-ha, a bin da, tsi ga,
1221. U'-tsi i-non-tha bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1222. Wa'-zha-zhe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1223. Tsi'-zhu e-thon-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
1224. I'-ni-tha mon-thin bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1225. I'-ni-tha gi-wa-ts'e-ga on-ki-the on-mon-thin ta bi a', wi-?on-ga,
e'-ki-a bi a, a bin da, tsi ga,
1226. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1227. Hon'-ga u-dse-the pe-thon-ba ni-ka-shi-ga ba don a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
1228. Hon'-ga win a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1229. Mon'-in-ka zhin-ga', a bin da, tsi ga,
1230. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1231. Non'-be zha-ta ga-xe ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1232. Mon'-thin-ka sha-be thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1233. Ba'-ha a-tsi-non-zhin ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1234. The' shki don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1235. We'-gon-tha a-thin mon-thin bi do" shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
LAFLESCHE] TRIBAL RITES OSAGE LANGUAGE 399
1236. We'-gon-tha gi-wa-ts'e-ga ki-the mon-thin ta bi a', wi-zhin-the
a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1237. Wa'-zha-zhe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1238. Tsi'-zhu e-thon-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
1239. In'-dse-ha ga-xa bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1240. Thon'-dse ba-he' e-ton-ha no" shki don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1241. We'-gon-tha gi-wa-ts'e-ga ki-the mon-thin ta bi a', wi-con-ga,
e'-ki-a, bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1242. E'thon-zha', a bi" da, tsi ga,
1243. In'-dse-ha ga-xa bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1244. In'-shta-ha a-ga-cta zhi ta tse a', wi-con-ga, e'-ki-a, bi a', a bin
da, tsi ga,
1245. In'-shta-ha a-ga-fta do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1246. Ni'-ka non da-pa ki-the mon-thin ta bi a', wi-con-ga, e'-ki-a bi
a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1247. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1248. Mon'-thin-ka to-ho thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1249. Ba'-ha a-tsi non-zhin ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1250. The' wi-con-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1251. We'-go°-tha a-thin mon-thin ta bi a', wi-9On-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a
bin da, tsi ga,
1252. We'-gon-tha a-thin mon-thin bi don shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1253. Mi' hi-e ge (a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1254. We'-gon-tha gi-wa-ts'e-ga ki-the mon-thin ta bi a', wi-con-ga,
e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1255. We'-gon-tha a-thin mon-thin bi don shki a', a bin da, fsi ga,
1256. Thon'-dse ba-he' e-ton ha non shki do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1257. We'-gon-tha gi-wa-ts'e-ga ki-the mon-thin ta bi a', wi-con-ga,
e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1258. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1259. Mon'-thin-ka zhu-dse thin-kshe a', a bia da, tsi ga,
1260. Ba'-ha a-tsi-non-zhin ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1261. The' shki don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1262. We'-gon-tha a-thin mon-thin ta bi a', wi-con-ga, e'-ki-a bi a',
a bin da, tsi ga,
1263. Wa'-zha-zhe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1264. Tsi'-zhu e-thon-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
1265. We'-gon-tha a-thin mo"-thin ta bi a', wi-con-ga, e'-ki-a bi a'.
a bin da, tsi ga,
1266. We'-gon-tha a-thin mon-thin bi don shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1267. Thon'-dse ba-he' e-ton-ha no" shki do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1268. We'-gon-tha gi-wa-ts'e-ga ki-the mon-thin ta bi a', wi-i?on-ga,
e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1269. E'thon-zha', a bin da, tsi ga,
400 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
1270. In'-dse-ha ga-xa bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1271. In'-shta-bthi a-ga-xton a-zhi ta tse a', wi-fon-ga e'-ki-a bi a',
a bin da, tsi ga,
1272. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1273. Mon'-thin-ka pi thin-kshe non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1274. Ba'-ha a-tsi-non-zhin ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1275. The' shki don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1276. We'-gon-tha a-thin mon-thin bi do" shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1277. Wa'-zha-zhe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1278. Tsi'-zhu e-thon-ba, a bin da, tsi ga,
1279. We'-gon-tha gi-wa-ts' e-ga ki-the mon-thin ta bi a', wi-90n-ga,
e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1280. Da'-gthe u-k'o-pi a-tha bi don shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1281. In'-dse-ha kshi-the mon-thin ta bi a', wi-9On-ga, e'-ki-a bi a',
a bin da, tsi ga.
N
1282. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1283. Mon'-thin-ka kon-ha be-shi" ga thin-kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1284. E'-shki don wa-thin-e-cka zhi in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
1285. Tse'-xe ni-ka-pu e-non bi non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1286. Shon/ xtsi pa-xe in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
1287. Wa'-zha-zhe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1288. Tsi'-zhu e-thon-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
1289. Tse'-xe ni-ka-pu tha bi don shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1290. Mi'hi-e ge ta, a bin da, tsi ga,
1291. We'-gon-tha a-thin mon-thin bi don shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1292. We'-gon-tha gi-wa-ts' e-ga ki-the mon-thin ta bi a', wi-con-ga,
e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1293. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1294. Hon'-ga u-dse-the pe-thon-ba ni-ka-shi-ga ba don a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
1295. Xtha'-xtha thin<;ge xtsi ni-ka-shi-ga thon-ka', a bi° da, tsi ga.
1296. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1297. Ha' ! wi-fon-ga, e'-ki-e non-zhin bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1298. We'-ki-k'on win thin-ga a-tha, wi-pon-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
1299. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1300. Tse'-xe ni-ka-pu e-gon ton no" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1301. He'-dsi xtsi a-thin gi e don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1302. Wi'-pon-ga e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1303. The' we-ki-k'on on-gi-the ta bi a', wi-9On-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin
da, tsi ga,
1304. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
LAFLBSCHE] TRIBAL, RITES OSAGE LANGUAGE 401
1305. Ni' da-ka-dse e-dsi on-gthe ta bi a', wi-con-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin
da, tsi ga,
1306. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1307. Ni' da-ka-dse e-dsi-gtha ba don a', a bin da, tsi ga.
1308. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, (si ga,
1309. Da'-don u-hon u-pa-ha i-the on-the ta ba do11 a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1310. Wi'-con-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
1311. Non'-bthe do-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
1312. We'-ki i-he-on-the tse on-thon bi a', wi-con-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a
bin da, tsi ga,
1313. U'-hon u-pa-ha i-the on-the ta bi a', wi-con-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a
bin da, tsi ga,
1314. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1315. Ho'-xthon-ta-xe thin-kshe non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1316. The', wi-con-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1317. U'-hon u-pa-ha i-the on-the ta bi a', wi-con-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a
bin da, tsi ga,
1318. E' thon-zha', a bin da, tsi ga,
1319. Wa'-thin-e-9ka u-pa-ha i-the on-tha ba zhi tse a', wi-con-ga,
e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1320. Mi'hi-e ge ta', a bin da, (si ga,
1321. Shin'-to ho bthon-xe don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1322. E'-ki-thon-ba xtsi u-pa-ha i-the on-the ta bi a', wi-con-ga, e'-ki-a
bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1323. Wa'-zha-zhe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1324. Tsi'-zhu e-thon-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
1325. We'-ki i-he-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
1326. Shi' win thin-ge a-tha, wi-con-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1327. £in' mon-non-ta hi thin-kshe no" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1328. E'shki don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1329. U'-hon u-pa-ha i-the on-the ta bi a', wi-con-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a
bin da, tsi ga,
1330. E'thon-zha', a bin da, tsi ga,
1331. Wa'-thin-e-c.ka u-pa-ha i-the on-tha ba zhi tse a', wi-poD-ga,
e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1332. Mi'hi-e ge ta', a bin da, tsi ga,
1333. Shi'-mi ho bthon-xe don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1334. E'-ki-thon-ba xtsi u-pa-ha i-the on-the ta bi a', wi-con-ga,
e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1335. Wa'-zha-zhe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1336. Tsi'-zhu e-thon-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
1337. We'-ki i-he-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
2786—21 26
402 THE OSAGE TRIBE IETH. AXX. 36
1338. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1339. Shi' win thin-ge a-tha, wi-con-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1340. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1341. 9in/ thin-kshe non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1342. The' u-hon u-pa-ha i-the on-the ta bi a', wi-con-ga, e'-ki-a bi a'
a bin da, tsi ga,
1343. E'thon-zha', a bin da, tsi ga,
1344. Wa'-thin-e-pka u-pa-ha i-the on-tha ba zhi tse a', wi-con-ga
e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1345. Mi'hi-e ge ta, a bin da, tsi ga,
1346. Ni'-ka wa-k'on o-tha'-ha kshe non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1347. E'-ki-thon-ba xtsi u-pa-ha i-the on-the ta bi a', wi-con-ga.
e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1348. Wa'-zha-zhe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1349. Tsi'-zhu e-thon-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
1350. We'-ki i-he-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
1351. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1352. Shi' win thin-ge a-tha, wi-con-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1353. Hon'-bthin-cu thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1354. E'shki don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1355. U'-hon u-pa-ha i-the on-the ta bi a', wi-con-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a
bin da, tsi ga,
1356. E'thon-zha', a bin da, tsi ga,
1357. Wa'-thic-e-cka u-pa-ha i-the on-tha ba zhi tse a', wi-con-ga,
e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1358. Mi'hi-e ge ta', a bin da, tsi ga,
1359. Wa'-k'o won we-da-the do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1360. E'-ki-thon-ba xtsi u-pa-ha i-the on-the ta bi a', wi-con-ga,
e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1361. Wa'-zha-zhe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1362. Tsi'-zhu e-thon-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
1363. We'-ki i-he-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
1364. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1365. Hon'-ga u-dse-the pe-thon-ba ni-ka-shi-ga ba don a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
1366. Xtha'-xtha thin-ge xtsi ni-ka-shi-ga bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1367. Ha' ! wi-con-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1368. We'-ki-k'on win thin-ge a-tha, wi-con-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
1369. Hon'-ga wa-tse-ga-wa ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1370. Wi'-con-ga, e'-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1371. We'-ki-k'on win tliin-ge a-tha, wi-con-ga, e'-gi-a bi a', a biQ da,
tsi ga,
1372. Thu-e' xtsi ci-thu-fe the do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
LAFLESCHB] TRIBAL, RITES OSAGE LANGUAGE 403
1373. Tse'-xe xtsi ge dsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1374. 'P'-da-po-ki thin-kshe non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1375. E'-dsi xtsi hi non-zhin ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1376. The' hon, wi-zhin-the, e a'-gthi non-zhin to" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1377. Wi'-co"-ga, e'-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1378. We'-ki-k'o" thon-ta zhi a, wi-co"-ga, e'-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1379. Thu-e' xtsi ci-thu-fe the don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1380. 'In'-da-da-be thin-kshe non a', a bia da, tsi ga,
1381. He'-dsi xtsi hi non-zhin to" a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
1382. He'-dsi xtsi a-thin gi e do" a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
1383. The' ho", wi-zhi"-the, e a'-gthi non-zhi" ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1384. We'-ki-k'on thon-ta zhi a', wi-co"-ga, e'-gi-a bi a', a bi" da,
tsi ga,
1385. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bi° da, tsi ga,
1386. Tse'-xe xtsi ge dsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1387. "I1" sha-gtha zhi°-ga thi"-kshe no" a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
1388. He'-dsi xtsi a-thin gi-e do" a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
1389. The ho"', wi-zhi°-the, e a-gthi non-zhin to" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1390. E'-zhi-zhi-fka u-ton-ga, wi-?o"-ga, e'-gi-a bi a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
1391. He'-dsi xtsi a, a bin da, tsi ga,
1392. A'-ba-do a-tha-k'a-be dsi xtsi a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
1393. Mon'-hi"-ci i-ba btho-ga kshe non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1394. He'-dsi xtsi a-thin gi-e don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1395. The hon', wi-zhi"-the, e a'-gthi non-zhi" a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
1396. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1397. We'-ki-k'on thon-ta a-ka', wi-co"-ga, e-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1398. Zha'-zhe on-ki-ton ta bi a', wi-co"-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a bi" da,
tsi ga,
1399. Mon'-hi"-ci i-ba btho-ga', a bi" da, tsi ga,
1400. Zha'-zhe on-ki-to" ta bi a'. wi-co"-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1401. E' tho"-zha', a bin da, tsi ga,
1402. Wa'-zha-zhe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1403. Tsi'-zhu e-tho"-ba', a bi" da, tsi ga,
1404. We'-ba-pa ba tho"-ta zhi a', wi-co"-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a bi" da,
tsi ga,
1405. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
1406. A'-ba-do a-ga-ha dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1407. Mon'-hi"-ca-be kshe a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
1408. He'-dsi xtsi hi non-zhi" to" a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
1409. He'-dsi xtsi a-thi" gi-e do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1410. He'-dsi xtsi a-thi" gthi e do" a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
1411. The' hon, wi-zhi"-the, e a'-gthi non-zhin a', a bin da, tsi ga,
404 THE OSAGE TRIBE [BTH. ANN. 36
1412. We'-ki-k'on thon ta a-ka', wi-pon-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga
1413. Wa'-zha-zhe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1414. Tsi'-zhu e-thon-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
1415. We'-ba-ca ba thon-ta zhi a', wi-coD-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da.
tsi ga,
1416. A'-ba-do a-ga-ha dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1417. Mon'-hin hon-ga kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1418. He'-dsi xtsi hi non-zhin ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1419. He'-dsi xtsi a-thin gi-e don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1420. The hon', wi-zhin-the, e a'-gthi non-zhin a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1421. Ha' ! wi-pon-ga, e'-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1422. We'-ki-k'oD thon ta a-ka', wi-£0n-ga, e'-gi-a bi a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
1423. Zha'-zhe on-ki-ton ta bi a', wi-9On-ga, e'-ki-a bi a'., a bin da,
tsi ga,
1424. Mon'-hia-hon-ga', a bin da, tsi ga,
1425. Zha'-zhe on-ki-ton on-mon-thin ta bi a', wi-con-ga, e'-ki-a bi a',
a bin da, tsi ga,
1426.' Wa'-zha-zhe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1427. Tsi'-zhu e-thon-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
1428. Mi' hi-e ge ta', a bin da, tsi ga,
1429. We'-ba-ce mon-thin ta bi a', wi-con-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da,
tsi ga.
1430. A'-ba-do go-da a'-tha-k'a-be dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1431. Mon'-hin shu-dse kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1432. He'-dsi xtsi hi non-zhin ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1433. He'-dsi xtsi a-thin gi-e don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1434. The hon/, wi-zhin-the, e a'-gthi non-zhin a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1435. Ha' ! wi-con-ga, e'-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1436. She e'-shnon u-tha-dse tha-ton-she-a', wi-con-ga, e'-gi-a, bi a',
a bin da, tsi ga,
1437. We'-ki-kV thon-ta a-ka', wi-con-ga, e'-gi-a bi a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
1438. Zha'-zhe on- ki-ton ta bi a', wi-con-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1439. Mon'-hin-zhu-dse a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1440. Zha'-zhe ou-ki-ton ta bi a', wi-con-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1441. Wa'-zha-zhe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1442. Tsi'-zhu e-thon-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
1443. We'-ba-ce mon-thin ta bi a', wi-con-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
1444. Mi'hi-e ge ta', a bin da, tsi ga,
1445. We'-ba-ce mon-thin bi don shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1446. Mon'-hin gi-pa-hi ki-the mon-thin ta bi a', wi-con-ga, e'-ki-a bi
a', a bin da, tsi ga,
LAFLESCHE] TRIBAL RITES OSAGE LANGUAGE 405
1447. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1448. Hon'-ga u-dse-the pe-thon-ba ni-ka-shi-ga ba do" a', a bin da,
tsiga,
1449. Xtha'-xtha thin-ge xtsi ni-ka-shi-ga thon-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
1450. We'-ki-k'on win thi°-ge' a-tha, wi-con-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
1451. Hon'-ga wa-tse-ga-wa ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1452. Wi'-con-ga, e-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1453. We'-ki-k'on win thin-ge' a-tha, wi-con-ga, e'-gi-a bi a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
1454. Hon'-ba i-ta-xe thon-dsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1455. Mon'-zhon ga-shi-be xtsi the don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1456. U'-k'u-be win hi non-zhin ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1457. U'-pa-ce thon dsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1458. Hi'-ko" ga-xo-dse xtsi a-gthi non-zhin to" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1459. Ha'-gon zhin-tha, wi-con-ga, e'-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1460. U'-k'u-be win pshi' a-tha, wi-zhin-the, e to" a', a biQ da, tsi ga,
1461. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1462. Non', wi-con-ga', a bin da, tsi ga,
1463. U'-ton-be tha-the tse a', wi-con-ga, e'-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1464. Hon'-ba i-ta-xe thon dsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1465. Mon'-zhon ga-shi-be xtsi the do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1466. U'-k'u-be we-thon-ba kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1467. He'-dsi xtsi hi non-zhin ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1468. U'-pa-ce thon dsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1469. Hi'-kon ga-xo-dse xtsi a-gthi non-zhin ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1470. Ha'-go° zhin-tha, wi-con-ga, e'-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1471. Wi'-zhin-the, e a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1472. U'-k'u-be thon-ba pshi' a-tha, wi-zhin-the, e' ton a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
1473. Wi'-con-ga', a bin da, tsi ga,
1474. U'-ton-be tha the tse a, wi-9On-ga, e'-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1475. Hon'-ba i-ta-xe thon-dsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1476. Mon'-zhon ga-shi-be xtsi the don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1477. U'-k'u-be we-tha-bthin kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1478. E'-dsi xtsi hi non-zhin e don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1479. U'-pa-ce thon dsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1480. Hi'-kon ga-xo-dse xtsi a-gthi no"-zhin e don a', a bi° da, tsi ga,
1481. Ha'-gon zhin-tha, wi-con-ga, e'-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1482. Wi'-zhin-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1483. U'-k'u-be tha-bthin pshi a-tha, wi-zhin-the, e' ton a', a bin da,
tsiga,
406 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
1484. Non'-wi-con-ga', a biu da, tsi ga,
1485. U'-ton-be tha the tse a', wi-con-ga, e'-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1486. Hon'-ba i-ta-xe thon dsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1487. Mon/-zhon ga-shi-be xtsi the don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1488. U'-k'u-be we-do-ba kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1489. E'-dsi xtsi hi non-zhin e don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1490. Ni'u-ba-shon pe-thon-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
1491. Sho'-dse con-hon kshe hi non-zhin ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1492. Wa'-don-be xtsi ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1493. Ni'u-ga-xthi pe-thon-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
1494. Ton'-won-gthon pe-thon-ba ni-ka-shi-ga thon-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
1495. E'-dsi xtsi wa-ton-be tse e'-ki-the thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1496. Ni'a-ki-gtha-gi hi bi tse a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1497. E'-dsi xtsi hi non-zhin e don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1498. Wa'-don-be ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1499. A'-shka xtsi wa-don-be ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1500. Pe' ba-xthe xtsi wa-don-be to" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1501. The'-ba ba-xthe-xthe xtsi wa-don-be ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1502. Pe' ga-tsu-ca xtsi wa-don-be ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1503. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1504. I'-ki-non-xthe xtsi gi e don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1505. Wa'-non-xthin xtsi gi e don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1506. U'-pa-ce thon dsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1507. Non'-ni-ni-tha xtsi gi thin a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1508. Wi'-con-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1509. Wi'-90n-ga a ba u-k'on xtsi a-gi a-ba, wi-9On-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a
bin da, tsi ga,
1510. A'-gi-ki-ba-non ba don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1511. Ha'-gon zhin-tha, wi-9On-ga, e'-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1512. Wi'-zhin-the, e a-gthi non-zhin a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1513. U'-k'u-be do-ba pshi a-tha, wi-zhin-the, e' ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1514. U'-k'u-be do-ba pshi e-de a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1515. Ni' u-ga-xthi pe-thon-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
1516. Sho'-dse 9On-han kshe wa-ton-be a', wi-zhin-the, e' ton a', a bin
da, tsi ga,
1517. Ni' u-ga-xthi pe-thon-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
1518. Ton-won-gthon wa-ton-be a', wi-zhin-the, e' ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1519. Ni'-ka-shi-ga bi a', wi-zhin-the, e' to" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1520. A'-shka xtsi wa-ton-be a' wi-zhin-the, e' ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1521. Pe' ba-xthe-xtha bi a', wi-zhin-the, e' ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1522. The'-ba ba-xthe-xthe xtsi bi a', wi-zhin-the, e' ton a', abin da,
tsi ga,
1523. Pe' ga-tsu-ca bi a, wi-zhin-the, e ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
LA FLESCHE] TRIBAL, RITES OSAGE LANGUAGE 407
1524. Ha' ! wi-£On-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1525. Wa'-zha-zhe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1526. Tsi'-zhu e-thon-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
1527. Ki'-ctu tse a, wi-con-ga, e'ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1528. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1529. Ki'-ptu a-tsi a tha ba don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1530. Wa'-zha-zhe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1531. Tsi'-zhu e-thon-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
1532. Wi'-con-ga a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
1533. U'-k'u-be do-ba a-hi bi e a-ka', Wa-zha-zhe, e'-gi-a bi a', a bin
da, tsi ga,
1534. U'-k'u-be do-ba a-hi ba don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
1535. Ni' u-ga-xthi pe-thon-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
1536. Sho'-dse con-hon kshe wa-don-ba bi e a-ka', wi-pon-ga a-ka', a
bin da tsi ga,
1537. Ton'-\von-gthon pe-thon-ba ha', a bin da, tsi ga,
1538. Sho'-dse pon-hon kshe wa-don-ba bi e a-ka', wi-£On-ga a-ka', a
bin da, tsi ga,
1539. A'-shka xtsi wa-don-ba bi e a-ka', wi-con-ga a-ka', a bin da,
tsi ga,
1540. Pe ba-xthe-xthe xtsi bi e a-ka', wi-pon-ga a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
1541. The'-ba ba-xthe-xthe xtsi bi e a-ka', wi-£On-ga a-ka', a bin da,
tsi ga,
1542. Pe ga-tsu-ca xtsi ni-ka-shi-ga bi e a-ka', wi-?on-ga a-ka', a bin
da, tsi ga.
THE HI'-<?A-DA WI'-GI-E
(Free translation, p. 212; literal translation, p. 556)
1. Da', a bia da, tsi ga,
2. Hon'-ga u-dse-the pe-thon-ba ni-ka-shi-ga ba don a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
3. Wi'-con-ga win a', a bin da, tsi ga, .
4. Ton'-in a-zhi xtsi we-ton-i" da', a bin da, tsi ga,
5. Hon/ xtsi gi thin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
6. Ha'-ta-ha xtsi wa-xpa-thin thin e-don, e'-ki-e a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
7. U'-gi-ki-a ba thin ha', a bin da, tsi ga,
8. U'-gi-ki-e a-tsi-a tha ba don a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
9. U'-k'u-be win pshi a tha, wi-zhin-the, e' to" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
10. U'-k'u-be win pslii thon-zha', a bin da, tsi ga,
11. On'-ha-gon man-zhi xtsi in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
12. U'-dse-the u-kon i-he-tha bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
13. Wi'-9On-ga a-ka, a bin da, tsi ga,
14. U'-k'u-be win a-hi bi thon-zha', a bin da, tsi ga,
15. Gi'-ha-gon ba zhi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
408 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
16. Da', a bin da, tsi ga,
17. Wi'-con-ga', a bin da, tsi ga,
18. fon'-in a-zhi xtsi we-ton-in da', a bin da, tsi'ga,
19. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
20. He'-dsi xtsi gi thin a', a bin da, tsi ga,
21. Wi'-con-ga gi thin we-ton-in da, e'-ki-e thon-ka', a bin da, tsi ga.
22. Ha'-ta-ha xtsi wa-xpa-thin thin e-don, e'-ki-e thon-ka', a bin da,
tsi ga,
23. U'-gi-ki-a ba thin ha', a bi" da, tsi ga,
24. U'-gi-ki-e a-tsi-a-tha ba don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
25. U'-k'u-be we-thon-ba pshi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
26. U'-k'u-be we-thon-ba pshi in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
27. O'-ha-gon mon-zhi xtsi in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
28. U'-dse-the u-kon i-he-tha bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
29. Wi'-con-ga a-ka, a bin da, tsi ga,
30. U'-k'u-be thon-ba a-hi bi e a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
31. Gi'-ha-gou ba zhi xtsi bi e a-ka', a bin da, (si ga.
32. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
33. Wi'-con-ga', a bin da, tsi ga,
34. U'-ga-sho" a-ka in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
35. Ton'-in a-zhi xtsi we-ton-in da', a bin da, tsi ga.
36. Mi'tho-ton xtsi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
37. He'-dsi xtsi gi thin a', a bin da, tsi ga,
38. Wi'-con-ga gi thin we-ton-in da, e'-ki-e thon-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
39. Ha'-ta-ha xtsi wa-xpa-thin thin e-don, e'-ki-e thon-ka', a bin da,
tsi ga,
40. U'-gi-ki-a ba thin ha', a bin da, tsi ga,
41. U'-gi-ki-e a-tsia-tha ba don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
42. U'-k'u-be tha-bthin pshi in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
43. U'-k'u-be tha-bthin pshi e-de a', a biQ da, tsi ga,
44. O°rf-ha-gon mon-zhi xtsi in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
45. U'-dse-the u-kon i-he-tha bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
46. He-dsi xtsi a, a bin da, tsi ga,
47. Wi'-con-ga win a', a bin da, tsi ga,
48. U'-ga-shon a-ka iQ da', a bin da, tsi ga,
49. Ton'-in a-zhi xtsi we-ton-in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
50. He'-dsi xtsi gi thin a', a bin da, tsi ga,
51. Wi'-con-ga gi thin we-ton-in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
52. Hi' shnon-shnon thin we-tan-in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
53. U'-gi-ki-a ba thin ha', a bin da, tsi ga,
54. U'-gi-ki-e a-tsia-tha ba don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
55. U'-k'u-be do-ba pshi a-tha, wi-zhin-the, e' ton a', a bin da, (si ga
56. U'-k'u-be do-ba pshi e-de a', a bin da, tsi ga,
57. ^i-u'-gthe e-dsi wa-ton-be in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
LAFLESCHE] TRIBAL RITES — OSAGE LANGUAGE 409
58. Wa'-dsu-ta thon-tse xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
59. Mon'-hin tha-ba-xa bi ge in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
60. Wa'-dsu-ta xtsi bi tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
61. Da', a bi° da, tsi ga,
62. Ha' ! wi-fon-ga, e'-ki-e thon-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
63. Wi'-fon-ga, a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
64. U'-ga-shon a-ka don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
65. U'-k'u-be do-ba a-hi bi e' a-ka in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
66. U'-k'u-be do-ba a-hi bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
67. Wa'-dsu-ta thon-ta xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
68. (^i-u'-gthe e-dsi wa-don-ba bin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
69. Mon'-hin tha-ba-xa bi tse e' a-ka in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
70. Wa'-dsu-ta thon-ta xtsi e' a-ka in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
71. Da', a bin da, tsi ga,
72. Ha' ! wi-$on-ga, e'-ki-e thon-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
73. Tsi'-zhu Wa-zha-zhe e-thon-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
74. Ki'-fto tse a-tha, e'-ki-e thon-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
75. Ki'-cto a-tsia-tha bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
76. Ha'! Tsi-zhu, Wa-zha-zhe e-thon-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
77. Wi'-con-ga a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
78. U'-ga-shon a-ka don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
79. U'-k'u-be do-ba a-hi bi e' a-ka in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
80. U'-k'u-be do-ba a-hi bi do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
81. ^i-u'-gthe e-dsi wa-don-ba bi e do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
82. Wa'-dsu-ta thon-ta xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
83. Mon'-hin tha-ba-xa bi tse e' a-ka in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
84. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
85. Bo'-bthi a-tsia-tha bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
86. Wi-e' Tsi-zhu, Wa-zha-zhe e-thon-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
87. Wa'-da t& thon-ka he-bthe non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
88. Wa'-da ba zhi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
89. Bo'-bthi a-tsia-tha bi a', a biQ da, tsi ga,
90. He-dsi xtsi a, a bin da, tsi ga,
91. Won'-pka xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
92. Wi'-con-ga', a bin da, tsi ga,
93. Ton'-in a-zhi xtsi we-ton-in da', a bin da, tsi ga, .
94. Wi'-9On-ga gi thin we-ton-in da', a bi" da, tsi ga,
95. Hi' shnon-shnon tha xtsi thin da', a bi° da, tsi ga,
96. Hi' shnon-shnon tha xtsi thi" we-ton-in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
97. U'-gi-ki-a ba thin ha', a bin da, tsi ga,
98. Ha'-ta-ha xtsi wa-xpa-thin thin e-don, e'-ki-e thon-ka', a bin da;
tsi ga,
99. Ha' ! wi-zhin-the, e' to" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
410 THE OSAGE TEIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
100. U'-k'u-be ca-ton pshi in da', a bitt da, tsi ga,
101. (^i-u'-gthe e-dsi xtsi wa-ton-be in da', a bitt da, tsi ga,
102. Wa'-dsu-ta thon-tse xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
103. (^i'ba-zha-ge i-tse-tha bi tse in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
104. Wa'-dsu-ta non-pe-wa-the xtsi bi tse in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
105. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
106. Ha' ! wi-con-ga, e'-ki-e thon-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
107. Tsi'-zhu Wa-zha-zhe e-thon-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
108. Ki'-cto tse a-tha, e'-ki-e thon-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
109. Ki'-cto a-tsia-tha ba don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
110. Ha'! Tsi-zhu Wa-zha-zhe e-thon-ba, e'-ki-e thon-ka', a bin da.
tsi ga,
111. Wi'-con-ga a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
112. U'-ga-shon a-ka don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
113. U'-k'u-be ca-ton a-hi bi e' a-ka in da', a biD da, tsi ga,
114. U'-k'u-be ca-ton a-hi bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
115. (^i-u'-gthe e-dsi wa-don-ba bi e don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
116. Wa'-dsu-ta thon-tse xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
117. (^i'ba-zha-ge i-tse-the tse a' bin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
118. Wa'-dsu-ta non-pe-wa-the xtsi tse a' bin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
119. Da', a bin da, tsi ga,
120. Tsi'-zhu Wa-zha-zhe e-thon-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
121. Wa'-da zh,i xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
122. Bo'-bthi a-tsia-tha bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
123. Wi-e' Tsi-zhu Wa-zha-zhe e-thon-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
124. Wa'-da ta thon-ka he bthe non, e'-ki-e thon-ka', a bin da, tsi ga
125. Wa'-da ba zhi xtsi in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
126. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
127. Wi'-con-ga win a', a bin da, tsi ga,
128. U'-ga-shon a-ka in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
129. Ton'-in a-zhi xtsi we-ton-in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
130. He'-dsi xtsi gi thin a', a bin da, tsi ga,
131. Thi'-con-ga gi thin we-ton-in da', a bin da, tsi ga,,
132. Hi' zhu-zhu-ba xtsi thin da, e'-ki-e thon-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
133. U'-gi-ki-a ba thin ha', a bin da, tsi ga,
134. U'-gi-ki-e a-tsia-tha ba don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
135. U'-k'u-be sha-pe pshi in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
136. £?i u'-gthe e-dsi wa-ton-be in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
137. Wa'-dsu-ta thon-tse xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
138. U'-zhon-ge on ha-ha bi ge in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
139. Wa'-dsu-ta thon-tse xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
140. Tse'-zhe-ni bo-ta-to-xa bi ge in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
LAFLESCHE] TRIBAL RITES OSAGB LANGUAGE 411
141. Wa'-dsu-ta non-pe-wa-the xtsi bi tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
142. Da', a bin da, tsi ga,
143. Wi'-<?on-ga, e'-ki-e thon-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
144. Tsi'-zhu, Wa-sha-zhe e-thon-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
145. Ki'-cto tse a-tha, e'-ki-e thon-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
146. Ki'-pto a-tsia-tha ba don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
147. Ha'! Tsi-zhu, Wa-zha-zhe e-thon-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
148. Wi'-con-ga a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
149. U'-ga-shon a-ka do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
150. U'-k'u-be sha-pe a-hi bi e a-ka in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
151. U'-k'u-be sha-pe a-hi bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
152. pi u'-gthe e-dsi wa-do"-ba bi e don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
153. Wa'-dsu-ta thon-tse xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
154. U'-zhon-ge on-ha-ha bi ge e' a-ka in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
155. Tse'-zhe-ni bo-ta-to-xa i-tse-tha bi ge e' a-ka i" da', a bi° da,
tsi ga,
156. Wa'-dsu-ta non-pe-wa-thextsi bi ge e' a-ka in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
157. Da', a bin da, tsi ga,
158. Wa'-da zhi xtsi bo-bthi a-tsia-tha bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
159. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
160. Wi'-con-ga win a', a bin da, tsi ga,
161. U'-ga-shon a-ka in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
162. Ton'-in a-zhi xtsi we-ton-in da, e'-ki-e thon-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
163. E'-dsi xtsi gi thin a', a bin da, tsi ga,
164. Thi'-con-ga gi thi" we-ton-in da, e'-ki-e thon-ka', a bin da, tsi ga
165. Ha' ! wi-zhin-the, e' tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
166. U'-k'u-be pe-thon-ba pshi in'da', a bin da, tsi ga,
167. U'-k'u-be pe-thon-ba pshi e-de a', a bin da, tsi ga,
168. Wa'-dsu-ta thon-tse xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
169. Mon'-hin non-cu-ge i-he-tha bi ge in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
170. In'-gthe ga-ta-ta-tha bi ge in-da', a bin da, tsi ga,
171. Wa'-dsu-ta non-pe-wa-the xtsi bi tse in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
172. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
173. Ha'! wi-pon-ga, c'-ki-e a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
174. Tsi'-zhu, Wa-zha-zhe e-thon-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
175. Ki'-cto tse a-tha, e'-ki-e a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
176. Ki'-cto a-tsia-tha ba don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
177. Wa'-da zhi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
178. Bo' bthi a-tsia-tha bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
179. Wi-e' Tsi-zhu, Wa-zha-zhe e'-thon-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
180. Wa'-da ta thon-ka he-bthe no" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
181. Wa'-da zhi xtsi bo-bthi a-tsia-tha bi a', a bin da, tsi ga.
412 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANX. 36
182. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
183. Wi'-con-ga a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
184. U'-ga-shon a-ka do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
185. U'-k'u-be pe-thon-ba a-hi bin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
186. Wa'-dsu-ta u-ba-tse a', a bin da, tsi ga,
187. Pe-thon-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
188. Wa'-don-ba bi e' a-ka in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
189. E'-dsi a-ta dsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
190. A'-ba to-xa don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
191. A'-hi-non-zhin bi do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
192. Ba'-tse ce gtha-gtha-the xtsi e-de a', a bin da, tsi ga,
193. Ni'-ka-shi-ga', a bin da, tsi ga,
194. Sho'-dse bo-pi-ci-dse kshe wa-don-ba bi e' a-ka in da', a bin da,
tsi ga,
195. Ni'-ka-shi-ga', a bin da, tsi ga,
196. Non'-pe-wa-the xtsi bi e' a-ka in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
197. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
198. Ha' ! wi-con-ga, e'-ki-e thon-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
199. Tsi'-zhu, Wa-zha-zhe e'-thon-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
200. Ki'-cto tse a-tha, e'-ki-e thon-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
201. Ki'-cto a-tsia-tha bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
202. Ha' ! Tsi-zhu, Wa-zha-zhe e'-thon-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
203. Wi'-con-ga a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
204. Wa'-non-pe xtsi a-gthi a-ka in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
205. U'-k'u-be pe-thon-ba a-hi bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
206. Wa'-dsu-ta u-ba-tse pe-thon-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
207. He'-dsi xtsi wa-don-ba bi e' a-ka in da, a bin da, tsi ga,
208. Wa'-dsu-ta non-pe-wa-the xtsi bi e' a-ka in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
209. He' thi-stse-don bi e' a-ka in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
210. E'-dsi a-ta dsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
211. A'-ba to-xa don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
212. E'-dsi xtsi hi-non-zhin bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
213. Ba'-tse ce gtha-gtha-the xtsi e-de a', a bin da, tsi ga,
214. Sho'-dse bo-ci-ci-dse kshe wa-don-ba bi e' a-ka in da', Tsi-zhu,
Wa-zha-zhe e-thon-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
215. Ni'-ka-shi-ga', a bin da, tsi ga,
216. Non'-pe-wa-the xtsi bi e' a-ka in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
217. Wi-con-ga a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
218. Ni'-ka-shi-ga', a bin da, tsi ga,
219. Pe' ga-tsu-ca bi e' a-ka in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
220. Pe' ba-sha-ba bi e' a-ka in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
221. I'ba-sha-ba bi e' a-ka in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
LAFLESCHE] TRIBAL, RITES OSAGE LANGUAGE 413
222. Ni'-ka-shi-ga', a bin da, tsi ga,
223. Wa'-Ra-hi ki-sha-non the xtsi bi e' a-ka in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
224. Mon/ thi-ki-shnon bi e' a-ka in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
225. Ni'-ka-shi-ga', a bin da, tsi ga,
226. Tse'-ha-wa-gthe ton bi e' a-ka in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
227. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
228. She' shon in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
229. Ha' ! wi-co°-ga, e'-ki-e thon-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
230. Tsi'-zhu, Wa-kon-da NoD-pa-bi thin-kshe non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
231. U'-gi-ki-e tse a-tha, e'-ki-e thon-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
232. U'-gi-ki-e a-tsia-tha ba do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
233. Ha' ! Hon-ga, e' tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
234. Wa'-pa-hi on-wa-sha mon-zhi mi kshe in da, e' tsi-the a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
235. Ha' ! Hon-ga, e' tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
236. Wa'-zha-zhe u-gi-ki-a thin ha, e' tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
237. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
238. Wa'-zha-zhe Wa-non thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
239. A'-gi-pa-mon-gthe i-no"-zhin a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
240. Wi'-con-ga a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
241. Wa'-non-pe xtsi a-gthi a-ka', Wa-zha-zhe, e'-gi-e a-ka', a bin da,
tsi ga,
242. Ni'-ka-shi-ga', a bin da, tsi ga,
243. Non'-pe-wa-the xtsi bi e' a-ka in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
244. Pe' ga-tsu-^a bi e' a-ka in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
245. Pe' ba-sha-ba bi e' a-ka in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
246. I'ba-sha-ba bi e' a-ka in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
247. Mon'-ge xthe-xtha bi e' a-ka in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
248. Wa'-pa-hi ki-sha-non the xtsi bi e' a-ka in da', a bin da, (si ga,
249. Tse'-ha-wa-gthe ton bi e' a-ka in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
250. Da', a bin da, tsi ga,
251. She' shon a-tha, Hon-ga, e' tsi-the a', a bi° da, tsi ga,
252. Ki' i-he-wa-tha-the ta tse a', Hon-ga, e'-gi-e a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
253. fa' he pe-thon-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
254. Wa'-pa-hi a-gi-the a-thin he a', Hon-ga, e'-gi-e a-ka', a bin da,
tsi ga,
255. Ta' he e-shki don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
256. Ga'-stse a-gi-gthe a-thin he non, Hon-ga, e'-gi-e a-ka', a bin da,
tsi ga,
257. I'-ki-i-he-wa-tha-the t& tse a', Hon-ga, e'-gi-e a-ka', a bin da,
tsi ga.
414 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
Nl'-KI Wl'-GI-E
(Free translation, p. 220; literal translation, p. #>2)
1. Da, a bin da, tsi ga,
2. Zhin'-ga ni-ka-shi-ga ta ba don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
3. Wa'-ki-gthi-gthon a-tsia-the a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
4. U'-k'on wa-non-tha zhi a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
5. Mon'-xe u-pa-ki-ba win a', a bin da, tsi ga,
6. U'-ni-ka-shi-ga ta ba don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
7. U'-k'on wa-non-tha zhi a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
8. Zhin'-ga ni-ka-shi-ga ba thon-ta zhin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
9. U'-ga-win-xe win ga-xe a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
10. Ki'-pto a-tsia-tha bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
11. Zhin'-ga ni-ka-shi-ga zhi a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
12. Mon'-xe u-pa-ki-ba we-thon-ba kshe a', a bin da, tsi'ga,
13. Zhin'-ga ni-ka-shi-ga ta ba don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
14. Zhin'-ga ni-ka-shi-ga ba thon-ta zhin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
15. U'-ga-win-xe thon-ba ga-xe a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
16. Hiu'-dse a-the ta ba don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
17. U'-k'on wa-non-tha zhi a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
18. Mon'-xe u-pa-ki-ba we-tha-bthin kshe a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
19. U'-ni-ka-shi-ga ta ba don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
20. E'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
21. U'-ni-ka-shi-ga zhi a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
22. Zhin'-ga ni-ka-shi-ga ba zhi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
23. U'-ga-win-xe tha-bthin ga-xe a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
24. Wi'-con-ga, e'-ki-e a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
25. Non/, zhin-ga ni-ka-shi-ga ba thon-ta zhin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
26. U'-ton-be ga-xa ba thi" ha', a bin da, tsi ga,
27. Hiu'-dse a-the ta ba do11 a', a bin da, tsi ga,
28. U'-k'on wa-non-tha zhi a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
29. Hiu'-dse a-tha bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
30. Ni' ga-thi-da zhi xtsi kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
31. Hon/ ta do", e'-ki-e a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
32. 'In' pa-pi pe-thon-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
33. A'-hiu-he a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
34. 'In' we-pe-thon-ba thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
35. '!"' pa-be thin-ksho a', a bin da, tsi ga,
36. 'In/ wa-non u-ki-gtha-ge thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
37. Zhin'-ga on-thon-gi-ni-thaxtsi mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
38. Zhin'-ga on-thon-gi-ni-tha mon-thin bi do" a.', a bin da, tsi ga,
/39. I'-ts' a thin-ge mon-thin ta i tsi11 da, a bi" da, tsi ga,
40. Zhin'-ga on-thon-gi-ni-tha mon-thin bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
LAFLESCHE] TRIBAL RITES OSAGE LANGUAGE 415
41. Ts'e wa-tse-xi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
42. Zhin/-ga on-thon-gi-ni-tha mon-thin bi do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
43. U'-non win shki i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
44. 'In' zhu-dse thi°-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
45. 'In/ wa-non u-ki-gtha-ge thin-kshc a', a bin da, tsi ga,
46. Zhin'-ga on-thon-gi-ni-tha mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
47. Zhin'-ga on-thon-gi-ni-tha mon-thin bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
48. I'-ts'a thin-ge mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
49. Zhin'-ga on-thon-gi-ni-tha mon-thin bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
50. Ts'e' wa-tse-xi ki-the mon-thin ta bin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
51. Zhin'-ga on-thon-gi-ni-tha mon-thin bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
52. U'-non shki i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
53. Wi',con-ga, e'-ki-e a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
54. Hon' tse don, e'-ki-e thon-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
55. Zhin'-ga ni a-ga-ha ba thon-ta zhin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
56. U'-ton-be ga-xa ba thin ha', a bin da, tsi ga,
57. Sho'-ka ton no" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
58. Ga' xtsi hi tha i don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
59. Hon'-bthin-sha-be e'-gon ton non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
60. E'-dsi xtsi zho-gthe a-gi bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
61. Ha' ! wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-e a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
62. Zhin'-ga ni a-ga-ha ba thon-ta zhin da, e'-gi-a bi a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
63. Ho'-toD-be tha-the tse in da, e'-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
64. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
65. Ha' ! wi-tsu-shpa, e' tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
66. Zhin'-ga ni a-ga-ha ba thon-ta zhi e-sha bin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
67. Ho'-ton-be'pa-xe tse e-sha ba don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
68. Ho'-ton-be pa-xe ta mi kshe in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
69. Ni'ki-mon-hon xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
70. Ni'a-ton-thin e-gon kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
71. Ni'u-ba-shon wi" hi kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
72. He'-gon a-zhi a, wi-tsu-shpa, e' tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
73. He'-gon a-zhi thon-zha', a bin da, tsi ga,
74. Ni'a-ga-ha non mon-bthin a-thin he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
75. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga on-the ta i tse a-tha', a bin da, tsi ga,
76. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga on-tha bi do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
77. I'-ts'a thin-ge mon-thin ta i tse a', zhin-ga', a bin da, tsi ga,
78'. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga on-tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
79. Ts'e' wa-tse-xi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
80. Da', a bin da, tsi ga,
81. Tsc'-xo-be e-gon kshe no" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
52. Wi'-tsi-go e', e gi-e a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
416 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
83. Zhin'-ga ni a-ga-ha ba thon-ta zhi a', wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-e a-ka', a
bin da, tsi ga,
84. U'-ton-be tha-the ta don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
85. E'-gi-a bi a', wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-e a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
86. Ha' ! wi-tsu-shpa, e' tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
87. Zhin'-ga ni a-ga-ha ba thon-ta zhi e'-sha ba don a', a bin da, tsi ga,"
88. U'-ton-be pa-xe te e'-sha ba don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
89. U'-ton-be pa-xe ta mi kshe in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
90. Ni'ki-mon-hon xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
91. Ni'a-mon-thin e'-gon kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
92. Ni'u-ba-shon we-thon-ba thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
93. E'-dsi xtsi hi thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
94. E'-gon a-zhi a', wi-tsu-shpa, e' tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
95. E'-goQ a-zhi thon-zha', a bin da, tsi ga,
96. Zhin/-ga zho-i-ga on-the ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
97. Ni'a-ga-ha non mon-bthin a-thin he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
98. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga on-the mon-thin bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
99. I'-ts'a thin-ge mon-thin ta i tse a-tha', a bin da, tsi ga,
100. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga on-tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
101. Ts'e' wa-tse-xi ki-the mon-thin tai tse a', zhin-ga', abin da, tsi ga,
102. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga on-tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
103. U'-non a bi shki i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
104. She' shon in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
105. Ga' non-zhin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
106. Sho'-ka ton non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
107. Wi'-con-ga, e-gi-e a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
108. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
109. Ni'-a-mon-thin e-de a', a bin da, tsi ga,
110. Ha' ! wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-e a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
111. Zhin'-ga ni a-ga-ha ba thon-ta zhi a, wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-a a-ka', a
bin da, tsi ga,
112. U'-ton-be tha-the ta doa e'-gi-a bin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
113. Zhin'-ga ni a-ga-ha ba thon-ta zhi e'-sha bin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
114. U'-ton-be ]>a-xe tse e'-sha ba don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
115. U'-ton-be )>a-xe ta mi-kshe in da', a biQ da, tsi ga,
116. Ni' ki-mon-hon xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
117. Ba'-shon-shon the kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
118. Ni'-u-ba-shon tha-bthin hi kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
119. E'-gon a-zhi a, wi-tsu-shpa, e' tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
120. E'-go° a-zhi thon-zha', a bin da, tsi ga,
121. Ni' a-ga-ha non mon-bthin a-thin-he a-tha', a bin da, tsi ga,
122. Zhin'-ga-zhu-i-ga on-the ta i tse a-tha', a bin da, tsi ga,
LAFLESCHE] TRIBAL RITES OSAGE LANGUAGE 417
123. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga on-tha bi do11 a', a bin da, tsi ga,
124. I'-ts'a thin-ge mon-thin (a i tse a-tha', a bin da, tsi ga,
125. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga on-tha' bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
126. TsV wa-tse-xi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
127. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga on-tha' bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
128. U'-non a bi shki i-the ki-the ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
129. Ga' non-zhin da', a bin da, tsi ga.
130. Da', a bin da, tsi ga,
131. Zhin'-ga ni a-ga-ha ba thon-ta zhi" da', a bin da, tsi ga,
132. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
133. Ki'-fda mon-ge zhu-dse kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
134. E'-dsi xtsi zhu-gthe a-gi bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
135. Wi'-tsi-go-e', e-gi-e a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
136. Zhin'-ga ni a-ga-ha ba thon-ta zhi a', wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-e a-ka', a
'bin da, tsi, ga,
137. U'-ton-be tha-the tse a', wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-e a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
138. Zhin'-ga ni a-ga-ha ba thon-ta zhi e'-sha bin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
139. U'-ton-be pa-xe tse' e-sha ba don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
140. U'-ton-be pa-xe ta mi-kshe in da', a bi" da, tsi ga,
141. Ni' ki-mon-hon xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
142. Ki'-gthi-don-don the kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
143. Ni'-u-ba-shon do-ba hi kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
144. E'-gon thon-ta zhi a', wi-tsu-shpa, e' tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
145. E'-gon thon-ta zhi thon-zha', a bin da, (si ga,
146. Ni' a-ga-ha no" mo°-bthin a-thin he a-tha', a bin da, tsi ga,
147. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga on-the ta i tse a-tha', a bin da, tsi ga,
148. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga on-tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
149. I'-ts'a thin-ge mon-thin ta i tsi" da', a bin da, tsi ga,
150. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga on-tha' bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
151. Ts'e' wa-tse-xi ki-the mon-thin ta i tse a', zhin-ga', a bin da,
tsi ga,
152. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga on-tha' bi do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
153. U'-non a bi shki i-the ki-the ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
154. Hon'-ba tha-gthi" xtsi shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
155. I'-the ki-the ta i tse a', zhi°-ga', a bin da, tsi ga.
156. Da', a bin da, tsi ga,
157. Wi'-<?on-ga, e'-ki-e a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
158. Zhin'-ga ni-ka-shi-ga ba thon-ta zhi in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
159. Zhin'-ga ni a-ga-ha ba thon-ta zhin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
160. Wi'-pon-ga, e'-ki-e a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
161. U'-ton-be ga-xa ba thin ha', a bin da, tsi ga,
162. O'-pxon ton no" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
2786—21 27
418 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 30
163. Wi'-tsi-go e', e-gi-e a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
164. Zhin'-ga ni a-ga-ha ba thon-ta zhi a, wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-e a-ka', a
bin da, tsi ga,
165. Zhin'-ga ni a-bi-pe tha ba thon-ta zhi a', wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-e a-ka',
a bin da, tsi ga,
166. U'-ton-be tha-the tse a', wi-tsi-go e', e-gi-e a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
167. Zhin'-ga ni a-ga-ha ba thon-ta zhi in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
168. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
169. O'-pxon ton no" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
170. Mon'-ki-£in-dse tsi-the don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
171. Mon'-thin-ka sha-be thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
172. Ga'-wa-ton-in thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
173. Ha' ! wi-zhin-the', e ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
174. We'-shnon wi-gi-tha bi a', wi-zhin-the, e to" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
175. Zhin'-ga mi hi-e ge ta', a bin da, tsi ga,
176. We'-gon-tha a-thin mon-thin bi don shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
177. We'-gon-tha da-don i-thu-ts'a-ga zhi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da',
a bin da, tsi ga,
178. We'-thon-bi on xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
179. Mon'-ki-pin-dse tsi-the don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
180. Mon'-thin-ka to-ho thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
181. Ga'-hi-thon-be ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
182. Ha' ! wi-zhin-the', e ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
183. We'-shnon wi-gi-tha bi a', wi-zhin-the', e ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
184. Zhin'-ga mi hi-e' ge ta', a bin da, tsi ga,
185. We'-gon-tha a-thin mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
186. We'-gon-tha a-thi" mon-thin bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
187. Da' i-thu-ts'a-ga zhi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsi" da', a bi" da, tsi ga.
188. We'-tha-bthiQ on xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
189. Mon'-ki-cin-dse tsi-the don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
190. Moa'-ha shu-dse thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
191. Ga'-hi-thon-be ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
192. Ha' ! wi-zhin-the', e ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
'193. We'-shnon wi-gi-tha bi a', wi-zhin-the', e tsi-the a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
194. Mi'hi-e ge ta', a bin da, tsi ga,
195. Zhin'-ga we-gon-tha a-thin mon-thin bi don shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
196. Da'-don i-thu-ts'a-ga zhi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da,
tsi ga.
197. I'-do-bi-on xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
198. Mon'-ki-cin-dse tsi-the don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
199. Mon'-thin-ka ?i thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
200. Ga'-hi-thon-be ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
LAFLESCHE] TRIBAL RITES OSAGE LANGUAGE 419
201. Ha' ! wi-zhin-the', e ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
202. We'-shnon wi-gi-tha bi a, wi-zhin-the', e ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
203. Mi'hi-e ge ta', a bin da, tsi ga,
204. We'-go°-tha a-thin mon-thin bi do" shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
205. Da'-don i-thu-ts'a-ga zhi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsi" da', a bin da,
tsi ga.
206. Wi'-zhin-the, e ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
207. Hon'-ga Opxon-ton-ga wi a'-ton-he in da', a bin da, (si ga,
208. Hon'-ga Mon-thin-ka-zhin-ga wi a'-ton-he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
209. Hon'-ga Mon'-thin-ka-ga-xe wi a'-ton he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
210. Hon'-ga Mo"-zhon-ga-xe wi a'-ton he in, da', a bin da, tsi ga,
211. Mon-thin'-ka sha-be thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
212. Ba'-ha ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
213. Ga' thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
214. Wa'-thin-e-?ka she mon mo" -zhi in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
215. Zhin'-ga we-gon-tha a-thin mon-thin bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
216. I'-ki-k'on mon-thin bi do" shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
217. In'-shta i-ga-bi-zhe kshe non shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
218. Do'-ka ga-xe the non shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
219. Da'-don i-thu-ts'a-ga zhi ki-the mon-thin ta tsin da', a bin da,
tsi ga.
220. Mon'-thin-ka to-ho thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
221. The' shki don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
222. We'-ki-k'on wi-kchi-xa bin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
223. Zhin'-ga mi hi-e' ge ta, a bin da, tsi ga,
224. We'-gon-tha a-thin mon-thin ta ba don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
225. Da' i-thu-ts'a-ga zhi mon-thin ta ba don a', a bin da, tsijga.
226. Da', a bin da, tsi ga,
227. Mon-thin'-ka zhu'-dse thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
228. Ba'-ha ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
229. The' we-shnon wi-gi-tha bi a', wi-zhin-the, e' ton a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
230. Mi'hi-e ge ta', a bin da, tsi ga,
231. We'-gon-tha a-shni ba she don shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
232. Da'-don i-sdu-ts'a-ga zhi ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
233. Mon-thin'-ka 9! thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
234. He' shki don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
235^ Zhin'-ga mi hi-e ge ta', a bin da, tsi ga,
236. We'-gon-tha a-thin mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
237. Da' i-thu-ts' a-ga zhi mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bi" da, tsi ga.
420 THE OSAGE TRIBE [BTH. ANN. 36
238. Da', a bin da, tsi ga,
239. Wi'-con-ga, e'-ki-e a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
240. Da' ni-the thin-ge on-ni-ka-shi-ga bin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
241. E'-dsi-zhi the thin-ge on-ni-ka-shi-ga bin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
242. In'-gthon-ga zhu-i-ga the ton non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
243. Wi'-con-ga, e'-gi-e a-ka, a bin da, tsi ga,
244. Ga' xtsi hi tha i don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
245. Thi'-con-ga gi thin we-ton-in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
246. I'-shnon-shnon-the xtsi thin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
247. I'-ton-thin-thin-ga-ga thin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
248. U'-gi-ki-a ba thin ha', a bin da, tsi ga,
249. U'-gi-ki-e a-tsia-tha ba don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
250. Ha' ! wi-zhin-the, e' ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
251. Ni'-ka-shi-ga win e-dsi a-ka', wi-zhin-the, e ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
252. Non'-pe-wa-the xtsi bi a', wi-zhin-the, e ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
253. Ni'-ka-shi-ga the on-ga thin e'-gon xtsi bin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
254. Ha' ! wi-pon-ga, e'-ki-e thon-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
255. Non/, da ni-the thin-ge on-ni-ka-shi-ga bi e'-pshe in da', a bin da,
tsi ga,
256. E'-dsi-zhi the thin-ge on-ni'-ka-shi-ga bin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
257. Ni'-ka-shi-ga be' thin shki don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
258. Wa-non'-xe a-dsi the on-the ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
259. Ni'-ka-shi-ga be' zhin-ga i-ta the shki don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
260. Ki' i-he-on-the ta i tsi" da', a bin da, tsi ga,
261. TV xtsi a-tsia-tha bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
262. U'-ba-non the win ga-xe a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
263. U'-ba-non the do-ba hi he'-the a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
264. The a-ka, wi-zhin-the, e ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
265. She' shon in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
266. Wa'-non-xe a-dsi the on-the ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
267. We'-a-ba-cu a', a bin da, tsi ga,
268. I'-u-gthe a-tsia-the a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
269. I'-u-gtha-kshin a tsia-tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
270. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
271. Ni'-ka-shi-ga', a bia da, tsi ga,
272. Hon'-ga bthin a', wi-zhin-the, e ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
273. Wi'-zhin-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
274. I'-e wa-cka bi a', wi-zhin-the, e ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
275. Hon'-ga-wa-tse-gi-tsi wi a'-ton he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
276. Wi'-zhin-the, e ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
277. Zhin'-ga-ga-hi-ge wi a'-ton-he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
278. Wa'-tse-ga-hi-ge wi a'-ton-he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
279. Wa'-tse-ga-wa wi a'-ton-he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
280. Wa'-tse-mon-in wi a'-ton he in da', a oin da, tsi ga,
281. She' shon in da', a bin da, tsi ga.
LA FLESCHEJ TRIBAL RITES OSAGE LANGUAGE 421
282. Zhin'-ga-ga-hi-ge a', a bin da, tsi ga,
283. Zha'-zhe tha-ki-ton mon-ni ta tsi" da', a bin da, tsi ga,
284. Wa'-tse-ga-wa shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
285. Zha'-zhe tha ki-ton mpn-ni ta tsi" da', a bin da, tsi ga,
286. We'-shno" wi-gi-the a', wi-zhin-the, e', tsi the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
287. She' shon in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
288. Wi'-pon-ga, e'-ki-e thon-ka, a bin da, tsi ga,
289. She' shon in da, a bin da, tsi ga,
290. U'-xthi thin-ge on-ki-the ta i tse a', wi-con-ga, e'-ki-e thon-ka, a
bin da, tsi ga,
291. Zha'-zhe on-ki-ton ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
292. Zhin'-ga-ga-hi-ge a', a bin da, tsi ga,
293. Zha'-zhe on-ki-ton ta i tse a', wi-9O°-ga, e'-ki-e thon-ka', a bin da,
tsi ga,
294. Wa'-tse-ga-wa shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
295. Zha'-zhe on-ki-ton ta i tse a', wi-£0n-ga, e'-ki-e thon-ka', a bin da,
tsi ga,
296. Ni'-ka-shi-ga, a bin da, tsi ga,
297. I'-e-wa-^ka e'-sha bi non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
298. I'-e-<?ka-wa-the shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
299. Zha'-zhe on-ki-ton ta i tse a', wi-?on-ga, e'-ki-e thon-ka', a bin da,
tsi ga,
300. Pa'-thin e-gon e'-sha bi non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
301. E'-shki don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
302. Zha'-zhe on-ki-ton ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
303. Pa'-thin-hon-ga shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
304. Zha'-zhe on-ki-ton ta i tse a', wi-con-ga, e'-ki-e thon-ka', a bin dn,
tsi ga.
305. Da', a bin da, tsi ga,
306. Wi'-con-ga, e'-ki-e a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
307. We'-ki-k'on wa-thin-ga bin da, e'-ki-e a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
308. U'-ton-be ga-xa ba thin ha', a bin da, tsi ga,
309. (^i'-thu-ce a-tsia-tha ba do" a', a bi° da, tsi ga,
310. In'-gthon-ga zhu-i-ga the to" no" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
311. Wi'-?on-ga, e'-gi-e a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
312. U'-ton-be ga-xa ba thin ha', a bin da, tsi ga,
313. Ga'-xtsi hi tha i don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
314. He'-dsi xtsi gi thin a', a bin da, tsi ga,
315. Thi'-con-ga gi thin we-ton-in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
316. U'-gi-ki-a ba thin ha', a bi" da, tsi ga,
317. U'-gi-ki-e a-tsia-tha bin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
318. Wi'-zhin-the, e to" a, a bi" da, tsi ga,
319. Wa'-dsu-ta thon-tse xtsi win a', a bin da, tsi ga,
320. He'-dsi a-ka, wi-zhin-the, e' ton a, a bin da, tsi ga,
422 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 30
321. She' shon in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
322. Wi'-con-ga, e'-ki-e thon-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
323. Wi'-con-ga a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
324. Wa'-dsu-ta thon-tse xtsi win e-dsi a-ka' bin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
325. She' shon in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
326. Thi'-to-ge gtha ba thin ha', a bin da, tsi ga,
327. Wa'-non-xe a-dsi the on-the ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
328. Wa'-dsu-ta be zhin-ga i-ta i shki don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
329. Wa'-non-xe a-dsi the on-the ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
330. No11', da ni-the thi°-ge xtsi on-ni'-ka-shi-ga bin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
331. yi'-thu-pe a-tsia-tha bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
332. Ho'-ba-non-the win ga-xe a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
333. U'-ba-non-the do-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
334. Hi'-i-he a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
335. The' a-ka, wi-zhin-the, e' tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
336. Wa'-non-xe a-dsi the on-the ta bi e'-pshe in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
337. We'-a-ba-pu a', a bin da, tsi ga,
338. I-u'-gtha-kshon a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
339. A'-ba-pu a-tsia-tha bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
340. Hin' ga-ta-the i-he-the a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
341. He'-dsi xtsi hi-e-ha a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
342. Wi'-zhin-the, e' tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
343. Mi'-xa bi a', wi-zhin-the, e' tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
344. Mi'-xa-pka-bi', a', wi-zhin-the, e', tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
345. We'-ki-k'on on-tha ba thon tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
346. We'-ki-k'on on-the ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
347. ^i' sha-ba bin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
348. Pa' sha-ba bin da', a bin, da, tsi ga,
349. Hi"' cka ga ge shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
350. E' shki don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
351. Zha'-zhe on-ki-ton ta i tse a', wi-pon-ga, e'-ki-e thon-ka', a bi"
da, tsi ga,
352. Mi'-xa-cka shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
353. Zha'-zhe on-ki-ton ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
354. Wa'-zhin-ga-fka shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
355. Zha'-zhe on-ki-ton ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
356. Zhin'-ga zha-zhe ki-ton mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
357. Mon'-shon-cka shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
358. Zha'-zhe on-ki-ton ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
359. pi'-ha sha-be ga ge shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
360. He' shki don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
361. We'-ki-k'on on-the ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
362. Mi' hi-e ge ta', a bin da, tsi ga,
363. Non'-xthe on-gi-the ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
364. We'-gon-tha a-thin mon-thin bi do" shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
LAFLHSCHB] TRIBAL, RITES OSAGE LANGUAGE 423
365. Da' i-thu-ts' a-ga zhi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
366. Non/ we-ki-k'on wa-thin-ga bin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
367. Mi'-xa-fka win ts' e'-on-tha bi non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
368. Ta'-hi-u-sdo-zha ga thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
369. He'-shki don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
370. Wa'-xthe-xthe on-gi-the ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
371. Wa'-xthe-xthe on-gi-the on-mon-thin bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
372. Mi' hi-e ge ta, a bin da, tsi ga,
373. Da'-don i-thu-ts' a-ga zhi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da,
tsi ga
374. Pa' sha-be ga tse a', a bin da, tsi ga,
375. He'-shki non-xthe on-gi-the ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
376. Non'-xthe on-gi-the on-mon-thin bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
377. Mi' hi-e ge ta', a bin da, tsi ga,
378. Da' i-thu-ts' a-ga zhi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
379. Wi'-con-ga, e'-ki-e thon-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
380. Non zhin-ga we-ki-k'on wa-thin-ga' bin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
381. U'-ton-be ga-xa ba thin ha', a bin da, tsi ga,
382. Wi'-pon-ga, e'-ki-e thon-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
383. In'-gthon-ga zhu-i-ga the to" no" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
384. Wi'-QOn-ga, e-gi-e a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
385. Ga' xtsi hi tha i do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
386. A'-ba-do a-tha-k'a-be dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
387. 'In> sha-gtha thin-kshe non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
388. He'-dsi xtsi a-thin gi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
389. The hon/ a-zhin-tha, wi-zhin-the, e' tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
390. The we'-ki-k'on on-tha ba tho" tse in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
391. She' shon in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
392. Zhin'-ga we-ki-k'on tha ba thon ta zhi a-tha', a bin da, tsi ga,
393. Zhin'-ga we-ki-k'on tha ba thon-ta zhi thon-zha', a bin da, tsi ga,
394. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga the ta i tse a-tha', a bin da, tsi ga,
395. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga the mon-thin bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
396. Zhin'-ga, a bin da, tsi ga,
397. I'-ts' a thin-ge mon-thin ta i tsi" da', a bin da, tsi ga,
398. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga tha bi do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
399. Ts'e' wa-tse-xi ki-the mon-thin ta i tse a-tha', a bin da, tsi ga,
400. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
401. U'-non a bi shki i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tse a-tha', a bin da,
tsi ga,
402. Ga' non-zhin da', a bi" da, tsi ga,
iga,
'•••**» Y"* t>"*»
n-ga bin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
402. Ga' non-zhin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
403. In'-gthon-ga zhu-i-ga the ton non a', a bin da, ts
404. Wi'-<?on-ga, e'-gi-e a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
405. Non' zhin-ga we-ki-k'o" wa-thin-ga bin da', a bi1
424 THE OSAGE TRIBE [BTH. ANN. 36
406. U'-ton-be ga-xa ba thin ha', a bin da, tsi ga,
407. Ga' xtsi hi tha i don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
408. A'-ba-do a-ga-ha xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
409. 'In'-da-po-ki thin-kshe non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
410. He'-dsi xtsi a-thin gi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
411. The, hon' a-zhin-tha, wi-zhin-the, e' to" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
412. She' shon in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
413. Zhin'-ga we-ki-k'on tha ba thon ta zhi a', wi-con-ga, e'-gi-a a-ka',
a biQ da, tsi ga,
414. Zhin'-ga we-ki-k'on tha ba thon-ta zhi thon-zha', a bin da, tsi ga,
415. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga the ta i tse a-tha', a bin da, tsi ga,
416. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
417. I'-ts'a thin-ge mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
418. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
419. Ts'e' wa-tse-xi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
420. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
421. U'-non a bi shki i-the ki-the ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga.
422. Wi'-con-ga, e'-ki-e thon-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
423. We'-ki-k'on wa-thin-ga bin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
424. In'-gthon-ga zhu-i-ga the ton non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
425. Wi'-con-ga, e'-gi-e thon-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
426. U'-ton-be ga-xa thin ha', a bin da, tsi ga,
427. A'-thin u-ta-non xtsi ge dsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
428. 'In'-zhu-9ka thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
429. He'-dsi xtsi a-thin gi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
430. The, hon' a-zhin-tha, wi-zhin-the, e' tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
431. The' we-ki-k'on tha ba thon tse a', wi-zhin-the, e' ton a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
432. We'-ki-k'on tha ba thon-ta zhi thon-zha', a bin da, tsi ga,
433. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga the ta i tse a-tha', a bin da, tsi ga,
434. Zhin/-ga zhu-i-ga tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
435. I'-ts'a thin-ge mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
436. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga tha' bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
437. Ts'e' wa-tse-xi ki-the mon-thin ta i tse a', zhin-ga', a bin da, tsi ga,
438. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga tha' bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
439. U'-non a bi shki i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga.
440. Wi'-con-ga, e'-ki-e thon-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
441. In'-gthon-ga zhu-i-ga the ton non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
442. Wi'-con-ga, e'-gi-e thon-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
443. Zhin'-ga we-ki-k'on wa-thin-ga bin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
444. U'-ton-be ga-xa thin ha', a bin da, tsi ga,
445. Ga' xtsi hi tha i don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
446. 'In'-zhu-ci thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
LAFLESCHB] TRIBAL RITES OSAGE LANGUAGE 425
447. He'-dsi xtsi a-thin gi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
448. The, hon' a-zhin-tha, wi-zhin-the, e' ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
449. Zhin'-ga we-ki-k'on tha ba thon ta zhi thon-zha', a bin da, tsi ga,
450. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga tha ba thon tse a-tha', a bin da, tsi ga,
451. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga the ta i tse a-tha', a bin da, tsi ga,
452. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga the mon-thin bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
453. I'-ts'a thin-ge mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
454. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga tha' bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
455. Ts'e' wa-tse-xi ki-the mon-thin taitsea',zhin-ga', abinda, tsi ga,
456. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga tha' bi do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
457. U'-non a bi shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
458. I'-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tse a', zhin-ga', a bin da, tsi ga.
459. Wi'-con-ga, e'-ki-e thon-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
460. Non/ zhin-ga we-ki-k'on wa-thin-ga bin da, a bin da, tsi ga,
461. In'-gthon-ga zhu-i-ga the to" no" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
462. Wi'-con-ga e'-gi-e thon-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
463. U'-ton-be ga-xa thin ha', a bin da, tsi ga,
464. Ga' xtsi hi tha i don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
465. He'-dsi xtsi gi thi" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
466. Wi'-con-ga gi thin we-ton-in da, e'-ki-e thon-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
467. Thi'-£0n-ga i-shnon-shnon the xtsi thin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
468. Hi'-ton-thin-thin-ga-ga thin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
469. U'-gi-ki-a ba thin ha', a bin da, tsi ga,
470. U'-gi-ki-e a-tsia-tha bin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
471. Ha' ! wi-£O°-ga, e'-gi-e thon-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
472. Wi'-zhin-the, e' ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
473. Wa'-dsu-ta thon-tse xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
474. E'-dsi a-ka', wi-zhin-the, e ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
475. Wa'-dsu-ta non-pe-wa-the xtsi bi a', wi-zhi°-the, e ton a', a bi°
da, tsi ga,
476. ^i'zha-ta bin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
477. Wi'-zhin-the, e to" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
478. He' a-gthe a-ka in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
479. Non'-pe-wa-the xtsi bi a', wi-zhin-the, e' ton a, a bin da, tsi ga,
480. Ha' ! wi-zhin-the, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
481. Wi'-con-ga a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
482. Wa'-non-pe xtsi a-gthi a-ka in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
483. Wa'-dsu-ta win e-dsi ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
484. Non'-pe-wa-the xtsi to" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
485. ^i'zha-ta e' a-ka in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
486. He' ge e'-ton a-gthe e' a-ka in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
487. She' sho" in da, e'-ki-e thon-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
488. Thi'-to-ge gtha ba thin ha', a bin da, tsi ga,
489. Non/, da ni-the thin-ge o"-ni'-ka-shi-ga bin da', a bi" da, tsi ga,
426 THE OSAGE TKIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
490. E'-dsi-zhi the thin-ge on-ni'-ka-shi-ga bin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
491. Wa'-dsu-ta be zhin-ga i-ta' thin shki don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
492. Wa'-non-xe a-dsi the on-the ta i tsi" da', a bin da, tsi ga,
493. £!i'-thu-<?e a-tsia-tha bin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
494. U'-ba-non-the win-a'-ha i-he-the a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
495. U'-ba-non-the do'-ba hi he a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
496. The' a-ka, wi-zhin-the, e' tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
497. E'-dsi hi he-tha bi no" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
498. Wa'-dsu-ta, a bin da, tsi ga,
499. Mi'-ga a-ka', wi-zhin-the, e'-ki-e thon-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
500. E'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
501. We'-ki-k'on on-tha ba thon tse a', wi-zhin-the, e'-ki-e thon-ka',
a bin da, tsi ga,
502. Xin'-ha ge e-ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
503. We'-ki-k'on on-tha ba thon-tse a', wi-zhi°-the, e'-ki-e thon-ka',
a bin da, tsi ga,
504. Non'-ka u-pa ga kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
505. E'-shki don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
506. U'-we-ton-in xtsi a-ka', wi-zhin-the, e'-ki-e thon-ka', a bin da,
tsi ga,
507. Min' ga thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
508. He' shki do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
509. Zha'-zhe on-ki-ton ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
510. Zhin'-ga Min-tse-xi shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
511. Zha'-zhe on-ki-ton ta i tse a', a bin da, tsi ga,
512. Non'-ka-dsi-win shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
513. Zha'-zhe on-ki-ton ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
514. He' ga-xa zhin-ga ge shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
515. Zha'-zhe on-ki-ton ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
516. Pa' thin-kshe e'-ton shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
517. Zha'-zhe on-ki-ton ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
518. Tse'-pa-ga-xe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
519. Zha'-zhe on-ki-ton ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
520. Da', a biQ da, tsi ga,
521. Hon'-ga U-dse-the Pe-thon-ba ni-ka-shi-ga bin da, a bin da, tsi ga,
522. Xtha'-xtha thin-ge xtsi ni-ka-shi-ga bin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
523. Zhin'-ga mon-hin tha ba thon-tse thin-ge' in da, wi-con-ge, e'-ki-e
thon-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
524. 'In'-gthon-ga zhu-i-ga the ton non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
525. Wi'-con-ga, e-gi-e thon-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
526. Ga' xtsi hi tha i don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
527. 'In'-ba-xtha kshe non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
528. He'-dsi xtsi a-thin gi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
LAFLESCHE] TRIBAL, RITES OSAGE LANGUAGE 427
529. The hon'-a-zhin tha, wi-zhin-the, e' tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
530. Zhin'-ga mon-hin tha ba thon tse a', wi-zhin-the, e' to" a', a bin
da, tsi ga,
531. Zhin'-ga mon-hin tha ba thon ta zhi in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
532. E'-zhi-zhi-fka u-ton-ga', wi-9<>n-ga, e'-gi-e thon-ka', a bin da,
tsi ga,
533. Wi'-con-ga, e'-ki-e thon-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
534. No"', zhin-ga mon-hin tha ba thon-tse thin-ge e'-pshe in da', a
bin da, tsi ga,
535. In'-gthon-ga zhu-i-ga the ton non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
536. Ga' xtsi hi tha i don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
537. Mon'-hin-ci fa-gi kshe non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
538. He'-dsi xtsi a-thin gi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
539. The hon'-a-zhin tha, wi-zhin-the, e' to" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
540. Zhin'-ga mon-hin tha ba thon tse a', wi-zhin-the, e ton a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
541. E'-zhi-zhi-fka u'-ton-ga', wi-pon-ga, e'-gi-e thon-ka', a bin da,
tsi ga,
542. Zhin'-ga mon-hin tha ba thon-tse thin-ge' e-pshe in da', a bin da,
tsi ga,
543. Wi'-con-ga, e'-ki-e thon-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
544. Non/, zhin-ga mon-hin tha ba thon-tse thin-ge' e-pshe in da', a
bin da, tsi ga,
545. In'-gthon-ga zhu-i-ga the to" non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
546. Wi'-con-ga, e'-gi-e thon-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
547. Ga' xtsi hi tha i don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
548. Mon'-hin-£i i-ba btho-ga zhu-dse kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
549. He'-dsi xtsi a-thin gi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
550. The hon'-a-zhin-tha, wi-zhin-the, e' to" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
551. She' shon in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
552. She' e-shnon u-tha-dse tha to" she a', wi-con-ga, e'-gi-a bi a',
a bin da, tsi ga,
553. Zhin'-ga mon-hin tha ba thon tse in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
554. Zhi°'-ga mon-hi° the mon-thin ta i tse a', wi-pon-ga, e'-ki-e
thon-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
555. Zhin'-ga mi hi-e ge ta', a bin da, tsi ga,
556. Mon'-hin gi-the mon-thin bi don shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
557. Mon'-hin gi-pa-hi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', zhin-ga', a bin da,
tsi ga,
558. Tsi'-zhu zhin-ga i-ta', a bin da, tsi ga,
559. Wa'-zha-zhe zhin-ga i-ta e-thon-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
560. Mon'-hin gi-the mon-thin ta i tsi" da', a bin da, tsi ga,
561. Mon'-hi" gi-the mon-thin bi do" shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
428 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
562. Mon/-hin gi-sho"-tha zhi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da,
tsi ga,
563. Mon'-hin gi-the mon-thin bi don shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
564. I'-ts'a thin-ge mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
565. Mon'-hin gi-the mon-thin bi don shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
566. Ts'e' wa-tse-xi ki-the mon-thin ta i tse a', zhin-ga', a bin da, tsi ga,
567. Mon'-hin gi-the mon-thin bi don shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
568. U'-non shki i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tse a', zhin-ga', a bin da,
tsi ga,
569. Mon'-hin zhu-dse ga kshe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
570. E'-shki don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
571. Zha'-zhe on-ki-ton ta i tse a', wi-con-ga, e'-ki-e thon-ka', a bin da,
tsi ga,
572. Zhin'-ga won shki don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
573. Mon'-hin-zhu-dse shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
574. Zha'-zhe on-ki-ton ta i tse a', wi-con-ga, e'-ki-e tho"-ka', a bin da,
tsi ga,
575. Zhin'-ga won shki don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
576. Mon'-hin-hon-ga shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
577. Zha'-zhe on-ki-ton ta i tse a', wi-con-ga, e'-ki-e thon-ka', a bin da,
tsi ga.
HON-BE'-CU WI'-GI-E
(Free translation, p. 239; literal translation, p. 574)
1. E'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
2. Zhin'-ga da-don ci ki-the ta ba don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
3. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
4. Sho'-ka Wa-ba-xi ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
5. Wi'-co^-ga, e-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
6. Zhin'-ga da-don ci ki-the ta ba don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
7. O-ton-be ga-xa th'in ha, e'-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
8. Sho'-ka Wa-ba-xi ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
9. Thu-e' xtsi the don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
10. 'IQ'zhu-dse thin-kshe non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
11. Wi'-zhin-the, e tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
12. The' zhin-ga ci ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da e'-tsi-the a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
13. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
14. Zhin'-ga pi ki-tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
15. ^i' gi-ba-xtho-ga zhi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da, e' tsi-the a', a
bin da, tsi ga,
16. Xa'-dse non-sha-tha-ge ki-the mon-thin ta i tsi" da, e' tsi-the a',
a bin da, tsi ga,
17. Zhin'-ga ci ki-the mon-thin bi do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
18. pi' i ki i-ts'a thin-ge ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da e' tsi-the a', a
bin da, tsi ga.
LAFLESCHE] TRIBAL RITES OSAGE LANGUAGE 429
19. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
20. Zhin'-ga da-don hon-be-kon the mon-thin ta ba don a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
21. Ki'-pda mon-ge zhu-dse kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
22. Zhin'-ga hon-be-kon the mon-thin ta i tsin da e' tsi-the a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
23. Zhin'-ga hon-be-kon the mon-thin bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
24. Hon'-be-kon i-ts'a thin-ge ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da e' tsi-the a',
a bin da, tsi ga,
25. Hon'-be-kon gi-ba-xa zhi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da e' tsi-the a',
a bin da, tsi ga,
2Q. Hon'-be-kon i-ts'a thin-ge ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da e' tsi-the a',
a bin da, tsi ga.
27. Hon' a-don ci ki-tha bi go" no" shki a, hin a, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
28. 'IQ/ fa-be thin-kshe non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
29. Ga' zhin-ga pi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsi" da e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
30. Zhin'-ga pi ki-the mon-thin bi do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
31. pi' i ki i-ts'a thin-ge ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da e' tsi-the a', a
bin da, tsi ga,
32. Zhin'-ga ci ki-the mon-thin bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
33. ^i' gi-ba-xtho-ga zhi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsi" da e' tsi-the a', a
bin da, tsi ga,
34. Xa'-dse non-sha-tha-ge ki-the mon-thin ta i tsi" da e' tsi-the a',
a bin da, tsi ga.
35. E'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
36. Zhin'-ga da-don hon-be-kon the mon-thin ta ba do" a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
37. Ki'-cda mon-ge ca-be kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
38. Ga' zhin-ga hon-be-kon the mon-thin ta i tsin da e' tsi-the a', a bi"
da, tsi ga,
39. Zhin'-ga hon-be-kon the mon-thin bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
40. Hon'-be-kon gi-ba-xa zhi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da e' tsi-the a',
a bin da, tsi ga,
41. Zhin'-ga hon-be-kon the mon-thin bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
42. Hon'-be-kon i-ts'a thin-ge ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da e' tsi-the a',
a bin da, tsi ga.
43. Hon' a-don ci ki-tha bi go" 110° shki a', hi" a, e'-ki-a' bi a,
abin da, tsi ga,
44. 'In/ shton-ga ci-hi thin-kshe no" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
45. Ga' zhin-ga ci ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
46. Zhin'-ga ci ki-the mon-thin bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
430 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. AXX. 30
47. (,)i'i ki i-ts'a thin-ge ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da e' tsi-the a', a bin
da, tsi ga,
48. Zhin'-ga pi ki-the mon-thin bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
49. Xa'-dse non-sha-tha-ge ki-the moD-thin ta i tsin da e' tsi-the a',
a bin da, tsi ga,
50. pi'gi-ba-xa zhi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da e' tsi-the a', a bin da;
tsi ga.
51. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
52. Zhin'-ga da-don hon be-kon the mon-thin ta ba don a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
53. Ki'-pda mon-ge pi kshe non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
54. Ga' zhin-ga hon-be-kon the mon-thin ta i tsin da e' tsi-theV, a Ui"
da, tsi ga,
55. Hon'-be-kon the mon-thin bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
56. Hon'-be-kon i-ts'a thin-ge ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da e' tsi-the a',
a bin da, tsi ga,
57. Zhin'-ga hon-be-kon the mon-thin bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
58. Hon'-be-kon gi-ba-xa zhi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da e' tsi-the a',
a bin da, tsi ga.
59. Hon' a-don pi ki-tha bi go" non shki a, hi" a, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
60. 'In' shton-ga sha-be thin-kshe non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
61. Ga' pi ki-the mon-thin tse a-tha e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
62. Zhin'-ga pi ki-the mon-thin bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
63. £i'i ki i-ts'a thin-ge ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da e' tsi-the a', a bin
da, tsi ga,
64. Zhin'-ga pi ki-the mon-thin bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
65. PI gi-ba-xtho-ga zhi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da e' tsi-the a', a
bin da, tsi ga,
66. Xa'-dse non-sha-tha-ge ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da e' tsi-the a',
a bin da, tsi ga.
67. E'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
68. Da'-don hon-be-kon the mon-thin ta ba don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
69. Ki'-pda mon-ge sha-be kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
70. Ga' hon-be-kon the tse a-tha e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
71. Zhin'-ga hon-be-kon the mon-thin bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
72. Hon'-be-kon gi-ba-xa zhi ki-the mon-thi° ta i tsin da e' tsi-the a',
a bin da, tsi ga,
73. Zhin'-ga hon-be-kon the mon-thin bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
74. Hon'-be-kon i-ts'a thin-ge ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da e' tsi-the a',
a bin da, tsi ga.
LAFLESCHE] TRIBAL RITES OSAGE LANGUAGE 431
Kl'-NON Wl'-GI-E
(Free translation, p. 242; literal translation, p. 575)
1. He-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
2. Zhin'-ga da-don ki-non gi-the ta ba do" a', a bin da, \s\ gn,
3. E'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
4. 'In'-zhin-ga do-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
5. A'-ki-kon i-tse-the a-ka', a bin da, ^si ga,
6. E'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
7. £a'-zhin-ga ha-thon-fka ha don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
8. Thi'-bthon-bthon-xe a-tsi-a-the a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga.
9. E'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
10. U'-ba-mon-xe i-tse-the a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga.
11. E'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
12. Da'-k'o i-the ga-xe a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
13. O'-da-bthu i-the ga-xe a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga.
14. Mon'-xe a-tha-k'a-be don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
15. Da'-zhu-dse i-non-the a-ka', a bi" da, tsi ga,
16. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
17. Zhin'-ga ki-non gi-the tse a-tha e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
18. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
19. Tsi'-zhu u-dse-the Pe-thon-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
20. U'-ca-ka thin-ge i-he-the a-ka', a bin da, (si ga,
21. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
22. Da'-don i-tha-thu-ce tse don e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, (si ga,
23. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
24. Tse'-ha-wa-gthe zhu-dse thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
25. I'-tha-thu-fe tse a-tha e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
26. I'-tha-thu-ce kshi-tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
27. Mi' hi-e ge ta', a bin da, tsi ga,
28. Wa'-pa-hi u-kia-sha thin-ge a-thin a-hi bi shki don a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
29. Wa'-pa-hi a-gtha ba zhi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsi" da e' tsi-the a',
a bin da, tsi ga,
30. Tse'-ha-wa-gthe zhu-dse thin-kshe a', a bin.da, tsi ga,
31. I'-tha-thu-?e on-gi-tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
32. Mi' hi-e ge ta', a bin da, tsi ga,
33. Wa'-pa-hi u-kia-sha thin-ge a-thin a-hi bi shki do" a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
34. Wa'-pa-hi a-bu-zha-ga bi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsi" da e' tsi-the a',
a bin da, tsi ga.
35. Tse'-ha-wa-gthe zhu-dse thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
36. I'-tha-thu-ce on-gi-tha bi do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
37. Mi'hi-e ge ta', a bin da, tsi ga,
432 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
38. Wa'-pa-hi u-kia-sha thin-ge a-thin a-hi bi shki don a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
39. Wa'-pa-hi a-ki-tha-zha-ta bi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da e' tsi-the
a', a bin da, tsi ga,
40.Tse'-ha-wa-gthe zhu-dse thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
41. I'-tha-thu-pe on-gi-tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
42. Mi' hi-e ge ta', a bin da, tsi ga,
43. Wa'-pa-hi u-kia-sha thin-ge a-thin a-hi bi shki don a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
44. Wa'-pa-hi ge-gon bi on-ki-the on-mon-thin ta i tsin da e' tsi-theja',
a bin da, tsi ga.
45. He'-dsi xtsi a, a bin da, tsi ga,
46. Shon/ da-don i-tha-thu-ce tse don e'-ki-e a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
47. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
48. Wa'-kon-da Hon-ba don thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
49. I'-tha-thu-ce tse a-tha e'-ki-e a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
50. Wa'-kon-da Hon-ba don thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
51. I'-tha-thu-ce on-gi-tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
52 Wa'-kon-da non-wa-pa bi on-mon-thin ta i tsin da e' tsi-the a', a bin
da, tsi ga,
53. Wa' kon-da Hon-ba don thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
54. I'-tha-thu-ce on-gi-tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
55. Wa'-kon-da e'-shki don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
56. In'-dse u-wa-kia-ta ba zhi on-mon-thin ta i tsin da e' tsi-the a',
a bin da, tsi ga,
SONG 1
(Free translation and music, p. 244)
1
Wi-tsi-go ho ga-k'o-ga bi the the,
E hu-thi-k'o bi the the,
E hu-thi-k'o bi the the he the,
Wi-tsi-go ho ga-k'o-ga bi the the,
E hu-thi-k'o bi the the,
E hu-thi-k'o bi the the.
Wi-tsi-go ho ga-k'o-ga bi the the,
E hu-thi-xthi bi the the, etc.
Wi-tsi-go ho ga-k'o-ga bi the the,
E hu-bi k'u bi the the, etc.
LAFLBSCHE] TRIBAL RITES OSAGE LANGUAGE 433
SONG 2
(Free translation and music, p. 245.)
1
Wi-tsi-go ho ga-k'o-ga bi the,
E hu-bi-ka bi the the,
E hu-bi-ka bi the the he the,
Hon-ga win wa-non no",
Ga-k'o ga bi the the,
E hu-bi-ka bi the the.
Wi-tsi-go ho ga-k'o-ga bi the,
E i-bi-ka bi the the, etc.
Wi-tei-go ho ga-k'o-ga bi the,
E i-bi k'o bi the the, etc.
SONG 3
(Free translation and music, p. 246)
1
K i-no" the mo11 the gi-don-ba,
Ki-no" the mou the gi-don-ba,
U-thi-k'o no" the mon the gi-don ba,
Ki-no" the mon the gi-do"-ba,
U-thi-k'o non the mo° the gi-do"-ba,
K i-no° the mo" the gi-do°-ba.
2
K i-nou the mou the gi-don-ba,
K i-no" the mon the gi-don ba,
O-thi-xthi no" the mon the gi-do°-ba, et< .
3
O-bi-ka no" the mo" the gi-don-ba, etc.
4
I-bi-ka non the mou the gi-doD-ba, etc.
5
I-bi-k'o no" the mo" the gi-don-ba, etc.
Kl'-NON Wl'-GI-E
(Free transliition, p. 247; literal translation, p. 577)
1. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
2. Zhin'-ga da-do" pi-tha to" mon-thin ta ba don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
3. Tse'-hin shin-ga thin-kshe no" a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
4. Ga' pi-tha to" a-ka', a bi" da, tsi ga,
5. Zhin'-ga pi-tha to" ki-the mo"-thi" bi do" a', a bi" da, (si ga,
6. I'-ts'a thi"-ge ki-the mo"-thi" (a i tsi" da e' tsi-the a', a bi" da,
tsi ga,
2786—21 28
434 THE OSAGE TBIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
7. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
8. Zhin'-ga da-don wa-non-p'in the mon-thin ta ba don a', a biu da,
tsi ga,
9. Tse-hin zhin-ga thin-kshe non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
10. Ga' wa-non-p'in the a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
11. Wa'-non-p'in the mon-thin bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
12. Wa'-non-p'in i-ts'a thin-ge ki-the mo"-thin ta i tsin da', e tsi-the a,
a bin da, tsi ga,
13. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
14. Tsiu'-ge thivkshe no" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
15. Ga' wa-non-p'in the ta a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
16. Tsiu'-ge thin-kshe non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
17. Ni'ki-mon-ho? the don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
18. Niu'-i-xa-xa ga thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
19. Wa'-ni-e-cka she mon mon-zhi in da', a bi° da, tsi ga,
20. Ho'-non pa-xe in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
21. Zhin'-ga won shki i'-ts'a thin-ge ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da e' tsi-
the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
22. Ni'ba-btha-xe ga ge a', a bin da, tsi ga,
23. O'-non pa-xe in da, a bin da, tsi ga,
24. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga on-tha' bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
25. O'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da e' tsi-the a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
26. Niu'-thu-ga ga thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
27. Wa'-ni-e-cka she mon mon-zhi in-da', a bin da, tsi ga,
28. ZhiQ'-ga thi-e u-thi-xthu-k'a the mon-thin bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
29. Thi-e' u-thi-xthu-k'a i-ts'a thin-ge ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da,
e' tsi-the a', a biQ da, tsi ga,
30. Ni'u-ca-gi ga kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
31. Wa'-ni-e-cka she mon mon-zhi in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
32. Zhin'-ga ni-a-kon the mon-thin bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
33. Ni'-a-kon i-ts'a thin-ge ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da e' tsi-the a',
a bin da, tsi ga.
34. Ni' i-ton-thin-a-ha ga-gthe-ce ga kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
35. Wa'-ni-e-cka she mon mon-zhi in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
36. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga on-tha' bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
37. Mon'-ge ga-gthe-ce a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da e' tsi-the
a, a bin da, tsi ga,
38. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
39. Won/ shki don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
40. Hon'-ba tha-gthin shki u-hi a-ki-the a-thin he no" in da', a bin da,
tsi ga,
41. Zhin'-ga hon-ba tha-gthin shki u-hi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da e
tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga.
LAFLESCHE] TRIBAL RITES - OSAGE LAXGUAGK 435
E WI'-GI-E
(Free translation, p. 249; literal translation, p. 579)
1. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
2. Wa'-xo-be jii-zhi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
3. I'-gi-k'u-tse ta ba don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
4. Wa'-ci-thu-ce u-ki-dse ta a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
5. U'-k'u-be win a-ci-thu-^a ba don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
6. U'-k'u-be win e-cka e-wa-ka zhi a-ka', a bi" da, tsi ga,
7. Wa'-dsu-ta win a-ci-thu-ca ba don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
8. Wa'-dsu-ta win e-cka e-wa-ka zhi a-ka', a biD da, tsi ga,
9. Wa'-dsu-ta u-ba-tse win a-ki-gtha-thi" non non a', a bi° da, tsi ga,
10. Ga' a-ci-thu-ce a-tsia-tha bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
11. WV-dsu-ta u-ba-tse win e-cka e-wa-ka zhi a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
12. Mi'hi-e ge ta', a bin da, tsi ga,
13. Ni'u-ga-xthi win e-dsi non non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
14. Ga' a-ci-thu-ce a-tsia-tha bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
15. Ni'u-ga-xthi win e-cka e-wa-ka zhi a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
16. Tsi'-zhi"-ga win a-ci-thu-ce a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
17. Zhin'-ga wa-ci-thu-ce mon-thin bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
18. Wa'-ci-thu-ce gi-o-ts'e-ga mon-thin ta ba shon a-ka', a bin da,
tsi ga.
19. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
20. Wa'-ci-thu-ce ga non shki a, hin a, e'-ki-a bi a', a hi" da, tsi ga,
21. U'-k'u-be thon-ba a-ci thu-ca ba don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
22. U'-k'u-be thon-ba e-cka e-wa-ka zhi a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
23. Wa'-dsu-ta tho"-ba a-ci-thu-ca ba don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
24. Wa'-dsu-ta thon-ba e-cka e-wa-ka zhi a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
25. Wa'-dsu-ta u-ba tse thon-ba a-ki-gtha-thi" no" non a', a bin tsi ga,
26. Ga' wa-fi-thu-ce a-tsia-tha bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
27. Wa'-dsu-ta u-ba-tse thon-ba a-ki-gtha-thin no" no" a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
28. E'-fka e-wa-ka zhi a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
29. Mi' hi-e ge ta', a bin da, tsi ga,
30. Ni' u-ga-xthi thon-ba e-dsi no" no" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
31. Ga' wa-fi-thu-ce a-tsia-tha bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
32. Ni' u-ga-xthi thon-ba e-cka e-wa-ka zhi a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
33. Tsi'-zhin-ga win a-ci-thu-ca bin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
34. Zhin'-ga wa-ci-thu-ce mon-thin bi do" a', a bi" da tsi ga,
35. Wa'-ci-thu-ce gi-u-mon-ka ta ba shon a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
36. Hon-a'-do" wa-ci-thu-fa ga no" shki a, hi" a, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin
da, tsi ga,
37. U'-k'u-be tha-bthi" a-fi-thn-ca ba don a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
38. U'-k'u-be tha-bthi" e-cka e-wa-ka shi a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
436 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
39. Wa'-dsu-ta tha-bthin a-ci-thu-?a bin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
40. Wa'-dsu-ta tha-bthin e-pka e-wa-ka zhi a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
41. Wa'-dsu-ta u-ba-tse tha-bthin a-ki-gtha-thin non no" a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
42. Ga' wa-ci-thu-ce a-tsia-tha bi a', a bin,da, tsi ga,
43. Wa'-dsu-ta u-ba-tse tha-bthin e-cka e-wa-ka zhi a-ka', a bin da,
tsi ga,
44. Mi' hi-e ge ta', a bin da, tsi ga,
45. Ni' u-ga-xthi tha-bthin a-ci-thu-ca bin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
46. Ni' u-ga-xthi tha-bthin e-cka e-wa-ka zhi a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
47. Tsi'-zhin-ga win a-ci-thu-ca bin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
48. Zhin'-ga wa-ci-thu-ce the mor-thin bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
49. Wa'-ci-thu-ce gi-o-ts'e-ga mon-thin ta ba shon a-ka', a bin da,
tsi ga,
50. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
51. Wa'-ci-thu-ce ga non shki a, hin a, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
52. U'-k'u-be do-ba a-ci-thu-ca bin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
53. U'-k'u-be do-ba e-cka e-wa-ka zhi a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
54. Wa'-dsu-ta do-ba a-ci-thu-ca bin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
55. Wa'-dsu-ta do-ba e-cka e-wa-ka zhi a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
56. Wa'-dsu-ta u-ba-tse do-ba a-ki-gtha-thin non no" a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
57. Ga' wa-pi-thu-ce a-tsia, tha bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
58. Wa'-dsu-ta u-ba-tse do-ba e-cka e-wa-ka zhi a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
59. Mi' hi-e ge ta', a bin da, tsi ga,
60. Ni' u-ga-xthi do-ba e-dsi non mJn a', a bin da, tsi ga,
61. Ga' a-pi-thu-ce a-tsia-tha bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
62. Ni' u-ga-xthi do-ba e-cka e-wa-ka zhi a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
63. Tsi'-zhin ga win a-ci-thu-ca bin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
64. Zhin'-ga wa-ci-thu-pe mon-thin bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
65. Wa'-ci-thu-ce gi-o-ts'a-ga mon-thin ta ba shon a-ka', a bin da,
tsi ga.
WA-TS'E'-THE WA-THON
(Free translation and music, p. 252)
1
O-ho da-ge a-wa-the a-thin he non,
Wi-e wa-mon a-thin he no",
A-ho ho, A-ho ho,
O-ho da-ye a-wa-the a-thi" he no",
Wi-e wa-mon a-thin he non,
A-ho ho, A-ho ho.
LAFLESCHEJ TRIBAL RITES OSAGE LANGUAGE 437
2
O-ho ga-gi-wa-mon a-thin he no".
Wi-e wa-mon a-thin he no",
A-he the he, A-he the he,
£a-be a-wa-the a-thin he no",
Wi-e wa-mon a-thin he no",
A-he the he, A-he the he.
3
Qi-hi a-wa-the a-thin he no", etc.
4
Ho"-ba e-no"-she a-thi" he no", etc.
THE LITTLE SONG OF THE GATHERING *
(Free translation and music, p. 253)
1
He-no" hi-ga-ckon-the a-the"-ka,
He-no" Hi-ga-ckoMhe a-thon-ka,
He-no" hi-ga-cko°-the a-tho"-ka he-e, he-e,
Hi-ga-cko"-the a-tho"-ka,
He-no" hi-ga-cko"-the a-tho"-ka he-e, he-e.
Wl'-GI-E TON-GA
(Free translation, p. 254; literal translation, p. 581)
1. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
2. Tsi'-zhu u-dse-the Pe-thon-ba bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
3. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
4. Wi'-con-ga, e-ki-e a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
5. Won'-da hiu-dse ta on-ga-tha ba thon-ta zhi in da, e'-ki-a bi a',
a bin da, tsi ga,
6. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
7. Sho'-ka wa-ba-xi ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
8. Wi'-<?on-ga, e-gi-e a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
9. Won'-da hiu-dse ta on-ga-tha ba thon ta zhi in da, e'-gi-a bi a',
a bin da, tsi ga,
10. O'-ton-be ga-xa thin ha, e'-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
11. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
12. Sho'-ka wa-ba-xi ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
13. Thu-e' xtsi the-e do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
14. Wa'-zhin-ga wa-tha-xthi thin-ge thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
15. E'-dsi xtsi a-thin gi e do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
16. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
17. Wi'-zhi"-the, e tsi-the a', a bi1 da, tsi ga,
438 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
18. The' i-hiu-dse on-ga-the ta bi thin-kshe, e' tsi-the a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
19. She' e ton a-tha, e-gi-e a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
20. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
21. Wa'-zhin-ga wa-tha-xthi thin-ge thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
22. I'hiu-dse a-hiu bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
23. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
24. O'-ga-\vin-xe do-ba ga-xe non-zhin a', a bin da, tsi ga,
25. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
26. pi'thu-ca ba don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
27. Zhon/ pa-ci pe-thon-ba', a bin da, tsi ga,
28. Ga' a-ton a-ti a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
29. He'-tlsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
30. ^i'thu-ca ba don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
31. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
32. U'-k'u-be ha-thon-cka don a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
33. Thiu '-xe-ts'a-zhi ton non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
34. E'-dsi xtsi hi non-zhin ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
35. He'-dsi xtsi a, a bin da, tsi ga,
36. pi'thu-^a ba don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
37. 'I'-pa-ci ha-thon-9ka don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
38. E'-dsi xtsi hi non-zhin ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
39. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
40. 'In'-cka shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
41. Zha'-zhe on-ki-ton ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga.
42. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
43. ^i'thu-?a ba don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
44. Mon'-xe pe-thon-ba ha', a bin da, tsi ga,
45. Hi'-no"-zhin a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
46. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
47. Wi'-con-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
48. Won'-da ga-ni-tha fi on-thu-ca ba thon ta zhi in da, e'-ki-e a-ka,
a bin da, tsi ga,
49. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
50. O'-ton-be ga-xe tse a-tha, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga.
51. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bi11 da, tsi ga,
52. Sho'-ka wa-ba-xi ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
53. Thu-e' xtsi the e don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
54. 'In/-zhu-9ka zhu-dse thin-kshe non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
55. He'-dsi xtsi a-thin gi e don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
56. Wi'-zhin-the, e tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
57. The' ci on-ki-tha ba thon tsin da, e' tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
LAFLESCHE] TRIBAL, RITES OSAGE LANGl^AGE 439
58. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
59. She' e-shnon u-tha-dse tha-ton she a', wi-pon-ga, e'-gi-e a-ka', a
bin da, tsi ga,
60. Zhin'-ga pi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da, e' tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
61. ^i'ki-the mon-thin bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
62. £)i'ba-xtho-ga zhi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da, e' tsi-the a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
63. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
64. Xa'-dse non-sha-tha-ge ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da, e' tsi-the a',
a bin da, tsi ga.
65. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
66. Sho'-ka wa-ba-xi ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
67. Thu-e' xtsi the e don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
68. 'In'-zhu-pka pa-be thin-kshe non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
69. E'-dsi xtsi a-thin gi e don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
70. Wi'-zhin-the, e' tsi-the a', a bin da, (si ga,
71. The' zhin-ga pi gi-tha ba thon tsein da, e' tsi-the a', abinda, tsiga,
72. Zhin'-ga pi gi-the mon-thin ta i tsin da, e' tsi-the a', abin da, tsi ga,
73. Zhin'-ga pi gi-tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
74. (Ji' ba-xtho-ga zhi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da, e' tsi-the a', a bin
da, tsi ga,
75. Xa'-dse non-sha-tha-ge ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da, e' tsi-the a',
a bi" da, tsi ga,
76. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
77. O'-ton-be ga-xa thin ha, e'-gi-e a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
78. Sho'-ka wa-ba-xi ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
79. Thu-e' xtsi the e don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
80. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
81. 'In'-zhu-pka pi-ga-xu thin-kshe non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
82. He'-dsi xtsi a-thin gi e don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
83. Wi'-zhin-the, e tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
84. The' zhin-ga pi gi-tha ba thon tse in da, e' tsi-the a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
85. Zhin'-ga pi gi-the ta i tse a-tha, e' tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
86. Zhin'-ga pi gi-tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
87. ^i' ba-xtho-ga zhi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da, e' tsi-the a', a bi°
da, tsi ga,
88. Xa'-dse non-sha-tha-ge ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da, e' tsi-the a', a
bin da, tsi ga,
89. E'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
90. Sho'-ka wa-ba-xi ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
91. Thu-e' xtsi the e do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
92. 'In'-zhu-pka sha-be thin-kshe no" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
440 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. AXX. 30
93. He'-dsi xtsi a-thin gi e don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
94. Wi'-zhin-the, e tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
95. The' zhin-ga ci gi-tha ba thon tse in da, e' tsi-the a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
96. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
97. Zhin'-ga ci gi-the mon-thin ta i tsin da, e' tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
98. Zhin'-ga ci gi-the mon-thin bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
99. pi' ba-xtho-ga zhi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da, e' tsi-the a', a bin
da, tsi ga,
100. Xa'-dse non-sha-tha-ge ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da, e' tsi-the a', a
bin da, tsi ga.
101. E'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
102. Wi'-con-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
103. Wa'-xo-be pi-zhi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
104. We'-ki-k'on thin-ge in da, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
105. O'-ton-be ga-xe tse a-tha, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
106. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
107. Sho'-ka wa-ba-xi ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
108. Wi'-con-ga, e'-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
109. O'-ton-be tha-the tse a-tha, e'-gi-e a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
110. E'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
111. Sho'-ka wa-ba-xi ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
112. Thu-e' xtsi the e do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
113. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
114. Mon'-hin-ci zhu-dse thin-kshe non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
115. He'-dsi xtsi a-thin gi e don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
116. Wi'-zhin-the, e' tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
117. The' zhin-ga mon-hin tha ba thon tse in da, e' tsi-the a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
118. E'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
119. Zhin'-ga mon-hin tha ba thon ta zhi a', wi-con-ga, e'-gi-e a-ka', a
bin da, tsi ga,
120. E'-zhi-cka u-ton-ga xtsi in da, e'-gi-e a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
121. O'-ton-be ga-xa thin ha, e'-gi-e a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
122. E'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
123. Sho'-ka wa-ba-xi ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
124. Thu-e' xtsi the e don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
125. Mon'-hin-ci to-ho thin-kshe no" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
126. E'-dsi xtsi a-thin gi e don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
127. Wi'-zhin-the, e' tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
128. The' zhin-ga mon-hin tha ba thon tse in da, e' tsi-the a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
LAFLESCHE] TRIBAL RITES OSAGE LAXGUAGE 441
129. Zhin'-ga mon-hin tha ba thon ta zhi a', wi-£on-ga, e'-gi-e a-ka',
a bin da, tsi ga,
130. E'-zhi-fka u-ton-ga xtsi' in da, e'-gi'-e, a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
131. 0'-ton-be ga-xa thin ha, e'-gi-c a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
132. Sho'-ka wa-ba-xi to" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
133. Thu-e' xtsi the e don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
134. Mon'-hin-£i ci i-ga-xn thin-kshe non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
135. E'-dsi xtsi a thin gi e do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
136. Wi'-zhin-the e tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
137. The' zhin-ga mon-hin tha ba thon tse in da, e' tsi-the a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
138. Zhin'-ga mon-hin tha ba thon ta zhi a', wi-con-ga, e'-gi-e a-ka',
a bin da, tsi ga,
139. E'-zhi-cka u-ton-ga xtsi in da, e'-gi-e a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
140. O'-ton-be ga-xa thin ha, e'-gi-e a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
141. E'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
142. Sho'-ka wa-ba-xi ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
143. Thu-e' xtsi the e do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
144. Mon'-hin-ci ca-be thin-kshe non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
145. E'-dsi xtsi a-thin gi e do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
146. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
147. Wi'-con-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
148. Wa'-xo-be pi-zhi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
149. We'-ki-k'on thin-ge in da, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
150. O'-ton-be ga-xe tse a-tha, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
151. E'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
152. Sho'-ka wa-ba-xi to" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
153. Wi'-con-ga, e-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
154. O'-ton-be tha-the tse a-tha, e'-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
155. E'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
156. Sho'-ka wa-ba-xi to" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
157. Thu-e' xtsi the e do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
158. Mon'-hin-ci cka thin-kshe non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
159. E'-dsi xtsi a-thin gi e don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
160. Wi'-zhin-the, e' tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
161. The' zhin-ga mon-hin tha ba thon tse in da, e tsi-the a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
162. E'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
163. Zhin'-ga mon-hin tha ba tho" ta zhi in da, e' tsi-the a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
164. E'-zhi-fka u-ton-ga xtsi in da, e'-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
165. E'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
166. O'-ton-be ga-xa thin ha, e'-gi-e a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
442 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 30
167. Sho'-ka wa-ba-xi ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
168. Thu-e' xtsi the e don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
169. Mon'-hin i-ba-btho-ga kshe non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
170. E'-dsi xtsi a-thin gi e don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
171. Wi'-zhin-the, e' tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
172. The' zhin-ga mon-hin tha ba thon tse in da, e' tsi-the a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
173. E'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
174. She' shon e tho, e'-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
175. She' e shnon u-tha-dse tha ton she a', wi-con-ga, e'-gi-e a-ka',
a bin da, tsi ga,
176. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
177. Zhin'-ga mon-hin the ta i tsin da, e' tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
178. Zhin'-ga mon-hin tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
179. Da' i-ba-kshin-da zhi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da, e' tsi-the a',
a bin da, tsi ga,
180. He-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
L81. Mon'-hin gi-pa-hi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da, e' tsi-the a', a bin
da, tsi ga.
182. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
183. Wi'-con-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
184. Wa'-xo-be pi-zhi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
185. We'-ki-k'on thin-ge in da, e'-ki-e a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
186. O'-ton-be ga-xe tse a-tha, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
187. E'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
188. Sho'-ka wa-ba-xi ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
189. Wi'-con-ga, e-gi-e a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
190. Wa'-xo-be pi-zhi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
191. We'-ki-k'on thin-ge in da, e'-gi-e a-ka' a bin da, tsi ga,
192. O'-ton-be ga-xa thin ha, e'-gi-e a-ka, a bin da, tsi ga,
193. E'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
194. Sho'-ka wa-ba-xi ton a', a bin da tsi ga,
195. Thu-e' xtsi the e don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
196. (,/V-gtho-hi ton non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
197. E'-dsi xtsi a-thin gi-e don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
198. Wi'-zhin-the, e' tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
199. The' zhin-ga we-ga-thu-ca ba thon tse a-tha, e' tsi-the a', a bin
da, tsi ga,
200. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
201. Zhin'-ga we-ga-thu-ca ba thon ta zhi in da, e'-gi-e a-ka', a bin
da, tsi ga
202. E'-zhi-cka u-ton-ga xtsi in da, e'-gi-e a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
203. O'-ton-be ga-xa thin ha, e'-gi-e a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
LAFLESCHE] TRIBAL, RITES OSAGE LANGUAGE 443
204. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
205. Sho'-ka wa-ba-xi to° a', a bin da, tsi ga,
206. Thu-e' xtsi the-e don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
207. ^a'-gtho-ha-sho-ga ton non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
208. E'-dsi xtsi a-thin gi-e don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
209. Wi'-zhiD-the, e' tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
210. The zhin-ga we-ga-thu-^a ba thon tse in da, e tsi-the a, a bin da,
tsi ga,
211. Zhin'-ga we-ga-thu-?a ba thon ta zhi a, wi-con-ga, e'-gi-a bi a',
a bin da, tsi ga,
212. E'-zhi-fka u-ton-ga xtsi in da, e'-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
213. E'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
214. O'-ton-be ga-xa thin ha, e'-gi-e a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
215. Sho'-ka wa-ba-xi ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
216. Thu-e' xtsi the-e don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
217. Pon'-ton-ga hi ton non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
218. E'-dsi xtsi a-thin gi-e do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
219. Wi'-zhin-the, e' tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
220. The' zhin-ga we-ga-thu-?a ba tho" tse in da, e', tsi-the a', a bin
da, tsi ga,
221. Zhin'-ga we-ga-thu-?a ba thon ta zhi a', wi-con-ga, e'-gi-e a-ka',
a bin da, tsi ga,
222. E'-zhi-cka u-ton-ga xtsi in da, e'-gi-e a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
223. O'-ton-be ga-xa thin ha, e'-gi-e a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
224. E'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
225. Sho'-ka wa-ba-xi ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
226. Thu-e' xtsi the-e don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
227. Pi'-ci-hi to" no" a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
228. E'-dsi xtsi a-thin gi-e do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
229. Wi'-zhin-the, e' tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
230. The' zhin-ga we-ga-thu-^a ba tho" tse in da, e' tsi-the a', a bin
da, tsi ga,
231. Zhin'-ga we-ga-thu-ca ba tho" ta zhi a', wi-con-ga, e'-gi-e a-ka',
a bin da, tsi ga,
232. E'-zhi-cka u-to"-ga xtsi in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
233. E'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
234. O'-ton-be ga-xa thin ha, e'-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
235. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
236. Sho'-ka wa-ba-xi ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
237. Thu-e' xtsi the-e don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
238. Zhon'-zhi-hi ton no" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
239. E'-dsi xtsi a-thin gi-e do" a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
444 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETII. ANX. ;«)
240. Wi'-zhin-the, e' tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
241. The' zhin-ga we-ga-thu-ca ba thon tse in da, e' tsi-the a', a hi"
da, tsi ga,
242. Zhin'-ga we-ga-thu-ca ba thon ta zhi a', wi-con-ga, e'-gi-e a-ka'
a bin da, tsi ga,
243. E'-zhi-cka u-ton-ga xtsi in da, e'-gi-e a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
244. O'-ton-be ga-xa thin ha, e-gi-e a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
245. E'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
246. Sho'-ka wa-ba-xi ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
247. Thu-e' xtsi the-e don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
248. Zhon'-sha-be to" non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
249. E'-dsi xtsi a-thin gi-e don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
250. Wi'-zhin-the, e' tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
251. The' zhin-ga we-ga-thu-ca ba thon tse i" da, e' tsi-the a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
252. Zhin'-ga we-ga-thu-ca ba thon ta zhi a', wi-con-ga, e'-gi-e a-ka',
a bin da, tsi ga,
253. E'-zhi-cka u-ton-ga xtsi in da, e'-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
254. O'-ton-be ga-xa thin ha, e'-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
255. E'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
256. Sho'-ka wa-ba-xi ton &\ a bin da, tsi ga,
257. Thu-e' xtsi the-e don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
258. O'-k'u-be ha-thon-cka do" a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
259. Thiu'-xe ts'a-zhi ton non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
260. E'-dsi xtsi a-thin gi-e do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
261. Wi'-zhin-the, e' tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
262. The' zhin-ga we-ga-thu-ca ba thon tse in da, e' tsi-the a', a bin[da,
tsi ga,
263. She' e-shnon u-tha-dse tha ton she a', wi-con-ga, e'-gi-e a-ka'
a bin da, tsi ga,
264. Zhin'-ga we-ga-thu-ca mon-thin ta i tsin da, e' tsi-the a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
265. Zhin/-ga we-ga-thu-ca mon-thin bi do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
266. We'-ki-i-he-the mon-thin ta i tsin da, e' tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
267. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
268. Mon'-hin i-ba-btho-ga kshe non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
269. Gthu'-ce a-tsia-tha bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
270. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
271. Mon'-hin non-pe-wa-the xtsi in da, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
272. Mon'-hin wa-kon-da xtsi in da, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
273. Mon'-hin-wa-kon-da shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
274. Zhin'-ga zha-zhe ki-ton t& i tsin da, e' tsi-the a', a biD da, tsi ga,
LiFLESCHE] TRIBAL RITES OSAGE LANGUAGE 445
275. E'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
276. Mon'-hin i-ba btho-ga don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
277. I'-ba-9pon a-tsia-tha bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
278. Wa'-bin ba-dsu-she gthe ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
279. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
280. Ba'-zha-be a-tsia-tha bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
281. Ta'-dse e-non-ha xtsi kshi-the ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
282. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
283. Ba'-xon a-tsia-tha bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
284. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
285. Ba'-^ke-be a-tsia-tha bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
286. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
287. We'-tsin ho-non-ka e'-gon kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga.
288. Gthi'-shton a-tsia-tha bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
289. E'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
290. Non'-be u-bi-zlm-zhu-e do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
291. Bi'-hu-ton u-ha-ha-e to" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
292. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
293. Wi'-con-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
294. Wa'-xo-be pi-zhi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
295. We'-ki-k'on thin-ge in da, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
296. O'-ton-be ga-xe tse a-tha, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
297. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
298. Sho'-ka wa-ba-xi ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
299. Wi'-90n-ga, e-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
300. Wa'-xo-be pi-zhi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
301. We'-ki-k'on thin-ge in da, e'-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
302. O'-ton-be ga-xa thi" ha, e'-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
303. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
304. Sho'-ka wa-ba-xi to" a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
305. Ho"'-ba i-ta-xe thon-dsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
306. Ga'-gi-gi-dse hi-the non-zhin a', a bin da, tsi ga,
307. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
308. O'-pa-^e thon dsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
309. Wi'-con-ga gi thin da, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
310. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
311. O'-gi-ki-a ba thi" ha, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
312. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
313. Hi'-kon ga-xo-dse xtsi gthi non-zhin to" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
314. Wi'-con-ga, e'-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
315. Ha' ta ha xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
316. Wa'-xpa-thi" tha thin-sha zhi non a', a bin da, tej ga,
317. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
446 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. M>
318. Wi'-zhin-the, e' tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
319. U'-k'u-be win pshi a'-tha, wi-zhin-the, e' tsi-the a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
320. On'-ha-gon mon-zhi xtsi in da, e' tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
321. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
322. Wi'-con-ga, e'-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
323. Ho'-ton-be ga-xa thin ha, e'-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
324. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
325. Sho'-ka wa-ba-xi ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
326. Hon'-ba i-ta-xe thon-dsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
327. Ga'-gi-gi-dse hi-the non-zhin a', a bin da, tsi ga,
328. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
329. O'-pa-ce thon-dsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
330. Wi'-pon-ga gi thin in da, e'-ki-a bi a, a bin da, tsi ga,
331. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
332. U'-gi-ki-a ba thin ha, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
333. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
334. Wi'-con-ga, e-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
335. Ha' ta ha xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
336. Wa'-xpa-thi" tha thin-sha zhi no", e'-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
337. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
338. Wi'-zhin-the, e' tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
339. U'-k'u-be tho"-ba pshi a-tha, e' tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
340. On'-ha-gon mon-zhi xtsi in da, e' tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
341. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
342. Wi'-con-ga, e-gi-a bi a', a bi° da, tsi ga,
343. Ho'-ton-be ga-xa thin ha, e'-gi-e a-ka', a biQ da, tsi ga,
344. E'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
345. Sho'-ka wa-ba-xi to" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
346. Hon'-ba i-ta-xe thon dsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
347. Ga'-gi-gi-dse hi-the non-zhin a', a bin da, tsi ga,
348. E'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
349. O'-pa-ce thon dsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
350. Wi'-con-ga gi thi" in da, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
351. O'-gi-ki-a ba thin ha, e'-ki-e a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
352. E'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
353. Wi'-con-ga, e-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
354. Ha' ta ha xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
355. Wa'-xpa-thin tha thin-sha zhi no", e'-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi gn,
356. E'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
357. Shi'-non-dse ga-xo-dse xtsi a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
358. Gthi'-non-zhin to" a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
359. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
360. Wi'-zhin-the, e' tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
361. U'-k'u-be tha-bthin pshi a-tha. e' tsi-the a', a bi° da, tsi ga,
LAFLESCHE] TRIBAL RITES OSAGE LANGUAGE 447
362. E'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
363. Wi'-zhin-the, e' tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
364. Ni'-ka wi° u-shkon bi tse a-tha, e' tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
365. O'-shko" hon to", e'-gi-e a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
366. E'-dsi xtsi a', "a bin da, tsi ga,
367. Wi'-zhin-the, e' tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
368. Pi'-pa zha-ta xtsi bi tse a', wi-zhin-the, e' tsi-the a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
369. Xa'-dse non-xthon-zhe i-tse-tha bi tse a tha, e' tsi-the a', a bin
da, tsi ga,
370. E'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
371. Wi'-?on-ga, e'-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
372. Wa'-xo-be pi-zhi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
373. We'-ki-k'o" thin-ge in da, e'-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
374. O'-ton-be ga-xa thin ha, e'-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
375. E'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
376. Sho'-ka wa-ba-xi ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
377. Thu-e' xtsi the-e don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
378. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
379. Hon'-ba i-ta-xe thon dsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
380. Ga'-gi-gi-dse hi-the nonnzhin a', a bin da, tsi ga,
381. E'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
382. Ho'-pa-?e thon dsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
383. Wi'-con-ga she-gthi in da, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
384. I'-zhu-zhu-ba xtsi gi thin in da, we-ton-in in da, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin
da, tsi ga,
385. E'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
386. O'-gi-ki-a ba thin ha, e'-ki-e a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
387. E'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
388. Wi'-9on-ga, e'-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
389. Ha'-ta-ha xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
390. Wa'-xpa-thin tha thin-she zhi non, e'-gi-e a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
391. E'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
392. Wi'-zhin-the, e' tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
393. U'-k'u-be do-ba pshi a-tha, e' tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
394. Ni'-ka win u-shkon bi tse e-pshe non e-dsi, a-ka', wi-zhin-the, e'
tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
395. E'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
396. O'-shkon ho" to", e' tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
397. E'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
398. Wi'-zhin-the, e' tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
399. Non'-pe-wa-the xtsi a-ka', wi-zhin-the, e' tsi-the a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
400. E'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
401. Wa'-pa-hi ton a-ka tha, e' tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
448 THE OSAGE TRIBE LBTH. ANN. 36
402. E'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
403. Wi'-po"-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
404. Wa'-xo-be pi-zhi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
405. We'-ki-k'on thin-ge in da, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
406. Thi'-to-ge gtha ba thin ha, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
407. E'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
408. We'-tsin ho no"-ka e'-gon kshe no" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
409. Gthu'-fe a-tsia-tha bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
410. E'-dsi xtsi a', a' bin da, tsi ga,
411. U'-zhon-ge win-a-ha fi-thu-^e ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
412. E'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
413. U'-ba-non the do-ba kshi the a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
414. E'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
415. We'-do-ba on-tse dsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
416. I'-ga-dsi-on i-he-the a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
417. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
418. Wi'-zhin-the, e'-tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
419. Ni'-ka win e-dsi a-ka e-pshe non the a-ka', wi-zhin-the, e' tsi-
the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
420. E'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
421. U'-shko" hon ton, e' tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
422. E'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
423. Wi'-zhin-the, e' tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
424. Non'-pe-wa-the xtsi bi a', wi-zhin-the, e' tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
425. Da'-don ni the thin-ge a-ka e-zha mi a', wi-zhin-the, e' tsi-the
a', a bin da, tsi ga,
426. Wa'-pa-hi ton a-ka tha, e' tsi-the a', a biQ da, tsi ga,
427. E'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
428. He' zhin-ga ton a-tha, wi-zhin-the, e' tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
429. E'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
430. Non'-pe-wa-the xtsi bi a', wi-zhin-the, e' tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
431. E'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga, •>
432. Wa'zhi" pi-zhi xtsi bi a', wi-zhin-the, e' tsi-the a', a bi° da, tsi ga,
433. E'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
434. Thi'-to-ge gtha ba thin ha, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
435. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
436. We'-tsin ho non-ka e'-gon kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
437. Gthu'-ce a-tsia-tha bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
438. Non'-be u-bi-zhu-zhu the a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
439. Bi'-hu-ton u-ha-ha e a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
440. E'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
441. Wi'-zhin-the, e' tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
442. Ni'-ka win e-dsi a-ka e-pshe no" e-dsi a-ka', wi-zhin-the, e' tsi-
the a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
LAFLESCHK] TRIBAL RITES OSAGE LANGUAGE 449
443. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, (si ga,
444. U'-shkon hon to", e'-gi-e a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
445. Wi'-zhin-the, e' tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
446. Wa'-pa-hi to" a-ka tha, e' tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
447. Non'-pe-wa-the xtsi a-ka', wi-zhin-the, e' tsi-the a', a bin da,
tsiga,
448. E'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
449. Wa'-zhin pi-zhi xtsi a-ka', wi-zhin-the, e' tsi-the a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
450. E'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
451. Wi'-90n-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
452. Thi'-to-ge gtha ba thin ha, e'-ki-e a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
453. Tsi'-zhu u-dse-the pe-thon-ba ni-ka-shi-ga ba do" a', a bin da,
tsiga,
454. Xtha'-xtha thin-ge xtsi ni-ka-shi-ga a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
455. E'-dsi xtsi a', a bi° da, tsi ga,
456. Ni'-ka wi-on-won the e'-shki do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
457. Wa'-non-xe a-dsi the ta tsin da, e'-ki-e a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
458. E'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
459. Wa'-dsu-ta be i-zhin-ge shki do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
460. Wa'-non-xe a-dsi the ta tsin da, e'-ki-e a-ka', a bi" da, tsi ga,
461. E'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
462. To'-ka non-zhin wi-on-won the e'-shki do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
463. Wa'-non-xe a-dsi the ta tsin da, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
464. E'dsi xtsi a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
465. We'-tsi" ho non-ka e'-gon kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
466. Gthu'-pe a -tsia-tha bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
467. E'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
468. Non'-be u-bi-zhu-zhu the a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
469. Bi'-hu-ton u-ha-ha e' a-ka, a bin da, tsi ga,
470. E'dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
471. Thi'-to-ge gtha ba thi" ha, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
472. E'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
473. We'-tsi" ho non-ka e'-gon kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
474. Gthi'-u-bthin a-tsia-tha ba do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
475. Wi'-tsi-go ga-ho'-sho" u-ha ba do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
476. E'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
477. We'-tsin ho non-ka e'-gon kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
478. I'-thon-bi-on tse dsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
479. Thi-u'-bthin a-tsia-the a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
480. E'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
481. Wi'-tsi-go ga-ta-kshin i-the-tha bi to" a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
2786—21 -29
450 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
482. E'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
483. I'-tha-bthin-on tse dsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
484. We'-tsin ho no°-ka e'-gon kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
485. Gthi'-u-bthin a-tsia-tha ba don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
486. Wi'-tsi-go ni-dse a-ta mon-gthe thin-kshe ga-xe a-ka', a bin da,
tsi ga,
487. E'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
488. We'-do-ba on tse dsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
489. We'-tsin ho non-ka e'-gon kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
490. Gthi'-u-bthi" a-tsia-tha ba don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
491. Ha'-shi pa-gthe xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
492. Wa'-bin ga-ta-the gthi i-he-the a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
493. E'-dsi xtsi a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
494. Wi'-pon-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
495. Thi'-to-ge gtha ba thin ha, e'-ki-e a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
496. E'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
497. A'-bi-ta-ta a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
498. E'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
499. Zhe'-ga tha-ta kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
500. Ga'-wiD a tsia-the a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
501. Wa'-shin u-ba-zhin tsi-the ga-xe a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
502. E'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
503. I-u'-tha-bthon-ce a tsia-tha bi a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
504. E'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
505. I' u-wa-non-be xtsi in da, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
506. Zhin'-ga non-bthe the mon-thin ta i tsi" da, e' tsi-the a', a bin da,
tsiga,
507. Zhin'-ga non-bthe the mon-thin bi do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
508. A'-dsu-ta i-ga-pi-ge ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da, e' tsi-the a', a
bin da, tsi ga,
509. E'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
510. Ni' da-ka-dse u-bi-don mon-thin ta i tsin da, e' tsi-the a', a bi"
da, tsi ga,
511. Zhe'-ga tha-ta thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
512. Ga'-win a-tsia-tha bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
513. E'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
514. (^'-fi-ga zhi xtsi in da, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
515. We'-ki-k'on the mon-thin ta i tsi° da, e' tsi-the a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
516. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
617. We'-thi" pa-gi xtsi in da, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
618. E'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
619. Wa'-xo-be on-gi-the ta i tsin da, e' tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
620. We'-thin-9a-gi shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
LAFLESCHE] TRIBAL RITES OSAGE LANGUAGE 451
521. Zha'-zhe on-ki-ton (a i tsin da', e tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
522. E'-dsi xtsi a', a bi° da, tsi ga,
523. We'-thin-ga-xe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
524. Zha'-zhe on-ki-ton ta i tsin da, e' tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
525. E'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
526. We'-thin-zhin-ga shki a', a bin da tsi ga,
527. Zha'-zhe on-ki-ton ta i tsi" da, e' tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
528. O'-thon-da ga thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
529. Wa'-xo-be on-gi-the ta i tsin da, e' tsi-the a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
530. Tse'-ha-wa-gthe on-gi-the on-mon-thin ta i tsin da, e' tsi-the a',
a bin da, tsi ga,
531. Zhin'-ga i-gi-ni-tha mon-thin ta i tsin da, e' tsi-the a', a bin da,
tsi ga,
532. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
533. Mi' hi-e ge ta, a bin da, tsi ga,
534. Wa'-pa-hi a-kia-shon thin-ge a-thin a-hi bi shki do" a', a bin da,
tsiga,
535. Wa'-pa-hi ge go0 bi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsi" da, e' tsi-the a', a
bin da, tsi ga,
536. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
537. Mi' hi-e ge ta', a bin da, tsi ga,
538. Wa'-pa-hi u-kia-shon thin-ge a-thi" a-hi bi shki do" a', a bin da,
tsiga,
539. Wa'-pa-hi a-gtha ba zhi on-ki-the on-mon-thin ta i tsin da, e'
tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
540. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
541. Mi' hi-e ge ta', a bin da, tsi ga,
542. Wa'-pa-hi u-kia-shon thin-ge a-thin a-hi bi shki do" a', a bi" da,
tsiga,
543. Wa'-pa-hi a-ki-tha-zha-ta bi on-ki-the on-mon-thin ta i tsi" da,
e' tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
544. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
545. Mi'hi-e ge ta', a bin da, tsi ga,
546. Wa'-pa-hi u-kia-shon thin-ge a-thin a-hi bi shki do" a', a bin da,
tsiga,
547. Wa'-pa-hi a-bu-zha-zha-ta bi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da, e'
tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
548. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
549. Tbi'-u-ba-he tha-ta ga kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
550. Ga'-wi" a-tsia, the a-ka', a bi" da, tsi ga,
551. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
452 THE OSAGE TRIBE C"TH. ANN. 36
552. We'-thin zhin-ga pe-thon-ba', a bin da, (si ga,
553. Tsi'-zhu U-dse-the Pe-thon-ba', a bin da, (si ga,
554. E'-non-ha kshi-the a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
555. E'-dsi xtsia', a bin da, tsi ga,
556. Wa'-xo-be on-gi-the ta i tsin da, e'-ki-e a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
557. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
558. He' tha-ta ga tse a', a bin da, tsi ga,
559. Wa'-xo-be on-gi-the ta i tsin da, e' tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
560. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
561. He'-thi-shi-zhe shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
562. Zha'-zhe on-ki-ton ta i tsi" da, e' tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
563. E'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
564. He'-thi-zha-ge shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
565. Zha'-zhe on-ki-ton ta i tsin da, e' tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
566. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
567. He' tha-ta ga tse a', a bin da, tsi ga,
568. Wa'-xo-be on-gi-the ta i tsin da, e' tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
569. E'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
570. £in'-dse ga tse a', a bin da, tsi ga,
571. Wa'-xo-be on-gi-the ta i tsi" da, e' tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
572. E'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
573. Tse'-dse-xe ga thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
574. Wa'-xo-be on-gi-the ta i tsin da, e' tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
575. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
576. Non'-dse u-thi-xin ga thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
577. Wa'-xo-be on-gi-the ta i tsi" da, e' tsi-the a', a biD da, tsi ga,
578. Pa'-xin ga thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
579. Wa'-xo-be on-gi-the ta i tsi" da, e' tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
580. He'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
581. I'-ki ga thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
582. Wa'-xo-be on-gi-the ta i tsin da, e' tsi-the a', a bin da, tsi ga.
(Free translation, p. 270)
Hau! ki'-non u-tha-ge u-wi'-btha-ge ta mi-kshe in da non,
wi-tsi-ni e'.
Ki'-no" pa-hon-gthe tse wa-dsu'-ta pa-hon-gthe k'in gthi' no" bi
non, e-gon kshe', wa-dsu'-ta tse-non' e-kshe tha'-ha, zhin-ga'-zhin-ga
u-non' wa-the thon-tse e'-stse tha'-ha, mi ga' thin-kshe, ton-tha-the
a-don, shton-ga, tha'-gthin tha-the a-don ha, wi-tsi'-go a-ka e'-gi-a be
the, e-she ta kin do. Don-e', won'-shki do" wa-ni'-e-pka she'-mo"
mon-zhi ta tse' a-be the, e-she ta kin do. Mon'-ha zhi-hi a'-dsu-ta
thi'-u-ba-he kshe i'-stsi-zhi hi a-don, pa'-xin shton-ga thin-kshe shki
LAFLESCHB] TRIBAL RITES— OSAGE LANGUAGE 453
i'-shtsi-zhi-hi, non'-ka u-pa shki i-shtsi-zhi-hi (a kin-rlo'. Wi-tsi'-go
a-ka won'-shki do", wa-ni'-e-cka she'-mon mon-zhi mi-kshe a'-be the,
zhin-ga'-zhin-ga mi the' u-non/ a-wa-the ta tse' a-be the e-she ta kin do.
Hau ! u-wa-ton tse', wa-dsu'-ta, tse-do'-ga non/ kshe tha'-ha, k'in
gthi bi kshe a'-ha-ha, xin-ha' thin-kshe shi, tha'-gthin shka-xe a-don,
ton' tha-the a-don shton-ga tha'-gthin shka-xe ta kin do. Wi-tsi'-go
a-ka e'-gi-a be the, e-she ta kin do'. Won/ shki don wa-ni'-e-cka
she'-mon mon-zhi ta tse a' be the, e-she a-don, i'-stsi-zhi-hi ta kin do,
thi-u-ba-he kshe shon-e'-gon, non'-ka u-pa kshe shki e', wa-ni'-e-cka
she'-mon mon-zhi a-thin he (a tse a' be the, e-she ta kin do. Won/
shki do" mi the zhin-ga' u-non a-wa-the a-thin he t& tse a' be the,
wi-tsi'-go a-ka, e-she ta kin do'. Wa-ni'-e-cka she'-mon mon-zhi ta
tse a' be the, e-she ta kin do'. Won/ shki don zhin-ga ts'e' wa-tse-xi
a-wa-gi-the a-thin he ta tse a' be the, wi-tsi'-go a-ka, e-she ta ki° do'.
Hau ! shi u-wa-ton tse', wa-dsu'-ta tse-he'-xo-dse kshe a-tha'-ha,
shi zhin-ga u-non' a-wa-the tse e-dsi e'-stse tha'-ha, Hau ! t°n'-tha
the a-don, shton-ga tha'-gthin tha the a-don, ha, a'-hin-u-ha-ge i'stsi-
zhi-hi t& kin do. Won' shki don, wa-ni'-e-cka she-mon mon-zhi mi-
kshe a' be the, wi-tsi'-go a-ka, e'-she ta kin do. Zhin-ga mi the u-non/
a-wa-the ta tse a' be the, wi-tsi'-go a-ka, e'-she ta kin do. Zhin-ga
ts' e' wa-tse'-xi a-wa-gi-the a-thin he ta tse a' be the, e'-she ta kin do.
Hau! we-do-ba tse', wa-dsu'-ta tse-do'-zhin-ga kshe tha'-ha, shi
wa'-tho-ton a-ni' a-don, tha'-gthin tha-the a-don, shton-ga shka'-xe
a-don e', ha, shi non-ka u-pa' kshe i'-stsi-zhi-hi ta kin da, a'-hin-u-
ha-ge shki e'. Wi-tsi'-go a-ka, wa-ni'-e-cka she'-mon mon-zhi a-thin
he ta tse a' be the. Mi the zhin-ga' u-non a'-wa-the ta tse a' be the,
e-she ta kin do'. Won' shki do" zhi°-ga ts'e' wa-tse'-xi a-wa-gi-the
a-thin he ta tse a' be the, e-she ta kin do'.
Hau ! ga she'-non a no" e'.
Nl'-KI Wl'-GI-E OF THE Tsi'-ZHU WA-SHTA'-GE
(Free translation, p. 277; literal translation, p. 591)
BY
1 . Ha' tha tsi ta', a bin da, tsi ga,
2. Zhin'-ga ni-ka-shi-ga ba zhi a-tha', wi-con-ga, e'-ki-e a-ka', a bin
da, tsi ga,
3. Wi'-con-ga', a bin da, tsi ga,
4. U'-ton-be tha-the ta bi a', wi-con-ga', a bin da, tsi ga,
5. Wi'-con-ga ga xtsi hi tha i do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
6. Mon'-xe u-ca-ki-ba win a', a bin da, tsi ga,
7. E'-dsi xtsi hi no°-zhin a', a bin da, tsi ga,
8. Wi'-zhin-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
9. On'-ha-gon mon-zhi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
454 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
10. U'-ton-be tha-the ta bi a', wi-con-ga', a bin da, tsi ga,
11. Zhin'-ga ni-ka-shi-ga ba zhi a-tha', wi-£on-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a bi"
da, tsi ga,
Ha' tha tsi ta, a bin da, tsi ga,
12. Ka'-xe-wa-hu-<?a ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
13. Ga' xtsi hi tha i don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
14. Mon'-xe u-pa-ki-ba win hi-non-zhin a', a bin da, tsi ga,
15. Wa'-koD-da u-ga-sha-be xtsi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
16. He'-dsi xtsi a-gthi-non-zhin a', a bin da, tsi ga,
17. Wi'-fon-ga ha'-ta-ha xtsi wa-xpa-thin tha thin sha zhi non a', a bi°
da, tsi ga,
18. Mon'-xe u-fa-ki-ba win pshi a-tha', a bin da, tsi ga,
19. E'-gon thon-ta zhi a', wi-zhin-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
Ha' tha tsi ta, a bin da, tsi ga,
20. Wi'-pon-ga', a bin da, tsi ga,
21. Non u'-ton-be tha-the ta bi a', wi-pon-ga', a bi" da, tsi ga,
22. Wi'-zhin-the ga' xtsi hi tha i do" a', a biu da, tsi ga,
23. Mon'-xe u-pa-ki-ba win a', a bin da, tsi ga,
24. E'-dsi xtsi hi non-zhin a', a bin da, tsi ga,
25. Wi'-pon-ga', a bin da, tsi ga,
26. Wa'-kon-da u-ga-sha-be xtsi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
27. He'-dsi xtsi a-gthi-non-zhin a', a bin da, tsi ga,
28. Ha'-ta-ha xtsi wa-xpa-thin tha thiu sha zhi non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
29. E'-gon thon-ta zhi a', wi-zhin-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
Ha' tha tsi $&', a bin da, tsi ga,
30. Ha' ! wi-pon-ga, e'-ki-e thon-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
31. U'-ton-be tha-the tse a', wi-pon-ga', a bin da, tsi ga,
32. Ka'-xe-wa-hu-pa ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
33. Thu-e' xtsi hi the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
34. Mon'-xe u-? a-ki-ba we-do-ba kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
35. He'-dsi xtsi hi noQ-zhin a', a bin da, tsi ga,
36. Ni'-ka-wa-kon-da-gi thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
37. Tho' ton hi non-zhin a', a bin da, tsi ga,
38. Ni'-ka-shi-ga win the a-ka', wi-zhin-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
39. Non'-pe-wa-the xtsi a-ka', wi-zhin-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
40. Non'-pe-wa-the shki zha-zhe ki-ton a-ka' e-zha-mi in da', a bin da,
tsi ga,
41. Ha' ! wi-tsi-go-e', e-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
42. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga tha ba thon tse mi-kshe in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
43. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga on-tha' bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
44. I'-ts'a thin-ge ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
45. Gthe'-don-zhin-ga shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
TKIBAL RITES OSAGE LANGUAGE 455
46. Zha'-zhe ki-ton mon-thin bi do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
47. U'-non a bi i'-the ki-the mo"-thin ta i tsi" da', a bin da, tsi ga,
48. Gthe'-don-win shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
49. Zha'-zhe a-ki-ton a-thin he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
50. E'-shki don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
51. Zhin'-ga zha-zhe ki-ton mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
52. U'-nou a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
53. Wi-non bthi" mon-zhi in da, a bin da, tsi ga.
Ha' tha tsi ta', a bin da, tsi ga,
54. Ha' ! wi-con-ga', a bin da, tsi ga,
55. Wi'-con-ga tho-e' xtsi hi the don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
56. Tho'-xe Pa-thi-hon ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
57. E'-dsi xtsi hi-non-zhin a', a bin da, tsi ga,
58. Ha' ! wi-tsi-go-e', e-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
59. Ni'-ka-shi-ga win the a-ka tha', a bin da, tsi ga,
60. Non'-pe-wa-the xtsi a-ka', wi-zhin-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
61. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga on-tha ba thon tse a-ton he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
62. Mon'-ki-cin-dse tsi-the don a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
63. Ha'-ba-kon-£e-ci-da e-gon to" non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
64. U'-don-be tha-gthin xtsi hi-tse-the to" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
65. Ga' tse shki zhu-i-ga tha ba thon tse i" da', a bin da, tsi ga,
66. I'-u-tha-bthon-9e a-tsia-the a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
67. I'u-wa-pa non a-tha', a bin da, tsi ga,
68. Zhin'-ga mon-kon tha ba tho° tse no" a-tha', a bin da, tsi ga,
69. Zhin'-ga mo°-kon the mon-thin bi do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
70. A'-dsu-ta i-ga-pi-ge a-ki-gtha-thin mon-thin ta i tsi" da', a bin da,
tsiga,
71. U'-non a bi shki i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsi" da', a bin da, tsi ga,
Ha' tha tsi ta/> a bin da, tsi ga,
72. I'-thon-bi-on xtsi mon-ki-fin-dse tsi-the don a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
73. Mon'-kon-ton-ga zhin-ga tse a', a bin da, tsi ga,
74. Xtha' zhu-dse i-tse-the ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
75. Ga' tse shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
76. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga tha ba thon tse in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
77. Zhin'-ga mon-kon the mon-thin bi do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
78. A'-dsu-ta i-ga-?i-ge a-ki-gtha-thin mon-thin ta i tsi° da', a bin da,
tsi. ga,
79. I'u-wa-ts'u-xa non a-tha', a bin da, tsi ga,
80. Ts'o'-xe shki zha-zhe ki-ton mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
81. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
82. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
Ha' tha tsi ta', a bi" da, tsi ga,
456 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
83. Tho'-xe Pa-thi-hon ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
84. Mon'-ki-pin-dse tsi-the don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
85. Ha'-ba zhii-dse kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
86. He'-dsi xtsi ga-ci-ge tsi-the to" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
87. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga tha ba thon tse in da', a bi? da, tsi ga,
88. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
89. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
Ha' tha tsi ta', a bin da, tsi ga,
90. I'-thon-bi-on xtsi mon-ki-cin-dse tsi-the don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
91. Ha'-ba to-ho kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
92. Wa'-ton to-ho thin-kshe e'-ki-thon-ba xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
93. Ga'-pi-ge tsi-the ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
94. Ga' tse shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
95. Non'-bthe mon-thin bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
96. U'-no" a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
Ha' tha tsi ta', a bin da, tsi ga,
97. We'-tha-bthin-on xtsi mon-ki-cin-dse tsi-the do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
98. Ha'-ba pka kshe non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
99. Wa'-ton ?ka thin-kshe e'-ki-thon-ba xtsi ga-ci-ge tsi-the ton a', a
bin da, tsi ga,
100. Zhin'-ga non-bthe the mon-thin ta i tsi" da', a bin da, tsi ga,
101. Ts'e' wa-tse-xi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
102. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
Ha' tha tsi ta', a bin da, tsi ga,
103. We'-do-bi-on xtsi mon-ki-pin-dse tsi-the don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
104. Ha'-ba gthe-zhe kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
105. Wa'-ton gthe-zhe thin-kshe e'-ki-thon-ba xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
106. Ga'-ci-ge tsi-the ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
107. Be' wa-dsu-ta don mi-ga thin-ge tse a', hin a', a bin da, tsi ga,
108. Wa'-dsu-ta mi-ga zhu-gthe kshi-the ton a', a bin da, tsi ga,
109. Non'-bthe the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
110. Non'-bthe ki i-ts'a thin-ge ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da, a bin da,
tsi ga.
111. Wi'-con-ga u-ton-be tha the ta bi a tha', a bin da, tsi ga,
112. He'-dsi xtsi hi non-zhin a', a bin da, tsi ga,
113. Pi'-pi-hi ton no" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
114. E'-dsi xtsi hi no°-zhin a', a bin da, tsi ga,
115. Ga' tse shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
116. Zho'-i-ga on-tha ba thon tse i" da', a bin da, tsi ga,
LAFLKSCHB] TRIBAL, RITES OSAGE LANGUAGE 457
117. Pi'-fi u-non-bu-dse xtsi a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
118. Ga' tse shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
119. Zhin'-ga zho-i-ga the (a i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
120. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, (si ga,
Ha' tha tsi ta', a bin da, tsi ga,
121. Xon'-dse hi to" no" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
122. E'-dsi xtsi hi non-zhin a', a bin da, tsi ga,
123. Wi'-non wa-kon-da ts'e wa-tse-xi a-ton he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
124. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga on-tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
125. U'-no" a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
126. Pa-xin ca-dse <u e-gon a' bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a
bin da, tsi ga,
127. Xin'-ha ba-c'in-tha ga ge a', a bin da, tsi ga,
128. U'-non a-gi-the a-ton he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
129. Zhin'-ga u-non the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
130. Kon/ thi-hi-da ga thin-kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
131. £Ji'-kon thi-hi-da e' no" bi non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
132. ^i'-kon thi-hi-da i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
133. Zhin'-ga u-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da,
tsi ga,
134. Wi'-tsu-shpa', a bin da, tsi ga,
135. Wi'-non bthi" mon-zhi in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
Ha' tha tsi ta', a bin da, tsi ga,
136. Ni'-u-thi-xa-xa xtsi ge dsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
137. E'-dsi xtsi hi non-zhin a', a bin da, tsi ga,
138. Wa'-zha-zhe win the a-ka in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
139. Ni' zhu-i-ga the xtsi ni-ka-shi-ga a-ka in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
140. Wi'-tsu-shpa', a bin da, tsi ga,
141. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga the thin-ga bi e'-sha bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
142. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga on-tha' bi do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
143. Ts'e' wa-tse-xi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
144. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga on-tha' bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
145. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
146. Hon'-ba tha-gthin shki u-hi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsi" da', a bi" da,
tsiga,
147. Wi'no" bthin mon-zi in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
Ha' tha tsi ta', a bin da, tsi ga,
148. Wi'-con-ga thi-to-ge gtha ba thin ha', a bin da, tsi ga,
149. Ga' xtsi hi tha i do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
150. Mon'-hin-ts'a zhi thi°-kshe no" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
458 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
151. Wi'-tsu-shpa wi-shnon wa-kon-da ts'e wa-tse-xi a-ton he i" da',
a bin da, tsi ga,
152. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga on-tha bi do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
153. Ts'e' wa-tse-xi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
154. Wi'-non bthi" mon-zhi in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
Ha' tha tsi ta', a bin da, tsi ga,
155. Shin'-zha-hi ton non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
156. Wi'-shki don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
157. Ts'e' wa-tse-xi a-ton he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
158. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga on-tha bi do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
159. Ts'e' wa-tse-xi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
160. Hon'-ba tha-gthin u-wa'-ni-ka-shi-ga a-ton he in da', a bin da,
tsiga,
161. Hon'-ba tha-gthin shki u-hi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da,
tsiga,
Ha' tha tsi ta', a bin da, tsi ga,
162. Wi'-con-ga, e-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
163. Thi'-to-ge gtha ba thin ha', wi-90n-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
164. Thu-e' xtsi hi the do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
165. Wi'-zhin-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
166. Wa'-dsu-ta win ts'e tha bi kshe a', wi-zhi"-the, e'-ki-e a-ka', a
bin da, tsi ga,
167. Wi'-pon-ga', a bin da, tsi ga,
168. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga tha ba thon tse in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
169. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga thg ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
170. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga tha' bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
171. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
Ha' tha tsi ta', a bin da, tsi ga,
172. Wi'-pon-ga', a bin da, tsi ga,
173. Thi'-to-ge gtha ba thin ha, wi-con-ga, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
174. Thu-e' xtsi hi the do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
175. Mon'-zhon u-ton-ga xtsi thin-kshe dsi a', a bi" da, tsi ga,
176. E'-dsi xtsi hi non-zhin a', a bin da, tsi ga,
177. Ga' tse shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
178. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga the ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
179. Mon'-zhon-u-kon-9ka shki zha-zhe on-ki-ton ta i tsin da', a bin da,
tsi ga,
180. Zhin'-ga ts'e wa-tse-xi ki-the mon-thi° ta i tsin da', a bin da,
tsiga,
Ha' tha tsi ta', a bin da, tsi ga,
LA FI.HSCHE] TRIBAL RITES OSAGE LANGUAGE 459
181. Wi'-con-ga', a bin da, tsi ga,
182. Thi'-to-ge gtha ba thin ha', a bin da, tsi ga,
183. Wi'-zhin-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
184. Ni'-ka-shi-ga win e-dsi a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
185. Tsi'u-ta-fa xtsi a-ka tha', a bin da, tsi ga,
186. Ni'-ka-shi-ga', a bin da, tsi ga,
187. Tsi'-hu-kon u-k'u-dse a-ka tha', a bin da, tsi ga,
188. Ga' tse shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
189. Zha'-zhe ki-ton a-ka e-zha-mi in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
190. Tsi'u-ta-pa gon-tha a-ka', wi-zhin-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
191. Tsi'u-ta-pa wa'-gthin a-tha, wi-zhin-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
192. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga the ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
193. Tsi'-u-ta-$a shki zha'-zhe ki-ton ta i tse a-tha', a bin da, tsi ga,
194. Zhin'-ga u-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da,
tsiga,
195. Ni'-ka-shi-ga', a bin da, tsi ga,
196. Non'-pe-wa-the xtsi a-ka in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
197. Tsi-u'-ki-a-ge shki zha-zhe ki-ton a-ka e-zha-mi in da', a bin da,
tsi ga,
198. Ga' tse shki a', a bi° da, tsi ga,
199. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga the ta i tsi" da', a bin da, tsi ga,
200. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga tha bi do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
201. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
202. Hon'-ba tha-gthi" shki u-hi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsi" da', a bin
da, tsi ga,
Ha' tha tsi ta, a bin da, tsi ga,
203. Wi'- pon-ga, e'-ki-e a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
204. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga the wa-thi"-ga bi a-tha, wi-zhi°-the, e'-ki-e
a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
205. Wi'-con-ga, a bin da, tsi ga,
206. Thi'-to-ge gtha ba thin ha, wi-pon-ga, e'-ki-e a-ka', a bin da, tsi ga,
207. Wi'-pon-ga', a bin da, tsi ga,
208. Thu-e' xtsi hi the do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
209. Wi'-zhin-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
210. Wa'-dsu-ta wi" the kshe a', a bin da, tsi ga,
211. Ts'e' tha bi kshe a', wi-zhin-the, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
212. Wi'-con-ga', a bin da, tsi ga,
213. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga the ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
214. Zhia'-ga zhu-i-ga tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
215. Ts'e' wa-tse-xi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsi" da, a bin da, tsi ga,
Ha' tha tsi ta', a bin da, tsi ga,
460 THE OSAGE TRIBE FETH. ANN. 36
216. Thi'-to-ge gtha ba thin ha', wi-9On-ga', a bi° da, tsi ga,
217. Thu-e' xtsi hi the do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
218. Mon'-zhon u-ton-ga xtsi thin-kshe dsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
219. Ni'-ka-shi-ga to" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
220. Mon'-zhon u-ton-ga xtsi thin-kshe dsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
221. E'-dsi xtsi ni-ka-shi-ga', a bin da, tsi ga,
222. U'-da-bthu-bthu-e xtsi ni-ka-shi-ga to" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
223. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga the ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
224. Mon'-zhon-u-9kon-fka shki zha-zhe ki-ton ta i tsin da, a bin da,
tsi ga,
225. Mon'-zhon shki zha-zhe ki-ton ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
226. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
227. Hon'-ba tha-gthin shki u-hi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da,
tsi ga,
228. Hon'-ba u-ca-ki-ba do-ba u-hi ki-the mon-thin ta i tsi" da', a bir
da, tsi ga,
Ha' tha tsi ta', a bin da, tsi ga,
229. Wi'-zhin-the, e'-ki-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
230. Thi'-to-ge gtha ba thin ha', wi-zhin-the, e'-ki-e a-ka', a bi" da,
tsi ga,
231. Wi'-90n-ga', a bin da, tsi ga,
232. Thu-e' xtsi hi the do" a', a bin da, tsi ga,
233. Ni' u-ga-xthi win e-dsi non non a', a bin da, tsi ga,
234. E'-dsi xtsi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
235. Tsi' zhin-ga win the tse a', wi-zhin-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
236. E'-dsi xtsi hi non-zhin bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
237. Hon'-ga bi a, wi-zhin-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
238. Wi'-tsi-go-e', e-gi-a bi a', a bin da, tsi ga,
239. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga on-tha ba thon tse a-ton he in da', a bin da, tsi ga,
240. Wi'-zhin-the a', a bin da, tsi ga,
241. Tsi' u-ta-ca wa-gthin win u-gthin a-ka', wi-zhin-the a', a bin da,
tsiga,
242. Ga' tse shki a', a bin da, tsi ga,
243. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
244. Tsi' u-k'u-k'u-dse a-ka', wi-zhin-the, a', a bin da, tsi ga,
245. E'-shki don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
246. Zhin'-ga zhu-i-ga tha bi don a', a bin da, tsi ga,
247. U'-non a bi i-the ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a bin da, tsi ga,
248. Hon'-ba u-?a-ki-ba do-ba u-hi' ki-the mon-thin ta i tsin da', a
bin da, tsi ga.
PART IIL-LITERAL TRANSLATION
461
THE XO'-KA Wi'-Gi-E13
(Free translation, p. 74; Osage version, p. 305)
1. He-dsi, at that time and place; xtsi, verily; a, they said; a bin da,
it has been said; tsi, house; ga, in this, 18, 66, 82.
2. Ho°-ga, the Hon-ga subdivision ; u-dse-the, fireplaces; pe-thon-ba,
seven; ni-ka-shi-ga, a people; ba do", they were; a, they said.
3. Ha, O; wi-con-ga, my younger brothers; e-ki-a, said to one
another; bi, they; a, they said.
4. We-ki-k'on, ceremonial articles, or symbols; thon-^se, suitable
for use; thin-ge, none; a-tha, there is; wi-con-ga, my younger
brothers; e-ki-a, said to one another; bi, they; a, they said.
5. In-gthon-ga, Puma; do-ga, the male; ton, standing; a, they said.
6. Ha, Ho; wi-con-ga, my younger brother; e-gi-a, said to him; bi,
they; a they said.
7. We-ki-k'on, ceremonial articles, or symbols; thon-(se, suitable
for use; thin-ge, none; a-tha, there is; wi-con-ga, my younger
brother; e-gi-a, said to him; bi, they; a, they said.
8. Tho-e, in haste; xtsi, verily; hi-the, he went forth; don, did; a,
they said.
9. A-ba-do, a small hill; a-ga-ha, upon the brow of; dsi, there;
xtsi, verily; a, they said, 51.
10. Wa-ca-be, the black bear; u-ca-ka, without blemish, without
spots; thin-ge, none; that has none; to" non, the standing; a,
they said.
11. Tho, in his presence; to", where he stood; hi, having arrived
there; non-zhin, stood; bi, they; a, they said.
12. Ha, O; wi-tsi-go-e, my grandfather; e-gi-a, said to him; bi, they;
a, they said.
13. We-ki-k'on, ceremonial article, or symbol; thon-tse, suitable;
thin-ge, none; a-tha, there are; wi-^si-go-e, my grandfather;
e-gi-e, said to him; a-ka, they.
14. Ha, Ho; zhi"-ga, little ones; e, to say; tsi-the, he hastened;
a, they said.
15. We-ki-k'on, ceremonial articles, or symbols; thon-tse, suitable;
thin-ge, you have none; e-she, you having said; do", because;
a, they said.
» Many of the lines of the wi'-gi-es arc used again and again. Where such repetitions of a line occur
the sequential numbers of the lines having the same words and meaning will be grouped together so
that the translation of one line will suffice for all, in order that much labor and space may be saved.
For the same reason the refrain at the end of every line, " A bl» da, tsi ga," will be omitted save in the
opening line of the wi'-gi-«.
463
464 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
16. We-ki-k'on, ceremonial article, or symbol; thon-tse, suitable;
a-ton-he, I stand.
17. E-dsi, there, in the activities of life; zhi, absent; the, moving;
thin-ge, none, never; xtsi, verily; a-ni-ka-shi-ga, I am a person;
in da, I am.
19. Xa-dse, grass; ba-tse, a bunch of; hon-cka, one of any kind;
don, the; a, they said.
20. Thi-thi-shi-zhe, plucked and twisted it; gthi, drew toward him
self; non-the, placed it upon the ground; ton, as he stood; 3S,
they said, 26, 44.
21. Ga, these grasses; tse, that lay upon the ground; shki, also; a,
they said, 71, 78.
22. We-ki-k'on, ceremonial article; the, make of it; mon-thin,34 as they
travel the path of life; ta bin da, they shall, 28, 41, 46, 58.
23. Tho-e, in haste; xtsi, verily; ci-thu-fe, took footsteps, went
forth; do", did; a, they said, 29, 37, 42, 50.
24. Ba-xpe, small stunted oaks; ba-tse, a bunch of; hon-cka, any
kind; do", the; a, they said.
25. Ga, this, bunch of stunted oaks; thin-kshe, sitting here; shki,
also; a, they said, 27, 32, 40, 45, 55.
30. Ga-xa, a branch, a creek; zhin-ga, small; ce-gtha-gtha the, a
line of groves along its banks; xtsi, verily; ge, dsi, there
amongst; a, they said.
31. Zhon-sha-be-the hi, dark-wood tree, the red-bud; ba-tse, a bunch
of; hon-cka, any kind; don, the; a, they said.
33. We-ki-k'on, ceremonial articles or symbol; the, make of; mo"-
thin, as they travel the path of life; tja i tsin da, they shall.
34. Non-xthe, charcoal; gi-the, they shall make of it; mon-thin, as
they travel the path of life; \,& bin da, they shall.
35. Non-xthe, charcoal; gi-the, they make of it; bi, they; do", when,
a, they said.
36. U-non, old age; a bi, spoken of as; i-the, live to see; mon-thin, as
they travel the path of life; ta bin da, they shall, 98.
38. Mon-ca, arrow-shaft trees; ba-tse, bunch; hon-cka, any kind ; do",
the; a, they said.
39. E-dsi, there, close to it; xtsi, verily; hi, having arrived at; gthin,
he sat down; thin-kshe, sitting; a, they said.
43. Ha-fi-hi, grapevine; kon, the root; ba-tse, bunch; hon-9ka, any
kind; don, the; a, they said
47. Zhin-ga, the little ones; we-ki-k'o°, ceremonial articles or symbols;
tha, they make of; bi, they; do", when; a, they said.
48. Da-gthe, captives; i-thi-sha-win, they shall tie up as with cords;
e non bi no", and spoken of as cords; a, they said.
« The word moa-thi", used colloquially, means, to walk. When the word is used figuratively and cere
monially it denotes the continuation of an important act during the life journey of the tribe.
LA FLESCHH] TRIBAL, RITES LITERAL TRANSLATION 465
49. Shon, for all time; xtsi, verily; ga-xe, they shall make of it:
mon-thi", as they travel the path of life; ta i tsin da, they shall.
52. 'In, stony; pa-ci, point; hon-cka, of any kind; don, the; a, they
said.
53. 'In-zhin-ga, small stones; do-ba, four.
54. ^"to-the shu, gathered them together; gthi, brought them toward
himself; non-the, placed them in a pile; to", as he stood; a,
they said.
56. We-ki-k'on, ceremonial articles or symbols; the, make of them;
mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; ta i tsi" da, they shall.
57. Zhin-ga, the little ones; da-ci-hi, cleanse themselves with heat;
ki-the, cause themselves; mon-thin, as they travel the path of
life; bi, they; don, when; shki, and; a, they said.
59. Zhin-ga, the little ones; tsi-hi, frame of their house; u-gthe, use
as supports for; the, use them; mon-thin, as they travel the
path of life; bi, they; do", when; shki, and; a, they said.
60. Tsi, house; hiu-gthe, frame; gi-shon-tha, loosen; zhi, not; ki-the,
cause for themselves; mon-thin, as they travel the path of life;
ta i tsi" da, they shall.
61. Wa-kon-da, god's; tsi, house; in da, it is.
62. Tsi, house; hi-u-gthe, frame; wi-ta, is mine.
64. Zhin-ga, the little ones; zho-i-ga, their bodies; the, make of it;
mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; bi, they; don, when;
a, they said.
65. Wa-kon-da, god's; tsi, house; to", possess; ki-the, cause them
selves to; mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; (a i tsin da,
they shall.
67. U-ci-gthe, a line of footprints; win, one; i-tse-the, he placed; to",
as he stood; a, they said.
68. U-ci-gthe, a line of footprints; jie-thon-ba, seven in number.
69. Thi-u-ba-he, from the side of the door; i-sdu-ge, the right side;
dsi, there; a, they said.
72. Wa-we-a-ga-pkon-the, I have made to be symbols; in da, I have;
79.
73. O-don, military honors; pe-thon-ba, the seven; e no" bi non, that
are spoken of as; a, they said.
74. Shon, all of them, and for all time; xtsi, verily; pa-xe in da, I
have made them to be.
75. U-ci-gthe, a line of footprints; sha-pe, six in number; a, they said.
76. Thi-u-ba-he, side of the door; tha-ta, the left side; dsi, there; a,
they said.
77. U-ci-gthe, a line of footprints; sha-pe ha, six in number; i-tse-the,
he placed; to", as he stood; a, they said.
2786—21 30
466 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 88
80. O-don, military honors; sha-pe; e non bi non, that are spoken of
as; a, they said.
81. I-tha-ga-ckon-the, I have made them to symbolize; in da, I have;
e, saying; to", he stood; a, they said.
83. Zhin-ga, the little ones; zho-i-ga, their bodies; tha, they make of;
bi, they; ga, thus; non-zhin da, they shall stand.-
84. Mi-xa cka, white swan; ton-ga, the great; thin-kshe, the sitting;
non, the; a, they said.
85. Zhin-ga, the little ones; zho-i-ga, their bodies; the, they make of ;
ta bi a, they shall; wi-con-ga, my younger brothers; e-ki-a,
said to one another; bi, they; a, they said.
86. Zhin-ga, the little ones; zho-i-ga, their bodies; on-the, they make
of me; bi, they; don, when; a, they said, 92.
87. Wa-dsu-ta, living creatures; shon-e-gon, all, whatever kind they
may be; xtsi, verily; a, they said.
88. Wi-non, I alone; a-hiu, wings; ca-gi, strong; bthi" da, I am; e,
saying; ton, he stood; a, they said.
89. Hon-ba, a day; he-be, the half of; a, they said.
90. Tse-don, the great lake; go-da-ha, on the farther side of; xtsi,
verily; a, they said.
91. Ga-ha-ha, swinging up and down; a-hi-gthin, having arrived
there I sit upon the waves; a-thin he, in my life movements;
no" in da, it is my habit; e, saying; to0, he stood; a, they said.
93. A-hiu-ha, their arms; ca-gi a bi, spoken of as strong; i-the, live
to see; mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; ta i tsin da,
they shall.
94. Hon-ba, the days; u-ca-ki-ba, the divisions of; do-ba, the four.
95. U-hi, to arrive there and enter; ki-the, they shall cause them
selves to; mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; ta bin da,
they shall. J.'/
96. U-non, old age; a bi, spoken of as; shki, and; i-the, live to see;
ki-the, they shall cause themselves to; mon-thin, as they travel
the path of life; ta bin da, they shall.
97. Zhin-ga, the little ones; u-non, the means of reaching old age;
on-gi-the, make of me; mon-thin, as they travel the path of
life; bi, they; don, when; a, they said.
KI'-NON WI'-GI-E
(Free translation, p. 77; Osage version, p. 307)
1. He-dsi, at that time and place; xtsi, verily; a, they said; a bin da,
it has been said; fysi, house; ga, in this, 11, 33, 40, 43, 51.
2. Wa-ca-be, the black bear; u-ca-ka, blemish, spots; thin-ge, that
has none; kshe, that lies; a, they said.
3. Ta, the deer, ki-thi-xa, mate; bi, they; u-zhin-ga, when it was
yet small, young; xtsi, verily; thin-kshe, sitting; dsi, then; a,
they said.
TRIBAL KITES — LITERAL TRANSLATION 467
4. Ni-dse, haunch, body; ki, to lay down as to rest; i-non-the, to put
upon the ground; ta do", to do so, pressed with the desire to
rest, hibernate; a, they said.
5. U-k'on wa-non-tha zhi, perplexed, bewildered; xtsi, verily; thi",
he was; a, they said.
6. Ta-dse, the winds, the four quarters; e-non-ha, to each one.
7. Ha-shki-pa, returning to the starting point; a-gthi, returning;
non-zhin-zhin, repeatedly, to stand; the, as he moved about;
a, they said.
8. Shon, while yet acting in this manner; to" in da, and as she stood.
9. Thu-e, quickly; xtsi, verily; ci-thu-ce, taking footsteps; the,
went forth; don, did; a, they said, 14, 18, 23, 28, 34.
10. Xa-dse, grass; ba-tse, bunch; hon-cka, of any kind; do", the; a,
they said.
12. Thi-thi-cki, gathered compactly together; gthi, toward himself;
non-the, placed upon the ground; thi°-kshe, as she sat; a, they
said, 16, 21, 26.
13. Ni-dse, haunch, body; ki, down; i-non-tha, upon the ground as to
rest; zhi, not; the, went away; a, they said, 17, 22, 27, 32.
15. Ba-xpe, stunted oaks; zhin-ga, small; hon-cka, of any kind; don,
the; a, they said.
19. Ga-xa, a branch, stream; zhin-ga, small; ce gtha-gtha, with a line
of groves upon its banks; xtsi, verily; ge, amongst; dsi, there;
a, they said, 24.
20. Zhon-sha-be-the hiu, dark-wood trees, the red-bud; ba-tse, a
bunch; hon-cka, any kind; do", the; a, they said.
25. Ha-fi-hi, grapevine; kon, root; thin-kshe, the sitting; no", the;
a, they said.
29. Mon-ha, a cliff; p.a-ci, to the summit of; hon-cka, any kind; do",
the; a, they said.
30. 'In-zhin-ga, small stones; do-ba, four.
31. Thi-ta-the, gathered them together; gthi, toward herself; i-non.
the, placed them upon the ground; to", as she stood; a, they
said.
35. 'In, rocky cliff; pa-ci, to the summit of; a-ga-ha, upon; dsi, there;
xtsi, verily; a, they said.
37. Thi-9On-tha, turned over; gthi, and drew toward herself; i-tse-the,
and placed them upon the ground; to", she stood; a, they said.
38. 'In, a stone; (a-xpi, upon the crown of her head; a-gthon, placed
thereon; xtsi, verily; hi, having arrived there; gthi", sat; thin-
kshe, sitting; a, they said.
39. Ni-dse, haunch; ki, down; i-non-tho, placed upon the ground;
thin-kshe, sitting; a, they said.
41. Mi, moons; pe-thon-ba, seven.
468 THE OSAGE TRIBE [»TH. ANN. 86
42. He-dsi, close to; xtsi, verily; hi, having arrived at; gthi", she sat;
thin-kshe, sitting; a, they said.
44. Hon-ba, days; u-ca-ki-ba, the divisions of; win, one; u-pshi, I
have arrived at and am entering; shon, verily; e-ki-the, thought
of herself; thin-kshe, as she sat; a, they said, 44, 50.
45. Wa-zhin-ga, the birds; ho-wa-gi ki-he, in every direction; sho"
e-gon, verily in all directions; xtsi, verily; a, they said.
46. Ho-ton, calling, singing; wa-non-k'on, hearing them; thin-kshe, as
she sat; a, they said.
48. Wa-gthu-shka zhin-ga, the little bugs, insects.
42. Kia-hi-hi the, flying hither and thither in swarms; xtsi, verily;
wa-don-be, she saw; thin-kshe, as she sat; a, they said.
52. Wa-kon-da, god, used here figuratively for season; u-pshi, I have
arrived at and am entering; shon, verily; e-ki-the, she thought
of herself; thin-kshe, as she sat; a, they said.
53. Zhin-ga-zhin-ga, the children.
54. Hon-ba, days; u-ca-ki-ba, divisions of; u-ni-ka-shi-ga, dwell
therein as persons; ta, shall; bi, they; e-ki-the, thought of her
self; thiVkshe, as she sat; a, they said.
55. Zhin-ga-zhin-ga, her child; gthu-ce, she took up; don, then; a,
they said.
56. Wa-kon-da, and to the god; tse-ga, that early; xtsi, verily;
e-thon-be, rises and appears; hi, comes; non, habitually; bi,
they, a, they said.
57. Ba-ha, exhibit, hold up to view; offer; tsi, come, having come to
the door; non-zhin, stood; to", standing; a, they said.
58. Zhin-ga, the little ones; ni-ka-shi-ga, persons, people; bi a, they
now are; wi-^si-go-e, O, grandfather; e, saying; to", she stood;
a, they said.
59. Zhin-ga, the little ones; u-non, old age; i-the, live to see; ki-the,
enable themselves; mon-thin, as they travel the path of life;
ta bi a, help them to; wi-fcsi-go-e, O, grandfather; e, saying;
to", she stood; a, they said.
Kl'-NON Wl'-GI-E
(Free translation, p. 79; Osage version, p. 309)
1. He-dsi, at that time and place; xtsi, verily; a, they said; a bin
da, it has been said; tsi, house; ga, in this, 9, 22, 26.
2. Zhin-ga, the little ones; ki-non, symbolic paintings; gi-tha, to
make of; bi, they; thin-ge, they have none; a-tha, they have;
wi-tsi-go-e, O, grandfather; e, saying; to", he stood.
3. Zhin-ga, the little ones; ki-non, symbolically paint; gi-tha, them
selves; bi, they; don, when; a, they said.
4. Wa-kon-da, the god; tse-ga, early; xtsi, verily; e-thon-be, arises
and appears; hi, comes; no", habitually; bi, they; a, they said.
LAFLESCHE] TRIBAL RITES LITERAL TRANSLATION 469
5. Wa-kon-da, the god; u-ga-zhu-dse, that strikes the heavens with
red; hi, as lie comes; non non, regularly; a, they said.
6. Ga, that god; ki-non, symbolically paint; gi-the, make of; mon-
thin, as they travel the path of life: ta bin da, they shall.
7. Ki-non, paint symbolically; gi-the, make of; mon-thin, as they
travel the path of life; bi, they; do", when.
8. U-non, old age; a bi, spoken of as; i-the, live to see; ki-the, cause
themselves to; mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; ta
bin da, they shall, 21, 30.
10. Wa-fa-be, the black bear; u-ca-ka, blemish, spots; thin-ge, that
has none; kshe, that lies; non, the; a, they said.
11. E-shki don, that animal also.
12. Wa-kon-da, god; u-ton-ba, to be noticed, identified; bi, they;
ki-the, cause themselves to be; mon-thin, as they travel the
path of life; ta bin da, they shall, 16, 35, 39.
13. Zhu-i-ga, my body; ca-be, the black; ga ge, these; a, they said.
14. Non-xthe, as charcoal; a-gi-the, I have made it to be; a-thin-he,
in my life activities; in da, I have, 32, 37.
15. Non-xthe, charcoal; gi-the, they make of it; mon-thin, as they
travel the path of life; bi, they; do", when; a, they said, 34.
17. The-shka, the throat; cka, the white spot; ga, this; thi"-kshe,
sitting; shki, also; a, they said.
18. Wa-kon-da, the. god; hon-ba, day; don, of; thin-kshe, sitting; a,
they said.
19. I-bi-con-dse, pressing close against him; on-kshi-the, we shall make
it to be; t& i tse a-tha, we shall.
20. I-bi-con-dse, press closely to him; on-kshi-tha, we make him to
be; bi, we; do", when; a, they said.
23. Mi-xa, swan; cka, white; ton-ga, the great ; thi"-kshe, the sitting;
non, the; a, they said.
24. Ha, O; wi-tsi-go-e, my grandfather; e-gi-a, they said to him; bi,
they; a, they said.
25. Zhin-ga, the little ones; zho-i-ga. their bodies; tha, of which to
make; bi, they; thin-ge, there is none; a-tha, it is so; wi-tsi-
go-e, my grandfather; e-gi-a, they said to him ; bi, they; a, they
said.
27. Zhin-ga, the little ones; zho-i-ga, their bodies; tha, to make of;
bi, they; thin-ge, there is none; e-she don, when you say; a,
they said.
28. Zhin-ga, the little ones; zho-i-ga, their bodies; on-tha, make of
me; ba, they; thon-tse, they shall, being fit for such purpose;
Mi-kshe, in da, I am.
29. Zhin-ga, the little ones; zho-i-ga, their bodies; on-tha, they make
of me; bi, they; do", when; a, they said, 33.
470 THE OSAGE TKIBE [HTH. ANN. 36
31. £i-ha, the skin of the feet; u-sha-be, in which the color is dark;
ga, this; thin-kshe, sitting; a, they said.
36. fa-zhu-zhe, the bill; i-^a-xe, the tip of; sha-be, dark in color;
ga, this; thin-kshe, sitting; a, they said.
38. Zhin-ga, the little ones; non-xthe, charcoal; gi-the, make of it;
mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; bi, they; do", when;
shki, and; a, they said.
40. A-hiu, wings; ga, these; thin-kshe, sitting; shki, also; a, they
said.
41. Wa-gthe, plumes; gi-the, make of them; mon-thin, as they travel
the path of life; ta i tsin da, they shall.
42. Wa-gthe, plumes; gi-the, they make of them; mon-thin, as they
travel the path of life; bi, they; don, when; shki, and; a, they
said.
43. Hon-ba, the day; wa-cu, that is clean, spotless, cloudless; ga, this;
ton, standing; a, they said.
44. I-tha-thu-ce, to bring with their strength; on-ga-xe, we shall make
them to; on-mon-thinj as we travel the path of life; ta i tsin da,
we shall.
45. Hon-ba, days; u-ca-ki-ba, the divisions of; do-ba, the four.
46. U-hi, to reach and to enter; ki-the, cause themselves to; mon-
thin, as they travel the path of life; $a bi a, they shall; zhin-ga,
the little ones.
MoN-THIN'-THE-DON Ts'A-GE
(Free translation, p. 84; Osage version, p. 310)
1. He-dsi, at that time and place; xtsi, verily; a, they said; abinda
it has been said; ^si, house; ga, in this, 7, 35, 63, 67, 72, 80,
83, 91, 120.
2. Wa-zha-zhe, name of the Wa-zha-zhe subdivision; u-dse-the, fire
places; pe-thon-ba, seven; ba, they were; don, were; a, they
said.
3. Wa-zha-zhe, man of the Wa-zha-zhe subdivision; win, one; a,
they said.
4. Wa-ki-gthi-gthon, to meditate for himself; tsi-the, he proceeded;
thin-kshe, as he sat; a, they said.
5. Tsi-xin-dse, at the end of the lodge; xtsi, verily; ge, there; dsi, at
that place; a, they said.
6. Ba-mon-xe, bowed, bent low, prostrate; hi-the, he fell; kshe, he
lay; a, they said, 18, 33, 48, 65.
8. Hon-ga, sacred, that which was consecrated; wa-ga-xa, was made;
bi, they, the people; a, they said, 22, 37, 53, 68, 85.
9. P-dse-ha, the skin of the face, the forehead; ga-xe, he made of
it, put it upon the skin of his face; to", as he stood; a, they
said, 23, 38, 54, 69, 86.
LAFLESCHE] TRIBAL, KITES — LITERAL, TRANSLATION 471
10. Hon-ba, the day; i-fca-xe, at the beginning of; thon dsi, there, at
that time; a, they said, 24, 39, 55, 70, 87.
11. Xa-ge, weep, cry; tha-shton, cease; a-zhi, he did not; thi", as he
moved about; a, they said, 25, 29, 40, 44, 56, 71, 88.
12. Thu-e, quickly, forthwith; xtsi, verily; ci-thu-ce, he took foot
steps; the, and went forth; do", did; a, they said, 41.
13. Tsi-u-hon-ge, as he came to the edge of the village; xtsi, verily;
ge dsi, there; a, they said.
14. Wa-kon-da, the god of day, the sun; tho-ton, straight, in the
middle of the heaven; a-thin, he brought him to or followed
him; hi, arriving there; thin-kshe, he sat to rest; a, they said,
27, 42, 58, 74.
15. U-pa-fe, the time wherein darkness comes, the evening; thon
dsi, at that time; a, they said, 28, 43, 59.
16. Tse-xe, the open prairie; xtsi, verily; ge dsi, there in the midst
of; a, they said, 30, 45, 60.
17. I-sdo-ge, toward his right side; pa-gthe, placing his head; xtsi,
verily; a, they said, 32, 47, 64.
19. Wa-kon-da, god; in-shta, his eyes; a-ga-cta, to close; ga-xe, he
made them; kshe, as he lay down to rest; a, they said, 34, 49,
66, 81.
20. Shon thin-kshe in da, even as he sat, while yet he sat, 50, 57.
21. Wa-kon-da, god; hon-ba, day; do", of; thin-kshe, sitting; a, they
said.
26. Shon, then, even as he; ton in da, paused, stood to rest.
31. The, in this spot; shki, also; wa-kon-da, god; e-dsi a-ba, resides
and moves therein; thon-ta, it is possible; sho", after all; e-the,
he thought; thin-kshe, as he sat; a, they said, 46, 78.
36. Wa-kon-da, god, used here as a trope for the light of day;
on-thi-don, drawn over me; hi-the, has passed over; mi-kshe,
me; shon, even now; e-ki-the, he thought; kshe, as he lay
upon the ground; a, they said, 51, 82.
52. Pa, his head; thi-hon, raised; tsi-the, he hastened to do; do",
and; a, they said, 84.
61. The, in this spot; shki do", also; a, they said, 62.
73. Shon, while yet he cried; the in da, as he wandered about.
75. U-zhon, time for going to sleep, the evening; we-sha-pe, the
sixth ; kshe, the length of time from the beginning of the vigil ;
a, they said.
76. Ni, water, stream; u-hon-ge, the head of, the source; win, one;
e-dsi do", there was; a, they said, 89.
77. He-dsi, there, at the place; xtsi, verily; hi, having arrived there;
no", zhi", paused; to", stood; a, they said, 90, 93.
79. The, ga, here, in this spot; xtsi, verily; a-zhon, I sleep; (se, shall;
e-the, he thought; thin-kshe, as he sat; a, they said.
472 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
92. Mon-thin-the-don Ts'a-ge, He-who-becomes-aged- while-yet-travel
ing, the pelican; don, a; a, they said.
94. Ha, O; wi-tsi-go-e, my grandfather; e, to say; tsi-the, he hastened;
a, they said.
95. Zhi'-ga, the little ones; zho-i-ga, their bodies; tha, of which to
make; bi, they; thin-ge, there is none; a-tha, there is; wi-tsi-go-e,
my grandfather; e-gi-e, said to him; ton, as he stood; a, they
said.
96. Ha, O; zhin-ga, little one; e, to say; tsi-the, he hastened; a, they
said.
97. Zhin-ga, the little ones; zho-i-ga, their bodies; tha, of which to
make; bi, ^hey; thin-ge, there is none; e-she don, you having
said; a, they said.
98. Zhin-ga, the little ones; zho-i-ga, their bodies; on-tha, make of
me; ba, they; thon-ta, they shall; mi-kshe in da, they shall of
me.
99. Zhin-ga, the little ones; zho-i-ga, their bodies; on-tha, make of
me; bi, they; don, when; a, they said.
100. U-non, old age; a bi, which is spoken of as; i-the, live to see;
ki-the, cause themselves to; mon-thin, as they travel the path
of life; ta bin da, they shall, 103, 107, 115, 134.
101. p-pa-ha, the skin of my feet; ga, this; thin-kshe, sitting; shki,
and; a, they said.
102. U-non, the means of reaching old age; a-gi-the, I have made it
to be; a-ton-he in da, as I stand, 105, 109, 113, 117, 132, 136.
104. Hi-zhu-ga-wa, the muscles of my jaws; ga, this; thin-kshe, sitting;
shki, and; a, they said.
106. Zhin-ga, the little ones; u-non, the means of reaching old age;
gi-the, they make of them ; mon-thin, as they travel the path
of life; bi, they; don, when; shki, and; a, they said, 110, 114.
108. Tse-wa-tse u-ga-wa, the inner muscles of my thighs; ga, this;
thin-kshe, sitting; shki, also; a, they said.
111. Tse-wa-tse u-ga-wa, inner muscles of the thighs; a bi, that is
spoken of as; i-the, live to see; mon-thin, as they travel the
path of life; \& bin da, they shall.
112. Mon-ge thi-cto-the, the muscles of my breast gathered in folds
with age; ga, these; thin-kshe, sitting; shki, also; a, they said.
116. A-zhu-ga-wa, the flaccid muscles of my arms; ga, these; thin-
kshe, sitting; shki, also; a, they said.
118. Zhin-ga, the little ones; u-non, a means of reaching old age; tha,
they make of them; bi, they; do", when; shki, and; a, they
said, 133, 137, 140.
119. A-zhu-ga-wa, flaccid muscles of the arms; a bi, spoken of as;
i-the, live to see; ki-the, cause themselves to; mon-thin, as
they travel the path^of life: (a bin da, they shall.
LA FLESCHE] TRIBAL RITES — LITERAL TRANSLATION 473
121. A-hiu, my wings; ga, tse, these; a, they said.
122. E, those; shki do", also; a, they said.
123. Wa-thin-e-cka, without meaning; zhi in da, are not.
124. Wa-hiu-k'a, bone awls or scarificators; a-gi-the, I have made
them to be; a-ton-he i" da, as I stand.
125. Zhin-ga, the little ones; wa-hiu-k'a, bone awls; gi-the, they make
of them; mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; bi, they;
don, when; a, they said, 127.
126. Wa-hiu-k'a, bone awls; gi-pa-hi, sharp for use; ki-the, cause
them to be; mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; ta bin da,
they shall.
127. Wa-hiu-k'a, bone awls; gi-the, they make of them; mon-thin, as
they travel the path of life; bi, they; don, when; shki, and;
a, they said.
128. U-non, old age; a bi, spoken of as; i-the, live to see; ki-the,
cause themselves to; mon-thin, as they travel the path of life;
ta bi a, they shall; zhin-ga, the little ones.
129. Zhin-ga, the little ones; wa-non-xe, spirit; i-thi-shton, has already
become one and passed into the spirit world; kshe, one lies;
shki do", even though; a, they said.
130. I-ki-pa-non-xe-cka, with the use of the bone awl as a scari-
ficator they shall bring themselves back to consciousness;
mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; (a bi a, they shall;
zhin-ga, the little ones; e, saying; to", he stood; a, they said.
131. A-ba t'o-xa, my stooping shoulder; ga, this; thin kshe, sitting;
shki, also; a, they said.
135. Do-dse u-ga-wa, the muscles of my throat; ga, these; thin-kshe,
sitting; shki, also; a, they said.
138. Do-dse u-ga-wa, flaccid muscles of their throat; a bi, spoken of
as; i-the, live to see; mon-thin, as they travel the path of life;
ta bin da, they shall.
139. Ta-xpi, crown of the head; hi", the hairs of; ca-dse, grown scant
with age; ga, this; thin-kshe, sitting; shki, also; a, they said.
141. Ta-xpi, the crown of their heads; hin, the hair of; ca-dse, grown
scant with age; a bi, spoken of as; i-the, live to see; mon-thin,
as they travel the path of life; ^a bin da, they shall; zhin-ga,
the little ones.
HON'-GA WA-GTHI" TS'A-GE
(Free translation, p. 88; Osage version, p. 314)
1. He-dsi, at that time and place; xtsi, verily; a, they said; abinda,
it has been said; (,si, house; ga, in this, 11, 35.
2. He-dsi, then and there; xtsi, verily; i-non-zhin, with the close of
the words (of the pelican) he arose; do", he did; a, they said.
3. Hin-da, now; a-gthe tse, I shall go home; e-ki-the, he thought of
himself; ton, as he stood; a, they said.
474 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
4. U-zhon, sleeps; we-pe-thon-ba, seventh; tse, on the; a, they said.
5. Ga-xa zhin-ga, a small stream; xtsi, verily; ge, the; dsi, there;
a, they said.
6. He-dsi, near to; xtsi, verily; gi, he approached; thin, as he
moved homeward; a, they said.
7. Hon-ga, the sacred eagle; Wa-gthin, very; Ts'a-ge, aged; do", a;
a, they said.
8. He-dsi, close to him; xtsi, verily; gthi, he came; non-zhin, paused;
ton, and stood; a, they said.
9. Ha, O; wi-tsi-go-e, my grandfather; e-gi-a, bi a, he said to him.
10. Zhin-ga, the little ones; zho-i-ga, their bodies; tha, of which to
make; bi, they; thin-ge, none; a-tha, there is; wi-tsi-go-e, my
grandfather; e-gi-a bi a, said to him;
12. Zhin-ga, the little ones; zho-i-ga, their bodies; on-tha, make of
me; ba, they; thon-ta, they shall; mi-kshe in da, of me.
13. Zhin-ga, the little ones; zho-i-ga, their bodies; on-tha, make of
me; bi, they; do", when; a, they said.
14. U-non, old age; a bi, spoken of as; i-the, live to see; ki-the, cause
themselves to; mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; t& bin
da, they shall, 18, 34, 43, 47.
15. ^i-pa-ha, the skin of my feet; ga, this; thin-kshe, sitting; shki,
also; a, they said.
16. U-non, a means to reach old age; a-gi-the, I have made it to be;
a-ton he in da, as I stand, 20, 24, 28, 32, 45, 49, 54.
17. Zhin-ga, the little ones; u-non, a means to reach old age; tha,
they make of it; bi, they; don, when; shki, and; a, they said,
21, 25, 29, 33, 46, 55.
19. Hi-kon, ankles; ba-c'in-tha, wrinkles; ga ge, these; shki, also; a,
they said.
22. Hi-kon, ankles; ba-c'in-tha, wrinkled; a bi, spoken of as; i-the,
live to see; ki-the, cause themselves to; mon-thin, as they travel
the path of life; ta bin da, they shall.
23. Tse-wa-tse, the inner muscles of my thighs; u-ga-wa, flaccid with
age; ga, this; thin-kshe, sitting; shki, also; a, they said.
26. Tse-wa-tse, inner muscles of the thighs; u-ga-wa, grown flaccid
with age; a bi, spoken of as; i-the, live to see; ki-the, cause
themselves to; mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; ta bin
da, they shall.
27. Mon-ge, my breast; thi-ctu-the, gathered in folds with age; ga,
this; thin kshe, sitting; shki, also; a, they said.
30. Mon-ge, muscles of the breast; thi-ptu-the, gathered in folds with
age; a, bi, spc ken of as; i-the, live to see; ki-the, cause them
selves to; mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; ta bin da,
they shall.
LIFLISCHK] TRIBAL RITES — LITERAL TRANSLATION 475
31. A-zhu-ga-wa, muscles of the arms grown flaccid with age; ga,
these; thin-kshe, sitting; shki, also; a, they said.
36. A-hiu, my wings; ga tse, these; shki, also; a, they said.
37. Wa-hiu-k'a, bone awls; on-gi-tha, make of them; ba, they;
thoMa, they shall; a-ton he in da, as I stand.
38. Wa-hiu-k'a, bone awls; gi-the, they make of them; mon-thin, as
they travel the path of life; bi, they; do", when; a, they said.
39. Wa-hiu-k'a, bone awls; gi-jja-lii, sharp for use; ki-the, cause to
be; mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; ta i tsin da, they
shall.
40. Zhin-ga, should one of the little ones; wa-non-xe, a spirit; i-thi-
shto", has become; kshe, lies; shki, and; do", when; a, they
said.
41. F-ki-pa-non-xe-cka, with the use of the awl as a scarificator he
shall be brought back to consciousness; mon-thin, as they travel
the path of life; bi, they; don, when; a, they said.
44. A-ba-fo-xa, my stooping shoulder; ga, this; thin-kshe, sitting;
shki, also; a, they said.
48. Do-dse, throat; u-ga-wa, grown flaccid with age; ga,this; thin-
kshe, sitting; shki, also; a, they said.
50. Zhin-ga, the little ones; u-non, a means of reaching old age; gi-the,
make of them; mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; bi,
they; do", when; shki, also; a, they said
51. Do-dse, throat, the muscles of; u-ga-wa, grown flaccid with age;
a bi, spoken of as ; i-the, live to see ; ki-the, cause themselves to;
mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; \,& bin da, they shall.
52. Ta-xpi, crown of the head; hin, the hairs of; ca-dse, grown scant
with age; ga, this; thin-kshe, sitting; a, they said.
53. E shki don, those also; a, they said.
56. Ta-xpi, the crown of their heads; hi", the hairs of; ca-dse, grown
scant with age; a bi, spoken of as; i-the, live to see; ki-the,
cause themselves to; mon-thin, as they travel the path of life,
ta bi a, they shall; zhin-ga, the little ones.
MON'-^E WI'-GI-E
(Free translation, p. 90; Osage version, p. 31S)
1. He-dsi, at that time and place; xtsi, verily; a, they said; abinda,
it has been said; fa, house; ga, in this.
2. U'-zhon, sleeps; we-pe-thon-ba, the seventh; tse, the; a, they said.
3. Tsi-u-hon-ge, borders of the village; xtsi, verily; ge dsi, there;
a, they said.
4. He-dsi, close to; xtsi, verily; a-gthi-non-zhin, he returned to and
paused; e do", when; a, they said.
5. Mon-ce, metal; u-shpe, a fragment of; hon-cka, any kind; don,
the; a, they said.
476 THE OSAGE TRIBE [BTH. ANN. 36
6. He-dsi, close to it; xtsi, verily; a-gthi-non-zhin, he paused and
stood on his return; ton, stood; a, they said.
7. Ha, O; wi-tsi-go-e, my grandfather; e, to say; tsi-the, he has
tened; a, they said.
8. Zhin-ga, the little ones; zho-i-ga, their bodies; tha, of which to
make; bi, they; thin-ge a-tha, there is none; wi-tsi-go-e, my
grandfather; e-gi-a bi a, he said to him.
9. Ha, O; zhin-ga-e, little one; e, to say; tsi-the, he hastened; a,
they said.
10. Zhin-ga, the little ones; zho-i-ga, their bodies; tha, of which to
make; bi, they; thin-ge, there is none; e-she do", you have said;
a, they said.
11. Zhin-ga, the little ones; zho-i-ga, their bodies; on-tha, make of
me; ba, they; thon-ta, they shall; mi-kshe, in da, of me.
12. Ts'e, to die; wa-tse-xi, difficult; mi-kshe in da, I am.
13. Zhin-ga, the little ones; zho-i-ga, their bodies; on-tha, make of
me; bi, they; do", when; a, they said, 19, 25, 27, 30.
14. Ts's, to die; wa-tse-xi, difficult; ki-the, cause themselves to be;
mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; ta bin da, they shall.
16. Zhin-ga, the little ones; wa-hiu-k'a, bone awl; on-gi-the, make of
me; mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; ta i tsin da, they
shall.
17. Zhin-ga, the little ones; wa-hiu-k'a, bone awl; on-gi-the, make of
me; mon-thi°, as they travel the path of life; bi, they don,
when; a, they said, 20.
18. Wa-hiu-k'a, their bone awl; gi-pa-hi, sharp for use; ki-the, they
shall cause it to be; mon-thin, as they travel the path of life:
ta i tsin da, they shall.
21. Zhin-ga, any one of the little ones; wa-non-xe, spirit; i-thi-shton,
becomes; kshe, and lies; shki don, even then; a, they said.
22. On-thon-ki-pa-non-xe-cka, their use of me as a scarificator shall
bring him back to consciousness; mon-thin, as they travel the
path of life; ta i tsin da, they shall.
23. On-thon-ki-pa-non-xe-cka, when they make use of me to bring
back their sick ones to consciousness; mon-thin, as they travel
the path of life; bi, they; do", when; a, they said.
24. U-non, old age; a bi, that which is spoken of as; i-the, live to
see; ki-the, cause themselves to; mon-thin, as they travel the
path of life; ta bin da, they shall.
26. I-ts'a, causes of death; thin-ge, they shall have none; mon-thin,
as they travel the path of life; ta i tsin da, they shall.
28. Wa-kon-da, of the gods; xin-ha, skin; ca-gi, hard; thin-ga in da,
there are none.
29. Wi-non, I alone; wa-kon-da, of the gods; xin-ha, skin; ca-gi, hard;
bthin da, I am.
LA njtscHE] TRIBAL RITES LITERAL, TRANSLATION 477
31. Xin-ha, skin; ca-gi, hard; a bi, spoken of as; i-the, to see; ki-the,
cause themselves to; mon-thin, as they travel the path of life;
ta i tsin da, they shall.
32. Hon-ba, days; u-ca-ki-ba, the divisions of; do-ba, the four.
33. U-hi, they shah1 reach, arrive at and enter; ki-the, cause them
selves to; mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; ta i tsin da,
thej* shall.
34. Hon-ba, the days; wa-tha-xthi, anger, hatred aggressiveness;
thin-ge, having none; to" non, the standing; a, they said.
35. I-tha-thu-ce, to bring forth, to influence; xtsi, verily; a-ni-ka.
shi-ga, I am a person having that power; a-ton he in da, I stand-
36. Hon-ba, the days; u-xthi, anger, hatred and aggressiveness;
thin-ge, that have none ; u-ni-ka-shi-ga, they shall dwell therein
as a people; ki-the, cause themselves to; mon-thin, as they
travel the path of life; ta bi a, they shah1; zhin-ga, the little
ones.
THE WI'-GI-ES OF THE GENTES
WA-ZHA'-ZHE SUBDIVISION
WA.-ZHA/-ZHE WA-NON GENS
(Free translation, p. 92; Usage version, p. 316)
1. He-dsi, at that time and place; xtsi, rerily; a, they said; a bin da,
it has been said; ^si, house; ga, in this.
2. Wa-zha-zhe, name of the Wa-zha-zhe subdivision; u-dse-the,
fireplaces; pe-thon-ba, seven; ni-ka-shi-ga, a people; ba, they;
don, were; a, they said.
3. Wa-zha-zhe, name of that subdivision ; Wa-non, the gens occupying
the office of the "oldest"; thin-kshe, sitting; a, they said, 7.
4. Ha, O; wi-tsi-go-e, my grandfather, used here as a term of rev
erence, and not in the ordinary sense; e-gi-a, they said to him;
bi, they; a, they said.
5. Zhin-ga, the little ones; we-ki-k'on, ceremonial articles; tha, of
which to make; ba, they; thon-tse, suitable; thin-ge, there are
none; a-tha, are; wi-tsi-go-e, my grandfather; e-gi-a, they said
to him; bi, they; a, they said.
8. Ke, the turtle; cin-dse, tail; ga-tse, serrations; pe-thon-ba, seven;
thin-kshe, sitting; a, they said.
9. Ga, that; thin-kshe, the sitting; shki, also; a, they said.
10. We-ki-k'on, ceremonial article; the, they make of; mon-thin, as
they travel the path of life; ta i tsin da, they shall.
11. <^i"-dse, tail; ga-tse, serrations; pe-thon-ba, seven; ga tse, these;
a, they said.
478 THE OSAGE TRIBE [«TH. ANN. 36
12. E shki don, those also; a, they said, 17, 30.
13. Wa-we-a-ga-9kon-the in da, I have made to represent or to sym
bolize, 18, 31.
14. O-don, military honors; pe-thon-ba, seven; e no" bi no", spoken
of as; a, they said.
15. I-tha-ga-ckon-the in da, I have made to represent or to symbolize.
16. ^in-dse, tail; ga-tse, serrations; sha-pe, six; ga tse, these; a, they
said.
19. O-don, military honors; sha-pe, six; e non bi non, spoken of as.
20. Shon, all, of whatever description; i-tse-a-the i" da, I have made
them to stand for, to symbolize.
22. Non-ka, the back, of the turtle; ga-gthe-zhe, the figures; ga, this;
thin-kshe, sitting; shki, also; a, they said.
23. Wa-thi"-e-cka, without a purpose; she-mon, I have made; mon-zhi
in da, I have not.
24. U-non, as a means to reach old age; the, make them to be;
mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; ta i tsin da, they shall.
25. U-non, as a means of reaching old age; tha, they make of; bi,
they; don, when; shki, and; a, they said.
26. U-non, old age; a bi, spoken of as; i-the, live to see; ki-the, cause
themselves to; mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; ta i
tsin da, they shall, 37, 40.
27. Zhin-ga, the little ones; zho-i-ga, their bodies; on-tha, they make
of me; bi, they; don, when; a, they said, 36, 39.
28. Xin-ha, skin; ca-gi, hard and impenetrable; ki-the, cause them
selves to be; mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; ta i
tsin da, they shall.
29. Mon-ge, the breast, of the turtle; ga-gthe-zhe, the figures of; ga,
these; thin-kshe, sitting; shki, also; a, they said.
32. Wa-kon-da, the god; mon-shi, up above, the arch of the heaven;
ta, there; ga, this; kshe, that lies; a, they said.
33. A-ki-thi-tse, that which lies across, the breast; xo-dse, the gray
line; ga, this; thin-kshe, sitting; shki, also; a, they said, 34.
35. I-tha-ga-pkon-the, I have made them to represent, to symbolize;
xtsi, verily; a-ni-ka-shi-ga, I as a people; in da, I have done so.
38. Hon-ga, the people of the Hon-ga subdivision; Tsi-zhu, those of the
Tsi-zhu division; e-thon-ba, of these two divisions.
39. Zho-i-ga, their bodies; on-tha, they make of me; bi, they; do",
when; shki, and; a, they said.
41. Hon-ba, the days; u-ca-ki-ba, the divisions of; do-ba, the four.
42. U-hi, to reach and to enter; ki-the, cause themselves to; mon-
thi", as they travel the path of life; ta i tsin da, they shall.
LAFLKSCHE] TRIBAL KITES — LITERAL TRANSLATION 479
WA-ZHA'-ZHE QKA GENS
(Free translation, p. 94; Osage version, p. 317)
1. He-dsi, at that time and place; xtsi, verily; a, they said; a bin da,
it has been said; tsi, house; ga, in this, 6.
2. Wa-zha-zhe, name of the Water division; u-dse-the, fireplaces;
pe-thon-ba, seven; ni-ka-shi-ga, a people having; ba, they; don,
were; a, they said.
3. Wa-zha-zhe, of the Water division; £ka, the white; thiMcshe, the
sitting; non, the; a, they said.
4. Ha, O; wi-(si-go-e, my grandfather; e-gi-a, they said to him;
bi, they; a, they said.
5. Zhin-ga, the little ones; we-ki-k'on, articles for ceremonial use;
tha, of which to make; ba, they; thon-tse, fit or suitable;
thin-ge a- tha, there are none; wi-tsi-go-e, my grandfather;
e-gi-a, they said to him; bi, they; a, they said.
7. Zhin-ga, the little ones; we-ki-k'on, ceremonial articles; tha, of
which to make; ba, they; thon-tse, fit or suitable for use;
thin-ge, none; e-she do", you say; a, they said.
8. We-ki-k'on, article for ceremonial use, a symbol; thon-tse, fit or
suitable; mi-kshe in da, I am.
9. Tsiu-ge, the mussel; thin-kshe. the sitting; no", the; a, they said.
10. Zhu-i-ga, bodies; the, 1 have made of; xtsi, verily; a-ni-ka-shi-ga,
I as a person, as a people; mi-kshe in da, I who sit here, 24.
11. Zhin-ga, the little ones; zhu-i-ga, their bodies; on-tha, they make
of me; bi, they; do", when; a, they said, 15, 21.
12. U-non, old age; a bi, spoken of as; i-the, live to see; ki-the, cause
themselves to; mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; t& i tsi"
da, they shall, 29.
13. Ha, the skin, shell; ba-k'in-tha, wrinkled; ga, these; kshe, that
lay; a, they said.
14. U-non, the means of reaching old age; pa-xe in da, I have made
them to be.
16. Ha, skin; ba-k'in-tha, wrinkled; a bi, spoken of as; i-the, live to
see; ki-the, cause themselves to; mon-thin, as they travel the
path of life; t& i tsin da, they shall.
17. Ni, water, a river; u-ba-shon, a bend, a turn; pe-thon-ba, seven.
18. U-pshi, I come to and pass; a-thin-he, in the course of my exist
ence; non in,da, habitually.
19. Wa-kon-da, the gods; e shki do", even they; a, they said.
20. Be, any one of them; u-zhon-ge, path, trail; on-thon-kshi-tha, see
the trail that I make in my travel; mon-zhi, mine not; a-thin-he
in da, in the course of my life.
480 THE OSAGE TRIBE [Bin. ANN. 36
22. Be, any one of them; u-zhon-ge, trail; i-kshi-tha, see their; ba,
they; zhi, not; ki-the, enable themselves, to conceal their trail
from the gods themselves; mon-thin, as they travel the path of
life; ta i tsin da, they shall.
23. Wa-kon-da, the god; hon-ba don, of day; thin-kshe, who sits; a,
they said, 25.
24. Zhu-i-ga, my body; the, I have made of him; xtsi, verily; a-ni-
ka-shi-ga, I as a person and as a people; mi-kshe i" da, I who
sit here.
26. Zhu-i-ga. their bodies; the, they make of him; xtsi, verily;
ni-ka-shi-ga, a people; ki-the, cause themselves to be; mon-
thin, as they travel the path of life; ta i tsin da, they shall.
27. Hon-ba, the days; u-ca-ki-ba, the divisions of; do-ba, the four.
28. U-hi, to reach and to enter; ki-the, cause themselves to; mon-
thin, as they travel the path of life; ta i tsin da, they shall.
WA'-TSE-TSI GENS
(Free translation, p. 95; Osage version, p. 318)
1. He-dsi, at that time and place; xtsi, verily; a, they said; a bin da,
it has been said; tsi, house; ga, in this, 7, 19.
2. Wa-zha-zhe, the Water subdivision: u-dse-the, fireplaces;
pe-thon-ba, seven; ni-ka-shi-ga, a people; ba, they; don, were;
a, they said.
3. Wa-zha-zhe, a (gens) of the Wa-zha-zhe subdivision; a, they said.
4. Wa-tse-tsi, they who came from the stars; thin-kshe, the sitting;
non, the; a, they said.
5. Ha, O; wi-tsi-go-e, my grandfather; e-gi-a, they said to him; a,
they said.
6. We-ki-k'on, ceremonial article, a symbol; thon-tse, suitable;
thin-ge a-tha, we have none; wi-tsi-go-e, my grandfather;
e-gi-a. they said to him; bi, they; a, they said.
8. We-ki-k'on, symbol; thon-tse, suitable; thin-ge, you have none;
e-she don, you say; a, they said.
9. We-ki-k'on, symbol; thon-tse, suitable; mi-kshe in da, I am, I who
sit here.
10. Xon-dse, the red cedar; mi-ga, the female; ton, that stands; non,
the; a, they said.
11. Zhu-i-ga, my body; the, I have made it to be; xtsi, verily;
a-ni-ka-shi-ga, I, as a person, as a people; mi-kshe in da, I who
sit here.
12. Zhin-ga, the little ones; zhu-i-ga, their bodies; on-tha, they make
of me; bi, they; don, when; a, they said.
13. U-non, old age; a bi, spoken of as; i-the, live to see; mon-thin,
as they travel the path of life; ta i tsin da, they shall, 24, 27.
LAFLESCHE] TRIBAL RITES LITERAL TRANSLATION 481
14. Xon-dse, the red cedar; do-ga, the male; to", standing; non, the;
a, they said, 16.
15. We-ki-k'on, symbol; the, make of it; mon-thin, as they travel the
path of life; ta i tsiQ da, they shall.
1 7. We-ki-k'on, symbol ; the, they make of it ; mon-thin, as they travel
the path of life; bi, they; don, when; a, they said.
20. Ni, waters; ga ge, these; shki, also; a, they said, 22.
21. I-tha-ki-thon-ba, coupled, with the cedar; xtsi, verily; on-ga-xe,
we shall make them to be; on-mon-thin, as we travel the path
of life; ta i tsin da, we shall.
23. U-non, the means of reaching old age; tha, they make them to
be; bi, they; do", when; shki, and; a, they said, 26.
25. Mon-hin, grass; ts'a zhi, that dies not; ga, this; to", that stands
before us; a, they said.
28. U-non, the means of reaching old age; a-gi-the, I have made it
to be; a to" he in da, I who stands here, 30, 32.
29. A-ba t'u-xa, the bending or the stooping shoulders; ga ge, these;
a, they said.
31. I-ta-xe, at the top of the stalk; xtha, blossoms; cka, white; ga,
these; thin-kshe, the sitting; shki, also; a, they said.
33. Zhin-ga, the little ones; non, old age; hi, reach; bi, they; don,
when; a, they said.
34. Pa-xin, hairs of the head; ca-dse, grown scant; ci-e-gon, and yel
lowish with age; i-the, live to see; ki-the, cause themselves to;
mon-tliin, as they travel the path of life; ta i tsin da, they shall.
TA I-M-KA-SHI-OA GENS
(Free translation, p. 95; Osage version, p. 319)
1. He-dsi, at that time and place; xtsi, verily; a, they said; a bin da,
it has been said; tsi, house; ga, in this.
2. Wa-zha-zhe, the Water subdivision; u-dse-the, fireplaces; pe-thon-
ba, seven; ni-ka-shi-ga, a people; ba, they; don, were; a, they
said.
3. Wa-zha-zhe, of the subdivision; win, one; a, they said.
4. Wa-zha-zhe, of the Wa-zha-zhe subdivision; Ta-tha-xin, the
Deer's-lung gens; thin-kshe, the sitting; no", the; a, they said.
5. Ha, O; wi-tsi-go-e, my grandfather; e-gi-a, they said to him;
bi, they; a, they said.
6. We-ki-k'o", symbol; thon-tse, suitable; tliin-ge, there is none;
a-tha, is; wi-tsi-go-e, my grandfather; e-gi-a, they said to him;
bi, they; a, they said.
7. Ha, O; zhin-ga, little ones; e, to say; tsi-the, he hastened ; a, they
said.
2786—21 31
482 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 30
8. We-ki-k'on, symbol; thon-tse, suitable; thin-ge, there is none;
e-she don, you say; a, they said.
9. We-kik'on, symbol; thon-tse, suitable; mi-kshe in da, I am.
10. Wa-dsu-ta, animal; zhin-ga, little; win, one; a, they said.
11. Zhu-i-ga, my body; a-the, I have made it to be; a-thi° he in da,
in the course of my life.
12. We-ki-k'on, symbol; the, they make it to be; mon-thin, as they
travel the path of life; ta i tsin da, they shall, 30.
13. We-ki-k'on, a ceremonial article; a symbol; the, they shall make
it to be; mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; bi, they; don,
when; a, they said.
14. We-ki-k'on, a symbol; gi-o-ts'e-ga, easy to obtain, satisfying to
the desires; ki-the, for themselves; mon-thin, as they travel the
path of life; ta i tsin da, they shall.
16. (^i-ha, the skin of the feet; u-sha-be, the part that is dark in color;
ga, this; thin-kshe, sitting; shki, also; a, they said.
17. Non-xthe, charcoal, symbolic of; a-gi-the, I have made it to be;
a-thin he in da, in my life's journey, 21, 25.
18. Zhin-ga, the little ones; non-xthe, charcoal; gi-the, they make of
it; mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; bi, they; don, when;
a, they said.
19. Non-xthe, charcoal; gia-da-xe, that will easily sink into the skin,
refers particularly to tattooing; ki-the, cause it to be for them
selves: mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; ta i tsin da, they
shall, 23, 27.
20. Pa-zhu-zhe, the tip of the nose; sha-be, that is dark in color;
ga, this; thin-kshe, sitting; shki, also; a, they said.
22. Zhin-ga, the little ones; zhu-i-ga, their bodies; tha, they make of
it; bi, they; don, when; a, they said, 26.
24. Non-ta, ears; i-^a-xe, the tips of; ga, these; thin-kshe, sitting,
shki, also; a, they said.
28. We-ki-k'on, ceremonial articles, symbols; ga, these; non-zhin da;
shall stand as.
29. Wa-dsu-ta, animal; tse-he-xo-dse, gray horns, a term meaning
young; kshe, lying; non, the; a, they said.
30. Zhin-ga, the little ones; we-ki-k'on, symbol; the, they make of it;
mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; ta i tsin da, they shall.
31. Tse-xi, hardship, dangers; a-shi-be, evade or overcome; a-thin he,
non in da, I do in my life's journey, 34.
32. Wa-pa-hi, sharp weapons; on-bo-zha-ga, fly around me in forked
lines; bi, they; a-thin-he, as I flee; shki don, although; a, they
said.
33. Xthi bi, when chased, pursued, surrounded; u-thi-con-ha, amongst
those pursued; a-thin he, I am; shki do", even though; a, they
said.
LA FLESCHE] TRIBAL RITES LITERAL, TRANSLATION 483
35. Zhin-ga, the little ones; zhu-i-ga, their bodies; on-tha, they make
of me; bi, they; don, when; a, they said, 39, 100.
36. Tse-xi, dangers; ga-shi-be, evade or overcome; ki-the, cause
themselves to; mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; ta i
tsin da, they shall.
37. Hon-ba, the days; u-ca-ki-ba, the divisions of; do-ba, the four, 40.
38. U-hi, to reach and to enter; a-ki-the, I cause myself to; a-thin-he,
in my life's journey; non in da, habitually.
41. U-hi, to reach and to enter; ki-the, cause themselves to; mon-
thi", as they travel the path of life; ta i tsin da, they shall.
42. U-non, a means of reaching old age; tha, they make of me; bi,
they; don, shki, when; a, they said.
43. U-non, old age; a bi, spoken of as; i-the, live to see; ki-the, cause
themselves to; mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; ta i
tsi" da, they shall.
45. Hon a-do°, why; we-ki-k'on, a symbol; tha, they make of it; bi,
they; gon no", do they; shki, and; a hin a, interrogative par
ticles.
46. Zhin-ga, the little ones; wa-dsu-^a, animals; i-hi-thon-be; the
means by which to make them appear; the, make it to be;
mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; ta i tsi" da, they shall.
47. Wa-dsu-^a, animals; i-hi-thon-be, the means by which to make
them to appear; tha, they make of it; bi, they; don, when;
shki, and; a, they said, 52, 58, 63, 68.
48. Wa-dsu-ta, the animals; gi-hi-thon-be, shall appear for them,
mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; ta i tsin da, they shall;
53, 59, 69, 73, 79, 85, 90, 95, 97, 99, 103.
49. Ta-shka-hi, the white oak tree; to", standing; non, the; a, they
said.
50. I-u-dse, at the base of; mon-non-to-ba, where the earth has been
softened by many hoofs; bi, they, the animals; thin-kshe, the
sitting; no", the; a, they said, 56, 61, 66, 71, 75, 81.
51. Wa-dsu-ta zhin-ga, the small animal, the deer; a-gi-shka-de, to
play, gambol upon; pa-xe in da, I have made it to be, 57, 62,
67, 72, 76, 82. .
55. Zhiu-dse hi, the red oak tree; ton, standing; non, the; a, they said.
60. Pi-pi-stse-dse, hi, the long acorn tree; to", standing; non, the; a,
they said.
65. Pi-ci-xo-dse, hi, the gray acorn tree; ton, standing; non, the; a,
they said.
70. Zhon-ca-ki-ba hi, the twisted oak tree; ton, standing; no", the; a,
they said.
74. Pi-ci-sha-be hi, the dark-acorn tree; to", standing; non, the; a,
they said.
77. Pi-ci-sha-be hi, dark-acorn tree; win, one; a, they said.
484 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
78. Gi-ta-pe, approach, in hunting; mon-thin, as they travel the path
of life; bi, they; don, when; shki, and; a, they said.
80. Pa-xpe, tse-shka, the short stunted oak; ton, standing; non, the;
a, they said.
83. Pa-xpe, the stunted oak; win, one; a, they said.
86. Ga, these, the playgrounds; shki, also; a, they said.
87. Wa-thin-e-cka, without a purpose; she-mon mon-zhi in da, in
making them I have not.
88. Ho-e-ga, as snares for the animals; i-non-a-tha, in da, I have
placed them where they are.
89. Ho-e-ga, snares; tha, they, the little ones, make of them; bi,
they; shki, also; a, they said.
92. Xa-dse, grass; ba-tse, bunch; ga, this; thin-kshe, sitting; shki,
also; a, they said.
93. E shki, that also; wa-thin-e-cka, without a purpose; zhi in da,
is not.
94. Xa-dse, grass; ba-tse, bunch; win, one; gi-ta-pe, they approach
in hunting; mon-thi11, as they travel the path of life; bi, they;
don, when; shki, and; a, they said.
95. U-ga-con-thin, morrow, or the beginning of day; xtsi, verily;
thin-ge, there is yet none; a, they said.
98. U-pa-ce, in the evening; thon dsi, when; shki, also; a, they said.
101. Hon-ga, the little ones of the Hon-ga subdivision.
102. Tsi-zhu e-thon-ba, coupled with those of the Tsi-zhu division.
E-NON' MiN-osE To" GENS
(Free translation, p. 98; Osage version, p. 322)
1. He-dsi, at that time and place; xtsi, verily; a, they said; a bin da,
it has been said; tsi, house; ga, in this, 6, 36, 72.
2. Wa-zha-zhe, the Wa-zha-zhe subdivision; u-dse-the, fireplaces;
pe-thon-ba, seven; ni-ka-shi-ga, a people; ba, they; don, were;
a, they said.
3. Wa-zha-zhe, of the Wa-zha-zhe subdivision; E-non Min-dse To",
the sole owner of the bow (gens), the gens having the office
of making the ceremonial bow; thin-kshe, the sitting; no", the:
a, they said.
4. Ha, O; Wa-zha-zhe, the subdivision name of the gens; e-gi-a,
they said to him; bi, they; a, they said.
5. We-ki-k'on, symbol; thon-tse, suitable; thin-ge, there is none; a- tha,
is; Wa-zha-zhe, the division name; e-gi-a, they said to him;
bi, they; a, they said.
7. We-ki-k'on, symbol; thon-tse, suitable; thin-ge, none; e-she, don,
you say.
8. We-ki-k'on, symbol; thon-tse, suitable; mi-kshe in da, I am.
LAFLESCHE] TRIBAL RITES LITERAL TRAXSLATION 485
9. Niu-i-xa-xa, rushing waters, rapids; xtsi, verily; ge, the, many;
dsi, there at such places; a, they said.
10. A-ni-ka-shi-ga, as a person dwell, abide; mi-kshe i" da, I who sit
here.
11. Ni, water; zhu-i-ga, my body; the, I make to be, of the water;
xtsi, verily; a-ni-ka-shi-ga, as a person, as a people; mi-kshe.
in da, I who sit here.
12. Ni, river; thi-u-ba-he, the side of the body; i-sdu-ge, the ngnt;
ga, this; kshe, lying; a, they said, 15.
13. Thi-u-ba-he, as my own right side; a-gi-the, I have made it to
be; a-thin he in da, as I journey through life, 19.
14. Zhin-ga, the little ones; zhu-i-ga, their bodies; on-tha, make of
me; bi, they; don, when; a, they said, 24.
15. Ni, river; thi-u-ba-he, the side of its body; i-sdu-ge, the right;
ga kshe, this lying; a, they said.
16. Thi-u-ba-he, the right side of their own bodies; gi-the, make of
it; mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; bi, they; do",
when; a, they said, 20.
17. Thi-u-ba-he, the side of the body; i-ts'a, causes of death; thin-ge,
none; ki-the, cause themselves to be; mon-thin, as they travel
the path of life; ta i tsin da, they shall, 21.
18. Thi-u-ba-he, side of the body; tha-ta, the left; ga kshe, this; a
they said.
22. Ni-u-thu-ga, the channel; ga kshe, this; a, they said.
23. Thi-u-thi-xthu-k'a, the hollow of my own body; a-gi-the, I have
made it to be; a-thin he in da, in my life's journey.
25. Thi-u-thi-xthu-k'a, the hollow of their bodies; i-ts'a, causes of
death; thin-ge, none; ki-the, cause themselves to have; mon-
thin, as they travel the path of life; ta i tsin da, they shall.
26. Wa-dsu-ta, animal, a living creature; win, one; zhu-i-ga, my body;
a-the, I have made it to be; a-thin he in da, in my life's journey.
27. Ho, fish; zhu-dse, the red; kshe no", the; a, they said.
28. Zhu-i-ga, of it my body; a- the, I have made it to be; a-thin he
i° da, in my life's journey, 33.
29. I-ts'a, causes of death; thin-ge, none; a-thin-he in da, in my life's
journey.
30. Zhu-i-ga, their bodies; the, they make of him; monn-thin, as they
travel the path of life; bi, they; do", when; a, they said, 34,
43, 47.
31. U-non, old age; a bi, spoken of as; i-the, live to see; mon-thin, as
they travel the path of life; ta i tsin da, they shall, 35, 40, 48.
32. Ho, fish; ca-be, the black; ga kshe, this; shki, also; a, they said.
37. To-shnon-ge, Otter; kshe, the lying; no", the; a, they said.
38. E, that; shki do", also; zhiu-i-ga, my body; a-the, I have made
it to be; a-thin he in da, in my life's journey.
486 THE OSAGE TRIBE [BTH. ANN. 36
39. Zhin-ga, the little ones; zhu-i-ga, their bodies; tha, they make of
him; bi, they; do", when; a, they said, 60.
41. Tsi-zhu, the people of the Tsi-zhu division; a, they said.
42. Hon-ga, those of the Hon-ga subdivision; e-thon-ba, the two to
gether; a, they said.
44. I-ts'a, causes of death; thin-ge, none; mon-thin, as they travel
the path of life; ta i tsin da, they shall.
45. Zha-be, beaver; do-ga, the male; kshe, the lying; a, they said.
46. Zhu-i-ga, my body; the, of it I have made it to be; xtsi, verily;
a-ni-ka-shi-ga in da, I as a person, as a people.
49. Thiu-xe, willow; zhin-ga, young, sapling; j>e-thon-ba, seven.
50. Tsi-u-ba-he, at the side of the house; i-sdu-ge, the right; dsi,
there; a, they said.
51. Tha-xu-e, dragged with his teeth; gthi, bringing them home;
i-he-the, he laid them down; ton, as he stood; a, they said, 69,
75, 80, 85, 90, 95.
52. Ga, these; tse, lying in a pile; shki, also; a, they said, 63.
53. Wa-we-a-ga-ckon-the, I have made to represent, or to symbolize
certain things; a-ton he in da, as I stand here.
54. O-don, military honors; e shnon bi non, the things that are spoken
of as; a, they said.
55. I-tha-ga-ckon-the, I have made them to represent, or to symbolize;
xtsi, verily; a-ni-ka-shi-ga, I as a person, as a people; a-ton he
in da, as I stand here.
56. Ni, the river; ki-mon-hon, against the current; dsi, there; xtsi,
verily; a, they said.
57. Ba-btha-btha-xe, pushed the water into ripples or waves; zho°, as
he lay and moved onward; a, they said.
58. Ni, waters; a-ki-tha-zha-ta, the parting of in forked lines; ga
kshe, these; a, they said.
59. U-non, the means of reaching old age; pa-xe in da, I have made
them to be.
61. Wa-kon-da, the gods of the waters; a-ki-tha-zha-ta, to part from
them in forked lines; bi, they; ki-the, cause themselves to;
mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; ta i tsin da, they shall.
62. pin-dse, his tail; ni, the waters; i-ga-po-ki, he struck with making
a cracking noise; on-ha, repeatedly; the, as he pushed forth;
a, they said.
64. Wa-thin-e-cka, without a purpose; a-po-ki, I struck with a noise;
mon-zhi in da, I have not.
65. Mi, the sun; hi-e ge, the settings of; ta, in that direction.
66. Wa-a-ga-po-ki, I send these strokes against the people who dwell
there; the a-the, I send them; a, they said.
67. Ni river; u-ba-shon, the bend of; we-thon-ba, the second; thin-
kshe, the sitting; a, they said.
LAFLESCHE] TRIBAL RITES LITERAL TRANSLATION 487
68. Thiu-xe, willow; ts'a-zhi, that never dies; hon-cka, of no par
ticular size; don,- a; a, they said, 74, 79, 84, 89, 94.
70. Zhin-ga, the little ones; we-tha-wa, use them to count with; mon-
thin, as they travel the path of life; bi, they; don, when; a, they
said, 76, 81, 86, 91, 97.
71. O-don, military honors; gi-4si-ca, counted with accuracy; ki-the-
they shall cause them to be; mon-thin, as they travel the path
of life; ta i tsin da, 77, 82, 87, 92, 98.
73. Ni, river; u-ga-xthi, the bend of; we-tha-bthin, the third; thin,
kshe, the sitting; dsi, there; a, they said.
78. Ni, river; u-ba-shon, the bend of ; we-do-ba, the fourth; thin-kshe
the sitting; dsi, there; a, they said.
83. Ni, river; u-ba-shon, the bend of; we-ca-ton, the fifth; thin-kshe,»
the sitting; dsi, there; a, they said.
88. Ni, river; u-ba-shon, the bend of ; we-sha-pe, the sixth ; thin-kshe,
the sitting; dsi, there; a, they said.
93. Ni, river; u-ba-shon, the bend; we-pe-thon-ba, the seventh; thin-
kshe; the sitting; dsi, there; a, they said.
96. Ga kshe, this one; shki, also; a, they said.
GA-TSIU' GENS
This gens does not recite a wi'-gi-e at this ceremony, but its pres
ence is necessary to represent "an essential part of the general symbolic
scheme. (See reasons given by Wa-xthi'-zhi for the presence of this
gens at the ceremony, p. 101 . See also lines 1 to 20 of the Wa-zha'-zhe
Wa-non wi'-gi-e for possible clue to the derivation of the title, Ga-tsiu,
of this gens, p. 92.)
HON/-GA U-TA.-NON-DSI GENS
(Free translation, p. 102; Osage version, p. 324)
1. He-dsi, at that time and place; xtsi, verily; a, they said; a bin da,
it has been said; tsi, house; ga, in this, 8, 30.
2. Hon-ga, a sacred person; U-ta-non-dsi, the isolated one (the gens
representing the earth); thin-kshe, the sitting; no", the; a, they
said.
3. Ha, O; wi-tsi-go-e, my grandfather; e-gi-a, they said to liim; bi,
they; a, they said.
4. We-ki-k'on, ceremonial article; thon-tse, suitable; thin-ge, none;
a-tha, is; wi-tsi-go-e, my grandfather; e-gi-a, they said to him;
bi, they; a, they said.
5. Ha, O; zhin-ga, little one; e, to say; tsi-the, he hastened; a, they
said.
6. We-ki-k'on, ceremonial article; thon-tse, suitable; thin-ge, none;
e-she, dott, you say; a, they said.
488 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
7. We-ki-k'on, ceremonial article, symbol; thon-tse, suitable; mi-kshe
in da, I who sit here.
9. Tsi, house; zhin-ga, little; win, one; i-tse-the, he had erected; ton,
as he stood; a, they said.
10. Wa-thin-e-cka, without a purpose; i-tse-a-tha, I have erected,
this house; mon-zhi in da, I have not, 12.
11. Wa-dsu-ta, animals; f>a, heads; u-thi-xon, in which to break;
i-tse-a-the in da, I have erected it.
12. Tse-xo-be, a spider; wa-ga-xe, a picture of, a symbol of; in da,
it is.
14. I-tha-thu-ce, to take into, as into a snare; xtsi, verily; i-tse-a-the
in da, I have erected it.
15. Wa-dsu-ta, animals; be, whoever, whichever one; zhin-ga, little
ones; i-ta i shki don, they may belong; a, they said.
16. U-ki-on-the, throw themselves into it, to be ensnared; mon-thin,
as they travel the path of life; ta i tsin da, they shall.
17. Zhin-ga, the little ones; wa-dsu-ta, animals; i-hi-thon-be, make
them to appear by the use of its power; tha, they make of it ;
bi, they; don, when; shki, and; a, they said.
18. U-ga-con-thin, in which the morrow comes, the break of day;
xtsi, verily; thin-ge, none, before it comes; a, they said, 26.
19. Wa-dsu-ta, animals; gi-hi-thon-be, shall appear for them; mon-
thin, as they travel the path of life; ta i tsin da, they shall, 21.
20. U-pa-ce, in which the evening comes; thon dsi, then and there;
shki, also; a, they said, 28.
22. Wa-dsu-ta, animal; wa-non, the ancient one, the oldest, the
buffalo bull; kshe, that lies, upon the earth; a, they said.
23. Ga, that one; kshe, lying; shki, also; a, they said, 46, 57, 66.
24. Wa-dsu-ta, animals; i-hi-thon-be, make them to appear by the
use of its power; the, make of it; mon-thin, as they travel the
path of life; ta i tsin da, they shall.
25. Wa-dsu-ta, animals; wa-bin, blood; a, they said.
27. Wa-bin, blood; gi-tse-ga, theirs renew or refresh; ki-the, they
shall cause themselves to; mon-thin, as they travel the path of
life; ta bin da, they shall.
29. Wa-dsu-ta, animals; wa-bin, blood; i-gi-tse-ga, with it their own
blood renew, refresh; mon-thin, as they travel the path of life;
ta i tsin da, they shall.
31. We-ki-k'on, ceremonial articles, symbols; thou-tse, suitable; ga,
non, these; non-zhin da, stand.
32. We-ts'a-da-pa, the short snake (the spreading adder); kshe, the
lying; non, the; a, they said.
33. Zhin-ga, the little ones; we-ki-k'on, ceremonial articles; the, they
make of; mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; ta i tsin da,
they shall, 43, 47, 54.
LAFLESCHE] TRIBAL RITES LITERAL TRANSLATION 489
34. Xa-dse, grasses; ba-tse, bunches; xtsi, verily; ge, in the midst
of; dsi, there; a, they said.
35. Pa, his head; thi-hon, he lifted ; tsi-the, quickly; don, did: a, they
said, 45, 56.
36. Zhin-ga, the little ones; wa-non-xe, spirits; i-thi-shton, have
already become; kshe, lying; shki don, although they may
have; a, they said.
37. On-thon-ki-pa-non-xe-cka, they shall by using me bring themselves
back to consciousness; mon-thin, as they travel the path of life;
ta i tsin da, they shall.
38. Zhin-ga, the little ones; zlio-i-ga, their bodies; on-tha, they make
of me; bi, they; don, when; a, they said, 83.
39. Hon-ba, the days; u-ca-ki-ba, the divisions of; do-ba, the four,
50, 60, 84.
40. U-hi, to reach and to enter; ki-the, cause themselves to; mon-
thin, as they travel the path of life: ta i tsi" da, they shall, 51,
61, 85, 87.
41. Hon-a-don, what; we-ki-k'on, ceremonial articles; tha, they make
of; bi, they; gon non, shall; shki, and; a hin a, interrogative
particles.
42. We-ts'a, snake; ci-ci-e, spotted with yellow; stse-dse, long; kshe,
the lying; non, the; a, they said.
44. Xa-dse, grasses; xtsi, verily; ge, amongst; dsi, there; a, they
said, 55, 64.
46. Ga, that; kshe, the lying; shki, also; a, they said, 57, 66.
49. On-thon-non-xe-cka, by the use of my strength they shall recover
consciousness; mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; ta i
tsin da, they shall, 59, 82.
53. We-ts'a-ca-be, the black-snake; kshe, lying; non, the; a, they
said.
58. Zhin-ga, the little ones; wa-non-xe, spirits; i-thi-shton, have
already become; xtsi, verily; bi, they; shki don, although; a,
they said, 67.
63. We-ts'a-ton-ga, the great snake, trope for the rattlesnake. Com
mon name for that snake is she'-ki; kshe, the lying; non, the;
a, they said, 69.
65. (^u-the, making a buzzing sound; tsi-gthe, heard in the distance;
kshe, lying; a, they said.
68. On-thon-ki-gthi-non-xe cka, by clinging to me and using my
strength they shall recover their consciousness; mon-thin, as
they travel the path of life; ta i tsin da, they shall.
70. Thi-xo-e, making a sound like the winds; on-ha-ha-e, repeatedly;
kshe, lying; a, they said.
71. U-ci-gthe, at the foot (of the patient); tse, the; a, they said.
490 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
72. Thi-k'a-xe, he sounded his rattles; on-ha-ha-e, repeatedly; ton,
stood; a, they said.
73. Pa u-gthe, at the head; ta ha, toward.
74. Thi-k'ak'a-xe, repeatedly sounding his rattles; ton, he stood; a,
they said, 76, 78, 80.
75. Ta-dse, winds; ga-xpa, the east; dsi, there; a, they said.
77. Ta-dse, winds; mon-ha, west; dsi, there; a, they said.
79. Ta-dse, winds; ba-con, from the cedars, the north; dsi, there; a,
they said.
86. Hon-ba, the days; tha-gthin, peaceful and beautiful; shki, and;
a, they said.
THE HON'-GA SUBDIVISION
HON'-OA A-HIU-TON GENS
(Free translation, p. 104; Osage version, p. 326)
1. He-dsi, at that time and place; xtsi, verily; a, they said; a bin da,
it has been said; tsi, house; ga, in this.
2. Hon-ga, a sacred person; u-dse-the, fireplaces; pe-thon-ba, seven;
ni-ka-shi-ga, a people; ba don, they were; a, they said.
3. Hon-ga, the sacred person; a-hiu-ton, who possesses wings; thin-
kshe, the sitting; non, the; a, they said.
4. Ha, O; wi-tsi-go-e, my grandfather; e-gi-a, they said to him; bi,
they; a, they said.
5. Zhin-ga, the little ones; we-ki-k'on, ceremonial articles, symbol;
tha, of which to make; ba, they; thon-tse, suitable; thin-ge,
none; a-tha, there is; wi-tsi-go-e, my grandfather; e-gi-a, they
said to him; bi, they; a, they said.
7. We-ki-k'on, symbol; thon-tse, suitable; thin-ge, none; e-she do",
you have said; a, they said.
8. We-ki-k'on, symbol; thon-tse, suitable; mi-kshe in da, I am, I who
sit here.
9. Wa-zhin-ga, the bird; wa-tha-xthi, stains, anger, evil disposition;
thin-ge, that has none; thin-kshe, the sitting; non, the; a, they
said.
10. Zhu-i-ga, my body; the, I have made of it; xtsi, verily; a-ni-ka-
shi-ga, I as a person, as a people; mi-kshe in da, I who sit here.
11. Wa-kon-da, the gods; u-ton-ba-bi, watched over, and cared for
by them; mi-kshe in da, I am, I who sit here.
12. Zhin-ga, the little ones; zhu-i-ga, their bodies; on-tha, they make
of me; bi, they; don, when; a, they said, 25, 29, 33.
13. Wa-kon-da, the gods; u-ton-ba bi, watch over them and care for
them; ki-the, cause themselves to be; mon-thin, as they travel
the path of life; ta i tsin da, they shall.
14. U-non, the means of reaching old age; on-gi-tha, they make of
me; ba, they; thon-tse, fit, suitable; mi-kshe in da, I am, I
who sit here.
LAFLESCHE] TRIBAL RITES LITERAL TRANSLATION 491
15. £i-ha, the skin of my feet; ga, this that you see; thin-kshe, the
sitting; shki, also; a, they said.
16. U-non, the means of reaching old age; a-gi-the, I have made it
to he; a-thin he, in da, in my life's journey.
17. Zhin-ga, the little ones; u-non, the means of reaching old age;
o"-tha, they make of me; bi, they; do", when; shki, and; a,
they said.
18. U-non, old age; a bi, spoken of as; i-the, live to see; ki-the, cause
themselves to; mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; ta i
tsi" da, they shall.
19. (^i-ha, the skin of my feet; u-sha-be, wherein the color is dark;
ga, this, behold; thin-kshe, the sitting; shki, also; a, they said.
20. Non-xthe, charcoal, for ceremonial use or as a symbol; a-gi-the,
I have made it to be; a-thin he in da, in my life's journey, 24,
28, 32.
21. Zhi"-ga, the little ones; noVxthe, charcoal; gi-the, they make of
it: mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; bi, they; don, when;
a, they said.
22. NoVxthe, charcoal; gi-a-da-xe, sink readily, into the skin (this
has reference to tattooing); ki-the, cause it to be; mon-thin, as
they travel the path of life; ^& i tsi" da, they shall.
23. Pa-zhu-zhe, the tip of my nose; i-ta-xe, the tip; sha-be, the dark
part; ga, this; thin-kshe, the sitting; shki, also; a, they said.
27. Zhu-i-ga, my body; ca-be, the black; ga, this; kshe, lying; shki,
also; a, they said.
31. In-be, my tail; i-ta-xe, the tip; sha-be, the dark part; ga, this;
thi°-kshe, the sitting; shki, also; a, they said.
WA-JJA'-BE-TO" GENS
(Free translation, p. 105; Osagc version, p. 327)
1. He-dsi, at that time and place; xtsi, verily; a, they said; a bin
da, it has been said; tsi, house; ga, in this, 20, 28, 45, 49.
2. Hon-ga, the Hon-ga subdivision; u-dse-the, fireplaces; pe-thon-ba,
seven; ni-ka-shi-ga, a people; ba, they; do", were; a, they said.
3. Wa-ca-be-ton, he who possesses the Black Bear; thin-kshe, the
sitting; non, the; a, they said.
4. Ha, O; wi-tsi-go-e, my grandfather; e-gi-a, they said to him; bi,
they; a, they said, 21, 47.
5. Zhin-ga, the little ones; zhu-i-ga, their bodies; tha, of which to
make; bi, they; thin-ge, there is none; a-tha, is; wi-tsi-go-e,
my grandfather; e-gia, they said to him; bi, they; a, they said,
22, 48.
6. Ha, O; zhin-ga, little ones; e, to say; tsi-the, he hastened to say;
a. thev said.
492 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 30
7. Zhin-ga, the little ones; zhu-i-ga, their bodies; tha, of which to
make; bi, they; thin-ge, there is none; e-she don, you say; a,
they said.
8. Zhin-ga, the little ones; zhu-i-ga, their bodies; o"-tha, they make
of me; ba, they; thon-tse, fit or suitable; mi-kshe in da, I am,
I who sit here, 23.
9. Non-xthe, charcoal; on-gi-tha, they make of me; ba, they; thon-
tse, suitable; mi-kshe i" da, I am, I who sit here.
10. (^i-ha, skin of the feet; u-sha-be, that is dark in color; ga, this
that you see; thin-kshe, the sitting; shki, also; a, they said,
29, 50.
1 1 . Non-xthe, charcoal; a-gi-the, I have made it to be; a-thi" he in da,
in my life's journey, 13, 17, 30, 34, 38, 42, 51, 55.
12. Pa-zhu-zhe, nose; i-ta-xe, the tip of; sha-be, the dark; ga, this;
thiVkshe, the sitting; shki, also; a, they said, 33, 54.
14. Zhin-ga, the little ones; non-xthe, charcoal; gi-the, they make of
it; mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; bi, they; do", when;
a, they said, 18, 31, 52.
15. Non-xthe, charcoal; gi-a-da-xe, sink into their skin; ki-the, they
shall cause it to; mon-thin, as they travel the path of life;
ta i tsin da, they shall, 19, 32 ,36, 40, 44, 53, 57.
16. Zhu-i-ga, my body; ca-be, black; ga, this; ge, in all its parts;
shki, also; a, they said.
24. In-gthon-ga, puma; do-ga, the male; kshe, the lying; a, they said.
25. Zhu-i-ga, my body; the, of it I have made it to be; xtsi, verily;
a-ni-ka-shi-ga, I as a person, as a people; mi-kshe in da, I who
sit here, 27.
26. Wa-kon-da, the god; hon-ba don, of day; thin-kshe, the sitting;
a, they say.
35. Zhin-ga, the little ones; zhu-i-ga, their bodies; on-tha, they make
of me; bi, they; don, when; a, they said, 39, 43, 56, 58, 62, 66.
37. Non-ta, ears; i-ta-xe, the tips of; sha-be, the dark; ga, this; thin-
kshe, the sitting; shki, also; a, they said.
41. ^in-dse, tail; i-ta-xe, the tip of; sha-be, dark; ga, this; thi"-kshe,
the sitting; shki, also; a, they said.
46. Mi-xa-cka, white swan: to"-ga, the great; thin-kshe, the sitting;
no", the; a, they said.
59. Hon-ba, day; he-be, a fraction of, a part of; a, they said.
60. Dse-don, great lake; go-da, on the farther side of; kon-ha, on the
edge or the border of; dsi, there; xtsi, verily; a, they said.
61. Ga-ha-ha, swinging up and down; a-hi-gthin, I arrive at and sit;
a-thin he, in my life's journey; no" in da, habitually.
63. A-hiu-ha, their arms; ca-gi, strong; ki-the, cause to become;
mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; ta i tsi" da, they shall.
LAFfcEscHE] TRIBAL RITES LITERAL TRANSLATION 493
64. Wa-dsu-ta, animals; shon-e-gon, all of them together; bi, they;
don, when; a, they said.
65. Xi on-won-ta-thin, become breathless sooner than I; bi, they;
a-thin he, in da, in my life's journey.
67. Wa-dsu-ta, ajiimnls; shon-e-gon, all of them together; xtsi,
verily; a, they said.
68. Ni u-ta-thin, shall become exhausted, breathless sooner than
they; bi, they; ki-the, shall cause themselves to be stronger
than they; mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; ta i tsi° da,
they shall.
IN-GTHON/-GA GENS
(Free translation, p. 107; Osage version, p. 329)
1. He-dsi, at that time and place; xtsi, verily; a, they said; a bin da,
it has been said; tsi, house; ga, in this, 32, 48, 63, 81, 101, 106,
109, 135, 150, 169.
2. Hon-ga, the Hon-ga subdivision; u-dse-the, fireplaces; pe-thon-ba,
seven; ni-ka-shi-ga, a people; ba, they; don, were; a, they
said, 102.
3. In-gthon-ga, the puma; zhu-i-ga, his body; the, had made of; ton,
standing, 103.
4. Ha, O; wi-^si-go-e, my grandfather; e-gi-a, said to him; bi, they;
a, they said, 104.
5. We-ki-k'on, symbol; thon-tse, suitable; thin-ge a-tha, there is
none; wi-tsi-go-e, my grandfather; e-gi-a, said to him; bi, they;
a, they said, 105.
6. Ha, O; zhin-ga, little ones; e, to say; tsi-thc, he hastened; a, they
said.
7. We-ki-k'on, symbol; thon-tse, suitable; thia-ge, there is none;
e-she, don, you have said, 107.
8. We-ki-k'on, a symbol; thon-tse, suitable; a-ton he in da, I am, I
who stand here.
9. In-gthon-ga, of the puma; do-ga, the male; kshe, lying; a, they
said.
10. Zhu-i-ga, my body; the, I have made it to be; a-ni-ka-shi-ga, I
as a person, as a people; a-ton-he in da, I who stand here.
11. Wa-zhi", courage; on-woD-ta-thin, none equal to me; bi, they;
a-thin-he in da, in my life's journey.
12. Wa-kon-da, the god; hon-ba don, of day; thin-kshe, the sitting;
a. they said. •
13. I-bi-con-dse, pressed closely against him; xtsi, verily; a-ni-ka-
shi-ga i" da, I as a person, as a people, 38.
14. Zhin-ga, the little ones; zhu-i-ga, their bodies; on-tha, they make
of me; bi, they; don, when; a, they said, 21, 25, 29, 45, 55, 60,
69, 74, 79, 84, 88.
494 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
15. I-ts'a, causes of death; thin-ge, none; mon-thin, as they travel in
the path of life; ta i tsin da, they shall.
16. 'In, rock or boulder; zhu-dse, the red; thin-kshe, the sitting; a,
they said, 18.
17. I-tha-thu-ce, I have made it (the sun) to take; xtsi, verily; a-ni-
ka-shi-ga in da, I as a person, as a people. (This means that
he has made the red boulder to symbolize the sun.) 36, 66, 68.
19. Wa-kon-da, the gods; e-shki don, even they; a, they said, 23, 27,
30, 41, 43, 46, 56, 58, 61, 70, 72, 75, 77, 82, 85.
20. O-ta-kshin, stumble over me; bi, they; a-thin-he in da, in my
life's journey.
22. A-ta-kshin, to stumble over themselves; bi, they; ki-the, cause
themselves to be; mon-thin, as they travel the path of life;
ta i tsin da, they shall, 42, 57, 71.
24. On-ki-tha-zha-ta, pass by me in forked lines; bi, they; a-thin-he
in da, in my life's journey, 44, 59, 73.
26. Wa-kon-da, the gods; a-ki-tha-zha-ta, pass around them in forked
lines; bi, they; ki-the, cause themselves to; mon-thin, as they
travel the path of life; ta i tsin da, they shall.
28. In-dse, in the face; on-won-ki-a-ta, stare at me rudely; thi°-ge,
in da, none of them, 83.
31. In-dse, their faces; u-ki-a-ta, stare at them rudely; ba zhi, they
not; ki-the, cause themselves to; mo"-thin, as they travel the
path of life; ta i tsin da, they shall, 86.
33. Wa-ca-be, the black bear; u-ca-ka, blemish, spots; thin-ge, hav
ing none; kshe, the lying; a, they said.
34. Zhu-i-ga, of it my body; the, I have made; xtsi, verity; a-ni-ka-
shi-ga, in da, I as a person, as a people, 50, 52, 54.
35. Wa-kon-da, the god; hon don, of night; thin-kshe, the sitting; a,
they said, 51.
37. 'In, boulder; ca-be, the black; thin-ks, he, the sitting; a, they said,
39.
40. Zhin-ga, the little ones; zhu-i-ga, their bodies; the, they make of;
mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; bi, they; do", when;
a, they said.
47. A-ki-tha-zha-ta, to pass around them in forked lines; bi, they;
ki-the, cause themsehres to; mon-thin, as they travel the path
of life; ta i tsin da, they shall, 62, 76.
49. Mi-xa-cka, the white swan; ton-ga, the great; thin-kshe, the sit
ting; non, the; a, they said.
53. 'In-zhu-cka, the white boulder; thin-kshe, the sitting; no", the;
a, they said.
64. O-pxon, elk; do-ga, the male; kshe, the lying; non, the; a, they
said.
65. 'In-zhu-ci, the yellow boulder; thin-kshe, the sitting; a, the,y said.
LA Fi-EsoiiK] TRIBAL, RITES LITERAL, TRANSLATION 495
67. Wa-tse, star; mi-ga, the female; thin-kshe, the sitting; a, they
said.
78. Be, who of them, none of them; hi, teeth; on-gtha, set upon me
in anger; mon-zhi, in da, me not.
80. Be, none of them; hi, their teeth; a-gtha, set upon them in anger;
ba, zhi, they not; ki-the, cause themselves to; mon-thin, as they
travel the path of life; t& i tsin da, they shall, 97.
87. Ts'e, to die; wa-^se-xi, difficult; mi-kshe in da, I am, I who sit
here.
89. Ts'e, to die; wa-tse-xi, difficult; ki-the, cause themselves to bej
mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; ta i tsin da, they shall,
96.
90. Hon-ba, the days; u-ca-ki-ba, the divisions of; do-ba, the four,
99, 178.
91. U-hi, to reach and to enter; ki-the, cause themselves to; mon-
thin, as they travel the path of life; ta i tsin da, they shall,
100, 179.
92. Wa-zha-zhe, the people of the Wa-zha-zhe subdivision; a, they
said, 132, 154, 174.
93. Tsi-zhu, the Tsi-zhu division; e-thon-ba, the two together, 133,
155, 175.
94. Zhu-i-ga, their bodies; on-the, they make of me; mon-thin, as
they travel the path of life; ta i tsi" da, they shall.
95. Zhu-i-ga, their bodies; on-the, they make of me; mo"-thin, as
they travel the path of life; bi, they; don, when; a, they said.
98. U-non, old age; a bi, spoken of as; shki, and; i-the, live to see;
ki-the, cause themselves to; mon-thin, as they travel the path
of life; ta i tsin da, they shall, 160, 168, 173, 177.
108. O-ton-be, a search; i>a-xe, I make; ta, shall; mi-kshe, I who sit
here; e, to say; tsi-the, he hastened; a, they said.
110. Thu-e, in haste; xtsi, verily; ci-thu-ce, took footsteps, strode
away; the, went forth; don, did; a, they said, 121.
111. Dse, lake; kon-ha, margin; dsi, there; xtsi, verily; a, they said,
122.
112. (^in, root of the sagittaria; thin-kshe, the sitting; no", the; a,
they said.
113. O-ga-ton-tha, sent rolling upon the ground; tsi-the, with a quick
motion; to", as he stood; a, they said.
114. E-dsi, then and there; xtsi, verily; a-thin, carrying it with him;
gthi-e, came home; do", and; a, they said, 125, 144.
115. The, this; ho", how; wi-zhin-the, my elder brothers; e, saying;
a-gthi, having come home; non-zhin, he stood; a, they said, 126.
116. I-u-tha-btho"-ce, in their mouths munched it; a-tsi-a-tha,
hastily; ba, they; don, and; a, they said, 127.
496 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
117. Non-bthe, as food; thon-ta, suitable; zhi a, it is not; wi-con-ga,
my younger brother; e-gi-a, they said to him; bi, they; a,
they said.
118. E-zhi-cka, not the kind; u-ton-ga, not quite; wi-con-ga, my
younger brother; e-gi-a, they said to him; bi, they; a, they
said.
119. E, it is true; thon-zha, nevertheless.
120. We-ki-k'on, ceremonial article; on-the, we make of it; on-mon-
thin, as we travel the path of life; ta i tse a, we shall; wi-con-ga.
my younger brother; e-gi-a, they said to him; bi, they; a,
they said.
122. Dse, lake; u-ckon-cka, in the center of; dsi, there; xtsi, verily;
a, they said.
123. Tse-wa-the, root of the water-chinkapin; kshe, the lying; non,
the; a, they said.
124. N"on-ci-ge, lifting or kicking aside with the foot; tsi-the, with a
quick movement; ton, as he stood; a, they said.
128. Ba-ce-ni, milk; e-gon, like; tha-dsu-zhe, squirted out as they
pressed the root between their teeth; the-tha, they sent out;
bi, they; a, they said, 146.
129. Zhin-ga, the little ones; non-bthe, as food; tha, they make of it;
ba, they; thon-tse a, it is suitable; wi-9On-ga, my younger
brothers; e-gi-a, said to him; bi, they; a, they said.
130. We-ki-k'on, for general use as food; thon-tse, it is suitable;
a-ka, it is; wi-con-ga, my younger brother; e-gi-a, they said to
him; bi, they; a, they said.
131. Zhi"-ge, the little ones; non-bthe, food; the, they make of it;
mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; ta i tsin da, they
shall, 138, 147, 156, 166.
134. Non-bthe, food; the, make of it; mon-thin, as they travel the
path of life; ta i tsin da, they shall.
136. Wa-dsu-ta, animal; shin-to-zhin-ga, the young male; kshe, the
lying; a, they said.
137. E-ki-tho°-ba, couple it with; xtsi, verily; ou-ga-xe, we make it
to be; ta bi a, we shall; wi-con-ga, my younger brothers;
e-ki-a, said to one another; bi, they; a, they said.
139. Non-bthe, food; the, they make of it; mon-thin, as they travel
the path of life; bi, they; don, when; a, they said, 148, 157,
159, 167, 176.
140. A-dsu-ta, their limbs; i-ga-pi-ge, by the use of these foods to
stretch in growth ; ki-the, cause themselves to ; mon-thin, as
they travel the path of life; ta i tsin da, they shall, 149, 158.
141. Dse, lake; go-da, on the farther side; kon-ha, border, margin;
dsi, there; xtsi, verily; a, they said, 161.
I.AFLESCHE] TRIBAL KITES LITERAL TRANSLATION 497
142. Do, the wild potato; thin-kshe, the sitting; no", the; a, they
said,
143. U-ga-ton-tha, sent it rolling upon the ground; a-tsia-tha, they
proceeded to; ba, they; don, and, 164.
145. She, that; e shnon, is the very thing; u-tha-dse, you have been
searching for; tha thin-she a, in your wanderings; wi-con-ga,
my younger brother; e-gi-a, they said to him ; bi, they; a, they
said.
151. Ta, the deer; he, horns; sha-be; dark, kshe, the lying; no", the;
a, they said.
152. I-tha-thu-ce, by its use to draw, to attract; on-ga-xe, we make;
tabi a, we shall; wi-con-ga, my younger brothers; e-ki-a, they
said to one another; bi, they; a, they said, 171.
153. I-tha-thu-ce, by its use to draw, to attract; on-ga-xa, we make
it to; bi, we; don, when; a, they said.
162. U-cu, a low-land forest, a forest in the bend of a river; u-gthon,
put into the bend; xtsi, verily; ge, in such a place; dsi, there;
a, they said.
163. Hon-bthin-cu, bean-seed, ground-bean; thin-kshe, the sitting;
non, the; a, they said.
165. Ga, this, the ground-bean; thin-kshe, the sitting; a, they said.
170. ^iu-ka, the turkey; ton-ga, the great; thin-kshe, the sitting;
non, the; a, they said.
172. Zhin-ga, the little ones; non-bthe, food; tha, they make of it;
bi, they; do", when; shki, and; a, they said.
OX-PXON (ELK) GENS
(Free translation, p. 112; Osage version, p. 334)
1. He-dsi, at that time and place; xtsi, verily; a, they said; a bin da,
it has been said; %si, house; ga, in this.
2. Hon-ga, the Ho"-ga subdivision; u-dse-the, fireplaces; pe-thon-ba,
seven; ni-ka-shi-ga, a people; ba, they; don, were; a, they said.
3. In-gthon-ga, puma; zhu-i-ga, his body; the, he had made of;
ton, standing; a, they said.
4. Ha, O; wi-con-ga, my younger brother; e-gi-a, they said to him;
bi, they; a, they said, 10.
5. We-ki-k'on, symbol; thon-tse, suitable; thin-ge a-tha, there is
none; wi-con-ga, my younger brother; e-gi-a, they said to him ;
bi, they; a, they said.
6. Thu-e, in haste; xtsi, verily; ci-thu-ce, took footsteps, went forth;
the, went forth; do", and.
7. O-pxon, elk; do-ga, the male; to", standing; non, the; a, they
said, 18.
2786—21 32
498 THE OSAGE TRIBE [EIH. ANN. 36
8. Tho, presence; ton, standing; hi, having arrived there; non, zhin,
they paused, stood; bi, they; a, they said.
9. Tho-e, in haste; xtsi, verily; gi-e, he returned; don, and; a, they
said.
11. Ni-ka, a man; win, one; e-dsi, there, at a certain place; a-ka, is;
wi-zhin-the, my elder brothers; e, saying; a-gthi, having
returned; non-shin, stood; a, they said.
12. Ha, O; wi-con-ga, my younger brothers; e-ki-a, they said to one
another; bi, they; a, they said.
13. Ni-ka, man; be, whoever; the, living, moving; shki don, he may
be; a, they said.
14. Wa-non-xe, spirits; a-dsi, there, to their abode; the, to go; on-the,
we, cause him to; ta bi a, we shall; wi-con-ge, my younger
brothers; e-ki-a, they said to one another; bi, they; a, they
said.
15. E-ta, thitherward, toward the man; pa-mo°-gthe, with heads
inclined forward; xtsi, verily; a, they said.
16. We-a-ba-cu, the index finger; iu-gtha-zhu-zhu-the, moistening in
his mouth; tsi-the, he hastened; thin-kshe, as he sat; a, they
said.
17. Thu-e, in haste; xtsi, verily; ci-thu-ca, they took footsteps, went
forth; ba, they; do", and.
18. O-pxon, the elk; do-ga, the male; to", standing; no", the; a, they
said.
19. E-ta, there, at the place where stood the elk; pa-mon-gthe, with
heads inclined toward him; xtsi, verily; hi, having arrived
there; non, zhin, they stood; bi, they; don, when; a, they said.
20. Ha, O; wi-zhin-the, my elder brothers; e, to say; tsi-the, he (the
elk), hastened; a, they said.
21. Hon-ga, a sacred person; bthin a, I am; wi-zhin-the, my elder
brothers; e, saying; to°, he stood; a, they said.
22. O-pxon-ton-ga, The-Great-Elk; wi, I am; a-ton he a, I who stand
here; wi-zhin-the, my elder brothers; e, saying; ton, he stood;
a, they said.
23. E-dsi, there, at any place, or at any important movement; zhi,
not present; the, moving; thin-ge, none; xtsi, verily; a-ni-ka-
shi-ga, I am such a person; wi-zhin-the, my elder brothers; e,
saying; ton, he stood; a, they said.
24. We-ki-k'on, a symbol; thon-tse, suitable; a-ton he a, I am, I who
stand here; e, saying; ton, standing; a, they said.
25. O-pxon-to"-ga, The-Great-Elk; shki, and; a, they said.
26. Zha-zhe, name; a-ki-ton, I have made to be mine; a-ton he a, I
who stand here; wi-zhin-the, my elder brothers; e, saying; ton,
he stood ; a, they said.
LAFLESCHE] TRIBAL KITES LITERAL TRANSLATION 499
28. We-ki-k'on, a symbol; thon-tse, suitable for; a-ton he in da, I am,
I who stand here.
29. Zhin-ga, the little ones; wa-dsu-ta, animals; i-hi-thon-be, the
instrument with which to make them appear; on-tha, they
make of me; bi, they; do", when; shki, and; a, they said.
30. Wa-dsu-ta, animals; gi-hi-thon-be, appear for them; mon-thin, as
they travel the path of Me; ta i tsin da, they shall.
32. U-k'on, to perform a mysterious act; tsi-the, he proceeded; to",
as he stood; a, they said.
33. Ta-dse, the four winds; e-non-ha, to each one.
34. Mon-ki-cin-dse, he threw himself upon the earth; tsi-the, he pro
ceeded; ton, as he stood; a, they said, 36.
35. Ta-dse, the wind; ga-xpa, of the east; dsi, there, in the midst of:
a, they said.
37. Hon-ba, the day; tha-gthi", calm, peaceful; i-he-the, he made it
to lie down; to", as he stood; a, they said.
38. Ta-dse, the wind; ba-con, of the north; dsi-there, in the midst of;
a, they said.
39. Mon-ki-cin-dse, threw himself upon the earth; tsi-the, he pro
ceeded to; do", when; a, they said, 42, 46, 51, 59.
40. Mon-xe, the heavens; ha-xpe-gthe, tse e-gon, as though touched
with gentle hands became gentle and peaceful; i-he-the, he
made it to lie in this peaceful state; to", as he stood; a, they
said.
41. Ta-dse, the winds; mon-ha, of the west; dsi, there, in the midst
of; a, they said.
43. Wa-kon-da, and the god above (the overarching heaven).
44. U-xthi, anger, violence; thin-ge, none, cleansed of; i-he-the, he
made to lie; to", as he stood; a, they said, 48.
45. Ta-dse, the winds; a-k'a, of the south; dsi, there, in the midst
of; a, they said.
47. Mon-zhon, and the earth; shon-e-gon, in all its parts; xtsi, verily;
a, they said.
50. We-ki-k'on, a symbol; thon-tse, suitable; a-ton he in da, I am,
I who stand here.
52. Hin, his hairs; u-bi-bti-dse, he scattered upon the earth over which
he had rolled himself; i-he-the, he made them (the hairs) to lie;
to", as he stood; a, they said.
53. Ga tse, these, hairs; shki, also; a, they said.
54. Wa-dsu-ta, the animals; i-hi-thon-be, the means of making them
to appear; p.a-xe, in da, I make them to be.
55. Xa-dse, grass; win, one; a, they said.
56. Wa-dsu-ta, animals; i-hi-thon-be, as the means of making them
to appear; wi-kchi-xe, in da, I have made them (the grasses)
for you.
500 THE OS AGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
57. Zhin-ga, for the little ones; wa-dsu-ta, the animals; gi-hi-thon-be,
appear for them in the midst of the grasses; mon-thin, as they
(the little ones) travel the path of life; ta i tsin da, they shall,
72, 77, 88, 96, 101, 104, 106.
60. Go-da, ahead; jia-gthe, placing his head, facing; i-non-zhin, ad
vanced toward and stood; ton, standing; a, they said.
61. Ni-dse, buttock; ta-be, ball; ga, these; thin-kshe, the sitting;
shki, also; a, they said.
62. Ton-dse, earth; da-pa, rounded, the hills; e, non bi non, that are
spoken of as.
63. Shon, all; xtsi, verily; pa-xe, in da, I have made, 67, 70, 75, 80, 94.
64. Ton-dse, earth, the hills; win, one; wa-dsu-ta, animals; gi-hi-thon-
be, appear for them; mon-thin- as they travel the path of life;
ta i tsin da, they shall.
65. Thi-u-ba-he, the side of the body; i-sdu-ge, the right; ga kshe,
this; a, they said.
66. Ton-dse, earth, the level; e non bi non, that is spoken of as; a, the}>-
said.
68. Non-ka on-he, the ridge of the back, the spine; ga kshe, this; a,
they said.
69. A-thin, a ridge; win, one; she kshe, behold, there lies; e non bi
non, spoken of as; a, they said.
71. A-thin, a ridge; win, one of the little ones; gi-ta-pe, approach;
mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; bi, they (the little
ones); do°, when; shki, and; a, they said.
73. Ta-hi, the neck; u-k'a-be, curved inwardly; ga tse, this; shki,
also; a, they said.
74. A-thin, a ridge; u-k'a-be, curved inwardly, a gap; e non bi non,
spoken of as; a, they said.
76. A-thin, a ridge; u-k'a-be, a gap of; win, one, any one of the little
ones; gi-ta-pe, approach; mon-thin, as they travel the path of
life; bi, they; don, when; shki, and.
78. Pa, the nose; pa-ci, the tip of; ga tse, this; shki, also; a, they said.
79. A-thin, a ridge; pa-ci, a peak arising therefrom; win, one; she tse,
behold there stands; e non bi non, spoken of as; a, they said.
81. A-thin, a ridge; pa-ci, a peak arising therefrom; win, one of the
little ones; gi-ta-pe, approach; mon-thin, as they travel the
path of life; bi, they; don, when; shki, and; a, they said.
82. A-thin, a ridge; pa-pi, a peak arising therefrom; win, one of the
little ones; gi-hi-tho"-be, appear for them; mon-thin, as they
travel the path of life; ta i tsin da, they shall.
83. He, horns; ga-xa, the branches of; u-dse, the bases of; ga, these;
thin-kshe, the sitting; shki, also; a, they said.
I.AFLBSCHB] TRIBAL, RITES LITERAL TRANSLATION 501
84. 'In, rocks; ca-ka, loose and scattered; e non bi non, spoken of as;
a, they said.
85. 'In, rocks; ca-ka, the loose and scattered; win, one of the little
ones; wa-dsu-ta, animals; gi-hi-thon-be, appear for them;
mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; ta i tsin da, they shall.
86. He, horn; ga-xa, the branch of; u-hon-ge, at the end; ga kshe,
this; a, they said.
87. Ga-xa, a branch, rivulet; zhin-ga, a small; win, one; a, they said.
89. He, horn; ga-xa, branch of; u-wa-ton, the next one; ga kshe,
this; a, they said.
90. Wa-tsi-shka, a creek; e no" bi non, spoken of as; a, they said.
91. Wa-tsi-shka, creek; win, one of the little ones; wa-dsu-ta,
animals; gi-hi-thon-be, appear for them; mon-thin, as they
travel the path of life; ta i tsin da, they shall.
92. He, horn; ga-xa, the branch of; u-gthon-the, the large parts of;
ga kshe, these; a, they said.
93. (t\>n-con-ga, the large streams dotted here and there with forests;
win, one; e non bi non, spoken of as; a, they said.
95. ^on-9on-ga, a stream such as this; win, one of the little ones;
gi-ta-pe, approach; mon-thin, as they travel the path of life;
bi, they; don, when; shki, and; a, they said.
97. He, horns; ga-xa, the branches of; u-gthon-the, the largest parts
of; kshe, the; shki, also; a, they said.
98. Ga-xa, branches; gthon-the, the largest; ga kshe, this; a, they
said.
99. Wa-dsu-ta, animals; i-hi-thon-be, the means of making them
to appear; jja-xe in da, I have made them to be.
100. Ga-xa, a branch ; win, anyone of the little ones; gi-ta-pe, ap
proach; mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; bi, they;
don, when; shki, and; a, they said.
102. Zhin-ga, the little ones; ta-bthe, to hunt for the animals; tha,
they go forth; bi, they; do", when; shki, and; a, they said.
103. U-ga-9On-thin, the morrow, the dawn; xtsi, verily; thin-ge, while
yet there is none; a, they said.
105. U-pa-ce, that part of the day in which comes the evening;
thon-dsi, at that time; shki, also; a, they said.
107. Wa-zha-zhe, the Wa-zha-zhe subdivision, the people of; a, they
said.
108. Tsi-zhu, the Tsi-zhu division, the people of; e-thon-ba, the}'
together.
109. We-ki-k'o", ceremonial articles, symbols; the, make of them;
mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; ta i tsi" da, they shall.
502 THE OSAGE TEIBE [ETH. ANN. 30
MON'-SHKON (CBAWFISH) GENS
(Free translation, p. 116; Osage version, p. 337)
1. He-dsi, at that time and place; xtsi, verily; a, they said; a bin
da, it has been said; tsi, house; ga, in this, 33, 51, 60, 70.
2. Hon-ga, the Hon-ga subdivision; u-dse-the, fireplaces; pe-thon-ba,
seven; ni-ka-shi-ga, a people; ba, they; don, were; a, they said.
3. In-gthon-ga, the puma; zhu-i-ga, his body; the, he had made of;
ton, the standing; non, the; a, they said.
4. Ha, O; wi-con-ga, my younger brother; e-gi-a, they said to him;
bi, they; a, they said, 14, 24.
5. We-ki-k'on, ceremonial articles; thon-tse, suitable; thin-ge a-tha,
there is none; wi-con-ga, my younger brother; e-gi-a, they said
to him; bi, they; a, they said.
6. Ga, in this manner; xtsi, verily; hi-tha, they had spoken; i, they;
don, when; a, they said.
7. Tse-xe, in an open prairie; xtsi, verily; ge dsi, there; a, they said.
8. Ni-ka, a man; win, one; tho, in his presence; ton, standing; hi,
having arrived there; non-zhin, they paused and stood; bi,
they; a, they said, 22.
9. Sha-ge, hand; ba-ha, uplifted; ton, standing; hi, having arrived
there; non-zhin, they paused and stood; bi, they; a, they said.
10. E-dsi, then and there; xtsi, verily; gi-e, he returned; don, and.
11. Wi-con-ga, my younger brother; ba, he.
12. O-k'on, acting in a significant manner; xtsi, verily; a-gi, return
ing; a ba, he is; wi-con-ga, my younger brothers; e-ki-a, they
said to one another; bi, they; a, they said.
13. Ni-ka, a man; win, one; e-dsi, a-ka, there is at a certain place;
wi-zhin-the, my elder brothers; e, saying; a-gthi, having come
home; no"-zhin, he stood; a, they said, 15.
16. Non-be, hand; zha-ta, cloven, forked; ga-xe a-ka, making he is;
wi-zhin-the, my elder brothers; e, saying; a-gthi, having come
home; non-zhin, he stood; to", standing; a, they said.
17. Ha, O; wi-con-ga, my younger brothers; e-ki-a, they said to one
another; bi, they; a, they said.
18. Ni-ka, man; be, whoever; ton, standing; shki don, he may be; a,
they said.
19. Wa-non-xe, spirits; a-dsi, there, to their abode; the, to go; on-the,
we cause him to; ta bi a, we shall; wi-con-ga, my younger
brothers; e-ki-a, they said to one another; bi, they; a, they said.
20. E-ta, thitherward; pa-mon-gthe, with heads inclined; xtsi, verily;
a, they said.
21. (^i-thu-ca, footsteps they took, went forth; ba, they; do°, and;
a, they said.
23. Non-be, hand; zha-ta, cloven, forked; ga-xe, making; non-zhin,
standing; ton, he stood; a, they said.
I.AFLESCHE] TRIBAL RITES LITERAL TRANSLATION 503
25. Ni-ka, man; be, who, what; tha ton she, art thou, who stands
yonder; e-gi-a, they said to him; bi, they; a, they said.
26. Hon-ga, a sacred person; bthi" a, I am; wi-zhin-the, my elder
brothers; e, saying; ton, he stood; a, they said.
27. Mon-shkon, the Crawfish; wi, I am; a-ton he a, I who stand here;
wi-zhin-the, my elder brothers; e, saying; ton, he stood; a, they
said.
28. Mon-thin-ka-zhin-ga, Little-earth; wi, I am; a-ton he a, I who
stands here; wi-zhin-the, my elder brothers; e, saying; ton, he
stood; a, they said.
29. Wi-zhin-the, my elder brothers; e, to say; tsi-the, he hastened to
say; a, they said.
30. E-dsi, at any place, or at any important movement; zhi, not
present; the, moving; thin-ge, none; a-ni-ka-shi-ga, I am such
a person; wi-zhin-the, my elder brothers; e, saying; to", he
stood; a, they said.
31. We-ki-k'on, a symbol, a ceremonial article; a to" he a, I am, I
who stands; wi-zhin-the, my elder brothers; e, saying; to", he
stood; a, they said.
32. We-ki-k'on, symbol; thon-tse, suitable; a-ton-he in da, I am, I
who stand here.
34. Mo°-to-to-be, a hillock of soft mud; hon-cka, of no particular size:
don, and; a, they said.
35. K'u-shi, as though sucked down, or gulped down; kshi-gthe, he
went home; do", and; a, they said, 44, 54, 62.
36. Mon-thin-ka, the soil of the earth; sha-be, the dark; thin-kshe,
the sitting; a, they said.
37. Ba-ha, holding it aloft to offer it to the people; tsi, he came;
non-zhin, stood; ton, standing; a, they said, 46, 56, 64.
38. The, this, bit of earth; wi-zhin-the, my elder brothers; e, to say;
tsi-the, he hastened; a, they said, 47.
39. We-ki-k'on, ceremonial article; shka-xe, you make of it; tse a,
you shall; wi-zhin-the, my elder brothers; e, saying; to", he
stood; a, they said.
40. Thon-dse, the side of the house; ba-he, the height of; e-ton-ha,
equal to its height; non shki do", even to that height; a, they
said, 68.
41. Da, the things, that you may ask for; i-sdu-ts'a-ga, you fail to
secure by its use; zhi, shall not; tha, you; thin-she, in your life's
journey; ta tse a, you shall; wi-zhin-the, my elder brother; e,
saying; to", he stood; a, they said, 50, 69, 78.
42. We-shnon, gratefully happy; wi-gi-the, I am causing you to be;
a-ton, he, a, I who stand here; wi-zhin-the, my elder brothers;
e, saying; ton, he stood; a, they said.
43. I-tha-pi-thin, slowly, gently; xtsi, verily; a, they said.
504 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
45. Mon-thin-ka, the soil of the earth; to-ho, the blue; thin-kshe, the
sitting; a, they said.
48. We-ki-k'on, ceremonial article; tha, you; the, make of it; tha,
you; thin-she, in your life's journey; ta tse a, you shall; wi-zhin-
the, my elder brothers; e, to say; tsi-the, he hastened; a, they
said, 52, 58, 66, 73.
49. We-gon-tha, as a means of making known (to Wa-kon-da) your
desires; a-ni, you keep it, treasure it; tha, you; thin-she, in
your life's journey; don, if; shki, and; a, they said, 77.
53. I-tha-bthin, the third time; on, at the; xtsi, verily; a, they said.
55. Mon-thin-ka, the earth's soil; zhu-dse, the red; thin-kshe, the
sitting; a, they said.
57. Ga, this, the red soil; thivkshe, the sitting; shki, also; a, they
said, 65.
59. We-mon-ka the, the winning of compassion and the granting of
your prayers; thi-o-ts'e-ga, shall be easy for you; tha, you;
thi-she, in your life's journey; ta tse a, you shall; wi-zhin-the,
my elder brothers; e, to say; tsi-the, he hastened; a, they said.
61. I-do-ba, the fourth time; on, at the; xtsi, verily; a, they said.
63. Mon-thin-ka, the earth's soil; ci, the yellow; thin-kshe, the sitting;
a, they said.
67. We-ki-k'on, ceremonial article, symbol; tha the, you make of it,
or use it as; tha, you; thin-she, in your life's journey; don, if;
shki, and; a, they said.
71. Non-be, hand; zha-ta, cloven, forked; ga tse, this; a, they said.
72. E, that; shki don, also; a, they said.
74. Zhon-xa, a stick, a pole; zha-ta, forked; e non-bi non, spoken of
as; a, they said.
75. Shon, all, for general use; xtsi, verily; wi-kshi-the in da, I have
made for you; wi-zhin-the, my elder brothers; e, saying; ton,
he stood.
76. Mi, sun; hi-e, the setting of; ge, plural; ta, there, in the direction
of.
I'-BA-TSE TA-DSE (THE WINDS) GENS
(Free translation, p. 118; Osage version, p. 339)
1. He-dsi, at that time and place; xtsi, verily; a, they said; a bin da,
it has been said; tsi, house; ga, in this.
2. Ha, O; wi-con-ga, my younger brothers; e-ki-a, they said to one
another; bi, they; a, they said.
3. We-ki-k'on, symbol; thon-tse, suitable; thin-ge a-tha, there is
none; wi-con-ga, my younger brothers; e-ki-a, they said to one
another; bi, they; a, they said.
4. In-gthon-ga, the puma; zho-i-ga, his body; the, he made of, the
one; ton, the standing; a, they said.
5. Thu-e, in haste; xtsi, verily; ci-thu-ce, took footsteps; the, went
forth; don, and; a, they said.
LA FLESCHE] TRIBAL RITES LITERAL TRANSLATION 505
6. Tse-xe, open prairie; xtsi, verily; ge, at such a place; dsi, there;
a, they said.
7. Hon-ga, the gentes forming the Hon-ga subdivision; we-ha-ge,
the last in the established order; to", the standing; a, they said.
8. Tho, presence; ton, standing; hi, having arrived there, where he
stood; non-zhin, they paused and stood; bi, they; a, they said.
9. Ha, O; wi-zhin-the, my elder brothers; e, to say; tsi-the, he
hastened; a, they said.
10. Ni-ka, man; be, who, what; tha, you; ton-she, standing there; a,
they said.
11. Hon-ga, a Hon-ga, sacred person; Gthe-zhe, the speckled (the
speckled eagle symbolizing the winds); wi, I am; a-ton he a,
I who stand here; wi-zhin-the, my elder brothers; e, saying;
ton, he stood; a, they said.
12. Hon-ga, a sacred person; bthi" a, I am; wi-zhin-the, my elder
brothers; e, saying; to", he stood; a, they said.
13. We-ki-k'on, a symbol; thon-tse, suitable; a-ton he a, I am, I who
stands here; wi-zhin-the, my elder brothers; e, saying; ton, he
stood; a, they said.
14. We-ki-k'on, a symbol; on-tha, make of me; mon-thin, as they
travel the path of life; ta i tsin da, they shall, 18.
15. We-ki-k'on, a symbol; o"-the, they make of me; mon-thin, as they
travel the path of life; bi, they; don, when; a, they said, 19.
16. Wa-zha-zhe, the people of the Wa-zha-zhe division; a, they said.
17. Tsi-zhu, those of the Tsi-zhu division; e-thon-ba, the two together.
20. Thon-dse, the house; ba-he, the height of; e-ton-ha, equal to the
height (that is, the rising of the sun to that height) ; non, shki
don, even to that (meaning that even before the sun has
passed over the houses their prayers would be granted); a,
they said.
21. We-ki-k'on, symbol; gi-o-ts'e-ga, that will make easy their
efforts to win divine sympathy; ki-the, for themselves; mon-
thin, as they travel the path of life; ta i tsin da, they shall.
22. We-shnon, gratefully happy; wi-gi-the, I am making you to be;
a-ton-he a, I who stand here; wi-zhin-the, my elder brothers;
e, saying; ton, he stood; a, they said.
TSI'-ZHU (SKY) DIVISION
TSI'-ZHU WA-NON GENS
(Free translation, p. 118; Osagc version, p. 340)
1. He-dsi, at that time and place; xtsi, verily; a, they said; a bin da,
it has been said; tsi, house; ga, in this, 18, 37,54, 56.
2. Tsi-zhu, the Tsi-zhu division; u-dse-the, fireplaces; pe-thon-ba,
seven; ni-ka-shi-ga, a. people; ba, they; do", were; a, they said,
57.
506 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
3. Tsi-zhu, of the Tsi-zhu gentes; Wa-non, the elder one; thin-kshe,
the sitting; a, they said.
4. Ha, O; wi-tsi-go-e, my grandfather; e-gi-a, they said to him; bi,
they; a, they said.
5. We-ki-k'on, symbol; thon-tse, suitable, fit; thin-ge a-tha, there is
none; wi-tsi-go-e, my grandfather; e-gi-a, they said to him; bi,
they; a, they said.
6. Ha, O; zhin-ga, little ones; e, to say; tsi-the, he hastened; a, they
said.
7. We-ki-k'on, symbol; thon-tse, suitable; thin-ge, there is none;
e-she, don, you have said; a, they said.
8. We-ki-k'on, a symbol; thon-tse, suitable for; mi-kshe in da, I am,
I who sit here.
9. Wa-kon-da, god; hon-ba, day; don, of the; thiVkshe, sitting; a,
they said, 12, 61.
10. Zhu-i-ga, my body; the, made of him; xtsi, verily; a-ni-ka-shi-ga,
I as a person, as a people; mi-kshe in da, I who sit here, 21, 60.
11. Zhin-ga, the little ones; zhu-i-ga, their bodies; on-tha, they make
of me; bi, they; don, when; a, they said, 22, 24, 67, 78.
13. Zhu-i-ga, their bodies; the, make of that god; xtsi, verily; ni-ka-
shi-ga, as persons, as a people; ki-the, make themselves to be;
mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; ta i tsin da, they shall.
14. Zhu-i-ga, their bodies; the, they make of him; mon-thin, as they
travel the path of life; bi, they; don, when, 33.
15. I-ts'a. causes of death; thin-ge, having none; mon-thin, as they
travel the path of life; ta i tsi" da, they shall.
16. U-non, a means of reaching old age; tha, they make of him; bi,
they; don, when; shki, and; a, they said, 35.
17. U-non, old age; a bi, that which is spoken of as; i-the, live to
see; ki-the, cause themselves to; mon-thin, as they travel the
path of life; ta i tsin da, they shall, 30, 36, 79.
19. Zhin-ga, the little ones; zhu-i-ga, their bodies; tha, they make of;
bi, the things of which; ga, these; non-zhin da, shall stand.
20. Wa-kon-da, god; hon-don, of the night; thin-kshe, the sitting; a,
they said, 63.
23. Ts'e, to die; wa-tse-xi, difficult; mi-kshe in da, I am, I who sit
here.
25. Ts'e, to die; wa-tse-xi, difficult to; ki-the, cause themselves to;
mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; ta i tsin da, they
shall, 34.
26. Wa-tse, star; do-ga, the male (the morning star); thin-kshe, the
sitting; a, they said, 65.
27. Ga, this god; thin-kshe, the sitting; shki, also; a, they said, 32, 59.
LA FLESCHE] TRIBAL RITES LITERAL TRANSLATION 507
28. Zhin-ga, the little ones; zhu-i-ga, their bodies; the, they make of
her; mo°-thin, as they travel the path of life; ta i tsin da, they
shall.
29. Zhin-ga, the little ones; zhu-i-ga, their bodies; tha, they make of
her; bi, they; don, when; a, they said.
31. Wa-tse-, star; mi-ga, the female (the evening star); thiVkshe, the
sitting; a, they said, 72.
38. Wa-kon-da, the god; tse-ga, early; xtsi, verily; e-thon-be, who
appears (the sun); hi, comes; non, habitually; bi, they; a, they
said.
39. Tha-ta, on the left side of his body; dsi, there, on that part; a,
they said.
40. Ga-gthe-zhe, stripes as though made by strokes, rays; sha-pe,
six; tse, standing; no", the; a, they said.
41. E-shki do", those also; a, they said.
42. Wa-we-a-ga-ckon-the in da, I have made to be symbols, 49.
43. O-don, of the military honors; e non bi no", the honors spoken
of as o-don, a, they said, 50.
44. O-don, military honors; tha, they make of them; bi, they; don,
when; shki, and; a, they said.
45. O-don, honors; a bi, spoken of as; gi-tsi-ca, to be accurately
accounted for; ki-the, cause them to be; mon-thin, as they
travel the path of life; ta i tsin da, they shall, 53.
46. Thi-u-ba-he, the side of his body; i-sdu-ge, the right; dsi, there;
a, they said.
47. Ga-gthe-zhe, rays; pe-thon-ba ha, seven separate; tse, standing;
non, the; a, they said.
48. Ga, these; tse, standing; shki, also; a, they said.
51. Shon, all of them; xtsi, verily; i-tse a-the in da, I have made them
to stand for.
52. Zhin-ga, the little ones; we-tha-wa, use them for counting, their
military honors; mo"-thin, as they travel the path of life; bi.
they; don, when; a, they said.
55. Hon a-don, of what; zhin-ga, the little ones; zhu-i-ga, their bodies;
tha, they make of; bi, they; go" non, shall; shki, and; a hi" a,
interrogative particles.
58. Wa-zhin-ga, bird; pa, bill; stse-dse, long; do", a; a, they said.
62. I-tha-thu-fe, as an instrument to bring the god of day, to sym
bolize; xtsi, verily; a-ni-ka-shi-ga, I am a person, a people
mi-kshe in da, I am, I who sit here, 64, 66, 73.
68. Wa-shi-shi, property, possessions; u-bu-dse, in profusion, abun
dance; xtsi, verily; i-the, to see, to gain; ki-the, cause them
selves to; mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; (a i tsi" da,
they shall, 77.
508 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
69. Mi, sun; hi-e, places of its setting; ge, plural; ta, toward, in the
direction of, 74.
70. We-gon-tha, as a means by which to express their desires; a-thin,
take with them; mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; bi,
they; don, when; shki, and; a, they said, 75.
71. Da, the things that they asfc for; thu-ts'a-ga, fail to obtain: zhi,
not; ki-the, cause themselves to; mon-thin, as they travel the
path of life; ta i tsin da, they shall, 76, 85.
80. Hon-ba, days; u-ca-ki-ba, the great divisions of; do-ba, the four;
shki, and; a, they said.
81. U-hi, to reach and to enter; ki-the, cause themselves to; mon-
thin, as they travel the path of life; ta i tsin da, they shall.
82. Wa-zha-zhe, the people of the Wa-zha-zhe subdivision; a, they
said.
83. Hon-ga, those of the Hon-ga subdivision; e-thon-ba, they together.
84. We-ki-k'on, ceremonial articles; symbols; on-the, they make of
me; mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; bi, they; don,
when; a, they said.
TSE-DO'-GA IN-DSE (BUFFALO BULL FACE) GENS
The members of this gens remain silent throughout the recitation
of the wi'-gi-es, but the presence of the gens at the ceremony is
necessary for the reason that it forms a part of the great tribal
division representing the sky. The office of this gens is to prepare
the symbolic moccasins to be worn by the Sho'-ka and the Xo'-ka
at the initiatory ceremonies of the war rites. (See p. 121.)
MI-K'IN/ WA-NON (ELDER SUN-CARRIER) GENS
(Free translation, p. 122; Osage version, p. 342)
1. He-dsi, at that time and place; xtsi, verily; a, they said; a bin da,
it has been said; tsi, house; ga, in this, 18, 45.
2. Tsi-zhu, the Tsi-zhu division; u-dse-the, fireplaces; pe-thon-ba,
seven; ni-ka-shi-ga, a people; ba, they; don, were; a, they said.
3. Mi-k'in, Sun-carrier; Wa-non, the elder (the term elder signifies
the warrior gens); thin-kshe, the sitting; a, they said.
4. Ha, O; wi-tsi-go-e, my grandfather; e-gi-a, they said to him; bi,
they; a, they said.
5. We-ki-k'on, a symbol; thon-tse, suitable; thin-ge a-tha, there is
none; wi-tsi-go-e, my grandfather; e-gi-a, they said to him; bi,
they; a, they said.
6. Ha, O; zhin-ga, little ones; e, to say; tsi-the, he hastened; a, they
said.
7. We-ki-k'on, symbol; thon-tse, suitable; thin-ge, there is none;
e-she don, you have said; a, they said.
I.A FLESCHE] TRIBAL RITES LITERAL TRANSLATION 509
8. We-ki-k'on, symbol; thon-tse, suitable; mi-kshe in da, I am, I
who sit here.
9. Wa-kon-da, god; hon-ba do", of the day; thin-kshe, the sitting;
a, they said, 12.
10. Zhu-i-ga, my body; the, I have made of that god: xtsi, verily;
a-ni-ka-shi-ga, I as a person, as a people; mi-kshe in da, I
who sit here, 20, 32, 40.
11. Zhin-ga, the little ones; zhu-i-ga, their bodies; on-tha, they make
of me; bi, they; don, when; a, they said, 21.
13. Zhu-i-ga, their bodies; the, making of that god; xtsi, verily;
ni-ka-shi-ga, persons, a people; ki-the, make themselves to be;
mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; ta i tsin da, they
shall, 23.
14. Zliu-i-ga, their bodies; the, they make of that god; mon-thin, as
they travel the path of life; bi, they; don, when; a, they said,
26, 35.
15. I-ts'a, causes of death; thin-ge, they shall have none; mon-thin,
as they travel the path of life; £a i tsin da, they shall.
1G. U-non, as a means of reaching old age; tha, they make of that
god; bi, they; do", when; shki, and, 28, 37, 43.
17. U-non, old age; a bi, that which is spoken of as; i-the, live to
see; ki-the, cause themselves to; mon-thin, as they travel the
path of life; (a i tsin da, they shall, 29, 38, 44.
19. Wa-kon-da, god; hon don, of the night; thin-kshe, the sitting; a,
they said, 22, 25.
21. Zhin-ga, the little ones; zhu-i-ga, their bodies; o°-tha, they make
of me; bi, they; don, when; a, they said.
24. Ts'e, to die; wa-tse-xi, difficult; mi-kshe in da, I am, I who sit
here.
27. Ts'e, to die; wa-tse-xi, difficult; ki-the, cause themselves to be;
mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; ta i tsin da, they
shall, 36, 42.
30. Wa-tse, star; do-ga, the male; thin-kshe, the sitting; a, they
. said, 34.
31. Ga, this, god; thin-kshe, the sitting; shki, also; a, they said.
33. Zhin-ga, the little ones; zhu-i-ga, their bodies; tha, they make of
that god; bi, they; do", when; a, they said, 41.
39. Wa-tse, star; mi-ga, the female; thi°-kshe, the sitting; a, they
said.
46. Zhin-ga, the little ones; zhu-i-ga, their bodies; tha, of which to
make; bi, they; ga, these; non-zhin da, shall stand.
47. Wa-kon-da, the god; tse-ga, early in the day; xtsi, verily; e-thon-
be, appears; hi, comes; no", habitually; bi, they; a, they said, 54.
48. Tha-ta, on the left side of his body; dsi, there; a, they said.
510 THE OSAGE TRIBE * [ETH. AXX. 36
49. Ga-gthe-zhe, stripes, rays; sha-pe, the six; tse, that stand; non,
the; a, they said.
50. Ga, these; tse, standing; shki, also; a, they said, 57.
51. Wa-we-a-ga-ckon-the in da, I have made to be symbols, 58.
52. Zhin-ga, the little ones; we-tha-wa, use them for counting; mo11-
thin, as they travel the path of life; bi, they; don, when; a,
they said, 59.
53. O-don, military honors; gi-tsi-ca, correct; a bi, spoken of as;
i-the, to see; ki-the, cause themselves to; mon-thin, as they
travel the path of life; ta i tsin da, they shall, 60.
55. Thi-u-ba-he, the side of the body; i-sdu-ge, the right; dsi, there;
a, they said.
56. Ga-gthe-zhe, stripes, rays; pe-thon-ba, seven; tse, the standing;
no", the; a, they said.
HoN I-NI-KA-SHI-OA (NlOHT PEOPLE) GENS
(Free translation, p. 123; Osage version, p. 343)
1. He-dsi, at that time and place; xtsi, verily; a, they said; a bia da,
it has been said; tsi, house; ga, in this.
2. Tsi-zhu, the Tsi-zhu division; u-dse-the, fireplaces; pe-thon-ba,
seven; ni-ka-shi-ga, person, a people: ba, they; do", were; a,
they said.
3. Hon, night; I-ni-ka-shi-ga, by which they became a people;
thin-kshe, the sitting; noa, the; a, they said.
4. Ha, O; wi-tsi-go-e, my grandfather; e-gi-a, they said to him; bi,
they; a, they said.
5. We-ki-k'on, symbol; thon-tse, suitable; thin-ge a-tha, there is
none; wi-tsi-go-e, my grandfather; e-gi-a, they said to him; bi,
they; a, they said.
6. Ha, O; zhin-ga, little ones; e, to say; tsi-the, he hastened; a,
they said.
7. We-ki-k'on, symbol; thon-tse, suitable; mi-kshe in da, I am, I
who sit here.
8. Wa-ca-be, the black bear; u-ca-ka, blemish, spots; thin-ge, that
has none; kshe, the lying; non, the; a, they said.
9. Zhu-i-ga, body; the, made of; xtsi, verily; a-ni-ka-shi-ga, I am a
person, a people; mi-kshe in da, I who sit here.
10. Zhu-i-ga, their bodies; the, they make of him; mon-thin, as they
travel the path of life; bi, they; don, when; a, they said.
11. I-ts'a, causes of death; thin-ge, having none; mon-thin, as they
travel the path of life; ta i tsin da, they shall.
12. U-non, old age; a bi, spoken of as; shki, and; i-the, live to see;
ki-the, cause themselves to; mon-thin, as they travel the path
of life; ta i tsin da, they shall, 26.
LAFLKSCHE] TRIBAL KITES LITERAL TRANSLATION 511
13. (^i-ha, the skin of the feet; u-sha-be, wherein it is dark in color;
ga, this; thin-kshe, this sitting; shki, also; a, they said.
14. Non-xthe, charcoal; a-gi-the, I have made it to be; a-thin he in da,
in my life's journey, 18, 22.
15. Non-xthe, charcoal; gi-the, they make of it; mon-thin, as they
travel the path of life; a, they said, 19, 23.
16. Non-xthe, charcoal; gi-a-da-xe, to sink readily into their skins;
ki-the; cause it to; mon-thin, as they travel the path of life,
ta i tsin da, they shall, 20, 24.
17. Pa-zhu-zhe, the tip of the nose; sha-be, dark in color; ga, this;
thin-kshe, the sitting; shki, also; a, they said.
21. Zhu-i-ga, my body; pa-be, black; ga, this; kshe, the lying; shki;
also; a, they said.
25. Zhin-ga, the little ones; u-non, the means of reaching old age;
gi-the, they make of it; mon-thin, as they travel the path of
life; bi, they; don, when; shki, and; a, they said.
27. Hon-ba, day; ti-ca-ki-ba, the great divisions of; do-ba, the four;
shki, and; a, they said.
28. U-hi, to arrive there and to enter; ki-the, cause themselves to;
mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; t& i tsin da, they shall.
XU-THA ZHU-DSE (RF.n EAGLE) GENS
(Free translation, p. 124; Osage version, p. 344)
1. He-dsi, at that time and place; xtsi, verily; a, they said; a bin
da, it has been said; tsi, house; ga, in this, 100, 132, 140,
153, 161.
2. Tsi-zhu, the Tsi-zhu division; u-dse-the, fireplaces; pe-thon-ba,
seven; ni-ka-shi-ga, persons, a people; ba, they; don, were; a,
they said, 104.
3. Tsi-zhu, the Tsi-zhu gens; Wa-shta-ge, the mild and gentle;
thin-kshe, the sitting; no", the; a, they said.
4. Xu-tha, eagle; zhu-dse, red; zhu-i-ga, their bodies; the, of which
they had made; thin-kshe, the sitting; non, the; a, they said.
5. Ha, O; wi-tsi-go-e, my grandfather; e-gi-a, they said to him; bi,
they; a, they said, 107.
6. Zhin-ga, the little ones; zhu-i-ga, their bodies; tha, of which to
make; bi, they; thin-ge a-tha, there is none; wi-tsi-go-e, my
grandfather; e-gi-a, they said to him; bi, they; a, they said, 108.
7. Ha, O; zhin-ga, little ones; e, to say; tsi-the, he hastened to say;
a, they said, 109.
8. Zhin-ga, the little ones; zhu-i-ga, their bodies; tha, of which to
make; bi, they; thin-ge, they have none; e-she don, you have
said; a, they said, 110.
512 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
9. Zhin-ga, the little ones; zhu-i-ga, their bodies; on-tha, they make
of me; ba, they; thon-tse, suitable for that purpose; mi-kshe
in da, I am, I who sit here.
10. Xu-tha, eagle; zhu-dse; red; thin-kshe, the sitting; a, they said.
11. Zhu-i-ga, their bodies; the, they make of him; mon-thin, as they
travel the path of life; bi, they; don, when; a, they said.
12. U-non, old age; a bi, that which is spoken of as; i-the, live to
see; ki-the, cause themselves to; mon-thin, as they travel the
path of life; ta i tsin da, they shall, 16, 28, 68, 77, 131, 139, 142,
147. 152, 158, 166, 173.
13. (^i-ha, the skin of my feet; u-thi-ctu-be, that is gathered in folds;
ga, this; thin-kshe, the sitting; shki, also; a, they said.
14. U-non, the means of reaching old age; a-gi-the, I have made it to
be; a-thin he in da, in my life's journey, 30.
15. Zhin-ga, the little ones; u-non, the means of reaching old age;
tha, they make it to be; bi, they; don, when; shki, and; a,
they said, 19, 23, 27, 31, 50, 55.
17. Hi-kon, the muscles of my ankles; ba-k'in-tha, wrinkled with age;
ga ge, these; shki, also; a, they said.
18. U-non, the means of reaching old age; a-gi-the, I have made
them to be; a-ton he in da, I who stand here, 22, 26, 34, 39, 44,
49, 54.
19. U-non, the means of reaching old age; tha, they make of them;
bi, they; don, when; shki, and; a, they said.
20. Hi-kon, their ankles; ba-k'in-tha, wrinkled with age; a bi, that
which is spoken of as; i-the, live to see; ki-the, cause them
selves to; mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; ta i tsin da,
they shall.
21. Hi-zhu-ga-wa, the loose muscles of the legs; ga, these; thin-kshe,
the sitting; shki, also; a, they said.
24. Hi-zhu-ga-wa, muscles of the legs loosened with age; a bi, spoken
of as; i-the, live to see; mon-thin, as they travel the path of life;
ta i tsin da, they shall.
25. Tse-wa-tse, inner muscles of the thighs; u-ga-wa, loose; ga, these;
thin kshe, the sitting; shki, also; a, they said.
29. Mon-ge, my breast; u-thi-ctu-the, wherein the skin is gathered in
folds; ga, this; thin-kshe, the sitting; shki, also; a, they said.
32. Mon-ge, breast; u-thi-ctu-the, wherein the skin is gathered in
folds with age; a bi, spoken of as; i-the, live to see; ki-the,
cause themselves to; mon-thin, as they travel the path of life;
ta i tsin da, they shall.
33. A-zhu-ga-wa, the loose muscles of my arms; ga, these; thin-kshe,
the sitting; shki, also; a, they said.
35. U-non, the means of reaching old age; gi-the, they make of them;
bi, they; don, when; a, they said, 40, 45.
LAILISCHE] TRIBAL RITES — LITERAL TRANSLATION 513
36. A-zhu-ga-wa, muscles of the arms loosened with age; a bi, spoken
of as; i-the, live to see; ki-the, cause themselves to; mon-thin,
as they travel the path of life; ta i tsin da, they shall.
37. A-ba-t'u-xa, my shoulder that is bent with age; ga, this; thin-
kshe, the sitting; shki, also; a, they said.
38. E-shki don, that also, 43, 48, 53.
41. A-ba-t'u-xa, their shoulders bent with age; a bi, spoken of as;
i-the, live to see; ki-the, cause themselves to; mon-thin, as they
travel the path of life; ta i tsin da, they shall.
42. Du-dse u-ga-wa, the loose muscles of my throat; ga, these; thin-
kshe, the sitting; shki, also; a, they said.
46. Du-dse u-ga-wa, the muscles of their throats loosened with age;
a bi, spoken of as; i-the, live to see; ki-the, cause themselves
to ; ta i tsin da, they shall.
47. Ta-xpi, the crown of my head; hi", the hair of; ca-dse, thinned
with age; ga, this; thin-kshe, the sitting; shki, also; a, they said
51. Ta-xpi, crown of the head; hin, the hair of; ca-dse, thinned with
age; a bi, spoken of as; i-the, live to see; ki-the, cause them
selves to; mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; ta i tsin da,
they shall.
52. Pa-xin, hair of the head; cka, white; ga, this; thin-kshe, the sitting;
shki, also; a, they said.
56. Pa-xin, the hair of their heads; ci e-gon, turned yellowish with
age; a bi, spoken of as; i-the, live to see; ki-the, cause them
selves to; mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; ta i tsin da,
they shall.
57. Wa-kon-da, of the god; hon-ba do", of day; thin-kshe, the sitting;
a, they said.
58. Zhu-i-ga, my body; the, I have made of that god; xtsi, verily;
a-ni-ka-shi-ga, I as a person, as a people; a-ton he in da, I who
stand here.
59. Wa-kon-da, gods; tse-ga, early in the day; xtsi, verily; e-thon-be,
appear; hi, come; no", habitually; bi, they; a, they said, 63, 72.
60. Wa-kon-da, the god; zhu-dse, red; u-ga-ton, e-gon, as though
dipped in that color (the red dawn); kshe, lying; no", the; a,
they said.
61. Ga, of that god; kshe, the lying; shki, also; a, they said, 149,
155, 163.
62. Zhu-i-ga, my body; the, I have made to be; xtsi, verily; a-ni-ka-
shi-ga in da, I as a person, as a people, 134, 136, 144.
64. Tha-ta, left side of the body; ta thi-sho", on that side; dsi, there;
a, they said.
65. Wa-gthe-ton e-go", of the plumelike, a shaft of light; to", the
standing; no", the; a, they said, 74.
2786—21 33
514 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
66. Wa-gthe, a symbolic plume; a-gi-the, I have made; a-ton he in
da, I who stand here.
67. Zhin-ga, the little ones; wa-gthe, their plumes; gi-the, they make
of that shaft of light; mon-thin, as they travel the path of life;
bi, they; don, when; shki, and; a, they said.
69. Ni-ka, men; non, aged; hi, they arrive at that stage of life; don,
when; a, they said, 78.
70. Wa-gthe, a symbolic plume; gi-the, they make of that shaft of
light; mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; bi, they; don,
when; a, they said, 76, 79.
71. Wa-gthe, their plume; gi-xi-tha, droop or fall; zhi, not; ki-the,
cause it to; mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; ta i tsin
da, they shall, 80.
73. I-sdu-ga, the right side of the body; dsi, there, on that side;
a, they said.
75. Ga, of that shaft of light; wa-gthe, a symbolic plume; a-gi-the,
I have made; a-thin he in da, to be used in my life's journey.
81. Hon-ba, days; tha-gthin, calm and peaceful; xtsi, verily; u-wa-
ni-ka-shi ga in da, I make my abode as a person.
82. Zhin-ga, the little ones; zhu-i-ga, their bodies; on-tha, they make
of me; bi, they; don, when; a, they said, 86, 96, 113, 117, 121.
83. Hon-ba, in the days; tha-gthin, that are calm and peaceful; xtsi,
verily; u-ni-ka-shi-ga, they shall make their abode as a people;
ki-the, cause themselves to; mon-thin, as they travel the path
of life; ta i tsin da, they shall, 118, 122.
84. Wa-kon-da, the gods; shon-e-gon, all of them together; xtsi,
verily; a, they said, 87, 95.
85. U-xthi, anger, violence; thin-ge, having none, without; xtsi,
verily; i-he-a-the, I have made them to lie; a-ton he in da, I
who stand here, 90, 92, 94.
88. U-xthi, anger, violence; thin-ge, having none; i-he-the, make
them to lie; mon-thrn, as they travel the path of life; ta i tsin
da, they shall, 97, 102.
89. Wa-kon-da, the god; hiu-dse, of this, the lower region (the earth) ;
ga, this; kshe, the lying; a, they said.
91. Hon-ba, the day; wa-pu, that is clear; ga, this; to", the stand
ing; a, they said.
93. Wa-kon-da, the god; mon-shi ta, of the upper region (the sky);
ga, this; kshe, the lying; a, they said.
98. Wa-zha-zhe, when the people of the Wa-zha-zhe subdivision;
a, they said, 169.
99. Hon-ga, and those of the Hon-ga subdivision; e-thon-ba, the two
together, 170.
100. Zhu-i-ga, their bodies; on-the, they make of me; mon-thin, as
they travel the path of life; bi, they; don, when; a, they said.
LAFLESCHEJ TRIBAL RITES — LITERAL TRANSLATION 515
101. Mon-zhon, the earth; shon e-gon, in all its parts; xtsi, verily; a,
they said.
105. Tsi-zhu win, to one of the Tsi-zhu gens; a, they said.
106. U-xthi, anger; thin-ge, having none; xtsi, verily; ni-ka-shi-ga,
a person, a people; ton, standing; a, they said.
111. Zhin-ga, the little ones; zhu-i-ga, their bodies; tha, they make
of me; ba, they; thon-tse, .suitable; a-ton he in da, I am, I
who stand here.
112. U-da-bthu-bthu-e, of the moist "vibrating air of the earth; xsti,
verily; a-ni-ka-shi-ga in da, I am a person, a people.
114. U-da-bthu-bthu-e, of the moist vibrating air of the earth; xtsi,
verily; ni-ka-shi-ga, a people; ki-the, cause themselves to be;
mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; ta i tsin da, they shall.
115. Hon-ba, the days; tha-gthin, that are calm and peaceful; xtsi,
verily; a, they said.
116. U-wa-ni-ka-shi-ga in da, I, as a person, make my abode in the
days that are calm and peaceful.
119. Hon-ba-tha-gthin, Peaceful-day; shki, and; a, they said.
120. Zha-zhe, is a name; a-ki-ton, that I have made to be mine; a-thin
he in da, in my life's journey.
123. Non-ni-on-ba zhin-ga, of a little pipe; win, one; zhu-i-ga, my
body; a-the, I have made; a-ton he in da, I who stand here.
124. Zhin-ga, the little ones.
125. Zhu-i-ga, their bodies; tha, make of that pipe; bi, they; do",
when; a, they said.
126. U-xthi, anger, violence; thin-ge, having none; a-ki-gtha-thi",
they shall keep themselves; mon-thin, as they travel the path
of life; ta i tsi" da, they shall.
127. Wa-shi-shi, riches; u-dse, seek for; a-thin, carry, make use of
in seeking; mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; bi, they;
shki, and; a, they said.
128. Wa-shi-shi, riches; u-bu-dse, in profusion; i-the, to see, to find;
ki-the, cause themselves to ; mon-thin, as they travel the path
of life; ta i tsin da, they shall.
129. We-non-bthe, by its use they shall obtain food; mon-thin, as they
travel the path of life; ta i tsin da, they shall.
130. We-non-bthe, when they obtain food by the use of the pipe;
mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; bi, they; do", when;
a, they said.
133. Xtha-ci, of a yellow flower; zhi"-ga, a little; win, one; a, they
said.
134. Zhu-i-ga, my body; the, I have made; xtsi, verily; a-ni-ka-shi-ga
i° da, I as a person, as a people, 136.
135. Ba-shta e-gon, a flower that stands as though with shorn head;
to", that stands; no", the; a, they said.
516 THE OSAGE TRIBE [KTH. ANN. 36
137. Zhin-ga, the little ones; zhu-i-ga, their bodies; tha, make of it;
bi, they; don, when; a, they said.
138. U-xthi, anger, violence; thin-ge, having none; ki-the, cause
themselves to be; mon-thin, as they travel the path of life;
ta i tsin da, they shall.
141. Zhin-ga, the little ones; non-bthe, food; tha, they make of it;
bi, they; don, when; shki, and; a, they said.
143. Ha-ba, corn; zhu-dse, the red; kshe, the lying; a, they said.
145. Zhin-ga, the little ones; non-bthe, food; the, they make of it;
mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; <;& i tsin da, they
shall, 150, 156, 164, 171.
146. Non-bthe, food; the, they make of it; mon-thin, as they travel
the path of life; bi, they; don, when; a, they said, 151, 157,
159, 165, 167, 172.
148. Ha-ba, corn; to-ho, the blue; kshe, the lying; a, they said.
154. Ha-ba, corn; gthe-zhe, the speckled; kshe, the lying; a, they said.
160. A-dsu-ta, their limbs; i-ga-ci-ge, stretched with growth; a bi,
spoken of as; i-the, live to see; ki-the, cause themselves to;
mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; ta i tsi" da, they
shall, 168.
162. Ha-ba, corn: ci, the yellow; kshe, the lying; a, they said.
174. Hon-ba, the days; u-ca-ki-ba, the divisions of; do-ba, the four.
175. U-hi, arrive there and enter; ki-the, cause themselves to; mon-
thin, as they travel the path of life; ta i tsin da, they shall, 177,
176. Hon-ba, the days; tha-gthin, that are calm and peaceful; shki.
and; a, they said.
TSI'-ZHU WE-HA-OE GENS (Tsr'-ZHU, LAST IN THE ORDER)
(Free translation, p. 130; Osage version, p. 349)
1. He-dsi, at that time and place; xtsi, verily; a, they said; a bin
da, it has been said; tsi, house; ga, in this.
2. Tsi-zhu, Tsi-zhu division; u-dse-the, fireplaces; ni-ka-shi-ga, a
people; ba, they; do", were.
3. Tsi-zhu We-ha-ge, Tsi-zhu, the last in order; thin-kshe, the
sitting; non, the.
4. Ha, O; wi-tsi-go-e, my grandfather; e-gi-a, they said to him; bi,
they; a, they said.
5. We-ki-k'on, symbol; thon-tse, suitable; thin-ge a-tha, there is
none; wi-tsi-go-e, my grandfather; e-gi-a, they said to him; bi,
they; a, they said.
6. Ha, O; zhin-ga, little ones; e, to say; tsi-the, he hastened; a, they
said.
7. We-ki-k'on, symbol; thon-tse, suitable; thin-ge, you have none;
e-she do", you say; a, they said.
8. We-ki-k'on, symbol; thon-tse, suitable; mi-kshe in da, I am, I
who sit here.
I.AFLESCHE] TKIBAL RITES LITERAL TRANSLATION 517
9. Wa-ca-be, of the black bear; hi", hair; zhu-dse, red; kshe, the
lying; a, they said.
10. Zhu-i-ga, my body; the, I have made; xtsi, verily; a-ni-ka-shi-ga,
I as a person, as a people; mi-kshe in da, I, who sit here.
11. Zhin-ga, the little ones; on-thon-gi-ni-tha, seek refuge in me; mon-
thin, as they travel in the path of life; bi, they; do", when.
12. U-non, old age; a bi. that which is spoken of as; i-the, live to see;
ki-the, cause themselves to; mon-thin, as they travel the path
of life; ta i tsin da, they shall, 14, 27, 29, 33, 41, 45, 47, 70.
13. U-no", as a means of reaching old age; on-the, make of me; mo",
thin, as they travel the path of life; bi, they; do", when; shki,
and; a, they said.
15. £!i-ha, the skin of the feet: u-sha-be, in which the color is dark:
ga, this; thin-kshe, the sitting; shki, also; a, they said.
16. Non-xthe, charcoal; a-gi-the, I have made it to be; a-thin he in
da, in my life's journey, 20, 24.
17. Zhin-ga, the little ones; non-xthe, charcoal; gi-the, they make of
it; mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; bi, they; don, when;
a, they said, 21, 25.
18. Non-xthe, charcoal; gi-a-da-xe, absorbable; ki-the, they shall
have; mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; ta i tsin da,
they shall, 22, 26.
19. Pa-zhu-zhe, the tip of the nose; ga, this; thin-kshe, the sitting;
shki, also; a, they said.
23. Zhu-i-ga, my body; ca-be, black; ga, this; kshe, lying; shki,
also; a, they said.
28. Zhin-ga, the little ones; zhu-i-ga, their bodies; o"-tha, they make
of me; bi, they; don, when; a, they said.
30. ^i-ha, the soles of my feet; u-thi-ptu-the, that are gathered in
folds; ga, this; thin-kshe, the sitting; shki, also; a, they said.
32. Zhi^-ga, the little ones; u-non, as a means of reaching old age;
tha, they make of it; bi, they; don, when; shki, and; a, they
said, 44, 50.
34. Hi-kon, the muscles of my ankles; ba-k'in-tha, that are wrinkled;
ga, this; thin-kshe, the sitting; shki, also; a, they said.
36. U-non, as a means of reaching old age; gi-tha, they make of it;
bi, they; don, when; shki, and; a, they said.
37. Hi-kon, the muscles of their ankles; ba-k'in-tha, wrinkled; a bi,
spoken of as; i-the, live to see; ki-the, cause themselves to;
mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; ta i tsin da, they shall.
38. Tse-wa-tse, the inner muscles of my thighs; u-ga-wa, loosened
with age; ga, this; thin-kshe, the sitting; shki, also; a, they
said.
42. Mon-ge, the muscles of my breast; u-thi-ctu-the, that are gathered
infolds; ga, this; thin-kshe, the sitting; shki, also; a, they said.
518 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 3«
46. A-zhu, the muscles of my arms; ga-wa, loosened with age; ga,
this; thin-kshe, the sitting; shki, also; a, they said.
48. A-ba-t'u-xa, my shoulder that is bent with age; ga, this; thin-
kshe, the sitting; shki, also; a, they said.
51. A-ba-t'u-xa, shoulder that is bent with age; a bi, that which is
spoken of as; i-the, live to see; ki-the, cause themselves to;
mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; ta i tsin da, they shall.
52. Du-dse, the muscles of my throat; u-ga-wa, that are loosened with
age; ga,this; thin-kshe, the sitting; shki, also; a, they said.
55. Du-dse, muscles of the throat; u-ga-wa, loosened with age; a bi,
that which is spoken of as; i-the, live to see; ki-the, cause them
selves to; mo"-thin, as they travel the path of Me; ta i tsin da,
they shall.
56. Ta-xpi, crown of the head; hi", the hair of; ca-dse, thinned with
age; ga, this; thin-kshe, the sitting; shki, also; a, they said.
58. Zhin-ga, the little ones; no", old age; hi, arrive at; bi, they; don,
when; a, they said.
59. Ta-xpi, the crown of the head; hin, the hair of; pa-dse, thinned
with age; a bi, that which is spoken of as; i-the, live to see;
ki-the, cause themselves to; mon-thin, as they travel the path
of life; ta i tsin da, they shall.
60. Pa-xin, the hair of the head; ca-dse, thinned with age; ci e-gon,
turned yellowish in color; ga, this; thin-kshe, the sitting; shki,
also; a, they said.
61. E-shki don, that also; a, they said.
63. Zhin-ga, the little ones; zho-i-ga, their bodies; on-tha, they make,
of me; bi, they; don, when; a, they said.
64. Pa-xin, hair of the head; ca-dse, thinned with age; ?i e-gon,
turned yellowish in color; a bi, that which is spoken of as;
i-the, live to see; ki-the, cause themselves to; mon-thin, as they
travel the path of life; ta i tsi" da, they shall.
65. Hon-ba, the days; u-ca-ki-ba, the divisions of; do-ba, the four.
66. U-hi, to reach and enter; ki-the, cause themselves to; mon-thin,
as they travel the path of life; ta i tsin da, they shall.
67. Wa-zha-zhe, the people of the Wa-zha-zhe subdivision; a, they
said.
68. Hon-ga, and those of the Hon-ga subdivision; e-thon-ba, the two
together.
69. Zhu-i-ga, their bodies; on-tha, they make of me; bi, they; don
when; a, they said.
TSE THON/-KA (BUFFALO BACK) GENS
(Free translation, p. 132; Osage version, p. 351)
1. He-dsi, at that time and place; xtsi, verily; a, they said; a bin
da, it has been said; tsi, house; ga, in this.
2. Tsi-zhu, Tsi-zhu division; u-dse-the, fireplaces; pe-thon-ba, seven;
ni-ka-shi-ga, person, a people; ba, they; do", were; a, they said.
LAFLESCHE] TRIBAL RITES LITERAL TRANSLATION 519
3. Tse-thon-ka, buffalo back; to", the standing; non, the; a, they
said.
4. Ha, O; wi-tsi-go-e, my grandfather; e-gi-a, they said to him; bi,
they; a, they said.
5. We-ki-k'on, symbol; thon-tse, suitable; thin-ge a-tha, there is
none; wi-tsi-go-e, my grandfather; e-gi-a, they said to him; bi,
they; a, they said.
6. Ha, O; zhin-ga, little ones; e, to say; tsi-the, he hastened; a, they
said.
7. We-ki-k'oD, symbol; thon-tse, suitable; thin-ge, you have none;
e-she don, you have said; a, they said.
8. We-ki-k'on, a symbol; thon-tse, suitable; a-ton he in da, I am, I
who stand here.
9. Wa-zha-zhe, the people of the Wa-zha-zhe subdivision; a, they
said.
10. Tsi-zhu, those of the Tsi-zhu division; e-thon-ba, the two together.
11. We-ki-k'on, a symbol; on-the, make of me; mon-thin, as they
travel the path of life; ta i tsi" da, they shall.
12. Non-be, my hands; dsu-dse, to be frequently burnt; on-tha, they
shall cause them to; mon-thin, as they travel the path of life;
ta i tsin da, they shall.
13. Non-be, my hands; dsu-dse, frequently burnt; o°-the, they cause
them to be; mon-thi°, as they travel the path of life; bi, they;
don, when; a, they said.
14. U-non, old age; a bi, that which is spoken of as; i-the, live to see;
mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; \,& i tsi" da, they shall.
15. U-non, as a means to reach old age; on-tha, they make of me; bi,
they; don, when; a, they said.
16. Hon-ba, the days; u-ca-ki-ba, the divisions of; do-ba, the four.
17. U-hi, arrive at and enter; ki-the, cause themselves to; mon-thin,
as they travel the path of life; (a i tsin da, they shall.
NI'-KA WA-KON-DA-OI (MEN OF MYSTERY) GENS
(Free translation, p. 133; Osage version, p. 352)
1. He-dsi, at that time and place; xtsi, verily; a, they said; a bi"
da, it has been said; (si, house; ga, in this, 15, 23, 32, 40.
2. Tsi-zhu, Tsi-zhu division; u-dse-the, fireplaces; pe-thon-ba, seven;
ni-ka-shi-ga, a people; ba, they; do", were; a, they said.
3. Ni-ka Wa-kon-da-gi, the men of mystery; thin-kshe, the sitting;
a, they said.
4. Ha, O; wi-tsi-go-e, my grandfather; e-gi-a, they said to him; bi,
they; a, they said.
5. We-ki-k'on, symbol; thon-tse, suitable; thin-ge a-tha, there is
none; wi-^si-go-e, my grandfather; e-gi-a, they said to him; bi,
they; a, they said.
520 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
6. Ha, O; zhin-ga, little ones; e, to say; tsi-the, he hastened; a, they
said.
7. We-ki-k'o", symbol; thon-tse, suitable; thin-ge, you have none;
e-she don, you have said; a, they said.
8. We-ki-k'on, symbol; thon-tse, suitable; mi-kshe in da, I am, I
who sit here.
9. Mon-ce, metal; zhu-dse, the red; thin-kshe, the sitting; a, they
said.
10. Zhu-i-ga, my body; the, I have made of it; xtsi, verily; a-ni-ka-
shi-ga in da, I as a person, as a people, 17, 25, 34, 46.
11. Zhin-ga, the little ones; zhu-i-ga, their bodies; on-tha, they make
of me; bi, they; don, when; a, they said, 26, 28, 35, 49.
12. U-non, old age; a bi, that which is spoken of as; i-the, live to
see; ki-the, cause themselves to; mon-thin, as they travel the
path of life; ta i tsin da, they shall, 19, 31, 39, 50, 52.
13. U-non, old age; a bi, that which is spoken of as; i-the, live to see;
ki-the, cause themselves to; mon-thin, as they travel the path
of life; bi, they; don, when; a, they said.
14. I-ts'a, causes of death; thin-ge, having none; mon-thin, as they
travel the path of life; $a i tsin da, they shall, 36.
16. Mon-ce, metal; ca-be, the black; thivkshe, the sitting; a, they
said, 20.
18. Zhin-ga. the little ones; zhu-i-ga, their bodies; tha, they make of
it; bi, they; don, when; a, they said, 26, 28, 35, 49.
21. Zhu-i-ga, their bodies; the, they make of it; mon-thin, as they
travel the path of life; bi, they; do", when; a, they said.
22. Xhin-ha, a skin; ca-gi, that is hard and impenetrable; a bi, that
is spoken of as; i-the, live to see; ki-the, cause themselves to;
mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; ta i tsin da, they shall.
24. Mon-ce, metal ; ca-tha-ge, loose, rough; thin-kshe, the sitting; non,
the; a, they said, 27.
29. Ts'e, to die; wa-tse-xi, difficult to ; ki-the, cause themselves to be;
mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; ta i tsin da, they
shall, 37.
30. U-non, as a means of reaching old age; tha, they make of it; bi,
they; don, when; shki, and; a, they said, 38.
33. Mon-ce, metal; ci, the yellow; thin-kshe, the sitting; non, the; a,
they said.
41. Hon-ba, the days; do-ba, the four; shki, and; a, they said.
42. U-hi, arrive there and enter; ki-the, cause themselves to; mon-
thin, as they travel the path of life; t& i tsin da, they shall.
43. Zhin-ga, the little ones; zhu-i-ga, their bodies; tha, of which to
make; bi, they; ga, are these; non-shin da, that stand.
44. Ba-ci, hailstone; ca-gi, the hard; thin-kshe, the sitting; non, the;
a, they said.
LAFLESCHE] TRIBAL RITES LITERAL TRANSLATION 521
45. Ga, this; thi°-kshe, the sitting; shki, also; a, they said.
47. Wa-ton-ci, corn; ca-gi, the hard (flint); thin-kshe, the sitting;
no", the; a, they said.
48. I-tha-ki-thon-ba, these two together; xtsi, verily; a-ni-ka-shi-ga
in da, of them I make myself to be a person, a people.
51. Zhin-ga, the little ones; non-bthe, food; gi-the, they make of it;
mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; bi, they; don, when;
shki, and; a, they said.
THO'-XE PA THI-HON (BUFFALO BULL) GENS
(Free translation, p. 134; Osage version, p. 353)
1. He-dsi, at that time and place; xtsi, verily; a, they said; a bin
da, it has been said; tsi, house; ga, in this, 7, 17, 21, 29, 41, 47,
57, 68, 79, 92, 114, 120, 132, 140.
2. Tsi-zhu, Tsi-zhu division; u-dse-the, fireplaces; pe-thon-ba, seven ;
ni-ka-shi-ga, a people; ba, they; do", were; a, they said.
3. Tho-xe, archaic name for buffulo bull; Pa' head; thi-hon, lift; ton,
the standing; non, the; a, they said.
4. Ha, O; wi-tsi-go-e, my grandfather; e-gi-a, they said to him; bi,
they; a, they said.
5. We-ki-k'on, symbol; thon-tse, suitable; thin-ge, a-tha, there is
none; wi-tsi-go-e, my grandfather; e-gi-a, they said to him; bi,
they; a, they said.
6. Hiu-dse, down, to earth; shi tse a, will you come; wi-tsi-go-e, my
grandfather: e-gi-a, they said to him; bi, they; a, they said.
8. Tsi-zhu, the Tsi-zhu gens; Wa-shta-ge, the gentle; thin-kshe, the
sitting; no", the; a, they said.
9. ^)ka-gthe, plume: zhti-dse, red: kshe, the lying; no", the; a, they
said.
10. Gthiu-ce, to take from its coverings; tsi-the, he hastened; dou,
and; a, they said.
11. The-ce, the tongue, of Tho-xe: tha-ta, at the left side; dsi, there;
a, they said.
12. U-ha, along side its full length; i-tse-the, placed; to", as he stood;
a, they said.
13. (^Y-dse, tail; u-thi-xpa-the, to drop (he had lifted his tail in
anger) ; i-non-the, down ; ga-xe, forced him to ; a, they said.
14. Ha, O; Tsi-zhu e, Tsi-zhu ; e, to say; tsi-the, he hastened ; a, they
said.
15. We-ki-k'o", symbol; thon-tse, suitable; thin-ge, you have none;
e she don, you have said.
16. We-ki-k'o", symbol; thon-tse, suitable; a to" he i" da, I am, 1 who
stand here.
18. ^in-dse, the hair of his tail; thi-bo-xa, expanded; tsi-the, with a
quick motion; do", and; a, they said.
522 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
19. Mon-sho-dse, dust, or mist; the-ton-ha, distance; shki, even at
this; wa-ton-in, clear, visible; a-zhi, not; i-non-zhin, to stand;
ga-xe, he made, or caused; ton, as he stood; a, they said.
20. E-dsi, present; zhi, not; the, moving; thin-ge, none; a-ni-ka-
shi-ga, I, as a person; Tsi-zhu-e, O, Tsi-zhu; e, saying; to", he
stood; a, they said.
22. Mon-ki-cin-dse, he threw himself upon the earth; tsi-the, with a
quick motion; do", and; a, they said, 30.
23. Mon-kon-ton-ga zhin-ga, the little great medicine (poppy mallow) ;
thin-kshe, the sitting; no", the; a, they said.
24. U-ga-ton-tha, sent rolling upon the earth; tsi-the, with a quick
motion; to", as he stood; a, they said, 32, 60, 81.
25. Ga, this (the root of the poppy mallow); shki, also; a, they
said, 33.
26. Mon-kon, a medicine; the, they shall make of it; mon-thin, as they
travel the path of life; ta i tsin da, they shall, 72, 83, 95, 117,
156.
27. Zhin-ga, the little ones; mon-kon, a medicine; the, they make of
it; mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; bi, they; do", when;
a, they said, 45, 51, 55, 66, 77, 84, 90, 96, 102, 106, 118, 122,
126, 130, 143, 147, 151, 157, 161.
28. U-non, old age; a bi, that which is spoken of as; i-the, live to see;
ki-the, cause themselves to; mon-thin, as they travel the path
of life; ta i tsin da, they shall, 46, 52, 56, 67, 78, 91, 97, 103, 107,
119, 123, 127, 131, 139, 144, 148, 152, 158, 162.
31. Ha-ba-kon-ce-ci-da, ripens-with-the-corn (plant commonly called
blazing star); to", the standing; non, the; a, they said.
34. Mon-kon, medicine; tha, they make of it; ba, they; thon-tse, a,
may be suitable for; wi-tsi-go-e, my grandfather; e-gi-a, they
said to him; bi, they said.
35. I-u-tha-bthon-ce, in their mouths munched it; a-tsia-tha, hastily;
ba, they; don, and; a, they said.
36. I, mouth; u-wa-pa, it is better within the; xtsi a, verily; wi-tsi-
go-e, my grandfather.
37. Ts'u-xe a, it is astringent; wi-tsi-go-e, my grandfather; e-gi-a,
they said to him; bi, they; a, they said.
38. Zha-zhe, a personal name; on-ki-ton ta bi a, we shall make it to
be for ourselves; wi-tsi-go-e, my grandfather; e-gi-a, they said
to him; bi, they; a, they said, 40.
39. Ts'u-xe, Astringent; shki, also; a, they said.
42. Mon-kon-ton-ga, the great medicine; ton, the standing; no", the;
a, they said.
43. Tho, present; ton, standing; hi, arriving there; non-zhin, to stand;
ga-xe, he made it to; a, they said.
I.A FI.BSCHK] TRIBAL RITES — LITERAL TRANSLATION 523
44. Zhi"-ga, the little ones; mon-ko", medicine; the, make of it; mon-
thin, as they travel the path of life; ta hi a, they shall; wi-tsi-
go-e, my grandfather; e-gi-a, they said to him; bi, they; a,
they said, 50.
48. Mo"-kon, medicine; ni-ka-shi-ga, man; to", the standing; no", the;
a, they said.
49. Tho, in his presence; hi, having arrived at; non-zhin, they stood;
bi, they; a, they said.
53. Wa-zha-zhe, the people of the Wa-zha-zhe subdivision; a, they
said, 104, 135, 159.
54. Hon-ga, those of the Hon-ga subdivision; e-thon-ba, the two
together, 105, 136, 160.
58. Hon-a-don, what; zhin-ga, the little ones; zhu-i-ga, their bodies;
tha, they make of; bi, they; gon non, shall; shki, and; a hin a,
interrogative particles.
59. Ha-ba, corn; zhu-dse, the red; kshe, the lying; no", the; a, they
said.
61. Wa-ton, squash; zhu-dse, the red; thin-kshe, the sitting; a, they
said.
62. E-ki-tho"-ba, with it making two, or a pair; xtsi, verily; a, they
said, 64.
63. Wa-dsu-ta, animal, buffalo; hi", hair; zhiu-dse, the red; kshe,
the lying; a, they said.
65. U-ga-to"-tha, sent rolling forth; i-thc-the, beyond sight; a-ka, he.
69. Hon-a-don, what; mon-kon, medicine; tha, they make of; bi,
they; go" no", shall; shki, and; a hi" a, interrogative particles,
115.
70. Ha-ba, corn; to-ho, the blue; kshe, the lying; a, they said.
71. Ga, this; kshe, the lying; a, they said, 82.
73. Wa-to", squash; ca-be, the black; thi"-kshe, the sitting; a, they
said.
74. E-ki-thon-ba, with it making two, or a pair; on-ga-xe, we make
of them; ta, shall; bi a, we; wi-co°-ga, my younger brothers;
e-ki-a, they said to one another; bi, they; a, they said.
75. Wa-dsn-ta, animal, buffalo; hi", hair; sha-be, dark; kshe, the
lying; a, they said.
76. E-ki-tho"-ba, with it making two, or a pair; on-ga-xe, we make
of them; ta bi a, we shall; wi-tsi-go-e, my grandfather; e-gi-a,
they said to him; bi, they; a, they said, 87, 89, 99.
80. Ha-ba, corn; gthe-zhe, the speckled; kshe, the lying; a, they
said.
85. A-dsu-ta, their limbs; i-ga-ci-ge, to stretch in growth by its use;
ki-the, cause them to; mo"-thin, a.s they travel the path of
life; ta i tsin da, they shall, 108.
524 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
86. Wa-ton, squash; gthe-zhe, the speckled; thin-kshe, the sitting;
a, they said.
88. Wa-dsu-ta, animal; gthe-she, speckled; kshe, the lying; a, they
said.
93. Zhin-ga, the little ones; mon-kon, medicine; tha, they make of:
bi, they; ga, these; non-zhin da, shall stand.
94. Ha-ba, corn; ci, the yellow: kshe, the lying; a, they said.
98. Wa-ton, squash; ci, the yellow; thin-kshe, the sitting; no", the;
a, they said.
100. Wa-dsu-ta, animal; hin, hair; ci, the yellow; kshe, the lying; a,
they said.
101. I-tha-thu-ce, as a means of bringing; on-ga-xe, we make of it;
ta bi a, we shall; wi-tsi-go-e, my grandfather; e-gi-a, they said
to him; bi, they; a, they said.
109. Hon-ba, the days; u-ca-ki-ba, the divisions of.
110. Hon-ba, the days; u-ca-ki-ba, the divisions of; do-ba, the four;
shki, even those; a, they said.
111. U-hi, to reach and to enter; ki-the, cause themselves to; mon-
thin, as they travel the path of life; ta i tsin da, they shall, 113.
112. Hon-ba, the days; tha-gthin, that are calm and peaceful; shki,
also; a, they said.
116. Wa-dsu-ta, animal; wa-non, the aged, the aged bull; to", the
standing; a, they said.
121. Ni-dse, muscles of the hind quarters; sho-ga, thick; ta-be, the
ball-like; ga, these; thivkshe, the sitting; shki, also; a, they
said.
124. Thi-u-ba-he, the side of my body; tha-ta, the left; ga, this; kshe,
the lying; a, they said.
125. Mon-kon, medicine; a-gi-the, I have made it to be; a-thin-he in
da, in my life's journey, 129.
128. Non-ka-on-he, the muscles of the spine; ga, this; kshe, the lying;
a, they said, 133.
134. We-cda-the, as a healing ointment, referring to the fat, and for
ceremonial use; a-gi-the, I have made it to be; a-ton he in da,
I who stand here.
137. We-cda-the, shall use the oil of it for ceremonial purposes; mon-
thin, as they travel the path of life; ta i tsin da, they shall.
138. We-cda-the, when they use the oil thereof; mon-thin, as they
travel the path of life; bi, they; don, when; a, they said.
141. Thi-u-ba-he, the side of my body; i-sdu-ge, the right; ga, this;
kshe, the lying; a, they said.
142. Mon-kon, medicine; a-gi-the, I have made it to be; a-ton he in da,
I who stand here, 146, 150.
145. Mon-ge-on-he, the muscles of the breast; ga, this; kshe, the
lying; a, they said.
LAFLISCHK] TRIBAL RITES LITERAL TRANSLATION 525
149. Thon-dse u-thi-xin, that which surrounds the heart, the heart
covering; ga, this; thiVkshe, the sitting; shki, also; a, they
said.
153. A-hiu-ha, arms, limbs; wi-ta, mine.
154. Zhu-i-ga, body; wi-ta, mine.
155. Zhu-i-ga, my body; shon e-gon, in all its parts; xtsi, verily; a,
they said.
ToN/-woN A-DON-BE (VILLAGE OVERSEER)
(Free translation, p. 147; Osage version, p. 357)
1. He-dsi, at that time and place; xtsi, verily; a, they said; a bin da,
it has been said; (si, house; ga, this, 4, 10.
2. Ha, O; wi-tsi-go-e, my grandfather; e-gi-a, they said to him; bi,
they; a, they said, 12, 51.
3. We-ki-k'on, symbols; thoMse, suitable; thin-ge a-tha, there are
none; wi-tsi-go-e, my grandfather; e-gi-a, they said to him; bi,
they; a, they said.
5. We-ki-k'on, symbols; thon-tse, suitable; thin-ge, there are none;
e-she do", you have said; a, they said.
6. Ha, O; zhin-ga, little ones; e, to say; tsi-the, he hastened; a, they
said.
7. Wa-kon-da, gods; gthon-the, great; do-ba, there are four, 8.
9. Ki-cto, assembled as though to hold a council; tse a, let them be;
wi-tsi-go-e, my grandfather; e, to say; tsi-the, they hastened;
a, they said.
11. Hon-ba, the god (day); wa-cu, the clear, cloudless, calm; ga, this;
ton, standing; a, they said.
12. Ha, O; wi-tsi-go-e, my grandfather; e-gi-a, they said to him; bi,
they; a, they said, 51.
13. Zhin-ga, the little ones; zho-i-ga, their bodies; tha, of which to
make; bi, they; thin-ge a-tha, there is none; wi-tsi-go-e, my
grandfather; e-gi-a, they said to him; bi, they; a, they said.
15. Wa-kon-da, god; gthon-the, great; wi non, I alone; bthi" in da,
I am.
16. Zhin-ga, the little ones; zho-i-ga, their bodies; on- tha, they make
of me; ba, they; suitable; mi-kshe in da, I am.
17. Zhin-ga, the little ones; zho-i-ga, their bodies; on-tha, they make
of me; bi, they; do", when; a, they said, 28, 36, 54, 68, 83.
18. U-non, old age; a bi, that which is spoken of as; i-the, live to see;
ki-the, cause themselves to; mon-thin, as they travel the path
of life; t» i tsi" da, they shall, 29, 37, 55, 60, 69.
19. Hon-ba, the days; u-ca-ki-ba, the divisions of; do-ba, the four,
24, 43, 61, 77.
526 THE OSAGE TRIBE [KTH. ANN. 36
20. U-hi, arrive there and enter; ki-the, cause themselves to; mon-
thin, as they travel the path of life; ta i tsin da, they shall, 25,
27, 44, 62, 78, 80.
21. Wa-zha-zhe, the people of the Wa-zha-zhe subdivision; i-da-be,
together; a, they said, 38, 56, 72.
22. Hon-ga, those of the Hon-ga subdivision; i-da-be, together; a,
they said, 39, 57, 73.
23. Tsi-zhu, those of the Tsi-zhu division; i-da-be, together; a, they
said, 40, 58, 74.
26. Hon-ba, the days; tha-gthin, that are calm and peaceful; xtsi,
verily; a, they said.
30. Wa-kon-da, goddess; hon-non-pa-ce, of the dark night; ga, this;
ton, standing; a, they said.
31. Ha, O; i-ko-e, my grandmother; e-gi-a, they said to her; bi, they;
a, they said, 65.
32. Zhin-ga, the little ones; zho-i-ga, their bodies; tha, of which to
make; bi, they; thin-ge a-tha, there is none; I-ko-e, my grand
mother; e-gi-a, they said to her; bi, they;-a, they said, 66.
34. Zhin-ga, the little ones; zho-i-ga, their bodies; tha, of which to
make; bi, they; thin-ge, there is none; e-she, do", you have
said; a, they said.
35. Zhin-ga, the little ones; zho-i-ga, their bodies; on-the, they make
of me; mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; ^& i tsin da,
they shall, 41.
35. Zho-i-ga, their bodies; on-the, they make of me; mon-thin, as they
travel the path of life; bi, they; do", when; a, they said, 59, 75.
45. Zhin-ga-zhin-ga, little ones, children, 70.
46. U-ki-wa-wa-the, in uninterrupted succession, an unbroken line
of descendants ; xtsi, verily; i-the, live to see; ki-the, cause
themselves to; mon-thin, a's they travel the path of life; ta i
tsin da, they shall, 71, 76, 84.
47. Hon-ba, the days; tha-gthin, that are calm and peaceful; shki,
and; a, they said.
48. U-ni-ka-shi-ga, to abide in as a people; ki-the, cause themselves
to; mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; ta i tsin da, they
shall;
49. Wa-kon-da, god; gthon-the, great ; wi no", I alone; bthi", I; mon-
zhi in da, I am not.
50. Wa-kon-da, god; mon-shi ta, the above, of the upper regions, the
sky; ga, this; kshe, the lying; a, they said.
52. Zhin-ga, the little ones; ni-ka-shi-ga, a people: bi a, they are now,
they have become; wi-tsi-go-e, my grandfather; e-gi-a, they
said to him; bi, they; a, they said.
LATLKSCHK] TRIBAL RITES LITERAL TRANSLATION 527
53. Zhin-ga, the little ones; zho-i-ga, their bodies; on-tha, they make
of me; ba, they; thon-tse, suitable; mi-kshe in da, I am, I who
sit here, 67.
64. Wa-kon-da goddess; hiu-dse ta, the below of the lower regions,
the earth; ga, this; kshe, the lying; a, they said.
79. Hon-ba, the days; tha-gthin, that are calm and peaceful; xtsi,
verily; shki, and; a, they said.
81. Wa-kon-da, the gods ; shon e-gon, all of them ; xtsi, verily; a, they
said.
82. U-xthi, anger, violence; thin-ge, having none; i-he a-the, I have
made them to lie down; a-ton-he in da, I who stand here.
THE NI'-KI NON-K'ON
(THE HEARING OF THE SAYINGS OF THE ANCIENT MEN)
(Free translation, p. 157; Osage version, p. 3P9)
1. He-dsi, at that time and place; xtsi, verily; a, they said; a bin da,
. it has been said; tsi, house; ga, this, 3, 6, 8, 12, 48, 50, 53, 55,
59, 88, 90, 94, 96, 100, 108, 127, 134, 136, 140, 142, 147, 170,
177, 179, 184, 187, 192, 202, 212, 215, 227, 231, 241, 243, 245,
251, 254, 260, 266, 274, 280, 284, 287, 289, 292, 295, 298, 314,
323, 341, 344, 347, 355, 375, 381, 388, 420, 434, 438, 443, 454,
468, 472, 489, 500, 514, 525, 534, 537, 557, 563, 568, 574, 580,
586, 592, 612, 618, 623, 629, 635, 641, 647, 667, 673, 678, 684,
690, 696, 702, 722, 728, 783, 739, 745, 751, 757, 767, 790, 801,
816, 823, 848, 853, 858, 871, 878, 901, 909, 924, 943, 955, 965,
975, 984, 988, 990, 998, 1014, 1024, 1063, 1065, 1071, 1073,
1104, 1116, 1120, 1123, 1163, 1167, 1177, 1183, 1190, 1199, 1213,
1226, 1230, 1247, 1258, 1272, 1282, 1293, 1296, 1299, 1304, 1306,
1308, 1314, 1338, 1340, 1351, 1364, 1385, 1391, 1396, 1405, 1447,
1461, 1503, 1528.
2. Hon-ga, the sacred, name of the Hon-ga subdivision; u-dse-the,
fireplaces; j>e-thon-ba, seven; ni-ka-shi-gai, people; bi, they; a,
they say, 48, 49, 89, 135, 242, 436, 538, 593, 648, 703, 758, 824,
872, 985, 1164, 1200, 1214, 1227, 1294, 1365, 1448.
4. Ha, O! wi-con-ga, my younger brothers; e-ki-e, said to one
another; non-zhin, stood; bi, they; a, they said, 51, 91, 137, 180,
203, 275; 436, 986, 1297.
5. Zhin-ga, little ones; hiu-dse, below; ta, there; ni-ka-shi-ga, people;
ba, they; thon-ta, should; zhi, not; a, oral question sign;
wi-con-ga, my younger brothers; e-ki-e, said to one another;
non-zhin, stood; bi, they; a, they said, 52, 93, 139, 178.
7. Wa-kon-da, gods; gtho°-the, great; do-ba, four, 54, 95, 141.
9. Wa-kon-da, god; hon-ba, day; don, of; thin-kshe, sitting; a, they
said, 862, 865, 1171.
528 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 86
10. Ha, O! wi-tsi-go-e, my grandfather; e-gi-a, they said to him; bi
a, they; a, they said, 98, 210, 229, 249, 554, 609, 664, 719, 776,
795, 846, 996, 1022, 1047.
11. Zhin-ga, little ones; hiu-dse, below; ta, there; ni-ka-shi-ga, people;
ba, they; thon-ta, should; zhi, not; a, question sign; wi-tsi-go-e,
my grandfather; e-gi-a, they said to him; bi, they; a, they
said, 99.
13. Zhinga, little ones; ni-ka-shi-ga, persons; bi, they; e-sha bi a,
you have said, 148.
14. Zhin-ga, little ones; hiu-dse, below; ta, there; ni-ka-shi-ga, people;
ta, should; bi, they; e-sha in da, you have said, 60, 101, 185.
15. Zhin-ga, little ones; zho-i-ga, bodies; on-tha, make of me; ba, they;
thon-ta, suitable; mi-kshe in da, I am, 559, 614, 669, 724, 779,
797, 812, 836.
16. Zhin-ga, little ones; hiu-dse, below; ta, there; ni-ka-shi-ga, people;
bi, they; don, when, 61, 102, 149.
17. U-non, old age; a bi, called; i-the, find; ki-the, cause themselves
to; mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; ta, shall; bi, they;
a, they said; zhin-ga, little ones, 23, 25, 27, 29, 31, 34, 38, 62,
66, 68, 70, 72, 74, 103, 105, 107, 110, 112, 114, 116, 118, 120,
150, 152, 154, 156, 158, 160, 340, 788, 822, 870, 941.
18. (^i-pa, toes; thi-ctu-the, gathered in a cluster; ga, behold; thin-
kshe, sitting; a, they said, 63, 104, 151.
19. U-non, old age; on-gi-the, make of me the means; mon-thin, as
they travel the path of life ; ta bi a, shall ; zhin-ga, little ones,
21, 64.
20. Hi-kon, ankles; ba-ei'n-tha, wrinkled; ga, behold; thin-kshe, sit
ting; a, they said, 65, 106, 153.
22. Shi-non-dse, knees; ba-ci'n-tha, wrinkled; ga, behold; kshe, lay,
a, they said, 67, 109, 155.
24. Tse-wa-tse-u-ga-wa, inner muscles of the thigh ; ga, behold; thin-
kshe, sitting; shki, also; a, they said, 69, 111, 157.
26. Mon-ge-thi-9tu-the, muscles of the breast gathered in folds; ga,
behold; thin-kshe, sitting; shki, also; a, they said, 71, 113,
159.
28. A-zhu-ga-wa, flabby muscles of the arm; ga, behold; thin-kshe,
sitting; shki, also; a, they said, 73, 115, 161.
30. Do-dse-u-ga-wa, flabby muscles of the throat; ga, behold; thin,
kshe, sitting; shki, also; a, they said, 117, 163.
32. Pa-hin, hair of the head; ca-dse, scant; ci e-gon, yellowish; ga,
behold; thin-kshe, sitting; shki, also; a, they said, 75, 121-
167.
33. E-shki don, those also, 79, 363, 369, 404, 407, 411, 1261, 1275,
1328, 1354.
LAFLBSCHE] TRIBAL RITES LITERAL TRANSLATION 529
35. U-no", old age; on-tha, make of me; bi, they; do", when; a, they
said, 39.
36. fa-hi", hair of the head; ca-dse, scant; ci e-gon, yellowish; a bi,
spoken of as; i-the, see; ki-the, cause themselves to; mon-
thin, as they travel the path of life; ta, shall; bi a, they shall;
zhin-ga, little ones, 77, 123, 169.
37. Ta-xpi, crown of the head; hin, hair; ca-dse, scant; ga, behold;
thin-kshe, sitting; shki, also; a, they said, 78, 124.
40. Ta-xpi, crown of the head; hi", hair; ca-dse, scant; a bi, spoken
of as; i-the, see; ki-the, cause themselves to; mon-thin, walk;
ta bin da, they shall, 81, 126, 857, 860.
41. Hon-ba, days; do-ba, four, 867.
43. Zhin-ga, little ones; zho-i-ga, bodies; on-tha, make of me; bi,
they; do", when; a, they said, 220, 225, 239, 258, 272, 561,
566, 571, 577, 583, 589, 616, 621, 626, 632, 638, 644, 671, 676,
681, 687, 693, 699, 726, 731, 736, 742, 748, 754, 781, 787, 814,
851, 864.
44. Hon-ba, days; u-ca-ki-ba, divisions; do-ba, four, 82, 84, 128,
130, 171, 173, 868.
45. U-hi, to reach and to enter; ki-the, cause themselves to; mon-
thin, as they travel the path of life; ta, shall; i, they; tsin da,
they shall, 83, 129, 172.
46. Hon-ba. days; tha-gthin, calm and peaceful; shki, also; a, they
said, 86, 132, 175.
47. U-ni-ka-shi-ga, abide in as a people; ki-the, cause themselves to;
mon-thin, as they travel the path of life ; ta, shah1 ; bi a, they ;
zhin-ga, little ones, 85, 87, 105, 133, 174, 176.
56. Wa-kon-da, god; hon, night; do", of; thin-kshe, sitting; a, they
said.
57. Ha, O!, i-ko-e, grandmother; e-gi-a, they said (toher);bi, they;
a, they said, 144.
58. Zhin-ga, little ones; hiu-dse, below; ta, there; ni-ka-shi-ga, peo
ple; ba, they; thon-ta, should; zhi, not; a, question sign;
i-ko-e, grandmother; e-gi-a, they said to her; bi, they; a, they
said, 146.
76. Zhin-ga, little ones, 80, 122, 125, 168, 373.
92. Zhin-ga, little ones; ni-ka-shi-ga, persons; bi a, they are; wi-
con-ga, my younger brothers; e-ki-e, said to one another;
non-zhin, stood; bi, they; a, they said, 138.
97. Wa-tse, star; do-ga, male; thin-kshe, sitting; a, they said.
119. A-ba, shoulder; t'u-xa, bent; ga, behold; thin-kshe, sitting;
shki, also; a, they said, 165.
143. Wa-tse, star; mi-ga, female; thin-kshe, sitting; a, they said.
278&— 21 34
530 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
145. Zhin-ga, little ones; ni-ka-shi-ga, persons; bi a, they are; i-ko-e,
grandmother; e-gi-a, said to her; bi, they; a, they said.
162. A-zhu-ga-wa, flabby muscles of the arm; a bi, spoken of as;
i-the, see; ki-the, to cause themselves to; mon-thin, as they
travel the path of life; ta, shall ; bi a, they; zhin-ga, little ones.
164. Do-dse u-ga-wa, flabby muscles of the throat; a bi, spoken of
as; i-the, see; ki-the, to cause themselves to; mon-thin, as they
travel the path of life; ta, shall; bi a, they; zhin-ga, little ones.
166. A-ba, shoulder; t'u-xa, bent; a-bi, spoken of as; i-the, see;
ki-the, to cause themselves to; mon-thin, as they travel the
path of life; ta, shall; bi a, they; zhin-ga, little ones.
181. Hon-ga, sacred one; a-hiu-ton, possessing wings; ton, standing;
no", the; a, they said, 827.
182. Ha, CM; wi-con-ga, my younger brother; e-gi-a, they said to him;
bi, they; a, they said, 205, 278, 293, 876, 888, 915, 919, 937,
947, 958, 1421, 1435.
183. Zhin-ga, little ones; hiu-dse, below; ta, there; ni-ka-shi-ga, peo
ple; ta, shall; bi a, they; wi-con-ga e, my younger brother;
e-gi-e, they said to him; non-zhin, stood; bi, they; a, they said.
186. O-ton-be, search for a way; pa-xe, I make; $a, shall; mi-kshe a,
sitting; wi-zhin-the, my elder brothers; e-tsi-the, he quickly
said; a, they said.
188. Mon-xe, heavens; u-ca-ki-ba, divisions; do-ba, four.
189. O-ga-win-xe, soaring; non-zhin, stood; a, they said, 191.
190. O-ga-win-xe, soaring; do-ba-four; a, they said.
193. Zhon-pa-ci, treetops; pe-thon-ba, seven; bin da, there were,
195, 198.
194. He-dsi, there at that place; xtsi, verily; hi, arrived; non-zhin,
standing; ton, paused; a, they said, 442, 544, 599, 654, 709,
764, 794, 832, 882, 898, 931, 972, 1046, 1375, 1381, 1408,
1418, 1432, 1467, 1478, 1489, 1497.
196. A-hiu-he, alighted upon; a-ka, they.
197. Hon-ga, the sacred; u-dse-the, fireplaces; pe-thon-ba, seven; bin
da, the.
199. A-ton, stood upon; i-he, all at the same time.
200. Ha, O!; wi-con-ga, younger brothers, 451.
201. Non, look you; zhin-ga, little ones; hiu-dse. below; ta, there;
ni-ka-shi, people; ba, they; thon-ta, possible; zhi a, not;
wi-con-ga, my younger brothers; e-ki-e, said to one another;
non-zhin, stood; bi, they; a, they said.
204. Hon-ga, sacred one; Wa-tse-ga-wa, Star-radiant; ton, standing;
non, the; a, they said, 207, 246, 261, 277, 439, 541, 596, 651,
706, 761, 791, 875, 927, 946, 968, 991, 1015, 1042, 1066,1083,
1369, 1451.
I.AFLBSCHI] TRIBAL KITES— LITERAL TRANSLATION 531
206. Zhin-ga, little ones; hiu-dse, below; $&, there; ni-ka-shi-ga,
people; ba, they; thon-ta, possible; zhi a, not; wi-con-ga, ray
younger brother; e-gi-e, they said to him; non-zhin, stood; bi,
they; a, they said.
208. Ga, as soon as; xtsi, verily: hi tha, spake; i, they; do", when;
a, they said, 234, 247, 255, 262, 269, 281, 762, 1016.
209. Tse-xo-be, spider; e-gon, resembles; e-de, that; a, they said.
211. Zhin-ga, little ones; ni, water; a-ga-ha, upon; ba, they; thon-ta,
possible; zhi a, not; wi-tsi-go e, O, my grandfather; e-gi-a,
said to him; bi, they; a, they said, 230, 250, 265.
213. Zhin-ga, little ones; ni, water; a-ga-ha, upon; ba, they; thon-ta,
possible; zhi, not; e-sha, in da, you have said, 232, 296.
214. O-ton-be, search for a way; pa-xe, I make; t&, shall; mi-kshe a,
I who sit here; zhin-ga, little ones; e, saying; to", stood; a,
they said, 233, 253, 268.
216. Ni, water; ki-mon-hon, against the wind or current; xtsi, verily;
a, they said, 235.
217. Ni, water; a-ga-ha, upon; a-ton-thin, running upon; e-gon, as
though; zhon, lay; a, they said.
218. Wa-kon-da, God; e-shkidon, even himself; a, they said, 221, 564,
569, 572, 575, 578, 581, 584, 587, 590, 619, 624, 627, 630, 633,
636, 639, 642, 645, 674, 679, 682, 685, 688, 691, 694, 697, 700,
729, 734, 737, 740, 743, 746, 749, 752, 755, 1059, 1175,1181,
1186, 1188, 1193, 1197.
219. Be, who; ci-gthe, footprints; on-thon-gi-tha, see my; mon-zhi, I
not; a-thi°-he in da, in my journey.
222. Be, who; ci-gthe, footprints; i-kshi-tha, see their; ba, they; zhi,
not; ki-the, cause themselves to; mon-thin, as they travel the
path of life; ta, shall; bi a, they; zhin-ga, little ones.
223. Ni, water; a-ki-tha-zha-ta, forked; ga, behold; kshc, that lay;
a, they said, 237, 256, 270.
224. Wa-koD-da, god; on-ki-tha-zha-ta, parting for me; bi, they;
a-thin-hein da, in my journey, 238, 257, 265, 271, 565, 620,
675, 730.
226. Wa-kon-da, gods; a-ki-tha-zha-ta, parting for them; bi, they;
ki-the. cause themselves to; mon-thi", as they travel the path
of life; ta bi a, shall; zhin-ga, little ones, 240, 259, 273, 567,
622, 677, 732.
228. Hon-bthin, bean; sha-be, dark; e-go", resembles; e-de. that; a,
they said.
235. Ba-btha-btha-xe, rippling the waters; zhon a, he lay.
244. Zhin-ga, little ones; zho-i-ga, bodies; tha, to make of; bi, they;
thin-ge, none; a-tha, it is so; wi-9On-ga, my younger brothers;
e-ki-e, they said to one another; non-zhin, stood; bi, they; a,
they said, 540, 595, 650, 705, 760, 826.
532 THE OSAGE TRIBE [BTH. ANN. 36
248. Ta-biu-fka, whitleather; e-gon, resembles; e-de, that; a, they
said.
252. Zhin-ga, little ones; ni, water; a-ga-ha, upon; ta, should; bi,
they; e-gon, possible; a-zhi, not; e-she, you have said; don,
when; a, they said, 267, 296.
263. Ki-cda, leech; e-de, a; a, they said.
264. Ha, O!; wi-tsi-go e, O, my grandfather: e-gi-e, said to him; ton,
stood; a, they said.
265. Zhin-ga, little ones; ni, water; a-ga-ha, upon; t-a, should; bi,
they; e-gon, possible; a-zhi-a, not; wi-tsi-go e, O, grandfather;
e-gi-e, said to him; ton a, stood.
276. Zhin-ga, little ones; ni, water; a-ga-ha, upon; ta, shall; bi, they;
e-gon, possible ; a-zhi a, not ; wi-pon-ga, my younger brothers ;
e-ki-a, said to one another; bi a, they.
279. Zhin-ga, little ones ; ni, water; a-ga-ha, upon; ta, shall; bi, they;
e-gon, possible; a-zhi a, not; wi-con-ga, my younger brother;
e-gi-a, said to him; bi a, they.
282. O-pxon-ton-ga, the great elk; toa a, the standing, 345.
283. Tho, in his presence, face to face; ton a, standing; hi-non-zhin
ton a, having arrived there stood, 445.
285. Non, look you; wi-zhin-the, elder brothers ; e, saying; a-gthi non-
zhin, having returned stood; ton a, standing, 449, 884.
286. Ni-ka, man; win, a; e-dsi, there, in yonder place; a-ka, is; wi-
zhin-the, my elder brothers; e, saying; a-gthi non-zhin, having
returned stood; to™ a, standing, 450.
288. Ni-ka, man; be, who; i-shin-ge, his son; xtsi, verily; to", does
he stand; a, question sign.
290. Hon-ga, sacred one; bthin a, I am; wi-zhin-the, my elder brother;
e, saying; ton a, he stood, 463.
291. O-pxon-ton-ga, the great elk; wi-e, I am; a-ton he a, I stand.
294. Zhin-ga, little ones; ni, water; a-ga-ha, upon; ni-ka-shi-ga, peo
ple; ba, they; thon-ta, possible; zhi a, not; wi-con-ga, my
younger brother; e-gi-a, said to him; bi a, they.
297. E-dsi, present; zhi, not; the, being; thin-ge, none; a-ni-ka-shi-ga,
I am a person; a-ton lie a, I stand; wi-zhin-the, my elder
brother; e, saying; ton a, standing, 466.
299. Mon-ki-9in-dse, threw himself violently upon the earth; tsi-the,
suddenly; don, did, 302, 307, 310, 346.
300. Ni, water; ga-shkon, disturb by striking; he, in all its expanse;
ton a, stood.
301. I-thon-ba-on, second time; tse a, at the, 320.
303. Ni, water; a-tha-don, lowered in depth; i-he-the, made to lie;
to" a, he stood, 308.
304. No", look you; wi-con-ga, my younger brothers, 312, 1462, 1484.
LAFLBSCHE] TRIBAL RITES LITERAL TRANSLATION 533
305. Wi-con-ga, my younger brother; u-k'on, perform an act of impor
tance; ta, will: a-ka, is; we-toD-in, there are signs; a-tha, it
is so; wi-con-ga, my younger brothers; e-ki-a, said to one
another; bi a, they, 313, 343.
306. We-tha-bthin-on, at the the third time; tse a, at the.
309. We-do-ba o", fourth time; tse a, at the, 328.
311. Mon-zhon, land earth; a-bi-ge, dry upon its surface; i-he-the,
made it to lie; to" a, he stood.
315. Ta-dse, winds; do-ba ha, that are divided into four parts.
316. E-no"-ha, to each of the divisions; hi, he went to; non-zhin, and
stood; to" a,- standing.
317. Ta-dse, winds; mon-ha, of the rising sun; tse a, the.
318. U-hi, he approached as in a hollow; non-zhin, and stood therein;
to" a, standing, 322, 326, 330.
319. Mon-zhon, land, earth; u-hu-ca-gi, within it he called loudly;
to" a, standing, 324, 327, 331.
321. Ta-dse, winds ;ba-con tse a, in the direction of thecedars, thenorth.
325. Ta-dse, winds; ga-xpa tse a, where drops the sun, the west.
329. Ta-dse, winds; a-k'a (archaic word for south); tse a, the.
332. Ta-dse, winds; we-do-ba tse a, the fourth.
333. E-non-ha, at each one, 1220.
334. U-niu, in which to breath; ga-xe, make; to", a, stood.
335. Zhi"-ga, little ones; mon-zhon, land, earth; u-hu-ca-gi, to call
loudly; bi, they; do", when; shki, and; a, they said.
336. Ga-xton, in this very manner; mon-thin, as they travel the path
of life; ta, shall; i, they; tsin da, they shall.
338. Niu, breath; wi-ta, mine.
339. I-gi-ni-tha, seek protection; bi, they; do", when; shki, also; a,
they say.
342. No", look you; wi-con-ga, my younger brothers; e-ki-e, said to
one another; non-zhin, stood; bi, they; a, they said.
348. Hin, hairs; u-ga-bu-dse, strewn profusely; i-he-the, he made to
lie; to", stood; a, they said.
349. Ga, this; tse, the; shki, also; a, they said.
350. Wa-thin-e-cka, without a purpose; she-mon, I have done; mon-
zhi, in da, I have not, 422, 527.
351. Xa-dse, grass; e-shnon, commonly called; bi, they; no", usually;
a, they said.
352. Sho", all, every kind; xtsi, verily; pa-xe, in da, I have made,
359, 365, 371, 378, 385, 391, 397, 402, 409, 415, 533, 1286.
353. Xa-dse, the grasses; win, any one of the little ones; gi-ta-pe,
approach in search of game; mon-thin, as they travel the
path of life: bi, they; don, when; shki, also; a, they said.
354. Wa-dsu-ta, animals; gi-hi-thon-be, appear for them; mon-thin,
as they travel the path of life; t/&, shall; bi a, they; zhin-ga,
little ones, 361, 366, 374, 380, 387, 394, 399, 405, 412, 417, 419.
534 THE OSAGE TEIBE [BTH. ANN. 36
356. Gu-da, in the opposite direction; j>a-gthe, placed his head; i-non-
zhin, he stood ; to" a, standing.
357. Ni-dse, rump; ta-be, ball; ga, this; thin-kshe, sitting; shki, also;
a, they said.
358. Ton-de, ground; da-p.a, round; e non, spoken of as; bi, they;
non, usually; a, they said.
360. Ton-de, ground; da-pa, round; win, any one of the little ones;
gi-ta-pe, approach in search of game; mon-thin, as they travel
the path of life; bi, they; don, when; shki, also; a, they said.
362. Thi-u-ba-he, one side of the upper part of the body; ga, this;
kshe, the lying; a, they said.
364. Ton-de, ground, a plain; win, a; she, yonder; kshe, lies; e non,
spoken of as; bi, they; non, usually; a, they said.
366. Ton-de, ground, a plain; win, any one of the little ones; gi-ta-pe,
approach in search of game; mon-thin, as they travel the path
of life; bi, they; do", when; shki, also; a, they said.
368. Non-ka, back; on-he, the middle of, the spine; ga, this; kshe,
that lies; a, they said.
370. A-thin, a ridge; win, a; ga, there; kshe, lay; e no", spoken of as;
bi, they; non, usually; a, they said.
372. A-thin, ridges; win, one of the little ones; gi-ta-p.e, approach in
search of game; mon-thin, as they travel the path of life;
bi, they; don, when; shki, also; a, they said.
376. Ta-hiu-ga- eta, inward curve of the neck; ga, this; tse, the;
shki, also ; a, they said.
377. A-thin, ridge; u-k'a-be, a gap; win, a; she tse, there is; e no",
spoken of as; bi, they; non, usually; a, they said.
379. A-thin, ridge; u-k'a-be, a gap; win, a, one of the little ones;
gi-ta-pe, approach in search of game; mon-thin, as they travel
the path of life; bi, they; don, when; shki, also; a, they said.
382. Pa, nose; pa-ci, tip; ga, this; tse, the; shki, also; a, they said.
383. He-shki, that also; wa-thin-e-cka, without a purpose; zhi in da,
is not, 428, 1284.
384. A-thin, ridge; p.a-ci, brow; win, a; e non, spoken of as; bi, they;
non, usually; a, they said.
386. A-thin, ridge; pa-ci, brow; win, one of the little ones; gi-ta-pe,
approach in search of game; mon-thin, as they travel the path
of life; bi, they; don, when; shki, also; a, they said.
389. He, horn; ga-xa, branch; u-gthon-the, the great one; ga, this;
kshe.. that lies; a, they said, 40.0, 406, 413.
390. Wa-tsi-shka, creek; zhin-ga, little; e no", spoken of as; bi, they;
no", usually; a, they said.
392. Wa-tsi-shka, creek; zhin-ga, little; win, one of the little ones; a,
they said.
TRIBAL RITES LITERAL TRANSLATION 535
393. Gi-ta-pe, approach in search of game; mon-thin, as they travel
the path of life; bi, they; don, when; shki, also; a, they said.
395. He, horn; ga-xa, branch; u-wa-ton, next in line; ga, this; kshe,
that lies; a, they said.
396. Ga-xa, branch of a stream; zhin-ga, small; win, a; she kshe, there
lies; e no", spoken of as; bi, they; non, usually; a, they said.
398. Ga-xa, branch; zhin-ga, small; win, one of the little ones; gi-ta-pe,
approach in search of game; mon-thin, as they travel the path
of life; bi, they; don, when; shki, also; a, they said.
401. Con-con-ga, a wooded stream, obsolete; win, a; she kshe, there
lies; e no", spoken of as; bi, they; no", usually; a, they said.
403. Con-con-ga, a wooded stream; win, one of the little ones; gi-ta-pe,
approach in search of game; mon-thin, as they travel the path
of life; bi, they; don, when; shki, also; a, they said.
408. Wa-tsi-shka, rivers; e non, spoken of as; bi, they; non, usually;
a, they said.
410. Wa-tsi-shka, river; win, one of the little ones; gi-ta-pe, approach
in search of game; mon-thin, as they travel the path of life;
bi, they; don, when; shki, also; a, they said.
413. He, horn; ga-xa, branch; u-gthon-the, the large part, the base;
ga, this; thin-kshe, sitting; shki, also; a, they said.
414. 'In-9a-ka, loose rocks; e no", spoken of as; bi, they; non, usually;
a, they said.
416. 'In-ca-ka, loose rocks; win, one of the little ones; gi-ta-pe,
approach in hunting game; mon-thi°, as they travel the path
of life; bi, they; don, when; shki, also; a, they said, 204, 418.
421. Pe-o-ton, forehead; ga, this; thin-kshe, sitting; shki, also; a, they
said.
423. Ho-e-ga, snare; a-gi-the, I have made it to be; a ton he in da,
I stand.
424. Zhin-ga, little ones; ho-e-ga, snare; gi-the, make it to be their;
mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; bi, they; don, when;
sliki, also; a, they said.
425. Mi, sun; hi-e, setting of; ge, the several places of; ta, in that
direction, 430, 432, 511, 520, 528, 891, 905, 963, 982, 1158,
1253, 1290, 1320, 1332, 1345, 1358, 1428, 1444.
426. We-ki i-he-the, with which to make men to fall; mo°-thin, as they
travel the path of life; ta, shall; i tsin da, they shall, 433, 531,
1325, 1337, 1350, 1363.
427. He, horn; a-tlii-ku-sha, turned or curved downward, brow
antlers; ga, this; tse, the; shki, also; a, they said.
429. Wa-xthe-xthe, standard; a-gi-the, I have made it to be; a-ton-he,
I stand; in da, I have.
431. Wa-bthi-ku-sha, I have turned them, menacingly; a-ton lie in da,
I stand.
536 THE OSAGE TRIBE [BTH. ANN. 36
437. Zhin-ga, little ones; ni, water; a-ga-ha, upon ; ba, they ; thon-ta,
possible; zhi a, not; wi-90n-ga, my younger brothers; e-ki-a,
said to one another; bi, they; a, they said.
440. Thu-e, quickly; xtsi, verily; ci-thu-ce, took footsteps; the, went
forth; do", did; a, they said, 542, 597, 652, 707, 792, 829, 879,
895, 928, 949, 992, 1043, 1067, 1084, 1372, 1379.
441. Tse-xe, open, treeless prairie; xtsi, verily; ge, where; dsi, there;
a, they said, 1017, 1044, 1100, 1373, 1386.
444. Ni-ka, man; win, a; a, they said.
446. Non-be, hand; ba-ha, uplifted; hi, arriving there; non-zhin,
stood; ton, standing; a, they said.
447. Non-be, hand; zha-ta, forked; ga-xe, making; ton, standing; a,
they said, 1231.
448. He-dsi, quickly, then and there; xtsi, verily; gi-e, he returned;
don, did; a, they said.
449. Ha, O! wi-zhin-the, elder brothers; e, saying; a-gthi-non-zhin,
having returned and stood; ton, standing; a, they said, 545,
600, 655, 710, 768, 884.
450. Ni-ka, man; win, a; edsi, there, a-ka, is; wi-zhin-the, elder
brothers; e, saying; a-gthi-non-zhin, having returned and stood;
ton, standing.
451. Ha, O! wi-co°-ga, my younger brother.
452. Ni-ka, man; be, who; zhin-ga, little one; i-ta, his; shki don, may
be; a, they said, 459.
453. Wa-non-xe, spirits; adsi, there, in the land where they dwell;
the, to go; on-the, we cause him to; (a, shall; bi a, let us;
wi-9On-ga, my younger brothers; e-ki-a, said to one another;
bi, they; a, they said, 460.
455. E-ta, in that direction ; ym-mon-gthe, heads inclined ; xtsi, verily;
a, they said, 550, 605, 660, 655, 715, 772, 804, 841.
456. (^i-thu-ce, took footsteps; tsi-tha, quickly; ba, they; don, did;
a, they said, 551, 606, 661, 716, 773, 805, 842.
457. We-a-ba-cu, index finger; a, they said.
458. I-u-tha-zhu-zhu the, thrust into his mouth to moisten; hi-the,
quickly; thin-kshe, sitting; a, they said.
461. He-dsi, there, at that place; xtsi, verily; hi, arriving there; non-
zhin, stood; bi, they; don, when; a, they said.
462. Ha, O; wi-zhin-the, elder brothers; e, said; tsi-the, quickly; a,
they said.
464. Hon-ga, sacred one; Mon-thin-ka-zhin-ga, little earth.
465. Wi, I; a-ton he a, I stand; wi-zhin-the, my elder brothers; e,
said; ton, stood; a, they said.
467. We-shnon, heartily grateful; wi-gi-the, I have caused you to be;
a-ton he a, I stand; wi-zhin-the, my elder brothers; e, saying;
ton a, he stood, 476, 493, 505.
LAFLBSCHI] TRIBAL, RITES LITERAL TRANSLATION 537
469. Wi-con-ga, my younger brothers; e-ki-a, said to one another;
bi, they; a, they said, 1074, 1302, 1310, 1508.
470. Wi-90n-ga, my younger brother; a-ka, is, 548, 603, 658, 713, 802,
1532.
471. O-k'on, perform some important act; ta, will: a-ka, is; we-ton-in
a-tha, there are sighs; wi-9On-ga, my younger brothers; e-ki-a,
said to one another; bi, they; a, they said.
473. Mon-thin-ka, earth, soil; sha-be, dark; thin-kshe, sitting; a, they
said, 1232.
474. Bn-ha, uplifted, holding aloft, offering; a-tsi-non-zhin, coming
forward and standing; to", stood; a, they said, 491, 503, 517,
1233, 1249, 1260, 1274.
475. Ga, this; thin-kshe, sitting; shki, also: a, they said, 518.
477. We-gon-tha, a sign of petition, supplication; a-ni, you carry or
possess, make to be; tha-thin-she, in your journey, life's course;
do", when; shki, also; a, they said, 494, 519, 1159.
478. We-gon-tha, supplication; thi-wa-ts'e-ga, easily, successfully;
tha-ki-the, cause .yourself to be;tha-thin-she, in your journey,
life's course; ta tse a, shall be; wi-zhin-the, my elder brother;
e, saying; ton a, he stood; a, they said, 483, 495, 1160.
479. Hon-ba, day; i-ta-xa, the top, the beginning; thon-dsi, at that
time; a, they said, 496, 1454, 1464, 1475, 1486.
480. In-dse-ha, skin of the face; tha-the, you make, or place upon;
do", when; a, they said, 485, 497, 506.
481. I"-shta-bthi, tears; a-tha-ga-xton, you shed upon; don, when; a,
they said, 508.
482. Tho°-dse ba-he, the side of the house; e-ton-ha, at that height;
no", even; shki, also; do", when, 498, 1161, 1240, 1256, 1267.
484. E, true; thoVxha, although this be, 510, 890, 904, 962, 978, 981,
1242, 1269, 1318, 1330, 1343, 1356, 1401.
486. I"-shta-ha, eyelids; a-tha ga-cta, you close; zhi, not; t& tsin da,
shall; wi-zhin-the, elder brother; e, saying; to", he stood; a,
they said.
487. In-shta-ha, eyelids; a-tha ga-cta, you close; do", if or when;
a, they said.
488. U-non, old age; u-tha-xtha, reach or overtake; zlii, not; tha-ki-
the, you cause yourself; tha thin-she, you in your journey;
ta tse a, shall; wi-zhin-the, my elder brother; e, saying; to",
he stood; a, they said.
490. Mon-thin-ka, earth, soil; (o-ho, blue; thin-kshe, sitting; a, they
said, 1248.
492. The, this; shki don, also; a, they said, 126*1.
499. Da, things whatsoever; thu-ts'a-ga, fail to secure; zhi, not; tha-
ki-the, cause yourself to be; tha thin-she, you in your journey;
(a tse a, shall; wi-zhin-the, elder brother; e, saying; ton, stood;
a, they said.
538 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
501. K'u-shi, gulped; kshi-gthe, went home; doQ, did; a, they said,
515.
502. Mon-thin-ka, earth, soil; zhu-dse, red; thin-kshe, the sitting; a,
they said, 1259.
504. The, this, shki do", also; e, said; tsi-the, quickly; a, they said.
507. In-shta-bthi, tears; a-tha ga-xton, you shed; a zhi, not; ta tse a,
. shall; wi-zhin-the, elder brother; e, saying; ton, stood; a, they
said.
509. U-hu-shi-ge, I forbid you to do so under penalty; wi-kshi-the,
I have made for you; wi-zhin-the a, elder brother; e, saying;
ton, stood; a, they said.
512. We-ki i-he-the, to make to fall in death; tha the, you shall use
it; ta tse a, you shall; wi-zhin-the, elder brother; e, saying;
ton, stood; a, they said.
513. We-ki i-he-the, to make to fall in death; thi wa-ts'e-ga, easily
for you; tha-ki-the, cause yourself to be; tha thin-she, you in
your journey; ta tse a, shall; wi-zhin-the, elder brother; e,
saying; to", stood; a, they said.
516. Mon-thin-ka, earth, soil; pi, yellow; thin-kshe, the sitting; non,
the; a, they said, 1273.
521. Da-gthe, captive; u-k'u-pi, fair, becoming; e, spoken of as; non,
usually; a, they said.
522. I-the, to see or to find; tha-ki-the, cause yourself to; don, if or
when.
523. In-dse-ha, skin of the face; tha kshi-the, make for him or to
put upon his face as a sign; tha thin-she, you in your journey;
ta tse a, shall; wi-zhin-the, elder brother; e, saying; ton, stood;
a, they said.
524. Da-gthe, captive; u-k'u-pi, fair or becoming; a bi, spoken of as;
i-the, to find or to see; tha-kithe, cause yourself to; tha thin
she, you in your journey; ta tse a, shall; wi-zhin-the, elder
brother; e, saying; ton, stood; a, they said.
526. Non-be, hands; zha-ta, cloven; ga tse, these; shki, also; a, they
said.
529. Non-be, hands; zha-ta, cloven; p.a-xe, I make; a-ton he in da, I
stand.
530. Zhin-ga, little ones; i-gi-ni-tha, to use as a means of protection;
mon-thin, in their journey; bi, they; don, if or when; shki,
also; a, they said, 535.
532. Zhon-xa, a stick, a pole; zha-ta, forked; e non, spoken of as; bi,
they; non, usually; a, they said.
536. I-gi-ni-tha, to make use of as a means of protection; gi-wa-
ts'e-ga, easily or successfully; ki-the, cause themselves to;
mon-thin, in their journey; (a i tse a, they shall; zhin-ga, the
little ones.
I.A FI.HSCHB] TRIBAL RITES LITERAL TRANSLATION 539
539. Ha, O; wi-con-ga, younger brothers; e-ki-a, said to one another;
bi, they; a, they said, 547, 594, 602, 649, 657, 704, 712, 759,
770, 825, 873, 944, 1367, 1524, 1074, 1098, 1105, 1508, 1524.
543. '1°, stone, rock, or boulder; zhu-dse, red; thin-kshe, sitting; a,
they said, 552, 1169, 1173, 1178, 1184, 1191, 1195.
546. Wi-tsi-go, grandfather; win, a; edsi, there, at that place; a-ka,
is; wi-zhin-the, elder brothers, e, saying; a-gthi non-zhin,
having returned he stood; ton, standing; a, they said, 601, 656,
711, 769, 771, 800.
548. Wi-con-ga, my younger brother; a-ka, who is, 603, 658, 713, 802,
1532.
549. Wi-tsi-go, grandfather; win, a; edsi, there, at that place; thin-
kshe, sitting; e, said; a-ka, he who is; wi-con-ga, younger
brothers; e-ki-a, said to one another; bi, they; a, they said,
604, 659, 714, 771, 803.
553. He-dsi, there, at that place; xtsi, verily; hi-non-zhin, having
arrived they stood; bi, they; a, they said, 718, 807, 844.
555. Wi-tsi-go e, O, grandfather; e-gi-a, they said to him; bi, they;
a, they said, 610, 665, 720.
556. Zhin-ga, little ones; zho-i-ga, bodies; tha, of which to make; bi,
they; thin-ge a-tha, none; wi-tsi-go e, O, grandfather; o-gi-a,
said to him; bi, they; a, they said, 611, 666, 721, 766, 777, 796,
809, 834, 847.
558. Zhin-ga, little ones; zho-i-ga, bodies; tha, of which to make;
bi, they; thin-ge, none; e-she, you say; do", when; a, they
said, 613, 668, 723, 811, 849.
560. Ts'e, to die, death; wa-tse-xi, difficult to be overcome; mi-kshe
in da, I who sit here, 615, 670, 725, 780, 813, 850.
562. Ts'e, death, to die; wa-tse-xi, difficult to be overcome; ki-the;
cause themselves to be; mon-thin, in their journey; ta i tsin da,
they shall, 617, 672, 727, 782, 815, 852.
570. O-ta-kshin, stumble over me; bi, they; a-thin he i° da, in my
journey, 625, 680, 735.
571. A-ta-kshin, stumble over them; bi, they; ki-the, cause them
selves to be; mon-thin, in their journey; ta bi a, they shall;
zhin-ga, little ones, 628, 683, 738.
576. Be, who; hi, teeth; on-gtha, set upon me; mon-zhi in da, I not,
631, 686, 741, 1187.
579. Be, who; hi, teeth; a-gtha, set upon them; ba, they; zhi, not; bi,
they; ki-the, cause themselves to be; mon-thin, in their jour
ney; ta bi a, they shall; zhin-ga, the little ones, 634, 689, 744.
582. Hi, teeth; on-won-ga-ci-da, the drawing in of breath when
stricken wi.th pain; bi, they; a-thin he in da, in my journey,
637, 692, 747.
540 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 30
585. Hi, teeth; u-ga-ci-de, drawing in of breath when stricken with
pain; bi, they; ki-the, cause themselves to be; mon-thin, in
their journey; ta, shall bi a, they; zhin-ga, the little ones,
640, 695, 750.
588. Hi, teeth; on-ki-tha-shon, break their teeth on me; bi, they;
a-thin he in da; in my journey, 643, 698, 753, 1194.
591. Hi, teeth; a-ki-tha-shon, break their teeth upon them; bi, they;
ki-the, cause themselves to be; mon-thin, in their journey; ta,
shall; bi a, they; zhin-ga, the little ones, 646, 701, 756.
598. 'In, stone, rock, or boulder; pa-be, black; thin-kshe, the sitting;
a, they said, 607.
608. He-dsi, there, at that place, xtsi, verily; hi, arriving at; non-
zhin, stood; bi a, they, 663, 718, 775, 807, 844.
653. 'In, stone, rock, or boulder; zho-cka, white flesh; thin-kshe, the
sitting; a, they said, 662.
708. ' I", stone, rock, or boulder; zho, flesh; ci, yellow; thin-kshe, the
sitting; a, they said, 717.
763. 'In-xe, stone (obsolete); shton-ga, soft; thin-kshe, the sitting;
non, the; a, they said, 774.
765. Ha, O! wi-tsi-go e, grandfather; e, said; tsi-the, quickly; a, they
said.
773. £)i-thu-9a, footsteps took; ba, they; do", did; a, they said.
778. Ha, O! zhin-ga, little ones.
783. Zhin-ga, little ones; zho, bodies; da-ka-da, hot, feverish; bi,
they; don, when; a, they said, 819.
784. Zhin-ga, little ones; zho, bodies; da-ka-de, hot, feverish; da-ci-ge,
to burn away, to cleanse; on-ki-gtha-thin, they shall take me
as the means of; mon-thin, in their journey; ^a i tsi" da, shall
they; zhin-ga, the little ones, 820.
785. Zhin-ga, the little ones; o-ho-shi-ga, ill or fretful; bi, they; do",
when; a, they said, 817.
786. O-ho-shi-ge, illness fretfulness; da-ci-ge, to burn away, cleanse;
on-ki-gtha-thi°, they shall take me as the means of; mon-thin,
in their journey; ta i tsi" da, they shall; zhin-ga, the little
ones, 818.
789. Hon-ba, days; tha-gthin, good, calm, peaceful; u-ni-ka-shi-ga,
abide therein as a people; ki-the, cause themselves to; mon-
thi", in their journey; ta i tsin da, they shall.
793. 'In, stone, rock, or boulder; shu-shu-dse, friable; thin-kshe, the
sitting; no", the; a, they said, 806.
798. He-dsi, quickly; xtsi, verily; a-gthi, he returned; non-zhin, and
stood; to", standing; a, they said.
799. Wi-zhin-the, my elder brothers; e, he said; a, they said, 147J,
1482.
808. Ha, O! wi-^si-go e, grandfather; e, said; a, they said, 833.
I,A FLERCHBJ TRIBAL RITES LITERAL TRANSLATION 541
810. Ha, O! zhin-ga, little ones; e, he said; tsi-the, quickly; a, they
said, 835, 1049.
821. Zhin-ga, the little ones; u-non, the means by which to reach old
age; on-gi-the, make of me; mon-thin, in their journey; bi,
they; do", when; shki, and; a, they said.
828. Ha, O! wi-zhin-the, elder brother; e-gi-a, they said to him; bi,
they; a, they said.
830. Ni, water; mon-ho", miry marsh; xtsi, very; ge, the; dsi, there;
a, they said.
831. 'In, stone, rock, or boulder; shin-ga, small; thin-kshe, the sitting;
non, the; a, they said, 843.
837. Ha, O! wi-con-ga, my younger brothers; e, saying; a-gthi, hav
ing returned; non-zhin, stood; to", standing; a, they said.
838. 'In, stone, rock, or boulder; zhi"-ga, little: win, a; e-dsi, there,
at yonder place; a-ka, is; wi-con-ga, my younger brothers;
e, saying; a-gthi, having returned; non-zhin, stood; to", stand
ing; a, they said.
839. Wi-zhin-the, my elder brother he who is.
840. 'In, stone, rock, or boulder; zhin-ga, little; win, a; e-dsi, there,
at yonder place; thin-kshe, sitting; e, said; a-ka, is; wi-con-ga,
my younger brothers; e-ki-a, said to one another; bi, they;
a, they said.
843. 'In, stone, rock, or boulder; thin-kshe, the sitting; no", the; a,
they said.
845. Ni-ha, alga1,; ga-mi-mi-tha, floating about as in the winds; xtsi,
verily; thin-kshe, sitting as though; a, they said.
854. Kon-ha, edges, of the boulder; ga-mi-mi-tha, algse floating about;
ga ge, these; shki, also; a, they said, 856.
855. Ni-ka, men; no°, aged; hi, arrived at; do", when.
859. Ni-ka, men; ts'a-ge, aged, venerable; hi, arrived at; bi, they;
don, when; a, they said.
863. I-bi-con-dse, close to, by its side, as a symbol of old age; on-kshi-
the, let us make it to be; ta bi a, we shall; wi-fon-ga, my
younger brothers; e-ki-a, said to one another; bi, they; a, they
said.
866. Zho-i-ga, bodies; the, to make to be; xtsi, verily; ni-ka-shi-ga,
people; ki-the, to make themselves to be; mon-thin, in their
journey; \& bi a, they shall; wi-con-ga, my younger brothers;
e-ki-a, said to one another.
869. U-hi, reach; ki-the, cause themselves to; mon-thi", in their
journey; ta bi a, they shall; wi-con-ga, my younger brothers;
e-ki-a, said to one another; bi, they; a, they said.
870. U-non, old age; a bi, spoken of as; i-the, see; ki-the, cause them
selves to; mon-thin, in their journey; (a bi a, they shall;
wi-con-ga, my younger brothers; e-ki-a, said to one another;
bi, they; a, they said.
542 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
874. Zhin-ga, little ones; non-bthe, food; tha, to make of; ba, they;
thoMse, they could; thin-ge, none; a-tha, it is so; wi-pon-ga,
my younger brothers; e-ki-a, said to one another; bi, they;
a, they said, 945.
877. Zhin-ga, little ones; non-bthe, food; tha, to make of; ba, they;
thon-tse, they could; thin-ge, none; a-tha, it is so; wi-90n-ga,
my younger brother; e-gi-a, said to him; bi, they; a, they
said, 894, 908.
880. Dse, lake; kon-ha, border; dsi, there; xtsi, verily; a, they said,
896.
881. Ho-xthon-ta-xe-hi, the sparganium; ton, the standing; a, they
said.
883. He-dsi, quickly; xtsi, verily; a-thin, with it; gi e, returned; do",
then; a, they said, 899, 913, 932, 953, 973, 1301, 1382, 1388,
1394, 1409, 1419, 1433.
885. The, this; hon, how will it serve; wi-zhin-the, elder brothers;
e, saying; a-gthi, having returned; nou-shin, stood; to",
standing; a, they said, 900, 914, 933, 954, 974, 1376, 1383,
1389, 1395, 1411, 1420, 1434.
886. I-k'u-tse, tested the taste; a-tsia-tha, with haste; ba, they; don,
did; a, they said, 902, 916, 934, 956, 976.
889. Non-bthe, to use as food; thoMa, possible; zhi a, not; wi-con-ga,
my younger brother; e-gi-a, said to him; bi, they; a, they
said, 903.
892. We, with which to; ki-i-he-on-the, to make fall, in death; ta bi a,
we shall; wi-con-ga, my younger brothers; e-ki-a, said to one
another; bi, they; a, they said, 906, 964, 983.
893. Non, look you; wi-con-ga, my younger brother; e-gi-a, said to
him; bi, they; a, they said, 907, 925, 966.
897. <pin-mon-non-ta-hi, the Nymphsea advena; ton, the standing; non,
the; a, they said.
910. Dse, lake; u-ckon-cka, in the middle of; dsi, there, at that place;
xtsi, verily; a, they said.
911. Tse-wa-the, the root of the water lily (Nelumbo lutea); kshe,
that lay; non, the; a, they said.
912. Non-pa-hon, made it to rise by treading upon it; a-tsia-tha.
moving in haste; ba, they; don, did.
917. Ba-ce-ni, milk; e-gon, resembling; a, they said, 935.
918. Tha-dsu-zhe, making the juice to squirt by chewing the root;
gthe, suddenly; a-ka, they, 936.
920. The, this plant; e, that; shnon, the very thing; u-tha-dse, have
been searching; tha, you; ton, standing; she a, you have;
wi-con-ga, my younger brother; e-gi-a, said to him; bi, they;
a, they said, 938, 1436.
LAFLESCHB] TRIBAL KITES LITERAL TRANSLATION 543
921. Zhin-ga, the little ones; no"-bthe, food; the, make of; mon-thin,
in their journey; ta. shall; hi a, they; wi-con-ga, my younger
brothers; e-ki-a, said to one another; bi a, they, 939.
922. Zhin-ga, the little ones; non-bthe, food; the, make of it; mon-
thin, in their journey; bi, they; do", when; a, they said, 940,
960, 979.
923. A-dsu-ta, arms, limbs; i-ga-ci-ge, with it stretch; ki-the, cause
themselves to ; mon-thin, in their journey; ta, shall; bi a, they;
wi-con-ga, my younger brothers: e-ki-a, said to one another;
bi, they; a, they said, 942.
926. U-to°-be, search; tha-the, you make; tse a, shall; wi-con-ga, my
younger brother; e-gi-a, said to him; bi a, they, 948, 967,
1463, 1474, 1485.
929. Dse, lake; go-da, beyond, on the farther side; kon-ha, edge, bor
der; dsi, there, at that place; xtsi, verily; a, they said, 951,
969. .
930. Do, the potato (Apios apios); thin-kshe, the sitting; non, the;
a, they said.
944. Non, look you, behold; wi-con-ga, my younger brothers; e-ki-a,
said to one another; bi, they; a, they said, 1098.
950. pin, Sagittaria Idtifolia; thin-kshe, the sitting; dsi, there, at that
place; a, they said.
952. £in, Sagittaria latifolia; thi°-kshe, the sitting; non, the; a, they
said,
957. Ba-ce-ni, milk; e-gon, resembling; tha-dsu-zhe, making the juice
to squirt; gtha, suddenly; bi, they; a, they said.
959. Zhin-ga, the little ones; non-bthe, food; tha, make of it, or to
use; ba, they; thon-ta, can; a-ka, it is; wi-con-ga, my younger
brothers; e-gi-a, said, to him; bi, they; a, they said, 977.
961. Ni, water; da-ka-dse, hot; u-bi-don, dip or immerse; mon-thin,
in their journey; ta, shall; bi a, they; wi-con-ga, my younger
brother; e-ki-a, said to one another; bi, they; a, they said,
980.
970. U-cu u-gthon, lowland forest in the bend of a stream; xtsi,
verily; ge, the; dsi, there, in that place; a, they said.
971. Hon-l>thin-cu, bean seed (Falcata comosa); thiVkshe, the sitting;
non, the; a, they said, 1353.
987. We'-ki-k'on, an article to be used as a symbol in a religious
ceremony; win, one; thin-ge, lacking, none; a-tha, is; wi-
con-ga, my younger brother; e-ki-a, said to one another; bi,
they; a, they said, 1298, 1368, 1450, 1453.
989. Zhin-ga, the little ones; wa-zhin, courage; gi-tha, to make of,
to use as a symbol; bi, they; thin-ge, have none; a-tha, it is
so; wi-co°-ga, my younger brother; e-ki-a, said to one
another; bi, they; a, they said, 1064, 1099.
544 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 30
993. A-ba-do, a small hill; a-ga-ha, on the summit, on the brow;
dsi, there; xtsi, verily; a, they said, 1406, 1416.
994. In-gthon-ga, puma; do-ga, male; ton, the standing; a, they said,
1068.
995. Tho, in view, bodily presence; ton, standing; hi, arrived there;
non-zhin, stood; bi, they; a, they said, 1019, 1069.
997. Zhin-ga, the little ones; wa-zhin, courage; gi-tha, make of as a
symbol; bi, they; thin-ge, none; a-tha, it is so; wi-tsi-go e,
O. grandfather; e-gi-a, said to him; bi, they; a, they said,
1023, 1048, 1087, 1103.
999. Zhin-ga, the little ones; wa-zhin, courage; gi-tha, make of as a
symbol; bi, they; thin-ge, none; e-she, you say; do", when;
a, they said, 1050.
1000. Zhin-ga, the little ones; wa-zhin, courage; gi-tha, make of; ba,
they; thon, they shall; ta, shah1; a-ton he in da, I stand, 1025,
1051, 1072, 1088.
1001. pin-dse, tail; thi-bo-xa, expand, make the hairs of the tail to
bristle out; tsi-the, suddenly; don, did; a, they said.
1002. £in-dse, tail; i:fa-xe, tip; sha-be, dark in color; ga, this; thin-
kshe, the sitting; shki, also; a, they said.
1003. Pe-dse, fire; gi-the, make of; mon-thin, in their journey; fa, i
tsin da, they shall.
1004. Pe-dse, fire; gi-the, they make of; bi, they; don, when; shki,
and; a, they said, 1028.
1005. Pe-dse, fire, flames; gi-shon-tha, to droop or become extin
guished; zhi, not; ki-the, cause themselves to be; mon-thiD,
in their journey; ta bin da, they shall, 1029, 1057.
1006. fi-ha, soles of the feet; u-sha-be, the dark parts; ga, these;
thin-kshe, the sitting; shki, also; a, they said, 1030.
1007. Non-xthe, charcoal; a-gi-the, I have made to be; a-thi° he in da,
in my journey; e, said; tsi-the, quickly; a, they said.
1008. Pa-zhu-zhe, nose; i-fa-xe, tip; sha-be, the dark part; ga, this;
thin-kshe; shki, also; a, they said, 1034, 1054.
1009. Non-xthe, charcoal; a-gi-the, I have made to be; a-thiQ he in da,
in my journey; e, saying; ton, stood; a, they said.
1010. Non-fa, ears; i-ta-xe, tips; sha-be, the dark part; ga, this;
thin-kshe, the sitting; shki, also; a, they said.
1011. Non-xthe, charcoal; a-gi-the, I have made to be; a-ton he in da,
I stand.
1012. Zhin-ga, the little ones; non-xthe, charcoal; tha, make to be;
bi, they; don, when; shki, also; a, they said, 1032, 1036.
1013. Non-xthe, charcoal; gi-sha-be, theirs shall be dark; ki-the,
cause themselves to be; mon-thin, in then- journey; ta bin da,
they shall, 1037.
LATLESCHE] TRIBAL RITES LITERAL TRANSLATION 545
1018. Wa-ca-be, black bear; u-ca-ka, blemish; thin-ge, none; to",
standing; non, the; a, they said, 1085.
1020. Po-e, in flames; ton, standing; hi, having arrived there where
he stood; non-shin, stood; bi, they; a, they said, 1086.
1021. Non-be, hand; ba-ha, holding up his hand; to", standing; a,
they said.
1026. Non-be, hand; zha-ta, forked, fingers or claws; ga ge, these; a,
they said.
1027. Pe-dse, fire; a-gi-the, I have made to be; a-ton he in da, I stand.
1031. Non-xthe, charcoal; a-gi-the, I have made to be; a-thin he in da,
in my journey, 1035, 1039.
1033. Non-xthe, charcoal; gi-pa-be, theirs be black; ki-the, cause
themselves to be; mon-thin, in their journey; ta bin da, they
shall, 1041.
1038. Zhu-i-ga, body; ca-be, black; ga, this; kshe, that lay; a, they
said.
1040. Zhin-ga, the little ones; non-xthe, charcoal; gi-the, make of;
mon-thin, in their journey; bi, they; don, when; a, they said.
1045. Mi-xa, swan; cka, white; ton-ga, large, or great; thin-kshe,
sitting; non, the, 1101.
1052. pi, feet; kon-ha, edges; sha-be, dark; ga, this; thin-kshe,
sitting; shki, also; a, they said.
1053. Pe-dse, fire; a-gi-the, I have made it to be; a-thin he in da,
in my journey; e, saying; ton, standing or stood; a, they said.
1055. Pe-dse, fire; a-gi-the, I have made it to be; a-thin he in da,
in my journey.
1056. Zhin-ga, the little ones; pe-dse, fire; gi-the, make it to be their;
mon-thin, in their journey; bi, they; do", when; shki, also;
a, they said.
1058. Zhin-ga, the little ones; wa-zhi", courage; gi-the, make to be
their; bi, they; don, when; shki, and; a, they said, 1061.
1060. Ni (figurative), breath, power of endurance; on-won-ta-thin,
they become exhausted before I do; bi, they; a-thin-he in da,
in my journey.
1062. Ni, breath, power of endurance; u-ta-thin, unequaled by the
gods; bi, they; ki-the, cause themselves to be; mon-thin, in
their journey; ta, shall; bia, they; zhi"-ga, the little ones.
1070. Zhin-ga, the little ones; wa-zhin, courage; thi-gi-the, make of
you; t&, let; bi a, them; wi-tsi-go e, O, grandfather; e-gi-a,
said to him; bi, they; a, they said.
1075. I°-gthon-ga, a puma; bia, he is; wi-con-ga, my younger broth
ers; e-ki-a, said to one another; bi, they; a, they said.
2786—21 35
546 THE OSAGE TEIBE IETH. ANN. 36
1076. Zha-zhe, name; on-ki-ton, adopt for ourselves; ta bi a, let us;
wi-con-ga, my younger brothers; e-ki-a, said to one another;
bi, they; a, said, 1078, 1080, 1092, 1097, 1106, 1111, 1115,
1398, 1400, 1423, 1438, 1440.
1077. In-gthon-ga, puma; ton, the standing; a, they said.
1079. In-gthon-ga-zhin-ga, young-puma; a, they said, 1081.
1082. Zha-zhe, name; on-ki-ton, adopt for ourselves; on-mon-thin,
throughout our journey; ta bi a, we shall; wi-con-ga, my
younger brothers; e-ki-a, said to one another; bi, they; a,
they said, 1094, 1425.
1089. Ha, O! wi-con-ga, my younger brothers; e, saying; ton, stood
a, they said.
1090. Wa-ca-ba, black bear; bi a, he is; w,i-con-ga, my younger
brothers; e-ki-a, they said to one another; bi, they; a, they
said.
1091. Sha-ba, dark in color; bi a, he is; wi-con-ga, my younger
brothers; e-ki-a, they said to one another; bi, they; a, they
said.
1093. Sha-be, dark; tsi-gthe, suddenly appearing; shki, also; a, they
said.
1095. Sha-be, the dark one; i-tha-tha, you have found; bi a, you
have; wi-con-ga, my younger brothers; e-ki-a, they said to
one another; bi, they; a, they said.
1096. Sha-be-i-the, Find er-of-the-D ark-One; shki, also; a, they said.
1102. Tho, in bodily presence; thin-kshe, sitting; hi, arriving there;
non-zhin, stood; bi, they; a, they said.
1107. ^"ka, white; bi a, he is; wi-zhin-the, my younger brothers;
e-ki-a, they said to one another; bi, they; a, they said.
1108. Wa-zhin-ga, a bird; bi a, he is; wi-con-ga, my elder brothers;
e-ki-a, they said to one another; bi, they; a, they said, 1112.
1109. Mi-xa-cka, a white swan; bi a, he is; wi-con-ga, my younger
brothers; e-ki-a, they said to one another; bi, they; a, they
said.
1110. Mi-xa-cka, White-swan; shki, also; a, they said.
1113. fka, white; bi a, he is; wi-con-ga, my younger brothers; e-ki-a,
they said to one another; bi, they; a, they said.
1114. Wa-zhin-cka, White-bird; shki, also; a, they said.
1117. Wa-zha-zhe, name of the Hon-ga subdivision representing the
water part of the earth; u-dse-the, fireplaces; j>e-thon-ba,
seven; ni-ka-shi-ga, people; ba don, they are; a, they 'said.
1118. Xtha-xtha, timid, cowardly or craven; thin-ge, none; xtsi,
verily; ni-ka-shi-ga, people; thon-ka, they are, 1165, 1201,
1295, 1366, 1449.
1119. Da, foes of whatsoever kind; ni-the, permit to live, mercy;
thin-ge, none; xtsi, verily; ni-ka-shi-ga, people; thon-ka,
they are, 1166.
LAFLESCHE] TRIBAL RITES LITERAL TRANSLATION 547
1121. Non-ni-on-ba, pipe; win, a; a, they said.
1122. Zho-i-ga, body; the, make to be; xtsi, verily; ni-ka-shi-ga,
people; thon-ka, they are, 1217.
1124. Ha, O! Hon-ga, name of the tribal subdivision representing the
dry part of the earth, the Sacred One; e, said; tsi-the,
quickly; a, they said.
1125. Non-ni-on-ba, pipe; win, a; zho-i-ga, body; a-the, I have made
to be; a-thin-he a, in my journey; Hon-ga, Sacred One;
e, said; tsi-the, quickly; a, they said.
1126. Zho-i-ga, body; tha-the, you make to be; tha-thin-she, in your
journey; don, when; shki, also; a, they said, 1174, 1180,
1185, 1192, 1196.
1127. Zho-i-ga, body; i-ts'a, causes of death; thin-ge, none; tha-
thin-she, you in your journey; ta tse a, shall; Hon-ga e, O,
Sacred One; e, saying; ton, stood; a, they said.
1128. Pa, head; u-shon-shon, the part or the joint that enables it to
move freely, the neck; ga, this, behold; thin-kshe, sitting;
shki, also; a, they said.
1129. Pa u-shon-shon, joint of the neck; a-gi-the, I have made it to
be mine; a-thin-he a, in my journey; Hon-ga e, O, Sacred
One; e, saying; ton, stood; a, they said.
1130. Pa u-shon-shon, joint of the neck; tha-the, you make to be
yours; don, when; shki, and; a, they said.
1131. Pa u-shon-shon, joint of the neck; i-ts'a, causes of death;
thin-ge, none; tha-ki-the, you cause yourself to be; tha-thin-
she, you in your journey; ta tse a, shall; IIon-ga e, O,
Hon-ga; e, saying; ton, stood; a, they said.
1132. U-thu-ga, hollow of the bowl; ga, this, behold; thin-kshe, sit
ting; shki, also; a, they said.
1133. I-u-thu-ga, cavity of the mouth; a-gi-the, I have made it to
be mine; a-thin he a, in my journey; Hon-ga e, O, Hon-ga;
a, saying; ton, stood; a, they said.
1134. Non-ni-on-ba, the pipe itself; ga, this, behold; thin-kshe, sitting;
shki, also; a, they said.
1135. I-u-thu-ga, hollow of the mouth; tha-the, you make to be
yours; tlia-thi" she, you in your journey; do", when; shki,
and; a, they said.
1136. Hollow of the mouth; i-ts'a, causes of death; thin-ge, none;
tha-thin-she, you in your journey; (a tse a, shall; Hon-ga e,
O, IIon-ga; e, saying; ton, stood; a, they said.
1137. Thi-u-ba-he, side of the body; i-sdu-ge the right; ga, this,
behold; kshe, lying; a, they said, 1139.
1138. Thi-u-ba-he, side of the body; a-gi-the, I have made to be
mine; a-thin he a, in my journey; Hon-ga e, O, Hon-ga; e, say
ing; to", stood; a, they said, 1147.
548 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
1140. Thi-u-ba-he, side of the body; tha-gi-the, you make to be
yours; tha-thin-she, you in your journey; don, when; shki,
and; a, they said, 1148.
1141. Thi-u-ba-he, side of the body; i-ts'a, causes of death; thin-ge,
none; tha-thin-she, you in your journey; ta tse a, shall;
Hon-ga e, O, Hon-ga; e, saying; ton, stood; a, they said, 1149.
1142. Non-ka, back; on-he, the middle of, or the spine; ga, this,
behold; a, they said.
1143. Non-ka, back; on-he, the middle of; a-gi-the, I have made to
be mine; a-thin he a, in my journey; Hon-ga e, O, Hon-ga;
e, saying; ton, stood; a, they said.
1144. Non-ka, back; on-he, the middle of; tha-the, you make to be;
tha-thin-she, you in your journey; don, when; shki, and; a,
they said.
1145. Non-ka, back; on-he, the middle of; i-ts'a, causes of death;
thin-ge, none; tha-thin-she, you in your journey; ta tse a,
shall; Hon-ga e, O, Hon-ga; e, saying; ton, stood; a, they said.
1146. Thi-u-ba-he, side of the body; tha-ta, left; ga, this, behold;
kshe, lying; a, they said.
1151. U-xthu-k'a, orifice, in the stem; ga, this, behold; kshe, the
lying; shki, also; a, they said.
1152. Thi-u-thi-xthu-k'a, hollow of the body; a-gi-the, I have made
it to be mine; a-thin-he a-tha, in my journey; e, saying; ton,
stood; a, they said.
1153. Thi-u-thi-xthu-k'a, hollow of the body; i-ts'a, causes of death;
thin-ge, none; tha-thin-she, in your journey; ta tse a, shall;
Hon-ga e, O, Hon-ga; e, saying; ton, stood; a, they said.
1154. We-thin, a cord or thong used for tying things; zhin-ga, small;
i-thi-don, that pulls, or holds, the bowl of the pipe to the
stem; ga, this, behold; kshe, that lies: shki, also; a, they
said.
1155. Ni-a-kon-gthe, windpipe; a-gi-the, I have made to be mine-
a-thin he a-tha, in my journey; e, saying; ton, stood; a, they
said.
1156. Ni-a-kon-gthe, windpipe; tha-gi-the, you make to be yours;
tha-thin-she, you in your journey; don, when; shki, and; a,
they said.
1157. Ni-a-kon, windpipe; i-ts'a, causes of death; thin-ge, none;
tha-thin-she, you in your journey; ta tse a, shall; Hon-ga e,
O, Hon-ga; e, saying; to", stood; a, they said.
1162. We-gon-tha, supplication; thi-u-mon-ka, easily granted to you;
tha-ki-the, cause yourself to be; tha-thin-she, you in your
journey; ta tse a, shall; Hon-ga e, O, Hon-ga; e, saying; ton,
stood; a, they said.
LAFI.ESCHE] TRIBAL RITES — LITERAL TRAXSLATION 549
1168. Ha, O! Wa-zha-zhe, name of the subdivision representing the
water part of the earth; e, said; tsi-the, quickly: a, they said.
1170. Zho-i-ga, body; xtsi, verily; a-ni-ka-shi-ga, I am a person-;
a-to" he a, I stand ; Wa-zha-zhe, Name of the Water Division ;
e, saying; to", stood; a, they said, 1172.
1176. A-ki-tha-zha-ta, to pass by in diverging lines; bi, they; tha-
ki-the, cause yourself to be; tha-thin-she, you in your jour
ney; ta tse a, shall; Wa-zha-zhe, the Water Division: e-gi-a,
they said to him; bi, they; a, they said.
1179. Zho-i-ga, body; the, make to be; xtsi, verily; a-ni-ka-shi-ga,
I am a person; a-thin-he a, I in my journey; Wa-zha-zhe, the
Water Division; e, saying; to", stood; a, they said.
1182. A-ta-kshin, stumble over you; bi, they; tha-ki-the, cause your
self to be; tha-thin-she, you in your journey; $a tse a, shall;
Wa-zha-zhe, the Water Division; e-gi-a, they said to him; bi,
they; a, they said.
1189. Be, who; hi, teeth; a-gtha, set upon; ba, they; zhi, not; tha-ki-
the, you cause yourself; tha-thin-she, you in your journey;
ta tse a, shall; Wa-zha-zhe, the Water Division; e-gi-a, they
said to him; bi, they; a, they said.
1198. Hi, teeth; a-ki-tha-shon, break their teeth on you; bi, they;
tha-ki-the, cause yourself to be; tha-thi"-she, you in you,
journey; ta tse a, shall; Wa-zha-zhe, the Water Division;
e-gi-a, they said to him; bi, they; a, they said.
1202. Hon-ga; win, a; a, they said, 1228.
1203. O-pxon, elk; zho-i-ga, body; the, made to be; xtsi, verily;
ni-ka-shi-ga, people; ton, stands; a, they said.
1205. Ho-e-ga, a snare; gi-the, made it to be; xtsi, verily; ni-ka-
shi-ga, people; to", stands; a, they said.
1206. Wa-gthu-shka, trope for man, the mysterious being, literally
bug; be, whosoever; zhin-ga, little one or offspring; i-ta-i
whosesoever; shki, and; don, when; a, they said, 1211.
1207. U-ki-on-the, to throw himself into, to be ensnared; on-ga-xer
we make them to; on-mon-thin, in our journey; ta bi a, we
shall; wi-con-ga, my younger brothers; e-ki-a, they said to
one another; bi, they; a, they said, 1212.
1208. Wa-zha-zhe, the Water Division; a, they said, 1222, 1237, 1263,
1277, 1287, 1323, 1335, 1348, 1361, 1402, 1413, 1426, 1441,
1525, 1530.
1209. Tsi-zhu, the tribal division representing the sky; e-thon-ba,
they also, 1223, 1238, 1264, 1278, 1288, 1324, 1336,1349,
1362, 1403, 1414, 1427, 1442, 1526, 1531.
1210. Ho-e-ga, a snare; gi-the, make it to be; mon-thin, in their
journey; bi, they; do", when; shki, and; a, they said.
1215. 'In, stones; a, they said.
1216. 'In, stones; zhin-ga, small; pe-tho"-ba, seven.
550 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 30
1218. 'In, stones; zhin-ga, small; do-ba, four.
1219. U-zhe-tsi, fireplace; do-ba ha, the four corners of.
1221. U-tsi, placed therein; i-non-tha, placed the stones therein; bi,
they; a, they said. .
1224. I-ni-tha, to make a shelter of; mon-thin, in their journey; bi,
they; don, when; a, they said.
1225. I-ni-tha, shelter; gi-wa-ts'e-ga, an easy and a safe one; on-ki-
the, we make for ourselves; on-mon-thin, in our journey; (a
bi a, we shall; wi-con-ga, my younger brothers; e-ki-a, they
said to one another; bi, they; a, they said.
1229. Mon-in-ka-zhin-ga, Little-earth.
1234. The, this; shki don, also; a, they said, 1261, 1275.
1235. We-gon-tha, supplication; a-thin, they keep, make use of; mon-
thin, in their journey; bi, they; do", when; shki, and; a, they
said, 1252, 1255, 1266, 1276, 1291.
1236. We-gon-tha, supplication; gi-wa-ts'e-ga, easily, successfully;
ki-the, cause themselves to be; mon-thin, in their journey; ta
bi a, shall; wi-zhin-the, elder brother; a, he said.
1239. In-dse-ha, skin of the face; ga-xa, they make, or put upon;
bi, they; don, when; a, they said, 1243, 1270.
1241. We-gon-tha, supplications; gi-wa-ts'e-ga, easily, successfully;
ki-the, cause themselves to be; mon-thin, in their journey;
ta bi a, they shall; wi-9On-ga, my younger brothers; e-ki-a,
they said to one another; bi, they; a, they said, 1254, 1257,
1268, 1279, 1292.
1244. In-shta-ha, eyelids; a-ga-cta, to drop, to close; zhi, not; ta tse a,
shall; wi-con-ga, my younger brothers; e-ki-a, they said to
one another; bi, they; a, they said.
1245. ID-shta-ha, eyelids; a-ga-cta, drop, close; don, if or when; a,
they said.
1246. Ni-ka, men; no", age; da-{m, short; ki-the, cause themselves
to be; mon-thin, in their journey; ta bi a, they shall; wi-
con-ga, my younger brothers; e-ki-a, they said to one
another; bi, they; a, they said.
1250. The, this; wi-con-ga, my younger brothers; e-ki-a, they said
to one another; bi, they; a, they said, 1316.
1251. We-gon-tha, supplications; a-thin, have; mon-thin, in their
journey; ta bi a, they shall; wi-con-ga, my younger brothers;
e-ki-a, they said to one another; bi, they; a, they said, 1262,
1265.
1271. In-shta-bthi, tears; a-ga-xtoa, shed upon; a-zhi, not; ta tse a,
shall.
1280. Da-gthe, captive; u-k'o-iji, fair or comely; a-tha, they go, to
seek; bi, they; don, when; shki, and; a, they said.
LAFLESCHE] TRIBAL RITES LITERAL TRANSLATION 551
1281. In-dse-ha, skin of the face; kshi-the, make for him, or put upon
his face; mon-thin, in their journey; ta bi a, they shall;
wi-con-ga, my younger brothers; e-ki-a, they said to one
another; bi, they; a, they said.
1283. Mo"-thin-ka, earth; kon-ha, edge, the rim of the crawfish's
house; be-shin, flaring; ga, this, behold; thin-kshe, sitting;
shki, also; a, they said.
1285. Tse-xe, vessel; ni-ka-pu, in which men are seethed; e non,
speak of; bi, they; non, usually; a, they said.
1289. Tse-xe, vessel; ni-ka-pu, in which to seethe men; tha, to use
or to make of; bi, they; do", when; shki, and; a, they said.
1300. Tse-xe, vessel; ni-ka-pu, in whicli men are seethed; e-gon, that
resembles; to", standing; non, the; a, they said.
1303. The, this; we-ki-k'on, any article used as an emblem or symbol
in a religious ceremony; on-gi-the, let us make; ta bi a, we
shall; wi-90n-ga, my younger brothers; e-ki-a, they said to
one another; bi, they; a, they said.
1305. Ni, water; da-ka-dse, hot or boiling; e-dsi there, in the fire
place; on-gthe, let us place it standing upright; ta bi a, we
shall; wi-£on-ga, my younger brothers; e-ki-a, said to one
another; bi, they; a, said.
1307. Ni, water; da-ka-dse, hot; edsi-gthn, they placed there, in the
fireplace; ba, they; do", and; a, they said.
1309. Da-do", what; u-hon, to cook, in the vessel; u-pa-ha, into,
the boiling water; i-the, go ir.lo; on-the, we cause; ta ba
do", shall we make; a, they said.
1311. Non-bthe, foods; do-ba, four.
1312. We-ki-i-he-on-the, use for making (our enemies) to lie low; tse,
shall; on-thon, we have said; bi a, we; wi-con-ga, my younger
brothers; e-ki-a, said to one another; bi, they; a, they said.
1313. U-hon, vessel containing water for boiling food; u-pa-ha, into,
in the midst of; i-the, to go into; on-the, we cause; ta bi a,
we shall; wi-con-ga, my younger brothers; e-ki-a, said to one
another; bi, they; a, they said, 1317, 1329, 1342, 1355.
1315. Ho'-xthon-ta-xe, Sparganium; thi"-kshe, the sitting; non, the;
a, they said.
1319. Wa-thin-e-cka, without a purpose; u-pa-ha, into, in the midst;
i-the, to go; on-the, we cause; ba, we; zhi, not; tse a, shall;
wi-co"-ga, my younger brothers; e-ki-a, said to one another;
bi, they; a, they said, 1331, 1344, 1357.
1321. Shin-(o, a young man; ho, voice; bthon-xe, broken; don, a;
a, they said.
1322. E-ki-thon-ba, as a pair, making two; xtsi, verily; u-pa-ha, into
the midst of; i-the, to go; on-the, we cause; ta °i a> we
shall; wi-co"-ga, my younger brothers; e-ki-a, said to one
another; bi, they; a, they said, 1334, 1347, 1360.
552 THE OSAGE TRIBE
[ETH. ANN. 36
1326. Shi, again, another; win, one; thin-ge a-tha, is lacking; wi-
con-ga, my younger brothers; e-ki-a, said to one another;
bi, they; a, they said, 1339, 1352.
1327. pin, mon-non-ta hi, Nymphae advena; thin-kshe, the sitting;
non, the; a, they said.
1333. Shi-mi, a young woman; ho, voice; bthon-xe, broken; do", a;
a, they said.
1341. £in, root of the water lily, Sagittaria latifolia, thin-kshe, the
sitting; non, the; a, they said.
1342. The, this; u-hon, in the vessel; u-pa-ha, in the midst of the
boiling water; i-the, to go; on-the, we cause; ta bi a, we
shall; wi-90n-ga, my younger brothers; e-ki-a, said to one
another; bi, they; a, they said.
1346. Ni-ka, man; wa-k'on, military honors; o-tha-ha, who has upon
him; kshe, who lies; non, the; a, they said.
1359. Wa-k'o, woman; won, once, for the first time; we-da-the, has
given birth; do", a; a, they said.
1370. Wi-con-ga, my younger brother; e-gi-a, they said to him; bi,
they; a, they said, 1377, 1452.
1371. We-ki-k'on, any article used in a ceremony; win, one; thin-ge,
lacking; a-tha, is; wi-9on-ga, my younger brothers; e-gi-a,
they said to him; bi, they; a, they said, 1453.
1374. 'In-da-po-ki, the explosive stone; thin-kshe, sitting; non, the;
a, they said.
1378. We-ki-k'on, an article used as a symbol or emblem; tho°-ta,
fit or suitable; zhi a, not; wi-con-ga, my younger brother;
e-gi-a, they said to him; bi, they; a, they said, 1384.
1380. 'In-da-da-be, a conglomerate stone; thin-kshe, sitting; non, the;
a, they said.
1387. 'In-sha-gtha, fragment of a rock; zhin-ga, small; thiVkshe,
sitting; non, the; a, they said.
1390. E-zhi-zhi-cka, not suitable, unfit; u-ton-ga, hardly; wi-con-ga,
my younger brother; e-gi-a, they said to him; bi, they; a,
they said.
1392. A-ba-do, a hill; a-tha-k'a-be, on the side, a hillside; dsi, there,
at that place; xtsi, verily; a, they said.
1393. Mon-hin-ci, knife or arrowhead of flint; i-ba, handle; btho-ga,
round; kshe, that lay; non, the; a, they said.
1397. We-ki-k'on, a symbolic article; thon-ta, suitable, fit for use;
a-ka, is; wi-pon-ga, my younger brother; e-gi-a, they said to
him; bi, they; a, they said, 1412, 1422, 1437.
1399. Mon-hi"-ci i-ba btho-ga, Round-handled knife.
1404. We-ba-ca, they use for cutting; ba, they; thon-ta, suitable for
them; zhi a, not; wi-con-ga, my younger brothers; e-ki-a,
they said to one another; bi, they; a, they said, 1415.
LA FLESCHE] TRIBAL RITES LITERAL TRANSLATION 553
1407. Mon-hin-ca-be, the black flint knife; kshe, that lay; a, they
said.
1410. Ile-dsi, there at that place, quickly; xtsi, verily; a-thi", carry
ing it; gthi, he returned; e don, did; a, they said, 1422, 1437.
1412. We-ki-k'on, an article used as a symbol; thon-ta, suitable;
a-ka, is; wi-con-ga, my younger brothers; e-ki-a, said to one
another; bi, they; a, they said.
1417. Mon-hin hon-ga, sacred flint knife; kshe, that lay; a, they said.
1424. Mon-hin hon-ga, Sacred knife.
1429. We-ba-ce, use for cutting; mon-thin, in their journey; ta bi a,
they shall; wi-9On-ga, my younger brothers; e-ki-a, said to
one another; bi, they; a, they said, 1443.
1430. A-ba-do, hill; go-da, on the farther side; a-tha-k' a-be, hillside;
dsi, there at that place; xtsi, verily; a, they said.
1431. Mon-hin zhu-dse, red flint knife; kshe, that lay; a, they said.
1436. She, that is; e-shnon, alone; u-tha-dse, you search; tha-ton-she
a, you stand; wi-co"-ga, my younger brother; e-gi-a, they
said to him; bi, they; a, they said.
1439. Mon-hin-zhu-dse, Red-knife; a, they said.
1455. Mo"-zhon, land; ga-shi-be, out of the confines; xtsi, verily; the,
went forth; don, did; a, they said, 1465, 1476, 1487.
1456. U-k'u-be, valley; win, one; hi, arriving there; non-zhin, stood;
ton, standing; a, they said.
1457. U-pa-ce, in the evening; thon, when; dsi, there or then; a, they
said, 1468, 1479, 1506.
1458. IIi-kon, legs or ankles; ga-xo-dse, stricken with gray, from the
grasses; xtsi, verily; a-gthi, having returned home; non-zhin,
stood; ton, standing, 1469, 1480.
1459. Ha-gon zhin-tha, how is it with you; wi-c.on-ga, my younger
brother; e-gi-a, they said to him; bi, they; a, they said, 1470,
1481, 1511.
1460. U-k'u-be, a valley; win, one; pshi, I arrived at; a-tha, I have;
wi-zhin-the, elder brothers; e, saying; ton, stood; a, they said.
1466. U-k'u-be, valley; we-thon-ba, the second; kshe, the lying; a,
they said.
1472. U-k'u-be, valley; thon-ba, a second; pshi, a-tha, I have arrived
at; wi-zhin-the, elder brothers; e, saying; to", stood; a, they
said.
1473. Wi-con-ga, my younger brother.
1477. U-k'u-be, valley; we-tha-bthin, a third; kshe, the lying; a,
they said.
1483. U-k'u-be, valley; tha-bthin, three; pshi, I have arrived at, I
have been to; a-tha, have; wi-zhin-the, my elder brothers;
e, saying; to", stood; a, they said.
554 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
1488. U-k'u-be, valley; we-do-ba, the fourth; kshe, the lying; a, they
said.
1490. Ni, water, river; u-ba-shon, bends; r>e-thon-ba, seven.
1491. Sho-dse, smoke; con-hon, white, pale; kshe, that lay in wide
expanse; hi, arriving there; non-zhin, stood; ton, standing;
a, they said.
1492. Wa-don-be, seeing, viewing; xtsi, verily, intently; ton, stood;
a, they said.
1493. Ni, water, river; u-ga-xthi, land within the bend of a river;
pe-thon-ba, seven, 1515, 1517, 1535.
1494. Ton-won-gthon, towns or villages; pe-thon-ba, seven; ni-ka-
shi-ga, people; thon-ka, there were.
1495. E-dse, there, closely.; xtsi, verily; wa-ton-be, I see or view;
tse, I shall; e-ki-the, he thought of himself; thin-kshe, as he
sat; a, they said.
1496. Ni, water; a-ki-gtha-gi, go to fetch for themselves; hi, go; bi,
they; tse, the place where; a, they said.
1498. Wa-don-be, seeing, viewing; ton, stood; a, they said.
1499. A-shka, closely, at a short distance; xtsi, verily; wa-don-be,
he saw them, the people; ton, stood; a, they said.
1500. Pe, foreheads; ba-xthe-xthe, mottled by pricking, tattooed;
xtsi, verily; wa-don-be, saw them; to", stood; a, they said.
1501. The-ba, jaws; ba-xthe-xthe, tattooed; xtsi, verily; wa-don-be,
he saw them; ton, stood; a, they said.
1502. Pe, foreheads; ga-tsu-ca, shaved or cut closely, referring to the
hair close to the forehead (Wa-xthi-zhi thinks this has refer
ence to the Osage wearing the hair reached); xtsi, verily;
wa-don-be, he saw them; ton, stood; a, they said.
1504. I-ki-non-xthe, concealing himself, hiding from the people; xtsi,
verily; gi, he returned; e don, then; a, they said.
1505. Wa-non-xthin, in great haste; xtsi, verily; gi, he returned;
e don, then; a, they said.
1507. Non-ni-ni-tha, with quick footsteps, strides, running; xtsi,
verily, with effort; gi, he returned; thin, he moved; a, they
said.
1509. Wi-con-ga, my younger brother; a-ba, he, moving, in motion;
u-k'on, acting as though he bears tidings of importance; xtsi,
verily; a-gi, he is coming home; a-ba, he; wi-con-ga, my
younger brothers; e-ki-a, they said to one another; bi, they;
a, they said.
1510. A-gi-ki-ba-non, they ran to meet their brother as though racing;
ba, they; don, then.
1512. Wi-zhi"-the, my elder brothers; e, saying; a-gthi, having come
home; non-zhin, stood; a, they said.
LAFLESCHE] TRIBAL KITES LITERAL TRANSLATION 555
1513. U-k'u-be, valleys; do-ba, four; pshi, I have been to; a-tha, I
have; wi-zhin-the, elder brothers; e, saying; to", stood; a,
they said.
1514. U-k'u-be, valleys; do-ba, four; pshi, I have been to; e-de, and;
a, they said.
1516. Sho-dse, smoke; con-hon, white, pale; kshe, lying in wide ex
panse; wa-ton-be a, I have seen them, the villages and their
smoke; wi-zhin-the, my elder brothers; e, saying; to", stood;
a, they said.
1518. Ton-won-gthon, towns or villages; wa-ton-be a, I have seen them;
wi-zhin-the, my elder brothers; e, saying; to™, stood; a, they
said.
1519. Ni-ka-shi-ga, people; bi a, they are; wi-zhin-the, my elder
urothers; e, sa}*ing; ton, stood; a, they said.
1520. A-shka, closely, near; xtsi, verily; wa-ton-be a, I saw them;
wi-zhin-the, my elder brothers; e, saying; to", stood; a, they
said.
1521. Pe, foreheads; ba-xthe-xtha, they were mottled by pricking,
tattooed; bi a, they were; wi-zhin-the, my elder brothers; e,
saying; ton, he stood; a, they said.
1522. The-ba, jaws; ba-xthe-xtha, they were tattooed; xtsi, verily;
bi a, they were; wi-zhin-the, my younger brothers; e, saying;
to", he stood; a, they said.
1523. Pe, foreheads, the hair of; ga-tsu-ca, shaved or cut close; bi a,
they were; wi-zhin-the, my elder brothers; e, saying; ton, he
stood; a, they said.
1527. Ki-ctu, assemble; tse a, let them; wi-con-ga, my younger
brothers; e-ki-a, said to one another; bi, they; a, they said.
1529. Ki-ctu, assemble; a-tsi-a-tha, hurriedly; ba, they; do", and;
a, they said.
1533. U-k'u-be, valleys; do-ba, four; a-hi, he has been to; bi, he;
e, said; a-ka, he; Wa-zha-zhe, the subdivision representing
the water part of the earth; e-gi-a, they said to him, the
leading member; bi, they; a, they said.
1534. U-k'u-be, valleys; do-ba, four; a-hi, he has been to; ba, he;
do", and.
1536. Sho-dse, smoke; con-hon, white, pale; kshe, arising and lying
over the villages; wa-don-ba, he has seen them, the villages
and the smoke, as also the inhabitants; bi, he; e, said; a-ka,
he; wi-con-ga, my younger brother; a-ka, he, 1538.
1537. Ton-won-gthon, towns or villages; pe-thon-ba ha, seven separate.
1539. A-shka, closely, near; xtsi, verily; wa-don-be, he saw them; bi,
them; e, said; a-ka, he; wi-con-ga, my younger brother;
a-ka, he.
556 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 38
1540. Pe, foreheads; ba-xthe-xthe, tattooed; xtsi, verily; bi, they;
e, said; a-ka, he; wi-eon-ga, my younger brother; a-ka, he.
1541. The-ba, jaws; ba-xthe-xthe, tattooed; xtsi, verily; bi, they; e,
said; a-ka, he; wi-con-ga, my younger brother; a-ka, he.
1542. Pe, foreheads; ga-tsu-ca, cut close, or shaved, the hair; xtsi,
verily; ni-ka-shi-ga, a people; bi, they; e, said; a-ka, he;
wi-con-ga, my younger brother; a-ka, he.
THE IIl'-CA-DA Wl'-GI-E (FINDING OF THE FOE)
(Free translation, p. 212; Osage version, p. 407)
1. Da, what, said they; a bin da, it has been said; tsi ga, in this
house, 16, 61, 71, 119, 142, 157, 250.
2. Hon-ga, the Earth Division; u-dse-the, fireplaces; r>e-thon-ba,
seven; ni-ka-shi-ga, people; ba, they; don, are; a, they said.
3. Wi-con-ga, my younger brother; win, a, one; a, they said, 47, 127,
160.
4. Ton-in, visible; a-zhi, not; xtsi, verily; we-ton-in, da, we feel from
our divining sense, 18, 35, 49, 93, 129, 162.
5. Hon, what, how, what tidings; xtsi, verily; gi, coming home; thin
da, moving.
6. Ha-ta-ha, for what reason, on what account; xtsi, verily;
wa-xpa-thin, poor, figuratively, suffer from exhaustion; thin,
moving; e-don, why; e-ki-a, said to one another; a-ka, they,
22, 39, 98.
7. U-gi-ki-a, to speak to as to one affectionately related; ba, you;
thi"-ha, go to him, 23, 40, 53, 97, 133.
8. U-gi-ki-e, to speak to him; a-tsia-tha, they, some of the brothers,
hastened forth; ba, they; don, and, 24, 41, 54, 134, 232.
9. U-k'u-be, valley; win, a, one; pshi, I have been to- a-tha, I have;
wi-zhin-the, elder brothers; e, saying; ton, stood; a, they said.
10. U-k'u-be, valley; win, one; pshi, I have been to; thon-zha; but:
11. On-ha-gon, to me nothing of importance; mon-zhi, I not, I
observed not; xtsi in da, verily it is so, 27, 44.
12. U-dse-the, fireplace, the space around the fireplace where men
gather for discussion; u-kon, a vacant space; i-he-the, they
made to lie; they made room for the men bearing news; bi,
they; a, they said, 28, 45.
13. Wi-con-ga, my younger brother; a-ka, he, 29, 63, 77, 111, 148, 183,
203, 217, 240.
14. U-k'u-be, valley; win, one; a-hi, he has been to; bi, he; thon-zha,
but.
15. Gi-ha-gon, to him nothing of importance; ba, he; zhi, not; xtsi,
verily; a, he says, or he tells us.
17. Wi-con-ga, my younger brother, 33, 92.
LAFLESCHE] TKIBAL KITES— LITERAL TRANSLATION 557
19. He-dsi, at that time and place; xtsi, verily; a, they said, 32, 46,
84, 90, 105, 126, 159, 172, 182, 197, 227, 237.
20. He-dsi, at that very time; xtsi, verily; gi, returning; thin, mov
ing; a, they said, 37, 50, 130, 163.
21. Wi-con-ga, my younger brother; gi, coming home; thin, moving;
we-ton-in da, we see from our divining sense, 38, 51, 94.
25. U-k'u-be, valley; we-thon-ba, a second; pshi a, I have been to.
26. U-k'u-be, valley: we-tho"-ba, second; pshi in da, I have been to.
30. U-k'u-be, valley; thon-ba, a second; a-hi, he has been to; bi, he;
e, said; a-ka, he.
31. Gi-ha-gon. to him nothing of importance; ba, he; zhi, not; xtsi,
verily; bi, he; e, said; a-ka", he.
34. U-ga-shoD, the going forth upon a journey, on an errand; a-ka,
in da, he, 48, 64, 78, 112, 128, 149, 161, 184.
36. Mi, sun; tho-ton, straight, midheaven, zenith; xtsi, verily; don,
when; a, they said.
42. U-k'u-be, valley; tha-bthin, a third; pshi in da, I have been to.
43. U-k'u-be, valley; tha-bthi", a third; pshi, I have been to; e-de,
and; a, they said.
52. Hi-shnon-shnon, strides rapidly taken, swiftly; thi", moving; we-
ton-in da, we see from our divining sense.
55. U-k'u-be, valleys; do-ba, a fourth; pshi a-tha, I have been to;
wi-zhin-the, elder brother; e, saying; ton, stood; a, they said.
56. U-k'u-be, valleys; do-ba, a fourth; pshi, I have been to; e-de,
and.
57. (,-i-u-gthe, footprints; e-dsi, there, at that place; wa-ton-be in da,
I have seen, 101, 136.
58. Wa-dsu-ta, animals of some kind; thon-tse, that might be; xtsi,
verily; a, they said, 67, 82, 102, 116, 137, 139, 153, 168.
59. Mon-hin, grass; tha-ba-xa, cut with the teeth, to disturb with the
teeth; bi, them; ge in da, many.
60. Wa-dsu-ta, animals; xtsi, verily; bi, they; tsin da, must be.
62. Ha, O! wi-9On-ga, my younger brothers; e-ki-e, said to one an
other; thon-ka, they, 72, 106, 173, 198, 229.
65. U-k'u-be, valleys; do-ba, a fourth; a-hi, has been there; bi, he;
e, said; a-ka, in da, he has.
66. U-k'u-be, valleys; do-ba, a fourth; a-hi, he has been to; bi, he;
don, when.
68. pi-u-gthe, footprints; e-dsi, there at that place; wa-do"-ba, he
saw; bin da, he did, 81, 115, 152.
69. Mon-hin, grass; tha-ba-xa, cut with the teeth; bi, they; tse, there
standing, the remains; e, said; a-ka i" da, he has, 83.
70. Wa-dsu-ta, animals; thon-ta, must be; xtsi, verily; e, said; a-ka
in da, he has.
558 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. AX.N. 36
73. Tsi-zhu, the tribal division representing the sky; Wa-zha-zhe, the
subdivision representing the waters; e-thon-ba, they together
making two.
74. Ki-ctu, assemble; tse a-tha, let them; e-ki-e, said to one another;
thon ka, they. 108, 145, 175, 200.
75. Ki-ctu, assemble; a-tsia-tha, quickly they went forth to; bi, they;
a, they said, 109, 146, 176, 201.
76. Ha,O! Tsi-zhu, Wa-zha-zhe, e-thon-ba, you together making two,
110,147, 202.
79. U-k'u-be, valleys; do-ba, a fourth; a-hi, he has been to; e, said;
a-ka in da, he has.
80. U-k'u-be, valleys; do-ba, a fourth; a-hi, he has been to; bi, he;
don, when; a, they said.
81. ^i-u-gthe, footprints; e-dsi, there at that place; wa-don-ba, he
saw them; bi, they; e, said; don, did; a, they said.
85. Bo-bthi, to go forth in a body as though swarming; a-tsia-tha,
they went forth; bi, they; a, they said, 89, 122, 178.
86. Wi-e, I; Tsi-zhu, Wa-zha-zhe; e-thon-ba, they together making
two, 123, 179.
87. Wa-da, speak; ta, would; thon-ka, they; he-bthe, I thought;
non, did; a, they said, 124, 180.
88. Wa-da, speak; ba, they; zhi, not; xtsi, verily; a, they said, 121,
122, 125, 177.
91. Won-cka, it happened; xtsi, verily; a, they said.
95. Hi-shnon-shnon-tha, his legs moving with rapid strides; xtsi,
verily; thin da, moving.
96. Hi-shnon-shnon-tha, his legs moving with rapid strides; xtsi,
verily; thin, moving; we-ton-in da, we see with our divining
sense.
99. Ha, O! wi-zhin-the, my elder brother; e, saying; to", stood; a,
they said, 165.
100. U-k'u-be, valleys; ca-ton, a fifth; pshi in da, I have been to.
103. ty, foot (prints); ba-zha-ge, forked, cloven; i-tse-tha, they had
placed upon the ground; bi, they; tse in da, they had.
104. Wa-dsu-ta, animals; non-pe-wa-the, formidable size, fear inspir
ing; xtsi, verily; bi, they; tse in da, they must be, 141, 171.
107. Tsi-zhu, Wa-zha-zhe; e-thon-ba, they together making two, 120,
174, 199.
113. U-k'u-be, valleys; ca-to", a fifth; a-hi, he has been to; bi, he;
e, said; a-ka in da, he has.
114. U-k'u-be, valleys; ga-ton, a fifth; a-hi, he has been to; bi, he;
do", when.
117. ^i, foot (prints); ba-zha-ge, forked, cloven; i-tse-the, placed
upon the ground ; tse, that stand; a, bin da, he said.
T.AFLESCHE] TRIBAL RITES LITERAL TRANSLATION 559
118. Wa-dsu-ta, animals; non-pe-wa-the, formidable, fear inspiring;
xtsi, verily; tse, the, as shown by their footprints; a bin da,
he has said.
131. Thi-con-ga, your younger brother; gi, coming home; thi°, mov
ing; we-ton-in da, we see with our divining sense, 164.
132. Hi-zhu-zhu-ba, moving rapidly his legs, with rapid strides;
xtsi, verily; thin da, he is moving; e-ki-e, said to one another;
thon-ka, they.
135. U-k'u-be, valleys; sha-p.e, a sixth; pshi in da, I have been to.
138. U-shon-ge, path; on-ha-ha, running in every direction; bi, they;
ge, the many; in da, they have made.
140. Tse-zhe-ni, urine; bo-ta-to-xa, the foam; bi, they; ge in da, the
many places where the animals had urinated.
143. Wi-con-ga, my younger brothers; e-ki-e, they said to one another;
thon-ka, they.
144. Tsi-zhu, Wa-zha-zhe; e-thon-ba, they together making two, 174,
199.
150. U-k'u-be, valleys; sha-pe, sixth; a-hi, he has been to; bi, he;
e, said ; a-ka in da, he has.
151. U-k'u-be, valleys; sha-pe, sixth; a-hi, he has been to; bi, he;
don, when.
154. U-zhon-ge, paths; on-ha-ha, in every direction running they had
made; ge, in many places; e, said; a-ka in da, he has.
155. Tse-zhe-ni, urine; bo-ta-to-xa, foaming; i-tse-tha, they had
placed, or left on the ground; bi, they; ge, in many places;
e, said ; a-ka in da, he has.
156. Wa-dsu-ta, animals; non-pe-wa-the, formidable, fear inspiring;
xtsi, verily; bi, they; ge, the many signs; e, said; a-ka in da,
he has.
158. Wa-da, speaking; zhi, not; xtsi, verily; bo-bthi, in a body as
though in a swarm; a-tsia-tha, they departed; bi, they; a,
they said, 181.
166. U-k'u-be, valleys; pe-thon-ba, seventh; pshi in da, I have been to.
167. U-k'u-be, valleys; pe-thon-ba, seventh; pshi, I have been to;
e-de, and; a, they said.
169. Mon-hin, grasses; no°-cu-ge, trampled to the earth so that they
lay pointing in the direction where the trail led ; i-he-the, they
made to lie; bi, they; ge in da, the many trails.
170. P-gthe, dung; ga-ta-ta-tha, they scattered upon the land; bi,
they ; ge i" da, the many places.
185. U-k'u-be, valleys; pe-thon-ba, seventh; a-hi, he has been to;
bi" da, he has.
186. Wa-dsu-ta, animals; u-ba-tse, in groups, herds; a, they said.
187. Pe-thon-ba. seven; a, they said.
560 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
188. Wa-don-ba, he has seen them; bi, he; e, said; a-ka in da, he has.
189. E-dsi, there at that place; a-ta, beyond; dsi, there; a, they said.
190. A-ba-to-xa, around hill; don, a, 211.
191. A-hi-non-zhin, having been to he stood on the summit; bi, he;
don, when.
192. Batse, groups of trees, groves; ce, cut, a line as though cut in
many places running along a stream; gtha-gtha-the, here and
there, in many parts; xtsi, verily; e-de, a, one line; a, they
said.
193. Ni-ka-shi-ga, people, 195, 215, 218, 222, 225, 242. (In line 193
the word is used in a figurative sense and refers to groups of
people and their towns or villages.)
194. Sho-dse, smoke; bo-ci-ci-dse, shooting upward or arising in col
umns and with a hissing sound; kshe, lying in broad expanse,
spreading in the sky above the villages; wa-don-ba, he saw
them; bi, them; e, said; a-ka in da, he has.
196. Non-pe-wa-the, a formidable and fear inspiring people; xtsi,
verily; bi, they; e, said; a-ka in da, he has, 216, 243.
204. Wa-non-pe, in fear, alariji; xtsi, verily; a-gthi, he has come
home; a-ka in da, he has.
205. U-k'u-be, valleys; pe-thon-ba, seventh; a-hi, he has been; bi,
he; don, when.
206. Wa-dsu-ta, animals; u-ba-tse, groups, herds; pe-thon-ba, seven.
207. He-dsi, there at that place, closely; xtsi, verily; wa-don-ba, he
has seen them; bi, them; e, said; a-ka in da, he has.
208. Wa-dsu-ta, animals; non-pe-wa-the, fear inspiring; xtsi, verily;
bi, they are; e, said; a-ka in da, he has.
209. He, horns; thi-stse-don, long and curved; bi, they are; e, said;
a-ka in da, he has.
212. E-dsi, there, at that place; xtsi, verily; hi-non-zhin, having ar
rived there and stood; bi, he; don, when; a, they said.
214. Sho-dse, smoke; bo-ci-pi-dse, shooting upward, arising in col
umns from the dwellings of people; kshe, lying in broad ex
panse; wa-don-ba, he saw them, the people, the villages, the
dwellings, and the columns of smoke; bi, them; e, said; a-ka
in da, he has; Tsi-zhu, Wa-zha-zhe; e-thon-ba, you together
making two.
219. Pe, foreheads; ga-tsu-ca, shaved or cut closely, referring to the
cut of the hah-; bi, they; e, said; a-ka in da, he has, 244.
220. Pe, foreheads; ba-sha-ba, they made dark by pricking, referring
to the tattoo marks on the forehead; bi, they; e, said; a-ka
in da, he has, 245.
221. I, mouths, chins; ba-sha-ba, they made dark by pricking, they
were tattooed around then- mouths; bi, they; e,said; a-ka i" da,
he has, 246.
I-AFLESCHE] TRIBAL RITES LITERAL TRANSLATION 561
223. Wa-pa-hi, things sharp and pointed, weapons; ki-sha-non the,
abundance, profusion; xtsi, verily; bi, they are; e, said; a-ka
in da, he has, 248.
224. Mon, arrows; thi-ki-shnon, bristling as the radiating rays of the
sun as they grasp their arrow in their hands, they have so
many; bi, they; e, said; a-ka in da, he has.
226. Tse-ha-wa-gthe, buffalo hide shields; ton, they possess; bi, they;
e, said; a-ka in da, he has 249.
228. She, that, the description of the weapons, the signs of the valor
of the foe, is enough, we are satisfied, that is what we want
to know; shon, in da, enough, satisfies us.
230. Tsi-zhu, of the gentes of the Tsi-zhu; Wa-kon-da, the gods;
no"-pa-bi, the one who is feared, otherwise known as the
Tsi-zhu Wa-no, the Elder Tsi-zhu, the people of the sun;
thin-kshe, the sitting; non, the; a, they said.
231. U-gi-ki-e, let them be spoken to; tse, let them, the Hon-ga;
e-ki-a, they said to one another; thon-ka, they.
232. U-gi-ki-e, to speak to them, the people of the sun; a-tsia-tha,
they went in haste, those of the Hon-ga; ba, they; don, did.
233. Ha, O'.; Hon-ga; e, said, the people of the sun; tsi-the, promptly;
a, they said, 235.
234. Wa-pa-hi, weapons; on-won-sha, I have not in abundance; mon-
zhi, I am not possessed of; mi, I; kshe in da, sitting; e, said,
the people of the sun; tsi-the, promptly; a, they said.
236. Wa-zha-zhe, the people of the Wa-zha-zhe division; u-gi-ki-a,
speak to them; thin ha, move ye; e, said the Tsi-zhu Wa-non;
tsi-the, promptly; a, they said.
238. Wa-zha-zhe Wa-non, the Elder Wa-zha-zhe, the war gens of the
Wa-zha-zhe division; thin-kshe, sitting; a, they said.
239. A-gi-pa-mo"-gthe, with heads bowed over the assembled people
of the Wa-zha-zhe Wa-non gens; i-non-zhin, having come be
fore them they stood; a-ka, they.
241. Wa-non-pe, in fear, in alarm; xtsi, verily; a-gthi, has come home;
a-ka, he, the messenger gens of the Hon-ga, from a group
subsequently known as Hi-pa-da, or Hon-ga U-ga-shon, the
Hon-ga who Travelled; Wa-zha-zhe; e-gi-e, they said to him,
the spokesman of the Wa-zha-zhe Wa-non, or to the people
themselves; a-ka, they, the Ho"-ga.
247. Mon-ge, breasts; xthe-xtha, tattooed; bi, they were; e, said;
a-ka in da, he has.
251. She, that, your description of the weapons of the foe, the out
ward signs of their valor; shon, is enough, satisfies us, that is
what we want to know, Ho"-ga; e, said, the Wa-zha-zhe Wa-
non; tsi-the, promptly; a, they said.
2786—21 30
562 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
252. Ki, down upon the ground, figurative for vanquish; i-he-wa-
tha-the, you 'shall lay them, make them to lie vanquished;
ta tse a, you shall; Hon-ga; e-gi-e, they said to him or to
them; a-ka, he, the Wa-zha-zhe Wa-non.
253. Ta, deer's; he, horns, the tips of; pe-thon-ba, seven.
254. Wa-pa-hi, weapons; a-gi-the, I have made to be; a-thin he a,
in my (life's) journey, Hon-ga; e-gi-e, said to him or to them;
a-ka, they, the Wa-zha-zhe Wa-non.
255. Ta, deer's; he, horns, the tips of; e-shki don, even those; a,
they said.
256. Ga-stse, split; a-gi-gthe, I with my arrows; a-thin he non, in my
journey, Hon-ga; e-gi-e, said to him or to them; a-ka, they
the Wa-zha-zhe Wa-non.
257. I-ki-i-he, with them, the sacred arrows; wa-tha-the, you shall
make them to lie down, vanquish them, the foe; ta tse a, you
shall, Hon-ga; e-gi-e, they said to him or to them; a-ka, they
the Wa-zha-zhe Wa-non.
NI'-KI WI'-GI-E
By WA-TSE'-MON-IN
(Free translation, p. 220; Osage version, p. 414)
1. Da, what said they; a bin da, it has been said; tsi, house; ga, in
this, 80, 130, 156, 226, 238, 305, 520.
2. Zhin-ga, the little ones; ni-ka-shi-ga, a people; ta, that; ba, they;
don, may; a, they said, 13.
3. Wa-ki-gthi-gthon, meditated upon plans for the purpose; a-tsi-a-
the, they proceeded; a-ka, they.
4. U-k'on, over the plans; Wa-non-tha zhi, perplexed; a-ka, they sat,
7, 17, 28.
5. Mon-xe, heavens; u-ca-ki-ba, divisions; win, the first; a, they said.
6. U-ni-ka-shi-ga, wherein to become a people; ta, that; ba, they;
don, may, 19.
8. Zhin-ga, the little ones; ni-ka-shi-ga, a people; ba, they; thon-ta,
possible; zhin da, it was not, 14, 25, 158.
9. U-ga-win-xe, a soaring, a circle; win, one or the first one; ga-xe,
made; a-ka, they.
10. Ki-cto, to assemble as for a council; a-tsia-tha, they proceeded;
bi, they; a, they said.
11. Zhi"-ga, the little ones; ni-ka-shi-ga, a people; zhi, not; a-ka,
they, 22.
12. Mon-xe, heavens; u-pa-ki-ba, divisions; we-thon-ba, the second;
kshe, that lay; a, they said.
15. U-ga-win-xe, soarings or circles; thon-ba, a second; ga-xe, made;
a-ka, they.
I.AFLESCHE] TRIBAL RITES LITERAL TRANSLATION 563
16. Hiu-dse, below; a-the, they go; ta, that; ha, they; do", may: a,
they said, 27.
18. Mon-xe, heavens; u-ca-ki-ba, divisions; we-tha-bthin, the third;
kshe, that lay; a, they said.
20. E-dsi, at that time and place; xtsi, verily; a, they said; a bin da,
it has been said; tsi, house; ga, in this, 64, 108, 132, 168, 270.
21. U-ni-ka-shi-ga, therein became a people; zhi, not; a-ka, they.
22. Zhi"-ga, the little ones; ni-ka-shi-ga, a people; ba, they; zhi,
not; a, they said.
23. U-ga-win-xe, soarings, circles; tha-bthi", a third; ga-xe, made;
a-ka, they.
24. Wi-con-ga, my younger brothers; e-ki-e, said to one another; a-ka,
they, 53, 157, 160, 239, 254, 288, 306, 322, 382, 422, 440, 533,
543.
26. U-ton-be, a search; ga-xa, make; ba, you; thin ha, move ye, go
forth, 56, 161, 308, 312, 381, 406.
29. Hiu-dse, below; a-tha, went; bi, they; a, they said.
30. Ni, water; ga-thi-da, disturbed; zhi, not; xtsi, verily; kshe, lying;
a, they said.
31. Ho", what; ta do", shall we do; e-ki-e, said to one another; a-ka,
they, 54.
32. 'In, rocks; pa-cl, the tops of; pe-thon-ba, seven.
33. A-hiu-he, alighted upon; a-ka, they.
34. 'In, rock; we-pe-thon-ba, the seventh; thin-kshe, that sat, in the
water; a, they said.
35. 'In, rock; ca-be, black; thin-kshe, that sat, in the water; a, they
said.
36. 'In, this rock; wa-non, as aged; u-ki-gtha-ge, he spoke of himself;
thin kshe, as he sat; a, they said, 45.
37. Zhin-ga, the little ones; on-thon-gi-ni-tha, seek protection in me;
xtsi, verily; mon-thin, in their life's journey; (a, shall; i tsi" da,
they shall, 46.
38. Zhin-ga, the little ones; on-thon-gi-ni-tha, seek protection in me;
mon-thin, in their life's journey; bi, they; do", when; a, they
said, 40, 42, 47, 49, 51.
39. I-^s'a, causes of death; thin-ge, none; mon-thin, in their life's jour
ney; ta, shall; i tsin da, they shall, 48, 77, 99, 124, 149, 397,
417, 435, 453, 564.
41. Ts'e, death, die; wa-tse-xi, difficult to; ki-the, cause themselves
to be; mon-thin, in their life's journey; ta, shall; i tsin da, they
shall, 50, 79, 101, 126, 151, 399, 419, 437, 455, 566.
43. U-non, old age; win, shki, some of the little ones; i-the, live to see ;
ki-the, cause themselves to; mo"-thin, in their life's journey;
ta, shall; i tsin da, they shall, 52, 103, 128, 153, 401, 421, 439,
568.
564 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 30
44. '!", rock; zhu-dse, the red one; thin-kshe, that sat, in the water;
a, they said.
55. Zhin-ga, the little ones; ni, water; a-ga-ha, upon the surface of;
ba, they, to dwell; thon-ta, possible; zhin da, it is not, 131,
159, 167.
57. Sho-ka, an official messenger; to", standing; no", the; a, they
said, 106.
58. Ga, thus; xtsi, verily; hi tha, spoken; i don, they when; a, they
said, 244, 313, 385, 407, 445, 464, 526, 536, 547.
59. Hon-bthin, bean; sha-be, black; e-gon, like, or resembles; to",
standing; non, the; a, they said.
60. E-dsi, there, at that moment; xtsi, verily; zho-gthe, accompa
nying; a-gi, returned; bi, they; a, they said, 134.
61. Ha, O; wi-tsi-go-e, my grandfather; e-gi-e, said to him; a-ka,
they, 82, 110, 135, 163.
63. PIo-to"-be, make search; tha-the, you make; tse in da, you are
bidden; e-gi-a, said to him; bi, they; a, they said, 84, 112.
65. Ha, O; wi-tsu-shpa, my grandchildren; e, said; tsi-the, quickly;
a, they said, 86.
66. Zhin-ga, the little ones; ni, water; a-ga-ha, on the surface of; ba,
they; thon-ta, possible; zhi, not; e-sha, you have said; bin da,
you have, 87, 113, 138.
67. Ho-ton-be, search; pa-xe, I make; tse, that I shall; e-sha, you
say; ba don, therefore, 88, 114, 139.
68. Ho-ton-be, search; pa-xe, I make; ta, shall; mi-kshe in da, I shall
do so, I who sit, 89, 115, 140.
69. Ni, water; ki-mon-hon, against the wind or current; xtsi, verily;
a, they said, 90, 116, 141.
70. Ni, water; a-ton-thin, running upon; e-gon, as though; kshe. went
forth; a, they said.
71. Ni, water; u-ba-shon, a turn therein; win, one; hi, arrived there;
kshe, as he went forth; a, they said.
72. He-go", possible; a-zhi a, it is not; wi-tsu-shpa, my grandchil
dren; e, said; tsi-the, quickly; a, they said, 94, 119, 144.
73. He-gon, possible; a-zhi, it is not; thon-zha, although, 95, 120, 145.
74. Ni, water; a-ga-ha, upon the surface; non, habitually; mo"-bthin,
my walk of life; a-thin he, in da, in my goings forth, 97, 121, 146.
75. Zhin-ga, the little ones; zho-i-ga, bodies; o"-the, make of me; ta,
shall; i tse a-tha, they shall, 96, 122, 147, 394, 415, 433, 451.
76. Zhin-ga, the little ones; zho-i-ga, bodies; on-tha, make of me; bi,
they; don, when; a, they said, 78, 98, 100, 102, 123, 125, 127,
148, 150, 152.
81. Tse-xo-be e-gon, spiderlike; kshe, lying; no", the; a, they said.
83. Zhin-ga, the little ones; ni, water; a-ga-ha, on the surface of; ba,
they; thon-ta, possible; zhi a, it is not; wi-tsi-go-e, O, my
grandfather; e-gi-e, said to him; a-ka, they, 111, 136, 164.
I.AFLESCHE] TRIBAL RITES LITERAL TRANSLATION 565
85. E-gi-a, they have said; bi a, they have; wi-tsi-go-e, O, my grand
father; e-gi-e, said to him; a-ka, they.
91. Ni, water; a-mon-thin, walking upon; e-gon, as though; kshe, as
he went forth; a, they said.
92. Ni, water; u-ba-shon, a turn therein; we-thon-ba, a second; thin-
kshe, the sitting; a, they said.
93. E-dsi, close to it; xtsi, verily; hi, arrived at; thin-kshe, he sat;
a, they said.
104. She, that; shon in da, is enough, it is well, 265, 281, 287, 289, 321,
325,391, 412, 487, 551.
105. Ga, these, the words spoken; non-zhin da, stand, they shall, 129,
402.
107. Wi-con-ga, my younger brother; e-gi-e, said*to him; a-ka, thev,
243, 311, 384, 404, 425, 442, 462, 471, 525, 546.
109. Ni a-mon-thi"J walker upon the water; e-de, a; a, they said.
117. Ba-shon-shon, in a zigzag line; the, went; kshe, as he went forth;
a, they said.
118. Ni, water; u-ba-shon, a turn therein; tha-bthin, a third; hi,
arrived at; a, they said.
133. Ki-cda, leech; mon-ge, breast; zhu-dse, red; kshe, the long; a,
they said.
137. U-ton-be, search; tha-the, you make; tse a, shall; wi-tsi-go-e, O,
my grandfather; e-gi-e, said to him; a-ka, they, 166.
142. Ki-gthi-don-don, pulling himself repeatedly; the, went; kshe, as
he went forth; a, they said.
143. Ni, water; u-ba-shon, a turn therein; do-ba, four or fourth; hi,
he arrived at; kshe, as he went forth; a, they said.
144. E-gon, to be so; thon-ta, possible; zhi a, it is not; wi-tsu-shpa,
my grandchildren; e, said; tsi-the, quickly; a, they said.
145. E-gon, to be so; thon-ta, possible; zhi, not; thon-zha, although.
154. Hon-ba, days; tha-gthi", good, peaceful; xtsi, verily; shki, and;
a, they said.
155. I-the, live to see; ki-the, cause themselves to; £a i tse a, they
shall; zhin-ga, the little ones.
162. O-pxon, elk; to", standing; non, the; a, they said, 169.
165. Zhin-ga, the little ones; ni, water; a-bi-ce, to become dry; tha,
they cause; ba, they; thon-ta, possible; zhi a, it is not; wi-tsi-
go-e, O, my grandfather; e-gi-e, said to him; a-ka, they.
170. Mon-ki-cin-dse, upon the earth threw himself; tsi-the, suddenly;
don, he did; a, they said, 179, 189, 198.
171. Mon-thin-ka, earth, soil; sha-be, the dark; thin-kshe, sitting the;
a, they said, 211.
172. Ga, by blows; wa-ton-i", brought to sight; thin-kshe, as he sat;
a, they said.
173. Ha, O; wi-zhin-the, my elder brothers; e, saying; to", stood; a,
they said, 182, 192, 201, 206, 250, 273, 276, 318, 342, 472, 477.
566 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 30
174. We-shnon, grateful; wi-gi-tha, I am causing you to be; bi a, I
am; wi-zhin-the, my elder brothers; e, saying; ton, stood; a,
they said, 183, 193, 202, 229.
175. Zhin-ga, the little ones; mi, sun; hi-e, the setting of; ge, the;
ta, in the direction of, 184, 194, 203, 223, 230, 235, 367, 377,
555.
176. We-gon-tha, with which to make supplications; a-thin, to have
or to use; mon-thin, in their life's journey; bi, they; don, when;
shki, and; a, they said, 186, 195, 204, 215, 364."
177. We-gon-tha, their supplications; da-don, whatever may be de
sired; i-thu-ts'a-ga, fail to obtain; zhi, not; ki-the, cause
themselves to; mon-thin, in their life's journey; ta i tsin da,
they shall, 187, 196, 205, 219, 365, 373, 378.
178. We-thon-bi-on, a second time; xtsi, verily; a, they said.
180. Mon-thin-ka, earth or soil; to-ho, blue; thin-kshe, the sitting;
a, they said, 220.
181. Ga, by blows; hi-thon-be, made to appear, exposed; ton, stood;
a, they said, 191, 200.
185. We-gon-tha, as a sign of supplication; a-thin, have or use; mon-
thin, in their life's journey; ta i tsin da, they shall, 236.
188. We-tha-bthin-on, a third time; xtsi, verily; a, they said.
190. Mon-ha, earth or clay taken from a bank or cliff; zhu-dse, red;
thin-kshe, the sitting; a, they said, 227.
197. I-do-bi-on, a fourth time; xtsi, verily; a, they said.
199. Mon-thin-ka, earth or soil; ci, yellow; thin-kshe, the sitting; a,
they said, 233.
207. Hon-ga, a sacred person; O-pxon-ton-ga, Great-elk; wi, I am;
a-ton-he, I who stand here.
208. Hon-ga, a sacred person; Mon-thin-ka-zhin-ga, Little-earth; wi,
I am; a-ton-he, I who stand here.
209. Hon-ga, a sacred person; Mon-thin-ka-ga-xe, Earth-maker; wi,
I am; a-ton-he in da, I who stand here.
210. Hon-ga, a sacred person; Mo"-zho"-ga-xe, Maker-of-the-land ; wi,
I am; a-ton he in da, I who stand here.
212. Ba-ha, held aloft to view; ton, he stood; a, they said, 228.
213. Ga, this, the dark soil; thin-kshe, sitting; a, they said.
214. Wa-thin-e-9ka, without a purpose; she mon, I have made; mon
zhi in da, I have not.
216. I-ki-k'on, put upon the face as a sign; mon-thia, in their life's
journey; bi, they; do", when; shki, and.
217. P-shta, eyes; i-ga-bi-zhe, winkers, the lids; kshe, that lay; no",
the; shki, even that; a, they said.
218. Do-ka, moist with tears; ga-xe, makes; the, as he wanders ; no",
when; shki, even; a, they said.
221. The, this, the blue earth; shki don, also.
LAFLESCHE] TRIBAL RITES LITERAL TRAXSLATIOX 567
222. Wc-ki-k'o", for ceremonial use; wi-kchi-xa, I have made for you;
hi" da, I have.
224. We-gon-tha, to use in their supplications; a-thin, have; mon-thin,
in their life's journey; ta ba don, they shall; a, they said.
225. Da, things of whatever kind; i-thu-ts'a-ga, fail to obtain; zhi,
not; mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; ta ba don, they
shall; a, they said.
231. We-gon-tha, use in your supplications; a-shni, you carry with
you; ba, you; she, as you go forth; do", when; shki, and;
a, they said.
232. Da-don, whatever things or efforts you may make; i-sdu-ts'a-ga,
fail to obtain or to succeed; zhi, not; ta i tsin da, you shall.
234. He, that; shki don, also; a, they said, 301, 350, 360, 369, 505,508.
236. We-gon-tha, use in their supplications; a-thin, have; mon-thin,
as they travel the path of life; ta i tsin da, they shall.
237. Da, things, or efforts; i-thu-ts'a-ga, fail to obtain or to succeed;
zhi, not; mon-thin, in their life's journey; ta i tsin da, they
shall.
240. Da, things (living enemies); ni-the, permit to live; thin-ge,
none; on-ni-ka-shi-ga, we are a people; bin da, we are.
241. Edsi, at that place, present; zhi, not; the, being; thin-ge, none;
on-ni-ka-shi-ga, we are a people; bin da, we are, 256, 490.
242. In-gthon-ga, puma; zhu-i-ga, body; the, made of; ton, standing;
no", the; a, they said, 310, 383, 400, 424, 441, 461, 524, 535
545.
245. Thi-con-ga, your younger brother; gi, returning; thin, moving;
we-ton-in da, there are signs, 315.
246. I-shnon-shnon the, tripping as he hastens; xtsi, verily; thin da,
as he moves, 467.
247. I-ton-thin-thin-ga-ga, running from time to time as he hastens;
thi" da, as he moves, 468.
248. U-gi-ki-a, speak to him, he who is yours; ba, you; thin, ha,
move ye forth, 316, 469.
249. U-gi-ki-e, to speak to him; a-tsia-tha, hastened; ba, they; don,
and; a, they said, 317, 470.
251. Ni-ka-shi-ga, a person; win, a, one; e-dsi, there, at a certain
place; a-ka, is; wi-zhin-the, my elder brothers; e, saying; ton,
stood; a, they said.
252. Non-pe-wa-the, a fear-inspiring one; xtsi, verily; bi a, he is;
wi-zhin-the, my elder brothers; e, saying; ton, stood; a, they
said, 479.
253. Xi-ka-shi-ga, persons; the on-ga thin, we who here move; e-gon,
resembles; xtsi, verily; bin da, he does.
255. No", look you; da, things of whatever kind, enemies; ni-the,
permit to live, to escape; thin-ge, none; on-ni-ka-shi-ga, we are
a people; bi, we are; e-pshe in da, I have said, 330, 489.
568 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 3G
257. Ni-ka-shi-ga, person; be, whoever; thin, he who moves, lives;
shki do", he may be; a, they said.
258. Wa-non-xe, spirits; a-dsi, there, in the place where they dwell;
the, to go; on-the, we cause him to; ta i tsin da, we shall, 266,
327, 329, 492.
259. Ni-ka-shi-ga, person; be, whoever; zhin-ga, little one; i-ta,
whose; the, he; shki don, may be; a, they said.
260. Ki, lay down upon the ground; i-he on-the, we make him to lie;
ta i tsin da, we shall.
261. Ta, contraction of the word e-ta, in that direction, where stands
the person; xtsi, verily; a-tsia-tha, they hastened ; bi, they, a,
they said.
262. U-ba-non-the, ceremonial pause; win, one; ga-xe, made; a-ka,
they, 332.
263. U-ba-non-the, ceremonial pauses; do-ba, four; hi, arriving at;
he-the, stood in line, abreast as though laying down of a line;
a-ka, they, 333-334, 495.
264. The, there, yonder; a-ka, he is, he stands; wi-zhin-the, my elder
brothers; e, saying; ton, he, the messenger, stood; a, they
said, 335, 496. '
267. We-a-ba-cu, pointer, forefinger, index finger; a, they said, 337.
268. I-u-gthe, thrust into their mouths; a-tsia-tha, hastily; a-ka,
they.
269. I-u-gtha-kshin, moistened in their mouths; a-tsia-tha, hastily ;
bi, they; don, then; a, they said.
271. Ni-ka-shi-ga, the person, 296.
272. Hon-ga, a sacred person; bthi" a, I am; wi-zhin-the, my elder
brothers; e, saying; ton, stood; a, they said.
273. Wi-zhin-the, my elder brothers; a, they said.
274. I-e-wa-cka, he speaks clearly (our language); bi a, he does;
wi-zhin-the, my elder brothers; e, saying; to", stood (the
Puma) ; a, they said.
275. Ho°-ga, a sacred person; Wa-tse-gi-tsi, He-who-comes-from-the-
midst-of-the-stars; wi, I am; a-ton he in da, I who stand here.
276. Wi-zhin-the, My elder brothers; e, saying; ton, stood (he, the
stranger); a, they said, 318, 472, 477.
277. Zhin-ga-ga-hi-ge, Young-chief; wi, I am; a-ton he in da, I who
stand here.
278. Wa-tse-ga-hi-ge, Star-chief; wi, I am; a-ton he in da, I who
stand here.
279. Wa-tse-ga-wa, Radiant-star; wi, I am; a-ton he in da, I who
stand here.
280. Wa-tse-mon-in, Star- that- travels; wi, I am; a-ton he in da, I who
stand here.
282. Zhin-ga-ga-hi-ge, Young-chief; a, they said, 292.
r.A FI.ESCHE] TRIBAL RITES LITERAL TRANSLATION 569
283. Zha-zhe, name; tha-ki-ton, you shall make to be yours; mo"-ni,
as you travel the path of life; ta i tsin da, you shall, 285.
284. Wa-tse-ga-wa, Radiant-star; shki, also; a, they said, 294.
286. We-shnon, grateful ; wi-gi-tho a, I am causing you to be ; wi-zhin-
the, my elder brother; e, saying; tsi-the, quickly; a, they said.
290. U-xthi, malice, hatred, anger; thin-ge, having none; on-ki-the,
we shall make ourselves to be; ta i tse a, we shall; wi-con-ga,
my younger brothers; e-ki-e, said to one another; thon-ka,
they.
291. Zha-zhe, name; on-ki-ton, make to be ours; ta i tsin da, we shall,
302, 353, 355, 358, 509, 511, 515, 517, 519.
293. Zha-zhe, name; on-ki-ton, make to be ours; ta i tse a, we shall;
wi-con-ga, my younger brothers; e-ki-e, said to one another;
thon-ka, they, 295, 299, 304, 351, 571, 574, 577.
297. I-e-wa-cka, he speaks clearly; e-sha bi non, you have said; a,
they said.
298. I-e-cka-wa-the, Clear-speaker or Speaks-fluently; shki, also.
300. Pa-thin, stranger; e-go", like one; e-sha bi non, you have said;
a, they said.
303. Pa-thin-hon-ga, The-sacred-stranger; shki, also.
307. We-ki-k'on, articles for ceremonial use; wa-thin-ga bin da, we
have no; e-ki-e, said to one another; a-ka, they, 306, 380, 405,
423, 443, 460.
309. (,'i-thu-ce, footsteps they took; a-tsia-tha, hastened forth; ba,
they; don, and; a, they said, 331, 493.
314. He-dsi, there, at that moment; xtsi, verily; gi, homeward; thin,
moving; a, they said, 465.
319. Wa-dsu-ta, animal; thon-tse, appearing to be of importance;
xtsi, verily; win, an, one; a, they said, 473.
320. He-dsi, there, at a certain place; a-ka, is; wi-zhin-the, my elder
brothers; e, saying; to", stood; a, they said, 474.
323. Wi-con-ga, my younger brother; a-ka, he, 481.
324. Wa-dsu-ta, animal; thon-tse, of some importance; xtsi, verily;
win, an, one; e-dsi, there, at a certain place; a-ka, is; bin da,
he has said.
326. Thi-to-ge, make haste; gtha, act quickly; ba, ye; thi", ha, as
you move, 488.
328. Wa-dsu-ta, animal; be, whoever; zhin-ga, little one; i-^a i, theirs;
shki do", may be, 491.
336. Wa-no°-xe, spirits; a-dsi, there, where, they dwell; the, go;
on-the, we cause; ta bi, we shall; e-pshe in da, I have said.
338. I-u-gtha-shon, moistened in their mouths; a-ka, they.
339. A-ba-cu, pointed at him; a-tsia-tha, proceeded to; bi, they; a,
they said.
570 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 30
340. Hin, hairs or feathers; ga-ta-the, struck it and made its feathers
to scatter; i-he-the, made the animal to lie in death; a-ka,
they.
341. He-dsi, at that moment; xtsi, verily; hi-e-ha, they arrived upon
the spot; a-ka, they.
343. Mi-xa, a swan; bi a, it is; wi-zhin-the, my elder brothers; e, they
said; tsi-the, quickly; a, they said.
344. Mi-xa-cka, a white swan; bi a, it is; wi-zhin-the, my elder
brothers; e, they said; tsi-the, quickly; a, they said.
345. We-ki-k'on, a ceremonial article; on-tha, we make of it; ba-thon,
it is fit that we; tsin da, we shall.
346. We-ki-k'on, a ceremonial article; on-the, we make of it; ta i tsi°
da, we shall, 361.
347. (^i, feet; sha-ba, dark in color; bin da, it is.
348. Pa, head; sha-ba, dark in color; bia da, it is.
349. Hin, hairs or feathers; cka, white; ga ge, these; shki, also; a,
they said.
352. Mi-xa-cka, White-swan; shki, also; a, they said.
354. Wa-zhin-ga-cka, White-bird; shki, also; a, they said.
356. Zhin-ga, the little ones; zha-zhe, these names; ki-ton, they shall
make to be their own; mon-thin, as they travel the path of
life; ta i tsin da, they shall.
357. Mon-shon-cka, White-feather; shki, also; a, they said.
359. (^i-ha, skin of the feet; sha-be, dark in color; ga, these; shki,
also; a, they said.
363. Non-xthe, charcoal for ceremonial use; on-gi-the, we shall make
of it, the color (symbolically); ta i tsin da, we shall, 375.
367. Mi-xa-cka, white swan; win, a, one; ts'e, dead; on-tha, we caused
it to be; bi nou, that one; a, they said.
368. Ta-hi u-sdo-zha, curve of its neck; ga, this; thin-kshe, the
sitting; a, they said.
370. Wa-xthe-xthe, war standard; on-gi-the, we make of it; ta i tsin
da, we shall.
371. Wa-xthe-xthe, war standard; on-gi-the, we make of it; on-mon-
thin, in our life's journey; bi, we; do", when.
374. Pa, tip of the bill; sha-be, the dark color; ga, this; tse, standing;
a, they said.
376. NoVxthe, charcoal; oQ-gi-the, we make of it; on-mon-thin, in our
life's journey; bi, we; don, when; a, they said.
386. A-ba-do, a small hill; a-tha-k'a-be, on the side of; dsi, there;
xtsi, verily; a, they said.
387. 'Iu sha-gtha, fragment of a rock; thin-kshe, the sitting; non, the;
a, they said.
388. He-dsi, there, at that moment; xtsi, verily; a-thiQ, carrying it in
his hands; gi, he came home; a, they said, 410, 429, 447, 528,
538, 549.
I.AFLESCHE] TRIBAL KITES LITERAL TRANSLATION 571
389. The, this, the fragment of a rock; hon, what; a-zhin-tha, think
you; wi-zhin-the, my elder brothers; e, said; tsi-the, quickly;
a, they said, 411, 430, 448, 529, 539, 550.
390. The, this; we-kik'on, ceremonial article; oMha, we make of;
ba, we; thon-tse, in da, it is fitting.
392. Zhin-ga, the little ones; we-ki-k'on, ceremonial article; tha, make
of it; ba, they; thon ta, fitting; zhi a-tha, not.
393. Zhin-ga, the little ones; we-ki-k'on, ceremonial article; tha, make
of it; ba, they; thon ta, fitting; zhi, not; thon-zha, however,
414, 432, 449.'
394. Zhi"-ga, the little ones; zhu-i-ga, bodies; the, make of it; ta i
tse a-tha, they shall, 415, 433, 451.
395. Zhin-ga, the little ones; zhu-i-ga, bodies; the, make of it; mon-
thin, in their life's journey; bi, they; don, when; a, they said,
398, 400, 416, 418, 420, 434, 436, 438, 452, 454, 456.
396. Zhi"-ga, the little ones.
408. A-ba-do, a small hill; a-ga-ha, on the top of; xtsi, verily; a, they
said.
409. 'In da-po-ki, rock that explodes with heat; thin-kshe, sitting;
no", the; a, they said.
413. Zhin-ga, the little ones; we-ki-k'o", ceremonial article; tha, make
of it; ba, they; thon-ta, fitting; zhi a, it is not; wi-con-ga, my
younger brother; e-gi-e, said to him; a-ka, they.
426. U-ton-be, search; ga-xa, you make; thin ha, go forth, 444, 463.
427. A-thin, a ridge; u-ta-no", a gap; xtsi, verily; ge, the; dsi, there;
a, they said.
428. 'In-zhu-cka, white rock; thin-kshe, the sitting; a, they said.
431. The, this; we-ki-k'on, ceremonial article; tha, make of it; ba,
they; thon tse a, let them; wi-zhin-the, my elder brother;
e, saying; to", he stood; a, they said.
446. 'I" zhu-ci; thi"-kshe, the sitting; a, they said.
450. Zhin-ga, the little ones; zhu-i-ga, bodies; tha, make of it; ba,
they; thon t,se a-tha, it may be fitting.
457. U-non, old age; a bi, spoken of; shki, also.
458. I-the, live to see; ki-the, cause themselves to or enable them
selves to; mon-thin, in their life's journey; ta i tse a, they shall;
zhin-ga, the little ones.
466. Wi-con-ga, my younger brother; gi, returning; tin", moving;
we-ton-in da, there are signs; e-ki-e, said to one another;
thon-ka, they.
475. Wa-dsu-^a, animal; non-pe-wa-the, fear-inspiring; xtsi, verily;
bi a, he is; wi-zhin-the, my elder brothers; e, saying; to", he
stood; a, they said, 479.
476. (ji, feet; zha-^a, cloven; bin da, he is.
478. He, horns; a-gthe, set upon his head: a-ka in da, he has.
572 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 30
480. Ha, O; wi-zhin-the, my elder brothers; e-ki-a, said to one an
other; bi, they; a, they said.
481. Wi-con-ga, my younger brother; a-ka, he.
482. Wa-non-pe, in fear, alarm; xtsi, verily; a-gthi, he has cpme home
a-ka in da, he has.
483. Wa-dsu-ta, animal; win, an, one; e-dsi, there, in a certain place
ton, standing; a, they said.
484. Non-pe-wa-the, fear-inspiring; xtsi, verily; to", he stands; a
they said.
485. £i, feet; zha-ta, cloven; e, said; a-ka in da, he has.
486. He, horns; ge, the; e-ton, even; a-gthe, he has upon his head;
e, said; a-ka in da, he has.
487. She, that; shon in da, is well; e-ki-e, said to one another; thon-ka,
they.
494. U-ba-no"-the, a ceremonial pause; win-a-ha, one or the first;
i-he-the, in a line as though laid upon the ground; a-ka, they.
495. U-ba-non-the, ceremonial pause; do-ba, four or a fourth; hi he,
arriving they made; a-ka, they.
497. E-dsi, there, at the place; hi he tha, arriving at, stood in line;
bi, they; no", when; a, they said.
498. Wa-dsu-ta, animal, where stood the animal.
499. Mi-ga, a female; a-ka, it is; wi-zhin-the, my elder brothers;
e-ki-e, said to one another; thon-ka, they.
501. We-ki-k'on, ceremonial article; on-tha, we make of it; ba thon
tse a, it is fit that we; wi-zhin-the, my elder brothers; e-ki-e,
said to one another; thon-ka, they, 503.
502. Xin-ha, the skin; ge, the various parts; e-ton, even to the; a,
they said.
504. Non-ka, the back; u-pa, the length and breadth of; ga, this;
kshe, that lies; a, they said.
506. U-we-ton-in, significant in its usefulness; xtsi, verily; a-ka, it is;
wi-zhin-the, my elder brothers; e-ki-e, said to one another;
thon-ka, they.
507. Min, the skin, out of which is made the robe; ga, this; thin-kshe,
the sitting; a, they said.
510. Zhin-ga, the little ones; Min-tse-xi, Sacred-robe; shki, also; a,
they said.
512. Non-ka-dsi-wi", Woman-of-the-spine ; shki, also; a, they said.
514. He, horns; ga-xa, that spread out; zhin-ga, small; ge, the; shki,
also; a, they said.
516. Pa, the head; thin-kshe, the sitting; e-ton, even that; shki, also;.
a, they said.
518. Tse-pa-ga-xe, Maker-of-the-head ; shki, also; a, they said.
521. Hon-ga, Name of the Hon-ga, subdivision; U-dse-the, fireplaces;
Pe-tho"-ba, seven; ni-ka-shi-ga, a people; bin da, they who are.
I.AFLESCHE] TRIBAL RITES LITERAL TRANSLATION 573
522. Xtha-xtha, craven or timid; thin-ge, none; xtsi, verily; ni-ka-
shi-ga, a people; bin da, they are.
523. Zhi"-ga, the little ones; mon-hin, knife; tha, to make of; ba, they;
thon-tse, they could; thin-ge in da, there is nothing; wi-con-ga,
my younger brothers; e-ki-e, said to one another; tho°-ka, they.
527. 'In-ba-xtha, stone that flakes; kshe, the long^no", the; a, they
said.
530. Zhin-ga, the little ones; mon-hin, knife; tha, make of it; ba, they;
thoMse a, let them; wi-zhin-the, my elder brothers; e, saying;
to", he stood; a, they said, 540.
531. Zhin-ga, the little ones; mon-hin, knife; tha, make of it; ba, they;
thon-ta, fit; zhi in da, it is not.
532. E-zhi-zhi-cka, not the right kind; u-ton-ga, not quite; wi-con-ga,
my younger brother; e-gi-e, said to him; thon-ka, they, 541.
534. No", look you; zhin-ga, the little ones; mon-hin, knife; tha, to
make of; ba, they; tho"-tse, fit; thin-ge, none or nothing;
e-pshe, in da, I have said, 542, 544.
537. Mon-hin-9i, flint; ca-gi, hard; kshe, long; non, the; a, they said.
548. Mon-hin-ci, flint (knife); i-ba, handle; btho-ga, round; zhu-dse,
red; kshe, long; a, they said.
552. She, that; e-shnon, alone, or the very thing; u-tha-dse, you have
been searching for; tha to" she a, as you stand there; wi-
90n-ga, my younger brother; e-gi-a, said to him; bi, they; a,
they said.
553. Zhin-ga, the little ones; mon-hin, knife; tha, make of it; ba, they;
thon-tse in da, it is fit.
554. Zhin-ga, the little ones; mon-hin, knife; the, they make of it;
mon-thin, in their life's journey; t& i tse a, they shall; wi-
con-ga, my younger brothers; e-ki-e, said to one another;
thon-ka, they.
556. Mon-hin, knife; gi-the, they make of it or use; mon-thin, in their
life's journey; bi, they; don, when; shki, and; a, they said,
561,563,565,567.
557. Mon-hin, knife; gi-na-hi, sharp enough for them to use; ki-the,
they shall cause it to be; mon-thin, in their life's journey; t& i
tsin da, they shall; zhin-ga, the little ones.
558. Tsi-zhu, the people of the Tsi-zhu division; zhin-ga, little ones;
i-(a, theirs.
559. Wa-zha-zhe, people of the Wa-zha-zhe division; zhin-ga, little
ones; i-(a, theirs; e-thon-ba, also.
560. Mon-hin, a knife, gi-the, make of it or use it; mon-thin, in their
life's journey; (a i tsin da, they shall.
562. Mon-hin, knife; gi-shon-tha, loose-jointed or broken; zhi, not;
ki-the, cause it to be; mon-thin, in their life's journey; t» i
tsin da, they shall.
574 THE OSAGE TRIBE
I ETH. ANN. I
569. Mon-hin, knife; zhu-dse, red; ga, this; kshe, long; shki, also; a,
they said.
572. Zhin-ga, little one; won shki don, any one of them; a, they said,
580.
573. Mon-hin-zhu-dse, Red-knife; shki, also.
576. Mon-hin-hon-ga, Sacred-knife; shki, also; a, they said.
HoN-BE'-gu WI'-GI-E
(Free translation, p. 239; Osage version, p. 428)
1. E-dsi, at that time and place; xtsi, verily; a, they said; a bin da,
it has been said; tsi, house; ga, in this, 3, 13, 19, 35, 51.
2. Zhin-ga, the little ones; da-don, what; ci, foot; ki-the, make for
themselves; ta, shall; ba, they; don, question word; a, they
said, 6.
4. Sho-ka, an official messenger; Wa-ba-xi, the principal; to", the
standing; a, they said, 8.
5. Wi-co"-ga, my younger brother; e-gi-a, said to him; bi, they; a,
they said.
7. O-to"-be, search; ga-xa, to make; thin ha, go thou forth; e-gi-a,
said to him; bi, they; a, they said.
9. Thu-e, promptly, hastily; xtsi, verily; the, went forth; do", and;
a, they said.
10. 'In, stone, rock or boulder; zhu-dse, red; thin-kshe, the, sitting;
no", the; a, they said.
11. Wi-zhi"-the, my elder brothers; e, he said: tsi-the, quickly; a,
they said.
12. The, this; zhin-ga, the little ones; ci, foot; ki-the, make for them
selves; mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; ta i tsin da,
they shall; e, he said; tsi-the, quickly; a, they said, 29, 45, 61.
14. Zhin-ga, the little ones; ci, foot; ki-tha, make for themselves; bi,
they; don, when; a, they said.
15. £i, foot; gi-ba-xtho-ga, to pierce as by thorns and sharp grasses;
zhi, not; ki-the, cause themselves to; mon-thin, as they travel
the path of life; ta i tsi" da, they shall; e, he said; tsi-the,
quickly; a, they said, 33, 50, 65.
16. Xa-dse, grasses, non-sha-tha-ge, trample down, crush with the
foot; ki-the, cause themselves to; mon-thin, as they travel the
path of life; ta i tsi" da, they shall; e, he said; tsi-the, quickly;
a, they said, 34, 49, 66.
17. Zhi"-ga, the little ones; ci, foot; ki-the, make for themselves;
mo"-thi", as they travel the path of life; bi, they; do", when;
a, they said, 30, 32, 46, 48, 62, 64.
18. (^i, foot; i-ki, when they make of it; i-ts'a, causes of death,
thin-ge, none; ki-the, cause themselves to; mon-thi", as they
travel the path of life; ta i tsin da, they shall; e, he said; tsi-the
quickly; a, they said, 31, 47, 63.
LAFLESCHEJ TRIBAL RITES — LITERAL TRANSLATION 575
20. Zhi"-ga, the little ones; da-do", what; hon-be-ko", moccasin
strings; the, make of; mon-thin, as they travel the path of life;
ta, shall; ba, they; do", question word; a, they said, 36, 52, 68.
21. Ki-cda, leech; mon-ge, breast; zhu-dse, red; kshe, the long; a,
they said.
22. Zhin-ga, the little ones; ho"-be-ko°, moccasin strings; the, make
of it; mo"-thi", as they travel the path of life; ta i tsi" da, they
shall; e, he said; tsi-the, quickly; a, they said, 38, 54, 70.
23. Zhi"-ga, the little ones; ho"-be-kon, moccasin strings; the, make
of it; mon-thi", as they travel the path of life; bi, they; do",
when; a, they said, 39, 41, 55, 57, 71, 73.
24. Ho"-be-kon, moccasin strings; i-ts'a, causes of death; thin-ge,
none; ki-the, cause themselves to be; mon-thin, as they travel
the path of life; ta i tsin da, they shall; e, he said; tsi-the,
quickly; a, they said, 26, 42, 56, 74.
25. Ho"-be-ko", moccasin strings; gi-ba-xa, break; zhi, not; ki-the,
cause themselves to; mo°-thi", as they travel the path of life;
e, he said; tsi-the, quickly; a, they said, 40, 58, 72.
27. Ho"-a-don, same as da-do", what; ci, foot; ki-tha, make of; bi,
they; go" no", shall; shki, and; a, hi" a, question words; e-ki-a,
said to one another; bi, they; a, they said, 43, 59.
28. 'In, stone, rock, or boulder; ca-be, black; thi"-kshe, the sitting;
no", the; a, they said.
37. Ki-cda, leech; mo"-ge, breast; ca-be, black; kshe, the long; a,
they said.
44. 'In, stone, rock, or boulder; shto"-ga, soft; ci-hi, yellow; thi"-
kshe, the sitting; non, the; a, they said.
53. Ki-cda, leech; mon-ge, breast; ci, yellow; kshe, the long; no",
the; a, they said.
60. 'In, stone, rock, or boulder; shto"-ga, soft; sha-be, dark; thi"-
kshe, the sitting; no", the; a, they said.
69. Ki-cda, leech; mon-ge, breast; sha-be, dark; kshe, the long; a,
they said.
Kl'-NON Wl'-GI-E
(Free translation, p. 242; Osage version, p. 431)
1. He-dsi, at that time and place; xtsi, verily; a, they said; a bi" da,
it has been said; tsi, house; ga, in this, 3, 6, 9, 11, 16, 18, 21,
23, 45, 47.
2. Zhi"-ga, the little ones; da-do", what; ki-no", symbolic painting;
gi-the, make use of; ta, shall; ba, they; do", an interrogative
particle; a, they said.
4. 'In-zhin-ga, small stones; do-ba. four.
5. A-ki-kon, leaning against each other; i-tse-the, placed; a-ka, they.
576 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
7. £a-zhi"-ga, twigs, dead branches of trees; ha-tho"-cka, an indefi
nite size of land covered by trees, within reach; don, the; a,
they said.
8. Thi-bthon-bthon-xe, to break into pieces with a din; a-tsia-tha,
proceeded; a-ka, they.
10. U-ba-mon-xe, thrusting the pieces underneath or between the
stones; i-tse-the, placed them; a-ka, they.
12. Da-k'o, a light, glow; i-the, to spread afar; ga-xe, made; a-ka,
they.
13. O-da-bthui a vibrating motion of the air with heat; i-the, to
spread afar; ga-xe, made; a-ka, they.
14. Mon-xe, the heaven; a-tha-k'a-be, the sides, the slopes of; don,
the; a, they said.
15. Da-zhu-dse, reddened with heat; i-non-the, made them to sit;
a-ka, they.
17. Zhin-ga, the little ones; ki-no", symbolic painting; gi-the, make
of this, the reflection of the fire against the sky, the vibration
of the air with heat; tse a-tha, let them; e-ki-a, said to one
another; bi, they; a, they said.
19. Tsi-zhu, the Tsi-zhu division; U-dse-the, fireplaces; Pe-tho"-ba,
seven.
20. U-ca-ka, parts left untouched by the glow; thin-ge, none; i-he-the,
made the mass of the people to lie.
22. Da-do", what; i-tha-thu-ce, bring forth with its influence; tse,
can; don, an interrogative particle; e-ki-a, said to one another;
bi, they; a, they said, 46.
24. Tse-ha-wa-gthe, shield; zhu-dse, red; thin-kshe, the sitting; a,
they said, 30, 35, 40.
25. I-tha-thu-ce, bring forth with its influence; tse a-tha, let it;
e-ki-a, said to one another; bi, they; a, they said, 49.
26. I-tha-thu-ce, bring forth with its influence; kshi-tha, they cause
it to; bi, they; don, when; a, they said.
27. Mi, sun; hi-e, the setting of; ge, the places; ta, from the direction
of, 32, 37, 42.
28. Wa-pa-hi, sharp weapons; u-kia-sha, equal in numbers; thin-ge,
none; a-thin, bringing; a-hi, they come; bi, they; shki, and;
do", when; a, they said, 33, 38, 43.
29. Wa-pa-hi, sharp weapons; a-gtha, standing out from their bodies;
ba, they; zhi, not; ki-the, cause themselves to; mon-thi", as
they travel the path of life; ta i tsin da, they shall; e, said;
tsi-the, quickly; a, they said.
31. I-tha-thu-ce, attract toward us; o"-gi-tha, we cause it to; bi, we;
don, when; a, they said, 36, 41, 51, 54.
LAFLISCHE] TRIBAL RITES LITERAL TRANSLATION 577
34. Wa-pa-hi, sharp weapons; a-bu-zha-ga, pass harmlessly by in
forked lines; bi, they; ki-the, cause themselves to; mon-thin,
as they travel the path of life; ta i tsi" da, they shall; e, said;
tsi-the, quickly; a, they said.
39. Wa-pa-hi, sharp weapons; a-ki-tha-zha-ta, glance away on either
side; bi, they; ki-the, cause themselves to; mon-thin, as they
travel the path of life; ta i tsin da, they shall; e, said; tsi-the,
quickly; a, they said.
44. Wa-parhi, sharp weapons; ge-gon, glance harmlessly away; bi,
we; on-ki-the, we cause ourselves to be; on-mon-thin, as we
travel the path of life; ta i tsin da, we shall; e, said; tsi-the,
quickly; a, they said.
48. Wa-kon-da, god; Hon-ba, day; do", of the; thin-kshe, the sitting;
a, they said, 50, 53.
52. Wa-kon-da, gods; non-wa-pa, feared by; bi, we; on-mon-thin, as
we travel the path of life; ta i tsin da, we shall; e, said; tsi-the.
quickly; a, they said.
55. Wa-kon-da, gods; e-shki do", even they, themselves; a, they said,
56. In-dse, faces; u-wa-kia-ta, stare us in the; ba, they; zhi, not;
on-mon-thin, we travel the path of life; ta i tsin da, we shall;
e, said; tsi-the, quickly; a, they said.
Kl'-NON Wl'-GI-E
(Free translation, p. 247; Osage version, p. 433)
1. He-dsi, at that time and place; xtsi, verily; a, they said; a bin
da, it has been said; (si, house; ga, in this, 7, 13, 38.
2. Zhin-ga, the little ones; da-don, what; pi-tha-ton, use for a girdle;
mon-thin, as they travel the path of life"; ta, shall; ba, they;
do", interrogative particle; a, they said.
3. Tse-hin, buffalo hair; zhin-ga, of the little one, the calf; thin-kshe,
the sitting; no", the; a, they said, 9.
4. Ga, this; pi-tha-ton, use as a girdle; a-ka, they will.
5. Zhin-ga, the little ones; pi-tha-ton, girdle; ki-the, cause them
selves to use; mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; bi, they;
don, when; a, they said.
6. I-ts'a, causes of death; thin-ge, none; ki-the, cause themselves to;
mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; ta i tsi" da, they shall;
e, said; tsi-the, quickly; a, they said.
8. Zhin-ga, the little ones; da-don, what; wa-non-p'in, neckband; the,
make of or use; mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; fa,
shall; ba, they; don, interrogative particle; a, they said.
10. Ga, this; wa-non-p'in, neckband; the, use; a-ka, they will.
2786—21 37
578 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 30
11. Wa-non-p'in, neckband; the, make of or use; mon-thin, as they
travel the path of life; bi, they; don, when; a, they said.
12. Wa-non-p'in, neckband; i-ts'a, causes of death; thin-ge, none;
ki-the, cause themselves to be; mon-thin, as they travel the
path of life; ta i tsin da, they shall; e, said; tsi-the, quickly;
a, they said.
14. Tsiu-ge, mussel; thin-kshe, the sitting; non, the; a, they said, 16.
15. Ga, this; wa-non-p'in, gorget pendant; the, use; ta, shall; a-ka,
they.
17. Ni, water, river; ki-mon-hon, against the current; the, went forth;
don, did; a, they said.
18. Niu-i-xa-xa, shallows where the waters rush over the rocks; ga,
this; thin-kshe, sitting; a, they said.
19. Wa-ni-e-cka, without a purpose; she-mon, I have made; mon-zhi
in da, I have not, 27, 31, 35.
20. Ho-non, old age; pa-xe in da, I have made it to be, 23.
21. Zhin-ga, the little ones; won shki, some may; i-ts'a, causes of
death; thin-ge, none; ki-the, cause themselves to be; mon-thin,
as they travel the path of life; ta i tsin da, they shall; e, said;
tsi-the, quickly; a, they said.
22. Ni waters, rivers; ba-btha-xe, ripples, waves; ga ge, these; a,
they said.
24. Zhin-ga, the little ones; zho-i-ga, bodies; on-tha, make of me; bi,
they; do", when; a, they said; 36.
25. O-non, old age; a bi, spoken of as; i-the, live to see; ki-the, cause
themselves to; mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; ta i
tsin da, they shall; e, said; tsi-the, quickly; a, they said.
26. Niu-thu-ga, the -hollow bed of the river; ga, this; thin-kshe, sit
ting; a, they said.
28. Zliin-ga, the little ones; thi-e, the trunk of the body; u-thi-xthu-
k'a, the hollow part; the, make of it; mon-thin, as they travel
the path of life; bi, they; don, when; a, they said.
29. Thi-e, trunk of the body; u-thi-xthu-k'a, the hollow part; i-ts'a,
causes of death; thin-ge, none; ki-the, cause themselves to be;
mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; ta i tsin da, they shall;
e, said; tsi-the, quickly; a, they said.
30. Ni, water, river; u-ca-gi, the strong part, the current; ga, this;
kshe, that here lies; a, they said.
32. Zhin-ga, the little ones; ni-a-kon, windpipe; the, make of it; mon-
thin, as they travel the path of life; bi, they; don, when; a, they
said.
33. Ni-a-kon, windpipe; i-ts'a, causes of death; thin-ge, none; ki-the,
cause themselves to be; mon-thin, as they travel the path of
life; ta i tsin da, they shall; e, said; tsi-the, quickly; a, they
said.
LAFLESCHE] TRIBAL RITES - LITERAL TRANSLATION 579
34. Ni, water, river; i-ton-thin-a-ha, in front of me; ga-gthe-ce, that
ripples; ga, this; kshe, that lies; a, they said.
37. Mon-ge, breast; ga-gthe-ce, furrows, wrinkles of age; a bi, spoken
of as; i-the, live to see; ki-the, cause themselves to; mon-thi",
as they travel the path of life; $a i tsin da, they shall; e, said;
tsi-the, quickly; a, they said.
39. Won shki don, and it shall so happen; a, they said.
40. Hon-ba, days; tha-gthin, good, calm, peaceful; shki, and; u-hi,
arrive at and enter; a-ki-the, I cause myself to; a-thin he, as I
travel in the path of life; non in da, I do.
41. Zhin,ga, the little ones; hon-ba, days; tha-gthin, good, calm, peace
ful; shki, and; u-hi, arrive at and enter; ki-the, cause them
selves to; mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; ta i tsin da,
they shall; e, said; tsi-the, quickly; a, they said.
E Wl'-GI-E
(Free translation, p. 249; Osage version, p. 435)
1. He-dsi, at that time and place; xtsi, verily; a, they said; a biQ da,
it has been said; tsi, house; ga, in this, 19, 50.
2. Wa-xo-be, a sacred object; pi-zhi, mysterious; a, they said.
3. I-gi-k'u-tse, to test its mysterious powers; ta, that; ba, they;
don, may; a, they said.
4. Wa-ci-thu-ce, an object toward which they may direct their
footsteps; u-ki-dse, seek for themselves; ta, shall; a-ka, they.
5. U-k'u-be, valley; win, a, one; a-ci-thu-ca, they directed their
footsteps toward; ba, they; don, did; a, they said.
6. U-k'u-be, valley; win, one; e-cka, indeed; e-wa-ka, they meant;
zhi, not; a-ka, they.
7. Wa-dsu-ta, animal, buffalo; win, one; a-ci-thu-ca, they directed
their footsteps toward; ba, they; do", did; a, they said.
8. Wa-dsu-ta, animal; win, one; e-cka, indeed; e-wa-ka, they meant;
zhi, not; a-ka, they.
9. Wa-dsu-ta, animals; u-ba-tse, group; win, one; a-ki-gtha-thin, that
keep themselves; no" no", habitually; a, they said.
10. Ga, those; a-ci-thu-ca, directed their footsteps toward; a-tsia-tha,
they proceeded; bi, they; a, they said, 14, 26, 31, 42, 57, 61.
11. Wa-dsu-ta, animals; u-ba-tse, group; win, one; e-cka, indeed;
e-wa-ka, they meant; zhi, not; a-ka, they.
12. Mi, sun; hi-e, setting; ge, the places; (a, in that direction, 29,
44, 59.
13. Ni, river; ti-ga-xthi, bend; win, one; e-dsi, there; non non, is; a,
they said.
15. Ni, river; u-ga-xthi, bend; win, one; e-cka, indeed; e-wa-ka, they
meant; zhi, not; a-ka, they.
580 THE OSAGE TEIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
16. Tsi-zhin-ga, little house; win, one; a-ci-thu-ce, directed their foot
steps toward; a-ka, they, 33, 47, 63.
17. Zhin-ga, the little ones; wa-ci-thu-ce, direct their footsteps
toward these; mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; bi,
they; don, when; a, they said, 34, 48, 64.
18. Wa-fi-thu-ce, the act of of taking footsteps; gi-o-ts'e-ga, easy
for them; ta, that it may; ba, they; shon, purpose; a-ka, they,
35, 49, 65.
20. Wa-ci-thu-ce, direct their footsteps; ga non, toward what; shki,
and; a, hin a, interrogative particles; e-ki-a, said to one another;
bi, they; a, they said, 36, 51.
21. U-k'u-be, valleys; thon-ba, two; a-ci-thu-ca, direct their footsteps
toward; ba, they; don, did; a, they said.
22. U-k'u-be, valleys; thon-ba, two; e-cka, indeed; e-wa-ka, they
meant; zhi, not; a-ka, they.
23. Wa-dsu-ta, animals; thon-ba, two; a-ci-thu-ca, direct their foot
steps toward; ba, they; do", did.
24. Wa-dsu-ta, animals; thon-ba, two; e-cka, indeed; e-wa-ka, they
meant; zhi, not; a-ka, they.
25. Wa-dsu-ta, animals; u-ba-tse, groups; thon-ba, two; a-ki-gtha-
thin, that keep themselves together; non non, habitually; a,
they said, 27.
28. E-cka, indeed; e-wa-ka, they meant; zhi, not; a-ka, they.
30. Ni, river; u-ga-xthi, bends; thon-ba, two; e-dsi, there; non non,
are; a, they said.
32. Ni, river; u-ga-xthi, bends; thon-ba, two; e-cka, indeed; e-wa-ka,
they meant; zhi, not; a-ka, they.
37. U-k'u-be, valleys; tha-bthin, three; a-ci-thu-ca, direct their foot
steps toward; ba, they; don, did; a, they said.
38. U-k'u-be, valleys; tha-bthin, three; e-cka, indeed; e-wa-ka, they
meant; zhi, not; a-ka, they.
39. Wa-dsu-ta, animals; tha-bthin, three; a-ci-thu-ca, direct their
footsteps toward; bin da, they did.
40. Wa-dsu-ta, animals; tha-bthin, three; e-cka, indeed; e-wa-ka, they
meant; zhi, not; a-ka, they.
41. Wa-dsu-ta, animals; u-ba-tse, groups; tha-bthiD, three; a-ki-
gtha-thin, keep themselves together; non non, habitually; a,
they said.
43. Wa-dsu-ta, animals; u-ba-tse, groups; tha-bthin, three; e-cka,
indeed; e-wa-ka, they meant; zhi, not; a-ka, they.
45. Ni, river; u-ga-xthi, bends; tha-bthin, three; a-ci-thu-ca, direct
their footsteps toward; bin da, they did.
46. Ni, river; u-ga-xthi, bends; tha-bthin, three; e-fka, indeed:
e-wa-ka, they meant; zhi, not; a-ka, they.
I.AFLKSCHE] TRIBAL RITES— LITERAL, TRANSLATION 581
52. U-k'u-be, valleys; do-ba, four; a-ci-thu-ca, direct their footsteps
toward; -bin da, they did.
53. U-k'u-be, valleys; do-ba, four; e-cka, indeed; e-wa-ka, they
meant; zhi, not; a-ka, they.
54. Wa-dsu-ta, animals; do-ba, four; a-ci-thu-ca, direct their foot
steps toward; bin da, they did.
55. Wa-dsu-ta, animals; do-ba, four; e-cka, indeed; e-wa-ka, they
meant; zhi, not; a-ka, they.
56. Wa-dsu-ta, animals; u-ba-tse, groups; do-ba, four; a-ki-gtha-thin,
that keep themselves; non non, habitually; a, they said.
58. Wa-dsu-ta, animals; u-ba-tse, groups; do-ba, four; e-pka, indeed;
e-wa-ka, they meant; zhi, not; a-ka, they.
60. Ni, river; u-ga-xthi, bends; do-ba, four; e-dsi, there; no" no", are;
a, they said.
62. Ni, river; u-ga-xthi, bends; do-ba, four; e-fka, indeed; e-wa-ka,
they meant; zhi, not; a-ka, they.
Wl'-GI-E TON-GA
(Free translation, p. 254; Osage version, p. 437)
1. He-dsi, at that time and place; xtsi, verily; a, they said; a bin da,
it has been said; tsi, house; ga, in this, 3, 6, 11, 16, 20, 23, 25,
29, 31, 35, 39, 42, 46, 49, 51, 58, 63, 65, 76, 80, 89, 96, 101, 106,
110, 113, 118, 122, 141, 146, 151, 155, 162, 165, 173, 176, 180,
182, 187, 193, 200, 204, 213, 224, 233, 235, 245, 255, 267, 270,
275, 279, 282, 284, 286, 289, 292, 297, 303, 307, 310, 312, 317,
321, 324, 328, 331, 333, 337, 341, 344, 348, 352, 356, 359, 362,
366, 370, 375, 378, 381, 385, 387, 391, 395, 397, 400, 402, 407,
410, 412, 414, 417, 420, 422, 427, 429, 431, 433, 435, 440, 443,
448, 450, 455, 458, 461, 464, 467, 470, 472, 476, 480, 482, 487,
493, 496, 498, 502, 504, 509, 513, 516, 518, 522, 525, 532, 536,
540, 544, 548, 551, 555, 557, 560, 563, 566, 569, 572, 575, 580.
2. Tsi-zhu, the Tsi-zhu division; u-dse-the, fireplaces; pe-thon-ba,
seven; bi, they; a, they said.
4. Wi-con-ga, my younger brothers; e-ki-e, said to one another;
a-ka, they, 47, 102, 147, 183, 293, 403, 451, 494.
5. Won-da, it seems certain; hiu-dse, below; ^a, there; on-ga-tha,
we go to dwell; ba, we; thon-ta, possible; zhi in da, it is not;
e-ki-a, said to one another; bi, they; a, they said.
7. Sho-ka, messenger; wa-ba-xi, principal; ton, the standing; a, they
said, 12, 52, 66, 78, 90, 107, 111, 123, 132, 142, 152, 156, 167,
188, 194, 205, 215, 225, 236, 246, 256, 298, 304, 325, 345, 376.
8. Wi-con-ga, my younger brother; e-gi-e, said to him; a-ka, they,
108, 153, 189, 299, 314, 322, 334, 342, 353, 371, 388.
582 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
9. Won-da, it seems certain; hiu-dse, below; ta, there; on-ga-tha, we
go to dwell; ba, we; thon-ta, possible; zhi in da, it is not; e-gi-a,
said to him; bi, they; a, they said.
10. O-ton-be, search; ga-xa, make; thin ha, go forth; e-gi-a, said to
him; bi, they; a, they said, 77, 121, 131, 140, 166, 192, 203,
•214, 223, 234, 244, 254, 302, 323, 343, 374.
13. Thu-e, in haste; xtsi, verily; the-e, went forth; don, did; a, they
said, 53, 67, 79, 91, 112, 124, 133, 143, 157, 168, 195, 206, 216,
226, 237, 247, 257, 377.
14. Wa-zhin-ga, bird, eagle; wa-tha-xthi, stain, evil thoughts; thin-ge,
none; thin-kshe, the sitting; a, they said, 21.
15. E-dsi, at that moment; xtsi, verily; a-thin, bringing with him;
gi-e, he returned; don, did; a, they said, 55, 69, 82, 93, 115, 126,
135, 145, 159, 170, 197, 208, 218, 228, 239, 249, 260.
17. Wi-zhin-the, my elder brothers; e, to say; tsi-the, he hastened,
a, they said, 56, 70, 83, 94, 116, 127, 136, 160, 171, 198, 209;
219, 229, 240, 250, 261, 318, 338, 360, 363, 367, 392, 398, 423,
441, 445.
18. The, this, the eagle; i-hiu-dse, by its aid downward; on-ga-the, we
go; ta, shall; bi, we by its strength; thiVkshe, he who here
sits; e, to say; tsi-the, he hastened; a, they said.
19. She, that, the eagle; e, is he; ton, who stands at your side; a-tha,
it is; e-gi-e, said to him; a-ka, they.
22. I-hiu-dse, by the strength of the eagle they descended; a-hiu, and
came to earth; bi, they; a, they said.
24. O-ga-win-xe, soaring in circles; do-ba, of four; ga-xe, making;
non-zhin, he stood; a, they said.
26. £i, footsteps; thu-ca, they took; ba, they; don, did; a, they said;
30, 36, 43.
27. Zhon, tree; p.a-ci, the tops of; pe-thon-ba, seven.
28. Ga, upon these trees; a-ton, they alighted and stood; a-ti, they
had come; a-ka, they.
32. U-k'u-be, valley; ha-thon-cka, of no particular size; don, a; a,
they said, 258.
33. Thiu-xe-ts'a-zhi, the never dying willow; ton, that stood in the
valley; non, the; a, they said, 259.
34. E-dsi, they approached, and close to it; xtsi, verily; hi, they came;
non-zhin, paused; ton, and stood; a, they said, 38.
37. 'In-pa-ci, the top of a rocky cliff; ha-thon-cka, that was of no
particular size; don, a; a, they said.
40. 'P-pka, White-rock; shki, also; a, they said.
41. Zha-zhe, name; on-ki-ton, we shall make to be ours; ta, shall;
i tsin da; we shall, 521, 524, 527, 562, 565.
44. Mon-xe, heavens; pe-thoD-ba ha, the seventh.
45. Hi, they approached and came to; non-zhin, they paused and
stood; a-ka, they.
I.AFLESCHE] TRIBAL KITES LITERAL TRANSLATION 583
48. Won-da, it seems certain; ga-ni-tha, without order, with no organi
zation; pi footsteps; on-thu-pa, we take (to make any progress
as a people); ba, we; thon-ta, possible; zhi in da, it is not;
e-ki-e, said to one another; a-ka, they.
50. O-ton-be, search; ga-xe, made; tse a-tha, let there be; e-ki-a, said
to one another; bi, they; a, they said, 105, 150, 186, 296.
54. 'In-zhu-cka (archaic), stone, rock, or boulder; zhu-dse, red; thin-
kshe, the sitting; non, the; a, they said.
57. The, of this boulder; ci, a foot; on-ki-tha, let us make for our
selves; ba, we; thon-tse in da, it may be suitable.
59. She, that; e-shnon, is the very object; u-tha-dse, for which you
have been making search; tha to" she a, as you stand; wi-
con-ga, my younger brother; e-gi-e, said to him; a-ka, they,
175, 263.
60. Zhin-ga, the little ones; pi, a foot; ki-the, make of it for them
selves; mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; ta, shall;
i tsin da, they shall; e, to say; tsi-the, they hastened; a, they
said, 72, 85, 97.
61. (Ji, a foot; ki-the, they make of it for themselves; mon-thin) as
they travel the path of life; bi, they; don, when; a, they said,
73, 86, 98.
62. ^i, foot; ba-xtho-ga, pierce, wound; zhi, not; ki-the, cause them
selves to; mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; ta, shall;
i tsin da, they shall; e, to say; tsi-the, they hastened; a, they
said, 74, 87, 99.
64. Xa-dse, grasses; non-sha-tha-ge, tread down, crush with the foot;
ki-the, enable themselves to; mon-thin, as they travel the path
of life; ta, shall; i tsi" da, they shall; e, to say; tsi-the; they
hastened; a, they said, 75, 88, 100.
68. 'In-zliu-cka, stone, rock, or boulder; pa-be, the black; thin-kshe,
the sitting; non, the; a, they said.
71. The, this, the black boulder; zhin-ga, the little ones; pi, a foot;
ki-the, make of for themselves; ba, they; thon-tse in da, it
may be suitable for them; e, to say; tsi-the, he hastened; a.
they said, 84, 95.
81. 'In-zhu-cka, stone, rock, or boulder; pi, yellow; i-ga-xu, streaked
with yellow; thin-kshe, the sitting; no", the; a, they said.
92. 'In-zhu-cka, stone, rock, or boulder; sha-be, dark; thin-kshe, the
sitting; non, the; a, they said.
103. Wa-xo-be, a sacred object; pi-zhi, the mysterious; a, they said,
148, 184, 190, 294, 300, 372, 404.
104. We-ki-k'on, articles for ceremonial use; thi°-ge in da, there are
none, are lacking; e-ki-a, said to one another; bi, they; a,
they said, 149, 185, 295, 405.
109. O-ton-be, make search; tha-the, you cause; tse a-tha, we bid you;
e-gi-e, said to him; a-ka, they, 154.
584 THE OSAGE TRIBE [EIH. ANN. 36
114. Mon-hin-ci, flint; zhu-dse, the red; thin-kshe, the sitting; non, the:
a, they said.
117. The, this, red flint; zhin-ga, the little ones; mon-hin, knife; tha,
make of; ba, they; thon tse in da, it may be suitable for them;
e, to say; tsi-the, he hastened; a, they said, 128, 137, 161, 172.
119. Zhin-ga, the little ones; mon-hin, knife; tha, make of it; ba, they;
thon-ta, suitable; zhi a, is not; wi-con-ga, my younger brother;
e-gi-e, said to him; a-ka, they, 129, 138, 163.
120. E-zhi-cka, not the right kind; u-ton-ga, not quite; xtsi in da,
verily; e-gi-e, said to him; a-ka, they, 130, 139, 164, 202, 212,
222, 232, 243, 253.
125. Mon-hin-ci, flint; to-ho, the blue; thin-kshe, the sitting; non, the;
a, they said.
134. Mon-hin-ci, flint; ci, yellow; i-ga-xu, streaked with; thin-kshe,
the sitting; no11, the; a, they said.
144. Mon-hin-ci, flint; pa-be, the black; thin-kshe, the sitting; non,
the; a, they said.
158. Mon-hin-9i, flint; cka, the white; thin-kshe, the sitting; non, the;
a, they said.
169. Mon-hin, knife; i-ba-btho-ga, round-handled; kshe, the long;
non, the; a, they said.
174. She, that; shon e tho, is satisfactory; e-gi-a, said to him; bi,
they; a, they said, 268.
177. Zhin-ga, the little ones; mon-hin, knife; the, make of it; ta, shall;
i tsin da, they shall; e, to say; tsi-the, he hastened; a, they said.
178. Zhin-ga, the little ones; mon-hin, knife; tha, make of it; bi, they;
don, when; a, they said.
179. Ba, things of any kind, enemies; i-ba-kshin-da, fail to cut with it
effectually; zhi, not; ki-the, cause themselves to; mon-thin,
as they travel the path of life; ta, shall; i tsin da, they shall;
e, to say; tsi-the, they hastened.
181. Mon-hin, knife; gi-pa-hi it shall always be sharp; ki-the, they
shall cause it to be so; mon-thin, as they travel the path of life;
ta, shall; i tsin da, they shall; e, to say; tsi-the, they hastened;
a, they said.
191. We-ki-k on, articles for ceremonial use; thin-ge in da, there are
none, lacking; e-gi-e, said to him; a-ka, they, 301, 373.
196. (^a-gtho-hi, hickory tree; to", standing; non, the; a, they said.
199. The, this tree; zhin-ga, the little ones; we-ga-thu-ca, as a weapon
to strike with, a club; ba, they; thon-tse a-tha, it may be
suitable for their use; e, to say; tsi-the, he hastened; a, they
said, 210, 220, 230, 241, 251, 262.
201. ZhiD-ga, the little ones; we-ga-thu-ca, use for a club; ba, they;
thon-ta, suitable; zhi in da, it is not; e-gi-e, said to him; a-ka,
they, 211, 221, 231, 242, 252.
LAFLESCHE] TRIBAL BITES LITERAL, TRANSLATION 585
207. (,'a-gtho-ha-sho-ga, the thick-barked hickory tree; to", standing;
non, the; a, they said.
217. Pon-ton-ga, hi, the large hickory nut tree; ton, standing; no",
the; a, they said.
227. Pi-ci-hi, acorn tree, the dark oak; ton, standing; no", the; a,
they said.
238. Zhon-zhi-hi, red-wood, the red oak tree; to", standing; non, the;
a, they said.
248. Zhon-sha-be, dark-wood tree, the red-bud; to", standing; no",
the; a, they said.
264. Zhin-ga, the little ones; we-ga-thu-ca, use for a war club; mon-
thi°, as they travel the path of life; ta, shall; i tsin da, they
shall; e, to say; tsi-the, they hastened; a, they said.
265. Zhin-ga, the little ones; we-ga-thu-ca, use as a club; mon-thin,
as they travel the path of life; bi, they; don, when; a, they
said.
266. We-ki-i-he-the, they shall use it to make fall, their enemies;
mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; ta, shall; i tsin da,
they shall; e, to say; tsi-the, they hastened; a, they said.
269. Gthu-ce, to take up; a-tsia-tha, they hastened ; bi, they; a, they
said, 409, 437, 466.
271. Mon-hin, knife; non-pe-wa-the, fear-inspiring; xtsi, verily; in da,
it is; e-ki-a, said to one another; bi, they; a, they said.
272. Mon-hin, knife; wa-kon-da, mysterious; xtsi, verily; in da, it is;
e-ki-a, said to one another; bi, they; a, they said.
273. Mon-hin-wa-koD-da, Mysterious-knife; shki, also; a, they said.
274. Zhin-ga, the little ones; zha-zhe, name; ki-ton, make to be theirs;
ta shall; i tsi" da, they shall; e, to say; tsi-the, they hastened ;
a, they said.
276. Mon-hin, knife; i-ba-btho-ga, round-handled; do", the; a, they
said.
277. I-ba-cpon, to nudge or thrust with it, the willow tree; a-tsia-tha,
they proceeded ; bi, they; a, they said.
278. Wa-bin, blood; ba-dsu-zhe, gushed from the cut; gthe, quickly;
to", as he (the performer of the act) yet stood near; a, they
said.
280. Ba-zha-be, to cut and peel the bark from the trunk of the tree;
a-tsia-tha, they proceeded; bi, they; a, they said.
281. Ta-dse, winds, the four winds; e-non-ha, for each one they first
stripped the bark from four sides of the trunk; xtsi, verily;
kshi-the, they made for it; to", as he (the performer of the
act) stood; a, they said.
283. Ba-xon, to cut the trunk into the desired length; a-tsia-tha, they
proceeded; bi, they; a, they said.
586 THE OSAGE TEIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
285. Ba-cke-be, to hew and to shave it to the desired size; a-tsia-tha,
they then proceeded; bi, they; a, they said.
287. We-tsin, a weapon to strike with, a club; ho-non-ka, the back of
a fish; e-gon, they made it to resemble; kshe, the long club;
a, they said, 408, 436, 465, 473, 477, 484, 489.
288. Gthi-shton, to finish their weapon; a-tsia-tha, they proceeded;
bi, they; a, they said.
290. ISTon-be, between his hands; u-bi-zhu-zhu-e, he (the carver),
caressed and stroked the weapon; don, he did; a, they said,
438, 468.
291. Bi-hu-ton, and made it to utter a cry of exultation; u-ha-ha-e,
at each stroke; ton, as he stood; a, they said, 439, 469.
305. Hon-ba, the day; i-ta-xe, the beginning of; thon-dsi, at that
time; a, they said, 326, 346, 379.
306. Ga-gi-gi-dse, swaying from side to side; hi-the, came the sight
of his form; non-zhin, the sight, the picture stood; a, they said,
327, 347, 380.
308. O-pa-ce, in the evening of the day; thon-dsi, at that time; a,
they said, 329, 349, 382.
309. Wi-con-ga, my younger brother; gi, returning; thin da, he is
moving; e-ki-a, said to one another; bi, they; a, they said,
330, 350, 383.
311. 0-gi-ki-a, speak to your brother; ba, all of you; thin ha, go forth;
e-ki-a, they said to one another; bi, they; a, they said, 332,
351, 386.
313. Hi-kon, his legs below the knees; ga-xo-dse, stricken and worn
gray by the grasses; xtsi, verily; gthi, having returned;
non-zhin, he stood; ton, standing; a, they said.
315. Ha ta ha, how has it fared with you; xtsi, verily; a, they said,
335, 354, 389.
316. Wa-xpa-thin, to suffer from exhaustion or any hardship; tha
thin-sha, you have been wont; zhi, not; non, usually; a, they
said, 336, 355, 390.
319. U-k'u-be, valley; win, one or first; pshi a-tha, I have been to;
wi-zhin-the, my elder brothers; e, to say; tsi-the, he hastened;
a, they said.
320. O-ha-gon, for me a happening; mon-zhi, there was not; xtsi,
verily; in da, it is true; e, to say; tsi-the, he hastened; a, they
said, 340.
339. U-k'u-be, valley; thon-ba, two or a second7 pshi a-tha, I have
been to; e, to say; tsi-the, he hastened; a, they said.
357. Shi-non-dse, knees; ga-xo-dse, stricken and worn gray by the
grasses; xtsi, verily; a, they said.
358. Gthi-non-zhin, having returned he stood; ton, standing; a, they
said.
LAFLESCHE] TRIBAL RITES LITERAL TRANSLATION 587
361. U-k'u-be, valley: tha-bthin, three or a third; pshi a-tha, I have
been to; e, to say; tsi-the, he hastened; a, they said.
364. Ni-ka, man; wi°, one; u-shkon, have moved therein; bi, he; tse
a-tha, there being signs that he had; e, to say; tsi-the, he
hastened; a, they said.
365. O-shkon, at the places where he had moved; hon, what were the
signs like; ton, at the places where he had stood; e-gi-e, said
to him; a-ka, they.
368. £>i-pa, toes; zha-ta, cloven; xtsi, verily; bi, he; tse a, he is, from
the signs; wi-zhin-the, my elder brothers; e, to say; tsi-the, he
hastened; a, they said.
369. Xa-dse, the grasses; non-xthon-zhe, he had crushed with the
weight of his feet; i-tse-tha, where he had placed them ; bi, he;
tse a-tha, he had ; e, to say; tsi-the, he hastened ; a, they said.
384. I-zhu-zhu-ba, with rapid strides; xtsi, verily; gi, returning; thin
in da, he is moving; e-ki-a, said to one another; bi, they;
a, they said.
393. U-k'u-be, valley; do-ba, four or a fourth; pshi a-tha, I have
been to; e, to say; tsi-the, he hastened; a, they said.
394. Ni-ka, man; win, one; u-shkon, had moved therein; bi, he; tse,
had; e-pshe non, that I had spoken of; e-dsi, there at the
place; a-ka, he is; wi-zhin-the, my elder brothers; e, to say;
tsi-the, he hastened; a, they said.
396. O-shkon, in appearance; hon, what is he like; to", as he stood;
e, to say; tsi-the, they hastened to say; a, they said, 421, 444.
399. Non-i>e-wa-the, fear-inspiring, formidable in appearance; xtsi,
verily; a-ka, he is; wi-zhin-the, my elder brothers; e, to say;
tsi-the, he hastened; a, they said, 424, 430, 447.
401. Wa-pa-hi, sharp weapons; to" a-ka tha, he has; e, to say; tsi-
the, he hastened, 426, 446.
406. Thi-to-ge gtha, make haste; ba, you; thi" ha and go forth;
e-ki-a, said to one another; bi, they; a, they said, 434, 452,
471, 495.
411. U-zhon-ge, path, file; win-a-ha, in a single; ci-thu-ce, took foot
steps, went forth; ton, they did; a, they said.
413. U-ba-non-the, ceremonial pauses or stops; do-ba, four; kshi-the,
they made for him ; a-ka, they.
415. We-do-ba on, at the fourth pause; tse dsi, then and there; a, they
said.
416. I-ga-dsi-on, they stood abreast in a single line; i-he-the, they laid
their line; a-ka, they.
419. Ni-ka, man; wi", one; e-dsi a-ka, there is at that place; e-pshe
no", as I have said; the a-ka, here he is; wi-zhin-the, my elder
brothers; e, to say; tsi-the, he hastened; a, they said, 442.
588 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 38
425. Da-don, things of any kind, living things; ni-the, permit to live,
mercy; thin-ge a-ka, he has none; e-zha mi a, to my thinking;
wi-zhin-the, my elder brothers; e, to say; tsi-the, he hastened;
a, they said.
428. He zhin-ga, little horns; ton a tha, he has; wi-zhin-the, my elder
brothers; e, to say; tsi-the, he hastened; a, they said.
432. Wa-zhin, courage or temper; pi-zhi, bad; xtsi, verily; bi a, he
has; wi-zhin-the, my elder brothers; e, to say; tsi-the, he has
tened; a, they said, 449.
453. Tsi-zhu, the Tsi-zhu division; u-dse-the, having fireplaces; pe-
thon-ba, seven: ni-ka-shi-ga, a people; ba don, they were; a,
they said.
454. Xtha-xtha, timid or craven; thin-ge, there were none; xtsi,
verily; ni-ka-shi-ga, a people; a-ka, they were.
456. Ni-ka, man; wi-on-won, whoever; the, who lives; e-shki don, he
may be; a, they said.
457. Wa-non-xe, spirits, ghosts; a-dsi, to their abode; the, to go; ta,
shall; tsi° da, he shall; e-ki-e, said to one another; a-ka, they,
460, 463.
459. Wa-dsu-ta, animal; be, whoever; i-zhin-ge, his son; shki don, he
may be; a, they said.
462. To-ka non-zhin, of those who stand erect, men; wi-on-won, which
ever one; the, living; e-shki don, he may be; a, they said.
474. Gthi-u-bthin, to brandish it with a quick motion; a-tsia-tha, they
proceeded; ba don, and; a, they said, 479, 485, 490.
4.75. Wi-tsi-go, my grandfather; ga-ho-shon-u-ha, they struck with a
sudden shock, making him to plunge forward; ba, they; don,
and; a, they said.
478. In-thon-bi-on, at the second time; tse-dsi, there and then; a,
they said.
481. Wi-tsi-go, our grandfather; ga-ta-kshin, they struck him with a
shock; i-the-tha, that sent him staggering; bi, they; a, they
said.
483. I-tha-bthin-on, at the third time; tse dsi, there and then; a, they
said.
486. Wi-tsi-go, our grandfather; ni-dse a-ta, they struck him so that
only upon his hind quarters; mon-gthe, he was able to stand;
thip-kshe, thus they made him to sit; ga-xe, they made him
helpless; a-ka, they.
488. We-do-ba-on, at the fourth time; tse dsi, there and then; a, they
said.
491. Ha-shi, they struck him so that he whirled around; pa-gthe,
and fell with his head toward the rear; xtsi, verily; a, they
said.
492. Wa-bin, blood; ga-ta-the, spilling from his body; i-he-the, they
made him to lie; a-ka, they.
LAPLBSCHE] TRIBAL RITES — LITERAL TRANSLATION 589
497. A-bi-^a-ta, they placed their hands upon his body to test his
quality; a-ka, they.
499. Zhe-ga, the hind leg; tha-ta, the left; kshe, the long; a, they
said, 511.
500. Ga-win, to cut in a long and circular incision; a-tsia-tha, they
proceeded to in haste; a-ka, they, 512, 550.
501. Wa-shin, fat; u-ba-zhin, protruding through the incision; tsi-the,
appeared quickly; through the cut they made; a-ka, they.
503. I-u-tha-bthon-ce, they took pieces of the fat into their mouths
to taste of it; a-tsia-tha, they proceeded; bi, they; a, they said.
505. I-u-wa-non-be, it is no"-be to the taste (there is no English
equivalent for the word non'-be, which is used by the Osage
to characterize the taste of nuts and of fats); xtsi in da,
verily it is; e-ki-a, said to one another; bi, they; a, they said.
506. Zhin-ga, the little ones; no°-bthe, for food; the, use it; mon-thin,
as they travel the path of life; ta i tsin da, they shall; e, to
say; tsi-the, he hastened; a, they said.
507. Zhin-ga, the little ones; non-bthe the, use it for food; mon-thin,
as they travel the path of life; bi, they; don, when; a, they said.
508. A-dsu-ta, their limbs; i-ga-ci-ge, shall stretch in growth by its
use; ki-the, this they shall do for themselves; mon-thin, as
they travel the path of life; ta i tsin da, they shall; e, to say;
tsi-the, they hastened; a, they said.
510. Ni da-ka-dse, boiling water; u-bi-do", they shall dip it into to
prepare it; mon-thin, as they travel the path of life: ta i tsi"
da, they shall; e, to say; tsi-the, they hastened; a, they said.
514. (^i-pi-ga, elastic; zhi, not; xtsi in da, verily it is; e-ki-a, said to
one another; bi, they; a, they said.
515. We-ki-k'on, an article for ceremonial use; the, they shall make
of it; mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; t& i tsin da,
they shall; e, to say; tsi-the, they hastened; a, they said.
517. We-thin, strap or cord; pa-gi, strong; xtsi in da, verily it is;
e-ki-a, said to one another; bi, they; a, they said.
519. Wa-xo-be, a sacred object; on-gi-the, we shall make of it; (ai
tsin da, we shall; e, to say; tsi-the, they hastened; a, they said,
529, 556, 559, 568, 571, 574, 577, 579, 582.
520. We-thin-ca-gi, Strong-strap; shki, also; a, they said.
523. We-thin-ga-xe, Strap-maker; shki, also; a, they said.
526. We-thin-zhi"-ga, Little-strap; shki, also; a, they said.
528. O-thon-da, the remaining center; ga, this; thi"-kshe, sitting; a,
they said.
530. Tse-ha-wa-gthe, shield; on-gi-the, we shall make of it; on-mon-
thin, as we travel the path of life; ta i tsin da, we shall; e, to
say; tsi-the, they hastened; a, they said.
590 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
531. Zhin-ga, the little ones; i-gi-ni-tha, shall make of it a protection;
mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; ta i tsin da, they shall ;
e, to say; tsi-the, they hastened; a, they said.
533. Mi, sun; hi-e, the setting of; ge, the places; ta, from that direc
tion, 537, 541, 545.
534. Wa-pa-hi, sharp weapons; a-kia-sha, equal in numbers; thin-ge,
none; a-thin, bringing with them; a-hi, they come; bi, they;
shki, and; don, when; a, they said, 538, 542, 546.
535. Wa-pa-hi, sharp weapons; ge-gon, to be ineffective; bi, they;
ki-the, they shall cause them to be; mon-thin, as they travel
the path of life; ta i tsin da, they shall; e, to say; tsi-the, they
hastened; a, they said.
539. Wa-pa-hi, sharp weapons; a-gtha, to pierce and stand out from
our bodies; ba zhi, they not; on-ki-the, we cause ourselves
to be; on-mon-thin, as we travel the path of life; ta i tsin da,
we shall; e, to say; tsi-the, they hastened; a, they said.
543. Wa-pa-hi, sharp weapons; a-ki-tha-zha-ta, to pass by us as in
forked lines; bi, we; on-ki-the, we cause ourselves to be; o°-
mon-thin, as we travel the path of life; ta i tsin da, we shall;
e, to say; tsi-the, they hastened; a, they said.
547. Wa-pa-hi, sharp weapons; a-bu-zha-zha-ta, pass harmlessly by
in forked lines; bi, they; ki-the, cause themselves to be safe
from the flying weapons; mon-thin, as they travel the path of
life; ta i tsin da, they shall; e, to say; tsi-the, they hastened;
a, they said.
549. Thiu-ba-he, the side of the buffalo; tha-ta, the left; ga, this;
kshe, the long; a, they said.
552. We-thin-zhin-ga, slender straps; pe-thon-ba, seven.
553. Tsi-zhu, the Tsi-zhu division; u-dse-the, possessing fireplaces;
pe-thon-ba, seven in number.
554. E-non-ha, one for each fireplace; kshi-the, they made; a-ka,
they.
558. He, horn; tha-ta, left; ga, this; tse, standing; a, they said, 567.
561. He-thi-shi-zhe, curved horns; shki, also; a, they said.
564. He-thi-zha-ge, outspread horns; shki, also; a, they said.
570. ^in-dse, tail; ga, this; tse, standing; a, they said.
573. Tse-dse-xe, the bladder; ga, this; thin-kshe, sitting; a, they said.
576. Non-dse-u-thi-xin, that which covers the heart, heart sack; ga,
this; thin-kshe, the sitting; a, they said.
578. Pa-xin, hair of the head; ga, this; thin-kshe, the sitting; a, they
said.
581. I-ki, chin; ga, this; thin-kshe, the sitting; a, they said.
LAFLESCHE] TRIBAL RITES LITERAL TRANSLATION 591
Nl'-KI Wl'-GI-E OF THE Tsi'-ZUU WA-SHTA'-GE
BY MON-ZHON-A'-KI-DA
(Free translation, p. 277; Osage version, p. 453)
1. Ha tha tsi ta, a bin da, tsi ga (archaic, untranslatable).
2. Zhin-ga, the little ones; ni-ka-shi-ga, a people; ba, they; zhi a-tha,
they are not; wi-pon-ga, my younger brothers; e-ki-e, said to
one another; a-ka, they, 11.
3. Wi-con-ga, my younger brothers, 20, 25, 54, 167, 172, 181, 205,
207, 212, 231.
4. U-ton-be, search; tha-the, you cause to be made; ta bi a, you
shall; wi-con-ga, my younger brothers, 10, 21, 31.
5. Wi-con-ga, a younger brother; ga, as thus; xtsi, verily; hi-tha,
they spake; i don, when they; a, they said.
6. Mon-xe, heavens; u-ca-ki-ba, the divisions of; win, one, or the
first; a, they said, 23.
7. E-dsi, there at the place; xtsi, verily; hi, having come to; non-
zhin, paused, stood; a, they said, 24, 35, 57, 112, 114, 122, 137,
176.
8. Wi-zhi°-the, my elder brothers; a, they said, 165, 183, 209, 240.
9. O-ha-gon, a happening for me; mon-zhi, none for me; xtsi,
verily; a, they said.
12. Ka-xe-wa-hu-ca, the youngest of the brothers; to", the standing;
a, they said, 32.
13. Ga, as thus; xti, verily; hi-tha, they spake; i do", when they; a,
they said, 149.
14. Mon-xe, heavens; u-ca-ki-ba, the divisions of; win, one, a second
one; hi, having arrived there; non-zhin, paused, stood; a, they
said.
15. Wa-kon-da, god of darkness; u-ga-sha-be, struck the heavens
with darkness; xtsi, verily; do", when; a, they said, 26.
16. He-dsi, at that moment; xtsi, verily; a-gthi, having returned;
non-zhin, stood; a, they said, 27.
17. Wi-90n-ga, my younger brother; ha-ta-ha, how has it fared with
you; xtsi, verily; wa-xpa-thin, to thus suffer; tha thi" sha,
has been your wont; zhi non, it has never been; a, they said,
28.
18. Mon-xe, heavens; u-ca-ki-ba, the divisions of; win, another one;
pshi a-tha, I have been to.
19. E-go", anything like what we want; thon-ta, possible; zhi a, it is
not; wi-zhin the; my elder brothers; a, they said, 29.
22. Wi-zhin-the, my elder brothers; ga, as thus; xtsi, verily; hi-tha,
spake; i don, when they.
30. Ha, O; wi-con-ga, my younger brothers; e-ki-e, said to one
another; thon-ka, they.
592 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
33. Thu-e, in haste; xtsi, verily; hi the, went forth; a, they said, 164,
174, 208, 217, 232.
34. Mon-xe, heavens; u-ca-ki-ba, the divisions of; we-do-ba, the
fourth; kshe, that lay; a, they said.
36. Ni-ka-wa-kon-da-gi, the man of mystery; thin-kshe, at his abode;
a, they said.
37. Tho, in his presence; ton, where he stood; hi, having arrived
there; non, zhin, paused, stood; a, they said.
38. Ni-ka-shi-ga, a person; win, one; the a-ka, here is; wi-zhin-the,
my elder brothers; a, they said, 59.
39. Non-pe-wa-the, fear-inspiring; xtsi, verily; a-ka, he is; wi-zhin-
the, my elder brothers; a, they said, 60.
40. Non-pe-wa-the, fear-inspiring; shki, and; zha-zhe; ki-ton, has for
his own; a-ka, he; e-zha-mi in da, I believe.
41. Ha, O; wi-tsi-go-e, my grandfather; e-gi-a, said to him; bi, they;
a, they said, 58.
42. Zhin-ga, the little ones; zhu-i-ga their bodies; tha, they make of
me; ba, they; thon-tse, may well; mi-kshe in da, I who sit here.
43. ZhiD-ga, the little ones; zhu-i-ga, their bodies; on-tha, they make
of me; bi, they; don, when, 124, 142, 144, 152, 158.
44. I-ts'a, causes of death; thin-ge, to have none; ki-the, cause them
selves to; ta i tsin da, they shall.
45. Gthe-don-zhin-ga, Little-hawk; shki, and; a, they said.
46. Zha-zhe, name; ki-ton, make to be theirs; mon-thin, as they travel
the path of life; bi, they; don, when; a, they said.
47. U-non, old age; a bi, the stage of life spoken of as; i-the, live to
see; ki-the, cause themselves to; mon-thin, as they travel the
path of life; ta i tsin da, they shall, 52, 71, 82, 89, 96, 102, 120,
125, 133, 145, 171, 194, 201, 226, 247.
48. Gthe-don-win, Hawk-maiden; shki, also; a, they said.
49. Zha-zhe, name; a-ki-ton, I have made to be my own; a-thin-he
in da, in my life's journey.
50. E-shki don, that name also; a, they said, 245.
51. Zhin-ga, the little ones; zha-zhe, name; ki-ton, they shall make
to be their own; mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; ta i
tsin da, they shall.
53. Wi-non, the only one; bthin, I; mon-zhi, am not, 135, 147, 154.
55. Wi-con-ga, a younger brother; tho-e, in haste; xtsi, verily; hi-the,
went forth; don, did; a, they said.
56. Tho-xe Pa-thi-hon, to Tho-xe Lift-ye-your-heads; ton, where he
stands, in his abode, 83.
61. Zhin-ga, the little ones; zhu-i-ga, their bodies; on-tha, make of
me; ba, they; thon-tse, may well; a-ton-he in da, I stand.
62. Mon-ki-cin-dse, he threw himself to the ground; tsi the, pro
ceeded to; don, when; a, they said, 84.
I.APLESCHE] TRIBAL RITES LITERAL TRANSLATION 593
63. Ha-ba-kon-ce-ci-da, ripens with the corn; e-gon, like the corn;
ton, standing; no", the; a, they said.
64. U-don-be, a sight; tha-gthin, beautiful, pleasing; xtsi, verily; hi-
tse-the, he made to stand upon the ground; to", as he stood;
a, they said.
65. Ga tse shki, of this also; zhu-i-ga, their bodies; tha, they make
of; ba, they; thon-tse in da, it will be suitable for them.
66. I-u-tha-bthon-ce, to taste of its root; a-tsia-the, they proceeded
in haste; a-ka, they.
67. I u-wa-pa, bitter to the taste; non a-tha, it is.
68. Zhin-ga, the little ones; mon-kon, medicine; tha, make of it; ba,
they; thon-tse, it being fit for that purpose; no" a-tha, it is.
69. Zhin-ga, the little ones; mon-kon, medicine; the, make of it; mon-
thin, as they travel the path of life; bi, they; don, when; a, they
said, 77.
70. A-dsu-(a, their limbs; i-ga-ci-ge, to stretch with in growth; a-ki-
gtha-thin, they shall keep it; mon-thin, as they travel the path
of life; ta i tsin da, they shall, 78.
72. I-thon-bi-on, at the second time; xtsi, verily; mon-ki-cin-dse, he
threw himself upon the ground; tsi-the, quickly; do", when;
a, they said, 90.
73. Mon-kon-ton-ga-zhin-ga, tlie little great medicine; tse, the stand
ing; a, they said.
74. Xtha, its blossoms; zhu-dse, reddened; i-tse-the, he made to
stand upon the ground; to", as he stood; a, they said.
75. Ga tse, of this standing before us; shki, also; a, they said, 94, 115;
118, 177, 188, 198, 242.
76. Zhin-ga, the little ones; zhu-i-ga, their bodies; tha, make of it,
ba, they; thon-tse i" da, they shall, 87, 168.
79. I u-wa-ts'u-xe, astringent to the taste; no" a-tha, it is.
80. Ts'o-xe, Astringent; shki, also; zha-zhe, name; ki-ton, make to
be their own; mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; ta i
tsin da, they shall.
81. Zhin-ga, the little ones; zho-i-ga, their bodies; tha, make of it;
bi, they; do", when; a, they said, 88, 170, 200, 214, 246.
85. Ha-ba, ear of corn; zhu-dse, red; kshe, the long; a, they said.
86. He-dsi, then, at that moment; xtsi, verily; ga-ci-ge, he tossed
into the air; tsi-the, with a quick motion; ton, as he stood;
a, they said.
91. Ha-ba, ear of corn; to-ho, the blue; kshe, the long; a, they said.
92. Wa-to", squash; to-ho, the blue; thi"-kshe, the sitting; e-ki-
thon-ba, together; xtsi, verily; a, they said.
93. Ga-ci-ge, tossed into the air; tsi-the, with a quick motion; to",
as he stood; a, they saW, 106.
278&-21— 38
594 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
95. Non-bthe, their food; the, make it to be; mon-thin, as they travel
the path of life; bi, they; don, when; a, they said.
97. We-tha-bthin-on, at the third time; xtsi, verily; mon-ki-cin-dse.
he threw himself upon the ground; tsi-the, quickly; don, when:
a, they said.
98. Ha-ba, ear of corn; cka, white; kshe, the long; no", the; a, they
said.
99. Wa-ton, squash; cka, white; thin-kshe, the sitting; e-ki-thon-ba,
together; xtsi, verily; ga-ci-ge, he tossed into the air; tsi-the,
with a quick motion; to", as he stood; a, they said.
100. Zhin-ga, the little ones; non-bthe, their food; the, make it to be;
mon-thin, as .they travel the path of life; ta i tsin da, they
shall, 109.
101. Ts'e, to die; wa-tse-xi, difficult; ki-the, cause themselves to be;
mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; ta i tsin da, they
shall, 143, 153, 159, 180, 215.
103. We-do-bi-on, at the fourth time; xtsi, verily; mon-ki-cin-dse,
threw himself upon the ground; tsi-the, quickly; don, when;
a, they said.
104. Ha-ba, ear of corn; gthe-zhe, speckled; kshe, the long; a, they
said .
105. Wa-ton, squash; gthe-zhe, speckled; thin-kshe, the sitting; e-ki-
thon-ba, together; xtsi, verily; a, they said.
107. Be, who, what; wa-dsu-ta, don, being a living animal; mi-ga,
female; thin-ge, be without; tse, would; a, hin a, interrogative
particles.
1 08. Wa-dsu-ta, thus, as a living creature; mi-ga, a female; zhu-gthe,
for a companion; kshi-the, he gave to him; ton, as he stood;
a, they said.
I 10. Non-bthe, make of it their food; ki, when; i-ts'a, causes of death;
thin-ge, to have none; ki-the, cause themselves to be; mon-
thin, as they travel the path of life; ta i tsin da, they shall.
111. Wi-con-ga, my younger brothers; u-ton-be, a search; tha-the, you
cause to be made; ta bi a-tha, you shall.
113. Pi-ci-hi, red oak tree; ton, standing; non, the; a, they said.
116. Zho-i-ga, our bodies; on-tha, we make of it; ba, we; thon-tse in da-
we shall.
117. Pi-ci, acorns; u-non-bu-dse, shook down in profusion with their
feet; xtsi, verily; a-ka, they.
119. Zhin-ga, the little ones; zho-i-ga, their bodies; the, make of it,
ta i tsin da, they shall, 169, 178, 192, 199, 213, 223, 243.
121. Xon-dse hi, red cedar tree; to°, the standing; no", the; a, they
said.
123. Wi-no", I alone; wa-kon-da, of the gods; ts'e, to die; wa-tse-xi,
difficult; a-ton he in da, I stand.
LAFLBSCHE] TRIBAL RITES — -LITERAL TRANSLATION 595
126. Pa-xin, hair of the head; ca-dse, grown scant with age; ci-e-gon,
yellowish; a bi, spoken of as; i-the, live to see; ki-the, cause
themselves to; mon-thin, as they travel the path of life; tai
tsin da, they shall.
127. Xin-ha, ski", bark; ba-c'in-tha, wrinkled, furrowed with age; ga
ge, these; a, they said.
128. U-non, old age; a-gi-the, I have made them to be; a-ton-he in da,
as I stand.
129. Zhin-ga, the little ones; u-non, old age; the, make of them; mon-
thin, as they travel the path of life; ta i tsin da, they shall.
130. Kon, roots; thi-hi-da, the base of the trunk; ga, this; thin-kshe,
sitting; a, they said.
131. ^i-kon, ankle; thi-hi-da, the base of; e no" bi, that is spoken of
as; non, the; a, they said.
132. (,)i-kon, ankle; thi-hi-da, the base of wrinkled with age; i-the,
live to see; ki-the, cause themselves to; mon-thin, as they
travel the path of life; ta i tsin da, they shall.
134. Wi-tsu-shpa, my grandchildren, 140.
136. Ni-u-thi-xa-xa, the shallows of a river where the water rushes
noisily over the rocks; xtsi, verily; ge dsi, at such a place;
a, they said.
138. Wa-zha-zhe, name of the Wa-zha-zhe division; win, one; the
a-ka in da, here stands.
139. Ni, of water; zhu-i-ga, his body; the, he had made; xtsi, verily;
ni-ka-shi-ga, a person; a-ka i° da, he is.
141. Zhin-ga, the little ones; zhu-i-ga, their bodies; the, of which to
make; thin-ga, have nothing; bi, they; e-sha, bi a, you have
said.
146. Hon-ba, the days; tha-gthin, that are calm, peaceful; shki, and;
u-hi, to enter; ki-the, cause themselves to; mon-thi", as they
travel the path of life; ta i tsin da, they shall, 161, 202, 227.
148. Wi-con-ga, my younger brothers; thi-to-ge, gtha, make haste;
ba thin ha, in your movements.
150. Mon-hin ts'a-zhi, to the grass that never dies; thi"-kshe, sitting;
no", the; a, they said.
151. Wi-tsu-shpa, my grandchildren; wi-shnon, I alone; wa-kon-da,
of the gods; ts'e, to die; wa-^se-xi, difficult; a-ton-he in da,
I stand.
155. Shin-zha-hi, an evergreen water plant; ton, standing; non, the;
a, they said.
156. Wi-shki don, I also.
157. Ts'e, to die; wa-tse-xi, difficult; a-ton-he in da, I stand.
160. Hon-ba, in the days; tha-gthin, that are calm and peaceful;
u-wa-ni-ka-shi-ga, I dwell as a person; a-ton-he in da, I stand.
162. Wi-con-ga, my younger brother; e-ki-a, said to one another; bi,
they; a, they said, 203.
596 THE OSAGE TRIBE [ETH. ANN. 36
163. Thi-to-gc gtha, make haste; ba thin ha, in your movements;
wi-con-ga, my younger brothers; e-kia, said to one another;
bi, they; a, they said, 173, 182, 206, 216.
166. Wa-dsu-ta, animal; win, one; ts'e tha, some one has killed; bi
kshe a, and it lies dead; wi-zhin-the, my elder brothers; e-ki-e,
said to one another; a-ka, they.
175. MoD-zhon, the earth; u-ton-ga, in the largest part; xtsi, verily;
thi"-kshe, the sitting; dsi, there; a, they said, 218, 220.
179. Mon-zhon-u-kon-cka, Mid-earth; shki, and; zha-zhe, name; oD-ki-
ton, make to be our own; ta i tsin da, we shall, 224.
184. Ni-ka-shi-ga, person; win, one; e-dsi, at a certain place; a-ka,
there is.
185. Tsi, in a house; u-ta-ca, beautiful; xtsi, verily; a-ka, he dwells.
186. Ni-ka-shi-ga, the person, 195.
187. Tsi-hu-kon, the smoke-vent of his house; u-k'u-dse, is an open
ing; a-ka tha, at the top of the house in which he dwells.
189. Zha-zhe, name; ki-ton, of his own; a-ka, he lias; e-zha-mi in da,
I believe.
190. Tsi, house; u-ta-ca, beautiful; gon-tha, satisfying to his desires;
a-ka, he has; wi-zhin-the, my elder brothers.
191. Tsi, the house; u-ta-ca, beautiful; wa-gthin, beyond description;
a-tha, it is; wi-zhin-the, my elder brothers; a, they said.
193. Tsi-u-ta-ca, House-beautiful; shki, and; zha-zhe, is a name;
ki-ton, they shall make to be their own; ta i tse a-tha, they
shall.
197. Tsi-u-ki-a-pe, House-covering; shki, and; zha-zhe, name; ki-ton,
he has made to be his own; a-ka, he has; e-zha-mi in da, I
believe.
204. Zhin-ga, for the little ones; zhu-i-ga, their bodies; the, of which
to make; wa-thin-ga, we have nothing; bi a-tha, we have;
wi-zhin-the, my elder brothers; e-ki-e, said to one another;
a-ka, they.
210. Wa-dsu-ta, animal; win, one; the-kshe, here lies; a, they said.
211. Ts'e tha, some one has killed; bi kshe, and it lies dead; wi-zhin-
the, my elder brothers; e-ki-a, said to one another; bi, they;
a, they said.
219. Ni-ka-shi-ga, person; to", the standing; a, they said.
221. E-dsi, there, at that place; xtsi, verily; ni-ka-shi-ga, the person.
222. U-da-bthu-bthu-e, in the midst of the air vibrating with heat;
xtsi, verily; ni-ka-shi-ga, the person; to", stands; a, they said.
225. Mon-zhon, Earth; shki, and; zha-zhe, name; ki-ton, they make
to be their own; ta i tsin da, they shall.
228. HoD-ba, days; u-ca-ki-ba, the divisions of; do-ba, the four; u-hi,
to enter; ki-the, cause themselves to; mon-thin, as they travel
the path of life; ta i tsin da, they shall, 248.
LAFLESCHE] TRIBAL KITES LITERAL TRANSLATION 597
229. Wi-zhin-the, my elder brothers; e-ki-a, said to one another; hi,
they; a, they said.
230. Thi-to-ge gtha, make haste; ba thin ha, in your movements;
wi-zhin-the, my elder brothers; e-ki-e, said to one another;
a-ka, they.
233. Ni, river; u-ga-xthi, a bend of; win, one; e-dsi non no", there was;
a, they said.
234. E-dsi, at that time and place; xtsi, verily; a, they said; a bin da,
it has been said; tsi, house; ga, in this.
235. Tsi-zhin-ga, a little house; win, one; the, here; tse a, stands;
wi-zhin-the, my elder brothers; a, they said.
236. E-dsi, there, at the little house; xtsi, verily; hi, having arrived
close to it; non-zhin, they paused and stood; bi, they; a, they
said.
237. Hon-ga, a sacred person; bi a, he is; wi-zhin-the, my elder
brothers; a, they said.
238. Wi-tsi-go-e, O, grandfather; e-gi-a, said to him; bi, they; a, they
said.
239. Zhin-ga, the little ones; zhu-i-ga, their bodies; on-tha, make of
me; ba thon-tse, they may well; a-ton-he in da, for that I stand
here.
241. Tsi-house; u-ta-ca, beautiful; wa-gthin, beyond description; win,
one; u-gthin, he dwells in; a-ka, he; wi-zhin-the, my elder
brothers; a, they said.
244. Tsi, house; u-k'u-k'u-dse, many entrances; a-ka, he has; wi-zhin-
the, my elder brothers; a, they said.
INDEX
Page.
A ODER, SPREADING, a life symbol 103
ADOPTION OF CAPTIVES 67
ALSEA LANGUAGE, grammatical sketch of — 22
ANDREWS, Miss II. A., assistance of 20
APPROPRIATION FOR AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY. 9
ARAPAIIO NOTEBOOKS 28
ARCHEOLOGY, report on, of Lower Mimbres
Valley n
ARROW CEREMONY 145
ARROWS, SEVEN SYMBOLIC, story of 156
BALLOU, HOWARD M., Hawaiian bibliog
raphy compiled by 28
DARIIAM, W. B., specimens presented by — 34
BEAR. See BLACK BEAR.
BEAVER, a life symbol 99, 100
BEEDE, A. McG., specimen presented by 34
BLACK BEAR—
a life symbol 105, 108, 123, 130
footprints of, a war symbol 76
BLACK BEAR GENS 105-107
ceremonial rank of 219
ni'-ki wi'-gi-e of 219-237
BLICK-DOO, CHIEF, list of gentes given by... 52
BLACKFISH, a life symbol 99
BLACKSNAKE, a life symbol 103
BOAS, FRANZ—
memoir by 30
work of 19-20
and CHAMBERLAIN, A. F., paper by 31
BOOORAS, WALDEMAR—
manuscript intrusted to 20
paper by 30
BOULDER—
black, a life symbol 108
red, a life symbol 61 , 108
white, a life symbol 109
yellow, a life symbol 109
Bow, a life symbol 99
Bow GENS 98
BREAST-SHIELD, SYMBOLIC, story of 186
BUFFALO BACK, a life symbol 132
BUFFALO BACK QENS 132-133
BUFFALO BULL, a life symbol 102
BUFFALO BULL GENS 134-139
BUFFALO-FACE GENS » 121
BUFFALO HEAD, the wa-xo'-be of an Omaha
subgens 65
BUFFALO HUNT, route of, designated by
chiefs 67
BUFFALO-SKIN, instructions for dressing. . . 270-271
BUFFALO SONGS 141-143,293-294
meaning of 143-144
BULL SNAKE, a life symbol 103
BURDEN-STRAP, SYMBOLIC 152,153
BUSHNELL, D. I., JR., work of 27
CALIFORNIA INDIANS, preparation of manu
script on 27-28
Page.
CAMPS, ceremonial arrangement of 69
CARRIER, Miss EMILY, Nanticoke words sup
plied by 14
CAT-TAIL, a life symbol 93
CAT-TAIL GENS, silent during ceremony 93
CAVES OF COTTONWOOD CANYON 26
CEDAR, MALE, a life symbol 95
CEDAR, RED, a life symbol 95
CEDAR TREE, in rites of the Osage 281
CEREMONIAL APPROACH, WI'-GI-E OF 249-251
CEREMONIAL FORMS, a handicap 66
CEREMONIALS, memorizing of 67
CEREMONY—
of making symbolic moccasins 239-242
of sending 91, 155-156
Painting 242
preliminary, of the Ni'-ki degree 153-154
See alia RITES.
CHAMBERLAIN, A. F., material collected by . . 20
See alia BOAS, FRANZ, and CHAMBERLAIN.
CHEROKEE INDIANS, sacred formulas of 12
CHIEF—
descent of office of 68
duties of 67
healing powers of 71
one, for each great division of the tribe. . . 67
symbolism of house of 6S-69
CHILD —
giving of gentile name to 50
love of parent for 50
CHOCTAW DICTIONARY, BYINGTON'S 29
CIIUKCHEE LANGUAGE, paper on 30
CI»'-DSE-A-GTHE GENS, Ni'-ki ritual of 272-274
CLARK, THOMAS F., JR.—
transfer of 34
work of 31
CON-DSEU'-GTHI", a division of the Osage. . . 45
Coos LANGUAGE, paper on 30
CORN—
blue, a life symbol 136
flint, a life symbol 134
red, a life symbol ' 136
speckled, a life symbol 137
yellow, a life symbol 137
COVILLE, FREDERICK V., acknowledgment to 55
CRAWFISH, a life symbol 116
CRAWFISH GENS 116-118
CREEK INDIANS, memoir on, by John R.
Swanton 13
CUCUHBITA FOF.TIDISSIMA, a life symbol 135
C'UCURBITA PERENNIS—
a life symbol 136
root of, called the Man Medicine 70
CURTIN, JEREMIAH, material collected by... 30
DAVENPORT ACADEMY OF SCIENCES, work of
Truman Michelson for 18
1 IAW.V, red plume the symbol of 134
599
600
INDEX
DEER— Page.
a life symbol 96
place of, in life of Osage 185
DEEK PEOPLE GENS 95
DEEE SONGS 185-191
DEGREES OF THE OSAGE RITES—
order of 152, 153
seven in number 152
DENSMORE, Miss FRANCES —
paper by 31
work of 27
DIVISIONS, accidental, of the Osage 45
DUNN, J. P., manuscript deposited by 28
DWELLERS-BELOW, a division of the tribe. . .* 45
DWELLERS-IN-THE-TlIORNY-THICKET. 8 divi-
sion of the tribe •. . . 45
DWELLERS-IN-TIIE-UPLAND FOREST, a divi-
sion of the tribe 45
DWELLERS-UPON-THE-HILLTOP, a division of
the tribe 45
EAGLE—
aged, wi'-gi-e of the 88-90
golden, a life symbol 104
red, a life symbol 124
spotted, a life symbol 118
EAGLE FEATHER, symbol of old age 71
EARTH, personification of 48, 51
ELDER HOUSEHOLD GENS 118
ELDER WA-ZHA'-ZHE GENS, wi'-gi-e of 92-93
ELK, a life symbol 109, 113
ELK GENS 112-115
E-NO*" Ml»-DSE-TON GENS—
life symbol of 99
wi'-gi-e of 98-101
E VANHOE, CHARLES, collection of 73
EVENING STAR, a life symbol 109, 120
FEWKES, J. WALTER—
specimens collected by 33
work of 10-12
FINDING OF THE FOE, Hi'ca-da story of — 211-219
FIREPLACES—
consecrated, of chiefs' houses 69
dedicated to peace 54
dedicated to warfare 53, 54, 69
sacred 53-54
FISH. See BLACKFISH, BEDFISH.
FLETCHER, Miss ALICE C. —
information gathered by 219
list of gentes obtained by 52
songs transcribed by 55
FOE, FINDING OF THE, wi'-gi-e of 212-219
FOOD, provided by initiate 270
FOOTPRINTS OF BLACK BEAR, a war symbol. . 76
FOWKE, GERARD, work of 22-23
Fox INDIANS, researches of Truman Michel-
son among 17-18
FRACHTENBERG, LEO J.—
paper by 30
work of 19,20-22
FREIRE-MARRECO, Miss BARBARA, work of.. 30-31
QA-HI'-GE O-K'ON, a tribal rite 47, 59
GAILLAND, MAURICE, Potowatomi grammar
by 29
O A-TSIU' GENS 101-102
GENTES—
groups of, organized for defensive pur
poses 53
GENTES— Continued.
list of 52-53,84
movements of 60
of the Hon'-ga Great Division 52
of the Ho"'-ga subdivision 52-53
of the Tsi'-zhu Great Division 53
owning the wa-xo'-be 65
GENTILE ORGANIZATION 51-52
not affected by division of tribe 45
GIBSON, HARDY, assistance of 14
GIBSON, MRS. MART, assistance of 14
GILL, DE LANCEY, work of 29, 32
GLYCINE APIOS, a life symbol Ill
GOVERNMENT OF OSAGE —
civil branch of 67
military branch of 65
military form of 59
GRAY-HORSE, village at 45
GREAT OSAGE VILLAGE, location of 44
GREAT WI'-GI-E 254-269
theme of 238
GROS VENTRE NOTEBOOKS 28
GUIANA INDIANS, animism and folklore of the 30
GURLEY, J. G., editorial work of 29
HABITATIONS OF WESTERN UTAH, chronology
of 26
HAILSTONE, alifesymbol 134
HALBERT, HENRY S. See SWANTON, J. R.,
and HALBERT.
HARMONY, an Osage mission 44
HARRINGTON, JOHN P.—
appointment of 34
paper by 29,30
work of 18-19
HAWK, SYMBOLIC 63
HAWKES, ERNEST, introduction by 20
HEARING OF THE SAYINGS OF THE ANCIENT
MEN, a tribal rite 47
HEWITT, J.N.B.—
custodian of manuscripts 28
work of 13-14, 30
HEYE MUSEUM, collections of, studied by
J. Walter Fewkcs 12
Hl'-CA-DA GENS —
story belonging to 211
wi'-gi-e of 212-219
HIEROGLYPHS. See MAYA HIEROGLYPHS.
HODGE, F. W., work of 9
HOLMES, W. H., work of 22
HOMINY, village at 45
HO"' I-Nl-KA-SHI-GA GENS, Wi'-gi-C Of 123-124
HO"'-BA THA-GTHI", wi'-gi-e of 127
HON'-GA A-HTU-TO* GENS—
life symbol of 104
wi'-gi-e of 104-105
HQX'GA GREAT DIVISION—
ceremonial position of 83
gentes of 84
one of the two tribal divisions 51
origin of the people of the 59
subdivisions of 51
HO"'-GA SUBDIVISION—
gentes of 84
wi'-gi-es of 104-118
HO~'-GA U-TA-NOX-DSI GENS —
discovered by the Wa-zha'-zhe 59
life symbols of 102, 103, 104
wi'-gi-e of 102-104
INDEX
601
Page.
Hopi POTTERY, paper on, by J. Walter
Fewkes 12
HOUSE OF CHIEF, symbolism of 68-69
HOUSE OF MYSTERIES—
processional approach to 81
songs of A. 198-201
use of 62
HUMPHREY, WILLIAM—
appointment of 34
work of 31
I'-BA-TSE TA-DSE GENS —
lite symbol of 118
wi'-gi-e of 118
INFORMANTS—
Mo"-zho'>-a'-ki-da 274
Pa'-thi"-wa-we-xta 272
Tse-zhi'i'-ga-wa-da-ia-ga 153, 155, 274
Wa'-thu-xa-ge 292, 298
Wa-tse'-mo»-i" 156, 211, 219
Wa-xthi'-zhi 153, 155
Xu-tha'-wa-to°-i» 238
IN-GTHON'-OA GENS—
life symbols of 107, 108, 109, 110, 111, 112
wi'-gi-e of 107-112
INITIATE, instructions to wife of 140, 270
INITIATION—
fees for 154,155
intoNi'-ki Wa-tho» degree 238
requirements for 154
INITIATOR OR PRIEST—
apparel of 248
ceremonial painting of 74
IROQUOISLANGUAGF.S, work of J. N. B. Hewitt
on 14
ISOLATED HO«'-GA GENS 61, 102
IU-DSE'-TA, a division of the tribe 45
JUDD, NEIL M., work of 24-26
KALAPUYA INDIANS, studied by LeoJ. Frach-
tenberg 20-21
KAW, relations of, with Osage 45, 46
KEEPER OF THE FIREPLACE, ceremony of
the 139-140
KELLO, MRS. J. R., AND Miss HATTIE, speci
men presented by 34
KROEBER, A. L.—
manuscript deposited by 28
work of 27-28
KUTENAI TALES 31
LA FLESCHE, FRANCIS, work of 15
LACINIAHIA PYCNOSTACHYA, & llfo symbol .... 135
LAGUNA DICTIONARY 28
I/AMB, D. S., manuscript deposited by 28
LAND CESSIONS OF THE OSAGE 44
LANDS, OF OSAOE, rich In minerals 45
LANGUAGE, OSAGE, present use of 46-47
LAST TSI'-ZHU GENS 130-132
LEARY, Miss ELLA, work of 32-33
LEECH, RED-BREASTED 224
LIFE SYMBOLS—
ceremony of sending 91
discussion of 62
meaning of term 71
medium of approach to Wa-ko»'-da 61
placing of, in House of Mysteries 62
LIFE SYMBOLS OF THE GENTES—
adder 103
arrows 99
beaver 99,100
2786—21 39
LIFE SYMBOLS OF THE GENTES- Continued.
black bear 105, 108, 123, 130
blackfish 99
blacksnake 103
boulder, black 108
boulder, red 108
boulder, white 109
boulder, yellow 109
bow 99
buffalo back 132
buffalo bull v 102
bull snake 103
cat-tall 93
cedar, male 95
cedar, red 95
corn, blue 136
corn, flint 134
corn, red 136
corn, speckled 137
corn, yellow 137
crawfish 116
cucurbits foetidissima 135
cucurbita perennls 136
deer 96
eagle, golden 104
eagle, red 124
eagle, spotted 118
elk 109, 1 13
evening star 109, 1 20
glycineapios Ill
hailstone 134
Lacmiaria pycnostachya 135
light, shaft of 126
metal 133
morning star 109, 119
mussel 94
Nelumbo lutea Ill
otter 99
peace pipe 128
pelican 85
poppy mallow 135
puma 107
rattlesnake 104
redflsh 99
Sagittaria latifolia 1 10
sedge 95
snapping turtle 92
spider 102
squash, black 136
squash, red 136
squash, speckled 137
squash, yellow 137
swan, white 108, 109, 230
typha latifolia 93
water 95,98
woodpecker 120
LINGUISTIC CLASSIFICATION OF THE OSAGE. . . 45
LrNOUisnc FAMILIES, map of 29
"LITTLE HOUSE"—
ceremonial approach to 248
use of 249
LITTLE-OLD-MEN—
character of organization by 59
formation of association of 48
language of 55
LITTLE OSAGE VILLAGE, location of 44
LITTLE SONG OF THE GATHERING 253
602
INDEX
Page.
"LITTLE SONGS OF THE SUN" 63-64
LOFT, WM. K., assistance or 14
McCoy, ISAAC, on Osage devotions 50
"MAN," Indian words denoting 29
MAN MEDICINE, discovery of 70
MANUSCRIPTS—
accessions to 28-29
in care of J. N. B.Hewitt 15-16
MARQUETTE, Osage first mentioned by 43
MARRIAGE REQUIREMENT 48, 51
MAYA' HIEROGLYPHS, INTRODUCTION TO
STUDY OF THE 31
MEN OF MYSTERY GENS 133
METAL, a life symbol 133
METAL WI'-GI-E 90-91
MIAMI-PEORIA DICTIONARY, translation of
part of 28
MICIIELSON, TRUMAN, work of 17-18
Mi-K'i«' WA-NO" GENS, wi'-gi-e of 122-123
MILITARY BRANCH OF OSAGE GOVERNMENT,
development of 65
MILITARY ORGANIZATION, ultimate purpose
Of 248
MILLER, GOVERNOR, quoted on prayers of the
Osage 49
MIMBRES VALLEY, LOWER, report on arche
ology of 11
MOCCASIN WI'-GI-E 239-241,290-291
MOCCASINS, SYMBOLIC —
ceremony of cutting 121
ceremony of making 239, 241-242
MON'-SHKQX GENS—
life symbol of 116
wi'gi-e of 116-118
MO"-ZHO"-A'-KI-DA, an informant 274
Moox, personification of 51
MOONEY, JAMES—
specimen collected by 33
work of 12-13
MOOREHEAD, WARREN K., acknowledgment
to 27
MORLEY, SYLVANUS G., paper by 31
MORNING STAR, a life symbol 109,119
MOUNDS OF WESTERN UTAH 24-25
MUNROE, Miss HELEN, work of 31
MURDER, duties of chief in connection with . . 67
MURIE, JAMES R., work of 27
MUSEUM OF THE AMERICAN INDIAN, Wa-xo'-
be Ton-ga in 73
Music, INDIAN, studied by Miss Frances
Densmore 27
Music, OSAGE 82, 141, 142, 186, 187, 188, 189, 190,
191, 198, 199, 200, 244, 245, 246, 252, 253,287,
289, 291, 293, 294, 295, 297, 299, 300, 301 , 302.
MUSSEL, a life symbol 94
NAMES, INDIAN POPULAR, CIRCULAR OF IN
FORMATION REGARDING 29
NANTICOKE WORDS, list of, secured by
J. N. B. Hewitt 14
NELUMBO LUTEA, a life symbol Ill
NEUMANN, FELIX, work of 28
NEW FIRE CEREMONY, paper on 27
NEWMAN, CHARLES B., work of 33
NICHOLS, MRS. FRANCES S., work of 29
NIGHT PEOPLE GENS 123-124
NI'-KA WA-KO»-DA-GI GENS, wl'-gi-e of 133-134
Nl'-KI DEGREE OF THE PUMA GENS 153
NI'-KI NON-K'O", a tribal rite 47
NI'-KI RITUAL OF CIN'-DSE-A-GTHE GENS, para
phrase Of 272-274
No ANGER SUBGENS 128-130
peace pipe a symbol of 128
NON'-HON-ZHIN-GA, organization of the 48
See also LITTLE-OLD-MEN.
j OFFICERS, for enforcement of orders of chief. . 68
OFFICES, distribution of 66
OLD AGE, symbols of 71
OMAHA TRIBE—
ceremony by women of 227
Earthmaker gens of 226
incident of reorganization of 65
knife used in tattooing ceremony of 236
relations of, with Osage 45,46
separation of, from Osage 281
O'-PXON GENS—
life symbol of 113
wi'-gi-e of 112-115
ORGANIZATION OF THE OSAGE—
allegorical story of 59-65
symbolic nature of 51, 59
OSAGE COUNTY, OKLAHOMA, map of 46
OSAGE LANGUAGE, present use of 46-47
OSAGE RESERVATION 44
OSAGE TRIBE—
ancient home of 43, 44
divided in two parts 48
divisions of the 45
kindred tribes of the 45
linguistic classification of 45
organization of 51, 59
population of 46
present prosperity of 45
war standard of 220
work of Francis La Flesche amonc 15-16
OTTER, a life symbol 99
OVERSEER OF THE VILLAGE —
rite of 146-151
wi'-gi-c of 147-150
PA-CIU'-GTHI", a division of the Osage 45
PAINTING, SYMBOLIC, instruction in 140
PAINTING CEREMONY—
songs Of 244-246
symbolism of 243
wi'-gi-e of 242-248
PARKER, ARTHUR, C., acknowledgment to. . . 27
PA'-Tin>«-WA-WE-XTA,an informant 272
PAWIIUSKA, village at 45
PAWNEE INDIANS, CEREMONIES OF, studied
by James R. Murie 27
PEACE PIPE, a life symbol 128
PEACE SYMBOL, the red plume 134
PEACEFUL DAY SUBGENS of Red-eagle gens. 127
PEACEMAKER, office of 54, 276
PELICAN—
a life symbol 85
sacred symbol of old age 71
vision of the aged 84-88
PEPPER, GEORGE H., acknowledgment to.. 73
PIKE, ZEBULON M., visit of, to the Osage. . . 44
PIPE, SYMBOLIC 61
See also PEACE PIPE.
PLANTING SONG... 295
INDEX
603
Page.
PLUME, RED, symbol of dawn and peace 134
POAST, Miss FLORENCE M., work of 9
PONCAS, relations of, with Osage 45, 46
POPPY MALLOW, a life symbol 135
POPULATION OF THE OSAGE 46
POTAWATOMI LANGUAGE —
classified by Truman Michelson 18
grammar of 29
POTTERY VESSELS, decoration of 10
PRAYER, in the daily life of the Osage 49
PROPERTY or THE BUREAU 34
PRYOR, WILLIAM, Ni'-ki degree conferred on. 220
PUBLICATIONS OF THE BUREAU, LIST OF 29
PUEBLO INDIANS, bibliography of 9
PUMA, a life symbol 107
PUMA GENS 107-112
Ni'-ki degree of 153, 155
relations of, with Black Bear gens 219
wi'-gi-e of 157-211
QUAPAW, relations of, with Osage 45, 46
RATTLESNAKE, a life symbol 104
RED EAQLE GENS 124-127
REDFISH, a life symbol 99
RED OAK TREE, In mythical story 281
RESERVATION or THE OSAGE 44
RICHMOND, CHAS. W., acknowledgment to. . 55
Rio MIMBRES, researches in valley of 10
RITE OF THE CHIEFS 47,59
Initiation Into 73-74
significance of 59
RITES, TRIBAL 47-51
giving of gentile name 50
order of 152-153
religious character of 49
seven ceremonial divisions of 152
See also CEREMONIES.
ROBBINS, WILFRED W., paper by 30
ROOTS, used to cure bodily ailments 70
ROTH, WALTER E., paper by 30
SACKED FIREPLACES 53-54
See aslo FIREPLACES.
SACRED HOUSES 54
SAFFORD, WM. K., acknowledgment to 55
SAGITTARIA LATIFOLIA, a life symbol 110
SANCTUARIES 54
SEDGE, a life symbol 95
SENECA FICTION, LEGENDS, AND MYTHS — 30
SENECA MYTHS AND FICTION, edited by
J. N. B. Hewitt 13
SHO'-KA, the ceremonial messenger 52, 74
SHON'-TOK-gA-BE, CHIEF, list of gentes given
by.. 52
SHRINE—
portable, for ceremonial use 70
the great portable 71-73
SITTING BULL, war record of 28
SlUSLAW LANGUAGE—
grammatical sketch of 22
paper on 30
SKIN DRESSING, Instructions regarding 270-271
SKY, personification of 48, 51
SLAUGHTER, MRS. ELLA, death of 32,34
SNAKE. See BLACK SNAKE, BULL SNAKE.
SNAPPING TURTLE, a life symbol 92
Page.
SOIL—
blue, use of 227
dark, use of 227
red, use of 227
yellow, use of 227
SONGS—
at door of House of Mystery 289
Buffalo 141-143, 293-294
Buffalo, meaning of 143-144
Deer 185-191
"Little Song of the Gathering" 253
"Little Songs of the Sun'' 63-64
of approach to ceremonial house 82
of approach to House of Mystery 287
of Death 252
of Moccasin wi'-gi-e 291
of painting ceremony 244-246
of setting up of House of Mystery 198-201
of Triumph 297-302
Planting song 295
SPIDER, a life symbol 102
SPRINGER, E. L., work of 31
SQUASH—
Black, alifesymbol 136
Red, a life symbol 136
speckled, a life symbol 137
yellow, alifesymbol 137
STANDLEY, PAUL C., acknowledgment to 55
STAR PEOPLE GENS 95
STARS—
personification of 51
See MORNING STAR, EVENING STAR.
STEVENSON, MRS. M. C. —
death of 1 6, 34
paper by 30
specimens collected by 33
work of 16-17
SULLIVAN, DENNIS, appointment of 34
SUN—
emblem of never-ending life 61
personification of 51
SUN CARRIER GENS 122
SWAN, WHITE, a life symbol 108, 109, 230
SWANTON, JOHN R .—
work of 13
and HALBERT, HENRY S., bulletin edited
by 29
SWEENEY, ALBERT, work of 29,32
SYMBOLS. See LIFE SYMBOLS; OLD AGE,
SYMBOLS OF; PEACE SYMBOLS; WAR SYM
BOLS; WARRIOR SYMBOL.
f A' I-NI-KA-SHI-GA GENS —
wi'-gi-e of 95-98
life symbol of 96
TAKELMA LANGUAGE, paper on 30
TATTOOING RITE, future publication on 73
TATTOOING WA-XO'-BE, description of
TERRITORY OF THE OSAGE 43, 44
TETON Sioux Music 31
completion of manuscript on 27
TEWA INDIANS—
ethnobotany of the 30
ethnogeography of the 29
THO'-XE GENS, order of degrees In 152
604
INDEX
Page.
THO'-XE PA THI-HO" GENS, wi'-gi-e of. . . 134-139
TRADERS, influence of 43-44
TRADITION or THE NQN'-HON-ZHIN-GA 48
TRIBAL DIVISIONS, movements of 60
TRIBAL ORGANIZATION—
not affected by division of tribe 45
symbolic expression of 50
TSE THON'-KA GENS, wi'-gi-e of 132-133
TSE-DO'-GA IN-DSE GENS—
ceremonial place of 121
silent during ceremony 121
TsE-ZHiN'-GA-WA-DA-i»-GA,aninformant. 153,155,274
TSIMSHIAN MYTHOLOGY 30
memoir on, by Dr. Boas 20
TSI'-ZHU—
one of the two tribal divisions 51
origin of people of the 59
TSI'-ZHU GREAT DIVISION—
ceremonial position of 83
gentesof 84
origin myth of 238
TSI'-ZHU WA-NO" GENS—
war symbol of 119
wi'-gi-e of 118-121
TSI'-ZHU WA-SHTA'-GE GENS—
Ki'-no" wi'-gi-e of 285-286
Ni'-ki wi'-gi-e of 274
TSI'-ZHU WE-HA-GE GENS, wi'-gi-e of 130-132
TUMACACORI, ruins near 11
TURTLE, SNAPPING, a life symbol 92
TYPHA LATLTOUA, a life symbol 93
UNITED STATES NATIONAL MUSEUM, Wa-xo'-
be Ton-ga owned by 73
UTE MUSIC, preparation of manuscript on 27
U'-XTHI THIN-GE SUBGENS —
Peace Pipe a symbol of 128
wi'-gi-e of 128-130
VIGIL OF THE TSI-ZHU WA-SHTA'-GE CHIEF ... 69
VIGIL OF THE W A'-TSE-TSI CHIEF 70
VILLAGES, OSAGE, map showing 46
VISION OF THE AGED PELICAN 84-88
WA-gA'-BE-TO" GENS —
life symbol of 105
wi'-gi-e of 105-107, 219-237
WA-KE'-STSE-DSE GENS—
life symbol of 93
silent during ceremony 94
WA-KO»'-DA—
approach to, through life symbols 61
belief in power of 152
dependence upon 49
explanation of 48
WAR-
authority for initiation of 66
custom of 49
WAR CEREMONIES, performed in House of
Mystery 62
WAR GENS, of the Tsi'-zhu tribal division... 238
Page.
WAR PARTIES, organized in three classes 66
WAR RITES, initiation into 238
WAR STANDARD, of the Osage people 220
WAR SYMBOLS—
footprints of the black bear 76
seven serrations of turtle's tail 92
sun rays 119, 123
willow saplings 100, 101
WARRIOR SYMBOL 63
WATER, a life symbol 95, 98
WATER BEETLE 222
WATER SPIDER 223
WATER STRIDER 223
WA-THE'-THE, THE SENDING CEREMONY... 91,155
W A'-THU-XA-GE, an informant 292, 298
WA-TSE'-MO»-I", an informant 158, 211, 219
records made by 54
W A'-TSE-TSI GENS—
life symbols of 95
wi'-gi-e of 95
WA-XA'-GA-U-GTHI", a division of the Osage. . 45
WA-XO'-BE—
contents of 72
gentes owning 65
secured for the National Museum 72
symbols of courage B3
WA-XO'-BE TO"-GA 71-73
W A-XTHI'-ZHI, an informant 153, 155
WA-ZHA'-ZHE CKA GENS—
lite symbol of 94
wi'-gi-e of 94
WA-ZHA'-ZHE SUBDIVISION —
origin of people of 59
wi'-gi-es of 92-104
WA-ZHA'-ZHE WA-NO" GENS —
life symbol of 92
wi'-gi-e of 92-93
WEST INDIES, memoir on antiquities of 11
WI'-GI-E OF THE AGED EAGLE 70,88-90
WI'-GI-E OF THE CHIEF'S VIGIL 84-91
WI'-GI-E OF THE EAGLE 88-90
WI'-GI-E OF THE METAL 70, 90-91
WI'-GI-E OF THE VIGIL 70, 71, 84-88
Wl'-GI-E To»-GA 254-269
theme of 238
Wl'-GI-E, THE XO'-KA 74-81
WI'-GI-ES OF THE GENTES, recital of 92-139
WILLOW SAPLINGS, SEVEN—
a war symbol 100, 101
meaning of 92
WINDS GENS 118
WOODPECKER, a life symbol 120
WORDS OF THE ANCIENT MEN, a tribal rite. . 62
XO'-KA, THE INITIATOR 74
XU-THA' ZHU-DSE GENS—
life symbol of 124
wi'-gi-e of 124-127
XU-THA'-WA-TOK-IN, an informant 238
ZuNi INDIANS, ETHNOBOTANY OF 30
o
RETURN CIRCULATION DEPARTMENT 11040
TO— »> 202 Main Library
LOAN PERIOD 1
HOME USE
2
3
4
5
6
ALL BOOKS MAY BE RECALLED AFTER 7 DAYS
Renewals and Recharges may be made 4 days prior to the due date.
Books may be Renewed by calling 642-3405.
DUE AS STAMPED BELOW
MAR 2b 1991
FORM NO. DD6
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA, BERKELEY
BERKELEY, CA 94720
I
00066141
463385
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY •'.
i '
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11